Korg Pa2X Pro User's Manual

E
4
User’s Manual
ENGLISH
OS Ver. 2.0
MAN00010019
Important safety instructions
•
Read these instructions.
•
Keep these instructions.
•
Heed all warnings.
•
Follow all instructions.
•
Do not use this apparatus near water.
•
Mains powered apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall
be placed on the apparatus.
•
Clean only with dry cloth.
•
Do not block any ventilation openings, install in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
•
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
•
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. (for
U.S.A. and Canada)
•
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they
exit from the apparatus.
•
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
•
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
•
Turning off the power switch does not completely isolate this
product from the power line so remove the plug from the socket if
not using it for extended periods of time, or before cleaning.
Please ensure that the mains plug or appliance couple remains
readily accessible.
•
•
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such
as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
Do not install this equipment on the far position from wall outlet
and/or convenience receptacle.
•
Do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a box for
the conveyance or similar unit.
•
Do not put your fingers under the display while it is moving, or
you will risk to pinch them under the display!
•
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
THE FCC REGULATION WARNING (for U.S.A.)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.
CE mark for European Harmonized Standards
CE mark which is attached to our company’s products of AC mains
operated apparatus until December 31, 1996 means it conforms to
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and CE mark Directive (93/68/EEC).
And, CE mark which is attached after January 1, 1997 means it
conforms to EMC Directive (89/336/EEC), CE mark Directive (93/68/EEC)
and Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC).
Also, CE mark which is attached to our company’s products of Battery
operated apparatus means it conforms to EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
and CE mark Directive (93/68/EEC).
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS
This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications
and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it
is intended that this product should be used. If you have purchased this
product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a telephone
sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the
country in which you reside.
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which
it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the
manufacturer's or distributor's warranty.
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your
product may be disqualified from the manufacturer's or distributor's
warranty.
Notice regarding disposal (for EU only)
If this “crossed-out wheeled bin” symbol is shown on the product or in the operating manual, you must dispose of the product in an
appropriate way. Do not dispose of this product along with your household trash. By disposing of this product correctly, you can avoid
environmental harm or health risk. The correct method of disposal will depend on your locality, so please contact the appropriate local
authorities for details.
Data Handling
Disclaimer
Data in memory may sometimes be lost due to incorrect user
action. Be sure to save important data to the internal hard disk or to
an external USB device. Korg will not be responsible for damages
caused by data loss.
The information contained in this manual have been carefully
revised and checked through. Due to our constant efforts to
improve our products, the specifications might differ to those in
the manual. Korg is not responsible for any eventual differences
found between the specifications and the contents of the instruction manual – the specifications being subject to change without
prior notice.
Example screens
Some pages of the manuals show LCD screens along with an
explanation of functions and operations. All sound names,
parameter names, and values are merely examples and may not
always match the actual display you are working on.
Cleaning the display
Use a soft cotton cloth to clean the screen. Some materials, such
as paper towels, could cause scratches and damage it. Computer
wipes are also suggested, provided they are specifically designed
for LCD screens.
Do not spray any liquids on the LCD screen directly. Always
apply the solution to your cloth first, then clean the screen.
Trademarks
Akai is a registered trademark of Akai Professional Corporation.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. TC-Helicon is a registered trademark of TC Electronic, Inc. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the
property of their respective holders.
Liability
Korg products are manufactured under strict specifications and
voltages required by each country. These products are warranted
by the Korg distributor only in each country. Any Korg product
not sold with a warranty card or carrying a serial number disqualifies the product sold from the manufacturer's/distributor's
warranty and liability. This requirement is for your own protection and safety.
Service and User’s Assistance
For service, please contact your nearest Authorized Korg Service
Center. For more information on Korg products, and to find
software and accessories for your keyboard, please contact your
local Authorized Korg distributor. For up-to-date information,
please point your web browser to www.korgpa.com.
Copyright © 2007 KORG Italy Spa. Printed in Italy.
Warning
This instrument features a motorized display that includes moving parts. The motorized
display includes a safety system that prevents the display from closing (and automatically
raises it) when fingers or an external object are detected in its path. However, inadvertently
activating the motorized display may cause physical harm, in particular to children. Be
very careful when using the motorized display, and keep children away while using it. This
instrument is not a toy, so please don't let children play with the display.
Keep your keyboard up-to-date
Your instrument can be constantly updated as new versions of the operating system are
released by Korg. You can download the operating system from www.korgpa.com. Please,
read the instructions supplied with the operating system.
The X-FADER slider
When turning the instrument on, please be assured the X-FADER slider is set to the center.
This sets both Player 1 and Player 2 to their maximum level. This will avoid you start a
Song without hearing anything.
Table of Contents
1
Table of Contents
Introduction
Digital Drawbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Selecting and saving Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting a Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Saving your settings to a Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Welcome! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Live Performing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Easy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Useful links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Making a backup of the original data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Loading the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Loading the Musical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting the AC power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Turning the instrument on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Controlling the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The X-Fader slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Audio Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Audio Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MIDI connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Damper Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The music stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keyboard tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The LOGO decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Interface basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Color TouchView™ graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . 23
Operative modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Selected, highlighted items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Non-available, grayed-out parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Easy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
The Style Play page in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Song Play page in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
The Lyrics page in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Quick Guide
Turning the instrument on and listening to
the demos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Turning the instrument on, and viewing the main screen . . . 32
Playing the demos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . 33
Playing two or three Sounds at the same time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand . . . . . 37
Changing the split point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Raising or lowering the Upper octave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting and playing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting and playing a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Intro, Fill, Variation, Ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Single Touch Settings (STS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
The Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard . . . . . . 50
Adjusting volume of each single track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Turning Style tracks on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Adding harmony notes to your right-hand melody with
the ENSEMBLE function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Song Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Selecting a Song to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Playing back a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Changing tracks volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Turning Song tracks on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Soloing a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mixing two Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
The SongBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting the desired entry from the Main List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Displaying Artist or Genre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sorting entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Searching entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Adding entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Creating a Custom List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Selecting and using a Custom List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Selecting a SongBook STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Singing with a connected microphone . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting a microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Applying harmony to your voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Soloing your voice (TalkBack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Locking Voice Processor settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Recording a new Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Entering Backing Sequence (Quick Record) mode . . . . . . . . . 76
Preparing to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Second-take recording (Overdubbing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Saving a Song to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Reference
Selecting elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sound Select window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Performance Select window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Style Select window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Pad Select window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
STS Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Song Select window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Style Play operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Start-up settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
How Styles, Performances and STSs are linked together . . . . . 87
Master Volume and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Factory, User and Favorite Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2
Table of Contents
Main page (Normal view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Style Tracks view page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Volume panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lyrics panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
STS Name panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Mic panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sub-Scale panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pad panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Split panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Effects: FX Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Effects: FX A…D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Track Controls: Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Track Controls: Drum Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Track Controls: Easy Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Keyboard/Ensemble: Keyboard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Keyboard/Ensemble: Key/Velocity Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Keyboard/Ensemble: Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Style Controls: Drum/Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Style Controls: Keyboard Range On/Off / Wrap Around . . . 107
Pad/Switch: Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Pad/Switch: Assignable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Preferences: Style Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Preferences: Style Play Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Write Performance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Write Single Touch Setting dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Write Style Performance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Write Global-Style Play Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
The Favorite banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Style Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
The Style structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Style Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Entering the Style Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Exit by saving or deleting changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Listening to the Style while in Edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
List of recorded events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Main page - Record 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Main page - Record 2/Cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Main page - Guitar Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Style Record procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Event Edit: Event Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Event Edit: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Style Edit: Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Style Edit: Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Style Edit: Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Style Edit: Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Style Edit: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Style Edit: Delete All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Style Edit: Copy from Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Style Edit: Copy from Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Style Element Track Controls: Sound/Expression . . . . . . . . . 135
Style Element Track Controls: Keyboard Range . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Style Element Track Controls: Noise/Guitar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Style Element Chord Table: Chord Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Style Track Controls: Type/Trigger/Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Import: Import Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Import: Import SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Export SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Write Style dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Copy Key/Chord dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Copy Sounds dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Copy Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Copy Key Range dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Copy Chord Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Overdub Step Recording window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Pad Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
The Pad structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Entering the Pad Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Exit by saving or deleting changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Listening to the Pad while in Record/Edit mode . . . . . . . . . .146
Main page - Record 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Main page - Guitar Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Pad Record procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Event Edit: Event Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Event Edit: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Pad Edit: Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Pad Edit: Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Pad Edit: Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Pad Edit: Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Pad Edit: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Pad Edit: Delete All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Pad Edit: Copy from Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Pad Edit: Copy from Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Pad Track Controls: Sound/Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Pad Chord Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Import: Import Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Import: Import SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Export: SMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Write Pad dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Song Play operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Transport controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
MIDI Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Tempo Lock and Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Master Volume, Balance, X-Fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Track parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Standard MIDI Files and Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Keyboard, Pad and Player tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Song Tracks 1-8 and 9-16 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Volume panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Jukebox panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Lyrics / Score panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
STS Name panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Mic panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Sub-Scale panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Pad panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Split panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Switching between players during editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Table of Contents
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects: FX Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects: FX A…D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Controls: Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Controls: Drum Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Controls: Easy Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard/Ensemble: Keyboard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard/Ensemble: Key/Velocity Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard/Ensemble: Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pad/Switch: Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pad/Switch: Assignable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jukebox Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences: Track Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences: General Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Global-Song Play Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
174
174
174
175
176
176
176
176
176
176
176
176
176
177
178
179
180
181
Recording MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SongBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Book Edit 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Book Edit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Custom List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
List Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Lyrics/STS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Sequencer operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Transport controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Sequencer mode and the MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Songs and Voice Processor Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Sequencer Play - Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Entering Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Record mode: Multitrack Sequencer page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Record mode: Step Record page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Record mode: Backing Sequence (Quick Record) page . . . . 200
Record mode: Step Backing Sequence page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Effects: FX Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Effects: FX A…D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Track Controls: Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Track Controls: Drum Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Track Controls: Easy Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Event Edit: Event Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Event Edit: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Song Edit: Quantize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Song Edit: Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Song Edit: Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Song Edit: Cut/Insert Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Song Edit: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Song Edit: Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Song Edit: Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Song Edit: RX Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3
Preferences: Sequencer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Write Global-Sequencer Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Song Select window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Save Song window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Global edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
What is it, and how the Global is structured . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Edit page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
General Controls: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
General Controls: Transpose Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
General Controls: Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
General Controls: Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
General Controls: Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
General Controls: Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Controllers: Pedal/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Controllers: Assignable Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Controllers: EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
MIDI: MIDI Setup / General Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
MIDI: MIDI In Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
MIDI: MIDI In Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
MIDI: MIDI Out Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
MIDI: Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Audio Setup: Style/Kbd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Audio Setup: Player 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Audio Setup: Player 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Audio Setup: Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Audio Setup: Audio In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Audio Setup: Metro / MP3 / SPDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Audio Setup: Master EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Voice Processor Setup and Preset sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Video Interface: Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Write Global - Global Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Write Global - Midi Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Write Global - Talk Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Write Global - Voice Processor Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . 237
Write Global - Voice Processor Preset dialog box . . . . . . . . . 238
Write Quarter Tone SC Preset dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Voice Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Accessing the Voice Processor edit pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Voice Processor Setup: Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Voice Processor Setup: Dynamics / EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Voice Processor Setup: Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Voice Processor Preset: Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Voice Processor Preset: Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor . . . . . . . . . . 246
Media edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Storage devices and internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Supported device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Selecting and deselecting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Searching files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
File types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Media structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Page structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Navigation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
4
Table of Contents
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Page menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Care of mass storage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Merging PCM samples from various sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Bonus software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
What is MIDI Over USB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Standard MIDI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
The General MIDI standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
The Global channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
The Control channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Connecting Pa2X to a Master keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Connecting the Pa2X to a MIDI accordion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Connecting the Pa2X to an external sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Playing another instrument with the Pa2X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Appendix
Factory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Style Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Style and Player controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Single Touch Settings (STS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Sounds (Bank order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Sounds (Program Change order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
DNC Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Multisamples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Drum Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
MIDI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Assignable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
List of Footswitch and EC5 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Sliders functions . . .321
List of Assignable Slider (Mic) functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
List of Assignable Switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
MIDI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
MIDI Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Program Change messages used as remote commands . . . . .325
Control Change and Program Change message used as
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Recognized chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Installing the Video Interface (VIF4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
NTSC, PAL, SECAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Connections and setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Installing additional Sampling RAM (EXB-M256) . . 331
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Connecting the Pa2X to a personal computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
KORG USB-MIDI Driver system requirements . . . . . . . . . . .332
Please note before use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Windows: Installing the KORG USB-MIDI Driver . . . . . . . .332
Mac OS X: Installing KORG USB-MIDI Driver . . . . . . . . . . .333
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Introduction
6
Front panel
Front panel
6
45
8
7
9
O
0
AB C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Q
R
S
L MN
J
K
V
W
3
2
1
1 PHONES
Connect a pair of headphones to this output. You can use headphones with an impedance of 16-200Ω (50Ω suggested). Use a
headphone splitter to connect more than one pair of headphones.
2 JOYSTICK
This joystick triggers different functions, depending on the
direction it is moved towards.
X (+/–)
Move the joystick towards the left (–) to lower the
pitch, or towards the right (+) to raise it. This is
also called Pitch Bend.
Y+
Move the joystick forward to trigger Modulation.
Y–
Move the joystick backward, to trigger the function assigned in Sound mode.
3 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH
These are freely assignable switches (see “Pad/Switch: Assignable
Switch” on page 108 for information on how to assign functions
to them).
4 MASTER VOLUME
This slider controls the overall volume of the instrument, both
of the Left and Right outputs, and the Headphones output. It
does not control the volume of the 1 and 2 sub-outputs.
This slider also controls the volume of the microphone connected to the MIC Audio Input, when it is sent to the Voice Processor. It control the signal entering the LEFT and RIGHT Audio
Inputs when it is sent to the MP3 Recorder (see “Audio Setup:
Audio In” on page 233).
5 BALANCE
While in Style Play and Song Play mode, this slider balances the
volume of the Keyboard tracks, against the Style (Accompaniment), Pad and Song tracks. This is a relative control, whose
effective maximum value is determined by the MASTER VOLUME slider position.
When moved, a magnified version of the virtual slider appears in
the display, for more accurate positioning.
Note: This does not work in Sequencer mode.
6 ASSIGNABLE SLIDER
Gbl
The first eight sliders of this section are freely assignable sliders
(see “Controllers: Assignable Sliders” on page 227 for information on how to assign functions to them). Four operating modes
are available, and can be selected by pressing the SLIDER MODE
button (see below).
The ninth slider acts either as an MP3 volume controller in most
cases, or as the 1’ footage when in Drawbar mode. When controlling the MP3 volume, it starts working only when the current
volume level is reached.
7
Introduction
Front panel
Y
\]
O
P
b
c
`
a
d
Z [
S TU
l
e
j
W
X
f
g
h
i
k
While in Volume mode, you can use these sliders to
change the volume of several tracks at once. While in Style Play
or Sequencer mode, select one of the Upper tracks, or one of the
separate Style or Song tracks in the display; then keep the SHIFT
button pressed, and move one of these sliders to proportionally
change the volume of all similar tracks.
Note: This does not work in Song Play mode on the Song tracks, but
it works on the keyboard tracks.
•
•
•
In Style Play and Song Play mode: First select one of the
Upper tracks. Then keep SHIFT pressed and move one of
the sliders, to proportionally change the volume of all
Upper tracks at the same time.
the display. The ninth slider (marked MP3 Vol)
controls the volume of the MP3 player.
DRAWBARS Each slider controls the corresponding drawbar
of the selected Digital Drawbars Sound.
MIC
While this mode is active, the first eight sliders
control parameters mostly related to the microphone and Voice Processor. The ninth slider
(marked MP3 Vol) controls the volume of the
MP3 player.
ASSIGNABLE Set of eight freely assignable controls. The ninth
slider (marked MP3 Vol) controls the volume of
the MP3 player.
In Style Play mode: First press TRACK SELECT and select
one of the separate Style tracks. Then keep SHIFT pressed
and move one of the sliders, to proportionally change the
volume of all Style tracks at the same time.
8 MODE section
In Sequencer mode: Keep SHIFT pressed and move one of
the sliders, to proportionally change the volume of all Song
tracks at the same time.
STYLE PLAY Style Play mode, where you can play Styles (automatic accompaniments) and play up to four Keyboard tracks and four Pad tracks.
7 SLIDER MODE
SB
Use this button to select one of the four available operating
modes for the sliders. The sliders can be freely programmed in
Global mode (see “Controllers: Assignable Sliders” on page 227).
VOLUME
When in this mode, each of the first eight sliders
controls the volume of the corresponding track in
Each of these buttons recalls one of the instrument’s operating
modes. When selected, each mode excludes the others.
In the main page, Keyboard tracks are shown in
the right half of the display. You can reach the
main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Style
Play edit pages. If you are in a different operating
mode, press STYLE PLAY to recall the Style Play
mode. If Keyboard tracks are not shown in the
display, press the TRACK SELECT button to see
them.
8
Front panel
This operating mode is automatically selected
when turning the instrument on.
SONG PLAY Song Play mode, where you can play back Songs
in Standard MIDI File (SMF or KAR) and MP3
format. Since the Pa2X is equipped with two
players, you can even play two Songs at the same
time, and mix them with the X-Fader.
In addition to the Song tracks, you can play up to
four Keyboard tracks and four Pads along with
the Song(s). In the main page, Keyboard tracks
are shown in the right half of the display. You can
reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any
of the Song Play edit pages. If you are in a different operating mode, press SONG PLAY to recall
the Song Play mode. Use the TRACK SELECT
button to cycle between Keyboard and Song
tracks.
SEQUENCER Sequencer mode, where you can play, record or edit
a Song. The Backing Sequence mode lets you record
a new Song based on the Keyboard and Style tracks,
and save it as a new Standard MIDI File.
SOUND
Sound mode, to play single Sounds on the keyboard, or edit them. By pressing RECORD you
can enter the Sampling mode, Pa2X full-featured
sampler.
DEMO
Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons
together to select the Demo mode. This mode lets
you listen to some Demo Songs, to let you understand the sonic power of the Pa2X. To exit from
this mode, press any of the MODE buttons.
9 GLOBAL
This button recalls the Global edit environment, where you can
adjust various global settings. This edit environment overlaps
any operating mode, that still remains active in the background.
Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode.
0 MEDIA
B BASS INVERSION
SB
This button turns the Bass Inversion function on or off.
Note: This function can be automatically activated by playing the
keyboard harder. See “Velocity Control” on page 109.
On
The lowest note of a chord played in inverted
form will always be detected as the root note of
the chord. Thus, you can specify to the arranger
composite chords such as “Am7/G” or “F/C”.
Off
The lowest note is scanned together with the
other chord notes, and is not always considered
as the root note.
C MANUAL BASS
SB
This button turns the Manual Bass function on or off.
Note: When you press the MANUAL BASS button, the Bass track
volume is automatically set to its maximum value. The volume is
automatically set back to the original value when the MANUAL
BASS button is deactivated.
On
The automatic accompaniment stops playing
(apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks), and
you can manually play the Bass track on the
Lower part of the keyboard. You can start the
automatic accompaniment again by pressing one
of the CHORD SCANNING buttons.
Off
The bass track is automatically played by the Style.
D STYLE SELECT section
Use these buttons to open the Style Select window and select a
Style. See “Style Select window” on page 83.
The leftmost button lets you select the upper or lower row of
Style banks, or the Favorite Style banks. Press it repeatedly to
select one of the rows. (After both LEDs have turned on, press
the button again to turn them off).
Upper LED On Upper-row Styles selected. These are ten factoryprogrammed banks.
This button recalls the Media edit environment, where you can
execute various operations on files and storage devices (Load,
Save, Format, etc…). This edit environment overlaps any operating mode, that still remains active in the background. Press
EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode.
Lower LED On Lower-row Styles selected. These are seven factory-programmed banks, plus three user-programmed banks.
A MEMORY
A word about Style banks and names. Styles in banks from
“8BEAT/16 BEAT” to “WORLD 2”, and from “LATIN” to “CONTEMP.” are standard Styles, the user can’t normally overwrite
with a Load operation (unless you remove the protection; see
“Factory Style and Pad Protect” on page 264).
SB
This button turns the Lower and Chord Memory functions on
or off. Go to the “Preferences: Style Preferences” edit page (Style
Play mode, see page 109) to decide if this button should be a
Chord Memory only, or a Lower/Chord Memory button. When
it works as a Lower/Chord Memory:
Note: This function can be automatically activated by playing the
keyboard harder. See “Velocity Control” on page 109.
On
The sound on the left of the split point, and the
chord for the automatic accompaniment, are kept
in memory even when you raise your hand from
the keyboard.
Off
The sound and chords are released as soon as you
raise your hand from the keyboard.
You can jump to the Style Play > Style Preferences page
by keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing the MEMORY button.
Both LEDs On FAVORITE Styles selected. These are custommade banks.
Styles in banks from “USER1” to “USER3” are location where
you can load new Styles from an external device, or save newly
created or edited Styles.
Like the User Styles, Styles in the “FAVORITE” banks are locations where you can load new Styles from an external device, or
save newly created or edited Styles. In addition, you can edit the
names of these banks as it appears in the display, so that you can
have a custom set of Styles. See “The Favorite banks” on
page 113.
Each button (Style bank) contains four pages, each with up to
eight Styles. Repeatedly press a bank button to cycle between the
available pages.
If you keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press one of
the buttons of this section, the “Write Style Performance” window appears in the display, and you can save the current Style
Performance (see “Write Style Performance dialog box” on
page 113).
E SINGLE TOUCH
This button turns the Single Touch and Variation/STS Link
functions on or off.
On
Flashing
Off
When a different Style (or the same again) is
selected, a Single Touch Setting (STS1) is automatically selected. The Keyboard sounds and
effects will change, along with the Style sounds
and effects.
Variation/STS Link function activated. This function makes each Variation recall the corresponding STS when selected. For example, select
Variation 2, and STS 2 will be automatically
recalled; select Variation 3, and STS 3 will be
automatically recalled.
When you select a different Style (or the same
again), the Style sounds and effects will change.
The Keyboard sounds and effects will not change.
F FADE IN/OUT
I FILL 1-3/BREAK buttons
Sty
9
SB
These buttons trigger a fill-in. Press them twice (LED blinking)
to let them play in loop, and select any other Style element (Fill,
Intro, Variation…) to exit the loop.
Note: Fill 3 is usually a Break.
Note: This function can be automatically activated by playing the
keyboard harder. See “Velocity Control” on page 109.
You can jump to the Style Play > Drum/Fill page by
keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing one of the FILL buttons.
J ENDING 1-3 buttons
Sty
SB
While the Style is running, these three buttons trigger an Ending, and stop the Style. Press one of them, and the Style will stop
running with an Ending.
Press them twice (LED blinking) to let them play in loop, and
select any other Style element (Fill, Intro, Variation…) to exit the
loop.
Note: Ending 1 plays a short sequence with different chords, while
Ending 2 plays on the latest recognized chord. Ending 3 starts
immediately, and is just two measures long.
K START/STOP
Starts or stops the Style running.
Note: This function can be automatically activated by playing the
keyboard harder. See “Velocity Control” on page 109.
When the Style or Song is not playing, press this button to start
it with a volume fade-in (the volume goes from zero to the maximum).
You can reset all ‘frozen’ notes and controllers on the Pa2X
and any instrument connected to its MIDI OUT or the USB
Device port, by using the “Panic” key combination. Just press
SHIFT + START/STOP to stop all notes and reset all controllers.
When the Style or Song is playing back, press this button to stop
it with a volume fade-out (the volume gradually decreases).
L SYNCHRO START / STOP buttons
You don’t need to press START/STOP or PLAY/STOP to start or
stop the Style or Song.
Note: This does not work in Sequencer mode.
You can jump to the Global > Basic page by keeping
SHIFT pressed, and pressing the FADE IN/OUT button.
G INTRO 1-3/COUNT IN buttons
Sty
SB
These buttons turn the corresponding Intro on. After pressing
one of these buttons, start the Style, and it will begin with the
selected intro. The INTRO LED automatically goes off at the end
of the intro.
Press them twice (LED blinking) to let them play in loop, and
select any other Style element (Fill, Intro, Variation…) to exit the
loop.
Note: Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords, while
Intro 2 plays on the latest recognized chord. Intro 3 is usually a onebar Count In.
H VARIATION 1-4 buttons
Sty
SB
Each of these buttons selects one of the four variations of the
current Style. Each variation can vary in patterns and sounds.
You can jump to the Style Play > Drum/Fill page by
keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing one of the VARIATION
buttons.
SB
These buttons turn the Synchro Start and Synchro Stop functions on or off. This lets you decide if you must press START/
STOP to start and/or stop a Style, or just play the keyboard in the
Chord Scanning area.
Start On, Stop Off
In this situation, just play a chord in the chord
recognition area (usually under the split point,
see “ACCOMPANIMENT – CHORD SCANNING section” on page 11) to automatically start
the Style. If you like, turn one of the INTROs on
before starting the Style.
Start Off, Stop On
In this case, raising your hands from the keyboard
stops the Style running.
Start On, Stop On
When both LEDs are lit, raising your hands from
the keyboard momentarily stops the Style running.
If you play a chord again, the Style starts again.
Start Off, Stop Off
All Synchro functions are turned off.
Introduction
Front panel
10
Front panel
M TEMPO LOCK
Warning: Do not force the display if it doe not
move! Press the button and try again.
This button turns the Tempo Lock and Link Mode functions on
or off.
On
Off
When you select a different Style or Performance,
or select a different Song, the tempo does not
change. You can still manually change it, by using
the DIAL.
Note: The last position is recalled when turning the
instrument on again.
Q RECORD
This button sets the instrument to the Record or Sampling mode
(which one depends on the current operating mode).
The Link Mode is also turned on for the Song
Play mode. Tempo is the same for both Players.
R TRACK SELECT
When you select a different Style or Performance,
or select a different Song, the memorized tempo
is automatically selected.
Depending on the operating mode, this button switches between
the various track views.
The Link Mode is also turned off for the Song
Play mode, so each Player plays with its own
Tempo.
You can jump to the Global > Lock page by keeping
SHIFT pressed, and pressing the TEMPO LOCK button.
N TAP TEMPO/RESET
This is a double-function button, acting in a different way
depending on the Style status (stop/play).
Tap Tempo: (Not available in Song Play and Sequencer mode).
When the Style is not playing, you can “beat” the tempo on this
button. At the end, the accompaniment starts playing, using the
“tapped in” tempo.
Reset: When you press this button while the Style is playing
back, the Style pattern goes back to the beginning of measure 1.
O COLOR TOUCHVIEW™ GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
Use this display to interact with the instrument. To set the display contrast, keep the MENU button pressed, and turn the
DIAL counter-clockwise to decrease brightness, or clockwise to
increase it.
You can change the display tilt angle by using the motorized display controls (see below “DISPLAY UNLOCK/LIFT buttons”).
P DISPLAY UNLOCK/LIFT buttons
The display tilt angle can be adjusted either using the motor, or
manually.
STYLE PLAY MODE
Toggles between Keyboard and Style tracks.
SONG PLAY MODE
Toggles between Keyboard tracks, Song tracks 18, and Song tracks 9-16.
SEQUENCER MODE
Toggles between Song tracks 1-8 and Song tracks
9-16.
S SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons
These buttons allow to select up to four Single Touch Settings.
Each of the Styles and SongBook entries includes a maximum of
four Single Touch Settings (STS), to automatically configure
Keyboard tracks and effects, and the Voice Processor, at the
touch of a finger. When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is lit, an STS
is automatically selected when selecting a Style.
If you keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press one of
the buttons of this section, the “Write STS” window appears in
the display, with the current STS already selected, and you can
save the current keyboard track settings in a STS (see “Write Single Touch Setting dialog box” on page 112).
T SHIFT
With this button held down, pressing certain other buttons gives
access to a second function.
U HELP
Press this button to open the context-sensitive Help.
Warning: Before moving the Pa2X, always lower the display completely down, or you will risk to break it!
V PLAYER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS
Warning: Do not put anything over or under the display, or you
will risk to damage the motor or the display!
Pa2X is equipped with two players (Player 1 and Player 2), each
with its own set of transport controls. The Player 1 group is also
used for the Sequencer mode.
Warning: Do not put your fingers under the display while it is
moving, or you will risk to pinch them under the display!
LIFT
Use this button to alternatively turn the display
up or down. Keep it pressed until the display is in
the desired position.
Warning: Do not force the display while the motor
is engaged!
UNLOCK
Use this button to disconnect the display from
the motor. Keep it pressed while gently adjusting
the tilt manually, then release the button to
reconnect the motor. This is particularly useful
when you turned the instrument off, and forgot
to lower the display down.
<< and >>
Rewind and Fast Forward commands. If you use
them while the Song is in play, they make it scroll
back or forward.
When pressed once, these buttons move the Song
to the previous or following measure. When kept
pressed, they make the Song scrolling continuously, until you release them.
In Sequencer mode, if you set a Locate Measure
other than 1, when pressing the << button the
Song rewinds up to that measure instead of the
first one (see “Locate measure” on page 194).
In Jukebox mode (Player 1), keep the
SHIFT button pressed, and press these buttons to
(HOME)
scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox
list (see “Jukebox Editor” on page 176).
•
Sends the Song Position back to measure 1 (i.e.,
the beginning of the Song).
•
•
•
In Sequencer mode, if you set a Locate Measure
other than 1, the Song Position goes back to that
measure (see “Locate measure” on page 194).
(PLAY/STOP)
Starts or stops the Song from the current Song
Position.
In Song Play mode, pressed while keeping SHIFT pressed, starts both players at the same
time.
W X-FADER
In Song Play mode, this slider balances the volume of the two
on-board players. When fully on the left, only Player 1 can be
heard. When fully on the right, only Player 2 can be heard. When
in the middle, both players play at full volume.
This slider also selects the Harmony Track from one of the two
players. It also selects the Lyrics, Score and Markers from one of
the players, assuming the “Lyrics/Score X-Fader Link” parameter
is turned on (see page 179).
11
exit the Global or Media edit environment, and return
to the current page of the current operating mode
exit from the SongBook mode
exit from the Lyrics page
exit from a Style, Performance or Sound Select window
[ MENU
This button opens the edit menu page for the current operating
mode or edit mode. After opening an edit menu, you can jump
to one of the edit sections by touching the corresponding button
in the display.
Otherwise, press EXIT to return to the main page of the current
operating mode, or the current page of the underlying operating
mode.
See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating mode or edit
environment, to see their “maps” in detail.
\ DISPLAY HOLD
This button turns the Display Hold function on or off.
On
When you open a temporary windows (like the
Sound Select window), it remains in the display
until you press EXIT or an operating mode button.
Off
Any temporary window closes after a certain
time.
Note: This slider does not work in Style Play or Sequencer mode.
X PLAYER 2 TRANSPORT CONTROLS
] LYRICS
Transport controls for Player 2. See instructions for Player 1
above.
This button recalls the Lyrics page for the active Player. You can
use the X-Fader to select either Player 1 or Player 2 (see “Lyrics/
Score X-Fader Link” on page 179).
Y TEMPO/VALUE section
Sty
SB
` ACCOMPANIMENT – CHORD SCANNING section
The DIAL and the DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons can be used to
control the Tempo, assign a different value to the selected
parameter in the display, or scroll a list of files in the Song Select
and Media pages.
In Style Play, Song Play and Sequencer-Backing Sequence mode,
use these buttons to define the way chords are recognized.
DIAL
LOWER
Chords are detected below the split point. The
number of notes you should play to form a chord
is defined by the Chord Scanning Mode parameter (see “Chord Recognition Mode” on page 109).
UPPER
Chords are detected above the split point. You
must always play three or more notes to let the
arranger recognize a chord.
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the value or
tempo. Turn it counter-clockwise to decrease the
value or tempo.
When used while pressing the SHIFT button, this control always acts as a Tempo control.
When used while pressing the MENU
button, this control always acts as a Display Contrast control.
DOWN/- and UP/+
DOWN/- decreases the value or tempo; UP/+
increases the value or tempo.
Press both buttons together to reset the Tempo to
the value memorized in the selected Style.
SB
FULL (both LEDs On)
Chords are detected on the full keyboard range.
You must always play three or more notes to let
the arranger recognize a chord. (You can use this
mode even when the Split keyboard mode is
selected).
OFF
Z EXIT
No chords detected. After pressing START/STOP,
only the Drum and Percussion accompaniment
tracks can play.
Use this button to perform various actions, leaving from the current status:
a SPLIT
•
•
In Style Play, Song Play and Sequencer-Backing Sequence mode,
use this button to define how the four Keyboard tracks are positioned on the keyboard, and how chords are recognized by the
arranger.
•
exit the edit menu page, without selecting any item
make the page menu disappear, without selecting any
item
return to the main page of the current operating mode
SB
Introduction
Front panel
12
Front panel
Note: One of the Chord Scanning options must be selected for the
accompaniment to play.
On
The Lower track plays below the split point, while
the Upper 1, Upper 2 and Upper 3 tracks play
above it. This is called the Split keyboard mode.
By default, turning on the Split mode automatically selects the Lower chord scanning mode (see
above). In this mode, chords are detected below
the split point. The number of notes you should
play to form a chord is defined by the “Chord
Recognition Mode” parameter (see page 109).
Off
The Upper 1, Upper 2 and/or Upper 3 tracks play
over the whole keyboard range. The Lower track
does not play. This is also called the Full keyboard mode.
By default, turning off the Split mode automatically selects the Full chord scanning mode (see
above). In this mode, chords are detected over the
full keyboard range. You must always play three
or more notes to let the arranger recognize a
chord (see “Chord Recognition Mode” on
page 109).
You can jump to the Style Play > Key Velocity page by
keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing the SPLIT button.
b STYLE CHANGE
Off
Sounds in banks “USER1” and “USER2” are locations where you
can load new Sounds from an external device, or save new or
edited Sounds.
The “USER DK” bank is where you can load new Drum Kits, or
save new or edited Drum Kits.
Each Sound bank contains various pages, each with up to eight
Sounds. Repeatedly press a bank button to cycle between the
available pages.
If you keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press one of
the buttons of this section (even if you are in Sound Select
mode), the “Write Performance” window appears in the display,
and you can save the current track settings into a Performance
(see “Write Performance dialog box” on page 112).
f SONGBOOK
Press this button to recall the SongBook mode. While in this
mode, you can browse through the music database.
You can jump to the SongBook > Custom List page by
keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing the SONGBOOK button.
g ENSEMBLE
SB
This button turns the Ensemble function on or off. When on,
the right-hand melody is harmonized with the left-hand chords.
This button turns the Style Change function on or off.
On
A note about Sound banks and names. Sounds in banks from
“PIANO” to “SFX” are standard Sounds, the user can’t directly
modify.
When you select a Performance, the Style might
change, according to which Style is memorized
onto the Performance.
When you select a Performance, the Style and
Style track settings remain unchanged. Only Keyboard track settings are changed.
Note: The Ensemble function works only when the keyboard is in
SPLIT mode, and the LOWER Chord Scanning mode is selected.
You can jump to the Style Play > Ensemble page by
keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing the ENSEMBLE button.
h MIC SETTING section
Use these buttons to check the microphone input level, and turn
the various voice sections or off in the Voice Processor.
c PERFORMANCE SELECT
Press this button to use the PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT
section to select a Performance.
MIC IN LED
This LED shows the level of the audio signal
entering the MIC input connectors. Three different colors (green, orange, red) show the level. Try
to keep the level so that this LED remains on
green most of the time, with orange appearing at
signal peaks. Never go to red.
d SOUND SELECT
Press this button to use the PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT
section to select a Sound, and assign it to the selected track.
e PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT section
Sty
Off: No signal entering.
SB
SB
Green: Low- to mid-level signal entering. If the
LED turns off too often, the input gain is too low.
Use the GAIN controls and/or the source device’s
volume to raise the input level.
Use these buttons to open the Sound Select or Performance
Select window, and select a Sound or a Performance. See “Sound
Select window” on page 82, or “Performance Select window” on
page 82. For a list of available Sounds, see “Sounds (Program
Change order)” on page 290.
Orange: Slight overload in the signal path. This is
fine if it turns on only on signal peaks.
The leftmost button selects the upper or lower row of Sound or
Performance banks. Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows.
Upper LED On
Upper row of Sounds or Performances selected.
Lower LED On
Lower row of Sounds or Performances selected.
On the front panel, Sound banks are identified by the instrument names, while Performance banks are identified by numbers (1 ~ 20).
Red: Clipping is occurring in the signal path. Use
the GAIN controls and/or the source device’s volume to lower the input level.
See page 14 for more information on the AUDIO
INPUTs and volume control.
ON
Press this button to turn the microphone input
on or off. The LED shows the status of the microphone section.
If you keep the SHIFT button pressed,
and press this buttons, the Voice Processor Setup
> Setup page will appear (see “Voice Processor
Setup: Setup” on page 239).
j TRANSPOSE
13
Sty
SB
These buttons transpose the whole instrument in semitone steps
(Master Transpose). The transposition value is usually shown on
the page header in the display.
HARMONY Turns the Voice Harmony effect on or off.
If you keep the SHIFT button pressed,
and press this button, the Voice Processor Preset
> Preset page will appear (see “Voice Processor
Preset: Preset” on page 241).
EFFECT
Turns the Voice Effects effect on or off.
If you keep the SHIFT button pressed,
and press this button, the Voice Processor Preset
> Effects page will appear (see “Voice Processor
Preset: Effects” on page 245).
i PAD (1-4, STOP)
SB
Each Pad corresponds to a dedicated Pad track. Use these buttons to trigger up to four sounds or sequences at the same time.
•
Press a single PAD button to trigger a single sound or
sequence.
•
Press more PAD buttons to trigger several sounds or
sequences.
Press both buttons together, to reset the Master Transpose to zero.
Note: The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum
mode (and, even if set in a different status, on the Drum and Percussion tracks). See “Track Controls: Mode” on page 102, and
“Track Controls: Mode” on page 176.
Note: You can also transpose MP3 files. Keep in mind, however,
that transposition always remains inside the range -5…+6 semitones. This range is enough to cover all keys, but allows to avoid
excessive audio degradation. Any further transposing will be
reversed to fit the range. So, you might see a +7 transpose value
(Just Fifth Up) shown in the display, but the MP3 will actually play
5 semitones lower (Just Fourth Down).
Lowers the Master Transpose in steps of a semitone.
Raises the Master Transpose in steps of a semitone.
The sequences will play up to the end. Then, they will stop or
continue repeating, depending on their “One Shot/Loop” status
(see “Pad Type” on page 155).
You can jump to the Global > Transpose Control page
by keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing one of the TRANSPOSE
buttons.
You can stop all sequences, or just some of them, by pressing the
STOP button of the PAD section:
k UPPER OCTAVE
•
Press STOP to stop all sequences at once.
•
Keep STOP pressed and press one (or more) of the PAD
buttons to stop the corresponding sequence(s).
Note: Melodic/harmonic sequences are automatically stopped
when selecting Intro 1 or one of the Endings. On the contrary,
rhythmic sequences will continue playing.
Note: Pads share polyphony voices with the other tracks, so avoid
using too many of them together with a dense Style or Song
arrangement.
These buttons transpose the selected track in steps of a whole
octave (12 semitones; max ±3 octaves). The octave transposition
value is always shown (in octaves) next to the Sound’s name.
Press both buttons together, to reset the Octave Transpose to the
saved value.
Note: The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum
mode (and, even if set in a different status, on the Drum and Percussion tracks).
About Pad synchronization. In Style Play mode, Pads are sync’d
to the Style’s tempo. In Song Play mode, they are sync’d to the
latest Player you set to play. For example, assume you pressed
PLY2-PLAY; when pressing one of the PAD buttons, it will play
in sync with Player 2.
–
Lowers the selected track one octave.
+
Raises the selected track one octave.
Note: There is no synchronization with MP3 files. Pads can only be
synchronized to the tempo of the last selected Standard MIDI Files.
Therefore, when an MP3 file is assigned to the last select Player,
Pads will synchronize to the tempo of the last Standard MIDI File
that has been played back.
l USB HOST(F) CONNECTOR
About Pads’ and the Players’ Play command. When you press
one of the PLAY buttons to start the corresponding Player, all
Pads will stop playing.
You can jump to the Style Play > Pad/Assignable Switch
page by keeping SHIFT pressed, and pressing one of the PAD
buttons.
SB
You can jump to the Style Play > Tuning page by keeping
SHIFT pressed, and pressing one of the UPPER OCTAVE buttons.
This is a USB Type A (Master/Host) connector, USB 2.0 compliant (High Speed). It duplicates the USB connector located in the
rear panel. Use it to connect to the Pa2X an USB Flash Memory
stick, an external CD-ROM drive, an USB hard disk. To access
the connected device, go to the Media edit mode (see “Media
edit mode” on page 249).
Introduction
Front panel
14
Rear panel
Rear panel
1
2 3
5
4
1
6
7
The microphone signal is sent to the Voice Processor. Whether it is sent to the main or the sub
outputs depends on the “Mic Out” parameter
(see page 233).
ACV cable connector
Plug the supplied AC cable into this connector.
3
Use the GAIN knob to adjust the input gain, and
set the volume level using the MIC/IN slider,
while watching at the MIC IN LED on the control
panel (see “MIC SETTING section” on page 12).
POWER switch
Use this switch to turn the instrument on or off.
4
VIDEO OUT (optional)
GAIN
If an optional VIF4 video interface is fitted, you can connect the
Pa2X to a TV or video monitor. See “Installing the Video Interface (VIF4)” on page 329 for more information.
5
AUDIO INPUT
Use these connectors to connect a microphone, another keyboard/synthesizer, or a CD player.
MIC
Only active when the “Input Routing” parameter is
set to “Mic In to Voice Processor” (see page 233).
This is a combo connector, featuring an XLR and
a 1/4” jack on the same connector. Use the balanced XLR jack to connect a condenser microphone, or the 1/4” jack to connect a dynamic
microphone.
9
off. Phantom power is also automatically turned off
each time you turn the Pa2X off.
Music stand holes
A music stand comes standard with your Pa2X. Insert its legs
into these two dedicated holes.
2
8
Use this controls to adjust the input sensitivity of
the MIC connector (from 20 to 55dB). You can
check the input level by watching at the MIC IN
LED on the control panel (see “MIC SETTING
section” on page 12).
LEFT, RIGHT Always active. Use these balanced/unbalanced
connectors to connect a line-level input source,
such as a CD player or a synthesizer. Depending
on the status of the “Input Routing” parameter
(see page 233), the signal goes directly to the Left
and Right outputs or to the MP3 Recorder. In the
latter case, the volume is controlled by the MASTER VOLUME slider.
Note: The MIC/IN slider has no effect on these
inputs.
Note: After having connected a condenser microphone, use the “+48V Phantom Power” soft switch
to turn the +48V phantom power on (see
page 233). Phantom power is only supplied to the
balanced XLR jack.
6
When disconnecting a microphone from the XLR
jack, the phantom power is automatically turned
To set the output for each track, or the routing for the audio
inputs, see the “Audio Output” section, starting from page 231.
AUDIO OUTPUT
Use these balanced/unbalanced connectors to send the audio signal (sound) to a mixer, a PA system, a set of powered monitors,
or your hi-fi system.
Rear panel
15
LEFT, RIGHT These are the main stereo outputs. Use them to
send the final stereo mix to an external device.
Connect either of them to output the signal in
mono. Set the output level with the MASTER
VOLUME slider.
8
1, 2
These are the sub outputs. Use them to create a
stereo sub-mix of just some tracks, or to output
just a single instrument to be mixed alone, or to
be processed or amplified externally.
ASSIGNABLE Use this port to connect a continuous- or footswitch-type pedal, like the Korg EXP-2, XVP10,
or PS-1. To program and calibrate it, see “Pedal/
Footswitch” on page 226.
Note: The MASTER VOLUME slider has no effect
on these outputs. Signal is sent dry, with no effects
applied.
DAMPER
EC5
This connects to a Korg EC5 multiswitch pedalboard, to control many functions in realtime. To
program the EC5, see “EC5-A…E” on page 227.
Note: Half-pedalling on Piano Sounds is available
when connecting a DS1H damper pedal.
DIGITAL OUTPUT
Use this 48 kHz S/PDIF output to connect the
Pa2X to the S/PDIF input connector of another
digital device, like a digital mixer, audio card, or
stand-alone CD recorder. The same signal output
from the Left and Right connectors is sent by this
connector. See “S/PDIF Enable” on page 234 for
more information.
7
9
USB
HOST(R)
This is a USB Type A (Master/Host) connector,
USB 2.0 compliant (High Speed). It duplicates
the USB connector located in the front panel. Use
it to connect to the Pa2X an USB Flash Memory
stick, an external CD-ROM drive, an USB hard
disk. To access the connected device, go to the
Media edit mode (see “Media edit mode” on
page 249).
DEVICE
This is a USB Type B (Slave/Device) connector,
USB 1.1 compliant (Full Speed). Use it to connect
the Pa2X to a personal computer, and transfer
data to/from its internal devices (SSD, Hard
Disk). See “HD and SSD-U Connection” on
page 265 for more information.
MIDI INTERFACE
The MIDI interface allows your Pa2X to be connected to external
controllers (master keyboard, MIDI guitar, wind controller,
MIDI accordion…), to a series of expanders, or to a computer
running a sequencer. For more information on how to use the
MIDI interface, see the “MIDI” chapter.
IN
This connector receives MIDI data from a computer or a controller. Connect it to an external
controller’s or computer’s MIDI OUT.
OUT
This connector sends MIDI data generated by
Pa2X’s keyboard, controllers, and/or the internal
player. Connect it to an expander’s or computer’s
MIDI IN.
THRU
This connector sends an exact copy of the data
received on the IN connector. Use it to cascade
the Pa2X with other MIDI instruments.
Use this to connect a Damper pedal, like the Korg
PS-1 or DS1H. To change its polarity and calibrate it, see “Damper” on page 227.
MIDI Over USB is supported, so you can use this
connector instead of the MIDI ports (see “What
is MIDI Over USB?” on page 269). The drivers
for PC and Mac needed for full use of this function are supplied in the Accessory CD that comes
with the instrument, or can be downloaded from
our web site (www.korgpa.com).
Introduction
PEDALS
16
Welcome!
Live Performing
Welcome!
Welcome to the world of Korg Pa2X Professional Arranger! Pa2X
is the most powerful arranger available today, both for professional and home entertainment use.
•
Fully editable music database, for fast song retrieving, supplied by the SongBook.
•
Onboard sampling to create and edit new sounds and
audio grooves.
Here are some of the features of your new instrument:
•
RX Technology, the cutting edge engine that drives every
aspect of the Pa2X – from the synthesis to the display and
how it all works together.
•
128 MB of Sample RAM as standard, easy to expand to 256
MB by using the optional Korg EXB-M256 expansion
board.
•
Powerful EDS (Enhanced Definition Synthesis) Korg sound
generation system, as seen in our best professional synthesizers.
•
Sophisticated Voice Processor, with effects and a 3-voice
harmonizer, featuring voice technologies by TC-Helicon™.
•
•
120 voices of polyphony.
•
OPOS (Objective Portable Operating System) multitasking
operating system, to let you load data while playing your
instrument.
High-quality microphone preamplifiers, with balanced
XLR/1/4” jack combo connectors and +48V phantom
power on the XLR connector.
•
High-quality input (ADC) and output (DAC) audio converters.
•
Color TouchView™ Graphical User Interface.
•
Motorized tilt display to easily adjust the viewing angle.
•
Eight fully-programmable sliders, plus an MP3 Volume
slider, to be also used as organ drawbars.
•
Two fully-programmable switches.
•
2 × USB 2.0 High Speed Host ports, for connecting external devices like hard disks, CD-ROM drives, USB memory
sticks, etc.
•
A single USB 1.1 Full Speed Device port, to connect a personal computer to your Pa2X. This port can be used for file
transfer, and for MIDI connection (without the need of a
dedicated MIDI interface for the personal computer).
•
Operating System updates, to load new features and
enhancements from disk. Don’t let your instrument get
old!
•
Double MP3 player and recorder as standard.
•
XDS Double Player with X-Fader.
•
Optional hardware expansions, to add a video out board
and more Sample RAM. Get more and more for the
money!
•
Hard disk as standard, for the widest space to your data.
•
Solid State Disk (SSD), for any system update – a smart way
to replace the usual ROM memory.
•
Favorite (Custom) Style banks, to create your own collections of Styles.
•
General MIDI Level 2 Sound-compatible.
•
950 Sounds, plus 63 Drum Kits.
•
Four multieffect processors for the internal MIDI tracks,
with 125 effects, including a Vocoder, and a selection of fine
guitar effects created using Korg’s REMS™ (Resonant
structure and Electronic circuit Modeling System) technology, to deliver truly great sounding effects.
•
Final semi-parametric Master EQ, to customize your own
sound.
•
320 Performance locations, and more than 1,600 preloaded
Single Touch Settings (STS), for fast setting of keyboard
sounds and effects.
•
409 preloaded Styles.
•
Style Record and Edit, including Guitar Mode.
•
Pad Record and Edit.
•
Full-featured 16-track sequencer.
Live Performing
Pa2X has been carefully designed to be used live. The “realtime”
word has its full meaning in this instrument. Performances
allow the instant selection of all the tracks on the keyboard and a
suitable Style; STSs allow an instant selection of the keyboard
tracks; Styles are the realtime backing companions for your realtime playing; Songs can be mixed in realtime; the SongBook is
the quick way to select a song from a sophisticated music database.
Easy Mode
If you are the kind of musician that prefers to play, more than
deal with technical matters, you can use the Pa2X in Easy Mode,
and forget all its most powerful features, and let them out of
your way.
Useful links
17
Useful links
What’s in the box
Your preferred Korg dealer not only carries this keyboard, but
also a whole bunch of hardware and software accessories. You
should ask him for more Sounds, Styles, and other useful music
materials.
After you buy your Pa2X, please check all the following items are
included in the package. If some of them are missing, immediately contact your Korg dealer.
Each Korg distributor can give you useful information. Just give
them a call for additional services. In the English-speaking
world, here are the relevant addresses:
USA
KORG USA, 316 South Service Road, Melville,
New York, 11747, USA
•
Pa2X
•
Music stand
•
Power cable
•
Owner’s Manual
•
Accessory CD (containing the USB driver, additional manuals, the Bonus Software, and a backup of the original
Operating System and Musical Resources)
Tel:1-516-333-9100, Fax:1-516-333-9108
Canada
Jam Industries, 620 McCaffrey, St-Laurent, QC,
Canada, H4T 1N1
Tel. (514) 738-3000, Fax (514) 737-5069
UK
KORG UK Ltd, 9 Newmarket Court, Kingston,
Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, MK10, 0AU
About this manual
Tel.: 01908 857100
This manual is divided in four sections:
UK Technical Support Tel: 01908 857122, Fax:
01908 857199
•
An Introduction, containing an overview of the instrument and of basic operations.
E-mail: [email protected]
•
A Quick Guide, containing a series of practical guides.
•
A Reference Guide, with each page and parameter
described in detail.
•
An Appendix, with a list of data and useful information for
the advanced user. Additional information can be found
inside the Accessory CD.
Many Korg distributors also have their own web page on the
internet, where you can find infos and software. Useful web
pages in English are the following:
Korg USA
www.korg.com
Korg UK
www.korg.co.uk
Korg Canada
www.korgcanada.com
Within the manual, you will find the following abbreviations:
The parameter can be saved to a Performance by
selecting the Write Performance command from
the page menu.
A place to find operating system updates and various system files (for
example, a full backup of the factory data), additional musical
resources, user’s manuals and various information, is at the following
link:
Korg Italy
Sty
www.korgpa.com
The parameter can be saved to one of the Single
Touch Settings of the current Style, or to a Single
Touch Setting of a SongBook entry. To save it to a
Style, select the Write STS command from the
page menu of the Style Play mode. To save it to a
SongBook entry (either of Style or Song type),
check the Write STS option in the Book Edit 1
page of the SongBook mode.
Other useful information can be found worldwide by accessing
to other Korg web sites, like the following:
Korg Inc. (Japan)
www.korg.co.jp
Gaffarel Musique (France)
www.laboitenoiredumusicien.com
Korg & More (Germany and
Austria)
www.korg.de
Eko Music Group (Italy)
www.ekomusicgroup.com
Letusa (Spain)
www.korg.es
The parameter can be saved to the current Style
Performance by selecting the Write Style Performance command from the page menu.
The parameter can be saved to the Global, by
selecting one of the available Write Global commands from the page menu. Several Global areas
are available, and a smaller symbol after the GBL
abbreviation will appear for each relevant parameter. More information is given in each Reference
chapter.
SB
The parameter can be saved to a SongBook entry.
Introduction
Welcome!
18
Welcome!
Making a backup of the original data
Making a backup of the original data
Loading the Musical Resources
A backup copy of all original data is supplied with the Accessory
CD, and can be found on our website (www.korgpa.com). You
can freely download it, in case you want to restore the Pa2X to its
original status.
Should you need the original Musical Resources, a copy of them
is already supplied with the Accessory CD, or can be downloaded
from www.korgpa.com. You may also have created a backup
copy of your custom data (see “Full Backup Resources” on
page 263).
In case you customize your Musical Resources (Sounds, Performances and Styles), we suggest you make frequent backup copies
of them, to avoid accidental loss.
To backup the Operating System, please see “Backup OS” on
page 262.
To backup the Factory Musical Resources (Styles, Programs…),
see “Full Backup Resources” on page 263.
Loading the Operating System
Your Pa2X can be constantly updated as new versions of the
operating system are released by Korg. You can download the
operating system from www.korgpa.com. Please, read the
instructions supplied with the operating system on the site.
You can see which version of the operating systems is installed in
your Pa2X by going to the “Utility” page of the Media mode (see
“OS Version Number” on page 263).
Warning: Do not install an OS other than the official OS supplied
by Korg for the Pa2X. Trying to install an OS created for different
models may cause data loss and permanent damage to the instrument. Korg is not responsible for any damage caused by improper
installation of the OS.
To restore data, see “Full Restore Resources” on page 263.
Warning: Do not install Musical Resources other than the official
ones supplied by Korg for the Pa2X. Trying to install Musical
Resources created for different models may cause data loss.
Loading Musical Resources created with previous Pa-Series (Pa80,
Pa60, Pa50, Pa1X, Pa800, Pa500) and i-Series instruments is
allowed with some limitations. See the “Media edit mode” chapter
for more information.
Start up
Connecting the AC power cord
19
Connecting the AC power cord
Connect the supplied power cord
to the dedicated socket on the rear
of the instrument. Then, plug it
into a wall socket. You don’t need
to worry about the local voltage,
since the Pa2X uses a universal
power adapter.
Turning the instrument on and off
•
Press the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the
instrument on. The display will light up, showing the boot
procedure.
Note: When turning the instrument on, RAM PCM Samples
used by some User Sounds may be automatically loaded,
depending on the status of the “PCM Autoload” parameter
(see page 264). This may take some time for loading.
•
Introduction
Start up
Keyboard, Style and Song Volume
By default, this slider balances the volume of the
Keyboard (RT, Realtime) tracks, against the
Style (ACC, Accompaniment), Pad and Song
(SEQ) tracks.
•
When in Style Play mode, this slider balances between the Keyboard tracks, and
the Style and Pad tracks.
•
When in Song Play mode, this slider balance between the Keyboard tracks, and
both Sequencer and Pad tracks.
As an alternative, the slider can be used to control the Style/Song Volume without affecting the Keyboard
tracks (see “Balance Slider” on page 225 for information on setting the slider’s behavior).
This is a relative control, whose effective maximum level is
determined by the MASTER VOLUME slider position.
When moved, a magnified version of the virtual slider appears in
the display, for more accurate positioning.
Note: This slider only works in Style Play and Song Play mode; it
does not work in Sequencer mode.
Press again the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the
instrument off.
Warning: When turning the instrument off, all data contained in RAM (Song recorded or edited in Sequencer mode,
Samples in edit and not yet saved) will be lost. MIDI Grooves
generated by the Time Slice function will be lost, too.
On the contrary, data contained in the SSD memory (Factory
data, User Sounds, Performances, Styles and Multisamples)
will be preserved. Saved Samples will be preserved, too.
The X-Fader slider
The X-Fader slider sets the relative volume of the two onboard
players (Player 1 and Player 2).
Player 1
Controlling the Volume
Player 2
•
Move it fully to the left to set Player 1 to the maximum level
and Player 2 to zero.
•
Move it fully to the right to set Player 1 to zero and Player 2
to the maximum level.
Use the MASTER VOLUME slider to control
the overall volume of the instrument. This
slider controls the volume of the sound going to
the main (LEFT & RIGHT) OUTPUTs and the
HEADPHONES connector.
•
Move it to the center to set both Players at the same level.
The 1 & 2 OUTPUT connectors are not affected
by this slider. So, use the mixer’s or speaker’s
level controls to adjust the volume.
Note: When moving this slider fully to the right or the left, the
shown Lyrics, Chords, Markers and Score, as well as the Harmony
Track, may change.
Note: Begin with a moderate level, then raise the
MASTER VOLUME up. Don’t keep the volume at
an uncomfortable level for too long.
Note: When turning the instrument on, move this slider to the center, to avoid starting a Song at the minimum level.
Master Volume
This slider also selects the Harmony Track (see “Harmony
Track” on page 178), and can select the Lyrics, Score and Markers of one of the two players (see “Lyrics/Score X-Fader Link” on
page 179)
20
Start up
Headphones
Green
Low- to mid-level signal entering. If the LED
turns off too often, the input gain is too low. Use
the GAIN controls and/or the source device’s volume to raise the input level.
Orange
Slight overload in the signal path. This is fine if it
turns on only on signal peaks.
Red
Clipping is occurring in the signal path. Use the
GAIN controls and/or the source device’s volume
to lower the input level.
Headphones
Connect a pair of headphones to the HEADPHONES output, under
the left part of the keyboard (just under the joystick). You can use
headphones with an impedance of 16-200Ω (50Ω suggested). Use a
headphone splitter to connect more than one pair of headphones.
Audio Outputs
Audio outputs allows you to connect the Pa2X to an external
amplification system.
Stereo. Connect two mono cables to the main (LEFT, RIGHT)
OUTPUTs. Connect the other end of the cables to a stereo channel of your mixer, two mono channels, two powered monitors,
or the CD, LINE IN or TAPE/AUX input of your audio system.
Don’t use the PHONO inputs of your audio system!
Mono. Connect a mono cable to either the LEFT or RIGHT OUTPUT alone. Connect the other end of the cable to a mono channel
of your mixer, a powered monitor, or a single channel of your CD,
LINE IN or TAPE/AUX input of a hi-fi system (you will hear that
channel only, unless you can set the amplifier to Mono mode).
Separate outputs. You can connect your Pa2X to four channels
of a mixer. This is very useful when recording, or if you want to
send a player’s or backing track to a separate channel. For example, by using the separate outputs, you may send the Drum or
Bass track to an external compressor or reverb unit, or mix the
separate tracks on an external mixer.
Connect four mono cables to each of the main (LEFT, RIGHT)
and 1, 2 OUTPUTs. To feed the sub-outputs (1, 2) you must program the track(s) you wish to send them (see the “Audio Output” section in the Global, starting from page 231).
Note: When a track is sent to the OUTPUT 1 or 2, it is removed
from the main mix going to the LEFT & RIGHT OUTPUTS.
Note: OUTPUTs 1 & 2 carry a dry sound with no effects applied.
The volume of these outputs cannot be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME slider.
Adjust the volume of the LEFT & RIGHT OUTPUTs with the
MASTER VOLUME slider. Adjust the volume of the 1 & 2 OUTPUTs with the mixer’s or external speaker’s level controls.
Audio Inputs
Connect your microphones, guitars, or any other musical instrument, to the AUDIO INPUTs on the back of the instrument. A
microphone connected to the MIC input is also sent to the Voice
Processor for sophisticate processing.
The internal +48V Phantom Power on the MIC input also allows
to connect any condenser microphone.
See the “Singing with a connected microphone” chapter on
page 71, and the “Audio Setup: Audio In” section on page 233,
for more information on connecting and setting the inputs and
the audio source.
MIDI connections
You can play the internal sounds of your Pa2X with an external
controller, i.e. a master keyboard, a MIDI guitar, a wind controller, a MIDI accordion, or a digital piano.
You can also control other MIDI devices with the Pa2X, or connect it to a computer for use with an external sequencer.
As an alternative to the MIDI connectors, you can use the USB
Device port for direct connection to a personal computer.
See the “MIDI” chapter on page 269 for more information on
MIDI connections.
Damper Pedal
Connect a Damper (Sustain) pedal to the DAMPER connector
on the back panel. Use a Korg PS1 or DS1H footswitch pedal, or
a compatible one. With the Korg DS1H, half-pedalling can be
used on some Grand Piano Sounds. To switch the Damper
polarity, see “Damper” on page 227
Demo
Listen to the built-in Demo Songs to appreciate the power of the
Pa2X. There are several Demo Songs to choose from.
1.
Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together.
Their LEDs start blinking.
At this point, if you don’t press any other button, all the Demo
Songs will be played back.
2.
Select one of the available options, to listen to a specified
Demo Song.
3.
Stop the Demo by touching the STOP button on the display,
or by exiting the Demo mode by pressing any MODE button.
Use the GAIN knobs next to the MIC input to set the input sensitivity. While you play the external source, look at the MIC IN
LED indicator on the front panel, to see when the audio level is
correctly set:
The music stand
Off
A music stand comes standard with your Pa2X. Insert its legs
into the two dedicated holes on the rear panel.
No signal entering.
Sound
21
Glossary of Terms
Before you begin, take a few moments to familiarize yourself
with the names and terms we will be using to talk about the various elements of the Pa2X.
In this section, you will find a brief description of various key
elements of the Pa2X. A professional arranger (Pa) keyboard
uses different terminology than a traditional synthesizer or
workstation. By familiarizing yourself with the names and functions in this section, you will get a better understanding of how
all the different parts of the Pa2X work together to create a realistic musical performance. This will also help you to get the most
out of the rest of the User’s Manual.
Sound
A Sound is the most basic unit of an Arranger Keyboard performance. A Sound is basically a playable instrument timbre
(piano, bass, sax, guitar…) that can be edited, saved, recalled
and assigned to any track. An individual Sound can be played on
the keyboard in the Sound mode. In the Style Play mode or
Sequencer mode, Sounds may be freely assigned to Sequencer
tracks, Style tracks, or Keyboard tracks.
Style
The Style is the heart of a professional arranger keyboard. At its
basic level, a Style will consist of up to eight parts, or “Tracks”.
Drums
Variation
For each Style, there are four Variations. In general, each Variation is a slightly different version of the others. As you progress
from Variation one to Variation four, the arrangements will
become more complex, and more parts (Tracks) may be added.
This allows your performance to have a more dynamic arrangement, without losing the original “feel” of the Style.
Fill-in
During a performance, a drummer may often perform a “fill” such as when transitioning from a verse to a chorus – adding
extra dynamics and keeping the beat from getting too repetitive.
The Pa2X offers three Fill-ins specifically programmed for each
Style. A Fill-in may be drums alone, drums with instrumentation, of even a silent “break”.
Intro & Ending
Each Style also allows you to embellish your performance with a
set of musical introductions and endings. A long and short version of the Intro and Ending are usually provided, with the
former more harmonically elaborated, and the latter with a fixed
chord. A “count-in” style Intro is also provided.
Pad
Pads are like single-track Styles, that can be triggered by using
the dedicated PAD buttons. They can be used to play in realtime
single sounds, as well as short, cycling sequences that play in
time with the Style or Standard MIDI File.
The Drum track will provide a repeating rhythmic phrase,
played by the standard instruments of a Drum Kit.
Percussion
An additional rhythmic phrase played by various percussion
instruments (conga, shaker, cowbell, etc.) is provided by the Percussion track.
The Drum and Percussion tracks will play the same phrase
repeatedly, regardless of the notes and chords being played on
the keyboard, although it is possible to assign a different Drum
Kit to either part, or to edit the Kit itself.
Bass & Accompaniment
The Bass track and the (up to) five additional Style tracks will
each play musical phrases that are musically related to and in
sync with the Drum and Percussion tracks. However, the notes
being played by these tracks will change to follow the chord progression that you play on the keyboard.
Again, any Sound you choose may be assigned to any track in a
Style.
Keyboard tracks
In addition to the Style and Pad tracks, up to four additional
parts can be played on the keyboard in real-time. Each of these
Keyboard tracks can be limited to a particular range of keys or
velocities, but in general three can be assigned to play above the
split point (Upper), and one below (Lower). This allows the
Upper Sounds to be layered together. The split point can be set
to any note on the keyboard. In addition to performing along
with a Style, these same Keyboard tracks will allow you to play
along with the Player.
STS (Single Touch Settings)
Single Touch Settings allow you to instantly change the sounds
assigned to each of the Keyboard tracks with a single button
press, allowing for wide variation in sounds during a performance. Four STS (Single Touch Settings) can be saved with each
Style or SongBook entry.
Introduction
Glossary of Terms
22
Glossary of Terms
Performance
Ensemble
By turning the Ensemble feature on, a single note played on one
of the Keyboard tracks will be embellished by additional notes to
create a complete chord voicing. The Ensemble knows which
notes to add by looking at the chord that the Style is playing. In
addition, the Ensemble parameters allow you to select the type
of voicing that will be added – from a simple one-note harmony
to a full “Brass” section – even a marimba-style trill!
Performance
The Performance is the most encompassing setting on the Pa2X
– a single setting that can remember a Style (with all the appropriate sounds), the Keyboard tracks (with all the appropriate
sounds) and all their Single Touch Settings, Tempo, transposition, etc… A Performance can be stored in one of the Performance Banks, or it can be saved in a “database” format using the
SongBook function.
Sequencer
The Sequencer acts as a recorder, so you can capture and playback your performances. The Pa2X sequencer can function in
different modes. In the Backing Sequence mode, each Style element and each Real-Time (Keyboard and Pads) element can be
recorded on a separate track in a single pass. This can be a big
help in getting a song recorded quickly. The sequencer can also
behave as a traditional 16-track linear sequencer, where each
track is recorded individually one at a time.
Player
The two Players act as two music player, so you can playback
your performances or any Standard MIDI File or MP3 file. Like a
DJ console, you can mix two songs with the X-Fader slider.
The LOGO decoder
On the front panel of your Pa2X you have probably noticed three
logos, and may have even wondered what they stand for. Well,
here is a quick explanation of each one.
RX Technology is the cutting edge engine
that drives every aspect of the Pa2X – from
the synthesis to the display and how it all
works together.
A variety of professional
vocal effects are provided by
the Pa2X – including reverb,
delay, compression, and even three-part vocal harmonies! All of
the vocal effects (apart for reverb) are provided by TC Helicon,
the leader in vocal processing technology.
General MIDI (GM) is a standard that
ensures the compatibility of sounds and
messages between GM compatible instruments available from different manufacturers. For example, sequenced songs created on any GM equipped
product and saved in the GM format will playback correctly on
the Pa2X.
General MIDI 2 extends the basic features of the General MIDI,
allowing for 256 Sounds and 9 Drum Kits (instead of 128 and 1).
23
Interface basics
The Color TouchView™ graphical user
interface
Pa2X features an easy-to-use graphical user interface, based on
Korg’s patented Color TouchView™ interface. Here are the basic
elements of the user’s interface.
Overlapping windows
When you touch a Sound, Style, STS, Pad or Song name, a
selecting window overlaps the current page. After you select an
item in the window, or press the EXIT button, the window
closes, and the underlying page is shown again.
Pages
Parameters are grouped into separate pages, to be selected by
touching the corresponding tabs on the lower part of the display.
Menus and sections
Pages are grouped in sections, to be selected by touching the corresponding buttons in the Edit menu that opens up when you
press the MENU button.
Dialog boxes
Similar to selecting windows, dialog boxes overlap the underlaying page. Touch one of the button on the display to give Pa2X an
answer, and the dialog box will close.
Page menus
Selectable items
A triangle next to the name of a Sound, Style, STS, Pad or Song,
means that you can select it and replace it with a different element. Touch the item’s name and make the corresponding Select
window appear.
Touch the icon on the upper right corner of each page, and a
menu with suitable commands for the current page will appear.
Touch one of the available commands to select it. (Or, touch
anywhere else on the screen to make it disappear, with no command selected).
Introduction
Interface basics
The Color TouchView™ graphical user interface
24
Interface basics
The Color TouchView™ graphical user interface
Pop-up menus
Lists and scrollbars
When an arrow appears next to a parameter name, touch it to
open a pop-up menu. Select any of the available options (or anywhere else on the screen to make the menu disappear).
Files on storage media, as well as other kinds of data, are shown
as lists. Use the scrollbar to scroll the list content.
Scrollbar
List
Checkboxes
This kind of parameters are on/off switches. Touch them to
change their status.
Numeric fields
Keep the SHIFT button pressed while touching one of the
arrows, to scroll to the next or previous alpha-numeric section.
Sliders
To change a slider’s position, select it, then use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change its position. As an alternative, touch a
slider with your fingers and keep it held. Then move it up or
down to change its position.
When a numeric value can be edited, touch it a second time to
open the Numeric Keypad.
Knobs
As an alternative, touch a numeric field and keep it held. Then
move your fingers up (or right) to increase the value, or move it
down (or left) to decrease it.
This also includes the Tempo numeric field in the main page of
the Style Play, Song Play, and Sequencer modes.
Editable names
When the
(Text Edit) button appears next to a name, touch
it to open the Text Edit window and edit the name.
To change a knob’s position, select it, then use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change its position. As an alternative, touch a
knob with your finger and keep it held. Then move your fingers
up (or right) to rotate it clockwise, or move it down (or left) to
rotate the knob counter-clockwise.
Operative modes
Drawbars
To change a drawbar’s position, use the physical sliders on the
control panel (provided they are in Drawbars mode).
As an alternative, you can change a drawbar position in the display. Select it, then use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change
its position.
25
Selected, highlighted items
Any operation carried on on parameters, data or list entries, is
executed on highlighted items. First select the parameter or item,
then execute the operation.
Also, you can touch a drawbar with your fingers and keep in
held. Then move it up or down to change its position.
Non-available, grayed-out parameters
When a parameter or command is not currently available, it is
shown in grey on the display. This means it cannot be selected,
but may become available when a different option is selected, or
you switch to a different page.
Icons
Various icons help identifying the type of a file, a Song, a folder.
For example:
Folder
File of Style Bank
Standard MIDI File
Operative modes
Pa2X pages are divided into various operating modes. Each
mode is accessed by pressing the corresponding button in the
MODE section on the control panel.
Each operating mode is marked with a different color code, that
helps you understand at first sight where you are.
Three special modes (Global, Media, and SongBook) overlap the
current operating mode, that remains active in the background.
The SongBook mode can recall the Style Play or Song Play
modes.
Shortcuts
Some commands or pages can be recalled by keeping the SHIFT
button pressed, and pressing other buttons or elements in the
display. See the “Shortcuts” chapter on page 334 for a list of
available shortcuts.
Introduction
Interface basics
26
Easy Mode
Easy Mode
If you have never used an arranger before, we suggest you to
switch to the Easy Mode. Easy Mode allows you to play Styles
and Songs with a simple user interface, free from the many
advanced parameters that you will want to learn at a later date.
At this point, the Easy Mode has been activated, and the elements in the display appear less cluttered:
Turning the Easy Mode on
Touch the little rectangle on the top right corner of the display,
to open the page menu:
Turning the Easy Mode off
The instrument will stay in this mode even after having been
turned off. Repeat the above operation when you want to deactivate the Easy Mode.
Switching between Styles and Songs
Depending on what you want to play, you must switch to Style
Play mode or Song Play mode.
•
Press the STYLE PLAY button to switch to the Style Play
mode and play Styles. This is the mode you are in when you
first turn the instrument on.
•
Press the SONG PLAY button to switch to the Song Play
mode and play Songs.
The page menu
Touch the “Easy Mode” menu item, to make the checkmark
appear:
Showing the Lyrics on the display
Some Standard MIDI Files or MP3 files contain Lyrics and
Chords. Press the LYRICS button to recall the LYRICS page.
Press EXIT to return to the previous page.
27
The Style Play page in detail
To see this page, press the STYLE PLAY button.
Style name and info. Touch the Style’s name
to open the Style Select window and choose
a different Style. → page 83
Sounds assigned to the right hand (UP1 to UP3)
and to the left hand (LOW). Touch the Sound’s
name to open the Sound Select window and
choose a different Sound. → page 82
Sound icon and status. If
the
icon appears,
the Sound is in mute and
cannot be heard. If the
icon does not appear, the
Sound is in play and can
be heard. → page 35
Tempo. Use the
DIAL to change it.
Length of the accompaniment
pattern, and current beat.
Performance or STS. Touch it to
open the Performance Select window and choose a different Performance. Sounds on the
keyboard will change. → page 82
Close this lock to avoid
transposition when
choosing a different
Performance or Style.
→ page 222
Touch it to turn the microphone
on/off. → page 71
Touch it to turn the voice harmony on/off. → page 74
Touch here to change the
Split Point. → page 38
Touch it to talk to your
audience. → page 75
Single Touch Settings (STS). Touch one of them to choose it, or use the dedicated
buttons on the control panel. Sounds on the keyboard will change. → page 84
Notes:
• There are three Sounds for the right hand (Upper 1, Upper 2,
Upper 3), and only one Sound for the left hand (Lower). Their
names are abbreviated as UP1, UP2 UP3, LOW, and are shown
in the right side of the display.
• Performances and STSs are collections of Sounds. Just choose
one of them to change all the Sounds of the keyboard (and,
when the STYLE CHANGE LED is lit on the control panel, of
the Style).
• Right hand (Upper) and left hand (Lower) Sounds are separated by the Split Point.
• Choose a Style to change the musical style of the accompaniment patterns. Touching the Style name in the display is the
same as to press one of the buttons of the STYLE section on the
control panel.
Introduction
Easy Mode
The Style Play page in detail
28
Easy Mode
The Song Play page in detail
The Song Play page in detail
To see this page, press the SONG PLAY button.
Song assigned to Player 1. Touch it to open
the Song Select window and choose a different Song. → page 84
Sounds assigned to the right hand (UP1 to UP3)
and to the left hand (LOW). Touch the Sound’s
name to open the Sound Select window and
choose a different Sound. → page 82
Sound icon and status. If
the
icon appears,
the Sound is in mute and
cannot be heard. If the
icon does not appear, the
Sound is in play and can
be heard. → page 35
Tempo. Use the
DIAL to change it.
Song assigned to Player 2. Touch it
to open the Song Select window
and choose a different Song. →
page 84
Performance or STS. Touch it to
open the Performance Select window and choose a different Performance. Sounds on the
keyboard will change. → page 82
Close this lock to avoid
transposition when
choosing a different
Performance or Style.
→ page 222
Touch it to turn the microphone
on/off. → page 71
Touch it to turn the voice harmony on/off. → page 74
Touch it to talk to your
audience. → page 75
Touch here to change the
Split Point. → page 38
Touch here to see the
Song’s Lyrics. → page 29
Single Touch Settings (STS). Touch one of them to choose it, or use the dedicated
buttons on the control panel. Sounds on the keyboard will change. → page 84
Notes:
• As in Style mode, there are three Sounds for the right hand
(Upper 1, Upper 2, Upper 3), and only one Sound for the left
hand (Lower). Their names are abbreviated as UP1, UP2 UP3,
LOW, and are shown in the right side of the display.
• Right hand (Upper) and left hand (Lower) Sounds are separated by the Split Point.
• Performances and STSs are collections of Sounds. Just choose
one of them to change all the Sounds of the keyboard.
• Available STSs depend on the Style or SongBook entry you last
selected.
• Since there are two onboard Players, you can play two Songs at
the same time. Mix them using the X-Fader on the control panel.
• Touching a Song name in the display is the same as to press one
of the SELECT buttons on the control panel. Each Player has its
own SELECT and transport buttons.
Easy Mode
The Lyrics page in detail
Introduction
The Lyrics page in detail
To see this page, press the LYRICS button.
Master Transpose. → page 160
Chord (if included in the Song).
Current beat and measure number.
Use these tabs to see Lyrics of the Song assigned
to Player 1, Player 2 or
the Style. → page 166
Lyrics are shown in
this area.
Use these tabs to see
Markers set for the Song
assigned to Player 1 or
Player 2. → page 167
Use these tabs to see the
Score of the Song
assigned to Player 1 or
Player 2. → page 167
STS. Either touch them to select,
or use the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons under the display.
→ page 10
Use this tab to set the
display options. →
page 169
Name of the Song in play.
Notes:
• Exit from this page by pressing the EXIT button.
• When you switch to a different Player using the X-Fader, the
Lyrics shown in the display may change (see “Lyrics/Score XFader Link” on page 179).
29
30
Easy Mode
The Lyrics page in detail
Quick Guide
32
Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos
Turning the instrument on, and viewing the main screen
Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos
First of all, turn the instrument on and familiarize yourself with the main screen. You can also listen
to the demos.
Power switch
Demo buttons
Display
Turning the instrument on, and viewing the main screen
Turn the Pa2X on by pressing the POWER button, located on the back panel.
After you turn the POWER on, a welcome screen is shown for a few seconds, and then the main display appears.
Tempo and beat counter
Style Element
length (in measures)
Recognized chord
Page menu
Style name
Sounds assigned to the
Upper Keyboard tracks
Style bank
Upper Keyboard tracks
Style meter
Sound bank icon
Sound name
Songs assigned to Player 1 and
Player 2
Sound assigned to the Lower
Keyboard track
Selected Performance or STS
Lower Keyboard track
Volume sliders. They can be
controlled by selecting one
of them and using the DIAL
to change the value (or by
touching and dragging them
in the display).
Play/Mute status
Tabs
Playing the demos
A variety of demo songs have been included to demonstrate the sonic power of the Pa2X.
1
To open the Demo page, press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons at
the same time.
2
Follow the instructions in the display. That’s it!
Playing Sounds
Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard
33
Playing Sounds
You can play up to three sounds at the same time on the keyboard. You can also split the keyboard
into two parts, to play up to three sounds with your right hand (Upper), and one with your left hand
(Lower).
Split button
Quick Guide
Sound Select section
Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard
1
Be sure the Upper 1 track is selected and set to play.
A selected track is shown with a
white background. In this example,
the Upper 1 track is selected. If it is
not selected, touch it once to select
it.
The absence of the
icon over the
bank icon shows that the
Upper 1 track is set to
play. If it is muted, touch
the bank icon to set it to
play.
2
If you want to play the Sound on the whole keyboard, be sure the keyboard is in Full Upper mode. If it is split in two parts, press the SPLIT button to turn its LED off.
(Full) Upper
i Note: Be sure tracks
Upper 2 and Upper 3 are
muted, and are not playing. If you hear more
than one sound, see also
page 35 for how to mute
tracks.
34
3
Playing Sounds
Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard
Touch the Upper 1 track’s area in the display, to open the Sound Select
window.
The triangle means
you can touch this
name to open a
Select window
Sound’s name
Set of banks. [1/10] corresponds
to the top row of Factory Sounds
on the control panel,
[11/17] to the lower row. [User]
are the User Sounds.
The currently
selected Sound
also appears on
the page header.
Target track for
the selected
Sound
i Note: You can also
open the Sound Select
window by pressing one
of the buttons in the
PERFORMANCE/SOUND
SELECT section – provided the LED on the
SOUND SELECT button is
on. This will let you jump
directly to the desired
Sound bank.
Sound bank icon
The selected Sound is highlighted. Touch a Sound’s name
to select it.
Touch one of the side tabs to
select a different Sound bank.
Touch one of the lower tabs to
select a different Sound page.
4
A Previous and Next Page pair of
button may appear in this area,
when more than five pages are
available.
Select a Sound from the Sound Select window.
The Sound Select window closes,
and the main screen appears
again, with the selected Sound
assigned to the Upper 1 track.
5
Play the Sound on the keyboard.
i Note: You
can leave the
Sound Select
window open
in the display, even after
selecting a Sound. Just
press the DISPLAY HOLD
button to turn its LED
on. In this case, press the
EXIT button to exit from
a selection window.
Playing Sounds
Playing two or three Sounds at the same time
35
Playing two or three Sounds at the same time
You can layer all three Upper tracks and play them on the keyboard.
Please note how the
icon appears in the
Upper 2 and Upper 3 status
boxes. These tracks will not
be heard.
Touch the
play.
icon in the Upper 2 status box, to set the Upper 2 track to
After touching in
this area, the
icon disappears. The Upper 2
track will be set to
play and will be
heard.
2
Play the keyboard.
Note how the ‘Dark Pad’ sound (assigned to the Upper 2 track) has been
layered with the ‘Grand Piano’ (assigned to the Upper 1 track).
3
Touch the
play.
icon in the Upper 3 status box, to set the Upper 3 track to
As above, after touching in this area, the
icon disappears. The Upper 3
track will be set to
play and will be
heard.
4
Play the keyboard.
Note how the ‘StringEns2’ sound (assigned to the Upper 3 track) has
been added to the ‘Dark Pad’ (assigned to the Upper 2 track) and the
‘Grand Piano’ (assigned to the Upper 1 track).
Quick Guide
1
36
Playing Sounds
Playing two or three Sounds at the same time
5
Touch the bank icon in the Upper 3 status box, to mute the Upper 3 track
again.
6
Play the keyboard.
Note how the ‘StringEns2’ sound (assigned to the Upper 3 track) has
been muted again. Only tracks Upper 1 and Upper 2 can be heard at this
time.
7
Touch the bank icon in the Upper 2 status box, to mute the Upper 2 track
again.
8
Play the keyboard.
Note how the ‘Dark Pad’ sound (assigned to the Upper 2 track) has been
muted again. Only track Upper 1 can be heard at this time.
Playing Sounds
Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand
37
Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand
You can play a single Sound with your left hand, in addition to playing up to three Sounds with your
right hand.
Press the SPLIT button to turn its LED on, and split the keyboard into
Lower (left hand) and Upper (right hand) parts.
Upper
Lower
2
Quick Guide
1
Be sure the Lower track is set to play.
If the Lower track is muted, touch
its
icon to make it disappear from this area.
3
Play the keyboard.
Note how the keyboard is split into two parts, each playing different sounds.
Lower
4
Upper
Return to the full keyboard playing mode by pressing the SPLIT button to
turn its LED off.
(Full) Upper
i Hint: You can select a
different Sound for the
Lower part, by following the same procedure
used for the Upper 1
track. See page 33.
38
5
Playing Sounds
Changing the split point
Play the keyboard.
Note how the keyboard once again plays the Upper tracks for
the entire length of the keyboard.
Upper
Changing the split point
If you are not comfortable with the selected split point, you may set the split point to any key.
1
Touch the Split tab to see the Split Point panel.
2
Touch the keyboard in the display, then play a note on the keyboard. Or,
touch the Split Point parameter to select it, and use the DIAL to select the
new split point.
3
Touch the Volume tab to go back to the Volume panel.
Playing Sounds
Raising or lowering the Upper octave
39
Raising or lowering the Upper octave
If all Upper tracks sound too high or too low, you can quickly change which octave they are playing
in.
1
Use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel, to transpose all
Upper tracks at the same time.
i Note: The Octave
Transpose value for each
of the keyboard track is
shown
under
the
Sound’s name.
Each press of this button
will lower the pitch by one
octave.
Press both UPPER OCTAVE buttons together to reset the octave.
Quick Guide
2
Each press of this button
will raise the pitch by one
octave.
Digital Drawbars
A special sound in the Pa2X is the “Digital Drawbars”. This sound simulates the classic tonewheel
organs of the past. You can use the Assignable Sliders of the Pa2X to adjust each drawbar, and then
save these settings to a Performance (see “Saving your settings to a Performance” on page 43).
1
Mute all Upper tracks, apart for the Upper 1 track. Select the Upper 1
track.
The Upper 1 track is set to
play and selected.
Upper 2 and 3 tracks are
muted (they cannot be
heard).
2
Touch the Sound name to open the Sound Select window.
i Note: You
can select a
Digital Drawbar
Sound
also by pressing the DIGITAL DRAWBAR button
in the PERFORMANCE/
SOUND SELECT section.
40
3
Playing Sounds
Digital Drawbars
Select the Digi Organ bank, then choose the DigDrawbars Sound.
Due to the nature of these Sounds, there is only one Digital Drawbar Organ Sound. Different
drawbar settings may be stored with each Performance. So, selecting a different Performance will
select different settings for the Digital Drawbar Organ.
After you select the Digital
Drawbar Organ Sound, the
Drawbar Setting page appears.
4
As soon as the Drawbar Setting page appears in the display, the Assignable Sliders will function as organ drawbars (the slider’s DRAWBAR LED
will be lit). Move the Assignable Sliders to change the various drawbar
settings.
i Note: You don’t need
to be in the Digital
Drawbars page to use
the Assignable Sliders to
change the sound. When
a Drawbar Organ is
assigned to a Keyboard
track, the sound can be
changed also while in
the main page, provided that the DRAWBARS LED is turned on.
To change the Digital
Drawbar Organ settings
by using the Assignable
Sliders, the DRAWBARS
LED must be turned on.
This automatically happens when recalling the
Drawbars page.
5
Select different parameters in this page, and change their settings to see
how each setting affects the sound.
6
When you have found some settings that you like, you can save them to
a Performance, as described later in this section.
i Hint: As an alternative to using Assignable
Sliders to change drawbar values, you can
touch a drawbar in the
display, and use the
TEMPO/VALUE controls
to change it, or just drag
it in the display.
Playing Sounds
Digital Drawbars
Press the EXIT button to go back to the main page.
Quick Guide
7
41
42
Selecting and saving Performances
Selecting a Performance
Selecting and saving Performances
The Performance is the musical heart of the Pa2X. Unlike selecting single Sounds, selecting a Performance will recall several Sounds at the same time, the needed effects and transpositions, a suitable
Voice Processor preset, plus many more parameters useful for playing in a musical situation.
You can save all control panel settings in a Performance memory location (including your Digital
Drawbar Organ settings). While many Performances are already supplied with the instrument, you
can customize each of them to your own taste, and then save them in their customized form.
Similar to Performances, you can also save your settings to a Single Touch Setting (STS), which will
store all the settings for the Keyboard tracks. Four STSs are supplied with each Style and SongBook
entry, and can be selected with the four dedicated buttons under the display.
As far as Style tracks are concerned, you can save settings in a third object called the Style Performance.
Please note that settings saved in Performance 1 are automatically selected when the instrument is
turned on. This means you can save your preferred startup settings to Performance 1.
Single Touch Settings (STS) section
Performance/Sound Select section
Selecting a Performance
1
Touch the Performance area in the display, to open the Performance
Select window.
Set of banks. [1/10] corresponds to the top
row of Performances on the control panel,
[11/20] to the lower row.
The selected Performance is
highlighted. Touch a Performance name to select it.
Touch one of the side tabs to
select a different Performance
bank.
Touch one of the lower tabs to
select a different Performance
page.
i Note: You can open
the Performance Select
window also by pressing
one of the buttons in the
PERFORMANCE/SOUND
SELECT section – provided the LED on the
PERFORMANCE SELECT
button is on. This will let
you jump directly to the
desired
Performance
bank.
Selecting and saving Performances
Saving your settings to a Performance
2
43
Select one of the Performances in the Performance Select window.
The Performance Select window closes, and the main screen
appears again (provided the
DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned
off). Sounds, effects, and other
settings, change according to
the setting memorized in the
selected Performance.
Play the keyboard.
Settings memorized in the selected Performance have
been selected. Sounds, effects and other settings have
been recalled.
i Note: If
the LED of
the
STYLE
CHANGE
button
is
turned on, selecting a
Performance may automatically select a different Style and its settings
(Sounds, effects, Drawbar settings for the Style
tracks…)
Saving your settings to a Performance
All the control panel settings, plus the Keyboard track settings, selected effects and Voice Processor
Preset, can be saved to a single Performance, to be quickly recalled at a later time.
1
Touch the page menu icon to open the page menu.
Page menu icon
Page menu
i Note: To open the
Write Performance dialog box, you can press
the SHIFT + one of the
PERFORMANCE buttons.
Quick Guide
3
44
2
Selecting and saving Performances
Saving your settings to a Performance
Select the ‘Write Performance’ command to open the Write Performance
dialog box.
After choosing the Write Performance
menu item, the Write Performance dialog box appears.
3
If you like, you may assign a new name to the Performance.
Touch Symbol to
enter special characters.
Use alphabetical
characters to
enter text.
Use the SHIFT button to switch
between capitals
and small characters.
Touch the ‘T’ symbol to open the Text Edit
dialog box.
Use the ‘<’ and ‘>’
buttons to move the
cursor.
Touch Clear to delete the
whole string, Delete to
delete just a single character.
When done, touch OK
to confirm the new
name, or Cancel to
abandon all changes.
Selecting and saving Performances
Saving your settings to a Performance
4
45
Select a Bank and Performance location in memory, where you would
like to save the Performance.
To select the target Bank and
Performance location, select
the Bank and Performance
parameters, and use the
TEMPO/VALUE section.
A)
The selected Performance location is
highlighted. Touch a
Performance’s name
to select it.
B)
Note: A Performance
can be saved to an
‘Empty’ location. An
‘Empty’ locations
currently contains
no data.
Touch one of the side tabs to
select a different Performance
bank.
5
Touch one of the lower tabs to
select a different Performance
page.
When you have changed the name to the Performance, and selected the
target location, touch OK to save the Performance to memory (or cancel
to stop the operation).
! Warning: Saving a
Performance
to
an
already used location
overwrites any existing
data at that location.
The old data are lost.
Make a backup of all
your important data.
Quick Guide
or…
Set of banks. [1/10] corresponds to the top
row of Performances on the control panel,
[11/20] to the lower row.
46
Selecting and playing Styles
Selecting and playing a Style
Selecting and playing Styles
Pa2X is an arranger, i.e. a musical instrument providing automatic accompaniments, or arrangements.
Each arrangement style is called, as a consequence, “Style”.
A Style is made of several Style Elements (Intro, Variation, Fill, Ending), corresponding to the various
sections of a song. By selecting Style Elements, you can make your playing more varied and musical.
When selecting a Style, a Style Performance, with settings for the Style tracks, is also selected. If the
SINGLE TOUCH LED is turned on, the first of the four Single Touch Settings (STS) associated with
the Style is selected, too, and Keyboard tracks, pads, effects and some other useful parameters are
automatically configured.
Use the Style controls to start or stop the Style.
Style Select section
Style Controls
Style Elements
Selecting and playing a Style
1
Touch the Style area in the display. The Style Select window appears.
Set of banks. [1/10] corresponds to the top row
of Styles on the control panel, [11/20] to the
lower row, [Favorite] to the Favorite Styles.
The selected Style is highlighted.
Touch a Style’s name to select it.
Touch one of the side tabs to
select a different Style bank.
Touch one of the lower tabs to
select a different Style page.
i Note: You can open
the Style Select window
also by pressing one of
the buttons in the STYLE
SELECT section. This will
let you jump directly to
the desired Style bank.
Selecting and playing Styles
Selecting and playing a Style
2
47
Select a Style from the Style Select window.
3
Be sure one of the Chord Scanning modes is selected.
For chord scanning to work, either of both LEDs must be
turned on. Lower: chords are recognized on the left of the
split point; Upper: chords are recognized on the right of
the split point; Full: chords are recognized on the whole
keyboard. Off: only the Drum track can be heard.
4
5
Press the SYNCHRO-START button to turn its LED on.
Play the keyboard.
When the Syncho-Start function is turned on, the Style
starts playing as soon as you play a note or chord in the
chord recognition area. Play chords with your left hand,
and the melody with your right hand. The arranger will
follow your playing.
6
i Note: You
can leave the
Style
Select
window open
in the display, even after
selecting a Style. Just
press the DISPLAY HOLD
button to turn its LED
on. In this case, press the
EXIT button to exit from
the Song Select window.
Press START/STOP to stop the Style.
i Note: You could simply press START/STOP to
start the Style, but the
Synchro-Start function
allows you to make the
Style start in sync with
your playing on the keyboard. Therefore, it may
be considered a “more
musical” way of starting
a Style.
Quick Guide
The Style Select window closes,
and the main screen appears
again, with the selected Style
ready to go.
48
Selecting and playing Styles
Tempo
Tempo
While a Tempo setting is saved with each Style or Performance, you can change it to be whatever you
like. You can use either of the following two methods.
•
While the Tempo parameter is selected, use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to
change its value.
•
When the Tempo parameter is not selected, or you are in any other page,
keep the SHIFT button pressed, and use the DIAL to change the Tempo.
The selected tempo will be shown in a small window.
IFT
SH
•
Press the UP and DOWN buttons at the same time to recall the saved
Tempo.
Intro, Fill, Variation, Ending
When playing Styles, you can select various “Style Elements” to make your playing richer. A Style is
made of up to four basic patterns (Variations), three Intros (or two Intros and a Count-In), three Fills
(or two Fills and a Break), and three Endings.
1
Make sure the SYNCHRO-START LED is turned on (otherwise, press the
button to turn it on).
2
Press one of the INTRO buttons to set the corresponding Intro to play.
i Hint: As an alternative to using the TEMPO/
VALUE controls, hold the
Tempo value in the display, then move your finger up/down or left/
right.
Selecting and playing Styles
Single Touch Settings (STS)
3
49
Play the keyboard.
The Style starts with the selected Intro. When the Intro is
completed, the basic pattern (selected Variation) starts to
play.
4
While playing, press one of the FILL buttons to select a Fill.
5
Before the Fill ends, press one of the VARIATION buttons, to select a different variation of the basic pattern.
When the Fill ends, the selected Variation will start playing.
6
i Note: You do not
need to select a Variation during a Fill, since a
Variation may already be
automatically recalled at
the end of the Fill. See
“Fill Mode (1…3)” on
page 107.
When you like to stop playing, press one of the ENDING buttons to stop
the Style with an Ending.
When the Ending is finished, the Style automatically stops.
Single Touch Settings (STS)
Each Style or SongBook entry may come with up to four Keyboard track settings, called STS (short
for “Single Touch Settings”). STS #1 is automatically selected when choosing a Style, provided the
SINGLE TOUCH LED is turned on. STS#1 is also recalled when a SongBook entry is selected.
STSs are still available when switching to Song Play mode from Style play mode, to let you select a different configuration of Keyboard tracks and a different Voice Processor Preset, while listening to the
Songs.
1
Press one of the four STS buttons under the display.
i Note: STSs are very
similar to Performances,
but they are fine-tuned
to the Style they are
associated to.
Quick Guide
i Note: You do not
need to select a Fill
before selecting a different Variation, but selecting a Fill makes the
transition
“smoother”
and more musical.
50
2
Selecting and playing Styles
The Pads
Play the keyboard.
Settings memorized in the selected STS have been
selected. Sounds, effects and other settings have been
recalled.
3
Try all the other STSs, and see how settings change with each of them.
i Hint: You may see
the name of the four
available STSs for the
current Style, by touching the STS Name tab.
The Pads
Each Style can assign different sounds or patterns to the four PADS. These sounds or patterns can be
played along with the Keyboard and Style tracks.
1
Press one of the four PADS.
2
If the selected PAD triggers an endless sound or pattern (i.e. an applause,
or a guitar arpeggio), pressing STOP will stop that sound.
3
Select a different Style, and see how the sounds or patterns assigned to
the PADS change.
You can even press more Pads at once, and play two or more sounds or patterns at the same
time. Pressing STOP stops them all at the same time. Keeping STOP pressed and pressing one of
the PAD buttons only stops that sound or pattern.
Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard
Balancing between the Keyboard and Style tracks may be useful, to gently fade them and adjust their
respective volume.
•
While the Style is playing, use the BALANCE slider (next to the MASTER
VOLUME slider) to balance between the Keyboard and Style volume.
i Hint: You can see
which sounds or patterns
are associated to the
four Pads for the current
Style, by touching the
Pad tab.
i Hint: You can open
the Pad Select window
to assign a different
sound or pattern to the
Pads, by pressing SHIFT +
one of the PADs.
Selecting and playing Styles
Adjusting volume of each single track
51
Adjusting volume of each single track
You can adjust the volume of each of the Style and Keyboard tracks, for example to soften the bass a
little, or to make the keyboard solo louder.
Use the Assignable Sliders (be sure the VOLUME LED is turned on) to
adjust each Keyboard track’s volume, as well as ‘grouped’ Style tracks.
In Normal view, all
Style tracks are seen
as three ‘grouped’
tracks.
To control the volume, the
VOLUME LED must be turned
on. If it is off, repeatedly press
the SLIDER MODE button to
change it. Please note that the
SLIDER MODE status is saved
with each Performance or STS.
The LED indicator
of “grouped” Style
tracks and Keyboard tracks turns
on.
2
To separately adjust each Style track, press the TRK. SEL. (TRACK SELECT)
button to change track’s view.
In Style view, all separate Style tracks are
shown, and can be
controlled using the
corresponding Assignable Sliders.
The LED indicator
of single Style
tracks turns on.
3
To return to Normal view, press the TRK. SEL. button again.
The LED on the TRK. SEL. button will turn off.
i Hint: As an alternative, you can change
each track’s volume, by
touching a track’s area
to select it, then using
the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the volume. Also, you can just
touch a track’s slider in
the display, then move
your finger up/down.
Quick Guide
1
52
Selecting and playing Styles
Turning Style tracks on/off
Turning Style tracks on/off
You may easily turn on or off any Style track while you are playing. For example, try muting all
accompaniment tracks, while drum and bass continue to play.
1
While the Style is playing, touch anywhere in the ACCOMP track’s channel strip to select the track (volume value highlighted), then touch it again
to set the track to Mute.
i Note: While in the
Normal view of the Style
Play mode, you can see
Style tracks grouped in
just three “complex”
tracks. To see each Style
track as individual tracks,
just press the TRACK
SELECT button.
Mute the ACCOMP
track. All accompaniment tracks will go
silent (apart from
Drum, Percussion and
Bass).
2
To set tracks back to the Play status, touch the Mute icon on the ACCOMP
track.
Set the ACCOMP
track to Play. All
accompaniment
tracks will return to
their original volumes.
3
To mute/unmute each single Style track, press TRACK SELECT to switch to
the Style Tracks view.
4
Press the TRACK SELECT button again to go back to the Normal view.
Adding harmony notes to your right-hand melody with the
ENSEMBLE function
Chords played with your left hand may be applied to the right-hand melody.
1
Press the SPLIT button to turn its LED on and split the keyboard.
The Ensemble function only works in Split mode.
i Hint: When moving
the slider of a muted
track, the track is automatically set to play
again.
Selecting and playing Styles
Adding harmony notes to your right-hand melody with the ENSEMBLE function
2
Press the ENSEMBLE button to turn its LED on.
3
Play chords with the left hand and single notes in the right hand.
53
Notice how the right hand is automatically harmonized,
according to the chords composed with your left hand.
To select a different harmonization style, keep the SHIFT button pressed,
and press the ENSEMBLE button to open the Ensemble page.
This is a fast ‘shortcut’ to recall this page. The longer would have been entering the Edit mode by
pressing the MENU button, then going to the Ensemble page.
While the Ensemble parameter is
selected, use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select one of the available
harmonization types.
IFT
SH
5
When the right harmonization type has been selected, press the EXIT button to go back to the main page.
While in an edit page, press
EXIT to go back to the main
page of the current operating
mode.
6
Press the ENSEMBLE button again to turn its LED off. The automatic harmonization will be turned off.
Quick Guide
4
54
Song Play
Selecting a Song to play
Song Play
Pa2X is equipped with two onboard players that can be run at the same time to mix between different
Songs. Pa2X can read Songs in Standard MIDI File (SMF), Karaoke™ (KAR) and MP3 format.
It may be of great interest to singers and guitar players to know that if a midifile or MP3 file contains
lyrics and chords, they can be seen in the display. Lyrics can also be seen on an external video monitor,
provided you have the (optional) VIF4 Video Interface installed.
The SONG PLAY button
Players controls
Selecting a Song to play
1
Press the SONG PLAY button to switch to the Song Play mode.
After pressing the SONG PLAY
button, the main page of the
Song Play mode appears.
2
Touch the Player 1 area to open the Song Select window.
i Hint: In Style Play
mode, you can pre-select
the Songs to be assigned
to both players. This
way, you will be ready to
start them, as soon as
you switch to Song Play
mode.
The Songs area of the
Style Play main page.
i Hint: As an alternative, you can open the
Song Select window by
pressing the SELECT button in the PLAYER 1 section on the control
panel.
Song Play
Selecting a Song to play
3
55
Scroll through the list and select the Song to play.
Use the scroll bar to see all Songs
in the list. Keep SHIFT pressed
and touch the Up/Down arrow
to scroll to the next/previous
alphabetic section. As an alternative, you can use the DIAL.
The selected Song is highlighted.
Touch a Song’s name to select it.
Touch the Select button to select the
highlighted Song, and assign it to
Player 1.
4
Use the Open and Close buttons
to browse through the folders.
Use the Sync P. (Synchronized Path)
button to see the selected Song again.
When the Song is selected, press the Select button to confirm your selection, and close the Song Select window.
Selected Song
After touching the Select button in the display, the main page of the Song Play mode
appears again.
Quick Guide
Use the Device pop-up menu to select
one of the available mass-storage
devices (SSD-U, hard drive…).
56
Song Play
Playing back a Song
Playing back a Song
Once a Song has been selected, it may be played back by the player.
1
Be sure the X-Fader is completely moved to the left (toward Player 1).
2
Press the
back.
(PLAY/STOP) button in the PLAYER 1 section to start play-
After pressing the
(PLAY/STOP) button, the
button’s LED turns on, and the measure counter
begins to show the current measure number.
3
Use the PLAYER 1 control section to control the Song’s playback.
Press the HOME button to
move the Song to measure 1.
Press the REWIND
button once to go to the beginning of the
current measure. Keep it pressed to go back
several measures.
4
Press the PLAY/STOP button to stop the Song
at the current position. Press it again to
resume playback.
Press the FAST
FORWARD button once to go to the beginning of the next measure. Keep it pressed to
go forward several measures.
When you want to stop the song and go back to the first measure, press
the
(HOME) button.
When the Song is
stopped, the LED on the
PLAY/STOP button goes
dark.
i Note: In any case, the
player will automatically
stop when the end of
the Song is reached.
Song Play
Changing tracks volume
57
Changing tracks volume
During playback, you may wish to change each track’s volume, to create a mix “on the fly”.
1
In Normal view, you can adjust each Keyboard track’s volume. Touch a
track and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change its volume
i Hint: As an alternative to using the TEMPO/
VALUE controls, hold the
track slider in the display, then move your finger up/down.
2
Press the TRACK SELECT button once to see tracks 1-8 (Track 1-8 view).
In Track 1-8 view, the first 8
tracks of the selected Song are
shown.
3
Press TRACK SELECT once again to see tracks 9-16 (Track 9-16 view).
In Track 9-16 view, the second
group of 8 tracks of the
selected Song are shown.
i Note: Changes to
Song tracks will not be
saved, and will be reset
each time you press the
(Home) button. They
may also be reset while
pressing the << (Rewind)
button. To save changes,
you must edit the Song
in Sequencer mode.
Quick Guide
Keyboard tracks
58
4
Song Play
Changing tracks volume
Press TRACK SELECT again, to return to the Normal view (Keyboard
tracks).
Keyboard tracks
5
Press the
6
While listening to the Song, switch from Normal view to Track 1-8 and
Track 9-16 view, to see which tracks are playing.
(PLAY/STOP) button to start the Song.
To see if a track is playing, look at its name, and see if it changes color.
•
Touch each track’s channel strip, to see each track’s detail in the Track
Info line.
Selected track
Assigned Sound. Touch it
to open the Sound Select
window.
Sound bank
Program Change
Song Play
Turning Song tracks on/off
•
59
Alternatively, you can see which type of Sound is assigned to each track
in the Sound area of the Track 1-8 and Track 9-16 views.
Sound Bank icons. Touch to open
the Sound Select window.
Turning Song tracks on/off
During playback, you may wish to mute one or more tracks, for example to sing along with the Song,
or play an instrumental part live on the keyboard.
Muting/unmuting Song tracks works exactly as with Style tracks. See “Turning Style tracks on/off ” on
page 52 for more information.
Soloing a track
Contrary to the above, you may want to make a single track play alone. This is called the Solo function.
1
While the Song is playing, keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch the
track you want to listen to in Solo mode.
2
To set all tracks back to the Play status, keep the SHIFT button pressed
again, and touch the track currently in Solo mode.
You can use the Solo function also in Style Play and Sequencer mode. The Solo command can
also be selected from the page menu.
i Note: These changes
will not be saved to the
Song. To save changes,
edit
the
Song
in
Sequencer mode.
Quick Guide
Octave Transpose
60
Song Play
Mixing two Songs
Mixing two Songs
You can select two Songs at the same time, and mix between them using the X-FADER slider.
1
Touch the Player 1 area to open the Song Select window and select the
Song to be played by Player 1. Touch Select to confirm.
2
Once a song is assigned to Player 1, touch the Player 2 area once to
select it, and a second time to open the Song Select window. Select a
Song to be assigned to Player 2, and touch Select to confirm.
3
Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press any of the two
STOP) buttons, to start both Players at the same time.
(PLAY/
T
HIF
S
4
During playback, move the X-Fader, to mix between the two Songs.
5
During playback, you may control each Player separately, by using the
dedicated Player controls.
6
Press the relevant
Player.
(PLAY/STOP) button to stop the corresponding
i Hint: You don’t need
to start both players at
the same time. You can
start the first Song –
then start the second
one when the first one is
near to the end. This
way, you can use the XFADER slider to gently
crossfade between the
end of one Song and the
beginning of the following one.
The SongBook
Selecting the desired entry from the Main List
61
The SongBook
One of the most powerful features of the Pa2X is the onboard music database, that allows you to organize your Styles and Songs (in SMF, KAR and MP3 format) for easy retrieving. Each entry of this
database may include the artist, title, genre, number, key, tempo, and meter (time signature) of a
specified song. When selecting one of the entries, the associated Style, Standard MIDI File or MP3 file
– as well as the Style Play or Song Play mode – is automatically recalled.
In addition to helping you organizing your shows, the SongBook allows you to associate up to four
Pads, and up to four STSs to each Standard MIDI File or MP3 file. This way, it is easy to recall a complete setup for Keyboard tracks, effects, and the Voice Processor, for realtime playing over a Standard
MIDI File or MP3 file.
You can add your own entries to the SongBook, as well as edit the existing ones. Korg has already supplied some hundred entries as standard. Furthermore, the SongBook allows you to create various custom lists, that may suit your different shows.
The SONGBOOK button
Selecting the desired entry from the Main List
A large database is already included with the instrument, and you can later customize it. You may
browse through this database in a variety of ways.
1
While you are in Style Play or Song Play mode, press the SONGBOOK
button to open the SongBook window.
Style, Standard MIDI File(s) or MP3 file(s) currently assigned to the arranger or player(s)
Use the scroll bar to see
all Songs in the list. Keep
SHIFT pressed and touch
the Up/Down arrow to
scroll to the next/previous alphabetic section.
As an alternative, you
can use the DIAL.
SongBook Main
List
Touch this checkbox to turn the
view filter on.
Touch this button
to edit the view
filter.
Adds the selected entry
to the Custom List (if
activated – see page 68).
Touch this button to
select the current entry
to play.
Quick Guide
Also, you can link a text file to a Standard MIDI File, MP3 file or to a Style, to read the Lyrics in the
display or in an external monitor, even if there are no Lyrics events in the midifile or MP3 file, or if
you prefer to play the song live with the help of the Styles.
62
2
The SongBook
Displaying Artist or Genre
Browse through the entries.
Icons in the Type column will help you identify the type of the entry. The Genre column is
shown by default, but you can switch to the Artist column (see “Displaying Artist or Genre”
below).
3
When the entry is visible in the display, select it and touch the Select button in the display.
After selecting an entry, the corresponding Style, SMF, KAR or MP3 file will be recalled, together
with the relevant operating mode (Style Play or Song Play). Up to four STSs will also be recalled.
Any TXT file associated with the entry can be seen in the Lyrics/STS page.
The selected Style, SMF, or KAR file, or MP3 is shown in the higher part of the screen.
Displaying Artist or Genre
For space matter, either the Genre or Artist column can be seen in the display. You cannot see both at
the same time.
1
Touch the page menu icon to open the page menu.
i Note: The Artist and
Key fields of all supplied
entries have been intentionally left empty.
2
Choose Show Artist (now Genre) to switch from Genre to Artist in the List
view. The Artist column will be shown.
3
Open the page menu again, and choose the Show Genre (now Artist)
item. The Genre column will be shown again.
The SongBook
Sorting entries
63
Sorting entries
You can change the order entries are shown in the display.
1
Touch the page menu icon to open the page menu.
Choose whether the list
must be seen in ascending
or descending order
2
Select one of the available sorting options.
The order of entries in the display changes, reflecting the selected sorting option.
•
As an alternative, you can change the sorting order by touching one of
the labels in a list of names.
Touch the Name label…
…to alphabetically order the names in
the list. Each time you touch the same
label, the order changes between
Ascending and Descending.
You can do the same by touching the Type, Name, Genre, Artist, Key, Number, Tempo or Meter
label.
•
Each time you touch the same label again, the order changes between
ascending and descending.
Quick Guide
Choose one of the sorting
options to change the list
view order. The selected
option will be shown in
red over the list of file.
64
The SongBook
Searching entries
Searching entries
The SongBook database may be really huge. You can, however, look for (say) specific artists or song
titles, using the filtering functions.
1
Touch the Filter button in the display, to open the Filter dialog box.
Available
search criteria.
“Genre” and
“Artist” are
both considered, even
though only
one of them
may be shown
in the List
2
Touch the
(Text Edit) button next to the search criteria (even more
than one) you want to enter.
For example, you may want to find all songs containing the word “love” in the title (in any position in the string). If so, select the ‘Name’ criterion, and enter the word ‘love’. Capitals are not
relevant for the search.
3
Touch OK in the display, and close the Text Edit dialog box. The entered
text is now the search criteria.
The SongBook
Searching entries
4
65
Touch OK to close the Filter dialog box and return to the SongBook page.
5
To see the whole SongBook database again, touch the Filtered check box
again, to make the check mark disappear.
Quick Guide
Once the Filter dialog box has been closed by touching OK, the Filtered check box is automatically checked, and the filter is activated. Only entries matching the entered criterion are seen in
the Main List.
66
The SongBook
Adding entries
Adding entries
You can add your own entries to the SongBook database.
1
Go to the Style Play or Song Play mode, depending on the type of entry
you want to add to the SongBook database.
2
Select the Style, Standard MIDI File or MP3 file to be added to the SongBook.
Assign the selected Song to Player 1. (Only Songs assigned to Player 1 will be saved in the SongBook entry. Songs assigned to Player 2 will not be saved).
3
Edit Keyboard and Style tracks as you prefer, by selecting different
Sounds and Effects, or editing any other parameter.
Please note that changes to a Standard MIDI File’s tracks will not be saved as SongBook data.
Data included in the Standard MIDI File will always be considered.
4
Select a different Voice Processor Preset, if you like.
5
When your entry is ready, press the SONGBOOK button, then the Book
Edit 1 tab to see the Book Edit 1 page.
Name of the Style, SMF, or KAR or MP3 file, memorized with the entry (provided “Write Current
Entry’s parameters
Resource” is selected when saving it).
Entry’s name
When checked, current settings for Style
tracks, or the path for the SMF, KAR or
MP3 file, are saved with the entry. If
unchecked, original Style track settings are
saved with the entry.
This parameter is mandatory when creating a new entry by touching the New Song
button.
Currently selected resource. If a
different Style, SMF, KAR or
MP3 file has been selected, it
may differ from the saved
resource (shown on top of the
page).
One of the four STS available
for each entry, where you can
save the current settings for
Keyboard tracks and the Voice
Processor.
When checked, you can save the current
Keyboard tracks and Voice Processor settings into one of the four STSs available
for each entry, or save all the current Style
STSs to the SongBook entry.
Touch New Song to
create a new entry.
Choose All Current Style STS to save the four
STSs (recalled by the latest selected Style)
with the new entry.
6
Touch the New Song button in the display to add a new item to the SongBook list.
7
Touch the
(Text Edit) button next to the field(s) you want to edit. Set
all other parameters.
You can write the genre, artist name, and name of the associated STS. Select a Tempo matching
the song’s tempo, and select the Meter (time signature) and Key of the song. You can also specify
a Master Transpose value, to be automatically selected when selecting the entry.
The SongBook
Adding entries
8
67
When done with this page, touch the tab to go to the Book Edit 2 page.
Name of the Style, SMF, KAR or MP3 file, memorized with the entry (provided “Write Current
Resource” is selected when saving it).
Entry’s name
Entry’s parameters
Entry’s number for
numeric selection
Text file linked to the entry.
This text will be seen as Lyrics
in the display (or in the external monitor, with the VIF4
option installed). See “Lyrics as
text files associated to a SongBook entry” on page 191.
Touch New Song to
create a new entry.
9
After having filled up all the desired fields (be as comprehensive as you
can), touch the Write button in the display to open the Write dialog box.
10
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to assign a name to the new entry, then
touch OK to save the entry to the SongBook database.
Entry’s name. By default it is the same name of the associated Standard MIDI File of MP3 file, or the associated Style. The name can be
up to 16 characters long.
Select Rename/Overwrite to overwrite an existing entry. Warning: the
older entry will be deleted!
Select New Song to add a new entry
to the SongBook database. This
option is automatically selected
when a new entry has been created
(by touching the New Song button
while in the Edit 1 page).
Quick Guide
Track from which to take notes to be
sent to the Voice Harmony.
68
The SongBook
Creating a Custom List
Creating a Custom List
You can create several Custom Lists in the SongBook, to make a set of entries suitable for your various
shows. Before starting a new Custom List, be sure you have added all needed entries to the SongBook
main database (see “Adding entries” above).
1
While in SongBook mode, open the page menu and check the ‘Enable List
Edit’ item.
After you check the
‘Enable List Edit’ item, the
List Edit page becomes
available.
2
Select a Custom List to be edited.
To edit an existing list, touch the Custom List tab to open the Custom List page, and select one of
the available Custom Lists. To create a new list, touch the List Edit tab to open the List Edit page,
and touch the New List button to create a new, blank list.
3
Touch the Book tab to open the Book page and see the full database. Use
the various sorting, searching and filtering options (seen above) to find
the entries you are looking for. Touch the Add to List button when the
desired entry has been selected.
Use the scroll bar to
see all Songs in the
list. Keep SHIFT
pressed and touch
the Up/Down arrow
to scroll to the next/
previous alphabetic
section. As an alternative, you can use
the DIAL.
SongBook list
Touch this checkbox to turn the
view filter on (if
any).
Touch this button to edit
the view filter.
Adds the highlighted entry to the
Custom List.
The SongBook
Creating a Custom List
4
69
When finished adding entries to the Custom List, touch the List Edit tab to
go to the List Edit page, and use the various commands to edit the list.
List name
Scrollbar
Select an entry on the
list to edit
Touch Write to save the
current Custom List.
5
Touch Del Song to
delete the selected
entry.
Touch New List to create a new Custom List.
Touch Del List to delete the current Custom
List. Warning: Del List will delete the current Custom List.
When the Custom List is ready, touch the Write button in the display to
save it to memory. Assign a new name to the Custom List.
Touch Symbol to
enter special charachters.
Use alphabetic
characters to
enter text.
Use the SHIFT button to switch
between capitals
and small characters.
Touch the ‘T’ symbol to open the Text Edit
dialog box.
Use the ‘<’ and ‘>’
buttons to move the
cursor.
Touch Clear to delete the
whole string, Delete to
delete just a single character.
When done, touch OK
to confirm the new
name, or Cancel to
abandon all changes.
Quick Guide
Use the vertical arrows
to move the selected
entry up or down in
the list.
70
The SongBook
Selecting and using a Custom List
Selecting and using a Custom List
After creating one or more Custom Lists, you can select one and use it for your show.
1
Touch the Custom List tab to select the Custom List page.
2
Use the List pop-up menu to select one of the available Custom Lists.
Entry in play. To select a
different one, highlight
it and touch the Select
button in the display.
Touch Select to set the
highlighted entry to play
(if different than the
one automatically
selected).
Use the List pop-up menu to
select one of the available Custom Lists.
3
Touch Next to select the next entry in the
list. (This command can also be assigned to
an Assignable Switch).
Select one of the entries in the list (it turns blue), then touch the Select button in the display to confirm selection (the selected entry turns green).
Press the PLAY button to start playing back the selected Song.
Selecting a SongBook STS
Up to four STSs can be associated to any SongBook entry. It doesn’t matter if it is based on a Style, a
Standard MIDI File or an MP3 file.
1
Touch the Lyrics/STS tab to open the Lyrics/STS page and see the four
STSs associated to the current SongBook entry.
STSs associated with
the current entry.
2
Select the desired STS by pressing the corresponding SINGLE TOUCH SETTING button on the control panel. As an alternative, touch its name in the
display.
The STS is selected. Keyboard tracks and Voice Processor settings may change.
Singing with a connected microphone
Connecting a microphone
71
Singing with a connected microphone
Pa2X is fitted with a powerful digital voice processor, based on technologies developed by TC Helicon,
including effects and three-part harmonization.
Microphone input volume control
Microphone input
Quick Guide
Microphone, Harmony and Effect switches
Connecting a microphone
To sing along with the Pa2X, you must first connect a suitable microphone to the MIC input (the one
that goes to the Voice Processor). Both dynamic and condenser microphones are directly supported.
Phantom power is available to condenser microphones.
1
Lower the Mic/In track volume by using the dedicated slider on the control panel.
i Note: Lowering the
Mic/In
track
volume
helps avoiding feedback.
Feedback is caused by
audio generated by the
Pa2X, returning to the
audio circuitry via the
microphone.
To control the Mic volume, the
VOLUME LED must be turned
on. If it is off, repeatedly press
the SLIDER MODE button to
change it. Please note that the
SLIDER MODE status is saved
with each Performance or STS.
2
Connect a microphone.
72
3
Singing with a connected microphone
Connecting a microphone
In case you are using a condenser microphone connected to the XLR MIC
input, press the GLOBAL button, choose the Audio Setup section, then go
to the Audio In page to see the microphone settings, and turn the phantom power on.
Touch this checkbox to
turn phantom power on
on the XLR MIC input,
and switch a condenser
microphone on.
4
Press the EXIT button to return to the main page of the Style Play or Song
Play mode.
5
Press the HARMONY and EFFECT buttons to turn their LED off, and deactivate the Voice Processor. Be sure the ON LED (Mic input) remains turned
on.
You can check the status of these buttons, and the Talk function, also in the Mic panel. Press the
EXIT button to go to the main page of the Style Play or Song Play mode, then select the Mic tab.
Mic panel. To test the
microphone level, be
sure the Mic Mute,
Effects and Talk buttons
are not pressed in.
Singing with a connected microphone
Connecting a microphone
6
73
Sing into the microphone, and adjust the input gain and the Microphone
volume, until you achieve the correct settings.
Adjust the input level by using the GAIN knob next to
the MIC input. Sing into the microphone, and watch
at the MIC IN LED on the control panel – it ought to
stay green. If it goes orange too often (or even red),
turn down the input gain; if it turns off too often,
increase the input gain. No hint of distortion should
be heard in the audio system when you sing.
i Note: You have a correct microphone volume
setting when the MIC IN
LED stays green most of
the time. The MIC/IN
slider must be set
accordingly, to compensate a too loud or weak
incoming signal.
7
Press the HARMONY and EFFECT buttons to turn their LED on, and activate the Voice Processor.
8
Try the ON button in the MIC SETTING section, to turn the whole microphone section on/off.
Look at the Mic Mute and Harmony Mute buttons in the display, while you use the MIC SETTING buttons o the control panel.
9
Touch the Volume tab to select the Volume panel.
While in this panel, you can use the Play/Mute button of the MIC/IN track in the display, to
mute/unmute the microphone section.
Microphone muted
10
Microphone set to
play
If you like, start a Style or Song. Adjust the microphone final volume
using the dedicated slider.
Quick Guide
While you adjust
the gain, gradually
increase the Microphone volume, by
using the corresponding slider.
74
11
Singing with a connected microphone
Applying harmony to your voice
Adjust the other settings, balancing the Style/Song and microphone with
the BALANCE slider and the MIC/IN slider.
The settings for the BALANCE and MIC/IN sliders are not saved in memory, so they stay consistent when selecting different Styles, Performances, Songs or Voice Processor settings.
Applying harmony to your voice
1
Be sure you are in Style Play mode, and select a Style you especially like.
2
Touch the Mic tab to show the Microphone panel, and select one of the
available Voice Processor Presets.
i Note: By default, Preset #1 is a solo voice; Preset #2 contains a threevoice harmony.
Voice Processor Presets are settings for the various Voice Processor modules (Effects, Harmony).
By selecting a Preset, all processing parameters may change.
A Voice Processor Preset is assigned to each Performance or STS. When selecting a different Performance or STS, the Voice Processor Preset may change (depending on the Mic panel lock status), changing the type of processing applied to your voice.
Mic panel lock
Use this pop-up menu
to select a Voice Processor Preset.
3
If you like, start the Style.
4
Be sure the HARMONY LED is turned on on the control panel.
5
Play some chords, to let the Voice Processor create new voices with them.
6
Sing along with the chords and melody you play on the keyboard.
7
If it is playing, stop the Style.
i Note: By default, the
first Performance and
STS have the harmony
effect turned off, to
avoid any unwanted
processing from being
applied to the microphone. When you select
a Preset you like, you can
save it to a Performance
or STS (see “Saving your
settings to a Performance” on page 43)
Singing with a connected microphone
Soloing your voice (TalkBack)
75
Soloing your voice (TalkBack)
1
While in the main page of the Style Play or Song Play mode, touch the
Mic tab to see Voice Processor’s settings.
2
During playback, touch the Talk button, making it appear depressed.
3
Sing or talk into the microphone.
You’ll hear background music has been made softer, while your voice will be heard loud and
proud. The effects have probably changed, too.
4
To turn the TalkBack function off, touch the Talk button again, making it
appear relieved.
The background music returns to the original volume.
Locking Voice Processor settings
If you like the selected Voice Processor Preset, and other settings you have made in the Microphone
panel, you can “lock” them, to prevent them from changing each time you select a Performance, Style
or STS that may be saved using different settings.
1
While the Microphone panel is shown in the display, touch the lock icon
to freeze it.
Lock on. Voice Processor settings will
not change when
selecting a different
Performance or STS.
2
To unlock the settings, touch the lock icon again.
Lock off. Voice Processor settings will
change when selecting a new Performance or STS.
Quick Guide
Sometimes, during a live show, you might like to talk to your audience. Use the TalkBack function to
attenuate the music, and let your voice pass through clean and clear.
76
Recording a new Song
Entering Backing Sequence (Quick Record) mode
Recording a new Song
There are several ways to create a Song on the Pa2X. The easiest and fastest is to use the Styles to
record what you are playing in realtime on the keyboard, while the arranger gives you the accompaniment tracks.
Style Select section SEQUENCER button
Style Elements
Style Controls
Player 1 controls
Entering Backing Sequence (Quick Record) mode
1
Press the SEQUENCER button to switch to the Sequencer mode.
After pressing the SEQUENCER
button, the main page of the
Sequencer mode appears.
2
Press the RECORD button to open the Song Record Mode Select dialog
box.
Press the RECORD button, to
open the Song Record Mode
Select dialog box
Recording a new Song
Preparing to record
3
77
Select the Backing Sequence (Quick Record) option and touch OK to enter
the Backing Sequence Record mode.
Quick Guide
After choosing the Backing Sequence
(Quick Record) option, the Backing
Sequence Record page appears.
Preparing to record
When you enter Backing Sequence Record, the most recently used Style is already selected, and all
tracks are ready to record. You could simply start recording as if you were playing in realtime with the
Styles. However, there are some settings that you may wish to edit.
•
If you like, adjust any editable parameter in the display.
Touch the Style
parameter (or one the
STYLE buttons) to
open the Style Select
window, and select a
different Style (as seen
on page 46).
Track(s) status. ‘Rec’ means they are ready
to record. ‘Play’ means they are recorded
and you can hear them. ‘Mute’ means they
cannot be heard.
Measure counter. Negative numbers (-2, -1)
are the precount,
after which you can
start recording.
Style’s Tempo. Change
it, if you like.
Style’s Meter (time signature). You cannot
change it.
Grouped tracks. During Quick Record, you cannot
access each separate Song track. For ease of use,
just two ‘master’ tracks are provided: Kbd/Pad (Keyboard/Pads) and Ch/Acc (Chord/Accompaniment).
Touch the Perf/STS
parameter to open
the Performance
Select window, and
select a different Performance (as seen on
page 42). As an alternative, you use the
PERFORMANCE/
SOUND or STS buttons.
78
Recording a new Song
Recording
Recording
1
Select the Style Element you wish to use before starting to play.
Select one of the Intros to start with an introduction. Select any of the Variations before starting
to record.
2
Start recording, by pressing the START/STOP button.
i Note: If you do not
wish to start the Song
with the Style playing,
you can simply start
recording by pressing
3
Play as if you were performing live with the Styles.
During recording, select any Style Element (Intro, Variation, Fill, Ending…) you like. You can
also press START/STOP to stop the Style, and press it again to start the Style up again!
Please remember that, while recording in Backing Sequence Record mode, you cannot use the
SYNCHRO, TAP TEMPO/RESET, BALANCE controls.
4
When finished recording your Song, press the
(PLAY/STOP) button in
the PLAYER 1 section to exit recording, and return to the main page of the
Sequencer mode.
After pressing the PLAY/STOP button, the
main page of the Sequencer mode appears
again.
5
While in the main page of the Sequencer mode, press the
(PLAY/
STOP) button in the PLAYER 1 section to listen to the recorded Song.
The Backing Sequence Song has been converted to an ordinary Song. If you like it, you can save
it to disk, and read it in Song Play mode, or with any external sequencer.
6
To edit the Song, press MENU to enter the Edit mode (see instructions
starting from page 205).
the
PLAY/STOP
button in the PLAYER 1
section, and start the
Style only later. The Style
will start at the next
beginning of the measure.
Recording a new Song
Second-take recording (Overdubbing)
79
Second-take recording (Overdubbing)
1
Press the RECORD button to enter Record again. When the Song Record
Mode Select dialog box appears, select Backing Sequence (Quick Record)
again.
2
If you are recording just one of the “grouped” tracks, set the track to be
preserved to the Play mode.
3
Repeat the recording process, and press the
(PLAY/STOP) button in
the PLAYER 1 section to stop recording and to return to the main page of
the Sequencer mode.
4
While in the main page of the Sequencer mode, press the
(PLAY/
STOP) button in the PLAYER 1 section to listen to the recorded Song.
Again, the Backing Sequence Song has been converted to an ordinary Song.
Saving a Song to disk
After recording a Song that you like, it is a good idea to save it to disk, to avoid losing it when the
instrument is turned off.
1
While in the main page of the Sequencer mode, touch the page menu
icon to open the page menu.
Quick Guide
You may wish to re-record, and add one of the two “grouped” tracks, or overwrite a bad recording
with a new one. Usually, you will record all chord and Style Element changes during the first take, and
record Keyboard tracks and Pads during the second take.
80
2
Recording a new Song
Saving a Song to disk
Select the Save song command to open the Save Song window.
After you select the Save
song command, the Save
Song page appears.
3
Select a device and folder where you want to save your Song.
Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in
the list. Keep SHIFT pressed and
touch the Up/Down arrow to scroll
to the next/previous alphabetic section. As an alternative, you can use
the DIAL.
If a Song is selected (highlighted) it will be overwritten. If
no Song is selected, a new Song
file will be created on the target
device.
To deselect a selected Song,
touch anywhere else in the Song
list, or select the same storage
device again.
Use the Device pop-up menu to select
one of the available storage devices
(SSD-U, hard drive…).
4
Touch the Save button to save the
Song to the current folder.
Use the Open and Close buttons
to browse through the folders.
Touch the Save button in the display to open the Save Song dialog box.
Touch the Text Edit
icon to edit the
Song’s name.
5
Touch OK in the display to save the Song to disk, or Cancel to stop the
Save operation.
In case you prefer to exit
this page without saving
the Song, press the EXIT
button.
Reference
82
Selecting elements
Sound Select window
Selecting elements
The following windows are shown in the various operating
modes, whenever you try to select a Sound, Performance, Style
or Song.
Sounds
Sound Select window
Program Change
Touch the Sound area whereas it appears in the display, or one of
the SOUND SELECT buttons on the control panel (provided the
SOUND SELECT LED is lit), to open the Sound Select window.
Use the SOUND SELECT buttons to go directly to the selected
bank.
Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous
page without selecting any Sound.
Bank sets
Side tabs (banks)
Touch one of these buttons in the display to select a Sound.
Unless the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on, the window automatically closes short after you select a Sound.
Program Change number. Shown only when the “Show Program
Change number” parameter is turned on in Global mode. (See
page 225).
Performance Select window
Touch the Performance area whereas it appears in the display, or
one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons on the control
panel (provided the PERFORMANCE SELECT LED is lit), to
open the Performance Select window. Use the PERFORMANCE
SELECT buttons to go directly to the selected bank.
Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous
page without selecting any Performance.
Bank sets
Side tabs (banks)
Sounds
Lower tabs (pages)
If more than four pages are
available, the Previous/Next tabs
are shown in this area
Note: Depending on the status of the “Auto Performance/Sound
Select” parameter (see page 225), a Sound may be immediately
selected when pressing one of the SOUND SELECT buttons. The
latest selected Sound for that bank will be selected.
Bank sets
Selected set of banks (top or bottom row of Factory Styles, User
banks).
Side tabs (banks)
Use these tabs to select a bank of Sounds. Each tab corresponds
to one of the SOUND SELECT buttons on the control panel.
Lower tabs (pages)
Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected
bank.
If you press again the same PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT
button on the control panel, the next page in the same bank is
selected. This way, you do not need to touch one of the corresponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page.
Performances
Lower tabs (pages)
Note: Depending on the status of the “Auto Performance/Sound
Select” parameter (see page 225), a Performance may be immediately selected when pressing one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT
buttons. The latest selected Performance for that bank will be
selected.
Bank sets
Selected set of banks (top or bottom row of Performances).
Side tabs (banks)
Use these tabs to select a bank of Performance. Each tab corresponds to one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons on the
control panel.
Lower tabs (pages)
Previous/Next tabs
Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected
bank.
Scroll the lower tabs to the left or the right, when additional tabs
are available but cannot be seen in the display.
If you press again the same PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT
button on the control panel, the next page in the same bank is
Selecting elements
Style Select window
selected. This way, you do not need to touch one of the corresponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page.
Performances
Touch one of these buttons in the display to select a Performance. Unless the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on, the window automatically closes short after you select a Performance.
Style Select window
Touch the Style area whereas it appears in the display, or one of
the STYLE buttons on the control panel, to open the Style Select
window. Use the STYLE buttons to go directly to the selected
bank.
Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous
page without selecting any Style.
Bank sets
83
After selecting a Style from this window, and another Style is
playing, the name of the new Style name begins to flash, meaning it is ready to start playing at the beginning of the next measure.
Style Select page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
Rename Favorite Bank
Choose this command from the page menu, and assign the
Favorite Style banks any name you like.
Side tabs (banks)
The assigned name can be spanned over two lines, by separating
them with the paragraph character (¶). For example, to write
“World Music” on two lines, enter “World¶Music”.
Be careful not to write words exceeding the width of the side tabs
of the Style Select window.
Styles
Note: Depending on the status of the “Auto Style Select” parameter
(see page 225), a Style may be immediately selected when pressing
one of the STYLE SELECT buttons. The latest selected Style for that
bank will be selected.
Bank sets
Selected set of banks (top or bottom row, or Factory Styles).
Pad Select window
Touch the Pad area whereas it appears in the display, to open the
Pad Select window.
Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous
page without selecting any Pad.
Bank sets
Side tabs (banks)
Side tabs (banks)
Use these tabs to select a bank of Styles. Each tab corresponds to
one of the STYLE buttons on the control panel.
Lower tabs (pages)
Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected
bank.
If you press again the same STYLE SELECT button on the control panel, the next page in the same bank is selected. This way,
you do not need to touch one of the corresponding tabs in the
display in order to select a different page.
Styles
Touch one of these buttons in the display to select a Style. Unless
the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on, the window automatically closes short after you select a Style.
Lower tabs (pages)
Pads
Reference
Lower tabs (pages)
84
Selecting elements
STS Select
Bank sets
Selected set of banks, corresponding to different types of Pads.
Hit are single-note, pre-programmed factory Pads. Sequence are
sequence-based, pre-programmed factory Pads. User can be
either single-note or sequence-based Pads, and can be userrecorded or modified.
Side tabs (banks)
Use these tabs to select a bank of Pads.
Song Select window
This page appears when you touch one of the Song areas in the
display, or one of the SELECT buttons in one of the PLAYER sections on the control panel.
Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the main page
of the Song Play operating mode without selecting a Song.
Page menu
icon
Directory
Lower tabs (pages)
Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected
bank.
Pad
Touch one of these buttons in the display to select a Pad. Unless
the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on, the window automatically closes short after you select a Pad.
STS Select
Storage device
Use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING button on the control
panel, to select one of the four STS associated with the current
Style or the selected SongBook entry.
Touch the STS name tab in the main page of the Style Play or
Song Play mode, or the Lyrics/STS tab in the SongBook mode, to
see the name of the available STSs.
•
In Style Play and Song Play mode:
Song path
While in this page, select a Standard MIDI File, Karaoke or MP3
file for the selected Player. A Jukebox file may only be assigned to
Player 1.
Note: There is a separate working directory for each onboard
player.
Directory
This is the list of the selected device’s content.
File status
•
File size
Scrollbar
In SongBook mode:
Type of the
file or folder
File or folder
name
Modification
date
Use the scrollbar to scroll the list items.
As an alternative, you can use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to
scroll.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and touch one of the arrows, to
jump to the previous or next alphabetical section.
You can touch one of the labels on top of the list, to reorder the
list items accordingly. By touching the label again, the order of
the files switches between ascending and descending.
Selecting elements
Song Select window
A list can contain several different types of files or folders.
Type icon
File/folder type
Standard MIDI File (SMF)
85
Sync P. (Synchronized Path)
Touch this button to see the Song assigned to the selected Player.
This is useful to quickly return to it, after you have browsed
through long directories and “dug” into different folders.
Select
Karaoke file (KAR)
Selects the highlighted item in the display. If a Song is already
playing, it stops, and the new Song is ready to play. You are
returned to the main page.
MPEG Layer 3 (MP3)
Search
Jukebox file (JBX)
Folder
The Search function allows for searching a Song file in the various media. See “Searching files” on page 250 for more information.
Play All
Status icon
File/folder status
Protected
–
Unprotected
Page menu icon
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. See “Song Select
page menu” on page 86 for more information.
Storage device
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available storage
devices.
Device
Type
SSD-U
User area of the internal SSD memory
HD
Hard disk
USB-F
Device connected to the front USB Host port
USB-R
Device connected to the rear USB Host port
The actual name (label) of the device may appear within square
brackets ([]).
Song path
This line shows the current device path.
Open
Opens the selected folder (item whose icon looks like this one:
).
Close
Closes the current folder, returning to the parent (“upper”)
folder.
You can use this Jukebox list as any other list of this type (i.e.,
start the playback with SEQ1 PLAY/STOP, jump to the next Song
in the list with SHIFT + >>, edit it in the Jukebox page…).
Note: A Jukebox list can include up to 127 Songs. If your folder contains more items, only the first 127 will be considered.
Hint: If you don’t want to lose the list when turning the instrument
off, go to the Jukebox page and save it to disk as a “.JBX” file.
Selecting a Song by its ID number
Each Song in a folder on a device (up to 9,999) has a progressive
ID number assigned. When the “Show Song Number” option is
selected in the Song Select page menu (see below), you can see
this number before the Song’s name in the Song Select window.
You can use this number to select the Song by composing the
corresponding number, speeding up the Song retrieval when you
are using an hard disk filled with midifiles.
While in the Song Select window, press the SELECT button to
open the keypad, and enter the number corresponding to the
Song to be selected.
While in any page of the Song Play mode, press the SELECT button twice to open the keypad.
Note: If no Song corresponds to the dialed number, the “Song not
available” message will appear.
Warning: While the directory may contain more than 9999 files,
you can’t select Songs outside the 0001-9999 range when using the
numeric keypad.
Reference
A file or folder may be in one of the following status. (See “Protect” and “Unprotect” on page 266 for information on how to
change the file status).
When this button is touched, all midifiles and MP3 files contained in the current directory are added to a new Jukebox list,
that is automatically assigned to Player 1. The order in which
they are played depends on the current sorting method, i.e., how
the files are shown in the display.
86
Selecting elements
Song Select window
Song Select page menu
Show Song Number
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
Check this option to make the Song’s progressive ID number
appear in the list, next to each Song.
Show Song Extension
Check this option to make the file extension (“*.mid”, “*.kar”,
“*.jbx”, “*.mp3”) appear in the list, at the end of each Song’s
name.
Create New Folder
Export Song List
This command lets you create a new generic folder in the root of
any device, or inside any other generic folder. You can’t create a
“.SET” folder with this command, since this type of folder is
reserved to the Save operations (and can be created with the New
SET button in any Save page).
Select this command to save the current list as a text file to the
SSD-U memory or the internal hard disk. This way, you will be
able to print a list of Songs, to see which number matches each
Song.
1.
While in the Song Select window, select the folder whose
Song list you wish to save as a text file.
2.
Select the Export Song List command from the page menu.
3.
A dialog box will appear, asking you to select either the
SSD-U memory or the hard disk.
By touching the
(Text Edit) button you can open the Text
Edit window. Enter the name, then touch OK to confirm and
close the Text Edit window.
Rename
Available only when an item is selected in a list.
Use this function to change the name of an existing file or folder.
You cannot change the 3-character extension of files and “.SET”
folders, since they are used to identify the type of file or folder.
4.
Select an option, and touch OK to confirm.
Note: The text file will contain a list of “*.mid”, “*.kar”, “.mp3” and
“*.jbx” files only. Folders and different kinds of files will not be
included.
When saved, the text file will be named after the selected folder. For
example, a folder named “Dummy” will generate a “Dummy.txt”
file. If a file with the same name already exists in the target, it will
be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation. A file containing the list of all valid files contained into the root of the disk
will generate a “Root.txt” file.
The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song,
file names, the total number of files in the list.
For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal computer, use a fixed size (i.e., non-proportional) character in your text
editor.
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit window.
Enter the new name, then touch OK to confirm and close the
Text Edit window.
Erase
Use this command to delete the selected file or folder.
Style Play operating mode
Start-up settings
87
Style Play operating mode
The Style Play mode is the boot-up operating mode. When in
this mode, you can play with Styles (i.e. automatic accompaniments), while playing with one to four tracks (Upper 1-3 and
Lower) on the keyboard. You can select different Sounds and
Effects by selecting Performances and STSs. A different Voice
Processor Preset may be selected by a Performance or STS. You
can also use the SongBook to automatically select Styles for a
desired music genre.
Master Volume and Balance
While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the general volume
of the instrument, you can use the BALANCE slider to balance
the Style Accompaniment and Pad tracks against the Keyboard
tracks.
Style Play mode can also be used in Easy Mode (see page 26).
Start-up settings
Overall instrument’s volume
Balance of Style and
Pad tracks against
RealTime (Keyboard) tracks
Since Performance 1 of Bank 1 (Performance 1-1) is automatically selected when turning the instrument on, you can save to it
your preferred start-up settings.
Note: As an alternative, the BALANCE slider can also work as a
volume control. See “Balance Slider” on page 225.
Factory, User and Favorite Styles
Note: If you like some settings to be preserved even when choosing
different Performances, STSs and Styles, turn on the desired “locks”
to avoid changes to the selected parameters (see “General Controls:
Lock” on page 222). Save these locks to the Global (see “Write Global - Global Setup dialog box” on page 237).
There are three different types of Style locations:
•
How Styles, Performances and STSs are
linked together
Factory Style banks (from “8/16 Beat” to “Contemporary”,
i.e., from BANK01.STY to BANK17.STY) are the preloaded
Styles, that you can’t usually edit (unless you don’t want to
do so, by turning the protection off, see “Factory Style and
Pad Protect” on page 264).
•
User Style banks (from “User 1” to “User 3”, i.e., from
USER01.STY to USER03.STY) are Styles loaded from an
external device, created or edited by yourself (the User).
These are banks conceived as a ‘workbench’ – a place where
to manage Styles and banks before saving them to a final
location. See the “Style Record mode” chapter on page 114
for information on how to edit or create Styles.
•
Favorite Style banks (by default, from “Favorite 1” to
“Favorite 10”, i.e., from FAVORITE01.STY to
FAVORITE10.STY) are similar to User Styles, but you can
rename the tabs in the Style Select window to create places
for custom banks, or for additional music genres that are
not already included among the supplied banks. See “The
Favorite banks” on page 113 for information on how to
manage these Styles.
Styles, Performances and STSs are linked in many ways.
• When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is steadily on or blinking,
selecting a Style also changes Keyboard tracks (STS 1 is automatically selected). Performance settings are overridden.
• When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on, selecting a Performance
also selects a Style (the one memorized with the Performance).
• Current track settings can be saved either in a Performance, an
STS, or a Style Performance, depending on the page menu command you select.
Reference
Select the Sounds, Effects, Voice Processor Preset, and other settings you would like to see automatically selected when turning
the instrument on. Then select the “Write Performance” command from the page menu. When the Write Performance window appears, save the settings to Performance 1 of Bank 1. (See
“Write Performance dialog box” on page 112).
88
Style Play operating mode
Main page (Normal view)
Page menu icon
Main page (Normal view)
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. See “Page menu”
on page 111 for more information.
This is the page you see after you turn the instrument on.
To access this page from another operating mode, press the
STYLE PLAY button.
To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit pages, press
the EXIT button.
Style area
Page header
Style area
This is where the Style name is shown, together with its tempo
and meter (time signature) parameters.
Page menu icon
Style name
Current
beat
Player 1/
2 area
Keyboard
tracks
area
Style bank
Style Element meter
Performance/
STS area
Current
tempo
Measure number
Style name
Panels
To switch between Normal view (Keyboard tracks, grouped
Style tracks and Mic/In controls) and Style view (individual
Style tracks), use the TRACK SELECT button. (See “Style
Tracks view page” and “Volume panel” starting from page 90).
Currently selected Style. Touch the Style name to open the Style
Select window. As an alternative, use the STYLE SELECT section
on the control panel.
Style bank
Bank the current Style belongs to.
Style Element meter
Page header
Meter (time signature) of the current Style Element.
This line shows the current operating mode, transposition and
recognized chord.
Measure number
Operating mode
name
Master Transpose
(in semitones)
While the Style is playing, an ‘M’ appears, and it shows the current measure number of the current Style Element playing.
While it is in stop, an ‘L’ appears, and it shows the length (total
number of measures) of the current Style Element.
Recognized
chord
Current beat
Operating mode name
Beat number of the current measure, that is currently playing.
Name of the current operating mode.
Master transpose
Sty
Master transpose value in semitones. This value can be changed
using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
Note: Transpose may be automatically changed when selecting a
different Performance or Style. It may also be changed when loading a Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg
Pa series.
To avoid transposing, the Master Transpose is “locked” by default.
If you want to lock or unlock it, change the Master Transpose Lock
parameter’s status (see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222),
then write the Global to memory (see “Write Global - Global Setup
dialog box” on page 237).
Recognized chord
Displays the recognized chord, when you play a chord on the
keyboard. If no chord abbreviation is shown, no chord recognition mode has been selected by using the CHORD SCANNING
buttons (see page 11).
Current tempo
Sty
Metronome tempo (from 30 to 250). Select this parameter and
use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the tempo.
As an alternative, you don’t need to select this parameter; just
keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the
tempo. Also, you can touch the Tempo field and drag it with
your finger.
To recall the Tempo stored in the current Style, press the
DOWN/- and UP/+ buttons at the same time.
Note: Tempo may change while a Style Element is playing. Each
Style Element may contain Tempo Change data.
Style Play operating mode
Main page (Normal view)
Player 1/2 area
Keyboard tracks area
This is where Songs assigned to the two onboard players are
shown.
This is where Keyboard tracks are shown.
Sound
name
89
Track name
Sound
bank’s icon
Song name
Song name
Name of Songs assigned to Player 1 (P1) and Player 2 (P2). You
can select Songs while playing Styles, to have them ready when
switching to Song Play mode.
Track status
Track’s octave transpose
The icon shows the type of the selected Song.
MPEG Layer-3 format, or MP3 (file extension:
*.MP3). This is a compressed audio file, that may
be generated on any personal computer, or on the
Pa2X itself.
Only assignable to Player 1. A Jukebox file (file
extension: *.JBX) can be assigned to Player 1, but
its name is not shown in this area. The JBX icon
appears, together with the name of the currently
selected Song in the Jukebox list.
Performance/STS area
This is where the latest selected Performance or STS name is
shown.
Selected Performance
or STS
Selected Performance or STS
This is the latest selected Performance (PERF) or Single Touch
Setting (STS).
Touch the name to open the Performance Select window (see
“Performance Select window” on page 82). As an alternative, use
the PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT section to select a different Performance.
To select a different STS, use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons under the display.
Sound name
Name of the Sound assigned to the corresponding Keyboard
track.
• If the track is already selected (white background), touch the
Sound name to open the Sound Select window.
• If the track is not selected (dark background), first select it,
then touch the Sound name to open the Sound Select window.
For more information about the Sound Select window, see
“Sound Select window” on page 82.
Keyboard track octave transpose
Non editable. Octave transpose of the corresponding track. To
individually edit the octave transpose for each track, go to the
“Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” edit page (see page 99).
You can also transpose all Upper tracks by using the UPPER
OCTAVE buttons on the control panel.
Bass & Lower Backing icon
Sty
When the Bass & Lower Backing function is
active, the Backing icon appears in the Lower
track Sound area (see “Bass & Lower Backing” on page 110).
Keyboard track name
Non editable. Name of the corresponding track:
Abbreviation
Track
Hand
UP1
Upper 1
Right hand
UP2
Upper 2
UP3
Upper 3
LOW
Lower
Left hand
Sound bank’s icon
This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to.
Keyboard track status
Play/mute status of the current track. Select the track, then
touch this area to change the track status.
No icon
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Reference
Standard MIDI File, often abbreviated as SMF
(file extension: *.MID or *.KAR).
90
Style Play operating mode
Style Tracks view page
Panels
Off
The lower half of the main page contains the various panels, you
can select by touching the corresponding tabs. See more information in the relevant sections, starting from page 91.
You can assign different Sounds to each Style
track, and save them in a Performance or Style
Performance. The selected Sounds are the same
for all Style Elements (there are no different
Sounds for each Style element).
Volume panel
Selected Track Info area
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track. It
appears both in the main page, and in several edit pages.
Track name
Sound bank
Sound name
Tabs
Program Change
Track name
Name of the selected track.
Style Tracks view page
Sound name
Press the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Normal
view to the Style Tracks view. In this view, individual Style tracks
are shown in the lower half of the display, while the upper half of
the main page changes, to show parameters for the Style tracks.
Sty
Sound assigned to the selected track. Touch anywhere in this
area to open the Sound Select window, and select a different
Sound.
Sound bank
Sty
Bank of the selected Sound.
Selected track
info area
Program Change
Sounds area
Program Change number sequence (Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB, Program Change).
Sty
Sounds area
Press TRACK SELECT again to return to the Normal view (Keyboard tracks, grouped Style tracks, Mic/In controls).
Original Style Sounds
Style track’s octave transpose icon
Sty
This parameter lets you assign different Sounds to the Style
tracks, overriding the Sounds recorded into each Style Element
pattern. These Sounds can be saved into a Performance or Style
Performance with the “Write Performance” or “Write Current
Style Performance” commands (see page 111).
Assigned Sounds, with this parameter turned on, are shown in
the Sounds area of this page.
Note: When assigning a Sound to a Style track, the “Original Style
Sounds” parameter is automatically turned off.
Note: This parameter can be saved with the Performance or Style
Performance, and is automatically set to On or Off when you select
a different Performance or Style, depending on the saved status.
On
This area lets you see the Sound’s family and bank, and octave
transposition for the eight Style tracks.
Style tracks always use the original Sounds
recorded in each Style Element. If you assign a
different Sound to a Style track, this parameter is
automatically set to Off.
Sound bank’s icon
Style track’s octave transpose icon
Sty
Non editable. Octave transpose of the corresponding track. To
change the octave transpose, use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons,
or go to the “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” edit page (see page 99).
Sound bank’s icon
This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to.
Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track
(detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area,
see above). Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select window.
Style Play operating mode
Volume panel
91
Style tracks). The Assignable Sliders LEDs show which view is
currently selected:
Volume panel
Volume LED
Touch the Volume tab to select this panel. This is where you can
set the volume of each track, and mute/unmute tracks.
Note: The volume of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance or STS, while the Style tracks volume may be memorized to
the Style Performance.
Sliders and volume of the tracks
Sty
You can change the volume of each track by using the first eight
Assignable Sliders in the control panel. To make them act as volume controls, be sure the VOLUME LED over the SLIDER
MODE button is lit:
Assignable Sliders LEDs
The Normal view shows grouped Style tracks, Mic/In controls,
Keyboard tracks:
Assignable sliders
The Assignable Sliders correspond to the ‘virtual sliders’ in the
display. These are a graphical representation of each track’s volume.
The Style Tracks view shows the separate Style tracks:
Reference
Virtual sliders
You can change the volume also by touching a track, and using
the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or by touching a track and dragging it in the display.
Hint: You can change the volume of all Keyboard or Style tracks at
once by using the Assignable Sliders. Select a track of the same type
of the tracks whose volume you want to change (e.g., the Upper 1
track to modify all Keyboard tracks). Then keep the SHIFT button
pressed, and move one of the Assignable Sliders. See “ASSIGNABLE
SLIDER” on page 6.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between
the Normal (grouped Style tracks, Mic/In controls,
Keyboard tracks) and Style Tracks view (separate
Here you can change the volume of each individual Style track.
This mix is saved into each Style Performance and Performance,
and can change when choosing a different Style.
92
Style Play operating mode
Volume panel
Grouped Style tracks
VPp
These special sliders of the Normal view control several Style
tracks at the same time.
Changing the volume of the grouped Style tracks (Dr/Perc,
Accomp, Bass) is a global offset. When you choose a different
Style, this offset does not change, and the average volume of the
Style tracks remains the same.
Saving the track’s status
• The status of Keyboard tracks can be saved to a Performance or
STS, and can be changed when choosing a different Performance
or STS (see “Write Performance” on page 111 and “Write Single
Touch Setting” on page 111).
• The status of the separate Style tracks can be saved to a Style
Performance (see “Write Current Style Performance” on
page 111).
• The status of the grouped Style tracks can be saved to the Global-Style Play Setup (see “Write Global-Style Setup” on
page 111).
Track names
Grouped Style Tracks
These controls allows you to globally set the balance between the
Drum/Percussion, Bass and Accompaniment tracks. For example, if you prefer Drums and Bass to be prominent to make them
have more ‘punch’, you can lower the grouped Accompaniment
tracks.
Changes are not memorized to a Performance or Style Performance. They can be memorized to the Global-Style Play Setup,
i.e., the preferences of the Style Play mode (see “Write GlobalStyle Setup” on page 111).
Slider Mode button status
The function assigned to the Assignable Sliders depends on the
status of the SLIDER MODE button. Note that this may change
when selecting a different Performance or STS.
For details about the various Slider Modes, see “SLIDER
MODE” on page 7.
Track status icons
Sty
Play/mute status of the current track. Select the track, then
touch this area to change its status.
Track status icons
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Under the sliders, a label for each track is shown. Use the
TRACK SELECT button to switch between the various track
views.
Track
Description
Normal View
DR/PERC (*)
Grouped Drum and Percussion tracks.
ACCOMP (*)
Grouped Accompaniment tracks.
BASS (*)
Grouped Bass Style track.
MIC/IN
Microphone (Voice Processor). Sources
connected to the Left and Right Audio
Inputs are not controlled by this slider.
LOWER
Lower track.
UPPER1…3
Upper tracks.
Style Tracks View
DRUM
Drum Style track.
PERC
Percussion Style track.
BASS
Bass Style track.
ACC1…5
Accompaniment Style tracks.
(*).Volume for these grouped tracks is a global offset and can be
memorized when choosing the “Write Global-Style Setup” command
form the page menu.
Style Play operating mode
Lyrics panel
93
Options side tab
Lyrics panel
Lyrics can be associated to a Styles as a “.TXT” file. When in this
panel, you can see:
Options for the Lyrics page are the same as in Song Play mode.
The Options pane preferences are saved into the Song Play
Setup, not in the Style Setup. See “Write Global-Song Play
Setup” on page 180 for more information.
• lyrics contained in a “.TXT” file linked to the latest-selected
Style-based SongBook entry (see “Linked .TXT” on page 188).
On-the-fly TXT loading
• lyrics contained in a “.TXT” file loaded after selecting a Style
(see “On-the-fly TXT loading” below).
Note: You cannot access Markers or the Score while you are in Style
Play mode.
When a SongBook entry does not contain a link to a “.TXT” file,
the “No lyrics. Press SHIFT and touch here to load a TXT file”
message appears in the display when you go to the Lyrics page.
Style Lyrics side tab
This panel shows the lyrics contained in the “.TXT” file:
Master Transpose
Recognized
chords
Current beat
Current measure
When this message appears, and you want to load a “.TXT” file,
keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch the center of the display. A standard file selector appears, and lets you look for a
“.TXT” file to be loaded while the current Style is playing.
STS
Please note that, unlike ordinary Lyrics, the text will not scroll
automatically while the Style is playing back. You must scroll it
with the DIAL or the vertical scrollbar. As an alternative, you can
use an assignable switch or footswitch, with the Text Page Up or
Text Page Down functions assigned, to scroll (respectively) to the
previous or next text page.
Recognized chords
Chords recognized on the keyboard.
Hint: When the file selector appears, you can use the Search
(
) function to search a “.TXT” file in the various media. See
“Searching files” on page 250 for more information.
STS Name panel
Touch the STS Name tab to select this panel. Single Touch Settings (STS) are memory locations for quickly choosing Keyboard
Sounds, contained in each Style or SongBook entry. While in
this panel, you can see the name of the four STSs belonging to
the latest selected Style or SongBook entry. Touch one of the
names to select the corresponding STS.
Master Transpose
Master transpose value in semitones. This value can be changed
using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
Current beat
Beat number of the current measure, that is currently playing.
Current measure
Current measure number.
STS
Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings (STS). Touch
one of them to select it.
Note: You cannot edit STS names with this panel. To edit a name,
select the STS to be renamed, then select the Write Single Touch
Setting command from the page menu (see “Write Single Touch
Setting dialog box” on page 112).
Reference
Display
options
94
Style Play operating mode
Mic panel
VP lock icon
Mic panel
Touch the Mic tab to select this panel. This is where you can set
the various Voice Processor options.
Harmony On/Off
Mic On/Off
Gbl
This lock avoids changing the Voice Processor Preset when
selecting a different Performance, STS or SongBook entry. This
is useful if you want to use the same Preset while selecting different Performances, STSs or SongBook entries.
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
Talk On/Off
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
FX Level
Voice Processor Preset
Note: Depending on the audio input routing, the microphone input
might not work, whichever the status of the switches in this page.
See “Audio Setup: Audio In” on page 233.
Mic On/Off
Use this switch to mute/unmute the microphone. This is the
same as the ON button in the MIC SETTING section on the
control panel, and of the MIC/IN Play/Mute icon in the Main
page (see “Track status icons” on page 92).
Harmony On/Off
Talk On/Off
Use this control to set the overall effect level on the voice. This is
the same as the “FX Level knob” found in the Voice Processor
Preset > Effects page of the Global mode (see page 245). This
parameter is saved in the Voice Processor Preset.
EQ Settings
Tlk
Use this switch to soften all music generated by the Pa2X, and
speak in the microphone at normal level. This is useful to
address your audience, while automatically lowering the background music volume.
While this switch is turned on, all Voice Processor
modules are momentarily turned off, except for
Reverb, whose level is simply reduced to avoid losing clarity on the voice. Setting for the Talk function can be programmed on the Talk page (see
“Voice Processor Setup: Talk” on page 240).
Depress this switch to return to the original settings.
VPs
Use these controls to set a global, three-band equalization
applied to the voice. This is useful to fine-tune your voice to the
acoustic environment of the room.
This is the same as the EQ controls found in the Voice Processor
Setup > Dynamics/EQ page of the Global mode (see page 98).
Low
Low band. Increase it to add body to your voice,
decrease it to remove boominess.
Mid
Mid band. Increase it to add clarity to your voice,
decrease it to remove nasality.
High
High band. Increase it to add brilliance to your
voice, decrease it to remove sibilance.
VPp
Turns the Harmony module on/off. This is the same as the HARMONY button in the MIC SETTING section on the control
panel.
VPp
Sub-Scale panel
Touch the Sub-Scale tab to select this panel. This panel replicates
the “Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale” edit page (see page 99).
With the “Quarter Tone” box non-checked
Note: When you deactivate the Talk function, the Voice Processor
Preset is recalled. Any unsaved change to the Preset will be lost.
VP Preset
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available Voice Processor Presets. Selecting a Preset may change all the above parameters, as well as other Voice Processor parameters. Presets can be
freely edited (see “Voice Processor Preset: Preset” on page 241).
With the “Quarter Tone” box checked
Style Play operating mode
Pad panel
95
Pad panel
Split panel
Touch the Pad tab to select this panel. This is where you can
assign a different Hit or Sequence Pad to each of the four pads,
and see at a glance how pads are programmed. For more
options, go to the “Pad/Switch: Pad” page (see page 108).
Touch the Split tab to select this panel. This is where you can set
the split point and Chord Recognition mode.
Split Point
Sty
SB
Name of the Hit or Sequence assigned to each Pad. Touch the
box to make the Pad Select window appear (see “Pad Select window” on page 83).
Note: Each Style or SongBook entry can change the Pad assignment.
Pads lock icon
Gbl
When locked, assignments to the pads remain unchanged when
selecting a different Style or SongBook entry.
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
Use this parameter to select a different split point. A full-range
piano keyboard is shown in the display, divided at the selected
split point. Upper tracks play on the right of this point, while the
Lower track plays on the left.
Keyboard diagram
Touch anywhere on the keyboard diagram. A message will
appear, asking you to press the new split point on the keyboard
of your Pa2X (or to press the EXIT button to close the message
with no changes).
Chord Recognition Mode
This parameter allows you to decide how chords are recognized
by the auto-accompaniment engine. Please note that when in
Full or Upper Chord Scanning mode, the Fingered 3 or Expert
mode is selected, and you must always play at least three notes,
to let a chord be recognized.
For more information on the various options, see “Chord Recognition Mode” on page 109.
Note: This parameter is the same you can find in the “Preferences:
Style Preferences” page (see page 109).
Split Point and Chord Recognition lock icons
Gbl
When locked, Split Point and Chord Recognition mode remain
unchanged when selecting a different Performance or STS.
These locks are reset when turning the instrument off, unless
you write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
Reference
Pad assignment
96
Style Play operating mode
Edit menu
Parameters area
Edit menu
From any page, press the MENU button to open the Style Play
edit menu. This menu gives access to the various Style Play edit
sections.
When in the menu, select an edit section, or press EXIT or
STYLE PLAY to exit the menu and return to the main page. To
return to the main page, you can also select the Main Page menu
item.
When in an edit page, press EXIT or the STYLE PLAY button to
return to the main page of the Style Play operating mode.
Each page contains various parameters. Use the tabs to select
one of the available pages. For detailed information on the various types of parameters, see sections starting from page 96.
Tabs
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan
This page lets you set the volume and pan for each of the Keyboard or Style tracks. Volume settings are the same as in the Volume panel of the main page.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Style tracks, and vice versa.
Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each edit
section groups various edit pages, that may be selected by touching the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display.
Grouped Style tracks
Edit page structure
Keyboard tracks
All edit pages share some basic elements.
Operating mode
Edit section
Page menu
icon
Selected
track info
Individual
Style tracks
Parameters
area
Upper Volume Link
Tabs
Operating mode
This indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode.
This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for
one of the Upper tracks, proportionally changes also the other
Upper tracks.
Note: This parameter is the same you can find in the “Preferences:
Style Play Setup” page (see page 110).
On
When changing volume to one of the Upper
tracks, volume for the other Upper tracks
changes in proportion.
Off
When changing volume to one of the Upper
tracks, only that track’s volume is changed. Other
Upper tracks are left unchanged.
Edit section
This identifies the current edit section, corresponding to one of
the items of the edit menu (see “Edit menu” on page 96).
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 111).
Sty
97
Style Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send
Sty
Dry
Use this checkbox to turn the dry (direct) track signal on or off.
Note: If the track is sent to a separate output, no FX is sent to any
output. To program the output status for each track, see “Audio
Setup: Style/Kbd” on page 232.
On
When checked, the direct, dry signal is sent to the
output, mixed with the FXs.
Track
Out L/R
FX Processor
Off
When unchecked, the direct, dry signal is
removed from the audio output, and only sent to
the FXs. The effected signal will still be panned
(in stereo FXs only) according to the Pan value.
Track
Out L/R
FX Processor
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send
This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (uneffected)
signal going to the Internal FX processors. The effect processors
included in Pa2X are connected in parallel, so you can decide
which percentage of the direct signal can be effected.
In case you want to send all of a track’s signal to the effect (as
when using “insert” effects, like Rotary, Distortion, EQ…), just
set the Dry parameter to Off (see “Dry” above).
There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play mode (two
for Keyboard tracks, two for Style and Pad tracks). You can
assign them any kind of available effects, but we found it convenient to arrange them in the following way, for most of the
Styles, STS and Performances included with the Pa2X:
FX A
Reverb processor for the Style and Pad tracks.
FX B
Modulating FX processor for the Style and Pad
tracks.
FX C
Reverb processor for the Realtime (Keyboard)
tracks.
FX D
Modulating FX processor for the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks.
Sty
Pan
Track position in the stereo field.
L-64…L-1
Left stereo channel.
C0
Center.
R+1…R+63
Right stereo channel.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Keyboard to
Style tracks, and vice-versa.
Volume of grouped Style tracks
Sty
Reference
This parameter is a general offset applied to all Styles. Changing
the volume of the grouped Style tracks (Dr/Perc, Accomp, Bass)
is a global offset. When you choose a different Style, this offset
does not change.
These controls allows you to globally set the balance between the
Drum/Percussion, Bass and Accompaniment tracks. For example, if you prefer Drums and Bass to be prominent to make them
have more ‘punch’, you can lower the grouped Accompaniment
tracks.
0…127
Volume level.
Volume of individual tracks
Sty
Track’s volume. This is the relative volume of each track, as saved
in the Style, Performance or STS. It may change when choosing a
different Style, Performance or STS.
0…127
MIDI value of the track’s volume.
Send level (A…D)
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Sty
Sty
0…127
Level of the track (direct) signal sent to the effect
processor.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Sty
98
Style Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control
In this page you can set the three-band equalization (EQ) for
each individual track.
This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization, programmed in the previous page.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Style tracks, and vice-versa.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Style tracks, and vice-versa.
Hi (High) Gain
Sty
This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization
on each individual track. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
Use these buttons to reset (i.e., “flatten”) equalization for the
corresponding track.
Reset All Tracks button
Touch this button to reset (i.e., “flatten”) equalization for all
tracks (both Realtime and Style tracks).
-18…+18dB High gain value in decibels.
Mid (Middle) Gain
Track Reset buttons
Sty
This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equalization on each individual track. This is a bell curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Middle gain value in decibels.
Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the corresponding track. When bypassed, equalization has no effect on the
track, but all parameters are preserved. When the box is unchecked,
equalization is activated again with the original settings.
On
The bypass function is engaged, so no equalization is active on the corresponding track.
Off
The bypass function is not engaged, so the equalization is active on the corresponding track.
Sty
Low Gain
This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization
on each individual track. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Low gain value in decibels.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Sty
Sty
Bypass
Sty
Input Trim
This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing
through the equalizer. Extreme equalization values can overload
the audio circuits and lead to distortion. This control lets you set
equalization as desired, and at the same time avoid overloading.
0…99
Limiting value. The higher, the most effective it is.
Play/Mute icon
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Sty
Style Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning
99
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning
Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale
This page is where you can set the octave transpose and fine tuning for each track. Plus, you can program the Pitch Bend range
for each track.
This page lets you program an alternative scale for the tracks
selected with the “Scale Mode” parameter (see page 109). The
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Style tracks, and vice-versa.
remaining tracks (if any) use the basic scale set in Global
mode (see “Main Scale” on page 222).
With the “Quarter Tone” box non-checked
With the “Quarter Tone” box checked
Sty
These parameters show the Pitch Bend range for each track, in
semitones.
1…12
Maximum up/down pitch bend range (in semitones). 12 = ±1 octave.
0
No pitch bend allowed.
Note: A different Scale can be associated to each Performance or
STS.
Note: Quarter Tone selection can be received by MIDI (i.e., by an
external sequencer or controller). Conversely, selection of Quarter
Tone settings can be sent by the Pa2X to an external MIDI recorder
as System Exclusive data.
Scale
Octave Transpose
Sty
This is the octave transpose value.
-3
Lowest octave.
0
Standard tuning.
+3
Highest octave.
Key
Sty
Detune
Selected scale. See “Scales” on page 323 for a list of the available
scales. When selecting the User scale, the keyboard diagram on
the right becomes active, letting you program a custom scale (see
“How to create a custom scale by fine-tuning each note of the
User scale” below).
This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred
key (see “Scales” on page 323).
This is the fine tuning value.
-64
Lowest pitch.
Quarter Tone
00
Standard tuning.
+63
Highest pitch.
Check the Quarter Tone parameter to make the keyboard diagram active. In the display, touch any note you want to lower a
quarter tone, making a big dot appear on the note diagram.
Touch the note again to make the dot disappear.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Sty
Reference
PB Sensitivity
100
Style Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale
In the display, touch one of the four SC Preset buttons to recall
the corresponding preset, and touch any note you want to lower
a quarter tone down, making a big dot appear on the detuned
note in the diagram. Touch the note again to make the dot disappear.
Scale alteration made in this page is momentary and is not saved
to memory. It is only meant to allow for fast scale alteration
while playing.
How to use the Quarter Tone function with
the SC Presets
When the Quarter Tone checkbox is checked, four SC Preset button appear, and you can select one of four SC Presets to recall a
preset custom scale.
1.
To do so, go to the Global mode, and reach the “General
Controls: Scale” page. When programming is done, choose
the “Write SC Preset” command from the page menu, then
select one of the preset locations where to save the current
settings (see “Write Quarter Tone SC Preset dialog box” on
page 238).
To make realtime changes faster, you can assign the Quarter
Tone function also to a footswitch, an EC5 switch or an Assignable Switch (see below “How to use the Quarter Tone function
with a footswitch, EC5 switch or Assignable Switch” for more
information).
The use of SC Presets allows for immediate recall of previously
programmed Quarter Tone scales (see below “How to use the
Quarter Tone function with the SC Presets” for more information).
2.
Return to this page, and check the Quarter Tone checkbox
to make SC Preset buttons appear.
3.
Touch one of the SC Preset buttons to recall a preset custom scale.
SC Preset buttons
Each preset contains a custom detuning of each note of the
scale. It also memorizes the selected degree(s) of the scale
(shown in the lower scale diagram).
These buttons appear only when the “Quarter Tone” parameter is
checked. Use these buttons to recall the corresponding custom
scale presets. See “How to use the Quarter Tone function with
the SC Presets” below for information on how to use them.
When no preset is selected, the default scale is automatically recalled. This scale assigns a -50 cent value to all notes,
and turns all scale degrees off.
Keyboard diagram
When Quarter Tone is checked, or a User scale is selected, this
diagram allows you to modify each note’s pitch.
Scale lock icon
You can select an SC Preset, also by assigning the relevant
function to the Assignable Switch or Assignable Footswitch.
4.
Gbl
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
How to create a custom scale by fine-tuning each note of the User scale
When the User scale is selected, the keyboard diagram becomes
active. You can then change each note tuning in cents of a semitone (within a range of ±99 cents, referred to Equal tuning). This
way, you can create a custom scale, you can save to a Performance or STS.
Fine tuning values
After selecting the User scale, touch a note in the keyboard diagram, and use TEMPO/VALUE controls to adjust the selected
note tuning in cents.
Note: These settings can be saved to a Performance or STS, as
described below.
Use the keyboard diagram to turn the note detuning on or
off.
Make a big dot appear to detune the corresponding note, or
make it disappear to reset tuning.
When locked, Scale parameters remain unchanged when selecting a different Performance or STS.
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
Program and save a custom scale into an SC Preset.
5.
Reset the original scale.
Uncheck the “Quarter Tone” checkbox to recall the main
scale.
Style Play operating mode
Effects: FX Select
How to use the Quarter Tone function with
a footswitch, EC5 switch or Assignable
Switch
You can assign the “Quarter Tone” function to a footswitch, a
Korg EC5 switch, or an Assignable Switch, to program a custom
scale in realtime, for example to allow for those sudden scale
change typical of Arabic music. These changes are not saved anywhere, so the scale is easily “wiped-out” when selecting a different Performance or STS, or when pressing the Quarter Tone
pedal again.
101
Effects: FX Select
This page allows you to select the A/B (Style and Pads) and C/D
(Keyboard) effects.
Note: While in Style Play mode, you can create a custom scale, to be
assigned to a Performance or STS, simply by selecting and editing a
User scale, and saving any change to a Performance or STS. See
“How to create a custom scale by fine-tuning each note of the User
scale” above.
1.
Program a footswitch, one of the EC5 pedals, or an Assignable Switch, to be the Quarter Tone switch.
Simply go to the Global mode, and reach the “Controllers:
Pedal/Switch” or “Controllers: EC5” page. There, you will
find the “Pedal/Footswitch” and “EC5-A…E” parameters,
to which you can assign the Quarter Tone function.
While still in Global mode, select the Write Global-Global
Setup command from the page menu, to save these settings
to the Global (see “Write Global - Global Setup dialog box”
on page 237).
2.
Lower some note pitches.
Keep the Quarter Tone pedal pressed. The keyboard will
not play at this time. Press the notes you want to lower a
quarter tone. Release the pedal.
3.
Play with your new scale.
Notes you pressed on step 2 are now lowered of a quarter
tone.
4.
Reset the original scale.
Press and release the Quarter Tone pedal again, without
playing any note. All pitches will be reset, and the scale
selected by the Performance, STS will be recalled.
FX A…D
Sty
Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors. Usually,
A and C are reverbs, while B and D are modulating effects (chorus, flanger, delay…). For a list of the available effects, see the
“Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD.
Effects from A to D can be saved to a Performance. Effect A/B
(Style and Pad tracks) can be saved to a Style Performance.
Effects C/D (Keyboard tracks) can be saved to an STS.
FX Amount
Sty
Volume of the effect, that is added to the dry (uneffected) signal.
B to A, D to C
Sty
Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect, or
of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect.
Mod.Track (Modulating Track)
Sty
Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modulate
an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by an internal physical controller.
Reference
While in Global mode, you can create a custom scale and save it to
one of the four SC Presets, and recall it by touching one of the SC
Preset buttons in the display. Then, you can start your realtime
scale editing from the selected preset. See “How to use the Quarter
Tone function with the SC Presets” above.
102
Style Play operating mode
Effects: FX A…D
Effects: FX A…D
Track Controls: Mode
These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect
processors. Here is an example of the FX A page, with the Reverb
Wet Plate effect assigned.
This page lets you connect each track to the internal sound generator and to external MIDI devices. This is very useful to let a
Style track drive an external expander, or play a digital piano
with one of Pa2X’s Keyboard tracks. In addition, here you can set
the polyphony mode for each track.
Selected effect
FX parameters
Selected effect
Sty
SB
Select one of the available effects from this pop-up menu. This is
equivalent to the “FX A…D” parameters found in the “Effects:
FX Select” page (see above).
Note: Effects can be different for each of the four editing pages.
FX parameters
Sty
SB
Parameters may be different, depending on the selected effect.
See the “Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD for a list
of available parameters for each effect type.
Int./Ext. (Internal/External)
Sty
FX Amount
Internal
The track plays the sounds generated by the
internal sound engine. It does not play an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT.
External
The track plays an external instrument connected
to the MIDI OUT. The connected device must
receive on the MIDI channel associated with this
track on the Pa2X (see “MIDI: MIDI Out Channels” on page 230).
Volume of the effect, that is added to the dry (uneffected) signal.
Src (Source)
Sty
SB
Modulation source. To select the track generating this message,
see the “Mod.Track (Modulating Track)” parameters found in
the “Effects: FX Select” page (see above). For a list of modulation
source, see the “Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD.
Sty
A track set to this status does not play the internal
sounds, therefore saving polyphony.
Instead of the assigned Sound name, the
<E: aaa.bbb.ccc> indicator is shown on a track’s
area in the Main page:
Control Change/Program Change area
This indicator begins with a remark saying the
track is in External (”E”) mode, and continues
with a strings of transmitted Control Change and
Program Change data. This will let you know
what the track is transmitting to the MIDI OUT.
In the following example, CC#0 is the Control
Change 0 (Bank Select MSB), CC#32 is the Con-
Style Play operating mode
Track Controls: Drum Volume
trol Change 32 (Bank Select LSB), PC is the Program Change:
CC#0 value
CC#32 value
PC value
These parameters can be accessed only on tracks set in Drum
mode (see above). Use them on tracks with a Drum Kit assigned,
or you will not be able to hear any change.
Note: All values are referred to the value of the original Sounds.
The track plays both the internal sounds and an
external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT.
Sty
Type
Drum
Track Controls: Drum Volume
In this page you can adjust the volume for each family of Drum
and Percussion instrument for the selected track. A list of families is shown below.
When touching the Sound area, the numeric keypad appears, instead of the Sound Select window.
You can enter the Control Change/Program
Change bundle shown above, separating the three
parts with a dot (.).
Both
103
Drum/Percussion track. Set a track to Drum
mode if you wish to separately adjust the volume
and set a different output for each percussive
family of the assigned Drum Kit Sound. (See
“Track Controls: Drum Volume” on page 103,
and “Audio Setup: Style/Kbd” on page 231).
Note: Tracks set to Drum or Percussion mode while
in Style Record (see “Track Type” on page 137),
cannot be edited here. This option appears in grey.
Other Style tracks cannot be set to Drum mode
here.
Tracks of this kind are polyphonic, i.e. they can
play more than one note at the same time.
Mono
Tracks of this kind are monophonic, i.e. each new
note stops the previous note.
Mono Right
A Mono track, but with priority assigned to the
rightmost (highest) note.
Mono Left
A Mono track, but with priority assigned to the
leftmost (lowest) note.
Play/Mute icon
Drum Family Volume
Use these knobs to adjust the offset value.
0…127
Sty
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Sty
Offset value. ‘127’ means no change to the original value memorized in the Drum Kit, while any
other (lower) value means a decrease to the original value.
Drum families
Meaning
Kick
Kick drums
Snare
Snare drums
Tom
Toms
HiHat
Hi-Hat cymbals
Cymbal
Ride, Crash and other cymbals
Perc.1
Low-pitched percussions
Perc.2
High-pitched percussions
EFX
Special effects
Select
Use these buttons to select the track to edit. The button corresponding to the selected track turns green.
Reset Track
Touch this button to reset all changes to percussive instrument
volumes in the selected track.
Reference
Poly
104
Style Play operating mode
Track Controls: Easy Edit
Reset All Tracks
Easy Sound Edit
Touch this button to reset all changes to percussive instrument
volumes in all tracks.
Use these knobs to adjust the offset value.
Play/Mute icon
Sty
Sty
-64…0…+63 Offset value. ‘0’ means no change to the original value
memorized in the Sound, while any other value
means a decrease or increase to the original value.
Track’s play/mute status.
Sound parameters
Meaning
Attack
Attack time. This is the time during which the
sound goes from zero (at the moment when
you strike a key) to it’s maximum level.
Decay
Decay time. Time to go from the final Attack
level to the beginning of the Sustain.
Release
Here is a quick example of the use of the Drum Volume function.
Release time. This is the time during which the
sound goes from the sustaining phase, to zero.
The Release is triggered by releasing a key.
Cutoff
Filter cutoff. This sets the sound brightness.
1.
While in this page, press TRACK SELECT to see individual
Style tracks.
Resonance
Use the Filter Resonance to boost the cutoff
frequency.
2.
Touch the Select button, in the display, above the Drum
track.
LFO Depth
Intensity of the Vibrato (LFO).
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
How to adjust volume for a single Drum
Family
3.
Press START/STOP to let the Style go.
4.
While listening to the Style, select the Snare knob, and use
TEMPO/VALUE controls to turn the volume completely
off.
You’ll notice how all snares stops sounding.
5.
Touch the Reset Track button in the display to recall the
original snare volume.
LFO Speed
Speed of the Vibrato (LFO).
LFO Delay
Delay time before the Vibrato (LFO) begins,
after the sound starts.
Select
Use these buttons to select the track to edit. The button corresponding to the selected track turns green.
Reset Track
Touch this button to reset all changes to Sound parameters in the
selected track.
Track Controls: Easy Edit
In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Sounds
assigned to each track.
Note: All values refer to the value of the original Sound.
Reset All Tracks
Touch this button to reset all changes to Sound parameters in all
tracks.
Play/Mute icon
Sty
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
How to adjust sound parameters for a single Sound
Here is a quick example of the use of the Easy Sound Edit function.
1.
If needed, while in this page press TRACK SELECT to see
Keyboard tracks.
2.
Touch the Select button, in the display, above the Upper 1
track.
3.
While playing on the keyboard to hear the Sound, select the
Cutoff knob, and use TEMPO/VALUE controls to turn its
value completely off.
You’ll notice how the filter progressively cuts out high frequencies, making the sound darker and mellower.
4.
Touch the Reset Track button in the display to recall the
original Cutoff value.
Style Play operating mode
Keyboard/Ensemble: Keyboard Control
105
Keyboard/Ensemble: Keyboard Control
Keyboard/Ensemble: Key/Velocity Range
This page lets you enable/disable the Damper and Expression
pedals, plus the Joystick, for each of the Keyboard tracks.
This page lets you program a key and dynamic (velocity) range
for each of the Keyboard tracks.
Key range is useful to create a set of Keyboard tracks playing in
different zones of the keyboard. For example, you may have
french horns and woodwinds playing in the center range of the
keyboard, while only woodwinds play on the higher range.
Velocity range is useful to create a sound made of up to three
dynamic layers, assigning each of the Upper tracks to a different
dynamic range.
As an example, you may assign the El.Piano 1 Program to the
Upper 1, and the El.Piano 2 Program to the Upper 2 track. Then,
set Upper 1 to [Bottom=0, Top=80], and Upper 2 to [Bottom=81, Top=127]. The El.Piano 1 will play when playing softer,
the El.Piano 2 when playing louder.
Damper
On
When you press the Damper pedal and release
the keys, the track’s sound is kept sustained.
Off
The Damper pedal is not active on any track set
to this status.
Joystick X
This enables/disables the left/right movement of the Joystick
(Pitch Bend, and sometimes a Sound parameter’s control; for
Pitch Bend settings, see “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” on page 99).
Joystick Y
Top/Bottom Key (Key Range)
This parameter pair sets the Top and Bottom key range for the
track.
C-1…G9
Expression
This parameter allows you to switch the Expression control on/
off on each individual Keyboard track. The Expression control is
a relative level control, always subtracted from the Volume value
of the track.
As an example, imagine you have a Piano sound assigned to
Upper 1, and a Strings sound assigned to Upper 2. If you turn
the Expression switch on on Upper 2, and off on Upper 1, you
can use a continuous pedal to control only the Strings’ volume,
while the Piano remains unchanged.
To program a pedal or Assignable Slider to act as an Expression
control, see “Controllers: Pedal/Switch” on page 226 or “Controllers: Assignable Sliders” on page 227. You can only assign this
function to a volume-type pedal, not to a switch-type one.
Assign the “KB Expression” option to the pedal or Assignable
Slider, then select Write Global-Global Setup from the page
menu to save the setting to the Global.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Selected key.
Top/Bottom Vel. (Velocity Range)
This parameter pair sets the Top and Bottom dynamic range for
the track.
0
Lowest velocity value.
127
Highest velocity value.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Reference
This enables/disables the front/rear movement of the Joystick
(Y+: Modulation, and sometimes a different Sound parameter’s
control; Y-: Various controls, or non-active).
106
Style Play operating mode
Keyboard/Ensemble: Ensemble
played, only the last two are trilled. You can set
the trill speed by using the Tempo parameter (see
below).
Keyboard/Ensemble: Ensemble
This page lets you program the Ensemble function. This function harmonizes the right-hand melody (played in realtime)
using the recognized chords of the left-hand.
Repeat
The played note is repeated in sync with the
Tempo parameter (see below). When playing a
chord, only the last note is repeated.
Note: The Ensemble function only works in Style Play mode, with
the Split button turned on.
Echo
As the Repeat option, but with the repeated notes
fading away after the time set with the Feedback
parameter (see below).
AutoSplit1
If more than a single Upper track is in play, the
Upper 1 track plays the melody in mono, while
the other Upper tracks play the chord notes.
If only the Upper 1 track is in play, it plays polyphonically all the chord notes.
AutoSplit2
Similar to AutoSplit1, but the Upper 1 track
always plays the uppermost note.
Note Velocity
Ensemble
This parameter sets the velocity difference between the righthand melody and the added harmonization notes.
Harmonization type.
-10…0
Duet
Adds a single note to the melody.
Tempo
Close
Adds a closed-position chord to the melody.
Open 1
Adds an open-position chord to the melody.
Note: This parameter only appears when the Trill, Repeat or Echo
options are selected.
Open 2
As the above, but with a different algorithm.
Block
Block harmonization – very typical of jazz music.
Power Ensemble
Subtracted velocity value.
Note value for the Trill, Repeat or Echo Ensemble options. This
is in sync with the Metronome Tempo.
Feedback
Adds a fifth and an octave to the melody, as heard
in hard rock.
Note: This parameter only appears when the Echo option is
selected.
Fourths LO
Typical of jazz, this option adds two perfect
fourths under the melody.
This parameter sets how many times the original note/chord is
repeated by the Echo option.
Fourths UP
As the above, but with notes added over the melody.
Ensemble Track Assign
Fifths
This adds a series of fifths below the original
note.
Use these parameters to separately set Upper tracks for the
Ensemble function.
Octave
Adds one or more octaves to the melody.
Off
There is no harmonization on this track.
Dual
This option adds to the melody line a second
note, at a fixed interval set with the “Note”
parameter. When selecting this option, a transposition value appears (-24…+24 semitones to the
original note).
Normal
This track is included in the harmonization.
Mute
This track only plays the Ensemble notes, but not
the original note.
Brass
Typical Brass section harmonization.
Track’s play/mute status.
Reed
Typical Reed section harmonization.
Trill
When two notes are played on the keyboard, this
option trills them. If three or more notes are
Play/Mute icon
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Style Play operating mode
Style Controls: Drum/Fill
Style Controls: Drum/Fill
In this page you can select various general parameters for the
Style.
107
Var.Inc/Var.Dec
The next higher/lower numbered Variation is
selected. When Variation 4 is reached, an Inc
command will select Variation 4 again. When
Variation 1 is reached, a Dec command will select
Variation 1 again.
To Var.1…To Var.4
“Fill to Variation” (->1, ->2, ->3, ->4) automatically selects one of the four available Style Variations at the end of the fill.
Fill Mode lock icon
Gbl
This lock prevents the Fill Mode being changed when selecting a
different Performance or Style.
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
Sty
Drum Mapping (Var.1…Var.4)
The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative arrangement of
percussive instruments for the selected Drum Kit, without any
additional programming. Just select a Drum Map, and some
percussive instruments will be replaced with different instruments.
Off
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
Sty
Track status
Track play/mute status. Touch these icons to change it.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Standard mapping.
Drum Mapping 1…7
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Drum Map number. Mapping 1 is “soft-sounding”, while mapping 7 is “loud-sounding”.
Sty
Kick and Snare Designation
The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick (Bass Drum)
sound with a different Kick of the same Drum Kit, while the
Snare Designation replaces the original Snare Drum sound with
a different Snare of the same Drum Kit.
Style Controls: Keyboard Range On/Off /
Wrap Around
In this page you can program the Wrap Around point, and turn
on/off the Keyboard Range included in each Style tracks.
Off
Original Kick or Snare.
Type 1…3
Kick or Snare replacing the original one.
Fill Mode (1…3)
Reference
Hint: Select different Designations while listening to the Style, and
see how they affect the Style. When you like the result, save your
setting to a Performance or Style Performance.
Sty
These parameters set a Variation to be automatically selected at
the end of each of the three available Fills (1…3).
Off
The same Variation, playing before selecting a
Fill, will be selected again.
V1&V2 … V3&V4
The specified Variations will be alternatively
selected, when one of them is selected. For example, with the “V1&V2” option, if Variation 1 is
selected, Variation 1 and Variation 2 will be alternatively selected after the end of the Fill.
Var.Up/Var.Down
The next higher/lower numbered Variation is
selected, in cycle. After Variation 4, an Up command will select Variation 1. After Variation 1, a
Down command will select Variation 4.
Keyboard Range On/Off
Sty
This parameter is an on/off switch for the Key Range parameter
memorized into each Style Element track.
On
The Keyboard Range is considered – provided it
has been programmed (see “Style Element Track
Controls: Keyboard Range” on page 136 in Style
Record mode). When a track goes over the lower
or higher Keyboard Range point, it is automatically transposed, to stay in the programmed
range.
Off
No Keyboard Range used.
108
Style Play operating mode
Pad/Switch: Pad
Sty
Wrap Around
Pan
The wrap-around point is the highest register limit for the backing track. The accompaniment patterns will be transposed
according to the detected chord. If the chord is too high, the
Style tracks might play in a register that is too high, and therefore unnatural. If, however, it reaches the wrap-around point, it
will be automatically transposed an octave lower.
Pan for each of the four Pad tracks.
The wrap-around point can be individually set for each track in
semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones, relative to the
chord root set in Style Record mode (see “Key/Chord” on
page 118).
A Send
It is advisable to set different Wrap Around points for each track,
to avoid all tracks “jump” to a different octave at the same time.
1…12
Maximum transposition (in semitones) of the
track, referred to the original key of the Style pattern.
Sty
Play/Mute icon
-64…-1
Left stereo channel.
0
Center.
+1…+63
Right stereo channel.
Sty
SB
Sty
SB
Send level to the A Internal FX processor (usually reverb) for
each of the four Pad tracks.
0…127
Level of the Pad track (direct) signal sent to the A
effect processor.
Sty
B Send
SB
Send level to the B Internal FX processor (usually modulating
effect) for each of the four Pad tracks.
0…127
Track’s play/mute status.
Level of the Pad track (direct) signal sent to the B
effect processor.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Pad lock icon
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
This lock avoids selecting a different Style or SongBook entry
changes also the Hit or Sequence Pads assigned to the Pads.
Gbl
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
Pad/Switch: Pad
This page lets you select a different hit sound or sequence for
each of the four PAD buttons.
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
Pad/Switch: Assignable Switch
This page lets you select a different function for each of the two
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH buttons, located near the joystick.
Assignments can be saved into the current Style Performance or
SongBook entry. The Pads share the A/B FX group with the Style
tracks.
Note: You can also assign different Hits or Sequences from the Pad
panel of the main page.
Note: Each Style or SongBook entry can change the Pad assignment.
Pad assignment
Sty
SB
Name of the Hit or Sequence assigned to each Pad. Touch the
box to make the Pad Select window appear (see “Pad Select window” on page 83).
Sty
Volume
Volume for each of the four Pad tracks.
0…127
Volume level.
SB
Assignable Switches can be saved into a Performance, STS or
SongBook entry.
Switch 1 / 2
Each of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH buttons. Use these pop-up
menus to assign a function to each switch. See “List of Assignable Switch functions” on page 322.
Assignable Switch lock icon
Gbl
This lock avoids selecting a different Performance or STS
changes also the functions assigned to the switches.
Style Play operating mode
Preferences: Style Preferences
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
Expert
In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style
play mode. Settings can be saved to a Performance, or STS.
This mode is an extension of the Fingered 2, adding rootless and slashed chord recognition, often
used in jazz, fusion, modern pop and light music.
This type of chord recognition is very useful to
play piano chords typical of jazz piano players.
You don’t always need to play the root note, doubling the note already played by the bass track.
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
Preferences: Style Preferences
109
Velocity Control
Set this parameter to trigger one of the following functions simply by playing louder with your left hand. When playing with a
velocity value higher than the value set by the “Velocity Control
Value” parameter (see page 110), the selected function will be
activated.
• This function only works when the SPLIT LED is turned on,
and the LOWER or no Chord Scanning mode selected.
• It does not work in FULL Chord Scanning mode, with the
SPLIT LED turned off, or with the UPPER Chord Scanning
mode selected.
Off
This parameter defines how chords are recognized by the autoaccompaniment engine. Please note that when in Full or Upper
Chord Scanning mode, the Fingered 3 or Expert mode is
selected, and you must always play at least three notes, to let a
chord be recognized.
Note: This parameter is the same you can find in the main page
(see “Split panel” on page 95).
Break, Fill In 1, Fill In 2
When playing with a velocity higher than the
trigger value on the Lower track, the selected element is automatically triggered.
Start/Stop
You can start or stop the Style by playing harder
on the keyboard.
Bass Inversion
When playing with a velocity higher than the
trigger value, the Bass Inversion function will be
activated or deactivated.
Memory
When playing with a velocity higher than the
trigger value, the Memory function will be activated or deactivated.
Fingered 1
Play one or more notes, according to the selected
Chord Scanning Mode. A full Major chord will be
recognized even if only a single note is played.
Fingered 2
You must always play two or more notes for a
chord to be recognized. If you play just one note,
a unison will be played. If you play a suspended
chord (a root+5th), a suspended chord will be
played. The full chord will be recognized when
you play three or more notes.
Scale Mode
You must always play three or more notes for a
chord to be recognized. This option is automatically selected when selecting the FULL Chord
Scanning mode.
Upper tracks The scale will only affect Upper 1-3 Keyboard
tracks.
Fingered 3
One Finger
You can also compose a chord using a simplified
chord playing technique:
• If you play only one note, a Major chord is recognized.
• Play the root note, plus a white key on the left,
for a 7th. For example, play C3 + B2 for a C7.
• Play the root note, plus a black key on the left,
for a Minor chord. For example, play C3 + Bb2
for a C minor.
• Play the root note, plus a white and a black key
on the left, for a Minor 7th. For example, play C3
+ B2 + Bb2 for a C min 7.
This parameter defines which tracks are affected by the selected
alternative scale (see “Scale” on page 99).
Keyboard tracks
The scale will only affect Keyboard tracks.
All Tracks
The scale will affect all tracks (Keyboard, Style,
Pads).
Memory Mode
This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button works.
Chord
When its LED is on, the MEMORY button keeps
the recognized chord in memory. When its LED
is off, the chord is reset when raising the hand
from the keyboard.
Chord + Lower
When its LED is on, the MEMORY button keeps
the recognized chord in memory, and keeps the
Lower track held until the next note or chord is
played. When its LED is off, the chord is reset
Reference
Chord Recognition Mode
The function is turned off.
110
Style Play operating mode
Preferences: Style Play Setup
when raising the hand from the keyboard, and
the Lower track is not sustained.
Fixed Arr. + Lower
When its LED is on, the MEMORY button keeps
the Lower track held until the next note or chord
is played. When off, the Lower track is not sustained when raising the hand from the keyboard.
The chord is kept in memory, up until you select
a different Style.
Lock icon
Gbl
Hint: To restore the original MIDI Setups, load the original Factory data again (available in the supplied Accessory CD, or downloadable from www.korgpa.com).
Performance/Sound Default
Sty
Performance banks and Sound banks share the same buttons on
the control panel. Use this parameter to define whether the PERFORMANCE SELECT or the SOUND SELECT LED must be on
when you turn the instrument on.
Style Change On By Default
Sty
All parameters in this page may be protected from selecting a
different Performance or STS.
This parameter allows you to define the status of the STYLE
CHANGE button at startup.
This lock is reset when turning the instrument off, unless you
write Global settings to memory (see “Write Global - Global
Setup dialog box” on page 237).
On
At startup, the LED of the STYLE CHANGE button will automatically turn on.
Off
At startup, the LED of the STYLE CHANGE button will stay off.
For more information on parameter locks, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222.
Velocity Control Value
Use this parameter to set a velocity value over which to automatically trigger the Style Start/Stop or select a Style Element (see
“Velocity Control” above).
Preferences: Style Play Setup
In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style
Play mode.
Upper Volume Link
Note: These settings are stored in the Style Play Setup area of the
Global file (together with all the other parameters marked with the
Sty abbreviation through the manual). After changing these
settings, select the Write Global-Style Play Setup command from
the page menu to save them to the Global.
On
When changing volume to one of the Upper
tracks, volume for the other Upper tracks
changes in proportion.
Off
When changing volume to one of the Upper
tracks, only that track’s volume is changed. Other
Upper tracks are left unchanged.
On
MIDI channels for the Style Play mode can be automatically
configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter. See
“MIDI Setup” on page 228 for more information on using MIDI
Setups.
For detailed information on preloaded MIDI Setup settings, see
“MIDI Setup” on page 319.
Note: After selecting a MIDI Setup, you can go to the Global mode
and apply any change to each channel setting. To store these
changes to a MIDI Setup, while still in Global mode select the Write
Global-Midi Setup command from the page menu. All MIDI Setup
can be freely customized and overwritten.
Sty
With this function, you can play a simple accompaniment with
your left hand. For this to work, the SPLIT LED must be turned
on, and the Style must not be running. By default, this function
is turned on.
Sty
Note: To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the
Style Play mode, select the Write Global-Style Setup command
from the page menu.
Sty
This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for
one of the Upper tracks, proportionally changes also the other
Upper tracks.
Bass & Lower Backing
Midi Setup
Sty
When the Style is not running, and you play a
chord with your left hand, the chord is played by
the Lower Sound (even if it is muted), while the
chord root is played by the Bass Sound. When
you start the Style, the normal behavior is
restored.
When the Bass & Lower Backing
function is active, the Backing
icon appears in the Lower track Sound’s area.
Off
No Bass Sound is added when the Style is not
running. The Lower track can be heard only if it
is not muted.
Style Play operating mode
Page menu
Page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
111
The Solo function works in a slightly different way, depending
on the selected track:
• Keyboard track: The selected Keyboard track is the only track
you can hear when playing on the keyboard. All other Keyboard
tracks are muted. The status of the Style tracks is unaffected.
• Style track: The selected track is the only Style track you can
hear. All other Style tracks are muted. The status of the Keyboard
tracks is unaffected.
• Grouped Style tracks: The Solo function does not work on these
special tracks.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the
tracks to solo it. Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the
Solo function.
Copy/Paste FX
Select this command to open the Write Performance dialog box,
and save most of the current control panel settings to a Performance.
To copy a single effect:
1.
Select the source Song, Performance, Style or STS, then
See “Write Performance dialog box” on page 112 for more information.
• go to the page of the single effect you want to copy (FX A,
FX B, FX C, or FX D), or
Write Single Touch Setting
• go to the Effects > FX Select page, to copy all four effects.
This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the
four effects into different Performances, Styles or STSs.
Select this command to open the Write Single Touch Setting
(STS) dialog box, and save Keyboard track settings to one of the
Single Touch Settings (STS) of the current Style.
2.
Choose the “Copy FX” command from the page menu.
See “Write Single Touch Setting dialog box” on page 112 for
more information.
3.
Select the target Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
page of the single effect you want to paste (FX A, FX B, FX
C, or FX D).
Write Current Style Performance
4.
Choose the “Paste FX” command from the page menu.
Select this command to open the Write Current Style Performance dialog box, and save Style track settings to the Style Performance of the current Style.
To copy all four effects:
1.
See “Write Single Touch Setting dialog box” on page 112 for
more information.
Select the source Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
Effects > FX Select page, to copy all four effects.
2.
Choose the “Copy FX” command from the page menu.
3.
Select the target Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
page of the Effects > FX Select page.
4.
Choose the “Paste FX” command from the page menu.
Write Global-Style Setup
Select this command to open the Write Global-Style Setup dialog box, and save global settings that are unique to the Style Play
mode. These settings are programmed on the “Preferences: Style
Play Setup” page (see page 110).
See “Write Global-Style Play Setup dialog box” on page 113 for
more information.
Solo Track
Select the track to be soloed, and check this item. You will hear
only the selected track, and the ‘Solo’ warning will flash on the
page header.
Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function.
Easy Mode
Easy Mode allows you to use the Style Play and Song Play modes
with an easier-to-use user interface. It is recommended to beginners, and to professionals alike that do not want to deal with the
extra parameters of the Advanced mode.
At any time, you can manually turn the Easy Mode on/off with
the Easy Mode command in the page menu of the Style Play and
Song Play modes.
See “The Style Play page in detail” on page 27 for more information.
Reference
Write Performance
You can copy a single, or all four effects, between Styles, Performances, STSs and Songs. To do this, choose the “Copy FX” and
“Paste FX” commands from the page menu of the Style Play,
Song Play or Sequencer modes.
112
Style Play operating mode
Write Performance dialog box
Write Performance dialog box
Write Single Touch Setting dialog box
Open this window by selecting the Write Performance item from
the page menu. Here, you can save all track settings, the selected
Style, various Style settings, and the selected Voice Processor
Preset, to a Performance.
Open this window by selecting the Write Single Touch Setting
item from the page menu. Here, you can save Keyboard track
settings, and the selected Voice Processor Preset, to one of the
four single Touch Settings (STS) belonging to the current Style.
Parameters saved in the Performance are marked with the
symbol through the user’s manual.
Parameters saved in the STS are marked with the
through the user’s manual.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the
SOUND/PERFORMANCE buttons to open this window.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons to open this window.
Name
Name
Name of the Performance to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit)
button next to the name to open the Text Edit window.
Name of the STS to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit) button
next to the name to open the Text Edit window.
Perf Bank
Current Style
Target bank of Performances. Each bank corresponds to one of
the PERFORMANCE/SOUND buttons. Use TEMPO/VALUE
controls to select a different bank.
Non editable. Settings are saved in one of the four STSs belonging to the current Style. This parameter displays the name of the
“parent” Style.
Performance
STS
Target Performance location in the selected bank. Use TEMPO/
VALUE controls to select a different location.
Target STS location. The name of the STS currently saved at the
target location is shown. Use TEMPO/VALUE controls to select
a different location.
Select… button
Touch this button to open the Performance Select window, and
select a target location.
symbol
Style Play operating mode
Write Style Performance dialog box
113
Write Style Performance dialog box
The Favorite banks
Open this window by selecting the Write Style Performance item
from the page menu. Here, you can save Style track settings to
the Style Performance of the current Style.
You can create a custom set of Styles, made of up to ten Favorite
banks. You can assign a different name to the tabs that appear in
the Style Select window, in order to add musical genres not
included among the Factory Styles.
When both LEDs of the leftmost STYLE button are lit, the
FAVORITE banks are selected. No loading is required. Each bank
can include up to 32 Styles; browse them using the PAGE buttons.
Sty
symbol through the user’s manual.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the
STYLE buttons to open this window.
File name
FAVORITE bank buttons
FAVORITE01…10.STY
Bank 1…10
Style Bank
Hint: New Styles are released from time to time on our website
(www.korgpa.com).
Non editable. Bank of Styles the current Style belongs to. Each
bank corresponds to one of the STYLE buttons.
Creating the Favorite banks
Current Style
There are two ways to create the Favorite banks:
Non editable. Name of the current Style.
•
Write Global-Style Play Setup dialog box
While in Style Record mode, you can write the new or
edited Style in the Favorite banks, as an alternative to the
User Style banks. See the Style Record chapter for more
information on saving a Style.
•
Open this window by selecting the Write Global-Style play Setup
item from the page menu. Here, you can save various Style Preference settings (see “Preferences: Style Play Setup” on page 110),
that are saved to the Global file.
While in Media mode, you can load any Style into the
Favorite banks, as an alternative to the User Style banks. See
the Media chapter for more information on the Load operations.
Renaming the Favorite banks
While the Style Select window is in the display, you can choose
the “Rename Favorite Bank” command from the page menu,
and assign the Favorite Style tabs any name you like.
Parameters saved in the Style Play Setup area of the Global are
marked with the
Sty
symbol through the user’s manual.
The assigned name can be spanned over two lines, by separating
them with the paragraph character (¶). For example, to write
“World Music” on two lines, enter “World¶Music”.
Be careful not to write words exceeding the width of the side tabs
of the Style Select window.
Reference
Parameters saved in the Style Performance are marked with the
The Favorite Styles are contained in ten files, automatically created by the Pa2X inside the Style folder in the SSD. Even if different bank names can appear in the display, these files have fixed
names:
114
Style Record mode
The Style structure
Style Record mode
By entering the Style Record mode, you can create your own
Styles, or edit an existing Style.
Each Style Element is made up of smaller units, called Chord
Variations (CV), but not all of them have the same number of
CVs. Variations 1-4 have up to 6 CVs each, while the other Style
Elements have only up to 2 CVs.
The Style structure
When you play on the chord recognition area (Lower, Upper or
Full, depending on the Chord Scanning section on the control
panel), the arranger scans the keyboard and determines which
chord you are playing. Then, depending on the selected Style
Element, it determines which Chord Variation (CV) should be
played for the scanned chord. Which Chord Variation corresponds to each scanned chord is a setting of the Style: the Chord
Variation Table. Each Style Element contains a Chord Variation
Table, whose prototype is the following:
The term “Style” relates with music sequences automatically
played by the arranger of the Pa2X. A Style consists of a predefined number of Style Elements (E) (Pa2X features thirteen
different Style Elements: Variation 1-4, Intro 1-3, Fill 1-3, Ending 1-3). When playing, these Style Elements can be selected
directly from the control panel, using the corresponding buttons.
To explain the Style structure, we can use a tree-structure, as
shown in the following diagram:
Pop Ballad
Chord
Chord Variations (CVs)
Variation 1-4
Intro 1-3, Fill 1-3, Ending 1-3
CV1 – CV6
CV1 – CV2
Maj
6
Variation 1
Variation 2
CV1
Drum
Perc
Bass
Acc1
Acc2
Acc3
Acc4
Acc5
CV2
M7
Variation 3
Variation 4
M7b5
Sus4
Sus2
M7sus4
min
Intro1
m6
m7
CV1
CV2
Intro 2
CV3
Intro 3/C.In
m7b5
mM7
7
7b5
7sus4
dim
CV4
Fill 1
CV5
Fill 2
dimM7
aug
aug7
CV6
Fill 3/Break
augM7
no 3rd
Ending 1
Ending 2
no 3rd, no 5th
b5
dim7
Ending 3
After deciding what CV to play, the arranger triggers the right
sequence for each track. Since each sequence is written in a particular key (for example, CMajor, GMajor or Emin), the
arranger transposes it according to the scanned chord. Notes in
the sequence are carefully transposed, to make them work fine
with all recognized chords.
Going deeper into the Style structure, we can see that each
Chord Variation is made up of Track Sequences, and the Pa500
supports 8 different tracks. DRUM and PERC are used for drum
and percussion sequences, BASS for bass and ACC1-5 are for
accompaniment sequences (string, guitar, piano or other accompaniment instruments).
Style Record mode
Style Import/Export
Just to summarize, when you play a chord on the chord recognition area, the arranger determines which Style Element is used,
then determines which Chord Variation should be used for the
played chord, then Style sequences for every track of that Chord
Variation are transposed from the original chord to the recognized chord, and so on every time you play a chord.
Ordinary, Guitar and Drum tracks
There are different types of tracks (see “Track Type” on
page 137), and each of them is treated in a different way by the
arranger;
•
Acc (Accompaniment) and Bass tracks: When a chord is
recognized, the programmed chord notes are transposed to
a suitable scale, according to the Note Transposition
Tables (NTT) The NTT allows you to record just some
Chord Variations, and have all the notes play in the right
place, avoiding dissonances and transposing the pattern
notes to the notes of the recognized chord.
•
Drum & and Perc (Percussion) tracks: No transposition is
applied.The original pattern plays always.
•
Gtr (Guitar) tracks: When a chord is recognized, the
arranger triggers single notes, strumming and arpeggios on
a “virtual guitar”, keeping care of the way notes are played
on the guitar keyboard.
•
115
While in Style Play mode, you can assign a single Sound to
the Style Performance (together with the other track
parameters), that remains the same for all Style Elements.
Which Sounds are used depends on the status of the “Original
Style Sounds” parameter (see page 90).
Note: When assigning a Sound in Style Play mode, the “Original
Style Sounds” is automatically turned off.
Style Import/Export
As an alternative to creating Styles on the Pa500, you can import
a Standard MIDI Files (SMF) from your computer to a Pa2X’s
Style. See “Import: Import SMF” on page 138 and “Export
SMF” on page 140.
Entering the Style Record mode
While in the Style Play operating mode, press the RECORD button. The following page will appear in the display:
What to record
You don’t need to record all Chord Variations for all Style Elements. It is often only needed to record just a Chord Variation
for each Style Element. Exceptions are the Intro 1 and Ending 1,
where we suggest to record both a Major and minor Chord Variations.
•
Pattern data vs. track data
While the Style Record mode is where you can create or edit
music patterns for the Style, track parameters (like Volume, Pan,
Octave Transpose, FX settings…) have to be edited in Style Play
mode.
•
After creating or editing music patterns in Style Record
mode, save them by selecting the Write Style command
from the page menu of the Style Record mode (see “Write
Style dialog box” on page 141).
•
After editing track parameters in Style Play mode, save
them to the Style Performance by selecting the Write Style
Performance command from the page menu of the Style
Play mode (see “Write Style Performance dialog box” on
page 113).
Sounds
There are two ways of assigning Sounds to the Style tracks.
•
While in Style Record mode you can assign different
Sounds to each Style Element (see “Sounds area” on
page 120).
Select Record/Edit Current Style to edit the current Style.
If it is a Factory Style, you may not be able to save it at the
original location (depending on the status of the “Factory
Style and Pad Protect” parameter, see page 264); you will
select a User Style instead.
When editing an existing Style, the original Style Performance is recalled, but the following parameters are reset to
their default values: Drum Mapping (Off), Kick & Snare
Designation (Off). This means that you can hear some differences between the Style in play and the same Style being
edited; for example, resetting the Drum Mapping may lead
to some instruments being replaced.
•
Select Record New Style to start from a new, empty Style. A
default Style Performance will be recalled. When finished
recording, you will save the new Style onto a User Style
location. (Styles can be saved onto Factory Style locations
only when the “Factory Style and Pad Protect” parameter is
set to Off – see page 264).
After editing the Style, please save it (see “Exit by saving or deleting changes” below) and exit the Style Record mode. Then, while
in Style Play mode, edit the Style Performance to adjust track
settings (Tempo, Volume, Pan, FX Send… see page 96 and following in the “Style Play operating mode” chapter) and save it by
selecting the “Write Current Style Performance” from the page
menu (see “Write Style Performance dialog box” on page 113).
Reference
Recording a Style is a matter of recording tracks, inside a series
of Chord Variations, inside a series of Style Elements, inside the
Style itself.
116
Style Record mode
Exit by saving or deleting changes
Note: After a record or edit operation, the memory is automatically reorganized. Therefore, when you press START/STOP
there is a delay before you can actually listen to the Style. This
delay is higher with a Style containing more MIDI events.
Note: While in Record mode, the footswitch and EC5 pedals are
disabled. On the contrary, volume/expression-type pedals can
be used.
List of recorded events
The Style Record mode filters out some events that may cause
wrong operation of the Style. Here are the recorded events, and
the most important filtered-out events.
Control function
Exit by saving or deleting changes
CC#
Allowed
Note On
RX Noise On
When finished editing, you can save your Style in memory, or
abort any change.
Pitch Bend
• To save changes, select the “Write Style” command from the
page menu (see “Write Style dialog box” on page 141).
Modulation
1
Breath
2
Pan
10
• To abort all changes, select the “Exit from Record” command
from the page menu, or press the RECORD button, to exit from
record and return to the main page of the Style Record mode.
Hint: Save often while recording, to avoid accidentally losing your
changes to the Style.
Listening to the Style while in Edit mode
While you are in Style Record mode, you can listen to the
selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style, depending on the
page you are in.
To select a Chord Variation, go to the Main page of the Record/
Edit mode (see “Element (Style Element)” and “Chord Var
(Chord Variation)” on page 117).
•
When you are in the Main, Event Edit, Quantize, Transpose, Velocity, or Delete pages, you can listen to the selected
Chord Variation. Press START/STOP to check how it
works. Press START/STOP again to stop the playback.
•
When you are in the Sounds/Expression, Keyboard Range,
Chord Table, Trigger/Tension, Delete All, Copy, Style Element Controls or Style Control pages, you can listen to the
whole Style. Press START/STOP and play some chords to
do your tests. Select any Style Element using the control
panel buttons (VARIATION 1-4, INTRO 1-3, FILL 1-3,
ENDING 1-3). Press START/STOP again to stop the playback.
•
When you are in the Guitar Mode page, you can listen to
the pattern you are programming, played in the selected
Key.
Note: While in Style mode, the Fingered 3 Chord Recognition mode
is automatically selected.
Channel After Touch
Expression
11
CC#12
12
CC#13
13
Damper (Hold 1)
64
Filter Resonance (Harmonic Content)
71
Low Pass Filter Cutoff (Brightness)
74
CC#80 (General Purpose #5)
80
CC#81 (General Purpose #6)
81
CC#82 (General Purpose #7)
82
Note: Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded directly
by using Pa2X integrated controls.
All allowed controllers can be assigned to an Assignable Pedal/
Slider/Switch.
MIDI Control Change messaged inserted by using a software on an
external computer are imported when using the import function
(“Import: Import SMF” on page 138).
Some controllers are reset at the end of the pattern.
Style Record mode
Main page - Record 1
117
Recording parameters area
Main page - Record 1
Element (Style Element)
After pressing the RECORD button, and having chosen whether
you want to edit an existing Style or create a new one, the main
page of the Style Record mode appears, with the tab “Record 1”
selected.
Page sub-header
Page header
Page menu icon
This parameter lets you select a Style Element for editing. Each
Style Element corresponds to a button on the control panel carrying the same name. After selecting a Style Element, select a
Chord Variation for actual editing (see below).
Var1…End3
This is the selected Style Element
Recording
parameters area
Chord Var (Chord Variation)
This parameter lets you select a Chord Variation for editing,
after selecting the Style Element this Chord Variation belongs to.
Selected
track info
area
Key/
Chord
area
NTT
area
Note: When this parameter and the assigned value is in small letters (cv1…cv6), the Chord Variation is empty; when it is in capitals
(CV1…CV6), it is already recorded.
• If Style Element is Var1, Var2, Var 3 or Var4, you can select one
of 6 Chord Variations to edit.
• If Style Element is Intro1, Intro2, Intro3, Fill1, Fill2, Fill3,
Ending1, Ending2 or Ending3, you can select one of 2 Chord
Variations to edit.
Page header
Resolution
This line shows the current operating mode and transposition.
Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording. Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors;
notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest
axis of a rhythmic “grid”, set with this parameter, thus
playing perfectly in time.
Operating mode
name
Master Transpose
(in semitones)
Operating mode name
Note: To quantize after recording, use the Quantize function in the
Edit section (see “Style Edit: Quantize” on page 129).
Name of the current operating mode.
High
Master transpose
(1/32)… (1/8)
No quantization applied.
Grid resolution, in musical values. For
example, when you select 1/16, all notes are
moved to the nearest 1/16 division. When
you select 1/8, all notes are moved to the
nearest 1/8 division. A ‘3’ after the quantization
Master transpose value in semitones. This value can be changed
using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu. See “Page menu” on
page 141.
value means triplet.
No quantization
Page sub-header
This area shows some performing info on the Style.
Style in record/edit
Beat counter
Measure number
1/16
1/8
Style in record/edit
Rec Length (Recording Length)
Name of the Style currently in edit or record.
This parameter sets the recording length (in measures) of the
selected track. Its value is always equal to, or a divider of, the
Chord Variation Length (see next parameter).
Beat counter
This indicator shows the current beat inside the current measure.
Measure number
Current measure you are recording.
This is not the total length of the Chord Variation, but just of the
current track. For example, you may have a Chord Variation
eight measures long, with a drum pattern repeating each two
measures. If so, set the CV Length parameter to “8”, and the Rec
Reference
Track volume/status area
118
Style Record mode
Main page - Record 1
Length parameter to “2” before starting recording the Drum
track. When playing back the Style, saving it or executing any
edit operation on the Style, the 2-measures pattern will be
extended to the full 8-measures length of the Chord Variation.
Warning: If you assign CV Length a value lower than Rec
Length, the value of Rec Length is not immediately updated in
the display. Therefore, you are still free of changing the value of
CV Length, before the measures exceeding its value are deleted
(see warning in “CV Length (Chord Variation Length)” below).
However, if you press START/STOP to begin recording, the real
Rec Length value is changed to the new one, even if the display
still shows the old value.
For example, you may have CV Length = 4 and Rec Length = 4.
If you set CV Length to 2, and press START/STOP to begin
recording, Rec Length is still shown as 4, but it is in reality set to
2, and recording will cycle for just 2 measures. After you press
START/STOP to stop recording, Rec Length is updated to 2, and
all measures after the second measure are deleted.
CV Length (Chord Variation Length)
This parameter sets the total length (up to 32 measures) for the
selected Chord Variation. When playing a Style, this will be the
length of the accompaniment pattern, when the chord corresponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard.
Warning: If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after
recording, any measure after the selected length will be deleted.
Be very careful when setting the CV Length to a lower value
after recording! If it happens, we suggest to exit from record
without saving (see “Exit from Record” on page 141).
Metro (Metronome)
This is where you can set the metronome.
Off
No metronome click will be heard during recording. In any case, a one-bar precount will be
played before starting recording.
On1
Metronome on, with a one-bar precount before
starting recording.
On2
Metronome on, with a two-bar precount before
starting recording.
Tempo
Select this parameter to use TEMPO/VALUE controls to set the
tempo.
Hint: You can always change the Tempo, when other parameters
are selected, by keeping the SHIFT button pressed, and rotating the
DIAL.
Selected track info area
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track.
Track name
Sound bank
Sound name
Program Change
Track name
Name of the selected track.
Drum…Acc5 Style track.
Sound name
Sound assigned to the selected track. The triangle means you can
touch the name to open the Sound Select window, and select a
different Sound.
Sound bank
Bank the selected Sound belongs to.
Program Change
Program Change number sequence (Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB, Program Change).
Key/Chord area
Key/Chord
This parameter pair allows you to define the track’s original key
and chord type, for the current Chord Variation. When in Style
Play mode, this chord will be played back exactly as it was
recorded, without any NTT processing (see above).
To record just one Chord Variation for a Style Element, the suggested original key/chord is “maj7” (with NTT = i-Series). Be
very careful to play the 7th+ note (i.e., with a “Cmaj7th” key/
chord, the B), to avoid the lack of notes, or a bad NTT conversion when playing different chords.
Note: To conform to Korg specifications, it is advisable to record
both the “Major” and “minor” Chord Variations for the Intro 1
and Ending 1 Style Elements.
When you select a track, the original key/chord assigned to the
selected track will be shown. All recorded tracks will play back
on that key/chord. For example, if the original key/chord for the
Acc1 track is A7th, when selecting the Acc1 track all the remaining tracks will play on the A7th key/chord.
Note: When recording tempo, old data is always replaced by the
new data.
In the example above, you will record the Acc1 track in the AMajor key, with notes pertaining to the A7th scale. This exact pattern will be recalled, when an A7th chord will be recognized.
Note: The actual tempo of the Style will be the one shown when
saving the Style Performance in Style Play mode (see “Current
tempo” on page 88).
Note: This does not apply to Guitar Mode, relying on a different
rule. See “Main page - Guitar Mode” on page 121 for more infomation.
Meter
This is the meter (time signature) of the Style Element. You can
edit this parameter only when the Style Element is empty, i.e.
before you begin recording anything.
Style Record mode
Main page - Record 1
119
NTT Area
Parallel/Root The root note (in CMaj = C) is transposed to the
missing notes.
NTT Type/Table
Parallel/Fifth The 5th note (in CMaj = G) is transposed to the
missing notes.
NTTs (Note Transposition Tables) are the sophisticated algorithms that allow Korg arrangers to convert recognized chords
into musical patterns. The Note Transposition Table (NTT)
determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes, when
a chord is recognized that does not exactly match the original
chord of a Chord Variation. For example, if you only recorded a
Chord Variation for the CMaj chord, when a CMaj7 is recognized on the keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes
to create the missing 7th.
Note: These parameters cannot be selected with Drum, Percussion
or Guitar tracks, and are therefore greyed out.
Note: NTT parameters are separately programmed for each track
of the Style Element.
There are two general types of NTTs:
As recorded with
NTT = Root or 5th
(Key/Chord = CMaj)
When you play a CM7
with NTT = Root
When you play a CM7
with NTT = 5th
Parallel/i-Series
All original patterns must be programmed on the
“Maj7” or “min7” chords. When loading old
Korg i-Series Styles, this option is automatically
selected.
As recorded with
NTT = i-Series
(Key/Chord = CM7)
When you play a CMaj
with NTT = i-Series
When you play a C7
with NTT = i-Series
• When Parallel types are selected, notes are transposed inside
the area set by the Wrap Around parameter. These tables are ideally suited to melody parts.
as played back
• When Fixed types are selected, the arranger moves as few notes
as possible, making legato lines and chord changes more natural.
They are ideally suited to chord tracks (strings, piano etc…).
as written
as played back
Fixed/Chord This table moves as few notes as possible, making
legato lines and chord changes more natural. It is
ideally suited to chord tracks (strings, piano
etc…). Contrary to the Parallel mode, the programmed chord is not transposed according to
the Wrap Around parameter, but always stays
around its original position, looking for common
notes between the chords.
Fixed/No Transpose
Note: To conform to Korg specifications, it is advisable to set the
NTT to “No Transpose” on the Intro 1 and Ending 1.
The programmed notes can only be transposed
by the Master Transpose. They are never transposed when chords are changed.
Reference
as written
Parallel/No Transpose
The chord is not modified, and is moved to the
new key unchanged. The pattern plays exactly the
recorded notes, and is moved to the new key as is.
This is the standard setting of Intro 1 and Ending
1 in Korg’s original Styles (where a chord progression is usually recorded, and should remain
unchanged in any key).
120
Style Record mode
Main page - Record 2/Cue
Delete Note button
Use this command to delete a single note or a single percussive
instrument from a track. For example, to delete a snare, keep the
D2 note (corresponding to the snare) pressed.
1.
Select a track.
2.
Touch the “Delete Note” button, and keep it pressed.
3.
Press START/STOP to start the Style.
4.
When you reach the passage containing the note to be
deleted, play the note on the keyboard. Keep it pressed, up
to the last note to be deleted.
5.
When finished, release the Delete button and the note to be
deleted, and press START/STOP again to stop the Style.
Main page - Record 2/Cue
While in the main page, touch the “Record 2/Cue” tab to see this
page. Most parameters in this page are the same as in “Main
page - Record 1”. In addition, here you can see and select Sounds
for each Style track, and the Cue mode for the Style Element.
Sounds
area
Cue area
Note: If the note is at the beginning of the pattern, press the
note before starting the Style.
Tracks volume/status area
Virtual sliders
Sounds area
Each virtual slider in the display corresponds to an Assignable
Slider on the control panel. Use the Assignable Sliders to change
each value, provided the VOLUME LED (over the SLIDER
MODE button) is turned on. This LED status depends on the
last selected Performance, but can be changed anytime by using
the SLIDER MODE button.
This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the
eight Style tracks.
Octave transpose icon
Sound bank’s icon
Octave transpose icon
As an alternative, touch the track’s area to select a track, and use
TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the value (or touch and drag
it in the display).
Track status icons
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Record status. After starting recording, the track
will receive notes from the keyboard and the
MIDI IN connector.
Track names
Under the sliders, a label for each track is shown.
Drum…Acc5 Shown Style tracks.
Non editable. This indicator shows the track’s octave transposition. Tracks will be recorded with the selected octave transposition. To change this value, use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons, or
go to the “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” edit page in the Style Play
mode (see page 99). Save this value to the Style Performance.
Sound bank’s icon
This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to.
Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track
(detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area,
see the “Record 1” page above). Touch it a second time to open
the Sound Select window.
Note: These Sounds can be replaced by Sounds selected by a Performance, provided the “Original Style Sounds” parameter is left
unchecked in Style Play mode (see page 90).
Style Record mode
Main page - Guitar Mode
Cue area
121
Main page - Guitar Mode
Cue mode for [Style element]
This parameter lets you decide how the current Style Element
will enter after it has been selected. This setting is only available
for the ‘Variation’ and ‘Fill’ Style Elements.
While in the main page, and a Guitar track has been selected,
touch the “Guitar Mode” tab to see this page. This is where you
can access Guitar Mode programming:
Immediate, first measure
The Style Element enters immediately, and begins
from the first measure. Only available on Fills.
Immediate, current measure
The Style Element enters immediately, and begins
from the current measure. Only available on Fills.
Next measure, current measure
The Style Element enters at the beginning of the
next measure, and begins from the current measure. Only available on Variations.
Note: To access this page, a Guitar track must first be selected (see
“Track Type” on page 137). Otherwise, the Guitar Mode tab will
remain grey (not selectable).
Note: When programming a Guitar track from an external
sequencer, you must be sure the Guitar tracks is associated to the
right channel. Go to the Global > MIDI > MIDI IN Channels page,
and assign the corresponding Style track (usually Acc1 ~ Acc5) to
the same channel of the Guitar track on the external sequencer.
Then, go to the Style Record > Style Track Controls > Type/Tension/Trigger page, and set the track as a track of type “Gtr” (see
“Track Type” on page 137).
Guitar Mode allows to easily create realistic rhythm guitar parts,
without the artificial, unmusical playing typical of MIDI programming of guitar parts. Just record a few notes, and you will
end up with realistic rhythm guitar tracks, where each chord is
played according to its real position on the guitar, and not generated by simply transposing a written pattern.
Recording overview
Recording a Guitar track is unlike the other tracks, where you
play the exact notes of a melody line. With Guitar tracks you play
the keys corresponding to the strumming modes, or play an
arpeggio by using the keys corresponding to the six strings (and
the special keys corresponding to the root and fifth notes). The
following sections describe the various control keys.
Reference
Next measure, first measure
The Style Element enters at the beginning of the
next measure, and begins from the first measure
of the new pattern. Available on both Fills and
Variations.
122
Style Record mode
Main page - Guitar Mode
Recording strumming types
Recording RX Noises
The octave from C2 to B2 is devoted to selecting a strumming
type. By pressing these keys, you play fast strumming samples:
Further on, the upper octaves are used to trigger RX Noises:
Full Down Slow Mute
Up Mute 4-Strings
Full Up Mute
Full Down Mute
Down Mute 4-Strings
RX Noises
Full Down
Up 4-Strings
Selecting a Capo
Full Down
Slow
Full Up
Down 4-Strings
Full Up Slow
Full Down Mute Body
Recording single strings
The octave from C3 to B3 is devoted to selecting a single string
(or more than one) for playing arpeggios or power chords. You
can either play a free arpeggio with the six guitar chords assigned
to the C~A keys, or play one of the faster sampled arpeggios on
the higher keys. The root note is always available on the C# key,
while the fifth note is always assigned to the D# key; with them,
you can always play the lowest notes of an arpeggio. This octave
also includes an ‘all mute’ key (F#):
All Mute
Recognized
Chord Fifth
Recognized
Chord Root
VI String (E)
V String (A)
IV String (D)
Power Chord
Full Down/Up
I String (e)
II String (B)
III String (G)
Together with strumming types, single strings and RX Noises,
you can choose a capo (capotasto). Note that this might prevent
some single strings to sound, depending on the composed
chord. You can always see with strings are playing and which are
not, as described in the “Diagram” section below.
Choosing a Key/Chord
The pattern is recorded in the key indicated by the Key/Chord
pair of parameters. However, this parameter is only considered
during playback of the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements.
With Intro 1 and Ending 1 (both Chord Variation 1 and 2) you
can also enter a chord progression. This is done with the lowest
MIDI octave (C-1 ~ B-1). Chord types are inserted by using
velocity, as shown in the following table:
Vel.
Chord Type
Vel.
Chord Type
1
Major
2
Major 6th
3
Major 7th
4
Major 7th flatted 5th
5
Suspended 4th
6
Suspended 2nd
7
Major 7th suspended 4th
8
Minor
9
Minor 6th
10
Minor 7th
11
Minor 7th flatted 5th
12
Minor major 7th
13
Dominant 7th
14
7th flatted 5th
15
7th suspended 4th
16
Dimished
17
Diminished major 7th
18
Augmented
19
Augmented 7th
20
Augmented major 7th
21
Major w/o 3rd
22
Major w/o 3rd and 5th
23
Flatted 5th
24
Diminished 7th
Down/Up 4-Strings
Playing back the pattern
When in Stye Play mode, the recorded Guitar pattern is transposed according to the chord recognized on the keyboard. The
way it is transposed depends on the programmed pattern, with
the chosen positions, strumming mods, etc…
Style Record mode
Style Record procedure
Guitar mode parameters
Here is a detailed description of the parameters of the Guitar
Mode page.
123
Style Record procedure
There are two different methods for recording a Style: Realtime
and Step.
This parameter pair allows you to define the track’s original key
and chord type. This parameter works in a different way than the
other tracks. While with other tracks this is always the reference
key used for NTT transposition, with Guitar tracks there is a difference, whether you are recording a Chord Variation contained
in an Intro 1 or Ending 1 Style Element, or any other Chord
Variation:
•
With Intro 1 and Ending 1, this chord will be used as the
reference key for the chord progression.
•
With all the other Chord Variations, this chord will be used
only for listening during recording. During playback in
Style Play mode, the chord will follow chord recognition.
•
Realtime Recording allows you to record Style patterns in
realtime.
•
Step Recording allows you to create a new Style by entering
single notes or chords in each track. This is very useful
when transcribing an existing score, or needing a higher
grade of detail, and is particularly suitable to create drum
and percussion tracks.
In addition, you can program a Style on a personal computer,
and then import it via the Import function (see “Import: Import
SMF” on page 138).
Preparing to record
Capo (0, I…X)
1.
If you like to edit an existing Style, select that Style.
A capo (from the Italian “capotasto”, “head of fingerboard”) is a
movable bar attached to the fingerboard of the guitar, to uniformly raise the pitch of all the strings. Its use makes the strings
shorter, therefore changing the timbre and position of the
chords (but not its shape).
2.
Press the RECORD button to enter the Style Record mode.
You are prompted to select either the Current Style, or a
New Style.
0
Open string – no capo.
I…X
Position of the capo over the fingerboard (i.e., “I”
corresponds to the first fret, “II” to the second
one, and so on).
Diagram
Select “record/edit Current Style” if you want to edit the
current Style, or make a new Style starting from an existing
one. Select “Record New Style” if you want to start from
scratch with an empty Style.
3.
After you select your preferred option, the main page of the
Style Record mode will appear.
4.
Select the Element (Style Element) and Chord Var (Chord
Variation) parameters, to select the Chord Variation to be
recorded/edited.
The diagram shows how a chord would be composed on the fingerboard. Here is the meaning of the various symbols:
Red dot
Fingered string (i.e., played note).
White dot
Fifth, playing on the D#2 key.
X
Non played or muted note.
Light grey bar Barré (a finger crossing all the strings, like a
mobile capo).
Note: For more information on the Style Elements and Chord
Variations, and the Style structure in general, see “The Style
structure” on page 114.
5.
Use the Rec Length (Recording Length) parameter to set
the length (in measures) of the pattern to record.
6.
Use the Meter parameter to set the Style Element’s meter
(time signature).
Dark grey bar Capo.
Note: You can edit this parameter only if you selected the
“Record New Style” option when entering the Record mode,
or when editing an empty Style Element.
7.
Select the Tempo parameter and set the tempo.
8.
Touch the Record 2 tab to see the Sounds area. Here you
can assign the right Sound to each Style track. You cannot
select Digital Drawbars Sounds. (For more details, see
“Sounds area” on page 120).
9.
If needed, set the Octave Transpose for each track. Note:
The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes coming from
the keyboard, and not from the arranger.
10. At this point, if you want to do a Realtime Recording go on
reading “Realtime Record procedure” below. Otherwise, if
you prefer to do a Step Record, jump to “Step Record procedure” on page 124.
Reference
Key/Chord
124
Style Record mode
Style Record procedure
Realtime Record procedure
Step Record procedure
1.
Select the track to record. Its status icon will turn to
‘Record’. (For more details, see “Tracks volume/status area”
on page 120).
1.
While in the main page of the Style Record mode, select the
“Overdub Step Recording” command from the page menu,
to enter the Overdub Step Record mode.
Note: When entering the Record mode, a track is already
in Record status. When you press START/STOP after
entering the Record mode, you can immediately start
recording.
2.
The “Pos” parameter shows the current position.
• If you do not want to insert a note or chord at the current
position, insert a rest instead, as shown in step 4.
• To jump to the next measure, filling the remaining beats
with rests, touch the Next M. button in the display.
If you like, you can try your part before recording:
• Mute the track, by repeatedly touching its icon status,
until the
3.
To change the step value, use the “Step Time values” area in
the display.
4.
Insert a note, rest or chord at the current position.
(Mute) status icon appears.
• Press START/STOP to let any recorded track play back,
and practice on the keyboard.
• To insert a single note, just play it on the keyboard. The
inserted note length will match the step length. You may
change the velocity and relative duration of the note, by
editing the “Duration” and “Velocity” parameters (see
page 144).
• When you have finished practicing, press START/STOP to
stop the arranger, and unmute the track by repeatedly
touching its icon status, until the
appears again.
2.
(Record) status icon
While the shown status icon is Record, press START/STOP
to begin recording. Depending on the “Metro” (metronome) option you selected, a 1- or 2-bars precount may
play before the recording actually begins. When it begins,
play freely. The pattern will last for some measures, according to the Rec Length value, then restart.
• To insert a rest, just touch the Rest button in the display.
Its length will match the step value.
Since the recording will happen in overdub, you can add
notes on any following passage. This is very useful to record
different percussive instruments at any cycle on a Drum or
Percussion track.
• To insert a chord or a second voice, see “Chords and second voices in Step Record mode” below.
Note: While recording, track’s Keyboard Range (see
page 136) is ignored, and the track can play over the whole
keyboard range. The Local parameter (see “Local Control
On” on page 228) is also automatically set to On, to allow
playing on the keyboard.
3.
• To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one, touch
the Tie button in the display. A note will be inserted, tied to
the previous one, with exactly the same name. You don’t
need to play it on the keyboard again.
5.
After inserting a new event, you may go back by touching
the Back button in the display. This will delete the previously inserted event, and set the step in edit again.
6.
When the end of the pattern is reached, the “End of Loop”
event is shown, and the recording restarts from the
“001.01.000” position. Any note exceeding the pattern
length, inserted at its end, will be reduced to fit the total
length of the pattern.
When finished recording, press START/STOP to stop the
arranger. Select a different track, and go on recording the
full Chord Variation.
At this point, you may go on, inserting new events in overdub mode (the previously inserted events will not be
deleted). This is very useful when recording a drum or percussion track, where you may want to record the bass drum
on a first cycle, the snare drum on the second cycle, and the
hi-hat and cymbals during the following cycles.
Note: You can select a different track only when the arranger
is not running.
4.
5.
When finished recording the Chord Variation, select a different Chord Variation or Style Element to go on recording
the full Style.
When finished recording the new Style, select the “Write
Style” command from the page menu, to open the Write
Style dialog box (see “Write Style dialog box” on page 141)
and save it to memory.
7.
When finished recording, touch the Done button in the
display to exit the Step Record mode.
A dialog box appears, asking you to either cancel, discard
or save the changes.
To exit the Style Record mode without saving any change,
select the “Exit from Record” command from the page
menu, or press the RECORD button.
If you touch Cancel, exit is canceled, and you can continue
editing. If you choose No, changes are not saved, and the
Step Record window is closed. If you choose Yes, changes
are saved, and the Step Record window is closed.
Style Record mode
Style Record procedure
9.
When back to the main page of the Style Record mode, you
may turn all tracks to the play status, then press START/
STOP to listen to the Style. Press START/STOP again to
stop the playback.
Ex.2:
From the main page of the Style Record mode, select either
the “Write Style” or the “Exit from Record” command to
exit from the Style record mode, respectively by saving the
Style to memory (see “Write Style dialog box” on
page 141), or by canceling any change.
Chords and second voices in Step Record
mode
Step Time =
Step Time =
On
Press C
On
Press G (continue holding C)
1.
Edit the first note’s Velocity value.
2.
Press the first note and keep it pressed.
3.
Edit the second note’s Velocity value.
4.
Press the second note and keep it pressed.
5.
Edit the third note’s Velocity value.
6.
Press the third note, then release all notes.
Entering a second voice. You can insert passages where one note
is kept pressed, while another voice moves freely.
Off
Release G and C
Ex.3:
Step Time =
Entering a chord made of notes with different velocity values.
You can make the upper or lower note of a chord, for example,
louder than the remaining ones, to let the most important stand
out from the chord. Here is how to insert a three-note chord:
Tie
You are not obliged to insert single notes in a track. There are
several ways to insert chords and double voices. Lets look at
some.
Entering a chord. Simply play a chord instead of a single note.
The event name will be the first note of the chord you pressed,
followed by the “…” abbreviation.
8.
125
On
Press F and C
Step Time =
Off
Release F
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
Off
Release G
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
On
Press E
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
On
Press G
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
On
Press D
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
Off
Release D
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
Off
Release E and C
Step Time =
Reference
Ex. 1:
On
Press E and C
Off
Release E (continue holding C)
Step Time =
On
Press G
Off
Release G and C
126
Style Record mode
Edit menu
Other pages have a slightly different structure.
Edit menu
Operating mode
Edit section
Page menu
icon
From any page (apart for Step Record), press the MENU button
to open the Style Record edit menu. This menu gives access to
the various Style Record edit sections.
When in the menu, select an edit section, or press EXIT to exit
the menu and return to the main page. To return to the main
page, you can also select the Main Page menu item.
Parameters
area
When in an edit page, press the EXIT button to return to the
main page of the Style Record mode.
Track status
Tabs
Operating mode
This indicates that the instrument is in Style Record mode.
Edit section
This identifies the current edit section, corresponding to one of
the items of the edit menu (see “Edit menu” on page 126).
Selected Style Element
Note: While the Style is in play, you cannot access the Edit section
pages from the main page (see page 117). Stop the playback before
pressing MENU.
Note: When switching from the Edit section pages (Quantize,
Transpose, Velocity, Delete) to the other pages, or vice-versa, the
Style (if in play) is automatically stopped.
In Style Record mode, edits always happen on the selected Style
Element.
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 141).
Parameters area
Each page contains various parameters. Use the tabs to select
one of the available pages. For detailed information on the various types of parameters, see sections starting from page 127.
Edit page structure
Most edit pages share some basic elements.
Operating mode
Edit section
Track status
Selected Style
Element
Page menu
icon
Selected
track info
Parameters
area
Tabs
Use these buttons to mute/unmute tracks while editing.
Tabs
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
Style Record mode
Event Edit: Event Edit
127
Position
Event Edit: Event Edit
Position of the event, expressed in the form ‘aaa.bb.ccc’:
The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI
event of the selected Chord Variation. You can, for example,
replace a note with a different one, or change its playing strength
(i.e., velocity value). See “Event Edit procedure” on page 128 for
more information on the event editing procedure.
Page sub-header
Page header
Page menu icon
•
•
•
‘aaa’ is the measure
‘bb’ is the beat
‘ccc’ is the tick (each quarter beat = 384 ticks)
You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different position. You can edit a position in either of the following ways:
(a) select the parameter, and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls
to change the value, or
(b) select the parameter, then touch it again; the numeric keypad will appear. Enter the new position by dialing in the
three parts of the number, separated by a dot. Zeroes at the
beginning can be omitted, as well as the least important
parts of the number. For example, to enter position
002.02.193, dial “2.2.193”; to enter position 002.04.000 dial
“2.4”; to enter position 002.01.000, simply dial “2”.
Event list
Track popup menu
Type, Value 1, Value 2
Tabs
Scrollbar
Type and values of the event shown in the display. Depending on
the selected event, the value may change. This parameter also
shows the (greyed-out, so non editable) “CC#11” (Expression)
event at the beginning of the pattern, and the “End Of Loop”
marking, when the end of a track is reached.
Page header
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu. See “Page menu” on
page 141.
Page sub-header
This area shows some performing info on the Song.
Event type
Value 1
Value 2
Note
Note name
Velocity
Ctrl
Control Change number
Control Change value
Bend
Bending value
–
To change the event type, select the Type parameter, then use the
TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a different event type. A set of
default values will be automatically assigned to the event.
To select and edit the event’s value, select the corresponding
parameter, and use TEMPO/VALUE controls.
Length
Selected track
Selected Style
Element
Selected Chord
Variation
Selected track
Name of the track in edit. Use the Track pop-up menu to select
one of the Style tracks.
SE/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Selected Style Element and Chord Variation. This parameter
cannot be edited. To select a different Style Element and Chord
Variation, press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style
Record mode (see “Main page - Record 1” on page 117).
Event list
Use the Event list to see all events contained in the selected track
in the selected Style Element.
Use the scrollbar to browse through the events. You can also
scroll by using the SHIFT + DIAL combination.
Touch the event to be selected. Selected events are highlighted
and can be heard.
Length of the selected Note event. The value format is the same
as the Position value. This is only available for Note events.
Note: If you change a length of “000.00.000” to a different value,
you can’t go back to the original value. This rather uncommon
zero-length value may be found in some drum or percussion tracks.
Scrollbar
Use the scrollbar to browse the event through the list. (As an
alternative, use Shift + Dial).
Other elements
Track pop-up menu
Use this pop-up menu to select the track to edit, inside the current Chord Variation.
Drum…Acc5 Style track.
Reference
See “Page header” on page 117.
128
Style Record mode
Event Edit: Event Edit
Go Meas.
9.
While the Style is not running, touch this button to open the Go
to Measure dialog box:
10. Select an event to be edited by touching it in the display.
Scroll though the various events by using the scrollbar.
This is usually a note, that you can edit.
For more information on the event types and their values, see “Event Edit: Event Edit” on page 127.
11. Edit the event.
When in this dialog box, select a target measure, and touch OK.
The first event available in the target measure will be selected.
• Select the “M” parameter. Use TEMPO/VALUE controls
to change the event’s position.
Insert
• Select the Type parameter. You may use TEMPO/VALUE
controls to change the event type, as well as its Value 1 and
Value 2.
Touch the Insert button in the display to insert a new event at the
current shown Position. The default values are Type = Note,
Pitch = C4, Velocity = 100, Length = 192.
Delete
Touch the Delete button in the display to delete the event
selected in the display.
• If a Note event is selected, select the Length parameter,
and use TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the event’s
length.
12. You may use the Go Meas. command to go to a different
measure (see “Go Meas.” on page 128)
13. As described in step 4, you may press START/STOP to lis-
Event Edit procedure
Here is the general procedure to follow for the event editing.
ten how the pattern sounds after your changes. Press
START/STOP again to stop the pattern running.
14. Touch the Insert button in the display to insert an event at
1.
Select the Style to edit, and press the RECORD button.
Select the “Current Style” option to enter recording. The
main page of the Style Record mode will appear.
the Position shown in the display (a Note event with default
values will be inserted). Touch the Delete button in the display to delete the selected event.
2.
Select the “Element (Style Element)” and “Chord Var
(Chord Variation)” parameters.
15. When editing is complete, you may select a different track
Note: For more information on the Style Elements and Chord
Variations, and the Style structure in general, see “The Style
structure” on page 114.
16. When finished editing the selected Chord Variation, press
3.
Press MENU, and select the Event Edit section. The Event
Edit page appears (see “Event Edit: Event Edit” on page 127
for more information).
4.
Press START/STOP to listen to the selected Chord Variation. Press START/STOP to stop it. Chord Scanning does
not work, so you will listen the pattern at the original Key/
Chord.
5.
Touch the Filter tab to select the Filter page, and uncheck
the filters for the event types you wish to see in the display
(see “Event Edit: Filter” on page 129 for more information).
6.
Touch the Event Edit tab to go back to the Event Edit page.
7.
Use the Track pop-up menu to select the track to edit (see
“Track pop-up menu” on page 127).
8.
The list of events contained in the selected track (inside the
Chord Variation selected on step 2) will appear in the display. Some events on the beginning of the Chord Variations, as well as the “EndOfTrk” event (marking its ending
point) cannot be edited, therefore appearing in grey.
to edit (go to step 7).
EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record
mode, then go to step 2 to select and edit a different Chord
Variation.
17. When finished editing the whole Style, select the “Write
Style” command from the page menu to open the Write
Style dialog box (see “Write Style dialog box” on page 141),
or select the “Exit from Record” command to cancel all
changes.
• Touch the
(Text Edit) button to enter the Text Edit
dialog box. Enter a name and confirm by selecting OK.
• Select a target memory location where to save the Style.
The name of the Style already existing at the selected location is shown after the Style Bank-Location number.
Warning: If you select an existing Style and confirm writing,
the older Style is deleted and replaced by the new one. Save
the Styles you don’t want to lose to a storage device, before
overwriting them.
18. Touch OK to save the Style to the internal memory, or Can-
cel to delete any changes made in Style Record mode. When
the “Are you sure?” message appears, touch OK to confirm,
or Cancel to go back to the “Write Style” dialog box.
Style Record mode
Event Edit: Filter
129
Event Edit: Filter
Style Edit: Quantize
This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in
the Event Edit page.
The quantize function may be used to correct any timing mistake after recording, or to give the pattern a “groovy” feeling.
Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in
the Event Edit page.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Note: Some of the events are “ghosted”, and non editable, since the
corresponding events are not editable in a Style.
Use this parameter to select a track.
All
Note/RX Noise
Control
Track
All tracks selected.
Notes and RX Noises.
Drum…Acc5 Selected track.
Control Change events. Only the following Control Change numbers are allowed with Styles.
E / CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Control function
CC# (Control Change Number)
Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Variation for editing.
1
Resolution
Modulation 2
2
Pan
10
Expression(a)
11
CC#12
12
This parameter sets the quantization after recording. For example, when you select 1/8, all notes are moved to the nearest 1/8
division. When you select 1/4, all notes are moved to the nearest
1/4 division.
CC#13
13
Damper
64
Filter Resonance
71
Low Pass Filter Cutoff
74
CC#80
80
CC#81
81
CC#82
82
(a). Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position
(001.01.000). An Expression value is already among the default
“header” parameters of the Style Element.
Tempo/Meter Tempo and Meter (time signature) changes (Master Track only).
Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend events.
No quantization
Reference
Modulation 1
1/8
1/4
(1/32)… (1/4)
Grid resolution, in musical values. A “b…f ” character added after the value means swing-quantization. A “3” means triplet.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to quantize.
If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to
select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the End
at 5.01.000.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to quantize. If you select the same note as the Bottom and
Top parameters, you can select a single percussive instrument in
a Drum or Percussion track.
130
Style Record mode
Style Edit: Transpose
Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percussion track is selected.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Track status icon
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to be transposed. If you select the same note as the Bottom
and Top parameters, you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track. Since in a Drum Kit each
instrument is assigned to a different note of the scale, transposing a percussive instrument means assigning the part to a different instrument.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Track status icon
Track names
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Style Edit: Transpose
Track names
In this page you can transpose the selected track(s).
Note: After transposing, please don’t forget to readjust the “Key/
Chord” parameter in the main page of the Style Record mode (see
page 118).
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Style Edit: Velocity
In this page you can change the velocity (dynamics) value of
notes in the selected track. An Advanced mode is available,
allowing you to select a velocity curve for the selected range.
This is useful to create fade-ins or fade-outs.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
E / CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Variation for editing.
Track
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Use this parameter to select a track.
Note: When an RX Sound is assigned to the track being edited, the
resulting sound may change, since this kind of Sounds is made of
several different layers triggered by different velocity values.
All
All tracks selected, apart for tracks set in Drum
mode (like the Drum and Percussion tracks). The
whole selected Chord Variation will be transposed.
Drum…Acc5 Single selected track.
Value
Also, a fade-out may result in the level “jumping” up next to the
zero, since a higher-level layer may be selected by low velocity values.
Track
Use this parameter to select a track.
Transpose value (±127 semitones).
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to be transposed.
If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to
select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the End
at 5.01.000.
All
All tracks selected. The velocity for all notes of
the whole selected Chord Variation will be
changed.
Drum…Acc5 Selected track.
E / CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Variation for editing.
Style Record mode
Style Edit: Cut
131
Track status icon
Value
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Velocity change value (±127).
Play status. The track can be heard.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to be modified.
If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to
select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the End
at 5.01.000.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to be modified. If you select the same note as the Bottom
and Top parameters, you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track.
Advanced
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Track names
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Style Edit: Cut
This function lets you quickly delete a selected measure (or a
series of measures) from the selected Chord Variation. All following events are moved back, to replace the cut measure(s).
When this checkbox is checked, the “Intensity”, “Curve”, “Start
Velocity Value” and “End Velocity Value” parameters can be
edited.
Intensity
(Only available in Advanced mode). Use this parameter to specify
the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the
curve you specify in “Curve”.
0…100%
Intensity value. With a setting of 0 [%], the velocity will not change. With a setting of 100 [%], the
velocity will be changed the most.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Curve
E / CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
(Only available in Advanced mode). Use this parameter to select
one of the six curves, and to specify how the velocity will change
over time.
Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Variation for editing.
Start
Curve 1
Curve 2
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
1
Start
Value
1
End
Value
Start
Value
First measure to be cut.
Curve 3
127
1
End
Value
Length
Start
Value
End
Value
Number of measures to be cut.
Execute
Curve 5
Curve 4
Curve 6
127
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
1
Start
Value
End
Value
1
Start
Value
End
Value
1
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
RANDOM
Start
Value
Track status icon
End
Value
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Start / End Vel. Value
(Only available in Advanced mode). Velocity change at the starting and ending ticks of the selected range.
0…100
Velocity change in percentage.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Track names
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Reference
Start Value = 0%, End Value = 100%
132
Style Record mode
Style Edit: Delete
Note: Some CC data are automatically removed
during recording. See the table on page 116 for
more information on the allowed data.
Style Edit: Delete
This page is where you can delete MIDI events out of the Style.
This function does not remove measures from the pattern. To
remove whole measure, use the Cut function (see “Style Edit:
Cut” on page 131)
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to delete.
If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you want to
select it all, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000, and the End
at 5.01.000.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to delete. If you select the same note as the Bottom and
Top parameters, you can select a single percussive instrument in
a Drum or Percussion track.
Note: These parameters are available only when the All or Note
option is selected.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Execute
E / CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Variation for editing.
Track status icon
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Track
Use this parameter to select a track.
Play status. The track can be heard.
All
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
All tracks selected. After deletion, the selected
Chord Variation will remain empty.
Drum…Acc5 Selected track.
Track names
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Event
Type of MIDI event to delete.
All
All events. The measures are not removed from
the Chord Variation.
Style Edit: Delete All
Note
All notes in the selected range.
Dup.Note
All duplicate notes. When two notes with the
same pitch are encountered on the same tick, the
one with the lowest velocity is deleted.
This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style Element or
Chord Variation, or the whole Style.
After Touch
After Touch events.
Note: This kind of data is automatically removed
during recording.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend events.
Prog.Change Program Change events, excluding the bundled
Control Change #00 (Bank Select MSB) and #32
(Bank Select LSB).
Note: This kind of data is automatically removed
during recording.
Ctl.Change
All Control Change events, for example Bank
Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft Pedal…
CC00/32…CC127
Single Control Change events. Double Control
Change numbers (like 00/32) are MSB/LSB bundles.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Track
All
All tracks of the selected Style, Style Element or
Chord Variation.
Drum-Acc5
Single track of the selected Style, Style Element or
Chord Variation.
Style Record mode
Style Edit: Copy from Style
133
E / CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
From… To E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Variation for editing.
Use these parameters to select the source and target Style Elements or Chord Variations.
All
Note: You can’t copy from a Variation to a different Style Element
(or vice-versa), because of their different structure.
All Style Elements, i.e. the whole Style. When E/
Track=All and CV=All, the whole Style is deleted,
and all parameters are set to the default status.
All
All Style Elements, i.e. the whole Style. You can’t
change the target, that is automatically set to All.
Var1…End2
Single Style Element.
Var1…CountIn
Single Style Element.
V1-CV1…CI-CV2
V1-CV1…E2-CV2
Single Chord Variation.
Single Chord Variation.
Execute
From… To Track
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Use this parameter to select the source and target track to copy.
You can double a track, to strengthen a pattern.
Track status icon
All
All tracks of the selected Style, Style Element or
Chord Variation.
Drum-Acc5
Single track of the selected Style, Style Element or
Chord Variation.
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Track names
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Track status icon
Status of tracks. Touch this icon to change the status.
Style Edit: Copy from Style
Warning: The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location
(overwrite).
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Track names
Under the buttons, a label for each track is shown.
Copying to a Chord Variation of a different
length
You can copy a Chord Variation to a different one of a different
length. Just keep in mind the following:
•
If the source length is a divider of the target length, the
source Chord Variation will be multiplied to fit the target
Chord Variation. For example, if the source is 4-measures
long, and the target 8-measures, the source will be copied
two times.
1 2 3 4
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too
many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is aborted.
Note: When you copy over an existing Chord Variation, Program
Change data is not copied, to leave the original Sounds unchanged
for that Chord Variation.
From Style
Choose this option to select the source Style to copy the track,
Chord Variation or Style Element from. Touch the Select button
to open the Style Select window and select the source Style.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
•
If the source length is not a divider of the target length, the
source Chord Variation will be copied for as many measures as can fit the target Chord Variation. For example, if
the source is 6-measures long, and the target 8-measures,
Reference
Here you can copy a track, Chord Variation or Style Element
inside the same Style, or from a different one. Furthermore, you
can copy a whole Style.
Play status. The track can be heard.
134
Style Record mode
Style Edit: Copy from Pad
the source will be copied once, then the first 2 measures
will be copied to fit the remaining 2 measures.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
Note: Avoid copying to a Chord Variation with a different meter
(time signature), for example a 4/4 Chord Variation onto a 3/4
one.
Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too
many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is aborted.
Note: When you copy over an existing Chord Variation, Program
Change data is not copied, to leave the original Sounds unchanged
for that Chord Variation.
From Pad
Choose this option to select the source Pad to copy the Chord
Variation from. Touch the Select button to open the Pad Select
window and select the source Pad.
From CV (Chord Variation)
Style Edit: Copy from Pad
Here you can copy a Chord Variation from a Pad. Furthermore,
you can copy a whole Pad.
Warning: The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location
(overwrite).
Use this parameter to select the source Chord Variation.
All
All Chord Variations, i.e. the whole Pad. You can’t
change the target, that is automatically set to All.
CV1…CV6
Single Chord Variation.
To CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the
current Style.
CV1…CV6
Target Chord Variation. Automatically set to All if
the “From CV” parameter is also set to All.
To Track
Use this parameter to select the target track to copy.
All
All tracks of the selected Style, Style Element or
Chord Variation.
Drum-Acc5
Single track of the selected Style, Style Element or
Chord Variation.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Style Record mode
Style Element Track Controls: Sound/Expression
In this page you can assign a different Sound to each track of the
selected Style Element. Each Style Element can have different
Sound; after saving the new Style, please don’t forget to check
the “Original Style Sounds” parameter in the Style Play mode
(see page 90), to let the Style select the Sound bypassing the Style
Performance settings.
In this page you can also check and modify the Expression
(CC#11) value for each of the Style Element tracks. This lets you
reduce the relative level of a track in a single Style Element, without reducing the overall Volume of the Style. This is a very useful
control, when you have different Sounds assigned to the same
track in different Style Elements, and the internal level of these
Sounds must be different.
Expression
Use these knobs to set the Expression (CC#11) value for the corresponding track. This value can be seen at the beginning of the
Event Edit list (see “Event Edit: Event Edit” on page 127).
Different Expression values can be defined for each Style Element. This way, you can set a different volume in each Style Element, relative to the general Volume value set in the Style
Header.
Expression leveling
You can quickly and easily adjust the Expression level of all
tracks in a Style Element (Variation, Intro…). This allows for a
more precise control over the volume level of all Style Element.
1.
While in this page, select one of the Style Elements by
pressing its button in the control panel.
Selected Style Element
When in this page, press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …
ENDING3).
Expression level
To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element, use
the “Copy Sound” and “Copy Expression” commands from the
page menu (see “Copy Sounds dialog box” and “Copy Expression dialog box” starting from page 142).
2.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and move any Assignable
Slider to proportionally change the Expression value of all
Style Variation tracks.
3.
Release the SHIFT button.
Selected Track Info area
4.
Repeat the above operation with all the desired Style Elements.
See “Selected track info area” on page 118 for detailed information.
Sounds area
See “Sounds area” on page 120 for detailed information.
Expression area
Expression Monitor
You can use these indicators to check if CC#11 (Expression)
messages are contained in a track. Expression messages contained in a track can vary the volume of the track. It is very difficult to catch them out – unless you carefully read all the events
in the Event Edit page.
This monitor should help you keeping track of them, and let you
access Event Edit only on the tracks containing the messages.
Press the START/STOP button to start playback, and look at the
indicators. When one of them lights up, you can enter Event Edit
on the corresponding track, and edit or remove the Expression
messages.
Note: A track’s volume may be changed by an Expression event
contained in a track. To check if any of these events exist in a track,
let the Style Element play and look at the Expression Monitor in
this same page. If one or more Expression events are found, go to
the Event Edit page and delete it (or them)
Volume area
Use these controls to set the volume and status of each track. See
page 120 for more information.
The Volume value is the same for the whole Style. Use the
Expression controls to adjust the relative balance between tracks
in each Style Element.
Reference
Style Element Track Controls: Sound/
Expression
135
136
Style Record mode
Style Element Track Controls: Keyboard Range
Style Element Track Controls: Keyboard
Range
Style Element Track Controls: Noise/
Guitar
The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern note
that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch, compared to the original acoustic instrument, when transposed by
the arranger. This will result in a more natural sound for each
accompaniment instrument.
The Noise/Guitar page is where you can set the RX Noise level
and the ‘human feel’ of Guitar tracks.
For example, the lower limit for a guitar is E2. If you play a chord
under the E2, the transposed pattern could exceed this limit, and
sound unnatural. A Bottom limit set to E2 for the guitar track
will solve the problem.
Different Keyboard Range values can be set for each Style Element.
RX Noise
Use these controls to adjust the volume of RX Noises in the corresponding tracks. This control applies to all types of tracks
(provided the Sound includes RX Noises).
Humanize GTR
Note: The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording. The selected
track can play on the full range of the keyboard.
When in this page, press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …
ENDING3).
To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element, use
the “Copy Keyboard Range” command from the page menu (see
“Copy Key Range dialog box” on page 143).
Top/Bottom
Use these controls to apply a random value to the position,
velocity and length of notes of Guitar tracks (see “Track Type”
on page 137). This control has no effect on other types of track.
Style Element Chord Table: Chord Table
This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each
of the most important recognized chord. When a chord is recognized, the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically
selected by the arranger to play the accompaniment.
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range for the corresponding track of the current Style Element.
Volume area
Use these controls to set the volume and status of each track. See
page 120 for more information.
When in this page, press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …
ENDING3).
Chord / Chord Variation
Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the
most important chords.
Style Record mode
Style Track Controls: Type/Trigger/Tension
Style Track Controls: Type/Trigger/Tension
In this page you can set the Mode, Retrigger mode for the Style
tracks, and activate/deactivate the Tension for the Accompaniment tracks.
137
Tension
Tension adds notes (a 9th, 11th and/or 13th) that have actually
been played to the accompaniment, even if they haven't been
written in the Style pattern. This parameter specifies whether or
not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added
to the Acc-type tracks.
On
The Tension will be added.
Off
No Tension will be added.
Import: Import Groove
When in this page, press the corresponding button on the control panel to select a Style Element (VARIATION1 …
ENDING3).
The Import Groove function allows the loading of MIDI
Grooves (“.GRV” files) generated by the Slice function (see the
“Time Slice” page of the Sampling mode, in the “Advanced Edit”
addendum in the Accessory CD). By importing these data to a
track, and assigning the Sound based on the sliced samples to the
same track, you can play the original audio groove, and freely
change its tempo.
Track Type
Drum
Drum track. This type of track is not transposed
by the arranger, and is used for Drum Kits made
of Drum sounds. It can be affected by the Drum
Mapping of the Style Play mode (see “Drum
Mapping (Var.1…Var.4)” on page 107).
Perc
Percussion track. This type of track cannot be
transposed, and is used for Drum Kit made of
Percussion sounds. It is NOT affected by the
Drum Mapping.
Bass
Bass track. This type of track always plays the
root when changing chord.
Note: After importing a groove generated by a melody line (not by
a percussive groove), the imported groove and samples will not be
transposed together with the other Style tracks. Audio data cannot
be transposed by the arranger.
Acc
Accompaniment track. This type of track can be
used freely, for melodic or harmonic accompaniment patterns.
Note: Please execute the Import Groove operation before turning
the instrument off. All “.GRV” files generated by a Time Slice operation are deleted when turning the instrument off.
Gtr
Guitar track. This type of track uses Guitar Mode
to create guitar strumming (see “Main page Guitar Mode” on page 121). When this type is
selected, the “Tension” parameter can no longer
be edited.
From
Use this parameter to select one of the MIDI Groove patterns
(“.GRV” files) generated when saving data after a Time Slice
operation.
Trigger Mode
To E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
This setting lets you define how Bass and Acc-type tracks are
retriggered when the chord is changed.
Use this parameter to select the target Style Element and Chord
Variation.
Off
Each time you play a new chord, current notes
will be stopped. The track will remain silent until
a new note will be encountered in the pattern.
Rt
(Retrigger) The sound will be stopped, and new
notes matching the recognized chord will be
played back.
Rp
(Repitch) New notes matching the recognized
chord will be played back, by repitching notes
already playing. There will be no break in the
sound. This is very useful on Guitar and Bass
tracks.
To Track
Use this parameter to select the target track inside the selected
Chord Variation. The Percussion track is usually suggested,
since the Drum track is still suitable for standard Drum Kit
sounds (count-in, break etc.). After importing the MIDI Groove
pattern, assign the Sound, to which the sliced samples are
assigned, to the track playing the MIDI Groove pattern.
Reference
Use this parameter to set the type of the corresponding track.
138
Style Record mode
Import: Import SMF
Import: Import SMF
The Import SMF function allows you to import MIDI data from
a Standard MIDI File (SMF) created on your preferred external
sequencer, and transform them in a Chord Variation.
Note: You cannot use this function to import data from any generic
Song. The Standard MIDI File to be imported must be programmed as if it was one of Pa2X’s Chord Variations.
• Meter (time signature) Change is not allowed, therefore not
recognized.
• The Chord Variation length is the same as the imported SMF.
You can change length by changing the value of the CV Length
parameter, on the main page of the Style Record mode.
Hint: If a note extends beyond the last measure of the Chord Variation, an additional measure is appended (for example, if a note
extends after the end of the fourth measure in a 4-measure pattern,
a 5-measure Chord Variation will be generated). If so, change the
CV Length value to reset the Chord Variation length. The exceeding
note will be cut, to fit the new pattern length.
When programming a Chord Variation on an external
sequencer, please assign each Style track to the correct MIDI
channel, according to the following table.
Style Track
When importing an SMF, parameters like CV Length, Meter,
Tempo Changes, Program Changes and Expression are recognized. These parameters will be imported as the header of the
Style Element containing the Chord Variation, provided the
“Initialize” parameter is checked, or the Style Element is empty.
MIDI Channel
Bass
09
Drum
10
Percussion
11
Accompaniment 1
12
Accompaniment 2
13
Accompaniment 3
14
Accompaniment 4
15
Accompaniment 5
16
Hint: It is a good idea to check the “Initialize” parameter when
importing the first Chord Variation of a Style Element, and
uncheck it when importing the following Chord Variations.
Note: Only SMF in format 0 can be loaded.
• Sounds assigned to each track can be imported, provided the
Program Change, Bank Select MSB and LSB events are on the
first ‘tick’ of the SMF. These data are loaded in the Style Element’s header, and not as Sounds assigned to the Style Performance.
This is the name of the Standard MIDI File to be loaded. Touch
the Select button to open the file selector, and select an “.SMF”
file.
Note: Sounds in the Style Element header can be overridden by
Sounds assigned to the Style Performance, by checking the “Original Style Sound” parameter in the main page of the Style Play
mode (Style Track view).
Touch this button to open the file selector and load the SMF.
• If the above data was not found on the first ‘tick’ of the
imported SMF, Sounds must be manually assigned to each track.
You can do this in the “Record 1” or “Record 2”, or the “Sound/
Expression” page of the Style Record mode,.
• Key/Chord, Chord Table, Expression, and any other Style Variation parameter, must be manually programmed in the relevant
Style Record pages.
• The starting Tempo, and each track’s Volume, must be programmed as Style Performance data, and then saved in the Style
Performance.
From Song
Select
Initialize
Check this parameter if you want all settings of the target Style
Element (i.e., Key/Chord, Chord Table, Sounds…) are reset
when loading the SMF.
Hint: It is a good idea to check the “Initialize” parameter when
importing the first Chord Variation of a Style Element, and
uncheck it when importing the following Chord Variations.
To E/CV
Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation.
Execute
After setting all parameters in this page, touch this button to
import the Standard MIDI File into the target Chord Variation.
Style Record mode
Import: Import SMF
139
Importing an SMF separated by Markers
into a Style
Whenever they are not saved in the SMF, Program Change, Control Change 00, 11 and 32, can be still programmed in Style
Record mode, by using the edit features available.
As an alternative to importing single Chord Variations, you can
import a whole Style as an SMF separated by Markers, i.e., a single SMF containing all the Chord Variations (Variation 1, Variation 2, etc.) each one separated by a Marker (the same events
used in Song Play mode).
Warning: Pa800 can only handle SMF format 0 (Zero). If you are
in trouble importing your file, maybe your sequencer (or DAW) is
exporting using a different format. Please refer to the software’s
user’s manual.
While in this page, touch the Select button, and choose the
Standard Midi File to be imported.
2.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed.
3.
Without releasing the SHIFT button, touch the Execute
button in the display.
4.
The naming structure for the Markers inside the SMF is
“EnCVn”, whose single components are shown in the following
table:
Component
Meaning
E
Style Element (‘v’ = variation, ‘i’ = intro, ‘f’ = fill,
‘e’ = ending)
n
Style Element number (‘1’~’4’ for variations, ‘1’~’2’
for all other style elements)
CV
Chord Variation (‘cv’ = chord variation – no other
choices allowed)
n
Chord Variation number [1~6 for Variations, 1~2 for
all others]
Release the SHIFT button.
When creating a new Style, we suggest to check the “Initialize”
checkbox. Do not check it if the SMF you are loading was previously exported from a Style to be edited; in this case, it is very
important to keep all the previous settings.
Style Tracks and MIDI Channels must be lined as in the previous
table, as per Korg’s standard Style format definition.
Note: Tracks/MIDI Channels other than the above mentioned are
ignored during the import procedure.
For a list of MIDI events supported during the import operations, please see “List of recorded events” on page 116. If any, the
following events are stripped off and automatically transferred
to the Style Element header during the import procedure:
•
Time signature (this event is mandatory)
•
Control Change bundle #00-32 (Bank Select MSB/LSB)
•
Program Change
•
Control Change #11 (Expression)
Control Change 00, Control Change 32 and Program Change
messages must be placed at the very beginning of each Chord
Variation (tick 0).
Warning: It is mandatory not to use capital letters in Marker
names. Some examples of valid names:
‘i1cv2’ = Intro1 – Chord Variation 2
‘v4cv3’ = Variation 4 – Chord Variation 3
Examples of non accepted names:
‘V1cv2’, ‘v1CV2’, ‘intro i1cv2’, ‘v1cv1 chorus’
The order of the Chord Variations inside the SMF is not relevant.
They can be freely placed inside the SMF.
At the end of this page you can find a screenshot of a test file created in Steinberg Cubase, just as an example of how a SMF separated by Markers can look like. Considering analogies between
actual workstations, it will not look much different in other
applications like Logic, Digital Performer, Pro Tools or Sonar.
Reference
1.
140
Style Record mode
Export SMF
Export SMF
Exporting a Style as an SMF separated by
Markers
The Export SMF function allows you to export a Chord Variation as a Standard MIDI File (SMF), and edit it on your preferred external sequencer.
As an alternative to exporting single Chord Variations to individual Standard MIDI Files, you can export a whole Style as an
SMF separated by Markers, i.e., a single SMF containing all the
Chord Variations (Variation 1, Variation 2, etc.) each one separated by a Marker (the same events used in Song Play mode).
To Song
1.
While in this page, keep the SHIFT button pressed.
2.
Without releasing the SHIFT button, touch the Execute
button in the display.
3.
Release the SHIFT button.
4.
Assign a name to the Standard Midi File where to save the
Style in edit.
This operation creates, in the selected device, an SMF format 0
(Zero), containing all the MIDI data included in the selected
Style, with each Chord Variation starting from a different
Marker (named as per the naming convention explained in the
Import section above).
This (non editable) parameter shows the name of the Standard
MIDI File to be generated. The (automatically assigned) name
will be the same of the exported Chord Variation.
Each Chord Variation will include, at the very beginning (tick 0),
the following informations:
•
Time signature
From E/CV
•
Control Change bundle #00-32 (Bank Select MSB/LSB)
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available Chord Variations from the current Style.
•
Program Change
•
Control Change #11 (Expression)
Execute
After selecting a Chord Variation, touch this button to export it
as a Standard MIDI File. A standard file selector will appear.
Select the target device and directory, then touch Save. After you
touch Save, a dialog box appears, letting you assign a name to the
file.
Style Record mode
Page menu
Page menu
141
See “Copy Key Range dialog box” on page 143 for more information.
Copy Chord Table
Touch the page menu icon to open the page menu. Touch a command to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the
menu without selecting a command.
Only available while in the Style Element Chord Table page. Select
this command to open the Copy Chord Table dialog box (see
“Copy Chord Table dialog box” on page 143).
Delete Current Track
(Only available in the Main Record pages). Select this command
to delete the selected track.
Overdub Step Recording
(Only available in the Main Record pages). Select this command
to open the Overdub Step recording window (see “Overdub Step
Recording window” on page 143).
Write Style
Solo Track
Select this command to open the Write Style dialog box, and save
the Style to the internal memory.
Select the track to be soloed, then check this item. You will hear
only the selected track, and the ‘Solo’ warning will flash on the
page header.
See “Write Style dialog box” on page 141 for more information.
Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function.
Only available in Record mode. While in Record mode, cancels
the latest recorded data and restores the previous situation.
Selected a second time, it restores recorded data again (“Redo”
function).
Copy Key/Ch (Copy Key/Chord) button
Select this command to open the Copy Key/Chord dialog box,
and copy Key/Chord settings of the currently selected track to all
other tracks of the same Chord Variation, or to the whole Style.
See “Copy Key/Chord dialog box” on page 142 for more information.
Copy Sound
(Only available in some edit pages). While the Style Element
Track Control edit section is selected, use this command to open
the Copy Sound dialog box and copy all Sounds assigned to the
current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the
tracks to solo it. Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the
Solo function.
Exit from Record
Select this command to exit from Record without saving changes
to the Style.
Write Style dialog box
Open this window by choosing the Write Style item from the
page menu. Here you can save the recorded or edited Style to
memory, by choosing either a User or Favorite Style bank.
See “Copy Sounds dialog box” on page 142 for more information.
Copy Expression
(Only available in some edit pages). While the Style Element
Track Control edit section is selected, use this command to open
the Copy Expression dialog box and copy all Expression values
assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style
Element.
See “Copy Expression dialog box” on page 142 for more information.
Copy Keyboard Range
(Only available in some edit pages). While the Style Element
Track Control edit section is selected, use this command to open
the Copy Keyboard Range dialog box and copy all Keyboard
Range values for the current Style Element tracks to a different
Style Element.
Parameters saved in the Style are marked with the
through the user’s manual.
symbol
Name
Name of the Style to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit) button
next to the name to open the Text Edit window.
Style Bank
Target bank of Styles. Each bank corresponds to one of the
STYLE SELECT buttons. Use TEMPO/VALUE controls to select
a different bank.
Reference
Undo
142
Style Record mode
Copy Key/Chord dialog box
Style
Target Style location in the selected bank. Use TEMPO/VALUE
controls to select a different location.
Note: A User or Favorite Style is usually prompted when writing a
Style. However, you can overwrite a Factory Style, when the “Factory Style and Pad Protect” parameter is left unchecked (see
page 264).
Copy Sounds dialog box
Open this window by choosing the Copy Sounds item from the
page menu. Here you can copy all Sounds assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element.
Select… button
Touch this button to open the Style Select window, and select a
target location.
From Style Element
Non editable. Currently selected Style Element.
To Style Element
Target Style Element.
All
While in the Style Select window, use the buttons on top of the
window to select either the User (Bank 11/20) or the Favorite
banks.
Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the
Style in edit.
Var1…CountIn
Single Style Element where to copy settings to.
Copy Key/Chord dialog box
Open this window by choosing the Copy Key/Chord item from
the page menu. Here you can copy Key/Chord settings of the
currently selected track to all other tracks of the same Chord
Variation, or to the whole Style. This function is useful to speedup pattern programming, and to avoid having different tracks in
different keys within the same Chord Variation.
Copy Expression dialog box
Open this window by choosing the Copy Expression item from
the page menu. Here you can copy all Expression values assigned
to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element.
From Style Element
Non editable. Currently selected Style Element.
Current Chord Variation Tracks
The Key/Chord of the current track will be copied to all tracks of the current Chord Variation.
All Style Tracks
The Key/Chord of the current track will be copied to all tracks of the Style (i.e., all Chord Variations).
To Style Element
Target Style Element.
All
Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the
Style in edit.
Var1…CountIn
Single Style Element where to copy settings to.
Style Record mode
Copy Key Range dialog box
143
Copy Key Range dialog box
Overdub Step Recording window
Open this window by choosing the Copy Keyboard Range item
from the page menu. Here you can copy all Keyboard Range values for the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element.
The Step Record allows you to create a new Style by entering single notes or chords to each track, by playing them on the keyboard one at a time, with no need to play on time. This is very
useful when transcribing an existing score, or needing a higher
grade of detail, and is particularly suitable to create drum and
percussion tracks.
To access this page, select the “Overdub Step Recording” command from the page menu.
From Style Element
Non editable. Currently selected Style Element.
To Style Element
Target Style Element.
All
Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the
Style in edit.
Var1…CountIn
Track (Selected track)
Name of the selected track in record.
DRUM…ACC5
Single Style Element where to copy settings to.
Style track.
SE (Selected Style Element)
Copy Chord Table dialog box
See “Element (Style Element)” on page 117.
CV (Selected Chord Variation)
See “Chord Var (Chord Variation)” on page 117.
Pos (Position)
This is the position of the event (note, rest or chord) to be
inserted.
Event list
Previously inserted events. You may delete this event, and set it
in edit again, by touching the Back button.
Step Time values
Length of the event to be inserted.
To Style Element
…
Note value.
Target Style Element.
Standard (–) Standard value of the selected note.
All
Dot (.)
Augments the selected note by one half of its
value.
Triplet (3)
Triplet value of the selected note.
Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the
Style in edit.
Var1…CountIn
Single Style Element where to copy settings to.
Meter
Meter (time signature) of the current measure. This parameter
cannot be edited. You can set the Meter in the main page of the
Style Record mode, before actually starting recording (see step 6
on page 123 for more information).
Reference
Open this window by choosing the Copy Chord Table item from
the page menu. Here you can copy the Chord Table of the current Style Element to a different Style Element.
144
Style Record mode
Overdub Step Recording window
Free Memory
Tie
Remaining memory for recording.
Touch this button to tie the note to be inserted to the previous
note.
Duration
Relative duration of the inserted note. The percentage is always
referred to the step value.
Back
Goes to the previous step, erasing the inserted event.
25%
Staccatissimo.
50%
Staccato.
85%
Ordinary articulation.
Goes to the next measure, and fills the remaining space with
rests.
100%
Legato.
Done
Velocity
Set this parameter before entering a note or chord. This will be
the playing strength (i.e., velocity value) of the event to be
inserted.
Kbd
Keyboard. You can select this parameter, by turning all counter-clockwise the dial. When this
option is selected, the playing strength of the
played note is recognized and recorded.
1…127
Velocity value. The event will be inserted with
this velocity value, and the actual playing
strength of the note played on the keyboard will
be ignored.
Rest
Touch this button to insert a rest.
Next M. (Next Measure)
Exits the Step Record mode. If you have inserted some notes, a
dialog box appears, asking you to either cancel, discard or save
the changes.
If you touch, Cancel, exit is canceled, and you can continue editing. If you choose No, changes are not saved, and the Step
Record window is closed. If you choose Yes, changes are saved,
and the Step Record window is closed.
Pad Record mode
The Pad structure
145
Pad Record mode
By entering the Pad Record mode, you can create your own Pads,
or edit an existing Pad.
The Pad structure
Pattern data vs. track data
While the Pad Record mode is where you can create or edit
music patterns for the Pad, track parameters (like Volume, Pan,
FX settings…) have to be edited in Style Play mode.
•
After creating or editing music patterns in Pad Record
mode, save them by selecting the Write Pad command from
the page menu of the Pad Record mode (see “Write Pad
dialog box” on page 158).
•
After editing Pad Track parameters in Style Play mode, save
them to the Style Performance by selecting the Write Current Style Performance command from the page menu of
the Style Play mode (see “Write Style Performance dialog
box” on page 113).
A Pad is basically a single-track Style. Most of what applies to
Style recording also applies to Pad recording.
There are two different categories of Pads:
•
•
“Hit” Pads. While they are
mostly used as non-transposing events, they can also be
transposing notes or chords.
Basically, they are single-note
or single-chord Sequences
(see below).
“Sequence” Pads, i.e., complex single-track patterns,
that can be transposed by
playing different chords on
the keyboard – exactly as a
Style track. They are roughly
equivalent to single-element,
single-track,
multi-chord
variation Styles (see illustration).
Pad
CV1
Pad Track
CV2
CV3
CV4
Entering the Pad Record mode
To enter Pad Record mode, go to the Style Play mode and press
RECORD. The Style/Pad Record Select window appears.
CV5
CV6
Exactly as with the Styles, when playing a chord in the chord recognition area, the corresponding Chord Variation is recalled.
Recognized chords are associated to a Chord Variation by means
of the Chord Variation Table. Each Pad contains a Chord Variation Table.
•
Select Record/Edit Pad to select an existing Pad to edit. If it
is a Factory Pad, you may not be able to save it at the original location (depending on the status of the “Factory Style
and Pad Protect parameter in the Media > Preferences
page); you will select a User Pad location instead.
•
Select Record New Pad to start from a new, empty Pad.
When finished recording, you will save the new Pad into a
User Pad location. (Pads can be saved into Factory Pad
locations only when the “Factory Style and Pad Protect”
parameter is set to Off).
As with the Styles, the Note Transposition Tables (NTT) applies
to the Pads.
The same differences between the different types of tracks
applies (see “Track Type” on page 156).
What to record
Recording a Pad is a matter of recording a single track, inside a
series of Chord Variations, inside the Pad itself.
You don’t need to record all Chord Variations. It is often only
needed to record just a Chord Variation.
When you have finished recording or editing the Hit or
Sequence Pad, please save it (see “Exit by saving or deleting
changes” below) and exit the Pad Record mode.
Then, go to the Pad page of the Style Play or Song Play mode,
assign the new Hit or Sequence to a Pad button, and adjust the
various Pad settings (Volume, Pan, and A/B FX Send… see “Pad/
Switch: Pad” on page 108). Finally, save the Pad settings by
selecting the “Write Current Style Performance” command from
the page menu.
Note: While in Record mode, the footswitch and EC5 pedals are
disabled. On the contrary, volume/expression-type pedals can
be used.
Reference
Each Pad is made up of up to six smaller units, called Chord
Variations (CV). Each Chord Variation is made of a single track
(the Pad track).
146
Pad Record mode
Exit by saving or deleting changes
Exit by saving or deleting changes
Main page - Record 1
When finished editing, you can save your Pad in memory, or
cancel any change.
The Main - Record page of the Pad Record mode looks like a
simplified version of the Main page of the Style Record mode,
with just a single track to be recorded and no Style Elements to
be chosen. The only addition is the “Pad Sync” parameter.
• To save changes, select the “Write Pad” command from the
page menu (see “Write Pad dialog box” on page 158).
• To cancel all changes, select the “Exit from Record” command
from the page menu, or press the RECORD button, to exit from
record and return to the main page of the Style Record mode.
Hint: Save often while recording, to avoid accidentally losing your
changes to the Pad.
Listening to the Pad while in Record/Edit
mode
While you are in Pad Record or Pad Edit mode, you can listen to
the selected Chord Variation. To select a Chord Variation, go to
the Main page of the Record/Edit mode.
•
•
When you are in the Main, Event Edit, Quantize, Transpose, Velocity, or Delete pages, you can listen to the selected
Chord Variation. Press START/STOP to check how it
works. Press START/STOP again to stop the playback.
When you are in the Sounds/Expression, Keyboard Range,
Chord Table, Trigger/Tension, Delete All, Copy, Style Element Controls or Style Control pages, you can listen to the
whole Pad. Press START/STOP and play some chords to do
your tests.
Note: In this mode, the pattern is always played back in loop, even
if the “Pad Type” parameter is set to “One Shot” (see page 155).
Note: While in Pad Record mode, the Fingered 3 Chord Recognition mode is automatically selected.
Please look at the User’s Manual for more information on the
various parameters. Only general information and differences
with the Style Record mode are described here.
Recording parameters area
Chord Var (Chord Variation)
This parameter lets you select one of the six available Chord
Variations (CV1 … CV6) for editing or recording.
Note: When this parameter and the assigned value is in small letters (cv1…cv6), the Chord Variation is empty; when it is in capitals
(CV1…CV6), it is already recorded.
Resolution
Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording.
Pad Sync
PAD
This parameter allows you to set a synchronization mode for the
Pad’s pattern.
Off
No synchronization. The sequence will start as
soon as you press the PAD button.
Continued
The pattern will start immediately, in sync with
the arranger’s or active player’s tempo. Depending on the current position of the beat counter, it
might not start from its very beginning; instead,
it will continue from the current position.
For example, if the arranger’s or player’s beat
counter shows the third beat, and is playing tick
91, the Pad will start from its third beat, at tick
91.
The beat counter
This works exactly as if it was a Fill.
Pad Record mode
Main page - Record 1
The sequence will start at the next beat, in sync
with the arranger’s or player’s tempo. It will start
from its very beginning (i.e., tick 1 or measure 1).
Rec Length (Recording Length)
Pad Track info area
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track.
PAD
This parameter sets the recording length (in measures) of the
sequence. Its value is always equal to, or a divider of, the Chord
Variation Length (see next parameter).
Warning: If you assign CV Length a value lower than Rec
Length, the value of Rec Length is not immediately updated in
the display. Therefore, you are still free of changing the value of
CV Length, before the measures exceeding its value are deleted
(see warning in “CV Length (Chord Variation Length)” below).
Sound bank
Sound name
Sound name
PAD
Sound assigned to the Pad track. The triangle means you can
touch the name to open the Sound Select window, and select a
different Sound.
However, if you press START/STOP to begin recording, the real
Rec Length value is changed to the new one, even if the display
still shows the old value.
Sound bank
CV Length (Chord Variation Length)
Program Change
PAD
This parameter sets the total length (up to 32 measures) for the
selected Chord Variation. When playing a Style, this will be the
length of the accompaniment pattern, when the chord corresponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard.
Warning: If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after
recording, any measure after the selected length will be deleted.
Be very careful when setting the CV Length to a lower value
after recording! If it happens, we suggest to exit from record
without saving (see “Exit from Record” on page 158).
Metro (Metronome)
This is where you can set the metronome.
Off
No metronome click will be heard during recording. In any case, a one-bar precount will be
played before starting recording.
On1
Metronome on, with a one-bar precount before
starting recording.
On2
Metronome on, with a two-bar precount before
starting recording.
Tempo
Select this parameter to use TEMPO/VALUE controls to set the
tempo.
PAD
Program Change number sequence (Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB, Program Change).
Tracks volume/status area
Octave Transpose
This (non editable) indicator shows the current octave
transposition. To change this value use the OCTAVE
TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
While this value is not memorized with the Pad, the transposition is used during recording. For example, if you play a C4 and
a +1 octave transposition is selected, a C5 is recorded.
Virtual slider
The virtual slider in the display shows the track’s volume.
To change the volume, touch the slider and use TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change the value (or touch and drag it
in the display).
This value is not saved with the Pad, and is only used to test the
Pad’s volume during editing or recording.
Track status icons
Status of the track. Touch this icon to change the status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Hint: You can always change the Tempo, when other parameters
are selected, by keeping the SHIFT button pressed, and rotating the
DIAL.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Record status. After starting recording, the track
will receive notes from the keyboard and the
MIDI IN connector.
PAD
This is the meter (time signature) of the sequence. You can edit
this parameter only when the sequence is empty, i.e. before you
begin recording anything.
PAD
Bank the selected Sound belongs to.
Note: This value will not be recorded, and will only be used for testing the pattern at various speeds while editing or recording.
Meter
Program Change
Key/Chord area
Key/Chord
PAD
This parameter pair allows you to define the track’s original key
and chord type, for the current Chord Variation. When playing
the pattern back, this chord will be played back exactly as it was
recorded, without any NTT processing (see below).
Reference
Beat
147
148
Pad Record mode
Main page - Record 1
NTT Area
Parallel/Root The root note (in CMaj = C) is transposed to the
missing notes.
NTT Type/Table
PAD
NTTs (Note Transposition Tables) are the sophisticated algorithms that allow Korg arrangers to convert recognized chords
into musical patterns. The Note Transposition Table (NTT)
determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes, when
a chord is recognized that does not exactly match the original
chord of a Chord Variation. For example, if you only recorded a
Chord Variation for the CMaj chord, when a CMaj7 is recognized on the keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes
to create the missing 7th.
Note: These parameters cannot be selected with Drum, Percussion
or Guitar tracks, and are therefore greyed out.
Note: NTT parameters are separately programmed for each track
of the Style Element.
Parallel/Fifth The 5th note (in CMaj = G) is transposed to the
missing notes.
As recorded with
NTT = Root or 5th
(Key/Chord = CMaj)
When you play a CM7
with NTT = Root
When you play a CM7
with NTT = 5th
Parallel/i-Series
All original patterns must be programmed on the
“Maj7” or “min7” chords. When loading old
Korg i-Series Styles, this option is automatically
selected.
As recorded with
NTT = i-Series
(Key/Chord = CM7)
There are two general types of NTTs:
When you play a CMaj
with NTT = i-Series
When you play a C7
with NTT = i-Series
• When Parallel types are selected, notes are transposed inside
the area set by the Wrap Around parameter. These tables are ideally suited to melody parts.
as written
as played back
• When Fixed types are selected, the arranger moves as few notes
as possible, making legato lines and chord changes more natural.
They are ideally suited to chord tracks (strings, piano etc…).
as written
as played back
Parallel/No Transpose
The chord is not modified, and is moved to the
new key unchanged. The pattern plays exactly the
recorded notes, and is moved to the new key as is.
This is the standard setting of Intro 1 and Ending
1 in Korg’s original Styles (where a chord progression is usually recorded, and should remain
unchanged in any key).
Fixed/Chord This table moves as few notes as possible, making
legato lines and chord changes more natural. It is
ideally suited to chord tracks (strings, piano
etc…). Contrary to the Parallel mode, the programmed chord is not transposed according to
the Wrap Around parameter, but always stays
around its original position, looking for common
notes between the chords.
Fixed/No Transpose
Note: To conform to Korg specifications, it is advisable to set the
NTT to “No Transpose” on the Intro 1 and Ending 1.
The programmed notes can only be transposed
by the Master Transpose. They are never transposed when chords are changed.
Delete Note button
Use this command to delete a single note or a single percussive
instrument from a track. For example, to delete a snare, keep the
D2 note (corresponding to the snare) pressed.
1.
Touch the “Delete Note” button, and keep it pressed.
2.
Press START/STOP to start the Pad.
3.
When you reach the passage containing the note to be
deleted, play the note on the keyboard. Keep it pressed, up
to the last note to be deleted.
4.
When finished, release the Delete button and the note to be
deleted, and press START/STOP again to stop the Pad.
Note: If the note is at the beginning of the pattern, press the
note before starting the Pad.
Pad Record mode
Main page - Guitar Mode
Main page - Guitar Mode
149
Recording strumming types
The octave from C2 to B2 is devoted to selecting a strumming
type. By pressing these keys, you play fast strumming samples:
While in the main page, and a Guitar track has been selected,
touch the “Guitar Mode” tab to see this page. This is where you
can access Guitar Mode programming:
Full Down Slow Mute
Up Mute 4-Strings
Full Up Mute
Full Down Mute
Note: When programming a Guitar track from an external
sequencer, you must be sure the Guitar tracks is associated to the
right channel. Go to the Global > MIDI > MIDI IN Channels page,
and assign the corresponding Style track (usually Acc1 ~ Acc5) to
the same channel of the Guitar track on the external sequencer.
Then, go to the Style Record > Style Track Controls > Type/Tension/Trigger page, and set the track as a track of type “Gtr” (see
“Track Type” on page 156).
Guitar Mode allows to easily create realistic rhythm guitar parts,
without the artificial, unmusical playing typical of MIDI programming of guitar parts. Just record a few notes, and you will
end up with realistic rhythm guitar tracks, where each chord is
played according to its real position on the guitar, and not generated by simply transposing a written pattern.
Recording overview
Full Down
Up 4-Strings
Full Down
Slow
Full Up
Down 4-Strings
Full Up Slow
Full Down Mute Body
Recording single strings
The octave from C3 to B3 is devoted to selecting a single string
(or more than one) for playing arpeggios or power chords. You
can either play a free arpeggio with the six guitar chords assigned
to the C~A keys, or play one of the faster sampled arpeggios on
the higher keys. The root note is always available on the C# key,
while the fifth note is always assigned to the D# key; with them,
you can always play the lowest notes of an arpeggio. This octave
also includes an ‘all mute’ key (F#):
Recording a Guitar track is unlike the other tracks, where you
play the exact notes of a melody line. With Guitar tracks you play
the keys corresponding to the strumming modes, or play an
arpeggio by using the keys corresponding to the six strings (and
the special keys corresponding to the root and fifth notes). The
following sections describe the various control keys.
All Mute
Fifth
Root
VI String (E)
V String (A)
IV String (D)
Power Chord
Full Down/Up
I String (e)
II String (B)
III String (G)
Down/Up 4-Strings
Reference
Note: To access this page, a Guitar track must first be selected (see
“Track Type” on page 156). Otherwise, the Guitar Mode tab will
remain grey (not selectable).
Down Mute 4-Strings
150
Pad Record mode
Pad Record procedure
Recording RX Noises
Guitar mode parameters
Further on, the upper octaves of the 61-key keyboard are used to
trigger RX Noises:
Here is a detailed description of the parameters of the Guitar
Mode page.
Key/Chord
This parameter pair allows you to define the track’s original key
and chord type. This parameter works in a different way, when
compared to the other tracks. While with other tracks this is
always the reference key used for NTT transposition, with Guitar
tracks there is a difference, whether you are recording a Chord
Variation contained in an Intro or Ending Style Element, or a
different Chord Variation:
RX Noises
•
With most Chord Variations, this chord will be used only
for listening during recording. During playback in Style
Play mode, the chord will follow chord recognition.
•
With Intro and Ending Chord Variations 1 and 2, this
chord will be used as the reference key for the chord progression.
Capo (0, I…X)
Selecting a Capo
Together with strumming types, single strings and RX Noises,
you can choose a capo (capotasto). Note that this might prevent
some single strings to sound, depending on the composed
chord. You can always see with strings are playing and which are
not, as described in the “Diagram” section below.
A capo (from the Italian “capotasto”, “head of fingerboard”) is a
movable bar attached to the fingerboard of the guitar, to uniformly raise the pitch of all the strings. Its use makes the strings
shorter, therefore changing the timbre and position of the
chords (but not its shape).
0
Open string – no capo.
I…X
Position of the capo over the fingerboard (i.e., “I”
corresponds to the first fret, “II” to the second
one, and so on).
Choosing a Key/Chord
The pattern is recorded in the key indicated by the Key/Chord
pair of parameters. However, this parameter is only considered
during playback of the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements.
With Intro 1 and Ending 1 (both Chord Variation 1 and 2) you
can also enter a chord progression. This is done with the lowest
MIDI octave (C-1 ~ B-1). Chord types are inserted by using
velocity, as shown in the following table:
Vel.
Chord Type
Vel.
Chord Type
1
Major
2
Major 6th
3
Major 7th
4
Major 7th flatted 5th
5
Suspended 4th
6
Suspended 2nd
7
Major 7th suspended 4th
8
Minor
9
Minor 6th
10
Minor 7th
11
Minor 7th flatted 5th
12
Minor major 7th
13
Dominant 7th
14
7th flatted 5th
15
7th suspended 4th
16
Dimished
17
Diminished major 7th
18
Augmented
19
Augmented 7th
20
Augmented major 7th
21
Major w/o 3rd
22
Major w/o 3rd and 5th
23
Flatted 5th
24
Diminished 7th
Playing back the pattern
When in Stye Play mode, the recorded Guitar pattern is transposed according to the chord recognized on the keyboard. The
way it is transposed depends on the programmed pattern, with
the chosen positions, strumming mods, etc…
Diagram
The diagram shows how a chord would be composed on the fingerboard. Here is the meaning of the various symbols:
Red dot
Fingered string (i.e., played note).
White dot
Fifth, playing on the D#2 key.
X
Non played or muted note.
Light grey bar Barré (a finger crossing all the strings, like a
mobile capo).
Dark grey bar Capo.
Pad Record procedure
Recording a Pad is very similar to recording a Style. Please see
the relevant chapter in the User’s manual.
151
Pad Record mode
Edit menu
Other pages exhibit a slightly different structure.
Edit menu
Operating mode
Edit section
Page menu
icon
When pressing the MENU button while in Pad Record mode,
the Pad Record Edit Menu will appear.
Parameters
area
Tabs
Operating mode
This indicates that the instrument is in Pad Record mode.
Note: The Pad Edit pages are a simplified version of the Style Edit
pages. See the User’s manual for information on the various
parameters.
Note: While the Pad is in play, you cannot access the Edit section
pages from the main page (see page 146). Stop the playback before
pressing MENU.
Note: When switching from the Edit section pages (Quantize,
Transpose, Velocity, Delete) to the other pages, or vice-versa, the
Pad (if in play) is automatically stopped.
Edit section
This identifies the current edit section, corresponding to one of
the items of the edit menu (see “Edit menu” on page 151).
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 158).
Parameters area
Each page contains various parameters. Use the tabs to select
one of the available pages. For detailed information on the various types of parameters, see sections starting from page 151.
Edit page structure
Tabs
Most edit pages share some basic elements.
Edit section
Page menu
icon
Event Edit: Event Edit
Pad track
info
Parameters
area
The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI
event of the selected Chord Variation. You can, for example,
replace a note with a different one, or change its playing strength
(i.e., velocity value).
Page sub-header
Page header
Page menu icon
Tabs
Event list
Tabs
Scrollbar
This is very similar to the Style Record’s Event Edit page. See
“Event Edit: Event Edit” on page 127 for more information on
the event editing procedure.
Reference
Operating mode
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
152
Pad Record mode
Event Edit: Filter
Event Edit: Filter
Pad Edit: Transpose
This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in
the Event Edit page.
In this page you can transpose the selected track(s).
Note: After transposing, please don’t forget to readjust the “Key/
Chord” parameter in the main page of the Pad Record mode (see
page 147).
Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in
the Event Edit page.
Note: Some of the events are “ghosted”, and non editable, since the
corresponding events are not editable in a Pad.
This is very similar to the Style Record’s Event Edit Filter page.
See “Event Edit: Filter” on page 129 for more information on the
filter page.
Pad Edit: Quantize
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing.
Value
Transpose value (±127 semitones).
Start / End Tick
The quantize function may be used to correct any timing mistake after recording, or to give the pattern a “groovy” feeling.
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to be transposed.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to be transposed.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing.
Resolution
This parameter sets the quantization after recording.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to quantize.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to quantize.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Pad Record mode
Pad Edit: Velocity
153
Pad Edit: Velocity
Pad Edit: Cut
In this page you can change the velocity (dynamics) value of
notes in the selected track.
This function lets you quickly delete a selected measure (or a
series of measures) from the selected Chord Variation. All following events are moved back, to replace the cut measure(s).
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing.
CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing.
Value
Start
Velocity change value (±127).
Intensity
(Only available in Advanced mode). Use this parameter to specify
the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the
curve you specify in “Curve”.
Curve
First measure to be cut.
Length
Number of measures to be cut.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Start / End Vel. Value
(Only available in Advanced mode). Velocity change at the starting and ending ticks of the selected range.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to be modified.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to be modified.
Advanced
When this checkbox is checked, the “Intensity”, “Curve”, “Start
Velocity Value” and “End Velocity Value” parameters can be
edited.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Reference
(Only available in Advanced mode). Use this parameter to select
from six types of curve, and specify how the velocity will change
over time.
154
Pad Record mode
Pad Edit: Delete
Bottom / Top Note
Pad Edit: Delete
This page is where you can delete MIDI events out of the Pad.
This function does not remove measures from the pattern. To
remove a whole measure, use the Cut function (see “Pad Edit:
Cut” on page 153)
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to delete.
Note: These parameters are available only when the All or Note
option is selected.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Pad Edit: Delete All
This function lets you quickly delete a single Chord Variation, or
the whole Pad.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing.
Event
Type of MIDI event to delete.
All
All events. The measures are not removed from
the Chord Variation.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Note
All notes in the selected range.
CV (Chord Variation)
Dup.Note
All duplicate notes. When two notes with the
same pitch are encountered on the same tick, the
one with the lowest velocity is deleted.
Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation to be deleted.
After Touch
Pitch Bend
All
All Chord Variations, i.e. the whole Pad. After
deletion, all parameters are set to the default status.
Note: This kind of data is automatically removed
during recording.
CV1…CV6
Single Chord Variation.
Pitch Bend events.
Execute
After Touch events.
Prog.Change Program Change events, excluding the bundled
Control Change #00 (Bank Select MSB) and #32
(Bank Select LSB).
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Note: This kind of data is automatically removed
during recording.
Pad Edit: Copy from Style
All Control Change events, for example Bank
Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft Pedal…
Here you can copy a track from a Style, and transform it into a
Pad pattern.
CC00/32…CC127
Single Control Change events. Double Control
Change numbers (like 00/32) are MSB/LSB bundles.
Warning: The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location
(overwrite).
Ctl.Change
Note: Some CC data are automatically removed
during recording. See the table on page 116 for
more information on the allowed data.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to delete.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Pad Record mode
Pad Edit: Copy from Pad
Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too
many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is aborted.
Note: When you copy over an existing Chord Variation, Program
Change data is not copied, to leave the original Sounds unchanged
for that Chord Variation.
155
From Pad
Choose this option to select the source Pad to copy the Chord
Variation from. Touch the Select button to open the Pad Select
window and select the source Pad.
From CV (Chord Variation)
From Style
Use this parameter to select the source Chord Variation.
Choose this option to select the source Style to copy the track
from. Touch the Select button to open the Style Select window
and select the source Style.
All
All Chord Variations, i.e. the whole Pad. You can’t
change the target, that is automatically set to All.
CV1…CV6
Single Chord Variation.
From E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the source Style Element and Chord
Variation.
Var1…End2
A single Style Element, i.e., all Chord Variations.
V1-CV1…E2-CV2
To CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the
current Pad.
CV1…CV6
Target Chord Variation. Automatically set to All if
the “From CV” parameter is also set to All.
A single Chord Variation.
Execute
From Track
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Use this parameter to select the source track to copy.
Drum-Acc5
Single track of the selected Style Element or
Chord Variation.
Pad Track Controls: Sound/Expression
To CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the
current Pad.
CV1…CV6
Target Chord Variation.
In this page you can assign a Sound to the Pad track, adjust its
Volume (CC#07) and Expression (CC#11) values, and set various other parameters, like the Keyboard Range, Track Type,
Trigger Mode, Tension and Wrap Around.
Execute
Touch this button to execute the operation set in this page.
Reference
Pad Edit: Copy from Pad
Here you can copy a Chord Variation from a different Pad. Furthermore, you can copy a whole Pad.
Warning: The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location
(overwrite).
Sound/Bank
PAD
Sound assigned to the Pad track.
Pad Type
PAD
Use this parameter to decide if the Pad will play once or if it will
loop.
Note: While in Pad Record mode, the pattern is always played back
in loop, even if this parameter is set to “One Shot”.
One Shot
When you press one of the PAD buttons, the corresponding Pad is only played once. This is useful
for playing Hits or Sequences that must only play
once.
Loop
When you press one of the PAD buttons, the corresponding Pad plays up to the end, then continues playing from the start. Press STOP in the PAD
section to stop it playing. This is useful for playing cyclic sequences.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute.
Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too
many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is aborted.
Note: When you copy over an existing Chord Variation, Program
Change data is not copied, to leave the original Sounds unchanged
for that Chord Variation.
156
Pad Record mode
Pad Chord Table
Expression
PAD
Use this knob to set the Expression (CC#11) value for the Pad
track. This value can be seen at the beginning of the Event Edit
list.
The Expression is useful to balance the Pad with the other Pads.
For example, if you want the Pad you are recording to be mellower than the average, just lower the Expression value.
Volume
Use this slider to set the Volume (CC#07) value for the Pad track.
This value is not saved with the Pad, and is only used to test the
Pad’s volume during editing or recording.
Keyboard Range
PAD
The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern note
that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch, compared to the original acoustic instrument, when transposed by
the arranger. This will result in a more natural sound for the Pad
instrument.
Note: The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording. The Pad
track can play on the full range of the keyboard.
RX Noise
Use these controls to adjust the volume of RX Noises in the corresponding tracks. This control applies to all types of tracks
(provided the Sound includes RX Noises).
Humanize GTR
PAD
(Not available if Track Type = Drum). This setting lets you define
how Bass and Acc-type tracks are retriggered when the chord is
changed.
Off
Each time you play a new chord, current notes
will be stopped. The track will remain silent until
a new note will be encountered in the pattern.
Rt
(Retrigger) The sound will be stopped, and new
notes matching the recognized chord will be
played back.
Rp
(Repitch) New notes matching the recognized
chord will be played back, by repitching notes
already playing. There will be no break in the
sound. This is very useful on Guitar and Bass
tracks.
Track Type
PAD
Use these controls to apply a random value to the position,
velocity and length of notes of Guitar tracks (see “Track Type”
on page 156). This control has no effect on other types of track.
Wrap Around
PAD
The wrap-around point is the highest register limit for the Pad
track. The Pad pattern will be transposed according to the
detected chord. If the chord is too high, the Pad track might play
in a register that is too high, and therefore unnatural. If, however, it reaches the wrap-around point, it will be automatically
transposed an octave lower.
The wrap-around point can be individually set in semitone steps
up to a maximum of 12 semitones, relative to the chord root set
in the main page of the Pad Record mode (see “Key/Chord” on
page 147).
1…12
Trigger Mode
PAD
Maximum transposition (in semitones) of the
track, referred to the original key of the Pad pattern.
Pad Chord Table
This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each
of the most important recognized chord. When a chord is recognized, the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically
selected by the arranger to play the Pad track.
PAD
Use this parameter to set the type of the Pad track.
Drum
Drum track. This type of track is not transposed
by the arranger, and is used for Drum Kits, or for
tracks that you don’t want to be transposed when
playing a different chord.
Bass
Bass track. This type of track always plays the
root when changing chord.
Acc
Accompaniment track. This type of track can be
used freely, for melodic or harmonic accompaniment patterns.
Tension
PAD
Tension adds notes (a 9th, 11th and/or 13th) that have actually
been played, even if they haven't been written in the Pad pattern.
This parameter specifies whether or not the Tension included in
the recognized chord will be added to an Acc-type track.
On
The Tension will be added.
Off
No Tension will be added.
Chord / Chord Variation
PAD
Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the
most important chords.
Pad Record mode
Import: Import Groove
157
Initialize
Import: Import Groove
The Import Groove function allows the loading of MIDI
Grooves (“.GRV” files) generated by the Slice function (see
“Time Slice” in the Sampling mode). By importing these data to
the Pad track, and assigning the Sound based on the sliced samples to the same track, you can play the original audio groove,
and freely change its tempo.
Check this parameter if you want all Pad settings (i.e., Key/
Chord, Chord Table, Sound…) are reset when loading the SMF.
Hint: It is a good idea to check this parameter when importing the
first Chord Variation of the Pad, and uncheck it when importing
the following Chord Variations.
To CV
Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation.
Execute
After setting all parameters in this page, touch this button to
import the Standard MIDI File into the target Chord Variation.
Export: SMF
From
The Export SMF function allows you to export a Chord Variation as a Standard MIDI File (SMF), and edit it on your preferred external sequencer.
Use this parameter to select one of the MIDI Groove patterns
(“.GRV” files) generated when saving data after a Time Slice
operation.
To CV (Chord Variation)
Use this parameter to select the target Chord Variation.
Import: Import SMF
To Song
This (non editable) parameters shows the name of the Standard
MIDI File to be generated. The (automatically assigned) name
will be the same of the exported Chord Variation.
From CV
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available Chord Variations from the current Pad.
Execute
After selecting a Chord Variation, touch this button to export it
as a Standard MIDI File. A standard file selector will appear.
Select the target device and directory, then touch Save.
When programming a Chord Variation on the external
sequencer, please assign the Pad track to the MIDI channel #10.
Note: Only SMF in format 0 can be loaded.
From Song
This is the name of the Standard MIDI File to be loaded. Touch
the Select button to open the file selector, and select an “.SMF”
file.
Select
Touch this button to open the file selector and load the SMF.
Reference
The Import SMF function allows you to import MIDI data from
a Standard MIDI File (SMF) created on your preferred external
sequencer, and transform them in a Chord Variation.
158
Pad Record mode
Page menu
Page menu
Write Pad dialog box
Touch the page menu icon to open the page menu. Touch a command to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the
menu without selecting a command.
Open this window by selecting the Write Pad item from the page
menu. Here you can save the recorded or edited Pad to memory.
Write Pad
When done recording or editing a Pad, and you want to save the
changes, select this command to open the Write Pad dialog box,
and save the Pad to the internal memory.
Parameters saved in the Pad are marked with the PAD symbol
through the user’s manual.
Name
PAD
See “Write Pad dialog box” on page 158 for more information.
Name of the Pad to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit) button
next to the name to open the Text Edit window.
Undo
Pad Bank
Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode, and in
some Pad Edit pages. While in Record mode, cancels the latest
recorded data and restores the previous situation. Selected a second time, it restores recorded data again (“Redo” function).
Target Pad bank. Only User banks can be selected.
Delete Pad Track
Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode. Select
this command to delete the Pad track.
Overdub Step Recording
Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode. Select
this command to open the Overdub Step recording window (see
the Style Record chapter in the User’s Manual for more information).
Exit from Record
Select this command to exit from Record without saving changes
to the Pad.
Pad
Target Pad location in the selected bank. Use TEMPO/VALUE
controls to select a different location.
Note: A User Pad is usually prompted when writing a Pad. However, you can overwrite a Factory Pad, when the “Factory Style and
Pad Protect” parameter is left unchecked (see page Media > Preferences).
Select… button
Touch this button to open the Pad Select window, and select a
target location.
Song Play operating mode
Transport controls
159
Song Play operating mode
The Song Play operating mode is where you can listen to Songs.
Since the Pa2X is equipped with two onboard players, you can
play two Songs at the same time. This is very useful to mix
between two Songs during a live performance. Songs can be in
Standard MIDI File, Karaoke™ or MP3 format.
You can play along with the Song with up to four Keyboard
tracks (Upper 1-3, Lower). You can select different Sounds and
Effects for Keyboard tracks by selecting Performances and STSs.
A different Voice Processor Preset may be selected by a Performance or STS.
While in Song Play, you can use the SongBook to automatically
select Songs for a desired music genre. With each Song entry in
the SongBook, up to four STSs are associated.
Master Volume, Balance, X-Fader
While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the general volume
of the instrument, you can use the BALANCE slider to balance
the Song and Pad tracks against the Keyboard tracks.
Overall instrument’s volume
Balance of Song and
Pad against RealTime (Keyboard)
tracks
Song Play mode can also be used in Easy Mode (see page 26).
Transport controls
You can use the separate transport controls for each of the two
onboard players. Use the PLAYER 1 controls for Player 1, and
PLAYER 2 controls for Player 2. See “PLAYER 1 TRANSPORT
CONTROLS” on page 10 for more information).
Use the X-Fader to mix between Player 1 and Player 2. Move it to
the center for the maximum volume of both players.
Player 1
Player 2
Note: When this slider is fully moved to the right or the left, different Lyrics, Chords, Score and Markers can be shown, and a different Harmony Track can be selected.
MIDI Clock
Pa2X transmits to the MIDI OUT and USB port only the MIDI
Clock messages generated by Player 1. For MIDI Clock messages
to be sent, the “Clock Send” parameter must be activated (see
“Clock Send” on page 228).
Tempo Lock and Link Mode
If you don’t want the Tempo to change when selecting a new
Song, turn on the TEMPO LOCK function. When the LED of
this button is turned on, you can still manually change the
Tempo with the DIAL.
When the Tempo Lock is activated, the Link Mode is also activated (see “Link Mode” on page 179). This makes both Players
use the same Tempo.
Track parameters
Keyboard track settings made in Song Play mode may be saved
to a Performance. You can then recall different settings by just
selecting a single Performance.
Settings for Song tracks, like pan, volume and FX sends, depend
on the midifile.
Changes to Song tracks made in Song Play mode cannot be
saved to a midifile, and are only intended for realtime control. To
permanently save changes to the various Song parameters, edit
the midifile in Sequencer mode.
Standard MIDI Files and Sounds
The native Song file format of the Pa2X is the Standard MIDI
File (SMF), an universal standard set by all manufacturers. You
can read these files with any musical instrument or computer.
Differences may appear in sounds. If you recorded a Song on the
Pa2X (Sequencer mode), using only General MIDI sounds (i.e.,
those with the ‘GM’ suffix in their name), you can be confident
you can play the same Song on virtually any other musical
instrument or computer. If you used Korg native sounds, you
may not find the same sounds on instruments from other manufacturers.
Reference
In Song Play mode the MIDI Clock is always generated by the
internal player, even if the Clock parameter is set to MIDI or
USB (see “Clock Source” on page 228). While in this mode,
Pa2X cannot receive MIDI Clock messages from the MIDI IN.
160
Song Play operating mode
Keyboard, Pad and Player tracks
When you read SMFs in Song Play mode, there is no problem
reading files made using only General MIDI sounds. Sounds
could be different when playing a Song made on a different
instrument: despite the wide compatibility of Pa2X with other
formats (like GS or XG), differences may arise.
If so, go to the Sequencer operating mode and load the SMF.
Then, manually reassign the non-matching Sounds, replacing
them with similar Sounds on the Pa2X. Finally, save the SMF
again, and you will be able to play it in Song Play mode with the
correct Sounds.
Main page
Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another operating
mode.
Note: When switching from Style Play to Song Play, the Song Setup
is automatically selected, and various track parameters and settings
may change.
To return to this page from one of the Song Play edit pages, press
the EXIT or SONG PLAY button.
Keyboard, Pad and Player tracks
To switch between Keyboard tracks (Normal view) and Song
tracks (Song Tracks views), use the TRACK SELECT button.
The Pa2X is equipped with a double player. Each Song can play a
maximum of 16 tracks, for a total of 32 player tracks.
Pressed a first time, you will see tracks 1-8; a second press will
show tracks 9-16; pressed again, you will go back to Keyboard
tracks. (See “Song Tracks 1-8 and 9-16 pages” and “Volume
panel” starting from page 163).
In addition, you can play the keyboard with four additional Keyboard tracks (Upper 1-3 and Lower). You can edit the Volume
and Play/Mute status for these tracks on the main page of the
Song Play mode (see illustration below).
While in Song Play mode, you can still select Performances or
STSs from the latest selected Style. To select a different set of
STSs, you must first select a different Style.
Touch here to
select a Style
Songs area
Page header
Style
area
Keyboard
tracks
area
Perf./
STS
area
Touch here to
select a Performance
Keyboard
track’s volume and Play/
Mute status
Page menu icon
Panels
Page header
This line shows the current operating mode, transposition and
recognized chord.
In addition to Keyboard tracks, selecting a different Style or
SongBook entry may change sounds assigned to the PADs.
When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play mode, Keyboard and Pad tracks are the same as in Style Play mode.
Operating mode
name
Master Transpose
(in semitones)
Recognized
chord
Operating mode name
Name of the current operating mode.
Master Transpose
SB
Master Transpose value in semitones. This value can be changed
using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
Note: You can also transpose MP3 files. Keep in mind, however,
that transposition always remains inside the range -5…+6 semitones. This range is enough to cover all keys, but allows to avoid
excessive audio degradation. Any further transposing will be
reversed to fit the range. So, you might see a +7 transpose value
(Just Fifth Up) shown in the display, but the MP3 will actually play
5 semitones lower (Just Fourth Down).
Note: Transpose may be automatically changed when selecting a
different Performance. It may also be changed when loading a
Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa
series.
Song Play operating mode
Main page
To avoid transposing, “lock” the Master Transpose parameter in the
Global (see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222), then write the
Global to memory (see “Write Global - Global Setup dialog box”
on page 237).
Standard MIDI File, often abbreviated as SMF
(file extension: *.MID or *.KAR). The SMF
(*.MID) is the industry standard song format,
used by Pa2X as its basic Song format when
recording a new Song. A MIDI Karaoke File
(*.KAR) is an extension of the SMF format.
Recognized chord
Displays the recognized chord, when you play a chord on the
keyboard. If no chord abbreviation is shown, no chord recognition mode has been selected by using the CHORD SCANNING
buttons (see page 11).
MPEG Layer-3 format, or MP3 (file extension:
*.MP3). This is a compressed audio file, that may
be generated on any personal computer, or on the
Pa2X itself.
Page menu icon
Only assignable to Player 1. A Jukebox file (file
extension: *.JBX) can be assigned to Player 1, but
its name is not shown in this area. The JBX icon
appears, together with the name of the currently
selected Song in the Jukebox list.
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. See “Page menu”
on page 180 for more information.
Note: To create or edit a Jukebox file, go to the Jukebox Edit page (see page 176).
Songs area
This is where Song names are shown, together with parameters
depending on the selected type of Song.
Player 1
Song name
Displays the name of the Song assigned to the corresponding
player.
• If the player is already selected (white background), touch the
Song name to open the Song Select window.
• If the player is not selected (dark background), first select it,
then touch the Song name to open the Song Select window.
This is how a Song’s area appears when a Standard MIDI File or
Karaoke file has been selected:
Song name
When the Song Select window appears, you can select a single
Song or a Jukebox file (see “Song Select window” on page 84).
If you select another Song while a Song is in play within the same
Player, the previous Song stops, and the new Song will be
selected, ready to play.
To select a Song, an alternative is to press the SELECT button
(on the control panel) corresponding to the desired player. Press
SELECT a second time to select a Song by dialing in its ID number (see “Selecting a Song by its ID number” on page 85).
Current measure
Meter
Tempo
And this is how it appears when an MP3 File has been selected:
Song type icon
Meter
Song name
This parameter only appears when a Standard MIDI File or
Karaoke file has been selected.
Current Song’s meter (time signature).
Measure number
Total time
Elapsed time
Tempo variation
Ply. 1/2
A different Song may be assigned to each of the two onboard
players (Ply.1 and Ply.2). Each player has its own parameters.
Song type icon
Songs of different types can be assigned to the players. This icon
shows the file type.
This parameter only appears when a Standard MIDI File or
Karaoke file has been selected.
Current measure number.
Tempo
This parameter only appears when a Standard MIDI File or
Karaoke file has been selected.
Metronome tempo. Select this parameter and use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change the tempo. As an alternative, you
don’t need to select this parameter; just keep the SHIFT button
pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the selected
player.
Reference
Player 2
Song type icon
161
162
Song Play operating mode
Main page
Hint: While in the main page, you can have the Tempo parameter
of Player 2 “on focus”, while Player 1 is selected. In this situation,
you can use the DIAL to change Tempo for Player 2, and SHIFT +
DIAL to change Tempo for Player 1.
Keyboard tracks area
This is where Keyboard tracks are shown.
Sound
name
Total time
Track name
This parameter only appears when an MP3 file has been selected.
Sound
bank’s icon
Total length (in minutes:seconds) of the selected MP3 file.
Elapsed time
This parameter only appears when an MP3 file has been selected.
Track status
Elapsed time (in minutes:seconds) of the MP3 file currently in
play.
Track’s octave transpose
Tempo variation
This parameter only appears when an MP3 file has been selected.
Sound name
Variation of the original MP3 file’s tempo, inside a range of
±30% of the original tempo. When Tempo is changed, MP3 files
are smoothly accelerated or slowed down (inside a range of
±30% of the original tempo). This may seem trivial, but it is
really rocket-science instead, and is made possible by Korg
sophisticate time-stretching algorithms.
Name of the Sound assigned to the corresponding Keyboard
track.
Style area
For more information about the Sound Select window, see
“Sound Select window” on page 82.
Currently selected Style. You can select a Style while playing
Songs, to have it ready when switching to Style Play mode. Also,
this lets you change the Pad and STS settings (since Pads and
STSs are recalled by a Style).
Keyboard track octave transpose
Touch the Style name to open the Style Select window. As an
alternative, use the STYLE SELECT section on the control panel.
• If the track is already selected (white background), touch the
Sound name to open the Sound Select window.
• If the track is not selected (dark background), first select it,
then touch the Sound name to open the Sound Select window.
Non editable. Octave transpose of the corresponding track. To
individually edit the octave transpose for each track, go to the
“Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” edit page of the Song Play mode (see
“Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” on page 99 for more details).
You can also transpose all Upper tracks by using the UPPER
OCTAVE buttons on the control panel.
Selected Style
Keyboard track name
Non editable. Name of the corresponding track:
Performance/STS area
This is where the Performance or STS name is shown.
Selected Performance
or STS
Abbreviation
Track
Hand
UP1
Upper 1
Right hand
UP2
Upper 2
UP3
Upper 3
LOW
Lower
Left hand
Sound bank’s icon
Selected Performance or STS
This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to.
This is the latest selected Performance (PERF) or Single Touch
Setting (STS).
Keyboard track status
Touch the name to open the Performance Select window. As an
alternative, use the PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT section
to select a different Performance.
To select a different STS from the latest selected Style, use the
four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons under the display.
Play/mute status of the current track. Touch this icon to change
the status.
No icon
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Song Play operating mode
Song Tracks 1-8 and 9-16 pages
163
Panels
Selected Track Info area
The lower half of the main page contains the various panels, you
can select by touching the corresponding tabs. See more information in the relevant sections, starting from page 164.
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track.
Not only it is shown on the main page, but also in several edit
pages.
Volume panel
Track name
Sound bank
Sound name
Program Change
Track name
Name of the selected track.
Tabs
Song Tracks 1-8 and 9-16 pages
Sound name
Sound assigned to the selected track. Touch anywhere in this
area to open the Sound Select window, and select a different
Sound.
Sound bank
Repeatedly press the TRACK SELECT button to cycle between
the Normal, Song Tracks 1-8 and Song Tracks 9-16 view. In Song
Track views, the upper half of the main page changes, to show
parameters for the Song tracks.
Bank the selected Sound belongs to.
Program Change
Program Change number sequence (Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB, Program Change).
Songs area
Sounds area
Selected track
info area
This area lets you see the octave transposition and Sound bank
icon for the eight tracks currently displayed.
Sounds area
Sound name
Song track octave transpose
Track name
Non editable. Octave transpose of the corresponding track. To
edit the octave transpose, go to the “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” edit
page of the Song Play mode (see “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” on
page 99 for more details).
Sound bank’s icon
Press TRACK SELECT again to return to Normal view (Keyboard tracks). (See “Main page” on page 160).
Songs area
Despite a different layout, it works as the Song area in the Normal view.
This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to.
Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track
(detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area,
see above). Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select window.
Reference
Song track octave
transpose
164
Song Play operating mode
Volume panel
The Normal view shows Mic/In controls and Keyboard tracks:
Volume panel
Touch the Volume tab to select this panel. This is where you can
set the volume of each track, and mute/unmute tracks.
Note: The volume of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance or STS, while the Song tracks volume may be memorized to
the Standard MIDI File.
Sliders and volume of the tracks
You can change the volume of each track by using the first eight
Assignable Sliders in the control panel. To make them act as volume controls, be sure the VOLUME LED over the SLIDER
MODE button is lit:
The Song Tracks 1-8 view shows Song tracks 1-8:
Assignable sliders
The Assignable Sliders correspond to the ‘virtual sliders’ in the
display. These are a graphical representation of each track’s volume.
Virtual sliders
You can change the volume also by touching a track, and using
the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or by touching a track and dragging it in the display.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between
the Normal (Keyboard and Mic/In tracks), Song
Tracks 1-8 and Song Tracks 9-16 views. The Assignable Sliders LEDs show which view is currently
selected:
Volume LED
Assignable Sliders LEDs
The Song Tracks 9-16 view shows Song tracks 9-16:
Song Play operating mode
Jukebox panel
Slider Mode button status
The function assigned to the Assignable Sliders depends on the
status of the SLIDER MODE button. Note that this may change
when selecting a different Performance or STS.
For details about the various Slider Modes, see “SLIDER
MODE” on page 7.
Track status icons
Sng
Play/mute status of the current track. Select the track, then
touch this area to change its status.
165
Jukebox panel
When a Jukebox (JBX) file is assigned to Player 1, you can use
the list shown in this panel to browse the Jukebox list, and touch
the Select button in the display to select a Song to play. This way,
you can select any Song in the list as your starting Song, and
manually change the order of the Songs to play.
Note: A Jukebox file can be assigned to Player 1 only.
Note: This panel is only available after loading a Jukebox file.
Hint: To create or edit a Jukebox file, go to the Jukebox Edit page
(see page 176). A quick way to create a Jukebox list is to touch the
“Play All” button in the Song Select window (see page 85).
Track status icons
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Saving the track’s status
Warning: If you delete a Song included in the Jukebox list currently
in play, the player will stop, and the “No Song” message will
appear. At this point, you can select the JukeBox tab to open the
Jukebox panel, and select a different Song.
As an alternative, you can select the next Song by pressing SHIFT +
>> (FAST FORWARD) in the PLAYER 1 section of the control
panel, then press
again.
Song list
(PLAY/STOP) in the PLAYER 1 section
Selected Song
Jukebox file
• The status of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance
or STS, and can be changed when choosing a different Performance or STS (see “Write Performance” on page 111 and “Write
Single Touch Setting” on page 111).
This allows for leaving the track status unchanged even when
playing a different Standard MIDI File. You can leave, for example, the bass track in mute, and let your bassist play it live for the
whole show.
However, an exception to the above is when reading a Standard
MIDI File created with a Pa-Series instrument. These files do
include special commands to force the Play/Mute status of each
track.
Track names
Under the sliders, a label for each track is shown. Use the TRK.
SEL button to switch between the various track views.
Abbreviation
Track
MIC/IN
Mic Audio input. Volume and play/mute status
not memorized.
UPPER1…3
Upper tracks. Volume and play/mute status
memorized into a Performance or STS.
LOWER
Lower track. Volume and play/mute status
memorized into a Performance or STS.
T01…T16
Song tracks. Volume memorized into a Standard MIDI File. Play/mute status memorized as
a general setting into the Global – Song Play
Setup (different for each Player).
Song list
Use this list to browse through the Songs in the Jukebox list. Use
the scrollbar to scroll the list.
Selected Song
Name of the Song currently in play. You can select a different
Song from the list, and touch the Select button in the display to
select it for playback.
Select button
Touch this button to select the Song highlighted in the list, and
assign it to Player 1. If a Song is already playing, it will be
stopped, and the selected Song will start playing back.
Jukebox file
Name of the selected Jukebox file. To edit this file, see “Jukebox
Editor” on page 176.
Transport controls for the Jukebox
When you select a Jukebox file, Player 1 transport controls work
in a slightly different way than with single Songs.
<< and >>
Pressed alone, these buttons are the Rewind and
Fast Forward commands.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press
these buttons to scroll to the previous or next
Song in the Jukebox list.
Reference
• The status of the Song tracks can be saved as a general setting
into the Global-Song Play Setup (by choosing the “Write GlobalSong Play Setup” command from the page menu, see (see “Write
Global-Song Play Setup dialog box” on page 181). Settings for
each Player can be different.
166
Song Play operating mode
Lyrics / Score panel
(HOME)
Returns to measure 1 of the current Song.
(PLAY/STOP)
Starts or stops the current Song. When you stop
the Song, it is stopped at the current position.
Press HOME to go back to measure 1 of the current Song.
If the Jukebox panel is open, you can select the
Song from which to start. See “Jukebox panel”
above.
While the Song is playing, Lyrics contained in a Standard MIDI
File or MP3 file flow in the display. Chord abbreviations (if any)
will appear above the lyrics, in time with the music (depending
on the “Show chords” parameter status, under the Options side
tab). Lyrics at the current position are highlighted.
If the text has been loaded as a “.TXT’ file, it will not scroll automatically while the Song is playing back. You must scroll it with
the DIAL or the vertical scrollbar. As an alternative, you can use
an assignable switch or footswitch, with the Text Page Up or Text
Page Down functions assigned, to scroll (respectively) to the previous or next text page.
If both player are playing, you can choose the Lyrics by moving
the X-FADER slider fully on the left (Player 1) or the right
(Player 2), provided the “Lyrics/Score X-Fader Link” parameter
is turned on (see page 179).
Lyrics / Score panel
Song chords
Ply Lyrics side tabs
These two panels show the lyrics and chord abbreviations. You
can see the following types of lyrics and chords:
•
lyrics contained in a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke™ file
as Lyrics events, or in an MP3 with Lyrics file (in ID3 format – see www.id3.org).
•
lyrics automatically loaded as a “.TXT” file with a Standard
MIDI File, Karaoke™ or MP3 file. When a “.TXT” file exists
in the same directory as a Standard MIDI File or MP3 file,
and shares exactly the same name, it will be loaded with the
“.MID” or “MP3” file (see “Text files loaded with Standard
MIDI Files and MP3 files” on page 170).
•
lyrics contained in a “.TXT” file linked to the latest-selected
Song-based SongBook entry (see “Linked .TXT” on
page 188).
•
when no lyrics data is contained in the Song, or linked to a
SongBook entry, you can see lyrics contained in a “.TXT”
file loaded after selecting a Song (see “On-the-fly TXT
loading” below).
Chords contained in the midifile (if any). This indicator may be
easier to read than chords shown within the lyrics.
When changing the Master Transpose, chord abbreviations contained in a Standard MIDI File are transposed, and correctly
shown in the display. Master Transpose must be activated on the
Sequencer, but not on the Keyboard.
Master Transpose
This is the priority of lyrics data shown in the display:
Master transpose value in semitones. This value can be changed
using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
i)
ii)
Current beat
TXT file linked to a SongBook entry, overriding…
TXT file contained in the same folder as the Standard MIDI
File or MP3 file, recalled by a SongBook entry, overriding…
iii) Lyrics events contained in the Standard MIDI File or MP3 file.
Lyrics will be shown only if they are compatible with a standard
format that Pa2X can understand.
Current beat
Current measure
Current measure number.
Selected player (Ply 1/Ply 2)
Master Transpose
Song chords
Beat number of the current measure, that is currently playing.
Current measure
Selected
player
Use these side tabs to select a player whose Song to show.
Note: You can have Player 2 selected in the Main page of the Song
Play mode, and Player 1 selected in the Lyrics page, or vice-versa.
This way, you can select a Song whose lyrics to display on the external video monitor, while selecting a different player for editing
operations.
STS
Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings (STS). Touch
one of them to select it.
STS
Song Play operating mode
Lyrics / Score panel
Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files
and MP3 files
When a “.TXT” file exists in the same directory as a Standard
MIDI File or MP3 file, and shares exactly the same name, it will
be loaded with the “.MID” or “MP3” file, and can be seen in the
Lyrics page.
167
Markers side tabs
Standard Song Markers contained in a midifile can be read with
the Pa2X, to quickly jump to a given position in the Song. Additionally, you can set your own marker points on-the-fly.
Touch one of these side tabs to access the Marker panel corresponding to one of the two players.
As an example, if the file “MYSONG.TXT” exists in the same
directory as the “MYSONG.MID” or “MYSONG.MP3” file, it is
loaded together with the matching “.MID” or “.MP3” file.
However, unlike ordinary Lyrics, the text will not scroll automatically while the Song is playing back. You must scroll it with the
DIAL. As an alternative, you can use an assignable switch or
footswitch, with the Text Page Up or Text Page Down functions
assigned, to scroll (respectively) to the previous or next text
page.
Selected
player
Note: When a “.TXT” file is loaded with the Song, it overrides any
included Lyrics data.
On-the-fly TXT loading
When a Song does not contain any Lyrics metadata or has no
“.TXT” file linked, the “No lyrics. Press SHIFT and touch here to
load a TXT file” message appears in the display when you go to a
Seq. Lyrics page.
Note: Markers do not work when the Groove Quantize is activated.
Note: It is not advisable to program them with a Jukebox file
assigned to Player 1, since pressing PLAY/STOP would delete the
markers.
How to add a marker:
1.
Go to the Song Play > Mark Ply.1 (Ply.2) page.
2.
Start the Song by pressing the PLY.1 (PLY.2) PLAY/STOP
button (however, markers can be added even while the
player is not running).
3.
When you reach the position you want to save as a marker,
touch the Add button in the display.
• If you touch Add within the last beat of the measure, the
beginning of the following measure is saved as a marker.
When this message appears, and you want to load a “.TXT” file,
keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch the center of the display. A standard file selector appears, and lets you look for
“.TXT” file to be loaded while the current Song is playing.
4.
Do the same for any following marker.
5.
Stop the Song by pressing the PLY.1 (PLY.2) PLAY/STOP
button.
Hint: When the file selector appears, you can use the Search
How to jump to a saved marker:
(
) function to search a “.TXT” file in the various media. See
“Searching files” on page 250 for more information.
1.
Start the Song again.
2.
When you want to jump to a saved marker, touch it in the
display. The Song will jump to the saved position at the
beginning of the next measure.
How to edit a marker:
1.
Touch the marker to be edited in the display.
2.
Touch the Edit button in the display to set the marker to
edit. The Edit Marker window will appear.
Reference
• If you touch Add within the first beats of the measure, the
beginning of the current measure is saved as a marker.
168
Song Play operating mode
Lyrics / Score panel
3.
While in Edit Marker window, you can edit the name and
position of the marker being edited.
4.
Save the markers (as described below).
Score side tabs
These tabs give access to the Score View pages. You can access
them from the Lyrics / Score pane of the Song Play mode.
How to delete a marker:
1.
Touch the marker to be deleted in the display.
2.
Touch the Delete button in the display to delete the selected
marker.
3.
Save the markers (as described below).
Touch here to
see the score
of the corresponding
Song.
How to save the markers:
Touch the Save Mk button in the display to save all markers.
If you are not in the Lyrics/Score page, choose from the page
menu the “Save Song Marker Ply.1” or “Save Song Marker Ply.2”
(depending on the player where you created the markers). The
markers will be saved into the midifile.
Auto Scroll
Check this parameter if you want the current marker to be
always visible in the display during playback, by making the list
of markers scroll automatically.
Don’t check this parameter, if you prefer to prevent the list from
scrolling. This is useful if you want a marker to remain in the
display, ready to be selected as soon as you want to jump to its
position, with no need to scroll the list to catch it out.
After having chosen either Song 1 or Song 2, the Score View page
appears.
Selected
Sequencer/Song
Song title
Chord symbols
Tempo
Measure number
Currently
selected staff
(in red)
Current measure indicator
STS
Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings (STS). Touch
one of them to select it.
Lyrics
Touch here to
turn lyrics on/
off
Touch here to
turn chord symbols on/off
Clef
Play/Mute
Selected track
Touch here to turn
note names on/off
To exit from this page, press the EXIT button.
Note: Master or Track Transpose do not affect the Score display.
Selected Player/Song
This is the name of the currently selected Sequencer (and Song).
To select a different Sequencer, press the EXIT button to exit the
Score View, and touch the tab corresponding to the other
Sequencer.
When moving the SEQ-BALANCE, the shown score may
change. When the SEQ-BALANCE is fully moved to the left, the
score for Sequencer 1 is shown; when the SEQ-BALANCE is
fully moved to the right, the score for Sequencer 2 is shown
instead. (For this to happen, the “Lyrics/Score X-Fader Link”
parameter in the Song Play > Preferences > General Control page
must be checked, see page 179).
Song title
Name of the Song.
Tempo
Current Tempo of the Song (in BPM, Beats Per Minute).
Song Play operating mode
Lyrics / Score panel
169
Staff
Selected track
The selected track is shown as traditional music notation.
Depending on the content of the track, either notes or chords are
shown. Pa800 takes care for you of ‘cleaning-up’ the score, so
that it is always easy to read.
Touch here to open a pop-up menu where to chose the track to
be shown from.
Several automatic operations are carried on to clean-up the
score: Pa800 automatically quantizes to 1/16 notes, detects triplets, avoids note overlaps, understands syncopation, and draws
beams according to the time signature. In addition, spacing and
measure length are dynamic, and single, double and end measure bars are automatically added.
Options side tab
Hint: The vocals part is often assigned to Track 4.
Touch this side tab to access the Options panel, and adjust the
various video settings (see details below).
If a KeySign (Key Signature) event is found at position
‘001.01.000’ of the Song’s Master track, the correct key signature
is also shown.
Currently selected staff marker
This red vertical line shows the approximate position of the playback, by indicating the current staff in play.
Current measure indicator
This red triangle shows the current measure in play.
Lyrics button
Display Controls
Touch this button to make the lyrics (if available) appear or disappear.
Use these parameters to define how lyrics are shown in the display. To set the external display, see “External Display” on
page 235.
Chord button
Sng
Touch this button to make the chord symbols (if available)
appear or disappear. Chords are shown either in the English or
Italian system, depending on the selected Help language (see
Global > Basic > Interface).
Characters
Note button
Link int and ext video
Touch this button to make the note name appear or disappear
next to each note. Note names are shown either in the English or
Italian system, depending on the selected Help language (see
Global > Basic > Interface).
When checked, settings for the internal display are automatically
mirrored to the external video monitor (provided the optional
VIF4 Video Interface board is installed).
Size of fonts. You can choose between a smaller and a bigger
font.
Touch here to open a pop-up menu, where to choose a clef from.
Available clefs are:
If this parameter is checked, chords are shown above lyrics in the
display – provided the midifile contains them.
Treble
Standard Treble clef ( ).
TXT File
Treble+8
Treble clef with transposition one octave upper.
Text Follow
Treble-8
Treble clef with transposition one octave lower.
Bass
Standard Bass clef ( ).
Bass-8
Bass clef with transposition one octave lower.
Play/Mute
Use this button to let the selected track play, or to mute it. If the
track is muted, the score is still shown, so that you can play or
sing it.
Hint: The “Melody Mute” function, that can be assigned to an
assignable switch, footswitch or EC5 pedal, allows for muting the
melody track of a Song (default: Track 4, see Song Play > Preferences > Track Setting > Melody). If your song has the melody part
assigned to the same track, you can mute or unmute it by using this
button, or the assigned switch/pedal.
Sng
Sng
When linking a “.TXT” file to a Song, you scroll the text by using
the Text Down and Text Up assignable commands. Unlike the
reading of Lyrics events contained in a Standard MIDI File or
MP3 file, there is no automatic scrolling, that makes the current
verse start on top of the internal and the external display at the
same time.
Therefore, text shown in the internal display and in the external
video (with the optional VIF4 Video Interface board installed)
might begin with a different verse. This parameter lets you
choose the internal or the external display as the one that must
be perfectly lined.
Internal Video
When pressing the control corresponding to the
Text Down command, the first line of the current
Reference
Show chords
Clef
Sng
170
Song Play operating mode
STS Name panel
page of text is shown on top of the internal video.
The external video might not be perfectly lined.
Choose this option if you are reading verses from
the internal display.
STS Name panel
Select this panel to see the name of the four available STSs. See
“STS Name panel” on page 93 for details.
External Video
When pressing the control corresponding to the
Text Down command, the first line of the current
page of text is shown on top of the external video.
The internal video might not be perfectly lined.
Choose this option is your audience is reading
verses from an external video.
Note: When this option is selected, the text scrollbar
disappears from the internal display.
Mic panel
Select this panel to set parameters for the microphone input. See
“Mic panel” on page 94 for details.
Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files
and MP3 files
Sub-Scale panel
When a “.TXT” file exists in the same directory as a Standard
MIDI File or MP3 file, and shares exactly the same name, it will
be loaded with the “.MID” or “MP3” file, and can be seen in the
Lyrics page.
Select this panel to select a secondary scale for the Keyboard
tracks. See “Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale” on page 99 for details.
As an example, if the file “MYSONG.TXT” exists in the same
directory as the “MYSONG.MID” or “MYSONG.MP3” file, it is
loaded together with the matching “.MID” or “.MP3” file.
Pad panel
However, unlike ordinary Lyrics, the text will not scroll automatically while the Song is playing back. You must scroll it with the
DIAL. As an alternative, you can use an assignable switch or
footswitch, with the Text Page Up or Text Page Down functions
assigned, to scroll (respectively) to the previous or next text
page.
Select this panel to see which Hit or Sequence Pads are assigned
to the four Pads. See “Pad panel” on page 95 for details.
Note: When a “.TXT” file is loaded with the Song, it overrides any
included Lyrics data.
Split panel
Select this panel to adjust the split point for the Keyboard tracks.
See “Split panel” on page 95 for details.
Song Play operating mode
Edit menu
171
Selected player
Edit menu
From any page, press the MENU button to open the Song Play
edit menu. This menu gives access to the various Song Play edit
sections for the currently selected player (see “Songs area” on
page 163).
When in the menu, select an edit section, or press EXIT or
SONG PLAY to exit the menu.
When in an edit page, press the EXIT or SONG PLAY button to
go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode.
Before entering edit, select one of the two players, by using the
Song area of the main page (see “Switching between players during editing” below).
Edit section
This identifies the current edit section, corresponding to one of
the items of the edit menu (see “Edit menu” on page 171).
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 180).
Parameters area
Each page contains various parameters. Use the tabs to select
one of the pages. For detailed information on the various types
of parameters, see sections starting from page 171.
Tabs
Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each edit
section groups various edit pages, that may be selected by touching the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display.
Switching between players during
editing
Note: Some of the edit parameters are only meant for realtime. To
see which parameters are saved in the Performance, STS or GlobalSong Play Setup and which are not, see the “Parameters” chapter
on page 344.
When you enter Edit mode, you can edit the selected player’s
parameters. The selected player is always shown on the page
header.
As a general rule, Keyboard track parameters can be saved in a Performance or SongBook STS, while some Song track parameters and
FX settings could be saved in the Global-Song Play Setup.
To select a player, go to the main page of the Song Play mode,
and select the players you wish to edit. The selected player is
shown with a white background.
Edit page structure
All edit pages share some basic elements.
Selected
Operating mode player
Edit section
Page menu
icon
Selected
track info
Parameters
area
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan
This page lets you set the volume and pan for each of the Keyboard or Song tracks.
Note: Song parameters cannot be saved when saving to a Performance or STS.
Tabs
Operating mode
This indicates that the instrument is in Song Play mode.
Note: The play/mute status of a Song track may be reset when
selecting a Song made on a Pa-Series instrument.
Reference
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
172
Song Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Song tracks, and vice versa.
On
When checked, the direct, dry signal is sent to the
output, mixed with the FXs.
Track
Out L/R
FX Processor
Off
When unchecked, the direct, dry signal is
removed from the audio output, and only sent to
the FXs. The effected signal will still be panned
(in stereo FXs only) according to the Pan value.
Track
Out L/R
FX Processor
Pan
Track position in the stereo field.
-64…-1
Left stereo channel.
0
Center.
+1…+63
Right stereo channel.
Volume
Track’s volume.
0…127
MIDI value of the track’s volume.
Play/Mute icon
Sng
Track’s play/mute status. See “Keyboard track status” on
page 162 for more information.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Upper Volume Link
Sty
This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for
one of the Upper tracks, proportionally changes also the volume
for the other Upper tracks.
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send
To save this parameter status, go to the Style Play mode, then
select the Write Global-Style Play Setup from the page menu (see
“Write Global-Style Play Setup dialog box” on page 113).
This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (uneffected)
signal going to the Internal FX processors.
Note: This parameter is the same you can find in the “Preferences:
Style Play Setup” page of the Style Play mode (see page 110).
On
When changing volume to one of the Upper
tracks, volume for the other Upper tracks
changes in proportion.
Off
When changing volume to one of the Upper
tracks, only that track’s volume is changed. Other
Upper tracks are left unchanged.
Note: Song parameters cannot be saved when saving to a Performance or STS.
The effect processors included in Pa2X are connected in parallel,
so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be
effected:
In case you want to send all of a track’s signal to the effect (as
when using “insert” effects, like Rotary, Distortion, EQ…), just
set the Dry parameter to Off (see “Dry” above):
Dry
There are four Internal FX processors in Song Play mode. Usually, they are arranged as follows:
Use this checkbox to turn the dry (direct) track signal on or off.
FX A
Reverb processor for Player 1 and 2.
Note: If the track is sent to a separate output, no FX is sent to any
output. To program the output status for each track, see “Audio
Setup: Player 1” and “Audio Setup: Player 2” on page 232.
FX B
Modulating FX processor for Player 1 and 2.
FX C
Reverb processor for Keyboard tracks.
FX D
Modulating FX processor for Keyboard tracks.
Song Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain
Furthermore, in Sequencer mode you can create Songs using all
four effects (see “Effects: FX Select” on page 209).
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Keyboard to
Song tracks, and vice-versa.
Note: When you stop, then start the Song again, or select a different
Song, the default Song track settings are selected again. You can,
however, pause the Song, change the effects, then exit from pause
and start the Song again. Edit the Song in Sequencer mode to permanently change the effects.
Send level (A…D)
0…127
Level of the track (direct) signal sent to the effect
processor.
Play/Mute icon
Sng
Track’s play/mute status. See “Keyboard track status” on
page 162 for more information.
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain
In this page you can set the three-band equalization (EQ) for
each individual track.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Song tracks, and vice-versa.
Reference
Depending on the status of the “Ply.2 FX Mode” parameter,
Player 2 might use the C/D effect pair (see page 179).
173
Note: The EQ is different for Player 1 and Player 2.
Hint: Track EQ can be memorized in the general preferences for the
Song Play mode (they are named Song Play–Global Setup). This will
help adapting the Pa2X's sound to personal taste for any MIDIfile
you will ever play. Need a lighter Bass track? Save the right equalization, and the Bass will stay light with all the subsequent Songs.
Hi (High) Gain
Sng
This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization
on each individual track. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB High gain value in decibels.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Mid (Middle) Gain
Sng
This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equalization on each individual track. This is a bell curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Middle gain value in decibels.
174
Song Play operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control
Sng
Low Gain
This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization
on each individual track. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Low gain value in decibels.
Play/Mute icon
Sng
Track’s play/mute status. See “Keyboard track status” on
page 162 for more information.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control
This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization, programmed in the previous page.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to
the Song tracks, and vice-versa.
Reset All Tracks button
Touch this button to reset (i.e., “flatten”) equalization for all
tracks (both Realtime and Song tracks).
Bypass
Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the
corresponding track. When bypassed, equalization has no effect
on the track, but all parameters are preserved. When the box is
unchecked, equalization is activated again with the original settings.
On
The bypass function is engaged, so no equalization is active on the corresponding track.
Off
The bypass function is not engaged, so the equalization is active on the corresponding track.
Input Trim
This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing
through the equalizer. Extreme equalization values can overload
the audio circuits and lead to distorsion. This control lets you set
equalization as desired, and at the same time avoid overloading.
0…99
Limiting value. The higher, the most effective it
is.
Play/Mute icon
Sng
Track’s play/mute status. See “Keyboard track status” on
page 162 for more information.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning
Parameters in this page let you set various tuning settings. See
“Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” on page 99 for details.
Parameters
Note: Song track values edited in this page are not saved, and are
only intended for realtime use.
Effects: FX Select
This page allows you to select effects to be assigned to the four
Internal FX processors (A-D).
Track Reset buttons
Use these buttons to reset (i.e., “flatten”) equalization for the
corresponding track.
Song Play operating mode
Effects: FX A…D
Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the
default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the Song,
change the effects, then start the Song again with the new effects.
Edit the Song in Sequencer mode to permanently change the effects.
Note: The default effect settings can be memorized in the GlobalSong Play Setup, by choosing the “Write Global-Song Play Setup”
command from the page menu (see page 180).
175
Effects: FX A…D
These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect
processors. Here is an example of the FX A page, with the Reverb
Smooth Hall effect assigned.
Selected effect
FX A…D
Sng
Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors. Usually,
A and C are reverbs, while B and D are modulating effects (chorus, flanger, delay…). For a list of the available effects, see the
“Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD.
FX Amount
FX parameters
Sng
Volume of the effect, that is added to the dry (uneffected) signal.
Sng
Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect, or
of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect.
Mod.Track (Modulating Track)
Sng
Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modulate
an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical
controller or a Song track.
Effects in Song Play mode
Pa2X is equipped with four effect processors, or DSPs (Digital
Signal Processors), to process MIDI tracks. In Song Play mode
you can have two or four effects at the same time, depending on
the midifile you are reading.
Effects A and B are usually reserved to both players and Pads,
while effects C and D are usually reserved to Keyboard tracks.
Depending on the status of the “Ply.2 FX Mode” parameter, each
effect pair could be reserved to a different Player (see page 179).
You can also create Songs that make use of all four effects in
Sequencer mode.
•
A Song created on the Pa2X (in Sequencer mode) can use
up to 4 effects (usually 2 reverbs + 2 modulating effects);
each track may use the A/B or C/D pair.
•
A Standard MIDI File or Karaoke™ file will only use 2
effects (usually 1 reverb + 1 modulating effect). This lets
you use the remaining 2 effects for the Realtime tracks.
•
When using both players at the same time, and the “Ply.2
FX Mode” is set to “AB” mode (see page 179), they only use
the A/B pair, while the C/D pair is reserved to the Keyboard
tracks.
•
When using both players at the same time, and the “Ply.2
FX Mode” is set to “CD” mode (see page 179), Player 1 uses
the A/B pair, while Player 2 uses the C/D pair, sharing it
with Keyboard tracks.
Selected effect
Sng
Select one of the available effects from this pop-up menu. This is
the same as the “FX A…D” parameters found in the “Effects: FX
Select” page (see above).
FX parameters
Sng
Parameters may differ, depending on the selected effect. See the
“Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of
available parameters for each effect type.
FX Amount
Sng
Volume of the effect, that is added to the dry (uneffected) signal.
Src (Source)
Sng
Modulation source. To select the track generating this message,
see the “Mod.Track (Modulating Track)” parameters found in
the “Effects: FX Select” page (see above). For a list of modulation
sources, see the “Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD.
Reference
B to A, D to C
176
Song Play operating mode
Track Controls: Mode
Track Controls: Mode
Keyboard/Ensemble: Ensemble
These parameters let you set the Internal/External, and the Poly/
Mono status of Song tracks. See “Track Controls: Mode” on
page 102.
See “Keyboard/Ensemble: Ensemble” on page 106.
Parameters
Parameters
Sng
Note: These parameters can be saved to the Global-Song Play
Setup, by selecting the Write Global-Song Play Setup command
from the page menu.
Track Controls: Drum Volume
These parameters let you adjust the volume for each percussive
instrument family. See “Track Controls: Drum Volume” on
page 176.
Drum Family Volume
Note: Song track values edited in this page are not saved, and are
only intended for realtime use.
Pad/Switch: Pad
See “Pad/Switch: Pad” on page 108.
Parameters
SB
Pad/Switch: Assignable Switch
See “Pad/Switch: Assignable Switch” on page 108.
Parameters
Jukebox Editor
Track Controls: Easy Edit
These parameters let you “fine-tune” edit parameters for Sounds
assigned to the tracks. See “Track Controls: Easy Edit” on
page 104.
The Jukebox function lets you play a list of Songs (127 max), at
the simple touch of a button. You can play a Jukebox file by
assigning it to Player 1, after having selected it in the Song Select
page, just as if it was an ordinary Song (see “Jukebox panel” on
page 165).
Easy Sound Edit
Note: Song track values edited in this page are not saved, and are
only intended for realtime use.
Keyboard/Ensemble: Keyboard Control
These parameters let you set parameters for the Keyboard tracks.
See “Keyboard/Ensemble: Keyboard Control” on page 105.
Parameters
In this page, you can create, edit and save a Jukebox file. A Jukebox list can contain Standard MIDI Files, Karaoke™ files, and
MP3 files.
Keyboard/Ensemble: Key/Velocity Range
If a Jukebox file is already selected into a Player, you will enter
this page with that file ready to be edited. Otherwise, you will
enter this page with an empty list.
These parameters let you select a note and velocity range for the
Keyboard tracks. See “Keyboard/Ensemble: Key/Velocity Range”
on page 105.
To create a new Jukebox file, touch Del All to remove all Songs
from the current list. Add new Songs, then touch Save and enter
a different name before confirming. A new Jukebox file will be
saved to disk.
Parameters
Move Up/Down
Use these button to move the selected item up or down in the
list.
Song Play operating mode
Groove Quantize
177
Add
Adds a Song at the end of the current list. You can add up to 127
Songs in a list. When this button is pressed, a standard file selector opens up in the display.
Note: A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same
folder.
Hint: Instead of a single Song, you can select a Jukebox file, and
add its whole content to the current Jukebox list.
Insert
Inserts a Song at the current position (i.e., between the selected
item and the preceding one). All subsequent Songs are moved to
the next higher-numbered slot. You can add up to 127 Songs in a
list.
Groove Quantize
You can apply a realtime “groove-quantization” to Player 1.
Groove-quantization is a way of changing the music groove during the playback, moving notes to the nearest axis of a rhythmic
“grid”. Please feel free to experiment: this function is a great
source of musical inspiration.
To enable groove quantize, you can either use the command in
this page, or check the Groove Quantize Enable command in the
page menu.
Note: A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same
folder.
Hint: Instead of a single Song, you can select a Jukebox file, and
insert its whole content to the current Jukebox list.
Delete
This command lets you delete the selected Song from the list.
Del All
Note: Groove Quantize parameters are not saved, as they are only
intended for realtime use.
Select this command to delete the whole Jukebox list.
Enable
Save
Touch this button to save the Jukebox file to disk. The Save Jukebox File dialog box appears, allowing you to edit the name and
save your file to disk.
Enables/disables quantization. It is automatically set to Off each
time the instrument is turned on, or when selecting a different
Song.
Hint: You can enable/disable the Groove Quantize also by selecting
the “Ply.1-Groove Quantize Enable” command from the page
menu.
Enables/disables quantization of the Note On event (i.e. beginning of the note).
Note Duration
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit window,
and edit the name.
If you are editing an existing list, and do not change its name, the
old file is overwritten. If you change it, a new file will be created
on disk.
If you are saving a new list, the “NEWNAME.JBX” name is automatically assigned, and you can edit it.
Note: You can save your “.JBX” file only in the same folder as the
Song files included in the list.
Enables/disables quantization of the Note Off event (i.e. the
length of the note).
Resolution
Coarse quantize grid resolution. This parameter is the main
quantization value, to be varied with the Acc, Swing and Window values.
(1/32)… (1/4)
Grid resolution, in musical values (a “3” after the
value means “triplet”). For example, when you
select 1/8, all notes are moved to the nearest 1/8
Reference
Note Start
178
Song Play operating mode
Preferences: Track Settings
division. When you select 1/4, all notes are moved
to the nearest 1/4 division.
Preferences: Track Settings
No quantization
In this page, you can set various general parameters referred to
Song tracks.
1/8
1/4
Accuracy
Accuracy percentage of quantize. For example, if Acc=50, and
the note is 20 tics away from the coarse grid, it is moved to the
grid of only 10 tics.
0
No accuracy. The quantize is not executed.
100
Maximum accuracy. The note is moved exactly at
the grid position.
Swing
Asymmetry of quantization. Grid axis are moved to the nearest
grid axis.
0
Even-numbered axis are totally moved over the
previous odd-numbered axis.
50
Axis are perfectly equidistant.
100
Even-numbered axis are totally moved over the
following odd-numbered axis.
Swng=50
Note: These settings are stored in the Song Play Setup area of the
Global file (together with all the other parameters marked with the
Sng abbreviation in the manual). After changing these settings,
select the Write Global-Song Play Setup command from the page
menu to save them to the Global.
Melody
Sng
This parameter selects the Song’s Melody track. This track can be
muted using the “Melody Mute” function, assignable to an
Assignable Switch, Footswitch or EC5 pedal.
Drum
Sng
This parameter selects the Song’s Drum track. This track is left
set to play (together with the Bass track) when selecting the
“Drum&Bass” function, assignable to an Assignable Switch,
Footswitch or EC5 pedal.
Swng=25
Bass
Sng
This parameter selects the Song’s Bass track. This track is left set
to play (together with the Drum track) when selecting the
“Drum&Bass” function, assignable to an Assignable Switch,
Footswitch or EC5 pedal.
Swng=75
Window
Area of quantize intervention, bordering the grid axis.
Harmony Track
0
The quantize window corresponds to the axis. No
quantization happens.
The Voice Processor gets the notes or chords from the track
selected with this parameter.
100
The quantize window extends to the nearest window; all events are quantized.
Note: If “Global” is selected, notes or chords sent to the Voice Processor depend on the “Harmony Mode” and “Source” paramters of
the Global mode (see page 242 for more information).
Win=0
Off
Win=50
Sng
No track sends notes to the Harmony module of
the Voice processor. Chords can still be received
from the MIDI IN.
Ply.1-Track 1…16
Win=100
Notes are sent from one of Player 1’s tracks.
Ply.2-Track 1…16
Notes are sent from one of Player 2’s tracks.
Ply.1+2Track1…16
Notes are sent by a track with the same name
from both Player 1 and Player 2.
Song Play operating mode
Preferences: General Control
Note: When both players are in play, the Voice Processor only receives notes from Player 1 when the XFader slider is fully on the left, and only from Player
2 when the X-Fader slider is fully on the right.
Notes or chords received by the Voice Processor
depend on the “Harmony Mode” parameter (see
page 242):
Performance recalls FX CD
This parameter selects the effects mode for the Performance.
Off
When selecting a Performance, no effect is
selected.
On
The Performance selects the C/D effect pair.
Note: When both this parameter and the “Ply.2 FX
Mode” parameter are set to select the C/D effect
pair, Player 2 shares its effects with Keyboard
tracks. Therefore, these effects can be changed either
selecting a Song for Player 2, or selecting a Performance.
• if the Chords option is selected, chords are sent
from the Chord Scanning area of the keyboard.
• if the Notes option is selected, notes are sent
(instead of chords).
• if the Shift or Scalic options are selected, notes
or chords are ignored.
Lyrics/Score X-Fader Link
Sng
This parameter allows you to use the X-FADER slider to select
the Player whose lyrics, chords, markers or score will be shown
in the built-in display or external monitor.
Preferences: General Control
When the “Text Only” option is selected as the external display
view mode, the slider allows you to choose whose lyrics and
chords will be shown on the external monitor (see “External
Display” on page 235 for more information).
In this page, you can set various general parameters.
Off
When moving the X-FADER, only the volume
balance between Songs will be selected. The
shown lyrics or markers will remain unchanged.
On
When moving the X-FADER fully to the left or
the right, the corresponding Song will fade-in,
and its lyrics, chords, markers and score will be
selected and shown in the display or external
monitor.
Lyrics
Markers
Player 1
Note: These settings are stored in the Song Play Setup area of the
Global file (together with all the other parameters marked with the
Sng abbreviation through the manual). After changing these
settings, select the Write Global-Song Play Setup command from
the page menu to save them to the Global.
Midi Setup
Sng
Lyrics
Markers
Player 2
Sng
MIDI channels for the Song Play mode can be automatically
configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter. See
“MIDI Setup” on page 228 for more information on using MIDI
Setups.
Note: To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the
Song Play mode, select the Write Global-Song Play Setup command
from the page menu.
For detailed information on preloaded MIDI Setup settings, see
“MIDI Setup” on page 319.
Ply.2 FX Mode
This parameter selects the effects mode for Player 2. When a 4effects Song is loaded, all four effects are used, independently
from this setting.
AB
The A and B effect pair is used. Player 2 shares its
effects with Player 1.
CD
The C and D effect pair is used.
Note: When this parameter is set to CD, Player 2
shares its effects with Keyboard tracks, so these
effects can be changed either selecting a Song for
Player 2, or selecting a Performance (unless the
“Performance recalls FX CD” parameter is left
unchecked – see above).
Note: After selecting a MIDI Setup, you can go to the Global mode
and apply any change to each channel setting. To store these
changes to a MIDI Setup, while still in Global mode select the Write
Global-Midi Setup command from the page menu. All MIDI Setups can be freely customized and overwritten.
Hint: To restore the original MIDI Setups, load the original Factory data again (available in the supplied Accessory CD, or downloadable from www.korgpa.com).
Sng
Link Mode
Sng
When playing Standard MIDI Files, the two onboard Players can
work each one with a different Tempo (Off), or use both the
same Tempo (various Link modes). With MP3 files, each Song
has its own recorded tempo, and cannot be linked.
Reference
Global
179
180
Song Play operating mode
Page menu
You can turn the Link Mode on by pressing the TEMPO LOCK
button and turning its LED on (by default, Beat mode is selected
the first time). This also turns the Tempo Lock function on.
Hint: You can always start both players simultaneously, by keeping
the SHIFT button held down while pressing one of the
(PLAY/STOP) controls.
Off
The players Tempo are not linked. Each player
uses its own Tempo.
Measure
The two players Tempo are linked together. The
Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored.
Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO/VALUE
controls.
Page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
Start one of the players, by pressing its own
(PLAY/STOP) control. Then, start the other
player, by pressing the other
(PLAY/STOP)
control; the second player starts at the next measure.
Beat
The two player’s Tempo are linked together. The
Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored.
Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO/VALUE
controls.
Start one of the players, by pressing its own
(PLAY/STOP) control. Then, start the other
player, by pressing the other
(PLAY/STOP)
control; the second player starts at the next beat
(quarter or octave, depending on the Song’s Time
Signature).
Fast Play
Sng
When checked, this function allows to skip the empty setup
beats at the beginning of a Standard MIDI File, and immediately
start from the first note. However, any setup data are read and
considered.
Please note that, being recorded as audio data, any empty space
at the beginning of an MP3 file cannot be skipped.
Note: When Pa2X is driving an external musical instrument, the
fast transfer of MIDI data to the MIDI OUT or USB port may
cause a delay to the Song’s start. Therefore, we suggest to turn this
function off when Pa2X is hooked to other instruments.
Get Hard Disk Path
Sng
Touch this button to see the current file path of the Song
assigned to each of the players. This lets you know where currently selected Songs are located in the disk.
Write Performance
Select this command to open the Write Performance dialog box,
and save most of the current control panel settings to a Performance.
See “Write Performance dialog box” on page 112 for more information.
Write Global-Song Play Setup
Select this command to open the Write Global-Song Play Setup
dialog box, and save global settings that are unique to the Song
Play mode.
See “Write Global-Song Play Setup dialog box” on page 181 for
more information.
Save Song Marker Ply.1/2
Select this command to save the markers created in the corresponding player (see “Markers side tabs” on page 167).
Export Jukebox List
Only available when a Jukebox list is selected. Select this command to save the current Jukebox list as a text file to a disk. Here
is how it works.
1.
While a Jukebox file is assigned to the player, select the
Export Jukebox List command from the page menu.
2.
A dialog box will appear, asking you to select either the
internal SSD-U memory or a storage device connected to
one of the USB Host ports.
3.
Select an option, and touch OK to confirm.
If you save these paths to the Global, by selecting the “Write Global-Song Play Setup” command from the page menu, the first
time you will open the Song Select window, after turning the
instrument on, the selected path will be selected by default.
Song Play operating mode
Write Global-Song Play Setup dialog box
Note: When saved, the text file will be named after the selected
Jukebox file. For example, a Jukebox file named “Dummy.jbx” will
generate a “Dummy.txt” file. A new, unnamed Jukebox file will
generate a “New_name.txt” file. If a file with the same name
already exists on the target device, it will be overwritten without
waiting for any confirmation.
The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song,
the file names, the total number of files in the list.
For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal computer, use a fixed size (i.e., non-proportional) character in your text
editor.
Ply.1-Groove Quantize Enable
Enables/disables the groove quantize (see “Groove Quantize” on
page 177). It is automatically unchecked each time the instrument is turned on, or when selecting a different Song.
Note: Groove Quantize only works on Player 1.
Solo Track
Select the track of the current Player to be soloed, and check this
item. You will hear only the selected track, and the ‘Solo’ warning
will flash on the page header.
Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function.
The Solo functions works in a slightly different way, depending
on the selected track:
• Keyboard track: The selected Keyboard track is the only track
you can hear when playing on the keyboard. All other Keyboard
tracks are muted. Player tracks are left in play status.
181
To copy all four effects:
1.
Select the source Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
Effects > FX Select page, to copy all four effects.
2.
Choose the “Copy FX” command from the page menu.
3.
Select the target Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
page of the Effects > FX Select page.
4.
Choose the “Paste FX” command from the page menu.
Easy Mode
Easy Mode allows you to use the Style Play and Song Play modes
with an easier-to-use user interface. It is recommended to beginners, and to professionals alike that do not want to deal with the
extra parameters of the Advanced mode.
At any time, you can manually turn the Easy Mode on/off with
the Easy Mode command in the page menu of the Style Play and
Song Play modes.
See “The Song Play page in detail” on page 28 for more information.
Write Global-Song Play Setup dialog box
Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global-Song Play
Setup item from the page menu. Here, you can save various Song
Preference settings (see “Preferences: Track Settings” on
page 178), that are saved to the Global file.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the
tracks to solo it. Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the
Solo function.
Copy/Paste FX
You can copy a single, or all four effects, between Styles, Performances, STSs and Songs. To do this, choose the “Copy FX” and
“Paste FX” commands from the page menu of the Style Play,
Song Play or Sequencer modes.
To copy a single effect:
1.
Select the source Song, Performance, Style or STS, then
• go to the page of the single effect you want to copy (FX A,
FX B, FX C, or FX D), or
• go to the Effects > FX Select page, to copy all four effects.
This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the
four effects into different Performances, Styles or STSs.
2.
Choose the “Copy FX” command from the page menu.
3.
Select the target Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
page of the single effect you want to paste (FX A, FX B, FX
C, or FX D).
4.
Choose the “Paste FX” command from the page menu.
Parameters saved in the Song Play Setup area of the Global are
marked with the
Sng
symbol through the user’s manual.
Reference
• Song track: The selected track is the only Song track you can
hear. All other Song tracks are muted. Keyboard tracks are left in
play status.
182
Recording MP3 files
Recording MP3 files
With Pa2X, you can record your performance as an MP3 file.
Keep in mind what follows:
• All you play on the keyboard, the Styles and the Standard MIDI
Files performed by the Players will be recorded. Also, audio
entering the Audio Inputs is recorded (single microphone input
with the “In to Voice Processor” option selected, or both inputs
with the “In to Direct” option selected. See “Audio Setup: Audio
In” on page 233). Harmony voices generated by the Voice Processor will be recorded as well.
When done, touch the Rec button in the display to start recording. The Rec button changes to Stop, and can be touched again
to stop recording. Also, the Idle label changes to Recording.
• Playback of MP3 files will not be recorded.
Note: You cannot enter MP3 Record mode while in Sequencer or
Media mode.
Note: If recording with the Master EQ turned on, the EQ will be
recorded into the MP3 file. This equalisation will be added to the
one selected during playback. It is advisable to turn Master EQ off
while recording, if the MP3 file has to be played back on the Pa2X.
Recording
To enter recording, keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press
the RECORD button. The MP3 Record dialog box will appear.
If you like, you can press the EXIT button to exit this dialog box
and access the Style Play and Song Play pages. To enter the dialog
box again, and see the file length or stop recording, press
SHIFT+REC again.
During recording, if you exit from the MP3 Record dialog box while still recording, a big red ‘R’ will flash in
the display.
During recording, you can use this dialog box to see the Recording time, file length, and the remaining space on disk. Maximum
recording time depends on the available space in the selected
device.
After touching Stop, recording will stop, and the following dialog box will appear:
When not recording, the shown status is Idle.
Choose the preferred MP3 audio quality option, by means of the
Quality pop-up menu. The higher the sound quality, the larger
the MP3 file that will be generated.
Use the Device parameter to choose a location where to temporary store the recorded MP3 file. This is not the final destination
of your file, since you will be able to choose a different location
after recording. However, be sure there is space enough for the
temporary file, by reading the Free space parameter.
Note: The default device is automatically selected as the recording
unit; use the Device pop-up menu to choose a different one. You
can record on the internal SSD-U flash memory, the hard disk, or a
device connected to one of the USB ports.
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to assign a name to the MP3
file. Touch the Browse button to select a device and directory
where to save the file. Touch the Save button to save the file.
After saving, you can listen to the MP3 file in Song Play mode, as
you do with any other Song.
The MP3 file can also be moved to a personal computer for further editing, via the USB interface.
Notes
Audio outputs
• Audio generated by the MP3 board can only be routed on the
Left+Right audio outputs.
Playback
• MP3 files recorded with lower sampling rates may not sound very
good. This is an unavoidable problem with MP3 files.
Recording MP3 files
183
Recording
• You can record as an MP3 file everything you play with the Pa2X,
including your vocals (in other words, you can record your whole
performance). However, you cannot record other MP3 files.
Devices
• It is not advisable to fill the target device too much during recording. Filling it may cause troubles with the recorded file.
Reference
• Regular care is recommended with your target device. Defragmenting and repairing internal devices can be made with any PC
utility, while the Pa2X is connected via USB.
184
SongBook
Book
SongBook
The SongBook is an onboard database that allows you to organize various “musical resources” (Style, Standard MIDI Files,
KAR files, and MP3 files) for easy retrieving.
The SongBook mode overlaps the Style Play and Song Play operating modes. When you select an entry from the database, the
Style Play or Song Play mode is automatically selected, depending on the type of file associated with the entry.
In addition to helping you organize your shows, the SongBook
allows you to associate four Pads, and up to four STSs to each
Standard MIDI File or MP3 file, played back in Song Play mode.
This way, it is easy to recall a complete setup for Keyboard tracks,
effects, and the Voice Processor, for realtime playing over a midifile or MP3 file.
For more information on using the SongBook, see the Quick
Guide (starting from page 61).
Note: SongBook entries do not include actual data, but only a
pointer to a Style in memory, a Standard MIDI File, or an MP3
file. When you copy a SongBook file, referenced files are not copied
with it.
Warning: If you load a SongBook list from a storage device
(“.SBD” file), the existing one in memory is deleted. Save your old
SongBook list before loading a new one.
List Header
The List Header may change, depending on the type of data
associated with the selected entry.
•
When a Style is associated to the entry, the currently
selected entry’s name is shown on the left (“N:”), and the
associated Style is shown on the right (“Style:”):
•
When a Standard MIDI File or MP3 file is associated to the
entry, the list header is split into two parts, with the left half
referring to Player 1, and the right one referring to Player 2.
Information for the selected entry’s name (“N:”) and associated Standard MIDI File or MP3 file (“P1:” or “P2:”) is
given for each player:
Note: If you select a different Style or Standard MIDI File or
MP3 file, the entry’s name field (“N:”) returns blank (---),
meaning the entry has been modified.
Main list
Full list of the SongBook database. Use the scrollbar (or the
TEMPO/VALUE controls) to browse through the list.
Book
The Book page contains the full database of song entries (i.e., an
“.SBD” file). While in this page, you can select an entry, and
touch the Select button in the display to load it. Then, press the
PLAY or START button to start the Song or Style.
You can touch one of the heading labels above the list to change
the order in which entries are shown. For example, by touching
the “Name” label, the list is alphabetically re-ordered according
to the entry names. The selected label turns red, showing the
currently selected ordering.
List Header
Main list
Scrollbar
The corresponding items in the page menu are automatically
updated to reflect these changes (see “Sort by Type/Name/
Genre/Artist/Number/Key/Tempo/Meter” on page 192).
By touching the label again, the order of the files switches
between ascending and descending.
Commands
Each entry of this database may include the song’s author, name,
genre, original key, tempo and meter (time signature). When
selecting one of the entries, the associated Style, Standard MIDI
File or MP3 file is automatically recalled. Also, STSs and Pads
may be recalled (if present).
Scrollbar
Use the scrollbar (or the TEMPO/VALUE controls) to scroll the
entries.
Commands
Filtered
When this box is checked, only entries matching the selected filter criteria are shown in the Main list. The box is automatically
checked when you exit from the Filter dialog box by touching
OK (see below).
SongBook
Book
Filter…
Touch this button to open the Filter dialog box, and select one or
more filter criteria, to show a restricted set of entries in the main
list.
185
To see the numbers while in the Book page, select the “Show
Song Numbers (now Key)” command from the page menu:
After you select this command, the “Num” column appears:
Touch the
(Text Edit) button next to the search criteria you
want to edit (Name, Genre, or Artist). You can also select a
Meter, or a range of Tempo values.
Touch the Clear button next to the search criterion you want to
delete or set to a default value.
Touch Clear All to reset all search criteria.
Add to list
Select an entry, then touch this button to add the selected entry
to the current Custom List (see “Custom List” on page 189).
Select
Touch this button to confirm selection of the highlighted entry
in the main list. After touching this button, the name of the
selected entry appears in the left upper corner of the display
(“N:”).
When you highlight a song in any of the SongBook lists, its name
appears in reversed text, over a dark-blue background. While in
this situation, the song is highlighted, but not yet loaded.
When you touch the Select button in the display, the song will be
loaded. The blue background turns to green, and the text is
turned to boldface, to show the Song has been loaded and ready
to play.
To start playback of the Song or Style, press (respectively) either
the PLAY or START button.
Numeric selection of entries
When in SongBook mode, you can select a SongBook entry by
means of an unique number. Numbers associated with each
entry can be programmed in the Book Edit 2 page (see “Book
Edit 2” on page 188).
To see the “Key” column again, select the “Show Key (now Song
Numbers)” command from the page menu.
To select a SongBook entry by entering its number, press the
SONGBOOK button again while you are in any page of the
SongBook mode. The numeric keypad will appear, allowing you
to enter the number corresponding to the desired entry.
Hint: You can export a list of SongBook entries in TXT format,
including the assigned selection number. You can print this list on
paper as a memo. (See “Export as text file” on page 192).
Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI
SongBook entries can be selected via MIDI (through the special
Control channel), by using the NRPN dedicated Control Change
messages #99 (MSB, with value 2) and #98 (LSB, with value 64).
See “Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI” on next page.
Setting the special Control MIDI channel
First of all, go to the Global > MIDI > Setup/General Control
page and select a MIDI Setup to be used when you will remotely
select SongBook entries.
Then go to the Global > MIDI > Midi In Channel page, to assign
a MIDI channel to the special Control channel. Assign the Control option to one of the sixteen available MIDI channels (usually one of the higher-numbered ones).
When done, save this setting to the current MIDI Setup by
choosing the “Write Global-Midi Setup” command from the
page menu.
If you plan to use a different MIDI channel for the Style Play and
Song Play modes, repeat the above to create a second MIDI
Setup.
Reference
If the “Enable List Edit” command is selected in the page menu,
the “Add to list” button becomes available, to let you add entries
to the selected Custom List.
186
SongBook
Book
Assigning a MIDI Setup to the Style Play and Song Play
modes
Since SongBook entries dynamically recall the Style Play or the
Song Play modes, it is advisable to assign them the same MIDI
Setup, or two different MIDI Setups with the Control channel
assigned to the same MIDI channel. This way, the same MIDI
channel will be used to select a SongBook entry in either the
Style Play or Song Play mode.
After the initialization string has been sent, you must send the
selection string, made of two Control Change messages: CC#06
(Data Entry MSB) for the thousands and hundreds, and CC#38
(Data Entry LSB) for the tens and units. The range of the Data
Entry controls, in this case, is 0~99 (instead of the typical
0~127).
The following examples show some typical situations.
•
When one of the operating modes is recalled, the MIDI Setup
memorized in the Style Play Setup or in the Song Play Setup will
be automatically selected, and MIDI channels will be automatically configured.
Initialization string (CC#99, 98)
Thousands and hundreds (00xx)
To assign a MIDI Setup to each of the two operating modes:
• In Style Play mode, go to the Style Play > Preferences > Style
Setup page, and select a MIDI Setup. Select the Write GlobalStyle Setup command from the page menu.
Tens and units (xx77)
•
• In Song Play mode, go to the Song Play > Preferences > General Control page, and select the same MIDI Setup assigned to
the Style Play mode. Select the Write Global-Song Play Setup
command from the page menu.
At this point, Pa2X must receive on the special Control channel
the NRPN Control Change messages #99 (MSB, with value 2)
and #98 (LSB, with value 64) in fast succession, as an initialization string. This string must be sent only once, unless another
NRPN control is sent on the same MIDI channel before selecting
a different SongBook entry.
Send the following string to select SongBook entry #100:
Initialization string (CC#99, 98)
Thousands and hundreds (01xx)
Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI
When you are ready to remotely select SongBook entries, switch
to the Style Play or Song Play mode.
Send the following string to select SongBook entry #77:
Tens and units (xx00)
•
Send the following string to select SongBook entry #2563:
Initialization string (CC#99, 98)
Thousands and hundreds (25xx)
Tens and units (xx63)
SongBook
Book Edit 1
Key Info
Book Edit 1
187
SB
Original key of the entry. The first field is the key name, the second one is the mode (major or minor).
The Book Edit 1 page is where you to add or modify SongBook
entries.
Tempo
Hint: Use the Filter in the Book page, to quickly find an entry to be
edited.
Basic tempo of the Style, or starting tempo of the Standard MIDI
File associated with the entry. This may change, if a Tempo
Change event is included with the associated resource.
The Book Edit 1 page with a Style-based entry:
SB
Note: Even if you can edit this value, the starting value of a Standard MIDI Files is always considered, and overrides this value.
Note: You can edit this value even if an MP3 is associated to the
SongBook entry. However, this is just an indicative value.
Meter Info
SB
Basic meter (time signature) of the Style, or starting meter of the
Standard MIDI File associated with the entry. This may change,
if a Meter Change event is included with the associated resource.
M.Transp. (Master Transpose)
SB
Master Transpose. When the entry is selected, the Master Transpose for the whole instrument is automatically changed (unless
the Master Transpose is locked).
The Book Edit 1 page with a Song-based entry:
Note: The Master Transpose value saved with the SongBook entry
overrides any Master Transpose setting contained in the referenced
Song.
Resource Area
Write Current Resource
Header
Name
SB
Name of the selected song entry. The name is assigned after you
touch the Write button to save the entry to the SongBook list.
Resource
SB
Style, Standard MIDI File or MP3 file associated with the saved
entry.
Warning: If you replace this resource with a different one, carrying
the same media path and name (in case of a Standard MIDI File or
MP3 file) or memory location number (in case of a Style), the
SongBook entry will no longer point to the right data. Be careful
not to delete or move a Style or a file associated with a SongBook
entry from the original location.
Database Area
Genre
SB
Music genre associated with the entry.
Artist
Name of the artist of the song associated with the entry.
SB
•
the latest selected Style; this also saves the associated Pads.
•
the SMF, KAR or MP3 file assigned to Player 1, and shown
on the right of this parameter; Pads associated to the latest
selected Style are also saved.
Note: Only the SMF, KAR or MP3 file assigned to Player 1 will be
saved in the SongBook entry. However, when recalling the entry,
the Song will be assigned to either Player, depending on which one
is currently free and not in play.
When unchecked, no new resource will be saved with the entry.
The original resource associated with the entry will be preserved
when touching Write.
When touching New Song to create a new, blank entry, this
parameter is automatically checked, and cannot be modified. A
reference to the associated resource will be saved with the new
entry.
Resource Name
SB
Name of the currently selected Style, Standard MIDI File or MP3
file. It may differ from the name of the resource already saved in
the entry, shown on top of the page (see “Resource” above).
You can select a different resource by going back to the Style Play
or Song Play mode, and selecting resources from there. Then,
press the SONGBOOK button to return to the Book Edit page.
When you touch Write, a link to the selected resource(s) is saved
with the entry (provided “Write Current Resource” is selected
Reference
When checked, a reference to the selected resource is saved with
the entry when touching Write. Saved resources are:
188
SongBook
Book Edit 2
when saving). The resource(s) will be recalled when you selected
the entry it is associated to.
Write STS
SB
When saving a SongBook entry, and this parameter is checked,
you can save a single STS or all four Style’s STSs.
<STS Name> A single STS is saved to the chosen SongBook
STS. The source are the current Keyboard tracks,
as they have been configured by selecting a Performance, Style STS, SongBook STS, or after
manual editing.
When you touch Write and choose the Rename/
Overwrite option, only the new STS is overwritten, while the others are left untouched.
All Current Style STS
All four STSs are saved to the current SongBook
entry. The source STSs are those contained in the
Style currently selected in Style Play mode.
To assign a different name to the entry, touch the
Edit) button to open the Text Edit window.
(Text
Select an option to add the new entry to the SongBook:
•
Select Rename/Overwrite to overwrite an existing entry,
optionally changing its name. Warning: The older entry will
be deleted!
•
Select New Song to save a new entry to the SongBook database.
Book Edit 2
The Book Edit 2 page is where you select Style options to be
memorized, link a “.TXT” file, and assign a unique number to
the current entry.
When you touch Write and choose the Rename/
Overwrite option, all STSs are overwritten at
once.
STS Name
SB
Name of the current STS. Touch the
(Text Edit) button to
open the Text Edit window, and modify the name.
To STS Location
One of the four STS available for each entry, where you can save
the current settings for Keyboard tracks and the Voice Processor.
Synchro Start / Synchro Stop / Memory
Buttons
The status of these functions can be memorized in a SongBook
entry.
New Song
Touch this button to create a new entry. Settings are copied from
the currently selected Style, or from the Standard MIDI File or
MP3 file assigned to Player 1. The selected resource will be
shown in the “Resource Name” field (see above).
Note: If the SongBook entry is based on a Song, Synchro Start and
Synchro Stop appear in grey and cannot be modified, since they
have no effect on a Song.
Unchanged
When selecting this SongBook entry, the status of
the corresponding function is left unchanged.
Off
When selecting this SongBook entry, the status of
the corresponding function is turned off.
On
When selecting this SongBook entry, the status of
the corresponding function is turned on.
Del Song
Touch this button to delete the current entry.
Write
Touch this button to open the Write Song dialog box, and save
the current entry to the main list of the SongBook.
Note: The maximum number of entries in a SongBook file is 3,000
entries.
SB
Linked .TXT
SB
You can select a text (.TXT) file, and link it to the Style or Song
associated with the current SongBook entry. When you select
this entry, the text file is automatically loaded.
Text files can be seen in the display and in an external monitor
(provided the VIF4 Video Interface has been installed). Since
there is no automatic synchronization between this kind of lyrics
and the associated songs, you must scroll them manually. This
can be accomplished in either of two ways:
•
When a “.TXT” file is selected, a special vertical scrollbar
appears in the Lyrics/STS page of the SongBook mode.
Touch it to scroll through the text during the performance.
See “Lyrics/STS” on page 190.
SongBook
Custom List
•
Scrolling is also possible by means of the Text Page Down/
Up command, that can be assigned to a Footswitch, EC
Switch or Assignable Switch.
This section of the Book Edit 2 page contains two buttons:
Reset
Touch this buttons to unlink the text file from the
entry.
Browse
Touch this button to open a standard File Selector, and select a “.TXT” file to be linked to the
current SongBook entry.
189
Custom List
Use this page to select and use one of the available Custom Lists
(contained in the “LISTDB.SBL” file saved in the same folder as
the “.SBD” SongBook file). Custom Lists are lists made of entries
extracted from the main SongBook list (as seen in the Book
page). They allow the use of smaller, customized SongBook lists,
suitable for a single gig or your own music tastes.
List Header
After selection, the name of the linked text file
appears above the two buttons.
Custom list
Scrollbar
Linked text file
Commands
SB
Here you can select a unique number (up to 9,999) to be associated to the current SongBook entry. By typing this number (by
using the Numeric Keypad) after pressing the SONGBOOK button again, you will be able to quickly recall an entry from the
Book page (see “Numeric selection of entries” on page 185).
Hint: You can jump to this page by keeping SHIFT pressed, and
pressing the SONGBOOK button.
Assigning a number is not mandatory, but may help you to organize your entries. For example, you can use the different 100s to
create a different way of categorizing your entries by genre or
age.
See “List Header” on page 184.
Each number can correspond only to a single entry. You cannot
assign the same number to two or more different entries. Therefore, if you try to save a modified entry without first selecting a
different Song Selection Number, and select the New Song
option in the Write Song dialog box, the following error message
will appear:
“This entry’s Song Selection Number has already been assigned.
Please assign a different number”.
Should this happen, you will automatically be kept in the Book
Edit 2 page. While there, assign a different number (while turning the Dial or pressing the UP/DOWN buttons, you are only
allowed to select numbers that are still free) and try to save the
entry again.
Harmony Track
When selecting a SongBook entry (pointing to a Standard MIDI
File or MP3 file), the Harmony Track can be automatically
selected.
Note: If the entry is based on a Style, this parameter is greyed out
(non-selectable).
Unchanged
The previously selected track is left unchanged.
Track Number The chosen track is selected when choosing the
(SMF-based) SongBook entry.
List header
Custom list
List of files contained in the selected Custom List. Use the scrollbar to browse through the list. As an alternative, use the
TEMPO/VALUE controls.
Scrollbar
Use the scrollbar (or the TEMPO/VALUE controls) to scroll the
entries.
Commands
List pop-up menu
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available lists.
Next
Touch this button to select the next entry in the list.
Hint: You can assign this command to an Assignable Switch or
Assignable Footswitch.
Select
Touch this button to confirm selection of the highlighted entry
in the list. After touching this button, the name of the selected
entry appears in the left upper corner of the display (“N:”).
Hint: This command is useful to browse through the list, and select
an entry different than the following one in the list.
Reference
Song Selection Number
190
SongBook
List Edit
Del List
List Edit
Touch this button to delete the current list.
This page is only available after checking the “Enable List Edit”
command in the page menu (see page 192).
Write
Touch this button to save changes to the selected Custom List.
Use this page to edit the available Custom Lists. A Custom List is
a set of SongBook entries, created by selecting items from the
Main List.
To add entries to a Custom List, first create or select the list to be
edited in this page. Then, go to the Book page, select the entry to
be added, and touch the “Add to list” button. When finished
adding entries, return to this page and edit the selected list.
List Name
Custom list
To assign a different name to the selected list, touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit window.
Select an option to save the edited Custom List:
Scrollbar
Commands
List Name
Name of the selected list. To select a Custom List, go to the “Custom List” page and use the List pop-up menu.
Custom list
List of songs contained in the selected Custom List. Use the scrollbar or the TEMPO/VALUE controls to browse through the list.
Scrollbar
•
Select Rename/Overwrite to overwrite an existing list,
optionally changing its name. Warning: The older list will
be deleted!
•
Select New List to save a new Custom List in memory. This
list will be available in the “Custom List” page.
Lyrics/STS
The Lyrics/STS page is where you can see lyrics, chords and
scores, and select STSs.
Ply./Style Lyrics side tabs
These three panels show the lyrics and chord abbreviations. You
can find more information on the types of data supported on
page 166.
Use the scrollbar (or the TEMPO/VALUE controls) to scroll the
entries.
Commands
Move
Use these buttons to move the selected song entry up or down in
the list.
Del Song
Touch this button to delete the selected song entry from the list.
New List
Touch this button to create a new, empty Custom List.
Note: The maximum number of Custom Lists in a SongBook file is
256 lists.
Warning: Any unsaved Custom List is lost when creating a new list
using this command.
When a Song-based entry has been selected, you can see lyrics
contained in a Standard MIDI File as Lyrics events, or in an MP3
with Lyrics file. In this case, text will automatically flow with the
music.
You can also see lyrics contained in a “.TXT” file linked to a Styleor Song-based SongBook entry. In this case, unlike with ordinary
Lyrics, the text will not scroll automatically while the Song is
playing back. You must scroll it with the DIAL or the vertical
scrollbar. As an alternative, you can use an assignable switch or
footswitch, with the Text Page Up or Text Page Down functions
assigned, to scroll (respectively) to the previous or next text page.
SongBook
Info
When no lyrics data is contained in the Song, or linked to a
SongBook entry, and no “.TXT” file has been linked to the current entry, you can see lyrics contained in a “.TXT” file loaded
after selecting an entry (see “On-the-fly TXT loading” below).
When a “.TXT” file is associated to the current song, a vertical
scrollbar appears, allowing you to scroll to the previous or
former text page during the performance.
Note: You cannot scroll a single line of text at a time; you always
scroll by a whole page of text, either if you touch on the scrollbar or
one of the small scrolling arrows.
191
Info
Use the Info page to see the name of the selected entry, the associated resource(s), the total number of Songs in the SongBook,
the number of filtered entries, the number of available Custom
Lists, and the number of Songs in the current list.
•
In case of an entry based on a Style:
Selected entry
Associated
resource
Touch here to scroll
to the next page
Lyrics as text files associated to a SongBook entry
Lyrics can be associated to each SongBook entry (either Style or
Song-based) as a “.TXT” file. See “Linked .TXT” on page 188 for
more information on this issue.
•
In case of an entry based on Standard MIDI Files or MP3
files:
Selected entry
On-the-fly TXT loading
Associated
resource(s)
Selected entry
This parameter shows the currently selected entry. If it is blank
(---), the latest selected entry has been modified, or no entry has
been selected yet.
When this message appears, and you want to load a “.TXT” file,
keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch the center of the display. A standard file selector appears, and lets you look for
“.TXT” file to be loaded to be shown while the current Style or
Song is playing.
Associated resource
Style or Standard MIDI File or MP3 file associated to the
selected entry.
Hint: When the file selector appears, you can use the Search
Song number
(
) function to search a “.TXT” file in the various media. See
“Searching files” on page 250 for more information.
Total number of entries in the SongBook list.
Markers side tabs
This parameter shows the number of entries shown in the Book
page, after applying the selected filter. If no filter is selected, this
matches the total number of entries in the SongBook list (see
previous parameter).
See “Markers side tabs” on page 167 for more information.
Filtered Song number
Score side tabs
Custom List number
See “Score side tabs” on page 168 for more information.
This parameter shows the number of available Custom Lists.
Options side tabs
Songs in the Current List
See “Options side tab” on page 169 for more information.
Number of entries in the selected Custom List.
Reference
When an entry does not contain any Lyrics metadata or has no
“.TXT” file linked, the “No lyrics. Press SHIFT and touch here to
load a TXT file” message appears in the display when you go to
the Lyrics/STS page.
192
SongBook
Page menu
Enable List Edit
Page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
Select this command, and make the checkmark appear, to make
the List Edit page available.
Export as text file
Only available when a SongBook list or Custom list is selected.
Select this command to open the Export dialog box, and save the
SongBook or Custom List as a text file. The selected filtering will
be applied to the exported list, assuming the Filter button is
checked.
The dialog box is a little different, depending on the page where
you selected this command.
•
Selected from the Book page:
•
Selected from the Custom List page:
Show Artist/Genre
Select this command to toggle between the Artist and Genre column on the SongBook list, appearing in the Book and Custom
List page.
Show Number/Key
Select this command to toggle between the Number and Key column on the SongBook list, appearing in the Book and Custom
List page.
Ascending/Descending
Select this command to toggle between the ascending and
descending view order of the SongBook list. The sorting order is
selected with one of the following commands.
The ascending/descending order is shown by a small arrow next
to the label’s name on top of the list.
Sort by Type/Name/Genre/Artist/Number/Key/Tempo/
Meter
Select one of these command to select the sorting order. The
selected option is shown in red above the entry list.
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit window
and assign a name to the text file to be saved to a storage device.
Then, select either the internal SSD-U memory or the hard disk
to save the file.
•
Touch OK to confirm.
Sequencer operating mode
Transport controls
193
Sequencer operating mode
You can save the new or edited Song as a Standard MIDI File
(SMF, i.e., a file with the “.MID” extension), and play it back
either in Song Play or Sequencer mode – or on any external
sequencer.
Transport controls
To play back a Song, use PLAYER 1 transport controls (i.e., the
one on the left side of the PLAYER area). While in Sequencer
mode, you can only use Player 1 controls. Player 2 controls are
deactivated. See “PLAYER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS” on
page 10 for more information.
The Songs and the Standard MIDI File
format
The native Song format for Pa2X is the Standard MIDI File.
Sequencer Play - Main page
Press SEQUENCER to access this page from another operating
mode. In this page you can load a Song, and play it back using
the transport controls for PLAYER 1 (see “Transport controls”
above).
Note: When switching from Style Play to Sequencer mode, the
Sequencer Setup is automatically selected, and various track
parameters may change.
To return to this page from one of the Sequencer edit pages,
press the EXIT or SEQUENCER button.
To switch between Song tracks 1-8 and 9-16, use the TRACK
SELECT button.
Song area
Sequencer mode and the MP3
While in Sequencer mode, you cannot load MP3 files. This
mode only allows for editing of the Standard MIDI Files.
Page menu icon
Selected
track info
area
Sounds
area
When saving a Song as a SMF, an empty measure is automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song. This measure contains various Song initialization parameters.
When an SMF is loaded, the empty measure is automatically
removed.
Page header
Track volume/status area
Page header
This line shows the current operating mode, transposition and
recognized chord.
Operating mode
name
Master Transpose
(in semitones)
Operating mode name
Songs and Voice Processor Presets
Name of the current operating mode.
Master Transpose
You can use the Voice Processor while in Sequencer mode. For
this, just two settings are needed:
Master transpose value in semitones. This value can be changed
using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel.
•
Select the Song track where you are recording chords for
the Voice Processor (see “Harmony Track” on page 215).
•
Select the desired Voice Processor Preset (in the Voice Processor Preset section of the Global mode, see page 241).
Note: Transpose may be automatically changed when loading a
Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa
series. The Master Transpose Lock parameter in the Global (see
“General Controls: Lock” on page 222) has no effect on the
Sequencer.
Reference
The Sequencer operating mode is the full-featured onboard
sequencer, where you can create a Song from scratch, or edit it.
You can also use this mode to edit the initial parameters of a
Standard MIDI File, either made with an external sequencer or
with Pa2X’s own sequencer.
194
Sequencer operating mode
Sequencer Play - Main page
Page menu icon
Tempo (Tempo mode)
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. See “Page menu”
on page 216 for more information.
Use this menu to select the Tempo change mode.
Song area
This is where the Song name is shown, together with its tempo
and meter (time signature) parameters, and the current measure.
Beat counter
Song name
Measure number
Tempo
Manual
In this mode, you can change the Tempo using
TEMPO/VALUE section controls. The Song will
be played back using the manually selected
tempo.
Auto
The Tempo recorded to the Song will be used.
Selected track info area
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track.
Not only it is shown on the main page, but also in several edit
pages.
Track name
Sound bank
Sound name
Program Change
Track name
Song name
Name of the selected track.
Displays the name of the selected Song. “NEWSONG” means
that a new (blank) Song is selected, and you can record it.
Sound name
Touch the Song name to make the Song Select window appear,
allowing for selection of a different Song (see “Song Select window” on page 84).
To select a Song, you can also press the SELECT button in the
PLAYER 1 section of the control panel. Press SELECT a second
time to select a Song by dialing in its ID number (see “Selecting a
Song by its ID number” on page 85).
Sound assigned to the selected track. Touch anywhere in this
area to open the Sound Select window, and select a different
Sound.
Sound bank
Bank the selected Sound belongs to.
Program Change
Program Change number sequence (Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB, Program Change).
Note: Only Standard MIDI Files can be loaded. MP3 files cannot
be loaded in Sequencer mode.
Meter
Sounds area
This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the
eight tracks currently displayed.
Current meter (time signature).
Measure number
Current measure number.
Octave icon
Sound bank’s icon
Tempo
Metronome tempo. Select this parameter and use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change the tempo. As an alternative, when a
different parameter is selected, or you are in a different page,
keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the
tempo of the sequencer.
Song track octave transpose
Locate measure
Sound bank’s icon
When checked, the measure shown by this parameter is a temporary start point of the song, instead of measure 1. When you
press the
(HOME) button, or use the << (REWIND) button
to go back to the beginning, the Song returns to this point.
This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to.
Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track
(detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area,
see above). Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select window.
Metro
Check this box to turn the metronome on during playback.
Non editable. Octave transpose of the corresponding track. To
edit the octave transpose, go to the “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” edit
page (see page 99 for programming information).
Sequencer operating mode
Sequencer Play - Main page
Track volume/status area
195
The Song Tracks 1-8 view shows Song tracks 1-8:
This area is where you can set the volume of each Song track,
and mute/unmute tracks.
Sliders and volume of the tracks
You can change the volume of each track by using the first eight
Assignable Sliders in the control panel. To make them act as volume controls, be sure the VOLUME LED over the SLIDER
MODE button is lit:
The Song Tracks 9-16 view shows Song tracks 9-16:
Assignable sliders
The Assignable Sliders correspond to the ‘virtual sliders’ in the
display. These are a graphical representation of each track’s volume.
Virtual sliders
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between
the Song Tracks 1-8 and Song Tracks 9-16 views. The
Assignable Sliders LEDs show which view is currently
selected:
Volume LED
Slider Mode button status
Usually, the function assigned to the Assignable Sliders depends
on the status of the SLIDER MODE button. While in Sequencer
mode, you cannot save the SLIDER MODE status to a Performance or STS, since Performances and STSs are disabled while
in this mode.
For details about the various Slider Modes, see “SLIDER
MODE” on page 7.
Track status icon
Seq
Play/mute status of the current track. Select the track, then
touch this area to change the track status. The status of Song
tracks is saved when saving the Song.
Assignable Sliders LEDs
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Track names
Under the sliders, a label for each track is shown. Use the
TRACK SELECT button to switch between tracks 1-8 and 9-16.
Abbreviation
Track
T01…T16
Song tracks. Volume memorized into a Standard MIDI File. Play/mute status memorized
into the Standard MIDI File as well, and can be
read in Song Play mode.
Reference
You can change the volume also by touching a track, and using
the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or by touching a track and dragging it in the display.
196
Sequencer operating mode
Entering Record mode
Entering Record mode
To enter Record mode, press the RECORD button while you are
in Sequencer mode. The following dialog box will appear:
Record mode: Multitrack Sequencer
page
While in Sequencer mode, press the RECORD button and select
the “Multitrack Sequencer” option. The Multitrack Sequencer
page appears.
Page sub-header
Page header
Page menu icon
Recording
parameters area
Selected
track info
area
Select one of the three available recording options and touch OK
(or Cancel if you don’t want to enter Record mode).
Multitrack Sequencer
Sounds
area
Full-featured sequencer. Select this option for
classic multitrack recording. (See “Record mode:
Multitrack Sequencer page” on page 196).
Backing Sequence (Quick Record)
Easy way of recording. Just play with Styles, and
record your realtime performance.
Step Backing Sequence
Step-record. Edit chords and controls for the
Style. Very useful if you are not a keyboard player.
Tracks volume/status area
See “Multitrack recording procedure” on page 198 for information on the record procedure.
Page header
See “Page header” on page 193.
Page menu icon
See “Page menu icon” on page 194.
Page sub-header
This area shows some performing info on the Song.
Song name
Free memory %
Beat counter
Measure number
Song name
Name of the Song in record.
Free memory %
Percentage of remaining memory available for recording.
Beat counter
This indicator shows the current beat inside the current measure.
Measure number
Current measure you are recording.
Recording parameters area
Rec mode (Recording mode)
Set this parameter before starting record, to select a recording
mode.
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Multitrack Sequencer page
Overdub
The newly recorded events will be mixed to any
existing events.
On2
Overwrite
The newly recorded events will replace any existing events.
Tempo
Auto Punch
Recording will automatically begin at the “Start”
position, and stop at the “End” position.
PedalPunch
Recording will begin when pressing a pedal set to
the “Punch In/Out” function, and will finish
when pressing the same pedal again.
Note: The Pedal Punch function will not work on
an empty Song. At least one track must already be
recorded.
Metronome on, with a two-bar precount before
starting recording.
Select this parameter, and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to
set the tempo.
Note: You can always change the Tempo, when other parameters
are selected, by keeping the SHIFT button pressed, and rotating the
DIAL.
Meter
This is the basic meter (or time signature) of the Song. You can
edit this parameter only when the Song is empty, i.e., before you
begin recording anything. To insert a meter change in the middle
of the Song, use the “Insert Measure” function (see page 213).
Tempo (Tempo mode)
Locate measure
This parameter sets the way tempo events are read or recorded.
When checked, the measure shown by this parameter is a temporary start point of the song, instead of measure 1. When you
Manual
Manual reading. The latest manual Tempo setting
(made using the TEMPO/VALUE controls) is
considered the current Tempo value. No Tempo
change events will be recorded. This is very useful
to record the Song much slower than its actual
Tempo.
Auto
Auto reading. The Sequencer plays back all
recorded Tempo events. No Tempo change events
are recorded.
Record
All Tempo changes made during recording will be
recorded to the Master Track.
press the
(PLAY/STOP) button to stop recording, or use
the << (REWIND) button to go back to the beginning, the Song
returns to this point.
Resolution
Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording.
Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors; notes played
too soon or too late are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic
“grid”, set with this parameter, thus playing perfectly in time.
High
No quantization applied.
(1/32)… (1/8)
Grid resolution, in musical values. For example,
when you select 1/16, all notes are moved to the
nearest 1/16 division. When you select 1/8, all
notes are moved to the nearest 1/8 division.
No quantization
Note: The tempo is always recorded in overwrite
mode (old data is replaced by the new data).
Selected track info area
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track.
See “Selected track info area” on page 194 for more information.
Sounds area
This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the
eight tracks currently displayed. See “Sounds area” on page 194
for more information.
1/16
1/8
Track volume/status area
Start/End
Start and End locators. These parameters area available only
when the “Auto Punch” recording mode is selected. They set the
starting and ending points of the Punch recording.
Metro (Metronome)
This is the metronome heard during recording.
Off
On1
No metronome click will be heard during recording. A one-bar precount will be played before
starting recording.
Metronome on, with a one-bar precount before
starting recording.
This area is where you can set the volume of each Song track,
and change track status. See “Track volume/status area” on
page 195.
Track status icons
Play/mute/record status of the current track. Select the track,
then touch this area to change its status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Record status. After pressing
(PLAY/STOP)
to start recording, the track will receive notes
from the keyboard and the MIDI IN or USB
Device connector.
Reference
Note: The Auto Punch function will not work on an
empty Song. At least one track must already be
recorded.
197
198
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Step Record page
Multitrack recording procedure
Here is the general procedure to follow for the Multitrack
Recording.
1.
Press SEQUENCER to enter Sequence mode.
2.
Press the RECORD button, and select the “Multitrack
Sequencer” option to enter the Multitrack Record mode.
Now you can prepare your recording parameters. (For
more details, see “Record mode: Multitrack Sequencer
page” on page 196).
3.
Be sure the Overdub or Overwrite recording options is
selected (see “Rec mode (Recording mode)” on page 196).
4.
Set the tempo. There are two ways of changing tempo:
Record mode: Step Record page
The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by entering single notes or chords to each track. This is very useful when transcribing an existing score, or needing a higher grade of detail,
and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks.
To access this page, select the “Overdub Step Recording” or
“Overwrite Step Recording” command from the page menu.
In Overdub Step Recording mode you will add to existing events,
while in Overwrite Step Recording mode you will overwrite all
existing events.
Page sub-header
Page header
Note parameters
• Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change the tempo.
• Move the cursor to the “Tempo” parameter, and use the
TEMPO/VALUE controls to change tempo.
5.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song
Tracks 1-8 and Song Tracks 9-16, and assign the right
Sound to each track (see “Sound bank’s icon” on page 194).
6.
Select the track to record. Its status icon will automatically
change to Record (see “Track status icons” on page 197).
7.
Use the “Locate measure” parameter to enter a measure
where you want to start recording.
8.
Press
(PLAY/STOP) to start recording. Depending on
the Metro option you selected, a 1- or 2-bars precount may
play before the recording actually begins. After precount,
play freely.
Step
time
Buttons
• If you selected the Auto Punch recording mode, the
recording will begin only when reaching the Start point.
• If you selected the Pedal Punch recording mode, press the
pedal when you want to begin recording. Press it again to
finish recording.
9.
See “Step Record procedure” below, for information on the
record procedure.
Page header
This line shows the current operating mode.
Page sub-header
Note: The Punch functions will not work on an empty Song.
At least one track must already be recorded.
Track
When finished recording, press
(PLAY/STOP) to stop
the sequencer. Select a different track, and go on recording
the whole Song.
S1Tr01…Tr16
Name of the selected track in record.
Player 1 track. In Sequencer mode, you always
work with Player 1.
10. When finished recording the new Song, either press the
RECORD button, or select the “Exit from Record” command from the page menu (see page 216).
Warning: Save the Song to a storage device, to avoid it is lost
when turning the instrument off.
Note: When exiting the Record mode, the Octave Transpose is
automatically reset to “0”.
11. If you wish, edit the new Song, by pressing the MENU but-
ton, and selecting the various edit pages.
Event list
Pos (Position)
This is the position of the event (note, rest or chord) to be
inserted.
Step Time area
Step Time
Length of the event to be inserted.
…
Note value.
Standard (–) Standard value of the selected note.
Dot (.)
Augments the selected note length by one half of
its value.
Triplet (3)
Triplet value of the selected note.
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Step Record page
Note parameter area
199
Back
Goes to the previous step, erasing the inserted event.
Meter (time signature) of the current measure. This parameter
cannot be edited. You can set a Meter change by using the Insert
function of the Edit menu, and inserting a new series of measures with a different Meter (see “Song Edit: Cut/Insert Measures” on page 213).
Next M. (Next Measure)
Free Memory
Exits the Step Record mode.
Available memory for recording.
Step Record procedure
Duration
Here is the general procedure to follow for the Step Recording.
Relative duration of the inserted note. The percentage is always
referred to the step value.
1.
Press SEQUENCER to enter Sequencer mode.
2.
Press the RECORD button, and select the “Multitrack
Sequencer” option to enter the Multitrack Record mode.
From the page menu, select the “Overdub Step Recording”
or “Overwrite Step Recording” mode. At this point, the
Step Record window will appear in the display.
3.
The next event will be entered at the position shown by the
Pos indicator in the upper right corner of the display.
50%
Staccato.
85%
Ordinary articulation.
100%
Legato.
Velocity
Goes to the next measure, and fills the remaining space with
rests.
Done
Set this parameter before entering a note or chord. This will be
the playing strength (i.e., velocity value) of the event to be
inserted.
Kbd
1…127
Keyboard. You can select this parameter, by turning all counter-clockwise the dial. When this
option is selected, the playing strength of the
played note is recognized and recorded.
Velocity value. The event will be inserted with
this velocity value, and the actual playing
strength of the note played on the keyboard will
be ignored.
• If you don’t want to insert a note at this position, insert a
rest instead, as shown in step 5.
• To jump to the next measure, filling the remaining beats
with rests, touch the Next M. button in the display.
4.
To change the step value, use the Step Time parameters.
5.
Insert a note, rest or chord at the current position.
• To insert a single note, just play it on the keyboard. The
inserted note length will match the step length. You may
change the velocity and relative duration of the note, by
editing the Velocity and Duration parameters. See “Velocity” and “Duration” on page 199.
Event list area
• To insert a rest, just touch the Rest button in the display.
Its length will match the step value.
List of inserted events
• To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one, touch
the Tie button in the display. A note will be inserted, tied to
the previous one, with exactly the same pitch. You don’t
need to play it on the keyboard again.
Previously inserted events. You may delete the last of these
events, and make it ready for a new event, by touching the Back
button in the display.
Position
Position where the event has been inserted. The
value is shown in the “measure.beat.tick” format.
• To insert a chord or a second voice, see “Chords and second voices in Step Record mode” on page 125 of the “Style
Record mode” chapter.
Note/RX Noise
Name of the inserted Note or RX Noise. When
entering a chord, a series of dots is shown after
the name of the root note.
6.
After inserting a new event, you may go back by touching
the Back button in the display. This will delete the previously inserted event, and set the step in edit again.
Vel.
Velocity of the inserted event.
7.
Dur.%
Percentage duration of the inserted event.
When finished recording, touch the Done button in the
display. A dialog box appears, asking you to either cancel,
discard or save the changes.
Buttons
Rest
Touch this button to insert a rest.
Tie
Touch this button to tie the note to be inserted to the previous
one. A note with the same pitch, and the specified length, will be
created, and tied to the previous one.
If you touch Cancel, exit is canceled, and you can continue
editing. If you choose No, changes are not saved, and the
Step Record window is closed. If you choose Yes, changes
are saved, and the Step Record window is closed.
Reference
Meter
200
8.
9.
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Backing Sequence (Quick Record) page
From the main page of the Multitrack Recording mode,
either select the “Exit from Record” command from the
page menu, or press the RECORD button to exit the
Record mode.
Record mode: Backing Sequence (Quick
Record) page
While in the main page of the Sequencer mode, you may
press the
(PLAY/STOP) button in the PLAYER 1 section to listen to the Song, or select the Save Song command
from the page menu to save the Song to a storage device
(see “Save Song window” on page 217).
Chords and second voices
With Pa2X, you are not obliged to insert single notes in a track.
There are several ways to insert chords and double voices. For
more information, see “Chords and second voices in Step
Record mode” on page 125 of the “Style Record mode” chapter.
Backing Sequence (Quick Record) mode allows you to quickly
record your live performance with the Styles. To make things
easier, just two grouped tracks are provided: Kbd/Pad (Keyboard
and Pads) to record keyboard and pads, and Ch/Acc (Chords/
Accompaniment) to record Style commands and chords played
on the keyboard.
While in Sequencer mode, press the RECORD button and select
the “Backing Sequence (Quick Record)” option. The Backing
Sequence (Quick Record) page appears.
Page sub-header
Page header
Page menu icon
Recording
parameters area
Selected
track info
area
B.S.
grouped
tracks area
Track volume/status area
See “Backing Sequence (Quick Record) recording procedure” on
page 202 for information on the record procedure.
Page header
See “Page header” on page 193.
Page menu icon
See “Page menu icon” on page 194.
Page sub-header
See “Page sub-header” on page 196.
Recording parameters area
Style
This parameter shows the selected Style. Either touch it, or press
one of the STYLE buttons, to open the Style Select window and
select a different Style (see “Style Select window” on page 83).
Free memory
Percentage of remaining memory for recording.
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Backing Sequence (Quick Record) page
Resolution
Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording.
Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors; notes played
too soon or too late are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic
“grid”, set with this parameter, thus playing perfectly in time.
High
201
Kbd/Pad: This Backing Sequence track includes the four Keyboard tracks and the four Pads. After finishing recording, they
will be saved as Song tracks 1-8, as in the following table:
No quantization applied.
(1/32)… (1/8)
Grid resolution, in musical values. For example,
when you select 1/8, all notes are moved to the
nearest 1/8 division. When you select 1/4, all
notes are moved to the nearest 1/4 division.
High (no
quantization)
Kbd/Pad track
Song track/Channel
Upper 1
1
Upper 2
2
Upper 3
3
Lower
4
Pad 1
5
Pad 2
6
Pad 3
7
Pad 4
8
Metro (Metronome)
1/16
This parameter sets the metronome mode during recording.
Off
No metronome click will be heard during recording. A one-bar precount will be played before
starting recording.
On1
Metronome on, with a one-bar precount before
starting recording.
On2
Metronome on, with a two-bar precount before
starting recording.
1/8
Chord/Acc, Kbd/Pad
Play
The Backing Sequence track is set to play. If there
are recorded data, they will be heard while
recording the other Backing Sequence track.
Tempo
Metronome tempo. Select this parameter and use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls to change the tempo. As an alternative, when a
different parameter is selected, or you are in a different page,
keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the
tempo of the sequencer.
Mute
The Backing Sequence track is muted. If this
tracks has already been recorded, it will not be
heard during recording of the other Backing
Sequence track.
Rec
The Backing Sequence track is in record. All previously recorded data will be deleted. After press-
(Non Editable). This parameter shows the meter (or time signature) of the selected Style for reference.
ing
(PLAY/STOP) to start recording, the
track will receive notes from the keyboard and
the MIDI IN connector.
PERF or STS (Performance or STS)
Ch/Acc: This Backing Sequence track groups all Style tracks,
together with recognized chords and Style controls and Style
Elements selection. After finishing recording, they will be saved
as Song tracks 9-16, as in the following table:.
Chord/Acc track
Song track/Channel
Bass
9
Drum
10
Percussion
11
Accompaniment 1
12
Accompaniment 2
13
Accompaniment 3
14
Accompaniment 4
15
Accompaniment 5
16
Meter
This parameter shows the selected Performance or STS (depending on the latest item selected).
To select a Performance, either touch it, or press one of the PERFORMANCE/SOUND buttons (provided the PERFORMANCE
SELECT LED is turned on), to open the Style Select window and
select a different Performance (see “Style Select window” on
page 83).
To select an STS, use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons under the display.
Backing Sequence grouped tracks area
Grouped tracks status indicators
These giant indicators show the status of the Backing Sequence
grouped tracks. They reflect the status of the Kbd/Pad and Ch/
Acc parameters (see “Chord/Acc, Kbd/Pad” above).
Selected track info area
This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track.
See “Selected track info area” on page 194 for more information.
Reference
These parameters let you define grouped track status during
recording. This status is reflected by the big status indicator
above the track sliders.
202
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Backing Sequence (Quick Record) page
Track volume/status area
5.
This area is where you can set the volume of each single Keyboard track, and mute/unmute tracks.
Virtual sliders (track volume)
Graphical display of each track’s volume. See “Sliders and volume of the tracks” on page 195 for more information.
Warning: Tracks set to REC are automatically overwritten
when starting recording. Set a track to the PLAY or MUTE
status, when you don’t want to delete it. For example, if you
are recording a keyboard part on an existing Style track, set
the Ch/Acc parameter to PLAY, and the Kbd/Pad track to
REC.
Assignable Sliders function
See “Slider Mode button status” on page 195 for more information.
Individual track status icons
While you can change the status of all Keyboard tracks at once,
by using the Kbd/Pad Backing Sequence track, you can also
change the status of each single track. Touch this icon to change
the status of the corresponding individual track.
6.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
• By pressing the START/STOP button you can start the
Style right at the beginning of the Song.
Under the sliders, a label for each track is shown.
MIC/IN
Mic audio input.
UPPER1…3
Upper tracks.
LOWER
Lower track.
Backing Sequence (Quick Record) recording
procedure
(PLAY/STOP)
Play a solo intro, then start the auto-accompaniment by
pressing the START/STOP button.
Track names
Track
Start recording by pressing the left
button or the START/STOP button.
• By pressing the left
(PLAY/STOP) button (or the
START/STOP button), you can record a keyboard intro
with no Style playing. After a count-in (see “Metro (Metronome)” on page 201), you can start recording.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Abbreviation
Select the status of the Backing Sequence grouped tracks,
using the Kbd/Pad and Ch/Acc parameters. (Kbd/Pad stays
for Keyboard and Pads; Ch/Acc stays for Chord and
Accompaniment, i.e. the Style tracks). To record all you
play on the keyboard, plus the automatic accompaniment,
leave their status to Rec (see “Track status icons” on
page 197).
Since you can use any Style control, you could start with
the usual combinations (INTRO, ENDING, FILL… see
“Selecting and playing a Style” on page 46 for more information).
Note: While in Backing Sequence mode, you can’t record the
SYNCHRO, TAP TEMPO/RESET, MANUAL BASS,
ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME controls.
7.
Play your music. While recording you can even change the
Style, or stop it by pressing START/STOP or one of the
ENDINGs. While recording you can even start the style
again, by pressing START/STOP.
8.
When finished recording your performance, press the
Here is the general procedure to follow for the Backing Sequence
(Quick) Recording.
1.
Press SEQUENCER to enter the Song mode.
2.
Press the RECORD button, and select the “Backing
Sequence (Quick Record)” option to enter the Backing
Sequence (Quick Record) mode. Now you can prepare
your recording parameters. (For more details, see “Record
mode: Backing Sequence (Quick Record) page” on
page 200).
(PLAY/STOP) button in the PLAYER 1 section. You
will go back to the Sequencer Play Main page (see
“Sequencer Play - Main page” on page 193).
The latest selected Style is currently selected. If it is not the
right one, select a different Style to start recording with.
(See “Style Select window” on page 83).
You may also edit the Song by pressing the MENU button
(see “Edit menu” on page 205).
3.
4.
The latest selected Performance or STS is currently
selected. If you prefer, select a different Performance or
STS. (See “Performance Select window” on page 82, and
“STS Select” on page 84).
At this point, you may press the
(PLAY/STOP) button in the PLAYER 1 section to listen to the new Song.
9.
Save the song to a storage device (see “Save Song window”
on page 217).
Warning: The recorded Song is in RAM (Random Access
Memory), and will be deleted when turning the instrument
off, switching to the Style Play or Song Play mode, or entering
Record again. If you wish to preserve it, save the Song to a
storage device.
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Step Backing Sequence page
203
The locator value is shown in the “measure.beat.tick” format.
Record mode: Step Backing Sequence
page
The Step Backing Sequence mode allows you to enter single
chords, to create or edit the Style (Chord/Acc) part of a Song.
This mode lets you enter chords even if you are not a keyboard
player, or fix any error made playing chords or selecting Style
controls, during a Backing Sequence (Quick Record) recording.
In this mode, you can only edit Songs created using the Backing
Sequence (Quick Record) recording mode. When saving a Song
created using the Backing Sequence (Quick Record) recording
mode, all Chord/Acc data is preserved, and can be loaded later,
to be edited again by using the Step Backing Sequence mode.
While in Sequencer mode, press the RECORD button and select
the “Step Backing Sequence” option. The Step Backing Sequence
window appears.
Page menu
icon
Parameters
area
Measure
Measure or bar number.
Beat
Divider in the Time Signature ratio (e.g., a quarter in a 3/4 time).
Tick
Smallest position value. Both Pa2X internal players feature a resolution of 384 ticks per quarter.
Style
This is the latest selected Style. To insert a Style change at the
current position, touch the Style name to open the Style Select
window, or follow the standard selecting procedure using the
buttons of the STYLE SELECT section.
Note: Any Style Change inserted after the beginning of the measure
(i.e., to a position other than Mxxx.01.000) will be effective at the
following measure. For example, if a Style Change event has been
inserted at M004.03.000, the selected Style will be effectively
selected at M005.01.000. (This works exactly as in Style Play
mode).
Note: When inserting a Style Change, you may also insert a Tempo
Change at the same position. A Style Change will not automatically insert the Style’s Tempo.
Performance
This is the latest selected Performance. Select a Performance to
recall the Style it links to. To insert a Performance change at the
current position, touch the Performance name to open the Performance Select window, or follow the standard selecting procedure using the PERFORMANCE/SOUND SELECT section.
See “Step Backing Sequence procedure” on page 205 for information on the record procedure.
Page menu icon
Note: The STYLE CHANGE LED is automatically turned on when
entering the Chord/Acc Step Mode. This means that selecting a Performance automatically selects the Style memorized in the Performance.
The SINGLE TOUCH and STS buttons are automatically disabled, meaning that you can’t change Keyboard tracks while in
Chord/Acc Step Mode.
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. See “Step Backing
Sequence page menu” on page 204 for more information.
Tempo
Parameters area
This is the Tempo Change parameter. To insert a Tempo Change
event at the current position, select this parameter and use the
TEMPO/VALUE controls to change its value.
Side arrow ( )
The small arrow next to a parameter means that its value is effective at the current position. For example, if you are at the
“003.01.000” position, and an arrow lights up next to the Chord
parameter, this means that a chord change happens at the
“003.01.000” position.
Measure
This parameter shows the current position of the Step Editor. To
go to a different position within the Song, use one of the following systems:
•
Select this parameter, then use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to go to a different measure.
•
Use the Measure buttons in the display to move to a different measure. Use the Step buttons in the display to move in
steps of 1/8 (192 ticks). Use the Event buttons in the display
to jump to the next event.
Chord
The chord parameter is divided in four separate parts:
Name
Type
Tension
Extension
Select one of the parts, then use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to
modify it. As an alternative, you can play a chord, and it will be
automatically recognized. While recognizing a chord, the status
of the BASS INVERSION button will be considered.
The lack of a chord (--) means that the accompaniment will not
play at the current position (apart for the Drum and Percussion
tracks). To select the “--” option, select the Name part of the
Chord parameter, then use TEMPO/VALUE controls to select
the very last value (C…B, Off).
Reference
“Soft” transport buttons
204
Sequencer operating mode
Record mode: Step Backing Sequence page
Note: If you replace a chord with a different one, please remember
that the Lower track (if recorded) will not be automatically
changed, and may cause a dissonance against the accompaniment.
Done button
Style Element
Touch this button to exit the Step Backing Sequence mode. All
changes will be saved to memory.
This is the Style Element (i.e., a Variation, Fill, Intro, or Ending).
The length of the selected Style Element is always shown by the
“Length” parameter (see below).
“Off ” means that the accompaniment will not play at the
selected position – only Keyboard and Pad tracks will play.
Hint: Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the automatic
accompaniment must stop (at the end of the Song).
Length
Done
Hint: Save the Song to a storage device, by selection the “Save
Song” command from the page menu, to avoid losing it when turning the instrument off.
Step Backing Sequence page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
This parameter will let you know where to place the following
Style Element Change. For example, if you inserted an Intro
event lasting for 4 measures, you can insert 4 empty measure
after this event, and a Variation event at the end of the Intro,
beginning at the 4th empty measure.
Del (Delete) button
When a side arrow ( ) is shown next to a parameter, there is an
event at the current position. You can touch the Del button next
to it, to delete the event at the current position.
Hint: To delete all events starting from the current position, select
the “Delete All from Selected” command from the page menu (see
below).
“Soft” transport buttons
Previous or Next Event
Use these buttons to move to the previous or next recorded
event.
Previous or Next Step
Use these buttons to go to the previous or next step (1/8, or 192
ticks). If an event is located before the previous or next step, the
locator stops on that event. For example, if you are positioned
on M001.01.000, and no event exists before M001.01.192, the >
button moves to the M001.01.192 location. If an event exists on
M001.01.010, the > button stops to the M001.01.010 location.
These commands are effective even if the Measure parameter is
not selected.
Previous or Next Measure
Use these buttons to move to the previous or following measure.
These commands are effective even if the Measure parameter is
not selected.
Insert Measure
Use this command to insert an empty measure starting from the
current measure. All Chord/Acc events contained in the current
measure will be moved to the following measure. The event at
the Mxxx.xx.000 position (i.e., exactly at the beginning of the
measure, like a Time Signature or Style change) will not be
moved.
Cut Measure
Use this command to delete the current measure. All Chord/Acc
event contained in the following measures will be moved one
measure back.
Delete All from Selected
Use this command to delete events of all types, starting from the
current position.
Note: All events on the very first tick (M001.01.000), like Perf,
Style, Tempo, Chord, Style Element selection, cannot be deleted.
Delete All Styles/Perfs from Selected
Delete All Styles Elements from Selected
Delete All Chords from Selected
Delete All Tempos from Selected
Select one of these commands to delete all events of the corresponding type, starting from the current position to the end of
the Song. To delete all events of the same type from the whole
Song, go back to the M001.01.000 position, and select one of
these commands.
Note: All events on the very first tick (M001.01.000), like Perf,
Style, Tempo, Chord, Style Element selection, cannot be deleted.
Sequencer operating mode
Edit menu
Step Backing Sequence procedure
Here is the general Step Backing Sequencer recording procedure.
Hint: Before entering Step Backing Sequence mode to edit an existing Song, select the “Save Song” command from the page menu,
and save the Song to a storage device. This way, you will have a
copy of the Song, in case you don’t like the results of your editing.
While in Sequencer mode, press the RECORD button, and
choose the “Step Backing Sequence” recording option.
2.
Select the Measure parameter, and go to the desired position in the Song, by using the TEMPO/VALUE controls.
Alternatively, you can move the locator using the “soft”
transport buttons in the display. See ““Soft” transport buttons” on page 204.
3.
Select the parameter type (Style, Performance, Tempo…)
to insert, edit or delete at the current position. If an arrow
( ) appears next to a parameter, the shown event has been
inserted at the current position.
4.
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the selected
event. Delete it by touching the Del button next to the
event. When editing a parameter without the arrow ( )
next to it, a new event is inserted at the current position.
5.
Exit the Step Backing Sequence recording mode, by touching the Done button in the display.
6.
Press
(PLAY/STOP) in the PLAYER 1 section to listen
to the consequence of your editing. If they are fine, save the
Edit menu
From any page, press the MENU button to open the Sequencer edit
menu. This menu gives access to the various Sequencer edit sections.
When in the menu, select an edit section, or press EXIT to exit
the menu.
When in an edit page, press EXIT or the SEQUENCER button to
go back to the main page of the Sequencer operating mode.
Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each edit
section groups various edit pages, that may be selected by touching the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display.
Edit page structure
Song to a storage device.
All edit pages share some basic elements.
Operating mode
Edit section
Page menu
icon
Selected
track info
Parameters
area
Tabs
Operating mode
This indicates that the instrument is in Sequencer mode.
Edit section
This identifies the current edit section, corresponding to one of
the items of the edit menu (see “Edit menu” on page 205).
Page menu icon
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 216).
Parameters area
Each page contains various parameters. Use the tabs to select
one of the pages. For detailed information on the various types
of parameters, see sections starting from page 206.
Reference
1.
205
206
Sequencer operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan
Tabs
C 00
Center.
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
R+1…R+63
Right stereo channel.
Volume
Mixer/Tuning: Volume/Pan
Track’s volume.
0…127
MIDI value of the track’s volume.
This page lets you set the volume and pan for each Song track.
Play/Mute icon
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks
1-8 and 9-16.
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Mixer/Tuning: FX Send
This page lets you set the level of the track’s direct (uneffected)
signal going to the Internal FX processors. The effect processors
included in Pa2X are connected in parallel, so you can decide
which percentage of the direct signal can be effected.
In case you want to send all of a track’s signal to the effect (as
when using “insert” effects, like Rotary, Distortion, EQ…), just
set the Dry parameter to Off (see “Dry” above).
There are four Internal FX processors in Sequencer mode,
grouped in two pairs (AB and CD). Usually you will create Songs
with only a pair (preferably AB), but you can create Songs using
both FX pairs. We suggest to use A and C as reverb processors,
and B and D as modulating effect processors.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks
1-8 and 9-16, and vice-versa.
Dry
Use this checkbox to turn the dry (direct) signal on or off.
Note: If the track is sent to a separate output, no FX is sent to any
output. To program the output status for each track, see “Audio
Setup: Player 1” on page 232.
On
When checked, the direct, dry signal is sent to the
output, mixed with the FXs.
Track
Out L/R
FX Processor
Off
When unchecked, the direct, dry signal is
removed from the audio output, and only sent to
the FXs. The effected signal will still be panned
(in stereo FXs only) according to the Pan value.
Track
Out L/R
FX Processor
Pan
Track position in the stereo field.
L-64…L-1
Left stereo channel.
Sequencer operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain
FX Groups
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the two FX groups (AB or
CD).
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Gain
In this page you can set the three-band equalization (EQ) for
each individual track.
Send level
0…127
207
Level of the track (direct) signal sent to the effect
processor.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks
1-8 and 9-16, and vice-versa.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Hi (High) Gain
-18…+18dB High gain value in decibels.
Mid (Middle) Gain
This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equalization on each individual track. This is a bell curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Middle gain value in decibels.
Low Gain
This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization
on each individual track. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Low gain value in decibels.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Reference
This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization
on each individual track. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are
shown in decibels (dB).
208
Sequencer operating mode
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control
Mixer/Tuning: EQ Control
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Play status. The track can be heard.
This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization, programmed in the previous page.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks
1-8 and 9-16, and vice-versa.
Mixer/Tuning: Tuning
Parameters
See “Mixer/Tuning: Tuning” on page 99.
Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale
This page lets you program an alternative scale for the selected
tracks (via the “Track Assign” parameter). The remaining
tracks (if any) use the basic scale set in Global mode (see
“Main Scale” on page 222).
Track Reset buttons
Use these buttons to reset (i.e., “flatten”) equalization for the
corresponding track.
Reset All Tracks button
Touch this button to reset (i.e., “flatten”) equalization for all
tracks.
Bypass
Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the
corresponding track. When bypassed, equalization has no effect
on the track, but all parameters are preserved. When the box is
unchecked, equalization is activated again with the original settings.
Note: Quarter Tone selection and activation of the Sub-Scale on
each track of a Song, can be received by MIDI (i.e., by an external
sequencer or controller). Conversely, selection of Quarter Tone settings, or activation of the Sub-Scale on each track of the Song, can
be sent by the Pa2X to an external MIDI recorder as System Exclusive data.
Parameters
See “Mixer/Tuning: Sub Scale” on page 99.
Track Assign
On
The bypass function is engaged, so no equalization is active on the corresponding track.
Check the parameter corresponding to each track where the
Sub-Scale must be used.
Off
The bypass function is not engaged, so the equalization is active on the corresponding track.
Play/Mute icon
Track’s play/mute status.
Input Trim
This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing
through the equalizer. Extreme equalization values can overload
the audio circuits and lead to distorsion. This control lets you set
equalization as desired, and at the same time avoid overloading.
0…99
Limiting value. The higher, the most effective it
is.
Play status. The track can be heard.
Mute status. The track cannot be heard.
Sequencer operating mode
Effects: FX Select
209
Effects: FX Select
Effects: FX A…D
This page allows you to select effects to be assigned to the four
Internal FX processors (A-D).
These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect
processors. Here is an example of the FX A page, with the Reverb
Smooth Hall effect assigned.
Note: When you stop the Song, or select a different Song, the
default effects are selected again. You can, however, stop the Song,
change the effects, then start the Song again. Save the Song to permanently change the effects.
FX A…D
Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors. Usually,
A and C are reverbs, while B and D are modulating effects (chorus, flanger, delay…). For a list of the available effects, see the
“Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD.
FX Amount
Selected effect
Select one of the available effects from this pop-up menu. This is
equivalent to the “FX A…D” parameters found in the “Effects:
FX Select” page (see above).
Parameters
Parameters may differ, depending on the selected effect. See the
“Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of
available parameters for each effect type.
B to A, D to C
Track Controls: Mode
Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect, or
of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect.
Parameter
Mod.Track (Modulating Track)
See “Track Controls: Mode” on page 102.
Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can modulate
an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical
controller.
Track Controls: Drum Volume
Parameter
See “Track Controls: Drum Volume” on page 209.
Track Controls: Easy Edit
Parameter
See “Track Controls: Easy Edit” on page 104.
Reference
Volume of the effect, that is added to the dry (uneffected) signal.
210
Sequencer operating mode
Event Edit: Event Edit
And here are the events contained in the Master track.
Event Edit: Event Edit
The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI
event of the selected track. You can, for example, replace a note
with a different one, or change its playing strength. See also
“Event Edit procedure” on page 211 for more information on
the event editing procedure.
Scrollbar
Position
Position of the event, expressed in the form ‘aaa.bb.ccc’:
•
‘aaa’ is the measure
•
‘bb’ is the beat
•
‘ccc’ is the tick (each quarter beat = 384 ticks)
You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different position. You can edit a position in either of the following ways:
(a) select the parameter, and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls
to change the value, or
(b) select the parameter, then touch it again; the numeric keypad will appear. Enter the new position by dialing in the
three parts of the number, separated by a dot. Zeroes at the
beginning can be omitted, as well as the least important
parts of the number. For example, to enter position
002.02.193, dial “2.2.193”; to enter position 002.04.000 dial
“2.4”; to enter position 002.01.000, simply dial “2”.
Type
First value
Second value
Tempo
Tempo change
–
Volume
Master Volume value
–
Meter (time signature)
–
Meter
change(a)
KeySign
Key Signature(b)
–
Scale
One of the available preset Scales
Root note for the
selected Scale
UScale (User Scale)
Altered note
Note alteration(c)
QT (Quarter Tone)
Altered note
Note alteration
(0, 50)(b)
QT Clear (Quarter
Tone Clearing)
Reset of all Quarter Tone
(QT) changes
–
FXType
One of the four available
FX processors
Effect number(d)
FXSend
Feedback Send (B>A or
D>C)
Feedback send
level
(a). Meter changes can’t be edited or inserted separately from a measure. To insert a Meter change, use the Insert function in the Edit section and insert a series of measures with the new meter. Existing data
can then be copied or entered to these measures
(b). This is the key signature shown in the Score. If this event is missing, the Score will be shown as if it was in the key of C Major.
(c). To edit User Scale and Quarter Tone settings, select the first value,
then select the scale’s degree to edit. Edit the second value to change
the tuning of the selected note of the scale.
(d). When selecting a different effect number during this edit, default
settings will be assigned to this event.
To edit the event Type and Values, select the parameter and use
the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change their value. In case of
numeric values, you can also press them twice to open the
numeric keypad.
Length
Length of the selected Note event. The value format is the same
as the Position value. Edit it in the same way.
Type of the event shown in the display. To edit it, select the parameter and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change its value.
Note: If you change a length of “000.00.000” to a different value,
you can’t go back to the original value. This rather uncommon
zero-length value may be found in the drum and percussion tracks
of Songs made in Backing Sequence mode.
Value 1 and 2
Track
Values of the event shown in the display. Depending on the
selected event, the value may change. This parameter also shows
the (non editable) “End Of Track” marking, when the end of the
track is reached.
Use this pop-up menu to select the track to edit.
Track 1…16
One of the ordinary tracks of the Song. These
tracks contains musical data, like notes and controllers.
Here are the events contained in ordinary tracks (1-16).
Master
This is a special track, containing Tempo changes,
Meter changes, Scale and Transpose data, and the
effect parameters.
Type
Type
First value
Second value
Note
Note name
Velocity
RX Noise
Note name
Velocity
Prog
Program Change number
–
Ctrl
Control Change number
Control Change value
Bend
Bending value
–
Aftt
Mono (Channel) Aftertouch value
–
PAft
Note to which the Aftertouch is
applied
Poly Aftertouch value
Scrollbar
Use the scrollbar to browse the event through the list. You can
also scroll by using the SHIFT + DIAL combination.
Sequencer operating mode
Event Edit: Filter
Go/Catch
7.
This is a dual-function command.
• While the sequencer is not running, it works as a Go to Measure command. Touch it to open the Go to Measure dialog box:
211
In the case of a Note event, select the Length parameter,
and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls (or touch the parameter again to open the numeric keypad) to change the
event’s length.
• While the sequencer is not running, you may touch the
Go/Catch button in the display to go to a different measure
(see “Go/Catch” above)
• While the sequencer is running, you may use the Go/
Catch button in the display to see the currently playing
event in the display (see “Go/Catch” above).
When in this dialog box, select a target measure, and touch OK.
The first event available in the target measure will be selected.
• While the sequencer is running, it works as a Catch Locator
command. Touch it to show the event that is currently playing.
• Use PLAYER 1 transport controls to listen to the Song.
8.
Touch the Insert button in the display to insert an event at
the Position shown in the display (a Note event with default
values will be inserted). Touch the Delete button in the display to delete the selected event.
9.
When the editing is complete, you may select a different
track (go to step 4).
Insert
Touch the Insert button in the display to insert a new event at the
current shown Position. The default values are Type = Note,
Pitch = C4, Velocity = 100, Length = 192.
Note: You can’t insert new events in an empty, non-recorded Song.
To insert an event, you must first insert some empty measures by
using the Insert Measure function (see “Song Edit: Cut/Insert Measures” on page 213).
Delete
Touch the Delete button in the display to delete the event
selected in the display.
Note: The “End of Track” event cannot be deleted.
10. When finished editing the whole Song, select the Save Song
command from the page menu to save the Song to a storage
device. See “Save Song window” on page 217 for more
information on saving a Song.
Event Edit: Filter
This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in
the Event Edit page.
Event Edit procedure
1.
While in the Event Edit page, press
(PLAY/STOP) in
the PLAYER 1 section to listen to the Song. Press it again to
stop the Song.
2.
Select the Filter page, and turn “Off ” the filter for the event
types you wish to see in the display (see “Event Edit: Filter”
on page 211 for more information).
3.
Return to the Event Edit page.
4.
Use the “Track” pop-up menu to select the track to edit.
The list of events contained in the selected track will appear
in the display.
For more information on the event types and their values, see
above.
5.
6.
Select the “Position” parameter. Use the TEMPO/VALUE
controls (or touch the parameter again to open the
numeric keypad) to change the event’s position.
Select the “Type” parameter and use the TEMPO/VALUE
controls to change the event type. Select the “Value 1 and
2” parameters and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls (or
touch the parameter again to open the numeric keypad) to
modify the selected value.
Reference
Here is the general event editing procedure.
Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in
the Event Edit page.
Note/RX Noise
Notes and RX Noises.
Program
Program Change events.
Control
Control Change events.
Tempo/Meter Tempo and Meter (time signature) changes (Master Track only).
After Touch
Mono (Channel) Aftertouch events.
Poly After Touch
Poly Aftertouch events.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend events.
Pa Controls
Controls exclusive of the Pa2X, like the FX and
Scale settings. These controls are recorded to the
Master Track, and saved as System Exclusive data.
212
Sequencer operating mode
Song Edit: Quantize
Song Edit: Quantize
Song Edit: Transpose
The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after recording.
Here you can transpose the Song, a track or a part of a track.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute to start the
operation.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute to start the
operation.
Track
Track
Use this parameter to select a track.
Use this parameter to select a track.
All
Quantize will apply to all tracks.
All
All tracks selected (apart for Drum tracks).
Track 1…16
Quantize will apply only to the selected track.
Track 1…16
Selected track.
Resolution
Value
This parameter sets the quantization value. For example, when
you select (1/8), all notes are moved to the nearest 1/8 division.
When you select 1/4, all notes are moved to the nearest 1/4 division.
Transpose value (±127 semitones).
No quantization
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to transpose.
If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the
beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000,
and the End at 5.01.000.
1/8
Bottom / Top Note
1/4
(1/32)… (1/4)
Grid resolution, in musical values. A “b…f ” character added after the value means swing-quantization. A “3” means triplet.
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to transpose. If you select the same note as the Bottom and
Top parameters, you can select a single note, or a single percussive instrument in a Drum track.
Song Edit: Velocity
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to be quantized.
If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the
beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000,
and the End at 5.01.000.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top note of the keyboard range to quantize. If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters, you can select a single percussive
instrument in a Drum track.
Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum track is
selected.
Here you can change the Velocity value for the notes. An
Advanced mode is available, allowing you to select a velocity
curve for the selected range. This is useful to create fade-ins or
fade-outs.
Sequencer operating mode
Song Edit: Cut/Insert Measures
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute to start the
operation.
213
Song Edit: Cut/Insert Measures
Track
In this page you can cut or insert measures from the Song.
Use this parameter to select a track.
All
All tracks selected.
Track 1…16
Selected track.
Value
Velocity change value.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to edit.
If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the
beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000,
and the End at 5.01.000.
After selecting the Start and Length parameters, touch Execute
to start the operation.
Bottom / Top Note
After the Cut, the following measures are moved back, to fill the
cut measures.
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to edit. If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top
parameters, you can select a single percussive instrument in a
Drum track.
After the Insert, the following measures are pushed forward to
accommodate the inserted measures.
Start
First measure where to begin cutting/inserting.
Advanced
When this checkbox is checked, the “Intensity”, “Curve”, “Start
Velocity Value” and “End Velocity Value” parameters can be
edited.
Length
Number of measures to be cut/inserted.
Meter
(Only available in Advanced mode). Use this parameter to specify
the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the
curve you specify in “Curve”.
0…100%
Intensity value. With a setting of 0 [%], the velocity will not change. With a setting of 100 [%], the
velocity will be changed the most.
Meter (time signature) of the measures to be inserted.
Song Edit: Delete
This page is where you can delete MIDI events from the Song.
Curve
(Only available in Advanced mode). Use this parameter to select
one of the six curves, and to specify how the velocity will change
over time.
Start Value = 0%, End Value = 100%
Curve 1
Curve 2
Curve 3
127
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
1
Start
Value
1
End
Value
Start
Value
1
End
Value
Curve 5
Curve 4
Start
Value
End
Value
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute to start the
operation.
Curve 6
127
127
127
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
RANDOM
Track
1
Start
Value
End
Value
1
Start
Value
End
Value
1
Start
Value
End
Value
Start / End Vel. Value
(Only available in Advanced mode). Velocity change at the starting and ending ticks of the selected range.
0…100
Velocity change in percentage.
Use this parameter to select a track.
All
All tracks selected.
Track 1…16
Selected track.
Master
Master track. This is where the Tempo, Scale and
Effect events are recorded.
Reference
Intensity
214
Sequencer operating mode
Song Edit: Copy
Event
Mode
Type of MIDI event to delete.
Use this parameter to select the Copy mode.
All
All events. Measures will not be removed from
the Song, and will remain empty.
Merge
Copied data are merged with the data at the target position.
Note
All notes in the selected range.
Overwrite
Copied data replace all data at the target position.
Dup.Note
All duplicate notes. When two notes with the
same pitch are encountered on the same tick, the
one with the lowest velocity is deleted.
After Touch
After Touch events.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend events.
Prog.Change Program Change events, excluding the bundled
Control Change #00 (Bank Select MSB) and #32
(Bank Select LSB).
Ctl.Change
All Control Change events, for example Bank
Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft Pedal…
CC00/32…CC127
Single Control Change events. Double Control
Change numbers (like 00/32) are MSB/LSB bundles.
Start / End Tick
Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the
range to edit.
If you wish to select a four-measure sequence starting at the
beginning of the Song, the Start will be positioned at 1.01.000,
and the End at 5.01.000.
Bottom / Top Note
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard
range to delete. If you select the same note as the Bottom and
Top parameters, you can select a single note, or a single percussive instrument in a Drum track.
Warning: Deleted data cannot be recovered!
From Track… To Track
Use these parameters to select the source and target track to
copy.
All
All tracks. The target track cannot be selected.
Track 1…16
Selected source and target tracks.
Start Measure… End Measure
These parameters are the starting and ending measure to copy.
For example, if From Measure=1 and To Measure=4, the first
four measures are copied.
To Measure
This parameter is the first of the target measures.
Repeat Times
Number of times the copy must be executed. Copies will be consecutive.
Song Edit: Move
Here you can shift a track forward or backward by just a few
ticks or whole measures.
Note: These parameters are available only when the All or Note
options are selected.
Song Edit: Copy
Here you can copy tracks or phrases.
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute to complete
the operation.
Track
Use these parameters to select the track you want to move.
Track 1…16
Selected track.
Start / End Tick
After setting the various parameters, touch Execute to start the
operation.
Note: If you copy too many events on the same “tick”, the “Too
many events!” message appears, and the copy operation is aborted.
These parameters set the starting and ending point of the range
to move.
To Tick
This parameter allows you to set the target starting point of the
moved track.
Sequencer operating mode
Song Edit: RX Convert
215
Song Edit: RX Convert
Preferences: Sequencer Setup
You can use the RX Convert page to convert notes of the midifile
into RX Noises, and vice-versa. This will help programming
Songs on an external sequencer.
In this page, you can select a MIDI Setup and the Harmony track
for the Sequencer mode.
Note: These settings are stored in the Sequencer Setup area of the
Track
Use these parameters to select the track containing the notes or
RX Noises you want to convert.
RX Note Velocity
Use this parameter to adjust the volume level of the RX Noises in
the selected track(s).
Add RX Noises to Guitar track
Use this parameter to automatically analyze the Standard MIDI
File, and add RX Noises to Guitar tracks. This command scans a
single track or the whole Standard MIDI File, looking for guitar
strummings played by nylon, steel or electric guitars.
After scanning, a suitable Guitar sound will be automatically
assigned to the relevant tracks, and RX Noises automatically
added where needed.
This means that you can transform any flat SMF into an ultrarealistic song with a real guitar player inside – at the touch of a
button!
Seq
Global file. (Parameter of this kind are marked with the
abbreviation through the manual). After changing these settings,
select the Write Global-Sequencer Setup command from the page
menu to save them to the Global.
Midi Setup
Seq
MIDI channels for the Sequencer mode can be automatically
configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter. See
“MIDI Setup” on page 228 for more information on using MIDI
Setups.
Note: To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the
Sequencer mode, select the Write Global-Sequencer Setup command from the page menu.
For detailed information on preloaded MIDI Setup settings, see
“MIDI Setup” on page 319.
Note: After selecting a MIDI Setup, you can go to the Global mode
and apply any change to each channel setting. To store these
changes to a MIDI Setup, while still in Global mode select the Write
Global-Midi Setup command from the page menu. All MIDI Setups can be freely customized and overwritten.
Hint: To restore the original MIDI Setups, load the original Factory data again (available in the supplied Accessory CD, or downloadable from www.korgpa.com).
Harmony Track
Seq
The Voice Processor gets the chord notes from the track selected
with this parameter.
Hint: Go to the Voice Processor Preset section of the Global mode to
try different Voice Processor Presets while creating or editing a
Song.
Off
No track sends notes to the Harmony module of
the Voice processor. Chords can still be received
from the MIDI IN.
Ply.1-Track 1…16
Chords are sent from one of Player 1 tracks.
Reference
After having chosen a track to convert, touch Execute to complete the operation.
216
Sequencer operating mode
Page menu
Delete Song
Page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
Select this command to delete the Song and create a new, blank
Song.
Delete Current Track
Select this command to delete the track currently selected in the
Track area (see “Track volume/status area” on page 197).
Solo Track
Select the track to be soloed, and check this item. You will hear
only the selected track, and the ‘Solo’ warning will flash on the
page header.
Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function.
Write Global-Player Setup
Select this command to open the Write Global-Player Setup dialog box, and save global settings that are unique to the Sequencer
mode. (See “Write Global-Sequencer Setup dialog box” on
page 217).
Load Song
Select this command to open the Song Select window, and load a
Song to the sequencer. (See “Song Select window” on page 217).
Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the
tracks to solo it. Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the
Solo function.
Copy/Paste FX
You can copy a single, or all four effects, between Styles, Performances, STSs and Songs. To do this, choose the “Copy FX” and
“Paste FX” commands from the page menu of the Style Play,
Song Play or Sequencer modes.
To copy a single effect:
1.
Save Song
• go to the page of the single effect you want to copy (FX A,
FX B, FX C, or FX D), or
Select this command to save the new or edited Song to a storage
device as a Standard MIDI File. The file is automatically added
the “.MID” extension. After selecting this command, the Save
Song page appears (see “Save Song window” on page 217).
Warning: Turning the instrument off will delete the Song from
memory. Save your Song to a storage device to avoid losing it.
Warning: The Song is also lost when switching from Sequencer to
Style Play or Song Play mode, without previously saving the Song
to a storage device.
Select the source Song, Performance, Style or STS, then
• go to the Effects > FX Select page, to copy all four effects.
This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the
four effects into different Performances, Styles or STSs.
2.
Choose the “Copy FX” command from the page menu.
3.
Select the target Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
page of the single effect you want to paste (FX A, FX B, FX
C, or FX D).
4.
Choose the “Paste FX” command from the page menu.
Undo
To copy all four effects:
When selecting this command, the latest operation is canceled,
and data are reverted to the previous situation.
1.
Select the source Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
Effects > FX Select page, to copy all four effects.
Overdub Step Recording
2.
Choose the “Copy FX” command from the page menu.
3.
Select the target Performance, Style or STS, then go to the
page of the Effects > FX Select page.
4.
Choose the “Paste FX” command from the page menu.
Only available in Record mode. Select this command to enter
Overdub Step Record mode. This recording mode lets you enter
events one at a time, adding events to the existing events. (See
“Record mode: Step Record page” on page 198).
Exit from Record
Overwrite Step Recording
Only available in Record mode. Select this command to enter
Overwrite Step Record mode. This recording mode lets you
enter events one at a time, overwriting all existing events. (See
“Record mode: Step Record page” on page 198).
Only available in Record mode. Select this command to exit the
Record mode, and go back to the Main page of the Sequencer
Play mode (see “Sequencer Play - Main page” on page 193).
Sequencer operating mode
Write Global-Sequencer Setup dialog box
217
Song path
Write Global-Sequencer Setup dialog box
Open this window by selecting the Write Global-Song Setup
item from the page menu. Here, you can save MIDI Setups (see
“Midi Setup” on page 215), that are saved to the Global file.
This line shows the path of the location where you are saving the
Song.
Directory
This is the list of the selected device’s content.
File status
File size
Parameters saved in the Sequencer Setup area of the Global are
Seq
symbol through the user’s manual.
Type of the
file or folder
File or folder
name
Modification
date
Use the scrollbar to scroll the list items.
Song Select window
This window appears when you select the “Load Song” command from the page menu, or press the SONG SELECT button
in the PLAYER 1 sections on the control panel. See “Song Select
window” on page 84 for details.
As an alternative, you can select one of the items, and use the
TEMPO/VALUE controls to scroll.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press DOWN or UP, to
jump to the previous or next alphabetical section.
Storage device
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available storage
devices where to save the Song.
Save Song window
The recorded Song is contained in RAM, and is lost when turning the instrument off. The Song is also lost when you overwrite it in Record mode, or if you confirm the warning
message when switching to the Style Play or Song Play mode.
You must save to a storage device any Song you wish to preserve.
This window appears when you select the “Save Song” command
from the page menu.
Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the main page
of the Sequencer operating mode without saving the Song.
Directory
Device
Type
SSD-U
User area of the internal SSD memory
HD
Hard disk
USB-F
Device connected to the front USB Host port
USB-R
Device connected to the rear USB Host port
The actual name (label) of the device may appear within square
brackets ([]).
Open
Opens the selected folder (item whose icon looks like this:
).
Close
Closes the current folder, returning to the parent (“upper”)
folder.
Sync P. (Synchronized Path)
Touch this button to see the Song assigned to the Sequencer.
This is useful to quickly return to it, after you have browsed
through long directories and “dug” into different folders.
Song path
Storage device
Reference
marked with the
218
Sequencer operating mode
Save Song window
Save
Master Transpose saved with the Song
Touch this button to open the Save Song dialog box, and save the
Song to the current directory.
When saving a Song, the Master Transpose value is saved with
the Song. Since this value is saved as System Exclusive data, it is
preserved also when playing back the Song in Song Play mode.
Hint: Since the Master Transpose is a global parameter, loading a
Song with a non-standard transposition may result in unwanted
transposing when loading other Songs that do not contain their
own transposition data. To transpose a Song it is advisable to use
the Transpose function in the Edit section of the Sequencer mode
(see “Song Edit: Transpose” on page 212).
• If no file has been selected in the display, prior to touching
Save, the “NewSong” default name will be automatically
assigned to the Song.
Note: If a file is selected, just touch the storage device name to deselect it.
• If a file has been selected in the display, prior to touching Save,
the name of the selected file will be automatically assigned to the
Song.
In any of the above situations, touch the
to edit the Song name.
You may also lock the Master Transpose, to avoid unwanted transposition. See “General Controls: Lock” on page 222 of the Global
chapter.
As a general rule, you should use the Master Transpose (TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel) when you need to transpose
Keyboard tracks together with the Song. You should use the Edit
mode Transpose function (see “Song Edit: Transpose” on page 212)
when only the Song has to be transposed.
Note: The Master Transpose value is always shown on the page
header:
(Text Edit) button
Warning: If a file with the same name is already in the current
directory, a message will warn you. If you confirm, the existing file
will be overwritten. Select a file before saving only if you want to
overwrite it (i.e., in case you are saving changes to an existing file).
Save Song procedure
1.
If you are in Record mode, stop the sequencer and exit
from the Record mode. Then go back to the main page of
the Sequencer Play mode (see “Sequencer Play - Main
page” on page 193).
2.
When saving a Song as an SMF, an empty measure is automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song. This measure contains various Song initialization parameters.
Select the Save Song command from the page menu. The
Save Song page appears.
3.
Select the folder where you want to save the Song into. Use
the Open and Close commands to browse open or close
folders. Use the scrollbar to browse through the files.
Play/Mute status saved with the Song
4.
When you are in the directory where you want to save your
Song to, touch the Save button in the display.
Empty measure at the beginning of the
Standard MIDI File
When saving a Song, the Play/Mute status is saved with the Song.
This status is preserved also when playing back the same Song in
Song Play mode.
• To overwrite an existing file, select it before touching
Save.
• To create a new file, do not select any file before touching
Save. The “NewSong” (“NEWSONG.MID” on a storage
device) name will be automatically assigned to the Song.
5.
After touching the Save button, the Save Song dialog box
will appear.
6.
If you like, touch the
name.
7.
Touch OK to confirm saving, or Cancel to stop the Save
operation.
(Text Edit) button to edit the
Global edit mode
What is it, and how the Global is structured
219
Global edit mode
The Global edit environment is the place where you can set global functions. This edit environment overlaps the current operating mode (Style Play, Song Play, Sequencer, Sound Edit).
What is it, and how the Global is structured
The Global is a file that can be written to memory (and may subsequently be saved to a storage device), containing global parameters for the whole instrument or each single operating mode.
Global parameters can be written to memory by selecting the
various “Write Global…” commands from the page menus –
each dedicated to one of the areas of the Global file. They can be
saved to a storage device by using the ordinary Media operations.
Edit menu
From any page of the Global mode, press the MENU button to
open the Global edit menu. This menu gives access to the various Global edit sections.
When in the menu, select an edit section, or press EXIT to exit
the Global mode.
When in a page, press EXIT to go back to current operating
mode in the background (Style Play, Song Play, Sequencer,
Sound).
Note: Saving or loading a “.SET” folder also saves or loads the Global file. Parameter changing may be avoided by turning the Lock on
for any single parameter (or groups of parameters in the Lock page
of the Global mode, see “General Controls: Lock” on page 222).
There are separate areas in the Global file, that may be separately
written to memory, to avoid writing all global parameters at
once when not needed:
•
Global Setup, containing global parameters not linked to
any single operating mode.
Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section. Each edit
section groups various edit pages, that may be selected by touching the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display.
•
Style Play Setup, containing global parameters for the Style
Play mode, not linked to the single Performance, STS or
Style.
Note: The Global mode is not available while in Record mode
(Style Record, Pad Record, Song Record, Sampling).
•
Song Play Setup, containing global parameters for the Song
Play mode, not linked to the single Song.
•
Sequencer Setup, containing global parameters for the
Sequencer mode, not linked to the single Song.
•
Media Preferences, containing preferences for the Media
mode.
•
MIDI Setup, containing the available MIDI Setups, i.e., settings for MIDI communication.
•
Voice Processor Setup, containing basic microphone settings for the Voice Processor.
•
Voice Processor Presets, containing single presets for the
Voice Processor.
All edit pages share some basic elements.
Edit mode
Edit section
Page menu
icon
Parameters
area
Main page
Tabs
There is no main page in the Global edit mode. When pressing
EXIT, you exit the Global mode, and the underlying operating
mode in the background is recalled.
Edit mode
This indicates that the instrument is in Global mode.
Edit section
This identifies the current edit section, corresponding to one of
the items of the edit menu (see “Edit menu” on page 219).
Reference
Edit page structure
220
Global edit mode
General Controls: Basic
Page menu icon
0
Standard pitch (A4=440Hz).
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 236).
+50
Highest pitch.
Reverb Offset
Parameters area
Each page contains various parameters. Use the tabs to select
one of the available pages. For detailed information on the various types of parameters, see sections starting from page 220.
Tabs
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
General Controls: Basic
This page contains various general parameters, setting the status
of the keyboard, the fade in/out, and the accelerando/ritardando.
Gbl
This is the master offset for all reverbs. Use it to adjust reverb
tails to the room where you are playing. Use negative values
when you are in a very reverberant room, positive values if the
room is too dry.
By using this global control, you are not obliged to change the
reverb time in each single Performance, STS, Style Performance,
or Song.
-50
Less reverb.
0
Standard reverb.
+50
More reverb.
Fade In/Out Time
These parameters allows you to set the speed for the Fade In/Out
function.
Fade In Time
Gbl
Time for a full fade in (from zero to maximum volume), after
you press the FADE IN/OUT button.
5…20
Fade time (in seconds).
Fade Out Time
Gbl
Time for a full fade out (from maximum volume to zero), after
you press the FADE IN/OUT button.
5…20
Keyboard Settings
Velocity Curve
Gbl
Fade time (in seconds).
Accelerando/Ritardando
This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to your touch.
By default, it is set to Medium 2.
These parameters lets you adjust the speed of the Accelerando
and Ritardando functions.
Fix
Step
No dynamic control available. Dynamic values
are fixed, as in a classic organ.
Soft1 … Hard3
Curves, from the lightest one to the hardest one.
A.Touch Curve
Gbl
This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to the pressure you apply after first pressing a key.
Speed of the Tempo change (from 1 to 6). With higher values,
the step change is greater, and the speed will change faster. With
lower values, the step change is smaller, and the speed will
change more slowly.
Curve
Accelerando/ritardando curves (from 1 to 3). Experiment the
various options, to see the one that best fit your taste.
Soft1 … Hard3
Off
Curves, from the lightest to the hardest one.
Glide
The aftertouch is turned off.
Glide is a function you can assign to a footswitch. When the
pedal is pressed, affected notes on Upper tracks are bent down,
according to settings for the Pitch Bend on the same tracks.
When the pedal is released, notes return to the normal pitch, at
the speed defined by the “Time” parameter.
Global Tuning/Reverb
Master Tuning
Gbl
This is the master tuning of the instrument (in cents of a semitone). Use it to adapt your keyboard tuning to an acoustic
instrument, for example an acoustic piano.
-50
Lowest pitch.
To change Pitch Bend values for each Upper track, see the “PB
Sensitivity” parameter in the Style Play mode (see page 99)
Time
Time needed to notes affected by the Glide to return to the normal pitch.
Global edit mode
General Controls: Transpose Control
221
Position
General Controls: Transpose Control
Scale and Transpose position
This page is where you can select to which tracks the Master
Transpose is applied to, and adjust some related parameter.
The Scale and Transpose Position allows you to define the relation between the Scale and the Master Transpose.
Post-KB/Pre-Scale
When this option is selected, notes will be transposed immediately after they leave the keyboard.
The Scale will be applied to the transposed notes.
For example, if you altered an E, and then set the
Master Transpose to +1, the E key will play F, and
the altered key will be E (that will play an altered
E).
Transpose
Tone
generator
Post-KB & Scale
Transpose Control
Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks…
Scale
Gbl
Use this parameter to turn the Master Transpose on or off, and
define the way it is applied, to Style and Keyboard tracks.
When this option is selected, all notes are transposed immediately before they enter the internal
tone generator, or are sent to the MIDI OUT, but
after the Scale. For example, if you altered an E,
and set the Master Transpose to +1, the altered
key will still be E (that will play an altered F).
Off
No Master Transpose is applied to Style and Keyboard tracks.
In Sync
When you press either the TRANSPOSE [] or []
buttons, the new transpose setting will not take
effect until the first beat of the next measure is
reached.
Standard MIDI File and chord transpose
When you press either the TRANSPOSE [] or []
buttons, the new transpose setting will occur
when the next note is played for both the Style
and Keyboard tracks individually.
When changing the Master Transpose, chord abbreviations contained in a Standard MIDI File are transposed, and correctly
shown in the display. Master Transpose must be activated on the
Sequencer, but not on the Keyboard.
In Realtime
Scale
Transpose
Tone
generator
Transpose applies to Player 1/2
Reference
The next key or chord you press will sound with
the new transpose setting applied. (Note that if
you play a Keyboard track prior to a new chord,
the Keyboard track will play in the new key as the
Style will continue to play in the old key until a
new chord is entered).
Gbl
This flag lets you turn the Master Transpose on or off for the two
onboard Players.
Transpose applies to Midi In notes
Gbl
This flag lets you turn the Master Transpose on or off for Note
messages received from MIDI IN.
Note: Chords contained into a linked TXT file are not transposed.
222
Global edit mode
General Controls: Scale
General Controls: Scale
General Controls: Lock
This page lets you select the main (or basic) scale of the instrument.
This page, split in four panes that can be selected by means of
the corresponding side tabs, contains all the available locks,
sometimes grouped under just a single lock. Locks prevent
parameter values to be changed when loading data from a storage device, or selecting a different Performance, Style or STS.
Locks
Gbl
All the available locks. Lock them to prevent changes due to
loading or selecting different elements. These locks are also
found in various other pages, next to the locked parameter.
Main Scale
Gbl
This parameter sets the main scale (or temperament) for the
whole instrument, apart for tracks where a different sub-scale
has been selected by a Performance or STS (see “Scale Mode” on
page 109, Style Play mode).
Hint: To save the status of the various parameters as a fixed status
for the Pa2X, save all the parameters to Performance 1 of bank 1
(automatically selected when turning on the instrument), and save
these locks to the Global.
• Lock–Tuning pane
See “Scales” on page 323 for a list of available scales.
Note: You cannot select a User scale in Global mode.
Key
Gbl
This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred key
(see “Scales” on page 323).
SC Preset buttons
Touch these buttons to recall the corresponding presets. Each
preset contains a custom detuning of each note of the scale
(shown in the upper scale diagram). It also memorizes the
selected degree(s) of the scale (shown in the lower scale diagram).
When no preset is selected, the default scale is automatically
recalled. This scale assigns a -50 cent value to all notes, and turns
all scale degrees off.
You can select an SC Preset, also by assigning the relevant function to the Assignable Switch or Assignable Footswitch.
To save the current scale programming to a preset, while in this
page choose the “Write Quarter Tone SC Preset” command from
the page menu, then select one of the preset locations where to
save the current settings (see “Write Quarter Tone SC Preset” on
page 237).
Upper scale diagram
Use this diagram to set the detuning of each note of the scale.
-99…0…+99 Note detuning in cents. Zero is no detuning, ±50
is a full quarter tone up or down, ±99 is nearly
one whole semitone up or down.
Lower scale diagram
Use this scale to turn detuning on or off. Applied detuning will
depend on the programming set with the Upper scale diagram,
or recalled by selecting one of the SC Presets.
When a note is detuned, a black dot appears in the corresponding note of the diagram.
Master Transpose
When locked, master transpose is not automatically changed when selecting a different Performance or Style.
(See “Master transpose” on page 88).
Perf M.Transpose
When closed, this lock prevents a Performance
change to modify the Master Transpose. When
open, changing a Performance may also change
the Master Transpose.
(See “Master transpose” on page 88).
Hint: In order to avoid having the Master Transpose setting change when selecting a different Style,
use the general Master Transpose Lock (the first
parameter in this page).
Note: When the Master Transpose Lock is closed,
this parameter has no effect. However, the Master
Transpose Lock also locks the Performance Transpose.
Style Performance Master Transpose Lock
When closed, this lock prevents a Style change to
modify the Master Transpose. When open,
changing a Style may also change the Master
Transpose.
(See “Master transpose” on page 88).
Global edit mode
General Controls: Lock
Hint: In order to avoid having the Master Transpose setting change when selecting a new Performance or STS, use the general Master Transpose
Lock (the first parameter in this page).
Note: When the Master Transpose Lock is closed,
this parameter has no effect. However, the Master
Transpose Lock also locks the Style Performance
Transpose.
Sub Scale/Quarter Tone
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the Sub-Scale or Quarter Tone value.
(See “Sub-Scale panel” on page 94).
STS SubScale/Quarter Tone
When closed, this lock prevents an STS change to
modify the SubScale/Quarter Tone settings,
allowing for changing sounds and effects but not
the scale. When open, changing an STS may also
change these settings.
(See “Sub-Scale panel” on page 94).
Auto Octave
This lock lets you decide if the instrument will
automatically transpose the Upper tracks when
turning the SPLIT button on and off.
• If On, when turning the SPLIT button or off,
the Upper tracks transposition is left unchanged.
• If Off, when turning the SPLIT button off (Full
keyboard mode), the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to “0”. When turning the
SPLIT button on (Split keyboard mode), the
Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically
set to “-1”.
• Lock–Control pane
Pad
223
When locked, selecting a Style or SongBook entry
will not change the Pad assignment.
(See “Pad/Switch: Pad” on page 108).
Lower
When this lock is closed, the Lower track remains
unchanged when a different Style, Performance
or STS is selected.
This is useful if, for example, you prefer to always
play with the left hand muted and reserved only
to playing chords for the arranger.
Hint: If you want the same Lower settings to be
used during all your shows, save your preferred
Lower settings to Performance 1-1 (automatically
selected on startup), then close this lock and choose
the “Write Global-Global Setup” from the page
menu.
Keyboard Mode (Split)/Chord Scanning
When this lock is closed, the status of the SPLIT
button (i.e., of the keyboard mode) and the
CHORD SCANNING section remain unchanged
when a different Performance or STS is selected.
This is useful if, for example, you prefer to always
play in Full Keyboard, with chords recognized on
the whole keyboard range.
Note: The Split (Keyboard Mode) and Chord Scanning settings are reset when switching to a different
operating mode.
Hint: If you want the same Keyboard Mode and
Lower Scanning settings to be used during all your
shows, save your preferred settings to Performance
1-1 (automatically selected on startup), then close
this lock and choose the “Write Global-Global
Setup” from the page menu.
Reference
• Lock–FX & Voice Processor pane
Assignable Switches
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the Assignable Switch assignment.
(See “Pad/Switch:
page 108).
Slider Mode
Assignable
Switch”
on
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the selected status of the SLIDER
MODE button.
(See “SLIDER MODE” on page 7).
Split Point
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the split point.
(See “Split Point” on page 95).
Voice Processor Preset
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the Voice Processor Preset.
(See “VP Preset” on page 94).
Upper 1 FXs In Sound mode, you can assign a Sound two
effects (FX1 and FX2). When you assign a new
Sound to the Upper 1 track, the FX1 and FX2 settings and send levels saved with that Sound can
be automatically selected, overriding Performance/STS settings for this track. Whether
Sound or Performance/STS effect parameters will
be considered, depends on the status of this lock.
224
Global edit mode
General Controls: Interface
• If the Upper 1 FX Lock is turned on, when
assigning a new Sound to the Upper 1 track, Performance/STS parameters are left untouched;
selected effects, and FX Send values, are not
changed.
Style Element When locked, selecting a different Style does not
cause selecting the Style Element memorized in
the Style Performance.
Style Tracks Play/Mute Lock
When closed, this lock prevents a Style or Performance change to modify the Play/Mute status of
the Style tracks. This way, you can, for example,
turn the bass track off during a whole show, to
allow your bassist to play it live. Also, you could
mute all Acc tracks, to only play with the Drum
and Bass tracks.
• If the Upper 1 FX Lock is turned off, when
assigning a new Sound to the Upper 1 track,
Sound parameters are considered; selected
effects, and FX Send values, are changed according to the Sound’s stored data.
Note: If effects associated to the selected Sound are
not compatible with effects already assigned to the
CD FX block, C and/or D Send values on the other
Keyboard tracks will be automatically set to zero.
(See “Track status icons” on page 92).
Style Tracks Volume
When this lock is closed, the volume of the Style
tracks remains unchanged when a different Style
or Performance is selected.
For example, assume a chorus effect is assigned to
the D effect processor. If the new Sound assigns a
distortion effect to the D effect processor, the D Send
value on the Upper 2, Upper 3, and Lower tracks
will be set to zero, to avoid these tracks sound in the
wrong way. This way, the Upper 1 track (usually
the most important one for solo playing) will sound
with the needed effect, while the other Keyboard
tracks will just sound dry.
This is useful if you create your own Styles, and
like to dynamically adjust the volume by using
the sliders as a mixer. It is not recommended with
Factory Styles, each one already mixed at its best
right at the factory.
• Lock–Style pane
General Controls: Interface
This page contains parameters related to the way messages are
shown in the display.
Style Preferences
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the value of parameters contained in
the Style Preferences pages. By default, it is
turned on.
(See “Preferences: Style Preferences” on page 109,
and “Preferences: Style Play Setup” on page 110).
Language
Bass Inversion
When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the Bass Inversion status. Bass Inversion can also be assigned to one of the Assignable
Switches or the Assignable Pedal.
(See “BASS INVERSION” on page 8).
Manual Bass When locked, selecting a Performance or STS will
not change the Manual Bass status.
(See “MANUAL BASS” on page 8).
Fill Mode
Help Language
When locked, the selected Fill Mode will not
change when selecting a different Performance or
Style.
Gbl
Use this pop-up menu to select one of the available languages for
the online help system.
Change button
Touch this button to apply the selected language to the user’s
interface. Note that the new language appears when turning the
instrument off, then on again.
How to select the Help language
1.
Since Pa2X must be reset at the end of this procedure, be
sure to first save all unsaved data.
2.
While in this page, select a language from the pop-up
menu.
3.
The Change button will start flashing in red. Touch it.
(See “Fill Mode (1…3)” on page 107).
Global edit mode
General Controls: Interface
4.
You will be asked if you want to save the Global, and select
the new language. Touch Yes to confirm. The Global will be
automatically saved, and the language selected.
5.
A message will advice you to reboot the Pa2X. Touch OK to
close the message window.
6.
Turn the Pa2X off, then on again.
225
Track Activity
Show Track Activity
Gbl
Use this parameter to turn on/off the Track Activity display.
When it is turned on, you can monitor events coming from the
tracks or the MIDI inputs. Incoming events are shown by the
changing color of each track’s label.
Background color
Color
Gbl
Balance slider as the Acc/Seq-RT Volume
Balance Slider
Here is the list of colors and their meaning:
Red
Data coming from the MIDI IN ports.
Green
Internal data, generated by the keyboard, pads,
the Arranger or one of the Players.
Grey
Either internally or externally generated data (or
both at the same time).
Dark Blue
No data received.
Gbl
The BALANCE slider can either be used to mix between the Keyboard and Accompaniment/Song tracks, or to control the
Accompaniment/Song Volume without changing the Keyboard
tracks. This is always a relative control, whose effective maximum value is determined by the MASTER VOLUME slider position.
Auto Select
Note: The BALANCE slider only works in Style Play and Song Play
modes. It does not work in Sequencer or Sound mode.
Auto Style Select
Auto Performance/Sound Select
Acc/Sng - RT/Kbd Balance
When one of these parameters is checked, the latest selected
Style, Performance or Sound selected in a bank is immediately
selected when pressing the bank button.
While in Style Play and Song Play mode, the
BALANCE slider balances the volume of the Keyboard (RT/Kbd) tracks, against the Style (Accompaniment), Pad and Song tracks.
Acc/Sng Volume
While in Style Play and Song Play mode, the
BALANCE slider controls the volume of the Style
(Accompaniment), Pad and Song tracks.
Program Change
Show Program Change number
Gbl
Check this parameter to show Program Change numbers next to
Sound names in the Sound Select window. By default, this
parameter is turned on.
Gbl
Gbl
This way, you can assign your preferred Style, Performance or
Sound to each control panel’s button, and select it just with a
single press.
However, the Style/Perf/Sound Select window still appears when
you press one of the bank buttons, so you can select a different
item if desired.
Note: Unless you save your settings by means of the “Write GlobalAuto Select Setup” page menu command, the memorized Style,
Performance or Sound is reset to the first one in each bank, when
turning the instrument off and then on again.
Hint: You can save your preferred Performances into the first location of each bank. This way, by turning on this parameter, you will
select your preferred Performance at the touch of a single button.
Also note that, by turning the “Factory Style and Pad Protect”
parameter off, you can do the same with the Styles.
Note: Program Change numbers are always shown in Sound Edit
mode, and in the various Track Info areas.
Reference
Use this parameter to choose a different background color for
the display. Possible choices are indicated as numbers.
226
Global edit mode
General Controls: Date & Time
General Controls: Date & Time
Controllers: Pedal/Switch
The Pa2X includes a battery-backed system calendar and clock.
This allows for automatically adding a time-stamp to the files,
when they are created or edited.
This page lets you select a function to the Assignable Pedal/Footswitch, and select the polarity for the Damper and Assignable
Pedal/Footswitch.
Note: When you edit a resource file (Sounds, Styles…), all items in
the same bank have their modification date changed. For example,
if you edit a single Style in bank “8/16 Beat”, all Styles in that bank
will take the new modification date.
The following (optional) pedals are compatible with Pa2X:
Type
Model
Continuous
(Volume/Expression)
EXP-2, XVP-10
Month
Switch
PS-1
Use this pop-up menu to choose a month.
Damper
DS1H (supporting half-pedalling)
Day
Pedal/Footswitch
Use this numeric field to input the day of the month.
Year
Pedal/Footswitch
Gbl
Use these numeric fields to input the time, in the
“hour:minute:second” format.
Function assigned to a continuous (i.e., volume/expression)
pedal, or to a footswitch, connected to the ASSIGNABLE PDL/
SW connector. See page 320 for a list of the assignable functions.
The first functions are switch-type functions, while the remaining (starting from Master Volume) are continuous-like functions.
Apply
Calibration
When edited all calendar and time fields, touch this button to
apply the changes.
Use this button to calibrate and choose the polarity of the pedal/
footswitch.
Use this numeric field to input the year.
Time
Gbl
1.
Connect the pedal or footswitch to the ASSIGN PEDAL/
SW connector on the back of the instrument.
2.
Go to this page, and touch the “Calibration” button in the
display. The following dialog box appears:
3.
You are asked to set the pedal to the maximum value. Press
the footswitch, or press the pedal to the maximum position
(usually front pressed).
Global edit mode
Controllers: Assignable Sliders
4.
Touch the “Push” button in the display to confirm the maximum value. The following dialog box appears:
227
Controllers: Assignable Sliders
This page lets you program the first eight Assignable Sliders. Two
sets are available (Mic and Assignable). Two other modes (Volume and Drawbars) are hard-wired to the volume and drawbars
control. You can assign the preferred set by using the SLIDER
MODE button on the control panel, cycling between the four
available modes. The status of the SLIDER MODE button can be
saved with the Performance or STS.
You are now asked to set the pedal to the minimum value.
Release the footswitch, or press the pedal to the minimum
position (usually back pressed).
6.
Touch the “Push” button in the display to confirm the minimum value.
7.
Check if the pedal or footswitch is working properly, assign
it a function, then save by choosing the “Write Global-Global Setup” command from the page menu.
Note: After loading a new Operating System, an older Global file, a
“SET” folder containing an older Global file, or a Backup file, you
might need to re-calibrate the pedal/footswitch.
Damper
Calibration
Gbl
Use this button to calibrate the action of the Damper pedal, and
set the polarity of a Damper pedal different than the supplied
one. See above for details about the procedure.
Assignable Mic Slider
Gbl
Functions assigned to the corresponding sliders on the control
panel, when the selected mode is MIC. This is the preferred
mode when you want to control the microphone and Voice Processor functions.
See “List of Assignable Slider (Mic) functions” on page 322 for a
list of the assignable functions.
Assignable Sliders
Gbl
Functions assigned to the corresponding sliders on the control
panel, when the selected mode is ASSIGNABLE.
See “List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Sliders functions”
on page 321 for a list of the assignable functions.
Controllers: EC5
This page lets you program each of the five switches of the
(optional) KORG EC5 multiswitch pedalboard.
See “List of Footswitch and EC5 functions” on page 320 for a list
of the assignable functions.
EC5-A…E
Each of the switches of a KORG EC5 multiswitch pedalboard.
Gbl
Reference
5.
228
Global edit mode
MIDI: MIDI Setup / General Controls
General Controls
MIDI: MIDI Setup / General Controls
Use these parameters to set MIDI Clock and Local Off.
This page allows you to select a MIDI Setup, convert ordinary
notes to RX Noises, and set global parameters for the MIDI
communication.
Mid
Clock Send
Use this parameter to turn the clock information on the MIDI
OUT or USB Device port on or off. This parameter is common
to all MIDI Setups.
Note: In Song Play mode, only the Tempo of Player 1 will be sent to
the MIDI OUT or USB Device port.
Off
The Pa2X cannot send the MIDI Clock signal.
You cannot slave another instrument to the Pa2X,
even when connected to the MIDI OUT or USB
Device port.
On
The Pa2X can send the MIDI Clock signal. You
can slave another instrument to the Pa2X Tempo,
Start/Stop and Play/Stop commands. Connect
the other instrument to the Pa2X MIDI OUT or
USB Device port.
Current MIDI Setup
MIDI Setup
Mid
MIDI channels can be automatically configured by selecting a
MIDI Setup. Each of them lets you assign the best values to various MIDI parameters, to allow an easier connection with a particular MIDI controller.
A different MIDI Setup may be automatically selected when
entering the Style Play, Song Play or Sequencer modes. To recall
a MIDI Setup for these modes, see “Midi Setup” on page 110 for
the Style Play mode, “Midi Setup” on page 179 for the Song Play
mode, and “Midi Setup” on page 215 for the Sequencer mode.
Clock Source
This parameter selects the MIDI Clock source for the Style Play
and Sequencer modes.
Note: In Song Play mode, the Internal clock is always used.
Note: The Clock parameter is always set to “Internal” each time
you turn the instrument on.
Internal
Internal, i.e. the clock generated by the Pa2X
Arranger and Player 1 internal metronome.
Ext. MIDI
External from the MIDI IN port. In Style Play or
Sequencer mode, the Pa2X is slaved to an external
device, connected to its MIDI IN port. The Start/
Stop and Play/Stop commands, as well as the
metronome tempo, cannot be selected from the
control panel of the Pa2X. Use the external device
to set the tempo and start or stop the sequencer
or arranger.
Ext. USB
As the above, but referred to the USB Device port.
See “Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver” on
page 332 for information on how to configure your
computer for MIDI Over USB communication.
For detailed information on preloaded MIDI Setup settings, see
“MIDI Setup” on page 319.
After selecting a MIDI Setup, you can apply any changes to each
channel’s settings. To store the changes in memory, select the
Write Global-Midi Setup command in the page menu to save it
to memory (see “Write Global - Midi Setup dialog box” on
page 237).
Hint: To restore the original MIDI Setups, load the original Factory data again (available in the supplied Accessory CD, or downloadable from www.korgpa.com).
Note to RX Noise
RX Noises are special sounds that make Sounds be more realistic. They are usually located above C7, depending on the Sound.
Local Control On
The Local parameter turns the keyboard on or off.
Note: The Local parameter is automatically reactivated each time
you turn the instrument on.
Enable
On
When this parameter is turned on, notes received from MIDI, or
performed by one of the internal players, in the RX Noises range,
are recognized and converted to RX Noises. When off, notes are
not recognized.
When you play the keyboard, MIDI data is sent to
the internal sound generator. If tracks are
assigned to a MIDI OUT channel, data is also
sent to the MIDI OUT or USB Device port.
Off
The keyboard is connected to the MIDI OUT or
USB Device port, but cannot play the internal
sound generator.
Note: This parameter is automatically turned off when turning the
instrument on again.
This is very useful when working with an external
sequencer, to send notes and various MIDI messages from the integrated keyboard and controllers to the external sequencer, and then let the
sequencer send them back to the sound generator, without overlapping. See the MIDI chapter.
Global edit mode
MIDI: MIDI In Control
229
Upper Octave Transp (Transpose)
MIDI: MIDI In Control
This page lets you program general parameters for the MIDI IN
and USB Device port, like the Chord Recognition channel and
MIDI parameters for the Voice Processor.
Mid
Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN or USB
Device port for the Upper tracks. For example, if you select the
+1 value, a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa2X.
This parameter may be useful to many MIDI accordion players,
whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave.
-2…+2
Octave transpose value.
Lower Octave Transp (Transpose)
Mid
Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN or USB
Device port for the Lower track. For example, if you select the +1
value, a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa2X.
This parameter may be useful to many MIDI accordion players,
whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave.
-2…+2
Midi In Velocity Value
Mid
Use this parameter to determine if the Octave Transpose is
applied also to notes received on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port.
Use this parameter to set a fixed velocity (dynamics) value for all
received MIDI notes. This is useful when playing the Pa2X with
an organ or a MIDI Accordion.
Normal
Received velocity values are left unchanged.
40…127
All received velocity values are converted to the
selected value.
On
Notes received on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port are transposed according to the Octave
Transpose setting for each track.
Voice Processor Midi controls
Off
Data received on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port are not transposed.
Midi In Channel
Track Mute Active
Mid
Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can still play
data received on the MIDI IN or USB Device port.
On
No data received on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port on a muted track can be played by Pa2X.
Off
Data received on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port on a muted track can still play on the Pa2X.
Chord 1 Midi Channel
Mid
Chord 2 Midi Channel
Mid
Notes entering these channels on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port, are sent to the Chord Recognition engine.
There are two separate Chord channels. This is very useful when
you must send chords to Pa2X on two different channels (like
with some MIDI accordions).
Off
Data received on the MIDI IN or USB Device
port is not sent to the Chord Recognition engine.
1…16
Data received on these channels via the MIDI IN
or USB Device port is sent to the Chord Recognition engine.
Mid
Mid
Notes received on this channel are sent to the Harmony section
of the Voice Processor.
Off
No data is sent to the Voice Processor.
1…16
Data received on this channel via the MIDI IN or
USB Device port is sent to the Voice Processor.
Octave Transpose In
Mid
Octave transpose for all notes received via MIDI by the Harmony section of the Voice Processor.
-2…+2
Octave transpose value.
In Note Range-High
Mid
This is the highest note that can be received by the Harmony section of the Voice Processor. Notes received over this note are not
recognized.
B-1…G9
Highest note.
In Note Range-Low
Mid
This is the lowest note that can be received by the Harmony section of the Voice Processor. Notes received under this note are
not recognized.
C-1…G#8
Highest note.
Reference
Midi In Controls
Midi In Octave Transpose
Octave transpose value.
230
Global edit mode
MIDI: MIDI In Channels
MIDI: MIDI In Channels
MIDI: MIDI Out Channels
In this page, you can assign Pa2X tracks to any of the MIDI
channels received on the MIDI IN and USB Device ports.
In this page, you can assign Pa2X tracks to any of the MIDI
channels sent to the MIDI OUT and USB Device ports.
Mid
Channels
Mid
Channels
You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks:
You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks:
Off
No track assigned.
Off
No track assigned.
Lower
Lower track.
Lower
Lower track.
Upper 1…3
One of the Upper tracks.
Upper 1…3
One of the Upper tracks.
Pad 1…4
One of the Pad tracks.
Pad 1…4
One of the Pad tracks.
Drum
Drum track.
Drum
Drum track.
Percussion
Percussion track.
Percussion
Percussion track.
Bass
Bass track.
Bass
Bass track.
Acc 1…5
One of the Auto-accompaniment tracks.
Acc1…5
One of the Auto-accompaniment tracks.
Ply.1 Tr 01…16
Ply.1 Tr 01…16
One of Player 1 tracks.
Ply.2 Tr 01…16
One of Player 1 tracks.
Ply.2 Tr 01…16
One of Player 2 tracks.
Global
Control
Special channel to simulate the Pa2X’s integrated
controls (keyboard, pedals, joystick) with an
external keyboard or controller. MIDI messages
coming on this channel are seen as if they were
generated by Pa2X’s integrated controllers.
On this special channel, the Pa2X receives MIDI
messages to remotely select Styles, Performances,
STS, Style Elements and SongBook entries. See
tables on page 276 and following for more information on the received data
One of Player 2 tracks.
Ply.1/2 Tr 01…16
Use these channels to send data generated by a
track with the same name on either or both
onboard players at the same time.
Chord
Use this channel to send notes recognized by the
Chord Recognition engine to the MIDI OUT and
USB Device port. This is useful, for example, to
control an external Harmonizer from the Pa2X,
using the Lower track to play chords, even if the
track is muted.
Global edit mode
MIDI: Filters
231
MIDI: Filters
Audio Setup: Style/Kbd
Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data received or
sent by the Pa2X on the MIDI and USB Device ports.
This page lets you connect Style, Keyboard and Pad tracks to the
audio outputs.
Mid
Off
No filter.
Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend.
MonoTouch
Mono (or Channel) After Touch.
PolyTouch
Poly After Touch.
PrgChange
Program Change.
SysExcl
System Exclusive.
All CC
All Control Change messages.
0…127
Control Change message #0…127. See “MIDI
Data” on page 324 for a list of available Control
Change messages.
Left + Right
The selected track is connected to the Left &
Right outs, in stereo. The track is also sent to the
Internal FX processors (A and B for the Style and
Pad tracks, C and D for the Keyboard tracks). You
can set the volume using the MASTER VOLUME
slider.
Track
Internal FX
Note events.
Midi Out Filters
Gbl
Use these parameters to assign an audio output (OUTPUT section, on the back of the instrument) to each track.
Selected MIDI IN filters.
Notes
Tracks
The track is also sent to the S/PDIF Digital Out.
However, the MASTER VOLUME slider has no
effect on this output.
Mid
Selected MIDI OUT filters. See above for information on each
filter type.
Out 1 + 2
The track is connected to the 1 & 2 sub-outs, in
stereo. It is not sent to the Internal FX processors.
The MASTER VOLUME slider has no effect on it.
Track
Internal FX
The track is not sent to the S/PDIF Digital Out.
Out 1
The selected track is connected to the sub-out 1.
It is mixed to mono. It is not sent to the Internal
FX processors. The MASTER VOLUME slider has
no effect on it.
Track
Internal FX
The track is not sent to the S/PDIF Digital Out.
Reference
Midi In Filters
232
Global edit mode
Audio Setup: Player 1
Out 2
The selected track is connected to the sub-out 2.
It is mixed to mono. It is not sent to the Internal
FX processors. The MASTER VOLUME slider has
no effect on it.
Audio Setup: Drums
This page lets you route Drum Kit Sounds to the audio outputs.
Track
Internal FX
The track is not sent to the S/PDIF Digital Out.
Audio Setup: Player 1
This page lets you connect Player 1 tracks to the audio outputs.
These setting are also applied to the Sequencer mode.
See “Audio Setup: Style/Kbd” on page 231 for more information
about the available audio outputs.
Drum Kit Output
Gbl
This parameter lets you decide if Drum Kit Sounds will be sent
to the single output (or output pair) defined for the track they
are assigned to, or each drum category will be sent to a different
output.
Track
When this option is selected, Drum Kits will be
sent to the output selected in one of the previous
pages for the tracks they are assigned to.
Drum Category
Tracks
When this option is selected, you can select a different output for each category of Drum Kit
sounds. Use the “Drum Kit Category” box below,
to select an output for each category of percussive
sounds.
Gbl
Use these parameters to assign an audio output (OUTPUT section, on the back of the instrument) to each track.
See “Audio Setup: Style/Kbd” on page 231 for more information
on the available audio outputs.
Audio Setup: Player 2
This page lets you connect Player 2 tracks to the audio outputs.
Tracks
Gbl
Use these parameters to assign an audio output (OUTPUT section, on the back of the instrument) to each track.
See “Audio Setup: Style/Kbd” on page 231 for more information
on the available audio outputs.
Drum Kit Category
Kick
Bass Drum category.
Snare
Snare Drum category.
Tom
Tom category.
Hi-Hat
Hi-Hat category.
Cymbal
Cymbal category.
Perc.1
Low-pitched percussion category.
Perc.2
High-pitched percussion category.
Perc. FX
Sound FX category.
Gbl
Global edit mode
Audio Setup: Audio In
233
+48V Phantom Power
Audio Setup: Audio In
This page lets you route the Audio Inputs and the Voice Processor to the audio outputs and to the MP3 Recorder. Also, it lets
you turn phantom power on or off for the Mic input.
After having connected a condenser microphone, use this switch
to turn the +48V phantom power on. Phantom power is supplied to the balanced XLR jack only, and not to the 1/4” Mic
jack.
When disconnecting a microphone from the XLR jack, the
phantom power is automatically turned off. Phantom power is
also automatically turned off each time you turn the Pa2X off.
Mic On/Off
Gbl
The status of this switch depends on the input routing (see
above).
On
When the switch appears closed (i.e., non interrupted) the Mic input is active, and goes to the
Voice Processor and then to the outputs. To turn
the microphone on, choose the “Mic In to Voice
Processor” input routing option.
Off
When the switch appears open (i.e., interrupted)
the Mic input is deactivated. To turn the microphone off, choose the “L+R to MP3 Rec (No
Mic)” input routing option.
Microphone to Voice Processor
Mic Out
Gbl
Use this pop-up menu to choose an output for the microphone.
Left+Right (MP3 Rec)
The microphone goes to the Voice Processor, then
to the main outputs (Left and Right) and to the
MP3 recorder.
Microphone off
Out 1+2 (No MP3 Rec)
Gbl
Use this pop-up menu to choose the routing of the Audio Input
signals.
Mic In to Voice Processor
The Mic input goes to the Voice Processor, then
to the main or sub outputs (depending on the
“Mic Out” parameter, see above). The Left and
Right inputs go directly to the main outputs.
The Mic input can be recorded into an MP3,
while the Left and Right inputs cannot be
recorded.
L+R to MP3 Rec (No Mic)
The Left and Right inputs go to the final mix,
together with the sounds generated by the Pa2X.
The Mic input is deactivated. No Voice Processor
effect is applied.
The Left and Right inputs can be recorded into an
MP3, while the Mic inputs (that is deactivated)
cannot be recorded.
The microphone goes to the Voice Processor, then
to the sub outputs (1 and 2). It cannot be
recorded into an MP3 file.
Left+Right Inputs to Out
Gbl
Non editable. The Left and Right inputs always go to the main
outputs (Left and Right). They cannot be routed to the sub-outputs (1 and 2). The indicator shows if they can be recorded into
an MP3 or not (this depends on the input routing, see above).
Reference
Input Routing
234
Global edit mode
Audio Setup: Metro / MP3 / SPDIF
Note: This parameter is automatically set to Off each time you turn
the instrument off.
Audio Setup: Metro / MP3 / SPDIF
On
This page lets you define various parameters for the Metronome,
the MP3 player and digital output.
All tracks set to be sent to the Left+Right audio
outputs (see starting from page 231) are sent to
the S/PDIF output. Together with the audio signal, the Word Clock sync signal is also output,
with a frequency of 48kHz.
When in this mode, the Pa2X becomes the Word
Clock master. No other master device can be connected to the same digital audio system. Please,
refer to the connected audio device (mixer, audio
card…) for information on how to set it as a
Word Clock slave.
Off
No signal is sent to the S/PDIF output.
MP3 Board
Metronome
Mode
Max Volume
Gbl
Use this parameter to activate the metronome for the Style Play
and/or Song Play operating modes.
Off
No metronome is heard.
Style
The metronome is always activated when playing
a Style.
Song
The metronome is always activated when playing
a Song.
Style+Song
The metronome is always activated when playing
a Style or Song.
Volume
Use this parameter to set the maximum volume of the MP3
Player. This control lets you balance MP3 files against SMF
Songs and Styles.
0…100
Max volume in percentage.
Audio Out
Use this parameter to select the audio output for the MP3 Player.
See “Tracks” on page 231 for detailed information on the available outputs.
Audio Setup: Master EQ
Gbl
In this page you can access the semi-parametric Master EQ. This
EQ is placed at the end of the audio path, just before the audio
outputs.
Use this parameter to set the volume of the metronome.
0…127
Gbl
Volume level.
Click Out
Gbl
The metronome’s click can be routed to any audio output.
Hint: When sending the click to your drum player, we suggest to
select one of the sub-outs Out 1 and 2, to avoid it is sent to the audience through the Left+Right outputs.
Note: The selected Metronome Mode must not be Off, in order for
the click to be sent to an audio output during playback.
See “Tracks” on page 231 for detailed information on the available outputs.
Left+Right
Left and Right outputs.
Out 1+2
Sub Outputs 1 and 2.
Out 1
Sub Output 1.
Out 2
Sub Output 2.
Note: When the Master EQ is enabled, polyphony is reduced to 118
notes.
Enable
Gbl
Use this checkbox to enable or disable the Master EQ.
Digital Output
S/PDIF Enable
Use this parameter to turn the S/PDIF digital audio output on or
off.
Low Gain
Gbl
This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies master equalization. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are shown in decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB Low gain value in decibels.
Global edit mode
Voice Processor Setup and Preset sections
Mid (Middle) Gain
Gbl
This parameter lets you adjust the semi-parametric middle frequencies master equalization. This is a bell curve filter, centered
around the frequency set with the Freq knob. Values are shown
in decibels (dB).
235
Video Interface: Video Out
If your Pa2X is fitted with an (optional) VIF4 Video Interface
Board, use this page to adjust its parameters.
-18…+18dB Middle gain value in decibels.
Mid (Middle) Freq
Gbl
This parameter lets you adjust the center frequency for the semiparametric middle band. Values are shown in Hertz (Hz).
100Hz…10kHz
Center frequency in Hertz.
Gbl
This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies master
equalization. This is a shelving curve filter. Values are shown in
decibels (dB).
-18…+18dB High gain value in decibels.
System
Selects the video standard (PAL or NTSC).
PAL
Used in most European, South American, Asian
and African Countries. This setting can be used
also with SECAM TV sets (used in France, Russia,
and some Countries of Africa); in this latter case,
however, the picture is shown in black & white.
NTSC
Used in North America, Central America and
part of South America. It is also used in Japan,
Korea, Taiwan, Philippines and Burma.
Voice Processor Setup and Preset sections
See the relevant “Voice Processor” chapter, starting from page 239.
Gbl
Mode
Gbl
Experiment with this parameter to see if your external monitor
produces better results with an interlaced or non-interlaced
video signal.
Interlaced
Mostly useful for CRT TV sets.
Non-Interl.
Mostly useful for LCD and Plasma TV sets or
monitors.
Character
Gbl
Select the character size.
Big
Bigger font.
Small
Smaller font.
Colors
Gbl
Selects a color set for the lyrics and background.
1…5
Color set. Try them to find the one you feel most
comfortable with.
External Display
Reset to Text Only at startup. Use this parameter to decide what
to show in the monitor connected to the Video Out port.
Text Only
Only Lyrics and Chords (if any) are shown in the
external display.
Mirror
The internal display of the Pa2X is duplicated
(“mirrored”) to the external display.
Reference
Hi (High) Gain
236
Global edit mode
Touch Panel Calibration
Touch Panel Calibration
Page menu
From time to time (for example, after loading a new operating
system), calibrating your Color TouchView™ display may be
necessary to make pointing more precise. If so, use this page.
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
1.
When in this page, first touch exactly inside the set of
arrows in the upper left corner of the display.
2.
The arrows will subsequently move to the other corners of
the display. Touch exactly inside them.
Note: In each Global page, the only available Write Global options
from the page menu are the ones relevant to the content of the current page. All other Write Global options are greyed out.
3.
Finally, touch Save to confirm the new calibration.
Write Global-Global Setup
Select this command to open the Write Global-Global Setup dialog box, and save global settings that are not tied to a single
operative mode. These settings are programmed in the Global
edit mode.
See “Write Global - Global Setup dialog box” on page 237 for
information on the dialog box.
Write Global-Midi Setup
Select this command to open the Write Global-Midi Setup dialog box, and save the current MIDI settings to a MIDI Setup.
•
In case you want to exit and cancel the calibration, press
EXIT before completing the procedure.
Hint: To quickly reach this page from any other page, press GLOBAL to enter the Global mode, then press it again and keep it
pressed, until this page appears.
See “Write Global - Midi Setup dialog box” on page 237 for
more information.
Write Global-Talk Configuration
Only available when the Talk is activated. Select this command to
open the Write Global-Talk Configuration dialog box, and save
the current Talk settings (see “Voice Processor Setup: Talk” on
page 240).
See “Write Global - Talk Configuration dialog box” on page 237
for more information.
This parameter is automatically set to off when turning the instrument off.
Write Global-Voice Processor Setup
Select this command to open the Write Global-Voice Processor
Setup dialog box, and save the current Voice Processor Setup settings (see from page 235).
See “Write Global - Voice Processor Setup dialog box” on
page 237 for more information.
Write Global-Voice Processor Preset
Select this command to open the Write Global-Voice Processor
Preset dialog box, and save the current Voice Processor Preset
settings (see from page 241).
See “Write Global - Voice Processor Preset dialog box” on
page 238 for more information.
Global edit mode
Write Global - Global Setup dialog box
237
Write Global-Auto Select Setup
Midi Setup
Choose this command to save the preferred Styles, Sounds and
Performances assigned to the control panel STYLE and PERFORMANCE/SOUND buttons, via the Auto Select functions
(see page 225).
One of the 8 available MIDI Setup locations, where to save current MIDI settings.
This way, the next time you will turn the Pa2X on, the preferred
Styles, Sounds and Performances will be still assigned to the relevant buttons.
Write Global - Talk Configuration dialog box
Write Quarter Tone SC Preset
Choose this command to open the Write SC Preset dialog box,
and save the current scale settings in one of the four available SC
Presets.
(Only available when the Talk function is activated.) Open this
dialog box by selecting the Write Global-Talk Configuration
item from the page menu. Here, you can save Voice processor’s
Talk settings (see “Voice Processor Setup: Talk” on page 240).
See “Write Quarter Tone SC Preset dialog box” on page 238 for
more information.
Write Global - Global Setup dialog box
Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global-Global Setup
item from the page menu. Here, you can save most settings, programmed in the Global edit mode, to the Global file in memory.
Parameters saved in the Talk Configuration area of the Global
are marked with the
Tlk
symbol through the user’s manual.
Write Global - Voice Processor Setup
dialog box
Parameters saved in the Global Setup area of the Global are
Gbl
symbol through the user’s manual.
Reference
marked with the
Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global-Voice Processor Setup item from the page menu. Here, you can save current
settings for the Voice Processor Setup edit section (see starting
from page 235).
Write Global - Midi Setup dialog box
Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global-Midi Setup
item from the page menu. Here, you can save all MIDI settings
to a MIDI Setup, that is included in the Global file in memory.
Parameters saved in the Voice Processor Setup area of the Global
are marked with the
VPs
symbol through the user’s manual.
Name
Name of the VP Setup to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit)
button next to the name to open the Text Edit window and modify the name.
Parameters saved in the MIDI Setup area of the Global are
marked with the
Mid
symbol through the user’s manual.
Voice Setup
One of the 16 available Voice Setup locations, where to save current VP Setup settings.
Name
Save and use as default
Name of the MIDI Setup to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit)
button next to the name to open the Text Edit window and modify the name.
Check this option when saving a VP Setup, you would like to be
automatically selected when turning the instrument on.
238
Global edit mode
Write Global - Voice Processor Preset dialog box
Write Global - Voice Processor Preset
dialog box
(Only available when the Talk function is NOT activated.) Open
this dialog box by selecting the Write Global-Voice Processor
Preset item from the page menu. Here, you can save current settings for the Voice Processor Preset edit section (see starting
from page 241).
Write Quarter Tone SC Preset dialog box
Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Quarter Tone SC
Preset item from the page menu. Here, you can save the current
scale settings in one of the four available SC Presets.
To
Parameters saved in the Voice Processor Preset area of the Global
are marked with the
VPp
VPs
symbol through the user’s manual.
Name
Name of the VP Preset to be saved. Touch the
(Text Edit)
button next to the name to open the Text Edit window and modify the name.
Voice Preset
One of the 128 available Voice Preset locations, where to save
current VP Preset settings.
One of the 4 available SC Preset locations, where to save current
scale settings.
Voice Processor
Accessing the Voice Processor edit pages
239
Voice Processor
The Voice Processor applies effects and three-part harmony to
your voice. Some dedicated controllers on the control panel
allows you to quickly access the most often used functions:
•
MIC On/Off button
•
MIC volume slider
•
MIC FX slider
•
HARMONY on/off button
•
EFFECT on/off button
Voice Processor Setup: Setup
In this page you can select a Voice Processor Setup, and set some
general parameters for the current Setup.
In addition, you can edit the Voice Processor Setups (general settings for the singer’s voice) and Presets (programming of various
effects and harmony styles) in the dedicated pages of the Global
edit mode, described in this chapter.
Accessing the Voice Processor edit pages
Setup
While in the Global edit mode, press the MENU button to access
the edit section menu:
Voice Processor Setup
Use this parameter to select a Voice Processor Setup.
When this page appears, touch either the Voice Processor Setup
or the Voice Processor Preset item to access the relevant edit
pages.
An alternative way to access these pages is to keep the SHIFT
button pressed, and press either the MIC (Setup page), HARMONY (Preset page) or EFFECT (Effects page) button on the
control panel.
They are parameters that would typically be set for a given situation based on the singer, microphone or studio configuration
and then left that way as a basis for the presets within the Voice
Processor. If you change your microphone (or singer!) the EQ/
Compression settings need to only be adjusted once in the setup
section.
If you wish to save your setup settings, just select the “Write Global-Voice Processor Setup” command from the page menu (see
page 237).
Lead Setting
Low Cut Frequency
VPs
A low-cut filter can be activated on the Lead Voice. This filter
allows for a cleaner signal from the microphone, by “cutting out”
pops, room rumble and mic handling noise.
Off
No low-cut filter applied.
60, 80, 120Hz Filter set to different frequencies. The frequencies
below the set value are cut out.
Harmony Settings
This parameter is a general setting for the Harmony section
voices, that is saved in the Voice Processor Setup. It will not
change when a different Preset is selected.
Reference
Setup parameters are global and do not change when a different
preset is recalled. Setup parameters are all the parameters found
in the Voice Processor Setup edit section, including Lead voice
input level and pan, Compression/Gate, and EQ parameters
among many others.
240
Voice Processor
Voice Processor Setup: Dynamics / EQ
Pitch Bend Range
VPs
EQ
Only available in Notes mode. Sets the range (in semitones) that
MIDI pitch bend information will alter the pitch of the harmonies in Notes mode.
The Voice Processor has an extremely flexible 3-band EQ with
frequency and gain-adjustable high and low shelving bands, as
well as a fully parametric band with Q control.
Pan/Volume
Low Gain knob
VPs
Low Shelving Frequency cut/boost. Range: ±12 dB.
Pan knob
VPs
Adjusts panning for the Lead voice. L64 (panned fully left) to
R63 (panned fully right).
Level knob
Low Shelving
80Hz…16kHz.
Frequency
VPs
center
frequency.
Range:
VPs
Mid Gain knob
This parameter sets the Lead voice level.
Off
Low Frequency knob
VPs
Mid Band Frequency cut/boost. Range: ±12 dB.
Lead voice is turned off.
-30dB … 0dB Lead voice level.
Mid Frequency knob
VPs
Mid Band Frequency center frequency. Range: 80Hz…16kHz.
Voice Processor Setup: Dynamics / EQ
Mid Q knob
In this page you can adjust parameters for the Compressor/Gate
and Equalizer, applied to the Lead and Harmony voices.
VPs
Resonance of the midband. Range is .1 (wide band) to 10 (very
narrow band).
High Gain knob
VPs
High Shelving Frequency cut/boost. Range: ±12 dB.
High Frequency knob
High Shelving
80Hz…16kHz.
Frequency
VPs
center
frequency.
Range:
Voice Processor Setup: Talk
Assign
Dyn
VPs
This page is where you can set the Talk function, to be used to
address the audience, speaking over the background music.
Parameter contained in this page are relative to programming
parameters, and are used to attenuate the music when speaking.
Compressor/Gate assignment. The options are Off, Lead + Harmony, Harmony or Lead. The compressor has auto-makeup
gain, so there are no output levels problems when selecting a different option.
Dynamics
The Voice Processor has dynamics processing optimized for
vocals.
Thresh knob
VPs
Compressor Threshold. Range: 0 to -60 dB.
Ratio knob
VPs
Compression ratio. Range: 1.1:1 to 64:1.
Gate knob
Gate Threshold. Range: Off, -70dB to 0dB
VPs
After editing, you can save the Talk settings in memory, by
choosing the “Write Global - Talk Configuration dialog box”
command from the page menu (see “Write Global-Talk Configuration” on page 236).
Note: The “Write Global-Talk Configuration” command is only
available when the Talk is activated.
Voice Processor
Voice Processor Preset: Preset
Talk
241
Voice Processor Preset: Preset
Talk On/Off
Tlk
On/off switch for the Talk function. This is the same switch you
can find in the Mic panel of the Style Play and Song Play modes.
This page allows you to select a Voice Processor Preset, as well as
turning on or off the various Voice processor modules.
This parameter is automatically set to off when turning the instrument off.
Note: When you deactivate the Talk function, the Voice Processor
Preset is recalled. Any unsaved change to the Preset will be lost.
Mode
Auto (AutoTalk)
Tlk
When this parameter is checked, the Talk function automatically
engages when the Player or Arranger is stopped. This way, you
can talk to the audience between two songs, without the need to
touch the Talk On/Off button.
Preset
Mixer
Voice Processor Preset
FX Level knob
Tlk
Use this knob to attenuate the effects level. 0dB corresponds to
no attenuation.
Master Volume Attenuation knob
Tlk
Use this knob to reduce the volume of all tracks (Keyboard,
Style, Player, Pad…). 0dB corresponds to no level reduction.
SB
Use this parameter to select a Voice Processor Preset. A Preset is
the programming of all Voice Processor’s harmony and effect
parameters. A Preset is always saved in a Performance or STS. It
is therefore recalled when selecting a Performance or STS.
If you wish to save your Preset settings, just select the “Write
Global-Voice Processor Preset” command from the page menu
(see page 236). The saved Preset will appear in the list of available Presets.
Harmony On/Off
Type
Tlk
Use this parameter to choose a reverb to be automatically
selected when turning the Talk function on. These reverbs cannot be edited.
These are “switches” for the voices generated by the Harmony
section.
V1…V3
VPp
Smooth Hall
These checkboxes allow turning each of the three Harmony
Voices On or Off, independent of the Level knob in the Harmony Voice page (see “Level knob” on page 244).
Wet Plate
Dry Plate
This is the same as the “Voice On/Off ”checkbox (see page 243).
Room
Bright Room
Hall
Early Reflections
Reference
Reverb
242
Voice Processor
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony
Master On/Off
Available parameters are: Scalic (Scalic presets), Chord (Chordal
presets), Shift, and Notes (Shift and Notes presets). See “Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor” on page 246 for a
full description of each harmony mode.
These are “switches” for the various Voice Processor sections.
Lead
VPp
This checkbox allows turning the lead voice On or Off, independent of the Lead Level knob in the Voice Processor Setup section
(see “Level knob” on page 240). This is useful in creating presets
where you want to hear harmony voices only.
Root
Note: This parameter is only available when the Harmony section
is turned on. If it is turned off, the Lead parameter is automatically
set to On.
In Scalic presets this sets the scale type. If the selected type is
Custom, a Custom Map can be used (see “Custom Voice Mapping” on page 244).
Harmony
PB Assign
VPp
VPp
In Scalic presets this sets the scale root.
Type
VPp
VPp
This checkbox allows the enabling/disabling of the Harmony
module.
Pitch Bend control assignment. Allows assignment of the pitch
bend to Pitch (applicable in Notes and Chord harmony modes).
Effects
Note: For this to work, a value other than zero must be assigned to
the “Pitch Bend Range” in the “Voice Processor Setup: Setup” page
(see page 240).
VPp
This checkbox allows the enabling/disabling of the Voice Processor Effects module.
Portamento
VPp
This is defined in milliseconds as the time to reach a target note
when a harmony voice needs to change pitch.
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony
In this page you can define general parameters for the Harmony
module.
Note Octave Transpose
VPp
This transposes the harmony voices in Notes mode (see “Harmony Mode” on page 242). The value corresponds to octaves
(±4). This is useful when used in conjunction with “In Note
Range-High” and “In Note Range-Low” parameters (see
page 229).
When receiving notes from MIDI, this value is summed to the
value of the “Octave Transpose In” parameter, found in the
“MIDI: MIDI In Control” page (see page 229).
Harmony Note Input
Harmony
Harmony On/Off
VPp
This checkbox allows enabling/disabling of the Harmony module. It is the same control found in the “Preset” page.
In Style Play and Song Play mode, when the Harmony track is
set to Global, the Voice Processor’s Harmony module can receive
notes and chords from a source different than the Arranger’s
Chord Scanning area. This way, you can continue sending
chords to the Arranger with your left hand, while, for example,
sending chords or notes to the Harmony module with your right
hand.
Source
Latch On/Off
VPp
When enabled in Chord mode, the latest chord played remains
active after the notes have been released from the keyboard.
When enabled in Notes mode, the harmony voices will only
respond to note input when the number of notes being played
equals the harmony voices enabled. This ensures logical voice
assignment when voices change. When Latch is On, the envelope
parameters Attack and Release are not applicable.
Harmony Mode
VPp
Assuming that in Song Play mode the selected “Harmony Track”
is “Global” (see page 178), this parameter changes the current
harmony mode. If a diffeent option is selected, this parameter
has no effect.
VPp
Assuming that in Song Play mode the selected “Harmony Track”
is “Global” (see page 178), this parameter allows you to select a
source of notes for the Harmony module of the Voice Processor.
If a diffeent option is selected, this parameter has no effect.
Note: This paremeter can only be edited when “Harmony Mode” is
“Note” or “Shift” (see above). When the “Chord” Harmony Mode
is selected, only the Chord Scanning option is available.
Chord Scanning
Notes are received from the same chord scanning
area dedicated to the Arranger. For example, if
the Lower chord scanning mode is selected on the
control panel, notes for the Harmony are received
from the Lower area of the keyboard.
Voice Processor
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony Voices
Lower
Notes are received from the Lower area of the
keyboard.
Individual Voice Basic
Upper
Notes are received from the Upper area of the
keyboard.
Voice On/Off
Full Keyb.
Notes are received from the full range of the keyboard.
The envelope lets you set a different Attack and Release time for
the harmony voices.
Note: The envelope can only work when the “Latch On/Off ”
parameter is turned off (see page 242).
Attack
VPp
Sets the envelope attack time for harmony voices. Available only
in Notes and Chord mode.
Release
VPp
Sets the envelope release time for harmony voices. Available only
in Notes and Chord mode.
Level
VPp
This checkbox allows enabling/disabling of the selected Harmony Voice. It is the same control found on the “Preset” page.
Gender
Harmony Voices Envelope
243
VPp
This parameter sets the formant of the Harmony Voice. Use it to
alter the character of the voice ranging from -50 (a big person
with a deep voice) to 0 (no change) to +50 (mice/alien sound).
Voicing
VPp
This parameter is used to set the voicing of the selected voice.
This parameter means different things depending on the harmony mode of the preset.
Scalic Mode Presets
In this mode the Voicing parameter specifies the interval of the
harmony note with respect to the input note in the scale. The
range of values goes from --8, which is 2 octaves below the input
note, to ++8 which is two octaves above the input note. For
example, a setting of +3 will result in a harmony voice a third
above the input voice, related to the current scale.
Chord Mode Presets
VPp
Sets the overall harmony voices level.
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony Voices
The Voice Processor can add up to three Harmony Voices to the
Lead voice. Here you can adjust parameters for each individual
voice.
In this mode the Voicing parameter specifies the relation of the
harmony note to the input note with respect to the current
chord. In Chord mode presets, the harmony voices are always
notes in the chord. A setting of Up1 will result in the harmony
voice being the next note above the input voice in the chord. For
instance, if the chord was C Major and the input note was an E,
an Up1 setting would produce a G harmony voice, just above the
input E.
The range of values goes from Down 5 to Unison to Up6. Additional values are Root1 and Root2 which give the root of the recognized chord as the harmony voice, and Bass1 and Bass2 (bass
voicing) which give the lowest note received. Root2 and Bass2
are the higher pitch Root and Bass settings.
Shift Mode Presets
Voice
Select
buttons
In this mode the voices are shifted relative to the input note. The
values range from -24 semitones to +24 semitones.
Notes Mode Presets
In this mode there is no selectable voicing, since harmony voices
exactly play received notes.
Smooth
Sets how much of the input pitch nuance is applied to the output
voice.
Voice Select buttons
V1…V3
VPp
VPp
Use these buttons to select one of the three available voices for
editing.
Reference
Level knob
244
Voice Processor
Voice Processor Preset: Harmony Voices
Pan/Level
Level knob
Note In
VPp
Incoming note.
VPp
Sets the output level of the selected voice. Please note that there
is also a master harmony voice level found in the “Harmony”
page.
C…B
Original note.
Note Out
VPp
Resulting note when applying the custom map.
Pan knob
VPp
±24
Adjusts the pan for the selected voice. L64 (panned fully left) to
R63 (panned fully right).
Number of semitones above or under the
received note.
UNI
Unison. The same note received on the input is
sent to the output.
Custom Voice Mapping
NC
No Change. The harmony voice will keep its previous pitch until the lead voice pitch changes to a
non “NC” note.
This area is only available in Scalic Mode, when Type is Custom
(see “Voice Processor Preset: Harmony” on page 242).
Scale mode harmonies are basically pitch maps. For each input
note in a scale you can define a resulting harmony note. The
Voice Processor has pre-defined pitch maps for all the offered
scale roots, types, and intervals.
Copy to… button
Use this button to copy the current custom map to another
voice. When you touch the button, the Copy Custom Voice Mapping dialog box appears:
The Custom voicing feature allows you to create your own pitch
maps. For example, you could define a pitch map so that a C
input produces an E output and a D input produces an A output.
The best way to work with custom voicing is as follows:
• For a given harmony voice, select the scale root, type, and
interval that most closely matches the desired voicing.
• Go to the “Note In” parameter and select the input note that
requires a different harmony note.
• Go to the “Note Out” parameter and change the harmony note
as desired.
• Select various other input notes and remap as desired. Repeat
the above steps for each harmony voice. You can also copy a map
from a voice to other voices.
• The custom map can be transposed under the Harmony page
by changing the “Root” parameter.
Check all desired target voices, then touch OK to confirm the
copy.
Voice Processor
Voice Processor Preset: Effects
Feedback
Voice Processor Preset: Effects
245
VPp
Delay feedback amount.
This page allows to adjust the various effect parameters for the
Voice Processor.
Src (Source)
VPp
Use this parameter to set the source of the tempo for the delay.
MIDI
Tempo is received from MIDI.
Manual
The delay time is set using the “Delay” parameter.
R (Ratio)
VPp
Sets the ratio between the tempo and the resulting delay. For
example, “1:2” means that for each quarter note at the current
tempo, the delay plays two notes. A value of “1:4” means that for
each quarter note at the current tempo, the delay plays four
notes, and so on.
Hi Freq Damp (High Frequency Damping)
FX Mix
VPp
High Frequency Damping.
Lead to Delay knob
VPp
Lead to Delay effects send.
Harmony to Delay knob
VPp
VPp
Sets the overall volume of the Reverb effect.
FX Level knob
Type
VPp
The list of reverb types includes the following acoustic simulations.
Harmony to Delay effects send.
Reverb Level knob
Reverb
VPp
Hall
Smooth Hall
Wet Plate
Dry Plate
Room
Bright Room
Early Reflections
Sets the overall volume of the Delay effect.
Type
VPp
Use this parameter to select a Delay type.
VPp
Reverb Pre-delay time. Sets the delay time prior to the reverb
output. Large rooms typically have reverbs that start much later
than the initial signal.
Reverb Time
VPp
Mono
Mono delay.
Stereo
Maintains the panning of the sends.
PingPong1
Sends the lead voice to the left effect end only.
Pre LEQ Gain
PingPong2
Sends the lead voice to the sends depending on
the lead pan setting.
Reverb pre-equalization of the low frequencies. Specifies the
characteristics of the reverbs low frequencies.
Delay
Reverb Decay Time. Length or the Reverb.
VPp
Only available when Src = Manual (see below). Use this parameter to fine adjust (in milliseconds) the current delay time.
Pre HEQ Gain
VPp
VPp
Reverb pre-equalization of the high frequencies. Specifies the
characteristics of the reverbs high frequencies.
Reference
Pre Delay
Delay
246
Voice Processor
Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor
Chord (Chordal) Mode
Harmony and Tuning with the Voice
Processor
Harmony
Here's where we can go into a little more depth about harmonies. We've tried to keep it practical, focusing on what Voice Processor can do for you.
Harmony Modes
The Voice Processor has four different harmony modes, which
give four unique methods of creating harmony. Once we get into
describing the more complex harmony modes, we’ll be showing
you examples based on the C major scale. If you are unfamiliar
with this scale we’ve shown C major here.
Chordal harmonies take your chord information to create intelligent, diatonic harmonies based on your voice. To make
“Chordal” harmonies, you need to input in real time the chords
of the song. This may be done either by playing on the keyboard,
via MIDI or through a programmed sequence of chords
included in the Harmony Track of a Song.
In Chordal mode the Voice Processor will only create harmony
voices that fall on the notes of the chord. Chordal harmonies are
“intelligent” because they decipher the chord you’re playing and
the note you’re singing to produce musically pleasing harmonies.
When one note above is defined as a harmony voice (Up1), the
next note from the chord above the input note is output for that
harmony voice.
The subsequent illustration shows the harmony notes for the C
major scale with a voicing selection of a C major chord and a
single “one above”.
Root: C, Chord Type: Maj, Voicing: Up1
Notes Mode
Black = Lead & Grey = Harmony
In this mode, you provide the Voice Processor with specific note
information to determine the pitch of the harmony voices. This
is the most direct and flexible way of creating harmonies, allowing you to weave complex melodies and counter harmonies irrespective of your lead vocal.
Shift Mode
Also known as “Fixed Interval”, this takes the pitch of your lead
voice and creates harmonies a set number of semitones away,
based on that pitch. The method of creating harmonies, using a
fixed number of semitones relative to an input note or pitch, is
called chromatic harmony, the theory of which we’ll go into
later. We consider this type of harmonizing to be non-intelligent
because Voice Processor is not set to any particular key or scale.
These are pure, parallel harmonies. The most common shift harmony voices are the 5th (7 semitones) and octave (12 semitones), ranging from two octaves below the input to two octaves
above the input pitch.
Below is the C Major scale, showing third above chromatic scale
harmony, as used in Voice Processor Shift Mode.
You might have noticed that each harmony note can cover more
than one input note, or that each input note doesn’t necessarily
have a unique harmony note. For instance, C and D both have E
as the 3rd above, E and F share G, and so on. This gives a more
stepped sound to the harmony as the changes are both greater in
magnitude and less frequent than when using other harmony
methods (shift mode for example). The benefit of this method is
that it is very easy to integrate vocal harmonies into your songs if
you already know their chord progressions! The following lists
the chords available with respect to the root of “C”:
Major
C
E
G
6
C
E
G
A
Maj7
C
E
G
B
M7sus4
C
F
G
B
min
C
Eb
G
min6
C
Eb
G
A
min7
C
Eb
G
Bb
min7b5
C
Eb
Gb
Bb
dim
C
Eb
Gb
[Bbb (= A)]
7
C
E
G
Bb
7b5
C
E
Gb
Bb
aug
C
E
G#
aug7
C
E
G#
sus4
C
F
G
sus2
C
D
G
7sus4
C
F
G
Black = Lead, Grey = Harmony
Bb
Bb
Voice Processor
Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor
Scale (Scalic) mode
parameter description under “Custom Voice Mapping” on
page 244.
Harmonies use key and scale information to create musically
correct, diatonic harmonies. Most popular music uses a single
scale, so you usually only have to input the information at the
beginning of your song. “Scalic” harmonies are more dynamic
than the chordal harmonies because there are unique harmony
notes for each input note. The subsequent illustration shows the
harmony notes for the C major scale with a voicing selection of a
C major scale and a single “third above” harmony voice. You can
see from the next diagram that the “Scalic” harmonies are intelligent and closely follow your lead voice for a tighter sound.
It is also tricky to pick out the key in some songs. An example is
“Sweet Home Alabama”. Listening, you might think this song is
in the key of “D”, as that’s the first chord, but the harmonies
actually work best in the key of “G” – try running the song
through Voice Processor to hear for yourself.
Setting the scale can also take a bit of practice: for songs centered
around the third or root of the scale it might not sound like
there’s any noticeable differences between the three major or
three minor scales. This is because your song doesn’t hit any of
the scale’s altered notes. A melody centered around the fifth of
the scale, (such as B in the key of E), highlights the differences
between the scales. Try the “Sha Lala Lala … La Tee Daa” chorus
of Van Morrison’s “Brown Eyed Girl” (key: E, scale: major, 3rd
above voicing) with each major scale to hear the audible difference between them. For the minor scales, Santana’s “Evil Ways”
(key: G, scale: minor, 3rd above voicing) highlights the differences between the three minor scales.
Black = Lead, Grey = Harmony
Under the Harmony page, is a parameter called “Smooth”.
When set to 100% the harmony voices follow your input pitch,
errors and all, but when set to 0% the harmonies will jump
directly to the scalic harmony notes, kind of like a hard pitch
correction on the harmony voice. Setting the Smooth parameter
between 0 and 100% is like having variable amounts of pitch
correction on the harmonies. Voice Processor has five preprogrammed harmony scales: three major, three minor and one
custom per preset. To create a custom scale or pitch map see the
MAJ2
MAJ3
MIN1
MIN2
MIN3
The following table illustrates the third and fifth above for a
given input note to illustrate the differences between the six different scales. “nc” means no change, in that the harmony voice
will simply keep its previous pitch until the lead voice pitch
changes to a non “nc” note.
Lead Voice
C
C#
D
Eb
E
F
F#
G
G#
A
Bb
B
3rd above
E
nc
F
nc
G
A
nc
B
nc
C
D
D
5th above
G
nc
A
nc
B
C
nc
D
nc
E
F
F
3rd above
E
nc
F
nc
G
A
nc
C
nc
C
D
D
5th above
G
nc
A
nc
C
C
nc
E
nc
E
F
F
3rd above
E
nc
F
nc
G
A
nc
Bb
nc
C
D
D
5th above
G
nc
A
nc
Bb
C
nc
D
nc
E
F
F
3rd above
Eb
nc
F
G
nc
Ab
nc
Bb
C
nc
D
nc
5th above
G
nc
Bb
Bb
nc
C
nc
D
Eb
nc
F
nc
3rd above
Eb
nc
F
G
nc
A
nc
Bb
C
nc
D
nc
5th above
G
nc
A
Bb
nc
C
nc
D
Eb
nc
F
nc
3rd above
Eb
nc
F
G
nc
Ab
nc
B
C
nc
D
nc
5th above
G
nc
A
Bb
nc
C
nc
D
Eb
nc
F
nc
Reference
MAJ1
247
248
Voice Processor
Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor
Diatonic and Chromatic
We've described scalic and chordal harmonies as diatonic, and
shift harmonies as chromatic; but what do those words mean?
Look at a piano keyboard. Between middle “C” and the next “C”
there are twelve keys – 7 white keys and 5 black keys. Each of
those keys are pitched one semitone apart for a total of, you
guessed it, 12 semitones. The chromatic scale uses all twelve
semitone notes opposed to the diatonic scales. Thus there is only
one chromatic scale, but 12 each of the major, minor, etc. diatonic scales (C major, C# major, D major, etc). Most of us have
grown up hearing the traditional “doh ray me fah so la tee doh”
diatonic scale, so that harmonies based on the diatonic scale
sound correct.
What does this mean, harmony-wise? Diatonic scale harmonies
can only use notes within specified scale or chord, so a “third
above” harmony voice actually varies between three and four
semitones above the lead note where the chromatic harmony
would stay exactly four semitones (a major 3rd) above each note.
Shifting, which uses the chromatic, 12 semitone scale, changes
the input pitch by a fixed number of semitones:
Chordal, which uses the root, third, fifth and sometimes seventh
of the many diatonic scales, pitches the harmony voice to the
closest note contained within the chord:
Scalic, which uses one of many diatonic scales, pitches the harmony voice to the nearest note contained within the scale:
To recap: we have three different harmony modes that use chromatic or diatonic scales.
Theory aside, the best way to get great sound is to experiment
with all of Voice Processor' possible harmony modes. Not only
will you develop an intuitive sonic sense of what works best
where, but by investigating different permutations and combinations you could discover some delightful sounds you might otherwise have missed.
Media edit mode
Storage devices and internal memory
249
Media edit mode
The Media edit mode is the place where you can manage files.
This edit environment overlaps the current operating mode
(Style Play, Song Play, Sequencer, Sound Edit).
About the SSD
The SSD (Solid State Disk) is a non-volatile memory, whose
content is preserved even after turning the instrument off. It is
divided in the following separate areas:
Storage devices and internal memory
SSD area
Content type
System Area (SSD-S)
Operating System and Musical Resources
(Styles, Pads, Sounds, Performances, STSs,
Multisamples and Global settings).
Includes the User and Favorite data.
User Area (SSD-U)
20 MB area reserved to the user. To be
considered similar to a small hard disk.
User-accessible storage devices
During a Media operation, files are usually exchanged between a
storage device and the internal memory. You can access the following mass storage device types:
SSD and the internal RAM memory
Media type
SSD-U(ser)
20 MB of User-reserved area of the internal SSD
Flash-ROM memory. Similar to a hard disk.
SSD-S(ystem)
Factory area of the internal SSD Flash-ROM memory. Only accessible when updating the Operating System and Musical Resources, or exchanging
Factory Sound, Styles and Pads.
HD
Internal Hard Disk
USB-F(ront)
USB memory device (like a pen drive) connected
to the front USB Host port.
USB-R(ear)
USB memory device (like a pen drive) connected
to the rear USB Host port.
A device can be selected by using the Device pop-up menu,
shown in the lower left corner of most Media pages:
After turning the instrument on, all data contained in the System
area of the SSD (Factory and User data) are transferred to a
RAM memory. This memory is volatile, and will be deleted
when turning the instrument off.
Before turning the instrument off, please remember to save any
new or modified data, like Songs or Samples.
Supported device
The following table shows the types of storage devices that can
be used with the Pa2X.
Internal
Device popup menu
External (USB Host)
SSD User (supplied as standard)
Hard Disk
Hard Disk (supplied as standard)
Pen Drive
Floppy Disk
Compact Disk (read only)
Device
name
External devices, like hard disks or pen drives, support the
FAT16 and FAT32 formats with long file names. NTSF (Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista), HFS (Mac OS 9) and HFS+ (Mac OS
X) formats are not supported.
Selecting and deselecting files
While a file list is shown in the display, you can select any item by
touching it. The selected item is highlighted.
You can deselect all items in any of the following ways:
•
Touch an empty area in the file list (if available).
•
Touch the Device pop-up icon, and select the current
device again.
Reference
Abbreviation
250
Media edit mode
Searching files
In addition to files, folders are searched. If you open a folder, the
file selector shows its content, where you can then select one of
the files it contains.
Searching files
The Search function allows for searching a file in the various
media. You can open the Search window by touching the Search
icon (
In
Use this pop-up menu to choose a device where to look in.
) while in the following pages:
All
•
Song Selection
•
On-the-fly TXT loading
•
JukeBox Editor > Add
•
SongBook > Edit2 > Browse
•
Sampling > Load Sample
•
Sampling > Import
•
Media pages
Check this box to search in all available devices: USB pen drive,
internal SSD memory, internal hard disk (if installed)…
List
Search results are shown here. The full file path is shown,
together with the matching file names.
Search
Here is a typical Search window:
Check this box to look into all connected devices and their folders
Click here to type
the file name or text
string to look for
Once you have typed the string to search for, touch this button
to execute the search. The name of this button changes to “Stop”
(see below). The time needed to complete the search depends on
the size of the device(s) and the number of files.
Note: Only one search a-time can be carried on. Please wait for the
current search to be completed, or touch the Stop or Select button in
the display to stop the current search and do a new one.
Click here to chose a
device or folder
where to look for
the above string.
Hint: You can touch the Cancel button in the display, or press the
EXIT button in the control panel, to exit from this window and
carry on other operations. The search will go on in the background.
Search results
Stop
Number of items
found
Touch here to exit
from this window
Touch here to start
(o stop) searching.
This button appears after you have touched the Search button in
the display. While a search is going on, a series of dots (…)
appears in this button. This means the search is going on and is
not yet completed.
Touch here to select the item
highlighted in the list
For
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to type the name (or part of
it) of the item(s) you are looking for. During search, you can use
the wildcards “?” (any single character) and “*” (any sequence of
characters).
Touch this button to stop the ongoing search. The name of the
button reverts to “Start” (see above). Any file found will remain
in the display, until you do a new search.
Select
Touch this button to select the item highlighted in the list of
matching items. You can select an item shown, even if the search
is still going on.
Cancel
For example, if you are looking for songs with names containing
the word “love”, you can use the “*” wildcard to write something
like “*love*”. This will find out “My love”, “Love is a wonderful
thing”, and “War and love”.
Also, if you are looking for words that can be spelled in a slightly
different way, you can use the “?” wildcard to find all occurrences; “gr?y” will find out both “gray” and “grey”.
Depending on the page you are in, file types are automatically
filtered to match the current operating mode. For example,
while in the Song Selection window, you can only search for files
with the “.MID”, “.KAR” and “.MP3” extensions (MP3 files can be
searched only if the EXBP-DualMP3 board is installed).
Touch this button to close the Search window. The current
search will go on in the background, even if you exit this window
and carry on any other operation.
Hint: This is equivalent to pressing the EXIT button in the control
panel.
Found
This box shows the total number of items found and shown in
the list.
Media edit mode
File types
251
File types
Media structure
The following tables describe all the file and folder types the
Pa2X can manage. Here are the files you can read or write with
the Pa2X.
Each device (and the internal memory) can contain files and
folders. Data in the Pa2X is slightly more rigidly structured than
in a computer, due to the pre-configured type of data inside the
instrument’s memory. The diagram below shows the global
structure of a Pa2X device.
File/folder type
SET
All the User data. (This is a folder containing
other folders).
BKP
Backup file, created with the “Full Resource
Backup” function of the Media > Utility page.
PKG
Operating System and Musical Resource files.
GBL
Global
VOC
Voice Processor Presets
PRF
Performance
PCG
Sound (Korg Pa-Series)
KMP
Multisample
PCM
Sample
AIF
AIFF audio files
WAV
WAVE audio files
STY
Style
PAD
Pad
SBD
SongBook
SBL
SongBook’s Custom List
JBX
Jukebox
MID
Midi file (Standard MIDI File, SMF)
MP3
MP3 file
TXT
Plain text file
Note: Style banks from 1 to 17 (Factory Styles) can be seen in
Media mode only when the “Factory Style and Pad Protect”
parameter is set to Off (see page 264), and only when loading or
saving a single Style bank, or when erasing something.
MYDIR.SET
GLOBAL
SETUP.GBL
VPPRESET.VOC
STYLE
BANK01.STY
1-1 8/16 Beat 1
…
1-32 8/16 Beat 32
PERFORM
BANK01.PRF
BANK….STY
1-1 Grand Piano
…
1-16 Full Strings
BANK17.STY
17-1 Contemp. 1
…
17-32 Contemp. 32
BANK02.PRF
2-1 Jazz Brass
…
2-16 Jazz Strings
USER01.STY
U1-1 User 1
…
U1-32 User 32
BANK….PRF
BANK20.PRF
USER02.STY
20-1 Rock Brass
…
20-16 Rock Strings
U2-1 User 1
…
U2-32 User 32
USER03.STY
SONGBOOK
Pa2X can also read (but not write) the following types of data.
Extension
File type
KAR
Karaoke file
PCG
Korg Triton Programs
KSF
Korg Trinity/Triton Sample
S
Akai Sample
P
Akai Program
U3-1 User 1
…
U3-32 User 32
SONGDB.SBD
LISTDB.SBL
STYLE (cnt’d)
SOUND
FAVORITE01.STY
USER01.PCG
1 Favorite 1
…
32 Favorite 32
1 Piano 1
…
128 SynBrass22
FAVORITE….STY
USER02.PCG
1 Favorite 1
…
32 Favorite 32
1 SopranoSax
…
128 Noise
FAVORITE10.STY
USERDK.PCG
1 Favorite 1
…
32 Favorite 32
1 Standard Kit
…
64 Orchestral Kit
PAD
BANK01.PAD
1 Cowbell 1
…
32 Drumkit F
BANK….PAD
1 Agogo 11
…
32 Windchimes 3
BANK20.PAD
1 Military 1
…
32 Circus 2
Reference
Extension
252
Media edit mode
Main page
Scrollbar
Main page
There is no main page in the Media edit mode. When pressing
EXIT, you exit the Media mode, and the underlying operating
mode in the background is recalled.
Touching the arrows while SHIFT is kept pressed jumps to the
previous or next alphabetical section, or file/folder type
(depending on the selected display order).
Device pop-up menu
Page structure
Use this menu to select one of the available storage devices.
Commands
All edit pages share some basic elements.
Edit mode
Use the scrollbar to scroll the list. Touching the arrows will scroll
one step at a time, while touching the bar will scroll one page at a
time.
Page menu
icon
Commands may be different depending on the shown page.
They are detailed in each relevant section.
Tabs
Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section.
List of files
Scrollbar
Path
Commands
Tabs
Navigation tools
When in a Media page, you can use any of the following commands to browse through the files and folders.
Scrollbar
Device pop-up menu
See “Scrollbar” above.
Edit mode
TEMPO/VALUE controls
This indicates that the instrument is in Media mode.
Use these controls scroll the list up or down.
Page menu icon
Device pop-up menu
Touch this icon to open the page menu (see “Page menu” on
page 266).
See “Device pop-up menu” above.
Path
Executes the media operation.
Full path of the directory currently shown in the display.
Load/Save/Copy/Erase button
Open button
List of files
Opens the selected folder or directory (whose name begins with
This area shows the files and folder contained in the selected
device.
the “
You can touch one of the heading labels above the list to change
the order in which files are shown. For example, by touching the
“Name” label, the list is alphabetically re-ordered according to
the file names. The selected label turns red, showing the currently selected ordering.
Close button
If you touch the red label again, the alphabetic order changes
from ascending to descending, or vice-versa. The small arrow
next to the label name shows the selected order.
The corresponding items in the page menu are automatically
updated to reflect these changes (see “Ordered by Name” and
“Ordered by Type” on page 267).
” icon).
Closes the current folder or directory, returning to the parent
(“upper”) level.
Media edit mode
Load
253
Load
See also “PCM Autoload” and “Load PCM button” on page
page 264.
In this page you can load User data files (Performances, User
Sounds, User Styles, the SongBook, User PCM, the Global) from
an internal or external storage device to the internal memory
(SSD and RAM).
Warning: When loading a “.SET” folder containing PCM
data, all existing PCM data in memory are deleted. Save
them before loading the folder, by selecting the “PCM” option
during a Save All operation (see “Saving the full memory content” on page 257).
To see if a “.SET” folder contains PCM data, open it and look
for a “PCM” folder.
To create a new .SET folder with PCM samples from different
sources, see “Merging PCM samples from various sources” on
page 268.
Loading all data of a specified type
You can load all User data of a specified type with a single operation.
Note: While in this page, only data allowed for loading are shown.
All other files are hidden.
Warning: When loading a “.SET” folder containing Sounds associated with PCM data (samples), all existing PCM data in memory
are deleted. Save the data already in memory, before loading the
new data.
To see if a “.SET” folder contains PCM data, open it and look for a
“PCM” folder.
1.
If loading from an external device, connect the device to
one of the USB Host ports.
2.
Select the source device, by using the Device pop-up menu.
When the device is selected, its content will appear in the
display.
3.
If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder,
select the latter and touch the Open button to open it.
Touch the Close button to go back to the parent folder.
4.
Select the “.SET” folder containing the data you wish to
load, and touch Open to open the “.SET” folder. A list of
User data appears (Global, Performance, SongBook,
Sounds, Style…).
5.
Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking
for, and touch Load to confirm your selection.
Hint: Load single Sounds, if you want to load new PCM data without deleting the ones already contained in memory. This will merge
the existing data with the new ones.
Loading all the User data
1.
If loading from an external device, connect the device to
one of the USB Host ports.
2.
Select the source device, by using the Device pop-up menu.
When the device is selected, its content will appear in the
display.
3.
If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder,
select this latter and touch the Open button to open it.
Touch the Close button to go back to the parent folder.
4.
Select the “.SET” folder containing the data you wish to
load, and touch Load to confirm the selection.
Note: Most data loaded from a storage device is merged with
data already existing in memory. For example, if there is data
in all three USER Style banks in memory (USER01, USER02,
USER03), and there is only the USER01 Style bank in the
storage device, the USER01 bank is overwritten, while
USER02 and USER03 banks are left unchanged.
As a result, you will have a STYLE folder in memory containing the USER01 bank you just loaded, and the old USER02
and USER03 banks.
Note: If the .SET folder you are loading contains one or more
Sounds or Drum Kits making use of external PCM sample,
the samples are automatically loaded (unless they are already
in memory). This way, all needed samples are always loaded
together with the Sounds or Drum Kits making use of them.
Reference
You can load all the User data with a single operation.
Note: Data loaded from a storage device, and data already in
memory are merged. For example, if there is data in all three
USER Style banks in memory (USER01, USER02, USER03),
and there is only the USER01 Style bank on a storage device,
the USER01 bank is overwritten, while USER02 and USER03
banks are left unchanged.
As a result, you will have a STYLE folder in memory containing the USER01 bank you just loaded, and the old USER02
and USER03 banks.
Warning: When loading PCM data, all existing PCM data in
memory are deleted. Save them before loading, by selecting
the “PCM” option during a Save All operation (see “Saving
the full memory content” on page 257).
254
Media edit mode
Load
Loading a single bank
7.
You can load a single bank of User data (User Sounds, User
Styles, Performances) with a single operation. A bank corresponds to a STYLE SELECT or PERFORMANCE/SOUND
SELECT button.
1.
If loading from an external device, connect the device to
one of the USB Host ports.
2.
Select the source device, by using the Device pop-up menu.
When device is selected, its content will appear in the display.
3.
If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder,
select this latter and touch the Open button to open it.
Touch the Close button to go back to the parent folder.
4.
Select the “.SET” folder containing the data you wish to
load, and touch Open to open the “.SET” folder. A list of
User data appears (Global, Performance, SongBook,
Sounds, Style…).
Select the target bank, and touch OK to load the source
bank.
Warning: After confirming, all User data contained in the
bank in memory is deleted.
Note: If Sounds or Drum Kits based on external PCM samples are deleted, choose the “Delete” command from the page
menu of the Sampling mode to delete the unused samples (see
the “Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD).
Note: If you are loading a bank of Sounds, and one or more
Sounds or Drum Kits use an external PCM sample, the samples are automatically loaded (unless they are already in
memory). This way, all needed samples are always loaded
together with the Sounds or Drum Kits making use of them.
See also “PCM Autoload” and “Load PCM button” on page
page 264.
Loading a single item
You can load a single User (or Favorite Style) item with a single
operation.
5.
Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking
for, and touch Open to open the selected folder. A list of
User (and Favorite Style) banks appears.
6.
Select the bank file you are looking for, and touch Load to
confirm the selection. A dialog box appears, asking you to
select one of the available User (or Favorite Style) banks in
memory.
In the page above, the previously selected Style bank will be
loaded into the bank 1 (USER1 button) in memory. The
existing Styles in memory will be deleted and overwritten.
1.
If loading from an external device, connect the device to
one of the USB Host ports.
2.
Select the source device, by using the Device pop-up menu.
When device is selected, its content will appear in the display.
3.
If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder,
select this latter and touch the Open button to open it.
Touch the Close button to go back to the parent folder.
4.
Select the “.SET” folder containing the data you wish to
load, and touch Open to open the “.SET” folder. A list of
User data appears (Global, Performance, SongBook,
Sounds, Style…).
5.
Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking
for, and touch Open to open the selected folder. A list of
User (or Favorite Style) banks appears.
Media edit mode
Load
6.
Select the bank file you are looking for, and touch Open to
open it. A list of User (or Favorite Style) items appears.
255
Loading Pa1X data
You can load Pa1X data exactly as if they were Pa2X data. Minor
differences might exist between effect parameters. Also, keep in
mind Voice Harmony is only 3 voices in the Pa2X, while it is 4
voices in the Pa1X. Some other parameters are missing in the
Voice Processor section.
At the same time, most Pa2X data can be read by any Pa1X (provided it is fitted with Operating System v. 3.0 or higher). However, keep in mind the following:
7.
Select the item you are looking for, and touch Load to confirm the load. A dialog box appears, asking you to select
one of the available User (or Favorite Style) locations in
memory.
•
Pa2X has a more extensive range of effects, that might not
exist on the Pa1X.
•
Due to the different content and organization, the SongBook will point to different Styles.
•
Styles with Guitar Mode and Fixed NTT tables are not
loaded.
Loading Pa80/60/50 data
You can load Pa80/60/50 data exactly as if they were Pa2X data.
The only difference is that the “SOUND” folder of Pa2X is called
“PROGRAM” in the Pa80/60/50. Therefore, to load Sounds
from Pa80/60/50 disks, you must accomplish one of the following operations:
Empty locations are named <empty>.
8.
Select the target location, and touch OK to load the source
file.
Warning: After confirming, the item you are overwriting in
memory will be deleted.
Note: If a Sound or Drum Kit based on external PCM samples is deleted, choose the “Delete” command from the page
menu of the Sampling mode to delete the unused samples (see
the “Advanced Edit” addendum in the Accessory CD).
Note: If you are loading a Sound or Drum Kit that makes use
of an external PCM sample, the sample is automatically
loaded (unless it is already in memory). This way, all needed
samples are always loaded together with the Sound or Drum
Kit making use of them. See also “PCM Autoload” and “Load
PCM button” on page page 264.
Loading Pa800 data
You can load Pa800 data exactly as if they were Pa2X data. At the
same time, Pa2X data can be read by any Pa800.
Note: Do not load the Global file of Pa800 to Pa2X, or vice-versa.
Global files are exclusive to a particular model, and can cause malfunctioning if loaded to a different model.
Either rename the “PROGRAM” folder “SOUND” (by
using a personal computer) before loading a “.SET” folder;
or
•
First load the “.SET” folder, then separately load the “.PCG”
file from the “PROGRAM” folder.
Loading i-Series data
Pa2X is compatible with the Styles of the older i-Series instruments. You can load them as if they were ordinary Pa2X data.
1.
Copy the old i-Series data into an USB device, or transfer
them to the internal SSD-U area or hard disk of the Pa2X.
2.
Press MEDIA to go to the Media mode. Select the Load
page if needed.
3.
While in the Load page, select the device containing the iSeries data from the Device pop-up menu.
4.
If you are reading an i30 file, select the “.SET” folder and
touch the Open button in the display.
5.
Select the “.STY” folder.
6.
At this point, you can load the whole “.STY” folder, or open
it and select a single Style.
• To load the whole folder, touch the Load button in the
display. If it contains more than 16 Styles, they will be
loaded into the USER banks sequentially, otherwise you
will be prompted to select one of the three USER Style
banks or the ten FAVORITE Style banks in memory. Once
the target bank is selected, touch Load to load the bank.
The “Are you sure?” message will appear. Touch OK to confirm, or Cancel to abort.
Reference
In the dialog box above, the previously selected Style will be
loaded into location 01 of the bank U01 (USER1 button) in
memory. The existing Style at the same memory location
will be deleted and overwritten.
•
256
Media edit mode
Save
• To load a single Style, touch Open in the display to open
the “.STY” folder. Since a conversion will be started at this
point, please wait some seconds for the operation to be
completed.
Select the Style to load, then touch Load. You will be
prompted to select a target location in memory. Once the
target location is selected, touch Load to load the Style. The
“Are you sure?” message will appear. Touch OK to confirm,
or Cancel to abort.
Save
In this page, you can save User data from the internal memory to
a mass storage device (like an hard disk or an USB pen drive).
You can save single files, banks, or all the User and Favorite Style
files of the internal memory (i.e., the SSD device).
Note: Loading a whole “.SET” folder from an i30 file may take
some time due to format conversion.
7.
Go to the Style Play mode, and select (one of) the loaded
Style. Adjust the Tempo, then select the “Write Current
Style Performance” to write changes to the Style Performance. Touch OK twice to confirm.
8.
Due to the difference in Sounds, you will probably want to
make some adjustments to the old Styles, once they are
loaded in Pa2X (changing the Sound, Volume, Pan, Tempo,
Drum Mapping, Wrap Around…).
9.
To make the Sound assignment to the Style tracks effective,
be sure the “Original Style Sounds” parameter is not
checked (see page 90).
Note: While in this page, only data allowed for saving are shown.
All other files are hidden.
Here are the various types of files contained in the internal
memory:
10. Save the Style Performance again. Select the “Write Current
Style Performance” to write changes to the Style Performance. Touch OK to confirm.
The file/folder
type…
…contains…
…and will create on
the target device…
All
All the User data in
memory
A .SET folder
Style
The USER 01-03 Styles
and the FAVORITE 01-10
Styles
A STYLE folder inside
a .SET folder
Sound
The USER Sounds and
Drum Kits
A SOUND folder inside
a .SET folder
Pad
The USER Pads
A PAD folder inside
the .SET folder
Perform (Performances)
The Performances
A PERFORM folder
inside a .SET folder
SongBook
The SongBook database
A SONGBOOK folder
inside a .SET folder
PCM
All the Multisamples
contained in the SSD,
and the Samples contained in RAM
A PCM folder inside a
.SET folder
The Global. All parame-
A GLOBAL folder
inside a .SET folder. A
.VOC file will be created inside the GLOBAL folder, containing
Voice Processor presets
Global
ters marked with
through the various
chapters are saved in the
Global. Voice Processor
presets are saved too.
Media edit mode
Save
257
Saving the full memory content
Saving all data of a specified type
You can save the full memory content with a single operation.
In addition to the above, you can save all data of a specified type
by selecting the corresponding folder.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If saving to an external device, connect the device to one of
the USB Host ports.
1.
The full content (“All”) of the internal memory is already
shown. Select it, and touch Save to confirm the selection.
The list of files in the target device is shown.
If saving to an external device, connect the device to one of
the USB Host ports.
2.
The full content (“All”) of the internal memory is already
shown. Select it, and touch Open to open it. A list of User
data types appear (each type is a separate folder).
If needed, select a different target device, by using the
Device pop-up menu. When the target device is selected, its
content will appear in the display.
3.
Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to
save, and touch Save To to confirm the selection. The list of
files of the target device is shown.
4.
If needed, select a different target device, by using the
Device pop-up menu. When the target device is selected, its
content will appear in the display.
5.
At this point, you can:
At this point, you can:
• Touch the New SET button and create a new “.SET” folder
(see “Creating a new “.SET” folder” on page 259), or
• Select an existing “.SET” folder.
6.
Touch Save to confirm. A dialog box appears, asking you to
select the type of data to save:
In the above dialog box, check all data type you wish to save
to a storage device.
• Touch the New SET button and create a new “.SET” folder
(see “Creating a new “.SET” folder” on page 259), or
Touch OK to confirm, or Cancel to abort.
• Select an existing “.SET” folder, and touch Save to confirm.
Warning: After confirming, all data of the selected type in the
target folder is deleted.
Warning: After confirming, all data of the selected type in the
target folder is deleted.
Reference
5.
258
Media edit mode
Save
Saving a single bank
7.
You can save a single User bank with a single operation. A bank
corresponds to a button on the control panel of the instrument
(i.e. a button of the STYLE section).
1.
If saving to an external device, connect the device to one of
the USB Host ports.
2.
The full content (“All”) of the internal memory is already
shown. Select it, and touch Open to open it. A list of User
data types appear (each type is a separate folder).
A dialog box appears, asking you to select one of the available User (or Favorite Style) locations inside the folder:
In the above dialog box, the previously selected bank of
Styles will be saved to the bank User 01 (corresponding to
the USER1 button) inside the selected folder. Three User
banks are available.
8.
Touch OK to confirm, or Cancel to abort.
Warning: After confirming, the same bank in the target folder
is deleted.
Saving a single item
3.
4.
Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to
save, and touch Open to open it. The list of contained bank
files is shown.
You can save a single User item with a single operation.
1.
If saving to an external device, connect the device to one of
the USB Host ports.
2.
The full content (“All”) of the internal memory is already
shown. Select it, and touch Open to open it. A list of User
data types appear (each type is a separate folder).
3.
Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to
save, and touch Open to open it. The list of contained bank
files is shown.
Select the bank file to be saved, and touch Save To to confirm the selection. The list of files of the target device is
shown.
5.
If needed, select a different target device, by using the
Device pop-up menu. When the target device is selected, its
content will appear in the display.
6.
At this point, you can:
• Touch the New SET button and create a new “.SET” folder
(see “Creating a new “.SET” folder” on page 259), or
• Select an existing “.SET” folder, and touch Save to confirm.
Media edit mode
Save
4.
Select the desired bank file, and touch Open to gain access
to the single items.
259
Creating a new “.SET” folder
Pa2X proprietary data must be saved in special folders with the
“.SET” extension. These special folders can be saved inside ordinary folders.
When saving, you can save onto existing “.SET” folders, or you
can create a new folder of this type. Here is how to do it.
5.
Once you have selected the file that you want to save, touch
Save To to confirm the selection. The list of files of the target device is shown.
6.
If needed, select a different target device, by using the
Device pop-up menu. When the target device is selected, its
content will appear in the display.
7.
At this point, you can:
1.
When the directory of the target device is shown in the display, the “New SET” button appears among the buttons
below the file list.
2.
Touch the New SET button. A dialog box appears, asking
you to enter a name for the new “.SET” folder.
3.
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit
window. Enter the name, then touch OK to confirm and
close the Text Edit window. Note: The “.SET” file name
extension is added automatically.
4.
Touch OK to create the new folder and exit the dialog box.
• Select an existing “.SET” folder, and touch Save to confirm.
8.
A dialog box appears, asking you to select one of the available User (or Favorite Style) locations inside the selected
folder
In the above dialog box, the previously selected Style will be
saved to location 01 inside the bank U01 (corresponding to
the USER1 button) inside the selected folder.
9.
Touch OK to confirm, or Cancel to abort.
Warning: After confirming, the same item in the target folder
is deleted.
Reference
• Touch the New SET button and create a new “.SET” folder
(see “Creating a new “.SET” folder” on page 259), or
260
Media edit mode
Copy
During Copy, a dialog box shows the progress of the operation.
Copy
In this page you can copy files and folders. Folders can be generic
or “.SET” folders. In addition, you can copy the content of the
generic folder you are in. You can copy inside the same device, or
from a device to a different one (both devices must be connected
to the Pa2X during the copy operation).
To preserve data structure integrity, during Copy operations you
can’t open “.SET” folders and copy only one of the files it contains. You can only open and go inside generic folders.
Copying a single file or folder
You can copy a single file or folder, from a generic folder to a different one. The file or folder must be located in the root (the
main/highest level in the device hierarchy) or into a generic
folder. You can’t copy single files or folders from inside a “.SET”
folder.
1.
If copying from or to an external device, connect the device
to one of the USB Host ports.
2.
Select the source device, by using the Device pop-up menu.
3.
Contrary to the Load and Save pages, in this page you can see all
types of files, and not only Pa-Series supported files.
Select the folder containing the file or folder you wish to
copy. If it is contained in another folder, touch the Open
button to open it. Touch Close to go back to the previous
hierarchic level.
4.
Touch Open to open the folder containing the file or folder
to be copied.
Copying a folder’s content
5.
Select the file or folder to be copied, then touch Copy To to
confirm its selection. The target device appears.
If nothing is selected while a folder is open in the display, you
can copy the folder’s content, without copying the folder itself.
Note: During the Copy procedure, you can’t open a “.SET” folder.
You can, however, open any generic folder.
1.
If copying from or to an external device, connect the device
to one of the USB Host ports.
2.
Select the source device, by using the Device pop-up menu.
3.
If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder,
select this latter and touch the Open button to open it.
Touch the Close button to go back to the parent folder.
4.
To copy the current folder’s content, without copying the
folder itself, do not select anything in the display.
5.
Touch Copy To to confirm. The target device appears.
Note: If the selected device is not available, the “Device not
found, or unknown format” message will appear. A different
device will be automatically selected.
6.
If needed, select the target device, by using the Device popup menu.
7.
If you want to select a different folder, use the Open and
Close buttons to move through the directories.
• To copy into an existing generic folder (not a “.SET”
folder), select that folder.
Note: If the selected device is not available, the “Device not
found, or unknown format” message will appear. A different
device will be automatically selected.
6.
If needed, select the target device, by using the Device popup menu.
7.
When the target device content appears in the display,
select the target folder. Touch Open to open a folder, or
Close to close it.
8.
Once the target is selected, touch Copy.
If a file or folder with the same name of the source data
already exists at the target location, the “Overwrite” dialog
box will appear (see “Overwriting existing files or folders”
below).
Multiple file selection
While in the Copy and Erase pages of the Media mode, you can
select several files or folders at the same time before executing
the operation. Files or folders can be selected consecutively (i.e.,
in a row), or discontinuously (i.e., with other files or folders in
the middle).
To choose either to select files in a consecutive or discontinue
way, use the Mode button on the right of the page command
buttons, to choose an option for the SHIFT button:
• To copy into the current folder, do not select anything.
8.
Once the target is selected, touch Copy.
If a file or folder with the same name of the source data
already exists at the target location, the “Overwrite” dialog
box will appear (see “Overwriting existing files or folders”
on page 261).
Choose this option to select files or folders consecutively (i.e., in a row).
Choose this option to select files or folders discontinuously (i.e., with other files or folders in
the middle).
Media edit mode
Erase
261
To select more files or folders consecutively:
1.
Touch the Mode button to choose the
SHIFT button.
2.
Select the first file or folder to be selected.
3.
Press and keep the SHIFT button pressed.
4.
Select the last file or folder to be selected.
5.
Release the SHIFT button.
option for the
Erase
The Erase function lets you erase files and folders from the
devices.
To select more files or folders discontinuously:
1.
Touch the Mode button to choose the
SHIFT button.
2.
Select the first file or folder to be selected.
3.
Press and keep the SHIFT button pressed.
4.
Select a second file or folder to be selected.
5.
While keeping the SHIFT button pressed, continue selecting the other files or folders to be selected.
6.
Release the SHIFT button.
option for the
•
•
To deselect one or more file or folder, without deselecting
everything, keep SHIFT pressed and touch the file or folder
to be deselected.
To deselect everything, select any other file or folder. All
selected files and folders will be deselected.
Overwriting existing files or folders
When copying files, a file or folder with the same name of a
source element might be found in the target device. In this case,
Pa2X asks you if you want to overwrite it.
When a duplicate file or folder is met, the following dialog box
appears:
Contrary to the Load and Save pages, in this page you can see all
types of files, and not only Pa-Series supported files.
Erase procedure
1.
If erasing from an external device, connect the device to
one of the USB Host ports.
2.
If needed, select a different device, by using the Device
pop-up menu.
3.
If the file or folder you are looking for is inside another
folder, select this latter and touch the Open button to open
it. Touch the Close button to go back to the parent folder.
4.
Select the file or folder to erase.
5.
Touch Erase to delete the selected item.
During erase, a dialog box shows the progress of the operation.
Cancel
The procedure is interrupted.
No
The file or folder is not overwritten. The source
file or folder is not copied. The procedure will
continue with the other files and folders.
Multiple file selection
Yes
The file or folder is overwritten. The procedure
will continue with the other files and folders.
See “Multiple file selection” on page 260 for information on how
to select more files or folders to be erased at the same time.
Yes (to) All
The file or folder is overwritten. Any following
duplicate file or folders will be overwritten as
well, without this dialog box appearing again.
The procedure will continue with the other files
and folders.
Reference
To deselect the files or folders:
With the Erase function you will be able to select the internal
system memory (SSD-S device), and erase files from there. You
cannot, however, delete folders from the internal memory, since
they are used by the operating system.
262
Media edit mode
Format
Format
Utility
The Format function lets you initialize a device. Pa2X uses a PC
compliant device format:
This page includes a set of backup and restore utilities.
Warning: When formatting a device, all data it contains is lost forever!
Volume Label
Use this parameter to assign a name to the device to be formatted.
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit window.
Enter the name, then touch OK to confirm and close the Text
Edit window.
Backup OS
This command allows you to make a backup of the Operating
System on a target device. A “.PKG” file will be created.
Note: Should you not do a backup and your internal data becomes
damaged, you can download the most up-to-date data from
www.korgpa.com. A copy of the original OS is also contained in the
Accessory CD that comes with your Pa2X.
1.
In case you are making the backup on an external USB
device, connect the device to one of the USB Host ports.
Be sure there is enough free space in your target device, or
the Backup procedure will not be completed. The OS
backup file requires about 6 MB.
Note: When changing the name to a device containing midifiles or
MP3 files used by the SongBook, the links are broken. We suggest to
give the device the same name it had before formatting.
2.
Select the Backup OS command, then touch the Execute
button in the display. The target device appears.
3.
If needed, select a different device, by using the Device
pop-up menu.
4.
If you wish to save data inside another folder, select this latter and touch the Open button to open it. Touch the Close
button to go back to the parent folder.
5.
Select the folder where to save data, and touch Backup to
save it. If nothing is selected, data will be saved to the current directory.
Execute button
Touch this button, after setting all the options in this page, to
execute the Format command.
Format procedure
Here is how to format a device.
1.
If formatting an external device, connect the device to one
of the USB Host ports.
2.
Touch the Execute button in the display to confirm formatting.
3.
The “If you confirm, all data in the media will be lost. Are
you sure?” message appears in the display. Touch Yes to
confirm, or No to cancel.
Note: When formatting the hard disk or an external USB
device, an additional warning appears, to avoid accidental
data loss.
Media edit mode
Utility
After touching Backup, a dialog box will appear, asking you
to select a name for the backup file, and whether compression must be turned on or off during the backup.
263
Note: You will not be able to load data from this file using the normal Media > Load operations. This file is used for archiving purpose only. To save data that must remain accessible, for example to
load User data after updating the Musical Resources, use the Media
> Save operations instead.
Full Restore Resources
This command fully restores the backup of the internal Factory
and User data, created with the “Full Backup Resources” command.
Warning: Don’t play the keyboard while restoring data, and stay in
the Media mode. Wait until the “Wait” message disappears.
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit
window. Enter the name, and confirm by touching OK.
1.
In case you are restoring from an external USB device, connect the device to one of the USB Host ports.
We suggest you check Compression, to save space on the
backup device. However, with compression turned on, the
operation will last longer.
2.
Select the Full Restore Resources command, then touch
Execute. The source device appears.
3.
If needed, select a different device, by using the Device
pop-up menu.
4.
Browse through the files to find the backup file.
5.
When the backup file (“.BKP” file) is in the display, select it
and touch the Restore command.
6.
When done, we suggest to turn the instrument off, then on
again.
6.
Touch OK to start the backup.
7.
When finished, save the (removable) storage device in a
safe place.
Full Backup Resources
This command allows you to make a full backup of the Factory
and User Musical Resources (excluding the Operating System)
on a target device. A “.BKP” file will be created.
Note: Should you not do a backup and your internal data becomes
damaged, you can download the original data from
www.korgpa.com. A copy of the original data in also contained in
the included Accessory CD.
OS Version Number
This line shows the installed Operating System version. From
time to time, check our web site (www.korgpa.com), to see if a
newer, free version has been released.
Reference
Choose this command, and follow the procedure seen to backup
the Operating System above. The required space on the target
device depends on the amount of data to be backed-up.
264
Media edit mode
Preferences
Factory Sound Protect
Preferences
This page includes various protect options, plus the PCM Autoload option.
When On, this parameter prevents writing edited Sounds from
the Edit Sound mode. When Off, you can freely save edited
Sounds either in the Factory or User Sound area.
Warning: Use this feature with great care! Reorganizing the Factory Sounds may make both Styles and Standard MIDI Files sound
with the wrong Sounds!
Note: This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the
instrument off.
Note: If your accidentally delete some Factory Data, reload the
Backup data, find the original Musical Resources in the supplied
Accessory CD, or download the data from www.korgpa.com.
Hide Unknown Files
Hard Disk Protect
Med
When this option is checked, non-proprietary files are hidden
when using Media operations, therefore making browsing directories easier.
When on, this parameter protects the hard disk from writing.
PCM Autoload
Note: This parameter is saved to memory, but not to a storage
device.
When you import a Sound based on PCM Samples, or create a
new Sound with Samples recorded in the Sampling mode, the
Samples are stored in a (hidden) PCM area inside the internal
HD.
SSD User Protect
Med
When on, this parameter protects the User area on the SSD from
writing.
Note: This parameter is saved to memory, but not to a storage
device.
Global Protect
Med
When loading a “.SET” file (see “Loading all the User data” on
page 253), this parameter (if On) prevents Global parameters
from being reprogrammed when loading all data. All Global
parameters are therefore left unchanged.
When this parameter is set to On, these User PCM Samples are
automatically loaded when turning the instrument on, so that
you don’t have to worry and deliberately load them.
However, since loading may take some time, you can choose
whether to automatically load these Samples or not, in case you
don’t need these Sounds.
If Samples have not been automatically loaded when turning the
instrument on, you can touch the Load PCM button in this page
to load them.
On
When turning the instrument on, User Samples
used by some Sounds are automatically loaded
from the (hidden) PCM area in the internal HD
to the RAM memory.
Off
When turning the instrument on, external Samples used by some Sounds are not automatically
loaded. Therefore, these Sounds will not sound,
until you use the Load PCM button to load them
to RAM.
When loading a single “.GLB” file, this parameter is ignored, and
the Global is overwritten by the loaded data.
Note: This parameter is saved to memory, but not to a storage
device.
Factory Style and Pad Protect
When On, this parameter protects the Factory Styles (from the
“8/16 BEAT” to the “CONTEMP.” bank) and Factory Pads
(named “Hit” and “Sequence” in the Pad Select window) from
being overwritten when loading data from a device. Furthermore, you can’t access these banks when saving data.
When Off, you can load or save User Styles or Pads even into the
Factory Style banks (from “8/16 BEAT” to “CONTEMP.”) and
Factory Pad banks (named “Hit” and “Sequence” in the Pad
Select window). This way, you customize personalize your Factory Style and Pad banks.
Please note that the Save All procedure always saves only the
USER and FAVORITE Style banks.
Note: This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the
instrument off.
Note: Should your accidentally delete some Factory Data, reload
the Backup data, find the original Musical Resources in the supplied Accessory CD, or download the data from www.korgpa.com.
Med
Load PCM button
Touch this button to load to RAM all PCM Samples used by
some User Sounds loaded from an external device, or created in
Sampling mode.
Not available if no User PCM Samples are used by any Sound,
PCM Autoload is selected, or if the PCM Samples have already
been loaded (either by pushing this button or by entering the Sampling mode).
Media edit mode
USB
265
The MEDIA LED will start blinking, while the
personal computer reads the internal SSD-U
memory and the internal hard disk of the Pa2X.
When finished (this may take some minutes,
depending on the hard disk size), the icons of the
SSD-U and the hard disk will appear among the
other storage devices connected to the computer:
USB
Use this page to enable or disable the USB Device port for file
transfer.
SSD-U
HD
Windows
Macintosh
The USB Device port allows you to access the internal SSD-U
and the internal hard disk from a personal computer (PC or
Mac), by just connecting the Pa2X to the computer’s USB interface. This way, you can exchange files between the Pa2X and a
personal computer.
Caveat: Do not modify “.SET” folders, or you will
no longer be able to use them on the Pa2X. Only use
the USB connection for data exchange purpose, or
to modify ordinary folders.
Note: Windows 2000, XP and Vista, as well as Mac OS X, can be
directly connected to the Pa2X. No additional driver must be
installed on your PC or Mac (the drivers supplied in the Accessory
CD are only for MIDI Over USB connection).
Note: After starting the USB connection, accessing
Pa2X data from the computer may take some time,
depending on the size of the hard disk and the data
contained in the SSD-U or hard disk.
HD and SSD-U Connection
Normally, the USB Device port is not enabled for file transfer on
the Pa2X (it is always on, however, for MIDI connection). Touch
the Enable button to turn it on, or the Disable button (with all
the caveats) to turn it off.
Enable
After connecting Pa2X to a personal computer by
using a standard USB cable, touch this button to
enable file transfer. In this case, Pa2X is the B USB
device (called Device or Slave), while the personal
computer is the A USB device (called Host or
Master).
Disable
Touch this button to disconnect the USB file
transfer. Be careful to touch it only when you are
absolutely sure data transfer has been completed.
Note: USB connection is also automatically disconnected when disconnecting the USB communication on the personal computer side.
To disconnect USB communication on a PC, you
usually select the dedicated command by clicking
on the USB device icon with the right mouse button. On the Mac, select the USB device icon, then
select the Eject command or drag it to the eject
icon in the Dock.
Hint: We suggest to disconnect USB connection
from the personal computer, instead of touching
this button on the Pa2X.
Caveat: Do not disconnect USB communication
before the personal computer has really finished
transferring files. Sometimes, the on-screen indicator tells the procedure has been completed,
BEFORE it is actually finished.
Disconnecting USB communication (or disconnecting the USB cable) before data transfer has
been completed may cause loss of data.
Reference
Note: While USB file transfer is enabled, you cannot access other
functions on the Pa2X. MIDI Over USB is also disabled.
266
Media edit mode
Page menu
Object(s) info
Page menu
Touch the page menu icon to open the menu. Touch a command
to select it. Touch anywhere in the display to close the menu
without selecting a command.
Select this command to see the size of any selected file or folder.
Also, the number of files and directories (folders) it contains are
shown.
Note: The single file size is always shown to the right of the file
name in any file list:
Create New Folder
This command lets you create a new generic folder in the root of
any device, or inside any other generic folder. You can’t create a
“.SET” folder with this command, since this type of folder is
reserved to the Save operations (and can be created with the New
SET button in any Save page).
By touching the
(Text Edit) button you can open the Text
Edit window. Enter the name, then touch OK to confirm and
close the Text Edit window.
Rename
Available only when an item is selected in a file list.
Use this function to change the name of an existing generic file
or folder. To preserve consistency through the data structure,
you cannot rename folders and files inside a “.SET” folder. Also,
you cannot change the 3-character extension of files and “.SET”
folders, since they are used to identify the type of file or folder.
Device Info
Select this command to see various info on the selected device.
To select a different device, use the Device pop-up menu on the
lower left corner of most Media pages.
By touching the
(Text Edit) button you can open the Text
Edit window. Enter the name (label) of the selected device, then
touch OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window.
Warning: If you change the name of a device connected to the
USB-F or USB-R port, and it contains midifiles used by some
SongBook entries, these entries will be damaged (due to broken
links to the resources contained in the device).
This does not affect resources contained in the SSD-U memory, or
the internal hard disk.
Protect
Select this command to protect the selected file or folder from
writing/erasing. The lock icon will appear next to the file or
folder name.
Unprotect
Touch the
(Text Edit) button to open the Text Edit window.
Enter the new name, then touch OK to confirm and close the
Text Edit window.
Select this command to unprotect the selected file or folder – if
protected.
Media edit mode
Care of mass storage devices
267
Ordered by Name
Parameters saved in the Media Preferences area of the Global are
Select this display option to see the list of files and folders in
rough alphabetical order, with different file types mixed in the
list. The Name label, above the file list, is shown in red.
marked with the
Med
symbol through the user’s manual.
Care of mass storage devices
This command is the same as directly touching the Name label
above the file list.
Ordered by Type
Select this display option to see the list of files and folders
ordered by type. Inside any type group, files are still in alphabetical order. The Type label, above the file list, is shown in red.
The Pa2X can save most of the data contained in memory to the
internal hard disk, internal SSD-U(ser) memory, or to external
devices (like hard drives or pen drives) connected to one of the
USB Host ports. Here are some precautions when handling these
devices.
Hard disk write protection
You can protect your internal hard disk from writing, by using
the software protection found in Media mode (see “Hard Disk
Protect” on page 264).
This command is the same as directly touching the Type label
above the file list.
Order by Size
Select this display option to see the list of files and folders
ordered by size. The Size label, above the file list, is shown in red.
SSD-U write protection
You can protect the SSD-U memory from writing, by using the
software protection found in Media mode (see “SSD User Protect” on page 264).
This command is the same as directly touching the Size label
above the file list.
•
Do not remove a device or move the instrument while the
device is operating.
•
Make a backup copy of the data contained in a device, in
order not to lose data forever in case of damage. You can
backup your data to a personal computer, and from there
to a CD or DVD. The internal SSD-U and hard disk can be
backed up on a personal computer’s hard disk, by using the
USB Device connection.
•
Do not leave a USB device connected to the USB ports
while carrying the instrument, or it may be damaged.
•
Keep the memory devices or the instrument away from
sources of magnetic fields, for example televisions, refrigerators, computers, monitors, speakers, cellular phones and
transformers. Magnetic fields can alter the contents of the
devices.
•
Do not keep memory devices in very hot or wet places, do
not expose them to direct sunlight and do not store them
without use in dusty or dirty places.
•
Do not place heavy objects on top of the devices.
•
Regular care is recommended with your devices. Defragmenting and repairing internal devices can be made with
any computer utility, while the Pa2X is connected via USB.
Order by Date
Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered
by date. The Date label, above the file list, is shown in red.
This command is the same as directly touching the Date label
above the file list.
Ascending/Descending
Use this command to switch between the ascending (Numbers,
A…Z) and descending (Z…A, Numbers) order.
This is the same as directly touching the red label above the file list.
Each time you touch the label, the ascending/descending order is
reversed.
Write Global-Media Preference
Select this command to open the Write Global-Media Preferences dialog box, and save settings made in the Preferences page
(see “Preferences” on page 264).
Possible problems
•
Magnetic fields, dirt, humidity and usage can damage data
in a device. You can try to recover the data with disk repair
utilities for personal computers. It is, however, advisable to
always make a backup copy of your data.
Reference
Precautions
268
Media edit mode
Merging PCM samples from various sources
Merging PCM samples from various
sources
When you load a .SET folder, all PCM samples in memory are
deleted. So, there is no way to merge different samples by loading complete .SET folders.
To merge samples from several sources, you must load single
Sounds or Drum Kits based on external PCM samples.
Delete all samples and multisamples
1.
2.
If you want to delete all samples and multisamples already
in memory, press the SOUND button to access the Sound
mode, then press the RECORD button to access the Sampling mode.
While in Sampling mode, choose the “Delete Sample” command from the page menu. Check the “All Samples, MultiSample, DrumSamples” option, and touch OK to delete all
samples and multisamples.
Warning: Before deleting, be sure to have a copy of any
important data you don’t want to lose.
3.
Choose the “Exit from Record” command from the page
menu, to exit from the Sampling mode.
Create a new .SET of samples
1.
Press the MEDIA button to access the Media mode. Go to
the Load page.
2.
Open a first .SET folder containing some of the PCM samples to merge. Open the SOUND folder, then one of the
USER banks, and choose the first of the Sounds or Drum
Kits based on samples you would like to load. Touch Load,
and choose a target User location in memory.
The Sound or Drum Kit is loaded, together with the PCM
samples it is based on.
3.
Do the same with any subsequent Sound or Drum Kit
whose samples you would like to load.
4.
When finished loading, save a new .SET folder, being sure
the PCM option is checked in the Save All dialog (see “Saving the full memory content” on page 257, or “Saving all
data of a specified type” on page 257).
Bonus software
With Pa2X, three “.SET” folders are supplied with the Accessory
CD, with the whole content of Korg’s “Real Drums” and “Turkish/Arabic World” collections, originally available as separate
cards for the Korg Pa80.
These are high quality sound sets, based on additional PCM
Samples. Go to www.korgpa.com for more information.
To load these sounds, first copy either the REALDRUM.SET or
TA_WORLD.SET folder to the SSD-U or internal hard disk
using the USB connection, then load them to memory. By loading the BONUS_SW.SET folder, you can load both collections at
once.
Warning: When loading the above folders, all User data in memory is deleted. Save important data, before loading the bonus software.
Note: After turning the instrument off, all samples are deleted from
the RAM memory. You can either have them automatically
reloaded when turning the instrument on again (see “PCM Autoload” on page 264), or manually load them (see “Load PCM button” on page 264).
MIDI
What is MIDI?
269
MIDI
Here is a brief overview of MIDI, as related to the Pa2X. If interested, you may find more information on the general use of
MIDI in the various specialized magazines and dedicated books.
In general
MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface. This
interface lets you connect two musical instruments, or a computer and various musical instruments.
From a software point of view, MIDI is a protocol that describes
messages for playing notes and controlling them. It is sort of a
grammar to let different instruments and computers speak the
same language, and let the one tell the other what to do.
From a physical point of view, MIDI messages can travel across
two different types of connectors on the Pa2X:
• The MIDI interface, that is composed of three different connectors. The MIDI IN receives data from another device; the
MIDI OUT sends data to another device; the MIDI THRU sends
to another device exactly what was received on the MIDI IN (this
is useful to daisy-chain more instruments).
• The USB Device port, that replaces both the MIDI IN and
OUT connectors with a single port and cable. To use it for MIDI
connection, it is advisable to install the KORG USB-MIDI Driver
supplied in the Accessory CD, or downloadable from our web
site (www.korgpa.com).
After Touch – This message is generated by pressing on the keyboard, after the note has been struck. It usually activates vibrato,
or other sound parameters.
Pitch Bend (PB) – You can generate this message acting on the
joystick (X direction). The pitch is translated up or down.
Program Change (PC) – When you select a Sound, a Program
Change message is generated on the channel. Use this message,
together with Control Change 00 and 32, to remotely select Pa2X
data from a sequencer or a master keyboard.
Control Change (CC) – This is a wide array of messages, controlling most of the instrument parameters. Some examples:
•
CC00, or Bank Select MSB, and CC32, or Bank Select LSB.
This message pair is used to select a Sound Bank. Together
with the Program Change message, they are used to select a
Sound.
•
CC01, or Modulation. This is the equivalent of pressing up
the joystick. A vibrato effect is usually triggered on.
•
CC07, or Master Volume. Use this controller to set the
channel’s volume.
•
CC10, or Pan. This one sets the channel’s position on the
stereo front.
•
CC11, or Expression. Use this controller to set the relative
volume of tracks, with the maximum value matching the
current setting of the CC07 control.
•
CC64, or Damper Pedal. Use this controller to simulate the
Damper pedal.
Both these devices are active at the same time. So, you can connect the Pa2X to a computer via the USB port, and connect
another instrument’s MIDI IN port to the MIDI THRU port of
the Pa2X.
Tempo
Channels and messages
Lyrics
Basically, a MIDI or USB cable transmits 16 channels of data.
Think to each MIDI channel as a TV channel: the receiver must
be set on the same channel of the transmitter. The same happens
with MIDI messages: when you send a Note On message on
channel 1, it will be received on channel 1 only. This allows for
multitimbricity: you can have more than one sound playing on
the same MIDI instrument.
Lyrics are non-standard MIDI events, made to display text
together with the music. Pa2X can read many of the available
Lyrics format on the market.
There are various messages, but here are the most commonly
used:
Note On – This message instructs an instrument to play a note
on a specific channel. Notes have both a name (C4 standing for
the center C) and a number (60 being the equivalent for C4). A
Note Off message is often used to say the note has been released.
In some case, a Note On with value “0” is used instead.
Together with the Note On message, a Velocity value is always
sent. This value tells the instrument how loud the note must
play.
Tempo is a global MIDI message, that is not tied to a particular
channel. Each Song includes Tempo data.
What is MIDI Over USB?
You can let the Pa2X communicate MIDI data with a computer
using the USB Device port instead of the MIDI ports. This way,
you can connect your Pa2X to a personal computer without the
need of a dedicated MIDI interface.
Most Pa2X MIDI features can be used on a Windows XP/Vista or
Mac OS X computer with no need of special software. However,
for full and easy use of all MIDI features, we suggest you to install
the “KORG USB MIDI Driver”, a special software that you can
find in the CD that comes with your Pa2X. Relevant instructions
come with the software itself. See “Installing the Korg USB MIDI
Driver” on page 332.
Reference
What is MIDI?
270
MIDI
Standard MIDI Files
Standard MIDI Files
Midifiles, or Standard MIDI Files (a.k.a. SMF), are a practical
way of exchanging songs between different instruments and
computers. Pa2X uses the SMF format as its default song format,
so reading a song from a computer, or saving a song that a computer software can read, is not a problem at all.
The Pa2X players are compatible with the SMF in format 0 (all
data in one track; it is the most common format) and 1 (multitrack). It can read the SMF in Song Play mode and modify/save
them in Sequencer mode. It can save a song in SMF 0 format in
the Sequencer mode.
When in Song Play mode, the Pa2X can also display SMF lyrics
in Solton, M-Live (Midisoft), Tune1000, Edirol, GMX, HitBit,
and XF formats, and the chord abbreviations of SMF in Solton,
M-live (Midisoft), GMX, and XF format.
Note: The above trademarks are the property of their respective
holders. No endorsement is intended by inclusion in this list.
Standard MIDI Files usually have the “.MID” or “.KAR” filename
extension.
The General MIDI standard
Some years ago, the musical instruments world felt a need for
some further standardization. Then, the General MIDI Standard
(GM) was born. This extension of the basic MIDI sets new rules
for compatibility between instruments:
•
A minimum of 16 MIDI channels was required.
•
A basic set of 128 Sounds, correctly ordered, was mandatory.
•
The Drum Kit had a standard order.
•
Channel 10 had to be devoted to the Drum Kit.
These notes will be combined with the ones of the special Chord
1 and Chord 2 channels.
The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels
You can set two special Chord channels (see page 230) to send to
the Pa2X notes for the chord recognition. The notes will be combined with the notes that go through the channel set as Global
(Global notes are recognized only under the split point, if the
SPLIT LED is lit up).
The Chord channels are not affected by the split point and the
status of the SPLIT button in the control panel. All the notes –
both above and below the split point – will be sent to the chord
recognition.
The buttons of the CHORD SCANNING section have a particular effect on the Chord channels:
•
if you have selected LOWER, the chord recognition mode
will be set by the “Chord Recognition Mode” parameter in
the Style Play mode (see page 109);
•
if you have selected UPPER or FULL, the chord recognition
mode will always be Fingered 3 (you need to play at least
three notes in order for the chord to be detected). If Expert
was selected before choosing UPPER or FULL, it will
remain selected.
These two channels are especially useful for accordion players to
assign a different Chord channel to the chords and the bass
played with the left hand. In this way, chords and bass will participate to the creation of chords for the chord recognition of the
automatic accompaniment.
The Control channel
A most recent extension is the GM2, that further expands the
Sounds database. The Pa2X is soundwise-compatible with the
GM2 standard.
You can set a MIDI IN channel as the Control channel (see
page 230), to select Styles and Performance from an external
device. See the Appendix for a list of messages corresponding to
Pa2X internal data.
The Global channel
MIDI Setup
Any channels with the Global option assigned (see “MIDI: MIDI
In Channels” on page 230) can simulate the Pa2X integrated
keyboard. When the Pa2X is connected to a master keyboard,
transmission should take place over the Global channel of the
Pa2X.
You can play Pa2X with an external controller, and use it simply
as a powerful sound generator. To help you configure the MIDI
channels, we have provided a set of MIDI Setups (see “Midi
Setup” on page 110 for the Style Play mode, “Midi Setup” on
page 179 for the Song Play mode, and “MIDI Setup” on page 228
for the Global mode).
The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and not over
a standard channel are affected by the status of the SPLIT button, as well from the split point. Therefore, if the SPLIT button
LED is lit up, the notes that arrive to the Pa2X over this channel
will be divided by the split point into the Upper (above the split
point) and Lower (below the split point) parts.
The notes that arrive to a Global channel are used for the chord
recognition of the automatic accompaniment. If the SPLIT LED
is turned on, only the notes below the split point will be used.
We recommend you to consider each MIDI Setup as a starting
point you can freely tweak. Once you have selected the most
appropriate MIDI Setup for the connection to be made, you can
modify the parameters as necessary and save them in a MIDI
Setup (see “Write Global - Midi Setup dialog box” on page 237).
MIDI
Connecting Pa2X to a Master keyboard
4.
Connecting Pa2X to a Master keyboard
You can control the Pa2X with a master keyboard or any other
MIDI keyboard. You only need to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the
Pa2X. The master keyboard will become the integrated keyboard
of the Pa2X if it transmits over the same channel programmed as
Global in the Pa2X.
271
Select the “Master Keyboard” MIDI Setup.
Note: Settings may change when new Global data is loaded
from disk. To protect settings from loading, use the Global
Protect function (see “Global Protect” on page 264).
5.
To save the assigned MIDI Setup for the selected operative
mode into the Global, select the “Write Global-Style
Setup”, the “Write Global-Song Play Setup”, the “Write
Global-Player Setup”, or the “Write Global-Global Setup”
command from the page menu.
6.
If needed, press one of the buttons in the MODE section to
go to the desired operative mode.
Connecting the Pa2X to a MIDI accordion
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
There are various types of MIDI accordions, each one requiring
different MIDI settings. Pa2X is provided with a series of “Accordion” MIDI Setups, each one suitable for a different MIDI accordion (see page 228).
Connection and settings
To connect the accordion to the Pa2X follow this procedure:
1.
Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the accordion to the
MIDI IN connector of the Pa2X.
2.
Select the MIDI Setup parameter. You can do this by going
to the “MIDI: MIDI Setup / General Controls” page of the
Global mode, or in the dedicated page of the Style Play,
Song Play or Sequencer mode (see “Midi Setup” on
page 110 and “Midi Setup” on page 179).
Connections and settings
To connect the master keyboard to the Pa2X follow this procedure:
1.
Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard
to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa2X.
2.
Program the master keyboard to transmit over the Global
channel of the Pa2X (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on
page 230).
3.
Note: A different MIDI Setup may be selected for the Style
Play, Song Play and Sequencer modes. The “1-Default” MIDI
Setup is automatically selected when entering the Sound Edit
mode. MIDI settings are therefore modified when switching to
a different operating mode. The current MIDI Setup is also
shown in the Global mode.
For information on the master keyboard programming, see
the master keyboard own user’s manual.
3.
Select the MIDI Setup parameter. You can do this by going
to the “MIDI: MIDI Setup / General Controls” page of the
Global mode, or in the dedicated page of the Style Play,
Song Play or Sequencer mode (see “Midi Setup” on
page 110, “Midi Setup” on page 179, and “Midi Setup” on
page 215).
4.
To save the assigned MIDI Setup for the selected operative
mode into the Global, select the “Write Global-Style
Setup”, the “Write Global-Song Play Setup”, the “Write
Global-Player Setup”, or the “Write Global-Global Setup”
command from the page menu.
5.
If needed, press one of the buttons in the MODE section to
go to the desired operative mode.
Note: A different MIDI Setup may be selected for the Style
Play, Song Play and Sequencer modes. The “1-Default” MIDI
Setup is automatically selected when entering the Sound Edit
mode. MIDI settings are therefore modified when switching to
a different operating mode. The current MIDI Setup is also
shown in the Global mode.
Select one of the available “Accordion” MIDI Setups.
Note: Settings may change when new Global data is loaded
from disk. To protect settings from loading, use the Global
Protect function (see “Global Protect” on page 264).
Reference
If the master keyboard transmits over the Global channel of the
Pa2X, the split point and the status of the SPLIT button in the
control panel will affect the notes received from the master keyboard.
272
MIDI
Connecting the Pa2X to an external sequencer
Connecting the Pa2X to an external
sequencer
You can program a new song on an external sequencer, using
Pa2X as a multi-timbral expander.
Connections and settings
In order to connect the Pa2X to a computer, you need to have a
computer with either a MIDI interface or a USB port.
1.
In case you will connect the computer and the Pa2X via the
USB port, install the Korg USB MIDI Driver, as explained
in “Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver” on page 332.
2.
Connect the Pa2X and the computer either via the USB
Device port, or via the MIDI ports and a MIDI interface, as
shown in the following diagram.
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Note: Settings may change when new Global data is loaded
from disk. To protect settings from loading, use the Global
Protect function (see “Global Protect” on page 264).
6.
Select the “Write Global-Player Setup” command from the
page menu to save the assigned MIDI Setup to the Global.
7.
Play the keyboard. Notes played on the keyboard go from
the MIDI OUT of the Pa2X to the MIDI IN of the computer/MIDI interface (or go from the USB port of the
Pa2X, to the USB port of the computer).
Notes generated by the computer (i.e. a song played by its
sequencer) are sent through the MIDI OUT of the MIDI
interface to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa2X (or go from
the USB port of the computer, to the USB port of the
Pa2X).
The Local Off
When the Pa2X is connected to an external sequencer, we recommend you to set the Pa2X in Local Off mode (see “Local
Control On” on page 228) to avoid that the notes are simultaneously played by the keyboard and by the MIDI events sent by
the external sequencer.
When the Pa2X is in Local Off, the Pa2X keyboard transmits
data to the external sequencer, but not to the internal sound generation. The sequencer will receive the notes played on the Pa2X
keyboard and send them to the selected track of the song. The
track will transmit the data to the internal sound generation of
the Pa2X.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
USB Device
Note: In order to send data to the Pa2X sound generation, the
“MIDI Thru” function must be activated in the external sequencer
(normally active; the name may be different according to the type
of sequencer). For more information refer to the instructions manual of the sequencer.
The Sounds
3.
Activate the “MIDI Thru” function on the external
sequencer. Please refer to the user’s manual of the
sequencer.
4.
Press GLOBAL, and go to the “MIDI: MIDI Setup / General
Controls” page. uncheck the “Local Control On” parameter
(see page 228). This is called the “Local Off status”.
5.
Press SEQUENCER to go to the Sequencer mode. Go to the
“Preferences: Sequencer Setup” page (see page 215). Select
the “Extern.Seq.” MIDI Setup.
The song that is played back by the computer sequencer can
select Pa2X Sounds through the MIDI messages Bank Select
MSB, Bank Select LSB (bank selection, two messages), and Program Change (Sound selection). For a list of Sounds and MIDI
values, see “Sounds (Program Change order)” on page 290.
A suggestion for those who program songs on computer: Even
though it is not essential, you usually set the bass on channel 2,
melody on channel 4, drum kit on channel 10, control of the
Pa2X voice harmonizer on channel 5.
MIDI
Playing another instrument with the Pa2X
Playing another instrument with the
Pa2X
You can use the Pa2X as the master controller for your MIDI
setup.
1.
Connect the Pa2X MIDI OUT connector to the other
instrument’s MIDI IN.
2.
Set the other instrument to the same channels you want to
play from Pa2X. For example, if you wish to play the Upper
1 and Upper 2 tracks with sounds of the other instrument,
enable the other instrument to receive on the same channels Pa2X is transmitting from tracks Upper 1 and Upper 2
(by default, channels 1 and 2).
3.
Set the master volume of the other instrument with its own
volume controls.
4.
Mute/unmute any track right from the Pa2X. Adjust each
track’s volume by using Pa2X sliders.
5.
Play the keyboard of the Pa2X.
The Keyboard
Pa2X’s keyboard can drive up to four tracks via the MIDI OUT
(Upper 1-3 and Lower). MIDI output channels are set in Global
mode (see “MIDI: MIDI Out Channels” on page 230).
As a default situation (“1-Default” MIDI Setup), each of Pa2X
Keyboard tracks transmit on the following channels:
Track
Out Channel
Upper1
1
Upper2
2
Upper3
3
Lower
4
273
The Player
Any Player’s track can drive a channel on an external instrument.
To set each track’s MIDI output channel, see “MIDI: MIDI Out
Channels” on page 230.
To hear only the expander’s sounds, you can lower the MASTER
VOLUME control on the Pa2X, or set the Song tracks to the
External status (see “Track Controls: Mode” on page 209).
Select the “Player 1” or “Player 2” MIDI Setup (depending on
the Player you are using on the Pa2X) to set the channels as follows.
Track
Out Channel
Song 1…16
1…16
The Arranger
One of the most interesting aspect of MIDI, is that you can use
your Pa2X to play an external instrument with its onboard
arranger. Yes, it’s hard to beat the audio quality of Pa2X, but you
could wish to use that old faithful synth you are still accustomed
to…
To assign some of Pa2X Style tracks to an external instrument,
set them to the External status (see “Track Controls: Mode” on
page 209).
Select the “Default” MIDI Setup to set the channels as follows
(this is the default status of Pa2X).
Track
Out Channel
Bass
9
Drums
10
Percussion
11
Acc1…5
12…16
To hear only the expander’s sounds, you can lower the MASTER
VOLUME control on the Pa2X, or set the Keyboard tracks to the
External status (see “Track Controls: Mode” on page 209).
Reference
When a track is muted, it cannot transmit any MIDI data to an
external expander or sequencer connected Pa2X’s MIDI OUT.
274
MIDI
Playing another instrument with the Pa2X
Appendix
276
Factory data
Styles
Factory data
Styles
Note: You can remotely select Styles on the Pa2X, by sending it Bank Select MSB (CC#0), Bank Select LSB (CC#32) and Program Change
messages on the Control channel (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230).
#
CC0
CC32
PC
1
0
0
Bank: 8/16 Beat
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Pop
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Ballad
0
1
0
2
0
Modern Ballad
0
Standard 8 Beat
0
Guitar Pop
2
1
Standard 16 Beat
1
Easy Pop 1
1
Moonlight Ballad
3
2
Kool Beat
2
Easy Pop 2
2
Soft Ballad
4
3
Guitar Beat
3
Pop Groove
3
Funky Ballad
5
4
Easy Beat 1
4
British Pop
4
Guitar Ballad
6
5
Easy Beat 2
5
Pop Jazz
5
Easy Ballad
7
6
Real 8 Beat
6
Slow Latin Pop
6
Organ Ballad
8
7
Real 16 Beat
7
Pop Ballad
7
Blue Ballad
9
8
Soft 8 Beat
8
Pop 6/8
8
Folk Ballad 1
Folk Ballad 2
10
9
Soft 16 Beat
9
Slow Pop 6/8
9
11
10
Classic Beat
10
Pop 12/8
10
Groove Ballad
12
11
Pop 16 Beat
11
Pop Shuffle 1
11
Blues Ballad
13
12
Analog Beat 1
12
Pop Shuffle 2
12
Analog Ballad 1
14
13
Analog Beat 2
13
Pop Shuffle 3
13
Analog Ballad 2
15
14
8 Beat Analog 1
14
Pop Chart 1
14
Rock Ballad 1
16
15
8 Beat Analog 2
15
Pop Chart 2
15
Rock Ballad 2
17
16
Modern Beat
16
Pop Funk 1
16
Slow 6/8
18
17
Half Beat
17
Pop Funk 2
17
Ballad 6/8 1
19
18
18
Fast Pop
18
Ballad 6/8 2
20
19
19
19
Medium 6/4
21
20
20
20
Slow Waltz
22
21
21
21
Pop Hit Ballad
23
22
22
22
Color Ballad
24
23
23
23
Oriental Ballad
25
24
24
24
26
25
25
25
27
26
26
26
28
27
27
27
29
28
28
28
30
29
29
29
31
30
30
30
32
31
31
31
Factory data
Styles
CC0
CC32
PC
1
0
3
Bank: Ballroom
CC0
CC32
0
4
PC
Bank: Dance
CC0
CC32
0
5
PC
Bank: Rock
0
Easy Listening
0
Club House
2
1
Slow Band
1
Euro Trance
3
2
Big Band Jump
2
Fashion Funk
2
Fire Rock
4
3
Big Band Fox
3
Dance Fever
3
Hard Rock
5
4
Big Band 40's
4
Funky Disco
4
Open Rock 1
6
5
50's Fox
5
Barry Dance
5
Open Rock 2
7
6
Organ Foxtrot
6
Sister & Girl
6
Heavy Rock
8
7
Organ Waltz
7
Philly Disco
7
Funky Rock
9
8
Waltz Ballad 1
8
Oriental Dance
8
Rock Oldie
10
9
Waltz Ballad 2
9
Groove It Up
9
Rock & Roll
11
10
Foxtrot 1
10
60's Dance
10
South Shuffle
12
11
Foxtrot 2
11
70's Disco 1
11
60's Rock
13
12
Fox Shuffle 1
12
70's Disco 2
12
Surf Rock
14
13
Fox Shuffle 2
13
80's Dance
13
Latin Rock 1
15
14
Quick Step 1
14
Miami Disco
14
Latin Rock 2
16
15
Quick Step 2
15
Love Disco
15
Slow latin rock
17
16
Slow Fox
16
Dance Motown
16
Slow Rock 1
18
17
Italian Fox
17
Soca Dance
17
Slow Rock 2
19
18
Operetta
18
Disco Gully
18
60's Slow Rock
20
19
Orchestral Tango
19
Dance Mix
19
Rock 6/8
21
20
English Tango
20
Disco Latin
20
Steely Rock
22
21
Italian Tango 1
21
House Garage
21
Abbey Rock
23
22
Italian Tango 2
22
House
22
SouthStrait Rock
24
23
Argentina Tango
23
Techno
23
Rock Beat
25
24
Irish Fox
24
Rap
24
Rock Shuffle
26
25
Twist
25
HipHop
25
Blues Shuffle
27
26
Jive
26
26
Light Rock
28
27
Pasodoble
27
27
29
28
Hully Gully
28
28
30
29
29
29
31
30
30
30
32
31
31
#
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Funk & Soul
1
0
6
0
Funk R&B
2
1
3
0
Pop Rock
1
English Rock
31
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Country
CC0
CC32
PC
0
7
0
Country Strum
Bank: World 1
0
8
0
Kool Funk
1
Country QuikStep
1
Oberkr. Waltz 1
Oberkr. Waltz 2
2
Al Funk
2
Country Beat 1
2
Oberkr. Polka 1
4
3
Elektrik Funk
3
Country Beat 2
3
Oberkr. Polka 2
5
4
Classic Funk
4
Country Ballad 1
4
Schlager Polka
6
5
Black Funk
5
Country Ballad 2
5
Party Polka
7
6
Talkin' Jazz
6
Country 3/4
6
Alpen Ballade
8
7
Funky Sisters
7
Modern Country
7
Polka Pop
9
8
Rhythm & Blues
8
Country Pop
8
Bavarian Pop
10
9
Blues
9
Bar Country
9
ClassicSchlager1
11
10
Soul
10
Bluegrass
10
ClassicSchlager2
12
11
Gospel
11
Country Boogie
11
ClassicSchlager3
13
12
Gospel Swing
12
Country Shuffle 1
12
Organ Evergreens
14
13
Gospel Shuffle
13
Country Shuffle 2
13
Schlager Rhumba
15
14
Modern Gospel 1
14
Country 8 Beat
14
SchlagerShuffle1
16
15
Modern Gospel 2
15
Country 16 Beat
15
SchlagerShuffle2
17
16
Al Swing
16
16
Dance Schlager
18
17
Groove
17
17
Fox Schlager
19
18
Groove Funk
18
18
Medium Schlager
20
19
Jazz Funk
19
19
Disco Schlager
21
20
Motown Shuffle 1
20
20
Pop Schlager
22
21
Motown Shuffle 2
21
21
Alpen Rock
23
22
22
22
Rock Schlager
24
23
23
23
Volkst. Schlager
25
24
24
24
Country Schlager
26
25
25
25
Schlager 1
27
26
26
26
Schlager 2
28
27
27
27
Schlager 3
29
28
28
28
Schlager 4
30
29
29
29
Caribbean
31
30
30
30
Samba Medley
32
31
31
31
Party Mix
Appendix
#
277
278
Factory data
Styles
#
CC0
CC32
PC
1
0
9
Bank: World 2
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Latin
CC0
CC32
PC
0
10
0
11
Bank: Latin Dance
0
Hawaiian
0
Guitar Bossa
0
Brazilian Samba
2
1
Flamenco 4/4
1
Basic Bossa
1
Sambalegre
3
2
Flamenco 3/4
2
Cool Bossa
2
Samba
4
3
Banda 2/4
3
Meditation Bossa
3
Samba De Sol
5
4
Mexican Waltz
4
Fast Bossa 1
4
DiscoSamba
6
5
Celtic Dream
5
Fast Bossa 2
5
Mambo
7
6
Celtic Waltz
6
Orch. Bossa 1
6
Mambo 2000
8
7
Celtic Ballad
7
Orch. Bossa 2
7
Mambo Party
9
8
Scottish Reel
8
Modern Bossa
8
Salsa 1
10
9
Orchestral Waltz
9
Organ Bossa
9
Salsa 2
11
10
OrchestralBolero
10
Groove Bossa
10
Merengue 1
12
11
Minuetto
11
Natural Bossa
11
Merengue 2
13
12
Baroque
12
Cool Latin Jazz
12
Club Latin
14
13
New Age
13
Cha Cha 1
13
Gipsy Dance
15
14
Tarantella
14
Cha Cha 2
14
Rhumba
16
15
Raspa
15
Cha Cha 3
15
Cumbia
17
16
Orleans
16
Cuban Cha Cha
16
Calypso
18
17
Norteno
17
Pop Cha Cha
17
Lambada
19
18
Quebradita
18
Disco Cha Cha
18
Meneaito
20
19
Tejano
19
Latin Big Band
19
Macarena
21
20
Cajun
20
Latin Pop
20
Bomba
22
21
Zydeco
21
Lite Beguine
21
Tortura Dance
23
22
Mariachi
22
Beguine
22
Sabor
24
23
Hora
23
Bachata
23
Andean
25
24
9/8
24
Latin Bolero
24
Reggae 1
26
25
Vahde
25
Bayon
25
Reggae 2
27
26
2/4 Oyun
26
Habanera
26
28
27
Ciftetelli
27
Guajira
29
28
Halay
28
28
30
29
5/8
29
29
31
30
Oryantal
30
30
32
31
Turkish Pop
31
27
31
#
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Jazz
CC0
CC32
PC
Bank: Trad(itional)
CC0
CC32
PC
1
0
12
0
Bigger Band
0
13
0
German Waltz 1
0
14
0
2
1
Medium BigBand1
1
3
2
Medium BigBand2
4
3
Fast Big Band 1
5
4
6
Bank: Movie & Show
Hollywood 1
German Waltz 2
1
Hollywood 2
2
German Waltz 3
2
Broadway
3
Vienna Waltz
3
Show Time
Fast Big Band 2
4
Italian Waltz
4
The Avalon
5
Serenade Band
5
Musette Waltz
5
Tap Dance
7
6
Jazz Club
6
French Waltz
6
Movie Ballad
8
7
BeBop
7
Irish Waltz
7
Movie Swing
9
8
Slow Swing Brush
8
Laendler Waltz
8
Safari Swing
10
9
Swing Ballad 1
9
German Polka
9
Western Movie
11
10
Swing Ballad 2
10
Italian Polka 1
10
Mystery Man
12
11
Swing Ballad 3
11
Italian Polka 2
11
Cartoon Time
13
12
Orchestral Swing
12
Italian Polka 3
12
Horror Movie
14
13
Django
13
Italian Mazurka 1
13
Love Movie
15
14
Jazz Brush
14
Italian Mazurka 2
14
Cinema Ballad
16
15
Soft Jazz
15
Italian Mazurka 3
15
Love Ballad
17
16
Jazzy Blues
16
March
16
Christmas Waltz
18
17
70's Beat Groove
17
French March
17
Chrismas Swing
19
18
Organ Swing
18
18
Theatre Swing
20
19
Organ Blues
19
19
Theatre March
21
20
50's Swing
20
20
Army Band
22
21
Medium Swing
21
21
23
22
Vocal Swing
22
22
24
23
Moon Swing
23
23
25
24
Jazz Waltz 1
24
24
26
25
Jazz Waltz 2
25
25
27
26
5/4 Swing
26
26
28
27
Stride
27
27
29
28
Dixieland
28
28
30
29
Charleston
29
29
31
30
30
30
32
31
31
31
Factory data
Styles
CC0
CC32
1
0
15
PC
Bank: Unplug(ged)
CC0
CC32
0
16
PC
Bank: Contemp(orary)
CC0
CC32
0
17
PC
Bank: User 1
0
Unplugged Ballad 1
0
Funky R&B
0
8 Beat Standard
2
1
Unplugged Ballad 2
1
AM : PM
1
16 Beat Standard
3
2
Unplugged Ballad 3
2
Little Boy
2
Rock Cha Cha
4
3
Unplugged Slow
3
Island View
3
Cha Cha
5
4
Desert Shuffle
4
Karma
4
Salsa
6
5
Serenade
5
Smooth Jazz
5
Bachata
7
6
Unplugged
6
Slow & jazzy
6
Rhumba
8
7
Meditando
7
Take beat
7
Flamenco
9
8
Unplugged Gtr 1
8
Swing HipHop
8
Modern Tango
10
9
Unplugged Gtr 2
9
Slow HipHop
9
Paso Dance
11
10
Unplugged Gtr 3
10
Hip Hindi Hop
10
Slow Waltz
12
11
Unplugged Gtr 4
11
Soft HipHop
11
Jive
13
12
Unplugged 8 Bt
12
HipHop Funk
12
Quick Step
14
13
Unplugged 16 Bt
13
Elektro Funk
13
Slow Fox
15
14
Slide Blues
14
Jazzy PopFunk
14
Reggaeton
16
15
Unplugged Rock
15
Pop Funk
15
Pop Ska
17
16
Unplugged Latin
16
Elektro Pop
16
Vocal Latin
18
17
Unplugged Swing
17
Modern Latin
17
Vocal Pop
19
18
Unplugged 3/4
18
Folk Beat
18
Cool Vocal
20
19
Acoustic Bld.3/4
19
Wave Jazz
19
Vocal Jazz
21
20
20
Little Shuffle
20
Orchestral Movie
22
21
21
21
Orchestral Bld
23
22
22
22
Ballad 6/8
24
23
23
23
Modern Ballad
25
24
24
24
Pop Rock Hit
26
25
25
25
Dance Hit
27
26
26
26
28
27
27
27
29
28
28
28
30
29
29
29
31
30
30
30
32
31
31
31
#
CC0
CC32
PC
1
0
18
0
Bank; User 2
CC0
CC32
PC
0
19
0
Bank: User 3
CC0
CC32
PC
0
20-29
0
2
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
4
3
3
3
5
4
4
4
6
5
5
5
7
6
6
6
8
7
7
7
9
8
8
8
10
9
9
9
11
10
10
10
12
11
11
11
13
12
12
12
14
13
13
13
15
14
14
14
16
15
15
15
17
16
16
16
18
17
17
17
19
18
18
18
20
19
19
19
21
20
20
20
22
21
21
21
23
22
22
22
24
23
23
23
25
24
24
24
26
25
25
25
27
26
26
26
28
27
27
27
29
28
28
28
30
29
29
29
31
30
30
30
32
31
31
31
Bank: Favorite 1~10
Appendix
#
279
280
Factory data
Style Elements
Style Elements
Note: You can remotely select the various Style Elements on the Pa2X, by sending it Program Change messages on the Control channel (see
“MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230).
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
80
Intro 1
81
Intro 2
82
Intro 3/Count In
83
Variation 1
84
Variation 2
85
Variation 3
86
Variation 4
87
Fill 1
88
Fill 2
89
Fill 3/Break
90
Ending 1
91
Ending 2
92
Ending 3
Note: The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0-127 numbering system.
Style and Player controls
Note: You can remotely send various commands to the Style and Player of the Pa2X, by sending it Program Change messages on the Control
channel (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230).
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
93
Fade In/Out
94
Memory
95
Bass Inversion
96
Manual Bass
97
Tempo Lock
98
Single Touch
99
Style Change
100
Start/Stop (Style)
101
Play/Stop (Ply 1)
102
Play/Stop (Ply 2)
Note: The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0-127 numbering system.
Single Touch Settings (STS)
Note: You can remotely select Single Touch Settings (STS) on the Pa2X, by sending it Bank Select MSB (CC#0), Bank Select LSB (CC#32)
and Program Change messages on the Control channel (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230). If a Style is already selected, just send
the Program Change message.
CC#0
CC#32
The same as the Style to which the STS belongs
PC
STS
PC
STS
PC
STS
PC
STS
64
STS 1
65
STS 2
66
STS 3
67
STS 4
Note: The above Control Change and Program Change numbers are given according to the 0-127 numbering system.
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
Name
The following table lists all Pa2X Factory Sounds as they appear
in the Banks accessed by pressing the SOUND buttons on the
control panel.
Legend: The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select
the Sounds. CC00: Control Change 0, or Bank Select MSB. CC32:
Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC: Program Change.
Bank: Sound/Performance Select button.
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Bank: Piano
Grand Piano RX
121
10
0
Grand Piano
121
3
0
Bright Piano GM
121
0
1
Grand&MovingPad
121
9
0
E.Grand Piano GM
121
0
2
Honky-Tonk GM
121
0
3
Harpsi KeyOff RX
121
3
6
Clav RX
121
5
7
AcousticPiano GM
121
0
0
Classic Piano
121
4
0
Jazz Piano
121
5
0
Piano & Strings
121
7
0
M1 Piano
121
2
2
Honky Wide
121
1
3
Harpsi 16' RX
121
5
6
Synth Clav RX
121
6
7
Bright Piano RX
121
5
1
Rock Piano
121
8
0
Ac. Piano Wide
121
1
0
Ac. Piano Dark
121
2
0
90's Piano
121
3
2
2000's Piano
121
4
2
CC00
CC32
Classic Wurly 1
121
17
PC
4
FM Pad E.P.
121
15
5
Tine E.Piano
121
19
4
Studio EP
121
7
4
Suit E.Piano 2
121
21
4
Dyno Tine EP 1
121
10
4
Stereo Dig. EP
121
6
5
Classic Dig. EP
121
7
5
Classic Wurly 2
121
12
4
FM Stack E.P.
121
16
5
Thin E. Piano
121
9
4
Pro Dyno EP
121
5
4
Pro Stage EP
121
6
4
Dyno Tine EP 2
121
22
4
Hybrid EP
121
8
5
Phantom Tine
121
10
5
Soft Wurly
121
13
4
White Pad EP
121
13
5
E. Piano 1 GM
121
0
4
R&B E. Piano
121
8
4
Bell E. Piano 1
121
23
4
Bell E. Piano 2
121
24
4
E. Piano 2 GM
121
0
5
DW8000 EP
121
11
5
Tremolo Wurly
121
16
4
Sweeping EP
121
12
5
Detuned EP 1
121
1
4
60's E. Piano
121
3
4
EP1 Veloc.sw
121
2
4
Syn Piano X
121
5
5
Detuned EP 2
121
1
5
EP2 Veloc.sw
121
2
5
Hard Wurly
121
14
4
EP Phase
121
4
5
Vel. Wurly
121
15
4
EP Legend
121
3
5
EP+Damper1 DNC
121
25
4
EP+Damper2 DNC
121
26
4
Harpsichord GM
121
0
6
Clav GM
121
0
7
Bright PianoWide
121
1
1
Piano & Pad
121
4
1
Piano Pad 1
121
2
1
Vibraphone 1 GM
121
0
11
1
Vibraphone 2
121
2
11
121
3
11
Piano Pad 2
121
3
Bank: Mallet & Bell
E. Grand Wide
121
1
2
Vibraphone 3
Grand&FM Stack
121
7
2
Vibrap. Wide
121
1
11
Harpsi Octave
121
1
6
Marimba GM
121
0
12
Clav Wah RX
121
2
7
Marimba Wide
121
1
12
Chorus Piano
121
5
2
Marimba Key Off
121
2
12
Piano Layers
121
6
2
Monkey Skuls
121
3
12
Piano & Vibes
121
6
0
Xylophone GM
121
0
13
6
Balaphon
121
6
12
121
0
8
Harpsi Wide
121
2
Harpsi Korg
121
4
6
Celesta GM
Pulse Clav
121
1
7
Glockenspiel GM
121
0
9
Clav Snap
121
3
7
Music Box GM
121
0
10
Sticky Clav
121
4
7
Sistro
121
1
9
Grand RX DEMO
121
11
0
Orgel
121
1
10
Digi Bell
121
4
98
Steel Drums GM
121
0
114
Warm Steel
121
1
114
Vs Bell Boy
121
2
98
Tubular Bell GM
121
0
14
Church Bell 1
121
1
14
Church Bell 2
121
3
14
Krystal Bell
121
3
98
Bank: E. Piano
Tine E.Piano RX
121
18
4
Club E. Piano
121
11
4
Suit E.Piano 1
121
20
4
Vintage EP
121
4
4
Dig. E. Piano
121
14
5
Classic Tines
121
9
5
Appendix
Sounds (Bank order)
281
282
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Tinkle Bell GM
121
0
112
Perc. Organ 3
121
10
17
Carillon
121
2
14
Perc. Organ 4 V.
121
9
17
Dulcimer GM
121
0
15
Perc. Organ 5 V.
121
11
17
Santur
121
1
15
Classic Click
121
4
18
Kalimba GM
121
0
108
Perc.Short Decay
121
8
18
Kalimba 2
121
1
108
BX3 Rock 1 V.
121
10
16
Mallet Clock
121
5
12
BX3 Rock 2 V.
121
1
18
Gamelan
121
1
112
BX3 Rock 3 V.
121
5
18
Bali Gamelan
121
2
112
BX3 Rock 4V.
121
12
18
Garbage Mall
121
3
112
Rock Organ GM
121
0
18
Rock Organ 2
121
11
18
Dirty B
121
3
18
Killer B
121
2
18
BX3 Full V.
121
6
16
BX3 Jazz V.
121
20
16
BX3 Jazz Pc. V.
121
9
18
BX3 Short Decay
121
7
17
Super BX Perc.
121
6
18
BX3 Gospel V.
121
21
16
Gospel Organ V.
121
13
16
Gospel Organ
121
9
16
Drawbars Slow V.
121
19
16
Drawbars Fast V.
121
18
16
Drawbars Org. GM
121
0
16
Drawbar Org. 2
121
3
16
Bank: Accordion
Harmonica AT 1
Harmonica AT 2
121
121
3
4
22
22
Harmonica GM
121
0
22
Cassotto 16’
121
12
21
Cassotto
Master Accordion
Accordion 16,8,4'
121
121
121
9
23
3
21
21
23
Sweet Musette
121
11
21
Sweet Harmonica
121
1
22
Harmonica 2
121
2
22
Cassotto Or.Tune
121
13
21
Cassotto NorTune
121
14
21
Acc.Clarinet OT
121
19
21
Acc. Clarinet NT
121
20
21
Acc. Piccolo OT
121
21
21
Acc. Piccolo NT
121
22
21
Accordion16,8'
121
2
23
Acc.16,8,4' Plus
121
8
23
French Musette
121
18
21
2 Voices Musette
121
16
21
3 Voices Musette
121
17
21
Detune Accordion
121
15
21
Fisa Master
Fisa 16,8'
Accordion16,4'
Fisa 16,4'
Musette Clar.
Musette 1
Musette 2
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
8
6
7
7
5
3
4
21
21
23
21
21
21
21
Accordion GM
121
0
21
Tango Accord. GM
121
0
23
Tango Accordion2
Fisa Tango!
Akordeon
Accordion 2
Accordion 3
Acc.16,8' & Bass
121
121
121
121
121
121
10
1
2
1
24
4
23
23
21
21
21
23
Acc. & Acc. Bass
121
9
23
Accordion Bass
121
5
23
Arabic Accordion
121
10
21
Steirisch.Akk.1
121
25
21
Steirisch.Akk.2
121
26
21
Steirisch.Akk.3
121
27
21
Steirisch.Akk.4
121
28
21
Acc.Voice Change
121
6
23
Harmonica DNC
121
5
22
Bank: Organ
Det.DrawbarsOrg.
121
1
16
Drawbars Organ
121
14
16
Old Wheels
121
3
17
Jazz Organ
121
8
16
Organ Low Pc. V.
121
4
17
Organ Low 1 V.
121
4
16
Organ Low 2 V.
121
15
16
Organ Mid V.
121
16
16
Organ Hi V.
121
17
16
Dark Organ 1 V.
121
7
16
Dark Organ 2 V.
121
5
16
Rotary Organ
121
8
17
Pipe Tutti 1
121
6
19
Pipe Tutti 2
121
8
19
Pipe Tutti 3
121
9
19
Pipe Tutti 4
121
10
19
Church Organ GM
121
0
19
Church Pipes
121
4
19
Church Oct. Mix
121
1
19
Full Pipes
121
5
19
Pipe Mixture
121
3
19
Pipe Flute 1
121
4
20
Pipe Flute 2
121
5
20
Flauto Pipes
121
3
20
Small Pipe
121
2
20
Puff Organ
121
1
20
Positive Organ
121
7
19
Detuned Church
121
2
19
Reed Organ GM
121
0
20
Det. Perc. Organ
121
1
17
VOX Legend
121
11
16
It. 60's Organ
121
2
16
M1 Organ
121
5
17
Dirty Jazz Organ
121
7
18
Jimmy Organ V.
121
10
18
Arabian Organ
121
12
16
Perc. Organ GM
121
0
17
Big Theatre Org.
121
30
16
Perc. Organ 2
121
2
17
Theatre Organ 1
121
22
16
Name
283
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
Theatre Organ 2
121
23
16
Guitar Strings
121
7
PC
24
Theatre Organ 3
121
24
16
Steel & Body
121
3
25
Theatre Organ 4
121
25
16
Pop Steel Slide
121
23
25
Tibia
121
26
16
Finger Key Off
121
7
25
Tibia 16/8/4'
121
27
16
Clean Jazz 2
121
23
27
Tibia & Vox
121
28
16
Tel. Middle
121
26
27
Post Horn Trem.
121
29
16
Clean Funk
121
8
28
Tibia & Kinura
121
31
16
Wet Dist. Guitar
121
6
30
Tibia Vox Glock
121
32
16
Mandolin
121
2
25
Jimmy Organ DNC
121
13
18
Mandolin Key Off
121
10
25
Mandolin Trem.
121
11
25
Mandolin Ens. 1
121
26
25
Mandolin Ens. 2
121
27
25
Banjo GM
121
0
105
Bank: Digi Organ
Digital Drawbars
121
127
16
Bank: Guitar
Nylon Gtr Pro1
121
8
24
Banjo Key Off
121
1
105
Nylon Slide Pro
121
14
24
Banjo RX
121
4
105
Steel Guitar Pro
121
19
25
Sitar GM
121
0
104
12 Strings Pro
121
17
25
Sitar 2
121
1
104
Soft Jazz Guitar
121
5
26
Sitar Tambou
121
2
104
Single Coil Pro
121
14
27
Sitar Sitar
121
7
104
5th Mute Gtr
121
21
28
Indian Stars
121
3
104
Stereo Dist.Gtr
121
8
30
Indian Frets
121
4
104
Nylon Gtr Pro2
121
11
24
Tambra
121
6
104
Nylon Vel. Harm.
121
10
24
Ukulele
121
1
24
Pop Steel Gtr 1
121
21
25
Bouzouki
121
5
104
Steel 12 String
121
5
25
Kanoun 1
121
5
107
JazzGtr SlidePro
121
6
26
Kanoun 2
121
2
107
Solid Guitar
121
21
27
Kanoun Trem. 1
121
6
107
Clean Funk RX1
121
10
28
Kanoun Trem. 2
121
3
107
Dist. Guitar RX1
121
9
30
Kanoun Mix
121
4
107
Nylon Bossa
121
4
24
Oud 1
121
5
105
Spanish Guitar
121
6
24
Oud 2
121
2
105
Steel Slide Pro1
121
13
25
Ac. Baglama 1
121
7
107
12 Strings Gtr
121
1
25
Ac. Baglama 2
121
8
107
Club Jazz Gtr 1
121
2
26
Ac. Baglama Grp.
121
9
107
Clean Guitar 2
121
20
27
Shamisen GM
121
0
106
Funk Stein RX1
121
12
28
Koto GM
121
0
107
Dist. Guitar RX2
121
10
30
Taisho Koto
121
1
107
Nylon Guitar GM
121
0
24
Finger Tips
121
8
25
Nylon Key Off
121
2
24
Hackbrett
121
6
25
Steel Guitar GM
121
0
25
Reso. Guitar
121
12
25
Pop Steel Gtr 2
121
22
25
Country Nu
121
11
27
Club Jazz Gtr 2
121
3
26
Pedal Steel Gtr1
121
1
26
Vintage S.1
121
19
27
Pedal Steel Gtr2
121
4
26
Clean Mute Gtr
121
6
28
Jazz Man
121
3
28
Distortion GtrGM
121
0
30
Tel. Bridge
121
27
27
Nylon Guitar 2
121
15
24
54 E. Guitar
121
24
27
Ac.Guitar KeyOff
121
5
24
Guitarish
121
8
27
Steel Guitar 3
121
20
25
Mid Tone Gtr
121
2
27
Steel Guitar 2
121
4
25
Single Coil
121
6
27
Clean Jazz 1
121
22
27
Stra. Vel. Pro
121
16
27
Clean Gtr Pro1
121
13
27
Stra. Gtr Slide
121
17
27
Muted Guitar GM
121
0
28
Stra. Chime
121
5
28
Dist. Clean Gtr
121
11
30
New Stra.Guitar
121
7
27
Nylon Guitar 3
121
3
24
Clean Guitar GM
121
0
27
Brazilian Guitar
121
9
24
Clean Gtr Pro2
121
15
27
Steel Folk Gtr
121
9
25
Clean Guitar 3
121
25
27
Steel Slide Pro2
121
14
25
Det. Clean Gtr
121
1
27
29
Jazz Guitar GM
121
0
26
Soft Overdrive
121
2
Chorus Gtr Pro
121
18
27
Chorus Guitar
121
3
27
Mute Vel. Gtr
121
2
28
Vintage S.2
121
4
27
Overdrive Gtr GM
121
0
29
Proces.E.Guitar
121
5
27
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
284
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
L&R E.Guitar 1
121
9
27
Violin Expr. 2
121
4
PC
40
L&R E.Guitar 2
121
10
27
Viola Expr.
121
1
41
R&R Guitar
121
4
28
Ensemble & Solo
121
11
48
Funky Cut Gtr
121
1
28
Movie Strings 2
121
6
49
Rhythm E.Guitar
121
7
28
Analog Strings 2
121
2
50
Muted Guitar 2
121
19
28
i3 Strings
121
5
48
E.Gtr Harmonics
121
2
31
Oh-Ah Voices
121
9
52
Solo Dist.Guitar
121
7
30
Femal&Male Scat
121
14
52
Dist. Steel Gtr
121
12
30
Slow Violin
121
3
40
Gtr Harmonic GM
121
0
31
Strings Quartet
121
9
48
Feedback Guitar
121
1
30
Full Strings
121
2
49
Guitar Pinch
121
1
29
Stereo Strings
121
3
48
Power Chords
121
4
30
Master Pad
121
2
89
48
Joystick Gtr Y-
121
3
30
N Strings
121
6
Mute Monster
121
5
30
Take Voices 1
121
4
52
Disto Mute
121
9
28
Scat V.& Bass2
121
18
52
Dist.Rhytmic Gtr
121
2
30
Slow Att.Violin
121
1
40
Guitar Feedback
121
1
31
Chamber Strings
121
12
48
Nylon Gtr RX1
121
12
24
Arco Strings
121
7
48
Nylon Gtr RX2
121
13
24
Legato Strings
121
4
48
Steel Guitar RX1
121
15
25
Sweeper Strings
121
1
49
Steel Guitar RX2
121
16
25
Symphonic Bows
121
10
48
12 Strings RX
121
18
25
Ooh Slow Voice
121
3
52
Pop SteelGtr RX1
121
24
25
Scat Voices RX
121
19
52
Pop SteelGtr RX2
121
25
25
Orchestra Tutti1
121
14
48
Vox Wah Chick RX
121
3
120
Orchestra Tutti2
121
19
48
Funky Wah RX
121
12
27
Orch. & Oboe 1
121
16
48
Clean Funk RX2
121
11
28
Orch. & Oboe 2
121
17
48
Funk Stein RX2
121
13
28
Strings & Horns
121
15
48
Clean Guitar RX1
121
14
28
Orchestra&Flute
121
20
48
Clean Guitar RX2
121
15
28
Strings & Glock.
121
18
48
Clean Guitar RX3
121
16
28
Spiccato Strings
121
4
49
Clean Guitar RX4
121
17
28
Violin GM
121
0
40
Clean Guitar RX5
121
18
28
Viola GM
121
0
41
Clean Guitar RX6
121
20
28
Cello GM
121
0
42
RealNylon Gtr ST
121
16
24
Contrabass GM
121
0
43
Real Nylon Gtr
121
17
24
Tremolo Str. GM
121
0
44
RealSteel Gtr ST
121
28
25
Harp GM
121
0
46
RealFolk Gtr ST1
121
29
25
Pizzicato Str.GM
121
0
45
RealFolk Gtr ST2
121
30
25
Pizz. Ensemble
121
1
45
Real Steel Gtr
121
31
25
Pizz. Section
121
2
45
Real Folk Gtr
121
32
25
Double Strings
121
3
45
Real 12 Strings
121
33
25
Octave Strings
121
8
48
Real El. Gtr ST1
121
28
27
60's Strings
121
2
48
Real El.Gtr ST2
121
29
27
Strings Ens.1 GM
121
0
48
Real El. Guitar1
121
30
27
Strings Ens.2 GM
121
0
49
Real El. Guitar2
121
31
27
Strings Ens. 3
121
21
48
Nylon Guitar DNC
121
18
24
Strings Ens. 4
121
3
49
Natural Nylon DNC
121
19
24
Synth Strings1GM
121
0
50
RealFolk Gtr DNC
121
34
25
Synth Strings2GM
121
0
51
Steel Gtr DNC
121
35
25
Synth Strings 3
121
1
50
Jazz Guitar DNC
121
7
26
Synth Strings 4
121
6
50
Crunch Gtr DNC
121
3
29
Synth Strings 5
121
1
51
Strings & Brass
121
1
48
Arabic Strings
121
13
48
Fiddle GM
121
0
110
Male Scat
121
16
52
Femal Scat
121
15
52
Take Voices 2
121
5
52
Aah Choir
121
7
52
Choir Aahs GM
121
0
52
Choir Aahs 2
121
1
52
Bank: Strings & Vocal
Violin Expr. 1
121
2
40
Violin & Viola
121
2
41
Concert Str.RX
Movie Strings 1
Analog Strings 1
Strings Ens. RX
Wuuh Choir
Scat V.& Bass1
121
121
121
121
121
121
23
5
5
22
8
17
48
49
50
48
52
52
Name
285
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
Grand Choir
121
11
52
Bright Trombone
121
2
PC
57
Slow Choir
121
10
52
Trombone 3
121
12
57
Voice Oohs GM
121
0
53
Trumpet GM
121
0
56
Ooh Choir
121
6
52
Trumpet 2
121
14
56
Ooh Voices
121
2
52
BeBop Cornet
121
9
56
Choir Light
121
12
52
Flugel Horn
121
7
56
Synth Voice GM
121
0
54
Trumpet Shake Y+
121
18
56
56
Synth Voices 2
121
6
54
Mono Trumpet
121
3
Cyber Choir
121
2
85
Dark Trumpet
121
1
56
Odissey
121
4
50
Trumpet Pitch
121
5
56
58
Voice Lead GM
121
0
85
Tuba GM
121
0
Choir Pad GM
121
0
91
Tuba Gold
121
2
58
Halo Pad GM
121
0
94
Oberkr. Tuba
121
1
58
Full Vox Pad
121
9
91
Dynabone
121
3
58
Strings Choir
121
13
52
Ob.Tuba & E.Bass 1
121
4
58
Analog Velve
121
3
50
Ob.Tuba & E.Bass 2
121
5
58
Vocalesque
121
2
54
Trumpet DNC
121
24
56
Fresh Breath
121
7
91
Cornet DNC
121
25
56
Ether Voices
121
1
85
Trombone DNC
121
13
57
Dream Voice
121
5
54
Bank: Brass
Humming
121
1
53
Big Band Brass 1
121
32
61
Analog Voice
121
1
54
Big Band Brass 2
121
4
61
Tight Brass 1
121
27
61
Tight Brass 2
121
29
61
Tight Brass Pro
121
28
61
Big BandShake Y+
121
33
61
Trumpet Ens1 Y+
121
35
61
Trumpet Ens2 Y+
121
36
61
Trumpet Ens.
121
9
61
Trpts &Trombs
121
34
61
Trombone Ens.
121
10
61
Trombones
121
11
61
Classic Vox
121
4
54
Doolally
121
2
53
Vocalscape
121
3
54
Heaven
121
3
91
Airways
121
3
53
Yang Chin
121
1
46
Movie Str.1 DNC
121
7
49
Movie Str.2 DNC
121
8
49
Scat Voices DNC
121
20
52
Bank: Trumpet & Trbn.
Trumpet Expr.1
121
15
56
Trpts & Brass
121
7
61
Trumpet Expr.2
121
4
56
Fat Brass
121
13
61
Cornet Expr.
121
21
56
Dyna Brass 1
121
14
61
Sweet FlugelHorn
121
12
56
Dyna Brass 2
121
22
61
Trombone Expr. 1
121
6
57
Glen & Friends
121
3
61
Trombone Vel. 1
121
8
57
Glen & Boys
121
6
61
Hard Trombone
121
3
57
Sax & Brass
121
5
61
Wah Trumpet
121
2
59
Brass & Sax
121
16
61
Trumpet Pro 1
121
10
56
Mute Ensemble 1
121
3
59
Cornet Pro 1
121
22
56
Mute Ensemble 2
121
4
59
Trumpet Overb.
121
2
56
Flute Muted
121
6
73
Flugel Horn Pro
121
13
56
Double Brass
121
24
61
Trombone Expr. 2
121
7
57
French Horn GM
121
0
60
60
Trombone Vel. 2
121
9
57
French Horn 2
121
1
Trombone Pro Vel
121
11
57
French Section
121
2
60
Mute Trumpet GM
121
0
59
Horns & Ensemble
121
4
60
Trumpet Pro 2
121
11
56
Classic Horns
121
3
60
Trumpet Pro 3
121
16
56
Attack Brass
121
8
61
Cornet Pro 2
121
23
56
Brass of Power
121
30
61
Warm Flugel
121
8
56
Sforzato Brass
121
23
61
Pitch Trombone
121
5
57
Brass Section GM
121
0
61
Trombone Vel. 3
121
10
57
Brass Section 2
121
1
61
Soft Trombone
121
4
57
Power Brass
121
21
61
Mute Trumpet 2
121
1
59
Brass Expr.
121
15
61
Concert Trumpet
121
19
56
Film Brass
121
17
61
Concert Trp.Pro
121
20
56
Movie Brass
121
20
61
Alp Trumpet
121
17
56
Brass Slow
121
18
61
Dual Trumpets
121
6
56
Fanfare
121
19
61
Trombone GM
121
0
57
Synth Brass 1GM
121
0
62
Trombone 2
121
1
57
Synth Brass 2GM
121
0
63
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
286
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
Synth Brass 3
121
1
62
Clarinet Pro 1
121
8
PC
71
Synth Brass 4
121
1
63
Oboe GM
121
0
68
Synth Brass 5
121
5
62
Whistle RX1
121
3
78
Synth Brass 6
121
5
63
Pan Flute GM
121
0
75
Analog Brass 1
121
2
62
Nay
121
2
72
Analog Brass 2
121
2
63
Jazz Flute Expr.
121
1
73
Electrik Brass
121
4
62
Flute Dyn. 5th
121
3
73
Jump Brass
121
3
62
Flute GM
121
0
73
Brass Pad
121
3
63
Clarinet Pro 2
121
9
71
Brass Section 3
121
31
61
Bassoon GM
121
0
70
Orchestra Hit GM
121
0
55
Whistle RX2
121
4
78
Brass Fall
121
26
61
Old Shakuhachi
121
1
77
Tight Brass 3
121
2
61
HighlandBagPipes
121
3
109
Tight Brass 4
121
12
61
Flute 2
121
9
73
Brass Impact
121
4
55
Wooden Flute
121
7
73
Brass Hit
121
25
61
Piccolo GM
121
0
72
Euro Hit
121
3
55
Jazz Clarinet
121
1
71
Bass Hit Plus
121
1
55
Double Reed
121
1
68
Netherland Hit
121
8
55
Whistle Breathe
121
2
78
6th Hit
121
2
55
Blown Bottle GM
121
0
76
Bambu Flute
121
8
73
Orchestra Flute
121
5
73
Woodwinds
121
6
71
Small Orchestra
121
1
72
Clarinet Ens.
121
5
71
Section Winds 1
121
3
71
Bank: Sax
Alto Sax Expr.
121
9
65
Alto Sax RX
121
10
65
Tenor Sax Noise1
121
1
66
Tenor Sax Noise2
121
6
66
Sweet Soprano 1
121
3
64
Soprano Pro
121
2
64
Baritone Sax Pro
121
3
67
Breathy Baritone
121
2
67
Sweet Alto Sax 1
Soft Alto Sax
Tenor Sax Expr.1
Jazz Tenor 1
121
121
121
121
5
7
7
9
65
65
66
66
Sweet Soprano 2
121
4
64
Sweet Soprano 3
121
1
64
Baritone Sax GM
121
0
67
Baritone Sax 2
121
4
67
Alto Sax Pro
121
8
65
Sweet Alto Sax 2
121
6
65
Alto Sax GM
121
0
65
Alto Breath
121
1
65
Tenor Sax Expr.2
Jazz Tenor 2
Tenor Breath
121
121
121
8
10
3
66
66
66
Tenor Sax GM
121
0
66
Breathy Alto Sax
121
3
65
Alto Sax Growl
121
4
65
Soft Tenor
121
2
66
Tenor Growl
121
4
66
Folk Sax
121
5
66
Soprano Sax GM
Baritone Growl
121
121
0
1
64
67
Cool Sax Ens.
121
11
65
Sax Ensemble
121
2
65
Section Winds 2
121
4
71
Reeds & Saxes
121
10
71
Shanai GM
121
0
111
English Horn GM
121
0
69
English Horn 2
121
1
69
Clarinet GM
121
0
71
Folk Clarinet
121
7
71
Recorder GM
121
0
74
Recorder 2
121
1
74
Whistle GM
121
0
78
Whistle 2
121
1
78
Bag Pipes GM
121
0
109
Uillean BagPipes
121
2
109
War Pipes
121
1
109
Ocarina GM
121
0
79
Kawala
121
1
75
Shakuhachi GM
121
0
77
Shakuhachi 2
121
2
77
Hichiriki
121
2
111
Clarinet GM
121
0
71
Klarnet 1
121
11
71
Klarnet 2
121
12
71
Zurna 1
121
3
111
Zurna 2
121
1
111
Flute Click
121
1
121
Clarinet DNC
121
13
71
Flute DNC
121
11
73
Whistle DNC
121
5
78
Reed of Power
121
11
66
Bank: Synth 1
Alto Sax DNC
121
12
65
The Pad
121
4
89
Tenor Sax DNC
121
12
66
Dark Pad
121
6
89
Analog Pad 1
121
8
89
Analog Pad 2
121
9
89
Vintage Pad
121
11
89
Bank: Woodwind
Flute Switch
121
2
73
Jazz Flute RX
121
10
73
Flute Frullato
121
4
73
OB Pad
121
12
89
Dark Anna
121
13
89
Name
287
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Symphonic Ens.
121
14
89
Wild Arp
121
6
55
Future Pad
121
5
91
Express. Lead
121
5
87
Air Clouds
121
1
97
HipHop Lead
121
6
87
Tinklin Pad
121
3
97
Analog Lead
121
7
80
Pods In Pad
121
4
97
Seq Lead
121
7
81
Vintage Sweep
121
7
95
Old & Analog
121
8
80
You Decide
121
8
95
Phat Saw Lead
121
8
81
Korgmatose
121
13
90
Glide Lead
121
9
81
Reoccuring Astra
121
6
95
Gliding Square
121
9
80
Money Pad
121
5
89
Flip Blip
121
7
55
Tsunami Wave
121
6
91
Power Synth
121
3
89
Ravelian Pad
121
8
91
Sine Switch
121
10
80
Astral Dream
121
1
95
Reso Sweep
121
1
90
Meditate
121
2
95
Synth Sweeper
121
3
90
Reso Down
121
2
97
Cosmic
121
1
93
Sky Watcher
121
2
90
Motion Raver
121
1
101
Super Sweep
121
4
90
Sync Kron
121
3
84
Wave Sweep
121
5
90
Fire Wave
121
10
81
Cross Sweep
121
6
90
Digital PolySix
121
7
90
Digi Ice Pad
121
2
101
A Leadload
121
11
87
Crimson 5ths
121
1
86
Noisy Stabb
121
8
90
Freedom Pad
121
7
89
Mega Synth
121
9
90
90
Noble Pad
121
5
97
Tecno Phonic
121
10
Mellow Pad
121
4
95
Dark Element
121
3
95
Lonely Spin
121
1
100
Band Passed
121
3
102
Cinema Pad
121
5
95
Cat Lead
121
9
87
Virtual Traveler
121
1
88
Pan Reso
121
4
102
Synth Ghostly
121
2
100
Square Rez
121
11
80
Motion Ocean
121
1
96
Rezbo
121
11
81
Moon Cycles
121
5
102
Auto Pilot 1
121
14
38
Farluce
121
11
90
Metallic Rez
121
4
84
Bell Pad
121
6
98
Square Bass
121
7
87
Bell Choir
121
7
98
Synth Pianoid
121
12
81
Warm Pad GM
121
0
89
Brian Sync
121
5
84
Sweep Pad GM
121
0
95
Arp Twins
121
6
84
Soundtrack GM
121
0
97
Arp Angeles
121
2
88
Sine Pad
121
1
89
Big & Raw
121
8
87
Itopia Pad
121
1
91
Caribbean
121
2
96
Big Panner
121
4
63
Lead Square GM
121
0
80
Dance ReMix
121
10
91
Lead Saw GM
121
0
81
Rave
121
6
97
Calliope GM
121
0
82
Elastick Pad
121
7
97
Chiff GM
121
0
83
84
Moving Bell
121
5
98
Charang GM
121
0
Analog Pad 3
121
10
89
Fifths Lead GM
121
0
86
Big Sweep Stab
121
12
90
Bass & Lead GM
121
0
87
Fresh Air 1
121
2
91
New Age Pad GM
121
0
88
Fresh Air 2
121
11
91
Polysynth GM
121
0
90
Pop Synth Pad 1
121
4
91
Bowed Glass GM
121
0
92
Pop Synth Pad 2
121
12
91
Metallic Pad GM
121
0
93
80's Pop Synth
121
2
93
Crystal GM
121
0
98
Wave Cycle DNC
121
3
96
Atmosphere GM
121
0
99
Brightness GM
121
0
100
Lead Square 2
121
1
80
Lead Sine
121
2
80
Lead Saw 2
121
1
81
Lead Saw Pulse
121
2
81
Lead Double Saw
121
3
81
Seq. Analog
121
4
81
Wire Lead
121
1
84
Bank: Synth 2
Old Portamento
Power Saw
121
121
3
5
80
81
Octo Lead
121
6
81
Electro Lead
121
2
87
Rich Lead
Thin Analog Lead
121
121
3
4
87
87
Dance Lead
121
4
80
Wave Lead
121
5
80
Sine Wave
121
6
80
Synchro City
121
2
84
Soft Wrl
121
1
87
OB Lead
121
10
87
LoFi Ethnic
121
7
84
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
288
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Port Whine
121
12
80
Bass4 Da Phunk
121
14
39
2VCO Planet Lead
121
13
80
Syn Bass Warm
121
1
38
VCF Modulation
121
3
101
Syn Bass Reso
121
2
38
Dark R&B Bass1
121
4
35
Bank: Bass
Acous. Bass Pro1
121
3
32
Jazz Bass
121
9
32
Finger Bass GM
121
0
33
Finger Bass 2
The Other Slap
121
121
6
5
33
37
Finger Slap 1
121
12
33
Pick Bass 1
121
7
34
Fretless Bass GM
Acous. Bass Pro2
121
121
0
4
35
32
Acoustic Bass GM
121
0
32
Finger Bass 3
121
7
33
Finger Bass 4
121
10
33
Super Bass 1
121
1
36
Super Bass 2
Pick Bass 2
121
121
2
8
36
34
Sweet Fretless
121
3
35
Bass & Ride 1
121
6
32
Acoustic Bass 2
121
8
32
Finger Bass 5
121
15
33
Bright Finger B.
121
9
33
Slap Bass 1 GM
121
0
36
Slap Bass 2 GM
121
0
37
Picked E.Bass GM
121
0
34
Fretless Bass 2
121
1
35
Bass & Ride 2
121
2
32
Ac. Bass Buzz
Finger E.Bass1
Finger E.Bass2
121
121
121
1
2
3
32
33
33
Slap Bass 3
121
6
36
Slap Bass 4
121
6
37
Picked E.Bass 4
Fretless Bass 3
DarkWoody A.Bass
121
121
121
11
2
5
34
35
32
More mid! Bass
121
11
33
Chorus Fing.Bass
121
8
33
Finger E.Bass3
121
4
33
Woofer Pusher B.
121
6
35
Attack Bass
121
1
39
Rubber Bass
121
2
39
Dr. Octave
121
16
38
Monofilter Bass
121
11
39
Synth Bass 80ish
121
9
39
Reso Bass
121
12
39
Autofilter Bass
121
10
39
Drive Bass
121
17
38
Nasty Bass
121
6
39
30303 Bass
121
5
38
Stein Bass
121
3
34
Euro Bass
121
4
39
Jungle Rez
121
5
39
30303 Square
121
6
38
Bass Square
121
7
38
Phat Bass
121
7
39
Syn Bass Res
121
8
38
Clav Bass
121
3
38
Hammer
121
4
38
Attack Pulse
121
3
39
Digi Bass 1
121
9
38
Blind as a Bat
121
12
38
Poinker Bass
121
8
39
Digi Bass 3
121
11
38
Jungle Bass
121
13
38
Hybrid Bass
121
15
38
Digi Bass 2
121
10
38
Techno Org.Bass
121
6
17
Organ Pedal 1
121
10
32
Organ Pedal 2
121
11
32
Acous. Bass RX
121
7
32
Finger Bass RX
121
13
33
SlapFing Bass RX
121
4
36
Picked Bass RX
121
10
34
SlapPick Bass RX
121
5
36
FunkSlap Bass RX
121
3
36
Finger Bass DNC
121
16
33
Slap Bass 5
121
7
37
Bank: Drum & Perc.
Dyna Slap Bass
121
3
37
Standard Kit RX1
120
0
5
Chorus Slap Bass
121
4
37
Standard Kit RX2
120
0
1
Dyna Bass
121
2
37
Standard Kit RX3
120
0
2
Finger Slap 2
121
1
33
Standard Kit RX4
120
0
6
Thumb Bass
121
1
37
Ambient Kit RX
120
0
3
Picked E.Bass 2
121
1
34
Pop Std. Kit RX
120
0
4
Ticktacing Bass
121
9
34
Electro Kit RX1
120
0
75
Picked E.Bass 3
121
2
34
Electro Kit RX2
120
0
76
Bass Mute
121
5
34
Brush Kit RX1
120
0
42
43
Fretless Bass 4
121
7
35
Brush Kit RX2
120
0
Synth Bass 1 GM
121
0
38
Brush Kit RX3
120
0
44
Synth Bass 2 GM
121
0
39
Hip Hop Kit RX
120
0
72
Synth Bass 3
121
18
38
Jazz Kit RX1
120
0
33
Synth Bass 4
121
15
39
Jazz Kit RX2
120
0
34
Stick Bass
121
5
33
Jazz Kit RX3
120
0
35
Dark R&B Bass2
121
5
35
Techno Kit RX
120
0
73
Bass&Gtr Double
121
6
34
House Kit RX1
120
0
30
FingerB.& Guitar
121
14
33
House Kit RX2
120
0
31
Bass & Guitar
121
4
34
Power Kit RX1
120
0
18
Auto Pilot 2
121
13
39
Power Kit RX2
120
0
19
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Dance Kit RX
120
0
74
Bank: SFX
Analog Kit
120
0
123
Jungle Kit
120
0
10
Electro Kit
120
0
122
Standard Kit 1
120
0
7
Bdrum&Sdrum Kit
120
0
50
Room Kit 1
120
0
120
Room Kit 2
120
0
12
Power Kit 1
120
0
121
Power Kit 2
120
0
17
HipHop Kit 1
120
0
9
HipHop Kit 2
120
0
13
Techno Kit 1
120
0
11
Techno Kit 2
120
0
14
Techno Kit 3
120
0
15
House Kit 1
120
0
26
House Kit 2
120
0
27
House Kit 3
120
0
28
Brush Kit 1
120
0
125
Brush Kit 2
120
0
41
Pop Std. Kit 1
120
0
89
Pop Std. Kit 2
120
0
90
Elektro Kit 1
120
0
96
Elektro Kit 2
120
0
97
Arabian Kit 1
120
0
51
Arabian Kit 2
120
0
117
Turkish Kit
120
0
118
Oriental PercKit
120
0
119
Standard Kit GM
120
0
0
Room Kit GM
120
0
8
Power Kit GM
120
0
16
Electro Kit GM
120
0
24
Analog Kit GM
120
0
25
Jazz Kit GM
120
0
32
Brush Kit GM
120
0
40
Orchestra Kit GM
120
0
48
SFX Kit GM
120
0
56
SFX Kit 2
120
0
57
Percussion Kit
120
0
64
Latin Perc. Kit1
120
0
65
Latin Perc. Kit2
120
0
68
Trinity Perc.Kit
120
0
66
i30 Perc. Kit
120
0
67
Synth Kit
120
0
58
Timpani GM
121
0
47
Agogo GM
121
0
113
Log Drum
121
4
12
Woodblock GM
121
0
115
Castanets
121
1
115
Taiko Drum GM
121
0
116
Concert BassDrum
121
1
116
Melodic Tom GM
121
0
117
Melodic Tom 2
121
1
117
Reverse Tom
121
2
117
Synth Drum GM
121
0
118
Rhythm Box Tom
121
1
118
Electric Drum
121
2
118
Reverse Snare
121
3
118
Reverse CymbalGM
121
0
119
Reverse Cymbal 2
121
2
119
Dragon Gong
121
1
119
CC00
CC32
289
PC
Goblins GM
121
0
101
Echo Drops GM
121
0
102
Star Theme GM
121
0
103
Gtr FretNoise GM
121
0
120
Breath Noise GM
121
0
121
Seashore GM
121
0
122
Bird Tweet GM
121
0
123
Ac. Bass String
121
2
120
Telephone GM
121
0
124
Helicopter GM
121
0
125
Applause GM
121
0
126
Gun Shot GM
121
0
127
Synth Mallet
121
1
98
Echo Bell
121
1
102
Echo Pan
121
2
102
Guitar Cut Noise
121
1
120
Rain
121
1
122
Thunder
121
2
122
Wind
121
3
122
Stream
121
4
122
Bubble
121
5
122
Dog
121
1
123
Horse Gallop
121
2
123
Bird Tweet 2
121
3
123
Telephone 2
121
1
124
Door Creak
121
2
124
Door
121
3
124
Scratch
121
4
124
Wind Chime
121
5
124
Car Engine
121
1
125
Car Stop
121
2
125
Car Pass
121
3
125
Car Crash
121
4
125
Siren
121
5
125
Train
121
6
125
Jet Plane
121
7
125
Starship
121
8
125
Burst Noise
121
9
125
Laughing
121
1
126
Screaming
121
2
126
Punch
121
3
126
Heart Beat
121
4
126
Footsteps
121
5
126
Machine Gun
121
1
127
Laser Gun
121
2
127
Explosion
121
3
127
Ice Rain GM
121
0
96
Jaw Harp
121
3
105
Hit in India
121
5
55
Stadium
121
6
126
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Bank order)
290
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
Sounds (Program Change order)
The following table lists all Pa2X Factory Sounds in order of
Bank Select-Program Change number.
Legend: The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select
the Sounds. CC00: Control Change 0, or Bank Select MSB. CC32:
Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC: Program Change.
Bank: Sound/Performance Select button.
CC00
CC32
PC
121
23
4
Name
Bank
Bell E. Piano 1
E.Piano
121
24
4
Bell E. Piano 2
E.Piano
121
25
4
EP+Damper1 DNC
E.Piano
121
26
4
EP+Damper2 DNC
E.Piano
121
0
5
E. Piano 2 GM
E.Piano
√
121
1
5
Detuned EP 2
E.Piano
√
121
2
5
EP2 Veloc.sw
E.Piano
√
121
3
5
EP Legend
E.Piano
√
121
4
5
EP Phase
E.Piano
√
121
5
5
Syn Piano X
E.Piano
E.Piano
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
GM2
121
6
5
Stereo Dig. EP
121
0
0
AcousticPiano GM
Piano
√
121
7
5
Classic Dig. EP
E.Piano
121
1
0
Ac. Piano Wide
Piano
√
121
8
5
Hybrid EP
E.Piano
121
2
0
Ac. Piano Dark
Piano
√
121
9
5
Classic Tines
E.Piano
10
5
Phantom Tine
E.Piano
GM2
121
3
0
Grand Piano
Piano
121
121
4
0
Classic Piano
Piano
121
11
5
DW8000 EP
E.Piano
121
5
0
Jazz Piano
Piano
121
12
5
Sweeping EP
E.Piano
121
6
0
Piano & Vibes
Piano
121
13
5
White Pad EP
E.Piano
121
7
0
Piano & Strings
Piano
121
14
5
Dig. E. Piano
E.Piano
121
8
0
Rock Piano
Piano
121
15
5
FM Pad E.P.
E.Piano
121
9
0
Grand&MovingPad
Piano
121
16
5
FM Stack E.P.
E.Piano
121
10
0
Grand Piano RX
Piano
121
5
22
Harmonica DNC
Accordion
Piano
121
0
6
Harpsichord GM
Piano
√
1
6
Harpsi Octave
Piano
√
121
11
0
Grand RX DEMO
121
0
1
Bright Piano GM
Piano
√
121
121
1
1
Bright PianoWide
Piano
√
121
2
6
Harpsi Wide
Piano
√
121
2
1
Piano Pad 1
Piano
√
121
3
6
Harpsi KeyOff RX
Piano
√
121
3
1
Piano Pad 2
Piano
121
4
6
Harpsi Korg
Piano
121
4
1
Piano & Pad
Piano
121
5
6
Harpsi 16' RX
Piano
121
5
1
Bright Piano RX
Piano
121
0
7
Clav GM
Piano
√
121
0
2
E.Grand Piano GM
Piano
√
121
1
7
Pulse Clav
Piano
√
√
121
2
7
Clav Wah RX
Piano
Piano
121
1
2
E. Grand Wide
Piano
121
2
2
M1 Piano
Piano
121
3
7
Clav Snap
121
3
2
90's Piano
Piano
121
4
7
Sticky Clav
Piano
121
4
2
2000's Piano
Piano
121
5
7
Clav RX
Piano
121
5
2
Chorus Piano
Piano
121
6
7
Synth Clav RX
Piano
121
6
2
Piano Layers
Piano
121
0
8
Celesta GM
Mallet & Bell
√
121
7
2
Grand&FM Stack
Piano
121
0
9
Glockenspiel GM
Mallet & Bell
√
121
0
3
Honky-Tonk GM
Piano
√
121
1
9
Sistro
Mallet & Bell
121
1
3
Honky Wide
Piano
√
121
0
10
Music Box GM
Mallet & Bell
1
10
Orgel
Mallet & Bell
√
121
0
4
E. Piano 1 GM
E.Piano
√
121
121
1
4
Detuned EP 1
E.Piano
√
121
0
11
Vibraphone 1 GM
Mallet & Bell
√
121
2
4
EP1 Veloc.sw
E.Piano
√
121
1
11
Vibrap. Wide
Mallet & Bell
√
121
3
4
60's E. Piano
E.Piano
√
121
2
11
Vibraphone 2
Mallet & Bell
121
4
4
Vintage EP
E.Piano
121
3
11
Vibraphone 3
Mallet & Bell
121
5
4
Pro Dyno EP
E.Piano
121
0
12
Marimba GM
Mallet & Bell
√
121
6
4
Pro Stage EP
E.Piano
121
1
12
Marimba Wide
Mallet & Bell
√
2
12
Marimba Key Off
Mallet & Bell
121
7
4
Studio EP
E.Piano
121
121
8
4
R&B E. Piano
E.Piano
121
3
12
Monkey Skuls
Mallet & Bell
121
9
4
Thin E. Piano
E.Piano
121
4
12
Log Drum
Drum & Perc.
121
10
4
Dyno Tine EP 1
E.Piano
121
5
12
Mallet Clock
Mallet & Bell
121
11
4
Club E. Piano
E.Piano
121
6
12
Balaphon
Mallet & Bell
121
12
4
Classic Wurly 2
E.Piano
121
0
13
Xylophone GM
Mallet & Bell
121
13
4
Soft Wurly
E.Piano
121
13
18
Jimmy Organ DNC
Organ
121
14
4
Hard Wurly
E.Piano
121
0
14
Tubular Bell GM
Mallet & Bell
√
E.Piano
121
1
14
Church Bell 1
Mallet & Bell
√
2
14
Carillon
Mallet & Bell
√
121
15
4
Vel. Wurly
√
121
16
4
Tremolo Wurly
E.Piano
121
121
17
4
Classic Wurly 1
E.Piano
121
3
14
Church Bell 2
Mallet & Bell
121
18
4
Tine E.Piano RX
E.Piano
121
0
15
Dulcimer GM
Mallet & Bell
121
19
4
Tine E.Piano
E.Piano
121
1
15
Santur
Mallet & Bell
121
20
4
Suit E.Piano 1
E.Piano
121
0
16
Drawbars Org. GM
Organ
√
121
21
4
Suit E.Piano 2
E.Piano
121
1
16
Det.DrawbarsOrg.
Organ
√
121
22
4
Dyno Tine EP 2
E.Piano
121
2
16
It. 60's Organ
Organ
√
√
291
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
GM2
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
3
16
Drawbar Org. 2
Organ
√
121
7
19
Positive Organ
Organ
121
4
16
Organ Low 1 V.
Organ
121
8
19
Pipe Tutti 2
Organ
121
5
16
Dark Organ 2 V.
Organ
121
9
19
Pipe Tutti 3
Organ
121
6
16
BX3 Full V.
Organ
121
10
19
Pipe Tutti 4
Organ
121
7
16
Dark Organ 1 V.
Organ
121
0
20
Reed Organ GM
Organ
√
121
8
16
Jazz Organ
Organ
121
1
20
Puff Organ
Organ
√
121
9
16
Gospel Organ
Organ
121
2
20
Small Pipe
Organ
121
10
16
BX3 Rock 1 V.
Organ
121
3
20
Flauto Pipes
Organ
121
11
16
VOX Legend
Organ
121
4
20
Pipe Flute 1
Organ
121
12
16
Arabian Organ
Organ
121
5
20
Pipe Flute 2
Organ
121
13
16
Gospel Organ V.
Organ
121
0
21
Accordion GM
Accordion
√
121
14
16
Drawbars Organ
Organ
121
1
21
Accordion 2
Accordion
√
121
15
16
Organ Low 2 V.
Organ
121
2
21
Akordeon
Accordion
121
16
16
Organ Mid V.
Organ
121
3
21
Musette 1
Accordion
121
17
16
Organ Hi V.
Organ
121
4
21
Musette 2
Accordion
121
18
16
Drawbars Fast V.
Organ
121
5
21
Musette Clar.
Accordion
121
19
16
Drawbars Slow V.
Organ
121
6
21
Fisa 16,8'
Accordion
121
20
16
BX3 Jazz V.
Organ
121
7
21
Fisa 16,4'
Accordion
121
21
16
BX3 Gospel V.
Organ
121
8
21
Fisa Master
Accordion
121
22
16
Theatre Organ 1
Organ
121
9
21
Cassotto
Accordion
121
23
16
Theatre Organ 2
Organ
121
10
21
Arabic Accordion
Accordion
121
24
16
Theatre Organ 3
Organ
121
11
21
Sweet Musette
Accordion
121
25
16
Theatre Organ 4
Organ
121
12
21
Cassotto 16'
Accordion
121
26
16
Tibia
Organ
121
13
21
Cassotto Or.Tune
Accordion
121
27
16
Tibia 16/8/4'
Organ
121
14
21
Cassotto NorTune
Accordion
121
28
16
Tibia & Vox
Organ
121
15
21
Detune Accordion
Accordion
121
29
16
Post Horn Trem.
Organ
121
16
21
2 Voices Musette
Accordion
121
30
16
Big Theatre Org.
Organ
121
17
21
3 Voices Musette
Accordion
121
31
16
Tibia & Kinura
Organ
121
18
21
French Musette
Accordion
121
32
16
Tibia Vox Glock
Organ
121
19
21
Acc.Clarinet OT
Accordion
121
0
17
Perc. Organ GM
Organ
√
121
20
21
Acc. Clarinet NT
Accordion
121
1
17
Det. Perc. Organ
Organ
√
121
21
21
Acc. Piccolo OT
Accordion
121
2
17
Perc. Organ 2
Organ
√
121
22
21
Acc. Piccolo NT
Accordion
121
3
17
Old Wheels
Organ
121
23
21
Master Accordion
Accordion
121
4
17
Organ Low Pc. V.
Organ
121
24
21
Accordion 3
Accordion
121
5
17
M1 Organ
Organ
121
25
21
Steirisch.Akk.1
Accordion
121
6
17
Techno Org.Bass
Bass
121
26
21
Steirisch.Akk.2
Accordion
121
7
17
BX3 Short Decay
Organ
121
27
21
Steirisch.Akk.3
Accordion
121
8
17
Rotary Organ
Organ
121
28
21
Steirisch.Akk.4
Accordion
121
9
17
Perc. Organ 4 V.
Organ
121
0
22
Harmonica GM
Accordion
121
10
17
Perc. Organ 3
Organ
121
1
22
Sweet Harmonica
Accordion
121
11
17
Perc. Organ 5 V.
Organ
121
2
22
Harmonica 2
Accordion
121
0
18
Rock Organ GM
Organ
121
3
22
Harmonica AT 1
Accordion
121
1
18
BX3 Rock 2 V.
Organ
121
4
22
Harmonica AT 2
Accordion
121
2
18
Killer B
Organ
121
0
23
Tango Accord. GM
Accordion
121
3
18
Dirty B
Organ
121
1
23
Fisa Tango!
Accordion
121
4
18
Classic Click
Organ
121
2
23
Accordion 16,8'
Accordion
121
5
18
BX3 Rock 3 V.
Organ
121
3
23
Accordion16,8,4'
Accordion
121
6
18
Super BX Perc.
Organ
121
4
23
Acc.16,8' & Bass
Accordion
121
7
18
Dirty Jazz Organ
Organ
121
5
23
Accordion Bass
Accordion
121
8
18
Perc.Short Decay
Organ
121
6
23
Acc.Voice Change
Accordion
121
9
18
BX3 Jazz Pc. V.
Organ
121
7
23
Accordion 16,4'
Accordion
121
10
18
Jimmy Organ V.
Organ
121
8
23
Acc.16,8,4' Plus
Accordion
121
11
18
Rock Organ 2
Organ
121
9
23
Acc. & Acc. Bass
Accordion
121
12
18
BX3 Rock 4 V.
Organ
121
10
23
Tango Accordion2
Accordion
121
0
19
Church Organ GM
Organ
√
121
0
24
Nylon Guitar GM
Guitar
√
121
1
19
Church Oct. Mix
Organ
√
121
1
24
Ukulele
Guitar
√
121
2
19
Detuned Church
Organ
√
121
2
24
Nylon Key Off
Guitar
√
121
3
19
Pipe Mixture
Organ
121
3
24
Nylon Guitar 3
Guitar
√
121
4
19
Church Pipes
Organ
121
4
24
Nylon Bossa
Guitar
121
5
19
Full Pipes
Organ
121
5
24
Ac.Guitar KeyOff
Guitar
121
6
19
Pipe Tutti 1
Organ
121
6
24
Spanish Guitar
Guitar
√
GM2
√
√
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
292
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
7
24
Guitar Strings
Guitar
GM2
121
5
27
Proces.E.Guitar
Guitar
GM2
121
8
24
Nylon Gtr Pro1
Guitar
121
6
27
Single Coil
Guitar
121
9
24
Brazilian Guitar
Guitar
121
7
27
New Stra.Guitar
Guitar
121
10
24
Nylon Vel. Harm.
Guitar
121
8
27
Guitarish
Guitar
121
11
24
Nylon Gtr Pro2
Guitar
121
9
27
L&R E.Guitar 1
Guitar
121
12
24
Nylon Gtr RX1
Guitar
121
10
27
L&R E.Guitar 2
Guitar
121
13
24
Nylon Gtr RX2
Guitar
121
11
27
Country Nu
Guitar
121
14
24
Nylon Slide Pro
Guitar
121
12
27
Funky Wah RX
Guitar
121
15
24
Nylon Guitar 2
Guitar
121
13
27
Clean Gtr Pro1
Guitar
121
16
24
RealNylon Gtr ST
Guitar
121
14
27
Single Coil Pro
Guitar
121
17
24
Real Nylon Gtr
Guitar
121
15
27
Clean Gtr Pro2
Guitar
121
18
24
Nylon Guitar DNC
Guitar
121
16
27
Stra. Vel. Pro
Guitar
121
19
24
Natural Nylon DNC
Guitar
121
17
27
Stra. Gtr Slide
Guitar
121
0
25
Steel Guitar GM
Guitar
√
121
18
27
Chorus Gtr Pro
Guitar
121
1
25
12 Strings Gtr
Guitar
√
121
19
27
Vintage S.1
Guitar
121
2
25
Mandolin
Guitar
√
121
20
27
Clean Guitar 2
Guitar
121
3
25
Steel & Body
Guitar
√
121
21
27
Solid Guitar
Guitar
121
4
25
Steel Guitar 2
Guitar
121
22
27
Clean Jazz 1
Guitar
121
5
25
Steel 12 String
Guitar
121
23
27
Clean Jazz 2
Guitar
121
6
25
Hackbrett
Guitar
121
24
27
'54 E. Guitar
Guitar
121
7
25
Finger Key Off
Guitar
121
25
27
Clean Guitar 3
Guitar
121
8
25
Finger Tips
Guitar
121
26
27
Tel. Midddle
Guitar
121
9
25
Steel Folk Gtr
Guitar
121
27
27
Tel. Bridge
Guitar
121
10
25
Mandolin Key Off
Guitar
121
28
27
Real El. Gtr ST1
Guitar
121
11
25
Mandolin Trem.
Guitar
121
29
27
Real El.Gtr ST2
Guitar
121
12
25
Reso. Guitar
Guitar
121
30
27
Real El. Guitar1
Guitar
121
13
25
Steel Slide Pro1
Guitar
121
31
27
Real El. Guitar2
Guitar
121
14
25
Steel Slide Pro2
Guitar
121
0
28
Muted Guitar GM
Guitar
√
121
15
25
Steel Guitar RX1
Guitar
121
1
28
Funky Cut Gtr
Guitar
√
121
16
25
Steel Guitar RX2
Guitar
121
2
28
Mute Vel. Gtr
Guitar
√
121
17
25
12 Strings Pro
Guitar
121
3
28
Jazz Man
Guitar
√
121
18
25
12 Strings RX
Guitar
121
4
28
R&R Guitar
Guitar
121
19
25
Steel Guitar Pro
Guitar
121
5
28
Stra. Chime
Guitar
121
20
25
Steel Guitar 3
Guitar
121
6
28
Clean Mute Gtr
Guitar
121
21
25
Pop Steel Gtr 1
Guitar
121
7
28
Rhythm E.Guitar
Guitar
121
22
25
Pop Steel Gtr 2
Guitar
121
8
28
Clean Funk
Guitar
121
23
25
Pop Steel Slide
Guitar
121
9
28
Disto Mute
Guitar
121
24
25
Pop SteelGtr RX1
Guitar
121
10
28
Clean Funk RX1
Guitar
121
25
25
Pop SteelGtr RX2
Guitar
121
11
28
Clean Funk RX2
Guitar
121
26
25
Mandolin Ens. 1
Guitar
121
12
28
Funk Stein RX1
Guitar
121
27
25
Mandolin Ens. 2
Guitar
121
13
28
Funk Stein RX2
Guitar
121
28
25
RealSteel Gtr ST
Guitar
121
14
28
Clean Guitar RX1
Guitar
121
29
25
RealFolk Gtr ST1
Guitar
121
15
28
Clean Guitar RX2
Guitar
121
30
25
RealFolk Gtr ST2
Guitar
121
16
28
Clean Guitar RX3
Guitar
121
31
25
Real Steel Gtr
Guitar
121
17
28
Clean Guitar RX4
Guitar
121
32
25
Real Folk Gtr
Guitar
121
18
28
Clean Guitar RX5
Guitar
121
33
25
Real 12 Strings
Guitar
121
19
28
Muted Guitar 2
Guitar
121
34
25
RealFolk Gtr DNC
Guitar
121
20
28
Clean Guitar RX6
Guitar
121
35
25
Steel Gtr DNC
Guitar
121
21
28
5th Mute Gtr
Guitar
121
0
26
Jazz Guitar GM
Guitar
√
121
0
29
Overdrive Gtr GM
Guitar
√
121
1
26
Pedal Steel Gtr1
Guitar
√
121
1
29
Guitar Pinch
Guitar
√
121
2
26
Club Jazz Gtr 1
Guitar
121
2
29
Soft Overdrive
Guitar
121
3
26
Club Jazz Gtr 2
Guitar
121
3
29
Crunch Gtr DNC
Guitar
121
4
26
Pedal Steel Gtr2
Guitar
121
0
30
Distortion GtrGM
Guitar
√
121
5
26
Soft Jazz Guitar
Guitar
121
1
30
Feedback Guitar
Guitar
√
121
6
26
JazzGtr SlidePro
Guitar
121
2
30
Dist.Rhytmic Gtr
Guitar
√
121
7
26
Jazz Guitar DNC
Guitar
121
3
30
Joystick Gtr Y-
Guitar
121
0
27
Clean Guitar GM
Guitar
√
121
4
30
Power Chords
Guitar
121
1
27
Det. Clean Gtr
Guitar
√
121
5
30
Mute Monster
Guitar
121
2
27
Mid Tone Gtr
Guitar
√
121
6
30
Wet Dist. Guitar
Guitar
121
3
27
Chorus Guitar
Guitar
121
7
30
Solo Dist.Guitar
Guitar
121
4
27
Vintage S.2
Guitar
121
8
30
Stereo Dist.Gtr
Guitar
GM2
293
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
9
30
Dist. Guitar RX1
Guitar
121
6
36
Slap Bass 3
Bass
121
10
30
Dist. Guitar RX2
Guitar
121
0
37
Slap Bass 2 GM
Bass
121
11
30
Dist. Clean Gtr
Guitar
121
1
37
Thumb Bass
Bass
121
12
30
Dist. Steel Gtr
Guitar
121
2
37
Dyna Bass
Bass
121
0
31
Gtr Harmonic GM
Guitar
√
121
3
37
Dyna Slap Bass
Bass
121
1
31
Guitar Feedback
Guitar
√
121
4
37
Chorus Slap Bass
Bass
121
2
31
E.Gtr Harmonics
Guitar
121
5
37
The Other Slap
Bass
121
0
32
Acoustic Bass GM
Bass
121
6
37
Slap Bass 4
Bass
121
1
32
Ac. Bass Buzz
Bass
121
7
37
Slap Bass 5
Bass
121
2
32
Bass & Ride 2
Bass
121
0
38
Synth Bass 1 GM
Bass
√
121
3
32
Acous. Bass Pro1
Bass
121
1
38
Syn Bass Warm
Bass
√
121
4
32
Acous. Bass Pro2
Bass
121
2
38
Syn Bass Reso
Bass
√
121
5
32
DarkWoody A.Bass
Bass
121
3
38
Clav Bass
Bass
√
121
6
32
Bass & Ride 1
Bass
121
4
38
Hammer
Bass
√
121
7
32
Acous. Bass RX
Bass
121
5
38
30303 Bass
Bass
121
8
32
Acoustic Bass 2
Bass
121
6
38
30303 Square
Bass
121
9
32
Jazz Bass
Bass
121
7
38
Bass Square
Bass
121
10
32
Organ Pedal 1
Bass
121
8
38
Syn Bass Res
Bass
121
11
32
Organ Pedal 2
Bass
121
9
38
Digi Bass 1
Bass
121
0
33
Finger Bass GM
Bass
√
121
10
38
Digi Bass 2
Bass
121
1
33
Finger Slap 2
Bass
√
121
11
38
Digi Bass 3
Bass
121
2
33
Finger E.Bass1
Bass
121
12
38
Blind as a Bat
Bass
121
3
33
Finger E.Bass2
Bass
121
13
38
Jungle Bass
Bass
121
4
33
Finger E.Bass3
Bass
121
14
38
Auto Pilot 1
Synth 2
121
5
33
Stick Bass
Bass
121
15
38
Hybrid Bass
Bass
121
6
33
Finger Bass 2
Bass
121
16
38
Dr. Octave
Bass
121
7
33
Finger Bass 3
Bass
121
17
38
Drive Bass
Bass
121
8
33
Chorus Fing.Bass
Bass
121
18
38
Synth Bass 3
Bass
121
9
33
Bright Finger B.
Bass
121
0
39
Synth Bass 2 GM
Bass
√
121
10
33
Finger Bass 4
Bass
121
1
39
Attack Bass
Bass
√
121
11
33
More mid! Bass
Bass
121
2
39
Rubber Bass
Bass
√
121
12
33
Finger Slap 1
Bass
121
3
39
Attack Pulse
Bass
√
121
13
33
Finger Bass RX
Bass
121
4
39
Euro Bass
Bass
121
14
33
FingerB.& Guitar
Bass
121
5
39
Jungle Rez
Bass
121
15
33
Finger Bass 5
Bass
121
6
39
Nasty Bass
Bass
121
16
33
Finger Bass DNC
Bass
121
7
39
Phat Bass
Bass
121
0
34
Picked E.Bass GM
Bass
121
8
39
Poinker Bass
Bass
121
1
34
Picked E.Bass 2
Bass
121
9
39
Synth Bass 80ish
Bass
121
2
34
Picked E.Bass 3
Bass
121
10
39
Autofilter Bass
Bass
121
3
34
Stein Bass
Bass
121
11
39
Monofilter Bass
Bass
121
4
34
Bass & Guitar
Bass
121
12
39
Reso Bass
Bass
121
5
34
Bass Mute
Bass
121
13
39
Auto Pilot 2
Bass
121
6
34
Bass&Gtr Double
Bass
121
14
39
Bass4 Da Phunk
Bass
121
7
34
Pick Bass 1
Bass
121
15
39
Synth Bass 4
Bass
121
8
34
Pick Bass 2
Bass
121
0
40
Violin GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
9
34
Ticktacing Bass
Bass
121
1
40
Slow Att.Violin
Strings & Vocal
√
121
10
34
Picked Bass RX
Bass
121
2
40
Violin Expr. 1
Strings & Vocal
121
11
34
Picked E.Bass 4
Bass
121
3
40
Slow Violin
Strings & Vocal
121
0
35
Fretless Bass GM
Bass
121
4
40
Violin Expr. 2
Strings & Vocal
121
1
35
Fretless Bass 2
Bass
121
0
41
Viola GM
Strings & Vocal
121
2
35
Fretless Bass 3
Bass
121
1
41
Viola Expr.
Strings & Vocal
121
3
35
Sweet Fretless
Bass
121
2
41
Violin & Viola
Strings & Vocal
121
4
35
Dark R&B Bass1
Bass
121
0
42
Cello GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
5
35
Dark R&B Bass2
Bass
121
0
43
Contrabass GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
6
35
Woofer Pusher B.
Bass
121
0
44
Tremolo Str. GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
7
35
Fretless Bass 4
Bass
121
0
45
Pizzicato Str.GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
0
36
Slap Bass 1 GM
Bass
121
1
45
Pizz. Ensemble
Strings & Vocal
121
1
36
Super Bass 1
Bass
121
2
45
Pizz. Section
Strings & Vocal
121
2
36
Super Bass 2
Bass
121
3
45
Double Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
3
36
FunkSlap Bass RX
Bass
121
0
46
Harp GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
4
36
SlapFing Bass RX
Bass
121
1
46
Yang Chin
Strings & Vocal
√
121
5
36
SlapPick Bass RX
Bass
121
0
47
Timpani GM
Drum & Perc.
√
√
√
√
√
GM2
√
√
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
294
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
GM2
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
0
48
Strings Ens.1 GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
20
52
Scat Voices DNC
Strings & Vocal
121
1
48
Strings & Brass
Strings & Vocal
√
121
0
53
Voice Oohs GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
2
48
60's Strings
Strings & Vocal
√
121
1
53
Humming
Strings & Vocal
√
121
3
48
Stereo Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
2
53
Doolally
Strings & Vocal
121
4
48
Legato Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
3
53
Airways
Strings & Vocal
121
5
48
i3 Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
0
54
Synth Voice GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
6
48
N Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
1
54
Analog Voice
Strings & Vocal
√
121
7
48
Arco Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
2
54
Vocalesque
Strings & Vocal
121
8
48
Octave Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
3
54
Vocalscape
Strings & Vocal
121
9
48
Strings Quartet
Strings & Vocal
121
4
54
Classic Vox
Strings & Vocal
121
10
48
Symphonic Bows
Strings & Vocal
121
5
54
Dream Voice
Strings & Vocal
121
11
48
Ensemble & Solo
Strings & Vocal
121
6
54
Synth Voices 2
Strings & Vocal
121
12
48
Chamber Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
0
55
Orchestra Hit GM
Brass
√
121
13
48
Arabic Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
1
55
Bass Hit Plus
Brass
√
121
14
48
Orchestra Tutti1
Strings & Vocal
121
2
55
6th Hit
Brass
√
121
15
48
Strings & Horns
Strings & Vocal
121
3
55
Euro Hit
Brass
√
121
16
48
Orch. & Oboe 1
Strings & Vocal
121
4
55
Brass Impact
Brass
121
17
48
Orch. & Oboe 2
Strings & Vocal
121
5
55
Hit in India
SFX
121
18
48
Strings & Glock.
Strings & Vocal
121
6
55
Wild Arp
Synth 2
121
19
48
Orchestra Tutti2
Strings & Vocal
121
7
55
Flip Blip
Synth 2
121
20
48
Orchestra&Flute
Strings & Vocal
121
8
55
Netherland Hit
Brass
121
21
48
Strings Ens. 3
Strings & Vocal
121
0
56
Trumpet GM
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
22
48
Strings Ens. RX
Strings & Vocal
121
1
56
Dark Trumpet
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
23
48
Concert Str.RX
Strings & Vocal
121
2
56
Trumpet Overb.
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
0
49
Strings Ens.2 GM
Strings & Vocal
121
3
56
Mono Trumpet
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
1
49
Sweeper Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
4
56
Trumpet Expr.2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
2
49
Full Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
5
56
Trumpet Pitch
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
3
49
Strings Ens. 4
Strings & Vocal
121
6
56
Dual Trumpets
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
4
49
Spiccato Strings
Strings & Vocal
121
7
56
Flugel Horn
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
5
49
Movie Strings 1
Strings & Vocal
121
8
56
Warm Flugel
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
6
49
Movie Strings 2
Strings & Vocal
121
9
56
BeBop Cornet
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
7
49
Movie Str.1 DNC
Strings & Vocal
121
10
56
Trumpet Pro 1
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
8
49
Movie Str.2 DNC
Strings & Vocal
121
11
56
Trumpet Pro 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
0
50
Synth Strings1GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
12
56
Sweet FlugelHorn
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
1
50
Synth Strings 3
Strings & Vocal
√
121
13
56
Flugel Horn Pro
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
2
50
Analog Strings 2
Strings & Vocal
121
14
56
Trumpet 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
3
50
Analog Velve
Strings & Vocal
121
15
56
Trumpet Expr.1
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
4
50
Odissey
Strings & Vocal
121
16
56
Trumpet Pro 3
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
5
50
Analog Strings 1
Strings & Vocal
121
17
56
Alp Trumpet
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
6
50
Synth Strings 4
Strings & Vocal
121
18
56
Trumpet Shake Y+
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
0
51
Synth Strings2GM
Strings & Vocal
121
19
56
Concert Trumpet
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
1
51
Synth Strings 5
Strings & Vocal
121
20
56
Concert Trp.Pro
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
0
52
Choir Aahs GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
21
56
Cornet Expr.
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
1
52
Choir Aahs 2
Strings & Vocal
√
121
22
56
Cornet Pro 1
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
2
52
Ooh Voices
Strings & Vocal
121
23
56
Cornet Pro 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
3
52
Ooh Slow Voice
Strings & Vocal
121
24
56
Trumpet DNC
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
4
52
Take Voices 1
Strings & Vocal
121
25
56
Cornet DNC
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
5
52
Take Voices 2
Strings & Vocal
121
0
57
Trombone GM
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
6
52
Ooh Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
1
57
Trombone 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
7
52
Aah Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
2
57
Bright Trombone
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
8
52
Wuuh Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
3
57
Hard Trombone
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
9
52
Oh-Ah Voices
Strings & Vocal
121
4
57
Soft Trombone
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
10
52
Slow Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
5
57
Pitch Trombone
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
11
52
Grand Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
6
57
Trombone Expr. 1
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
12
52
Choir Light
Strings & Vocal
121
7
57
Trombone Expr. 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
13
52
Strings Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
8
57
Trombone Vel. 1
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
14
52
Femal&Male Scat
Strings & Vocal
121
9
57
Trombone Vel. 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
15
52
Femal Scat
Strings & Vocal
121
10
57
Trombone Vel. 3
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
16
52
Male Scat
Strings & Vocal
121
11
57
Trombone Pro Vel
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
17
52
Scat V.& Bass1
Strings & Vocal
121
12
57
Trombone 3
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
18
52
Scat V.& Bass2
Strings & Vocal
121
13
57
Trombone DNC
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
19
52
Scat Voices RX
Strings & Vocal
121
0
58
Tuba GM
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
√
GM2
√
GM2
295
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
1
58
Oberkr. Tuba
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
4
63
Big Panner
Synth 1
GM2
121
2
58
Tuba Gold
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
5
63
Synth Brass 6
Brass
121
3
58
Dynabone
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
0
64
Soprano Sax GM
Sax
121
4
58
Ob.Tuba & E.Bass 1
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
1
64
Sweet Soprano 3
Sax
121
5
58
Ob.Tuba & E.Bass 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
2
64
Soprano Pro
Sax
121
0
59
Mute Trumpet GM
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
3
64
Sweet Soprano 1
Sax
121
1
59
Mute Trumpet 2
Trumpet & Trbn.
√
121
4
64
Sweet Soprano 2
Sax
121
2
59
Wah Trumpet
Trumpet & Trbn.
121
0
65
Alto Sax GM
Sax
121
3
59
Mute Ensemble 1
Brass
121
1
65
Alto Breath
Sax
121
4
59
Mute Ensemble 2
Brass
121
2
65
Sax Ensemble
Sax
121
0
60
French Horn GM
Brass
√
121
3
65
Breathy Alto Sax
Sax
121
1
60
French Horn 2
Brass
√
121
4
65
Alto Sax Growl
Sax
121
2
60
French Section
Brass
121
5
65
Sweet Alto Sax 1
Sax
121
3
60
Classic Horns
Brass
121
6
65
Sweet Alto Sax 2
Sax
121
4
60
Horns & Ensemble
Brass
121
7
65
Soft Alto Sax
Sax
121
0
61
Brass Section GM
Brass
√
121
8
65
Alto Sax Pro
Sax
121
1
61
Brass Section 2
Brass
√
121
9
65
Alto Sax Expr.
Sax
121
2
61
Tight Brass 3
Brass
121
10
65
Alto Sax RX
Sax
121
3
61
Glen & Friends
Brass
121
11
65
Cool Sax Ens.
Sax
121
4
61
Big Band Brass 2
Brass
121
12
65
Alto Sax DNC
Sax
121
5
61
Sax & Brass
Brass
121
0
66
Tenor Sax GM
Sax
121
6
61
Glen & Boys
Brass
121
1
66
Tenor Sax Noise1
Sax
121
7
61
Trpts & Brass
Brass
121
2
66
Soft Tenor
Sax
121
8
61
Attack Brass
Brass
121
3
66
Tenor Breath
Sax
121
9
61
Trumpet Ens.
Brass
121
4
66
Tenor Growl
Sax
121
10
61
Trombone Ens.
Brass
121
5
66
Folk Sax
Sax
121
11
61
Trombones
Brass
121
6
66
Tenor Sax Noise2
Sax
121
12
61
Tight Brass 4
Brass
121
7
66
Tenor Sax Expr.1
Sax
121
13
61
Fat Brass
Brass
121
8
66
Tenor Sax Expr.2
Sax
121
14
61
Dyna Brass 1
Brass
121
9
66
Jazz Tenor 1
Sax
121
15
61
Brass Expr.
Brass
121
10
66
Jazz Tenor 2
Sax
121
16
61
Brass & Sax
Brass
121
11
66
Reed of Power
Sax
121
17
61
Film Brass
Brass
121
12
66
Tenor Sax DNC
Sax
121
18
61
Brass Slow
Brass
121
0
67
Baritone Sax GM
Sax
121
19
61
Fanfare
Brass
121
1
67
Baritone Growl
Sax
121
20
61
Movie Brass
Brass
121
2
67
Breathy Baritone
Sax
121
21
61
Power Brass
Brass
121
3
67
Baritone Sax Pro
Sax
121
22
61
Dyna Brass 2
Brass
121
4
67
Baritone Sax 2
Sax
121
23
61
Sforzato Brass
Brass
121
0
68
Oboe GM
Woodwind
121
24
61
Double Brass
Brass
121
1
68
Double Reed
Woodwind
121
25
61
Brass Hit
Brass
121
0
69
English Horn GM
Woodwind
121
26
61
Brass Fall
Brass
121
1
69
English Horn 2
Woodwind
121
27
61
Tight Brass 1
Brass
121
0
70
Bassoon GM
Woodwind
√
121
28
61
Tight Brass Pro
Brass
121
0
71
Clarinet GM
Woodwind
√
121
29
61
Tight Brass 2
Brass
121
1
71
Jazz Clarinet
Woodwind
121
30
61
Brass of Power
Brass
121
2
71
Clarinet G
Woodwind
121
31
61
Brass Section 3
Brass
121
3
71
Section Winds 1
Woodwind
121
32
61
Big Band Brass 1
Brass
121
4
71
Section Winds 2
Woodwind
121
33
61
Big BandShake Y+
Brass
121
5
71
Clarinet Ens.
Woodwind
121
34
61
Trpts &Trombs
Brass
121
6
71
Woodwinds
Woodwind
121
35
61
Trumpet Ens1 Y+
Brass
121
7
71
Folk Clarinet
Woodwind
121
36
61
Trumpet Ens2 Y+
Brass
121
8
71
Clarinet Pro 1
Woodwind
121
0
62
Synth Brass 1GM
Brass
√
121
9
71
Clarinet Pro 2
Woodwind
121
1
62
Synth Brass 3
Brass
√
121
10
71
Reeds & Saxes
Woodwind
121
2
62
Analog Brass 1
Brass
√
121
11
71
Klarnet 1
Woodwind
121
3
62
Jump Brass
Brass
√
121
12
71
Klarnet 2
Woodwind
121
4
62
Electrik Brass
Brass
121
13
71
Clarinet DNC
Woodwind
121
5
62
Synth Brass 5
Brass
121
0
72
Piccolo GM
Woodwind
121
0
63
Synth Brass 2GM
Brass
√
121
1
72
Small Orchestra
Woodwind
121
1
63
Synth Brass 4
Brass
√
121
2
72
Nay
Woodwind
121
2
63
Analog Brass 2
Brass
√
121
0
73
Flute GM
Woodwind
121
3
63
Brass Pad
Brass
121
1
73
Jazz Flute Expr.
Woodwind
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
296
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
2
73
Flute Switch
Woodwind
GM2
121
0
85
Voice Lead GM
Strings & Vocal
121
3
73
Flute Dyn. 5th
Woodwind
121
1
85
Ether Voices
Strings & Vocal
121
4
73
Flute Frullato
Woodwind
121
2
85
Cyber Choir
Strings & Vocal
121
5
73
Orchestra Flute
Woodwind
121
0
86
Fifths Lead GM
Synth 2
121
6
73
Flute Muted
Brass
121
1
86
Crimson 5ths
Synth 1
121
7
73
Wooden Flute
Woodwind
121
0
87
Bass & Lead GM
Synth 2
√
121
8
73
Bambu Flute
Woodwind
121
1
87
Soft Wrl
Synth 2
√
121
9
73
Flute 2
Woodwind
121
2
87
Electro Lead
Synth 2
121
10
73
Jazz Flute RX
Woodwind
121
3
87
Rich Lead
Synth 2
121
11
73
Flute DNC
Woodwind
121
4
87
Thin Analog Lead
Synth 2
121
0
74
Recorder GM
Woodwind
121
5
87
Express. Lead
Synth 2
121
1
74
Recorder 2
Woodwind
121
6
87
HipHop Lead
Synth 2
121
0
75
Pan Flute GM
Woodwind
121
7
87
Square Bass
Synth 2
121
1
75
Kawala
Woodwind
121
8
87
Big & Raw
Synth 2
121
0
76
Blown Bottle GM
Woodwind
√
121
9
87
Cat Lead
Synth 2
121
0
77
Shakuhachi GM
Woodwind
√
121
10
87
OB Lead
Synth 2
121
1
77
Old Shakuhachi
Woodwind
121
11
87
A Leadload
Synth 2
121
2
77
Shakuhachi 2
Woodwind
121
0
88
New Age Pad GM
Synth 2
121
0
78
Whistle GM
Woodwind
121
1
88
Virtual Traveler
Synth 1
121
1
78
Whistle 2
Woodwind
121
2
88
Arp Angeles
Synth 2
121
2
78
Whistle Breathe
Woodwind
121
0
89
Warm Pad GM
Synth 1
√
121
3
78
Whistle RX1
Woodwind
121
1
89
Sine Pad
Synth 1
√
121
4
78
Whistle RX2
Woodwind
121
2
89
Master Pad
Strings & Vocal
121
5
78
Whistle DNC
Woodwind
121
3
89
Power Synth
Synth 2
121
0
79
Ocarina GM
Woodwind
√
121
4
89
The Pad
Synth 1
121
0
80
Lead Square GM
Synth 2
√
121
5
89
Money Pad
Synth 1
121
1
80
Lead Square 2
Synth 2
√
121
6
89
Dark Pad
Synth 1
121
2
80
Lead Sine
Synth 2
√
121
7
89
Freedom Pad
Synth 1
121
3
80
Old Portamento
Synth 2
121
8
89
Analog Pad 1
Synth 1
121
4
80
Dance Lead
Synth 2
121
9
89
Analog Pad 2
Synth 1
121
5
80
Wave Lead
Synth 2
121
10
89
Analog Pad 3
Synth 1
121
6
80
Sine Wave
Synth 2
121
11
89
Vintage Pad
Synth 1
121
7
80
Analog Lead
Synth 2
121
12
89
OB Pad
Synth 1
121
8
80
Old & Analog
Synth 2
121
13
89
Dark Anna
Synth 1
121
9
80
Gliding Square
Synth 2
121
14
89
Symphonic Ens.
Synth 1
121
10
80
Sine Switch
Synth 2
121
0
90
Polysynth GM
Synth 2
121
11
80
Square Rez
Synth 2
121
1
90
Reso Sweep
Synth 2
121
12
80
Port Whine
Synth 2
121
2
90
Sky Watcher
Synth 1
121
13
80
2VCO Planet Lead
Synth 2
121
3
90
Synth Sweeper
Synth 2
121
0
81
Lead Saw GM
Synth 2
√
121
4
90
Super Sweep
Synth 1
121
1
81
Lead Saw 2
Synth 2
√
121
5
90
Wave Sweep
Synth 1
121
2
81
Lead Saw Pulse
Synth 2
√
121
6
90
Cross Sweep
Synth 1
121
3
81
Lead Double Saw
Synth 2
√
121
7
90
Digital PolySix
Synth 2
121
4
81
Seq. Analog
Synth 2
√
121
8
90
Noisy Stabb
Synth 2
121
5
81
Power Saw
Synth 2
121
9
90
Mega Synth
Synth 2
121
6
81
Octo Lead
Synth 2
121
10
90
Tecno Phonic
Synth 2
121
7
81
Seq Lead
Synth 2
121
11
90
Farluce
Synth 1
121
8
81
Phat Saw Lead
Synth 2
121
12
90
Big Sweep Stab
Synth 1
121
9
81
Glide Lead
Synth 2
121
13
90
Korgmatose
Synth 1
121
10
81
Fire Wave
Synth 2
121
0
91
Choir Pad GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
11
81
Rezbo
Synth 2
121
1
91
Itopia Pad
Synth 1
√
121
12
81
Synth Pianoid
Synth 2
121
2
91
Fresh Air 1
Synth 1
121
0
82
Calliope GM
Synth 2
√
121
3
91
Heaven
Strings & Vocal
121
0
83
Chiff GM
Synth 2
√
121
4
91
Pop Synth Pad 1
Synth 1
121
0
84
Charang GM
Synth 2
√
121
5
91
Future Pad
Synth 1
121
1
84
Wire Lead
Synth 2
√
121
6
91
Tsunami Wave
Synth 1
121
2
84
Synchro City
Synth 2
121
7
91
Fresh Breath
Strings & Vocal
121
3
84
Sync Kron
Synth 2
121
8
91
Ravelian Pad
Synth 1
121
4
84
Metallic Rez
Synth 2
121
9
91
Full Vox Pad
Strings & Vocal
121
5
84
Brian Sync
Synth 2
121
10
91
Dance ReMix
Synth 1
121
6
84
Arp Twins
Synth 2
121
11
91
Fresh Air 2
Synth 1
121
7
84
LoFi Ethnic
Synth 2
121
12
91
Pop Synth Pad 2
Synth 1
√
√
√
GM2
√
√
√
√
297
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
GM2
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
0
92
Bowed Glass GM
Synth 2
√
121
5
105
Oud 1
Guitar
121
0
93
Metallic Pad GM
Synth 2
√
121
0
106
Shamisen GM
Guitar
√
121
1
93
Cosmic
Synth 2
121
0
107
Koto GM
Guitar
√
121
2
93
80's Pop Synth
Synth 1
121
1
107
Taisho Koto
Guitar
√
121
0
94
Halo Pad GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
2
107
Kanoun 2
Guitar
121
0
95
Sweep Pad GM
Synth 1
√
121
3
107
Kanoun Trem. 2
Guitar
121
1
95
Astral Dream
Synth 1
121
4
107
Kanoun Mix
Guitar
121
2
95
Meditate
Synth 1
121
5
107
Kanoun 1
Guitar
121
3
95
Dark Element
Synth 2
121
6
107
Kanoun Trem. 1
Guitar
121
4
95
Mellow Pad
Synth 1
121
7
107
Ac. Baglama 1
Guitar
121
5
95
Cinema Pad
Synth 1
121
8
107
Ac. Baglama 2
Guitar
121
6
95
Reoccuring Astra
Synth 1
121
9
107
Ac. Baglama Grp.
Guitar
121
7
95
Vintage Sweep
Synth 1
121
0
108
Kalimba GM
Mallet & Bell
121
8
95
You Decide
Synth 1
121
1
108
Kalimba 2
Mallet & Bell
121
0
96
Ice Rain GM
SFX
121
0
109
Bag Pipes GM
Woodwind
121
1
96
Motion Ocean
Synth 1
121
1
109
War Pipes
Woodwind
121
2
96
Caribbean
Synth 2
121
2
109
Uillean BagPipes
Woodwind
121
3
96
Wave Cycle DNC
Synth 1
121
3
109
HighlandBagPipes
Woodwind
121
0
97
Soundtrack GM
Synth 1
121
0
110
Fiddle GM
Strings & Vocal
√
121
1
97
Air Clouds
Synth 1
121
0
111
Shanai GM
Woodwind
√
121
2
97
Reso Down
Synth 1
121
1
111
Zurna 2
Woodwind
121
3
97
Tinklin Pad
Synth 1
121
2
111
Hichiriki
Woodwind
121
4
97
Pods In Pad
Synth 1
121
3
111
Zurna 1
Woodwind
121
5
97
Noble Pad
Synth 1
121
0
112
Tinkle Bell GM
Mallet & Bell
121
6
97
Rave
Synth 1
121
1
112
Gamelan
Mallet & Bell
121
7
97
Elastick Pad
Synth 1
121
2
112
Bali Gamelan
Mallet & Bell
121
0
98
Crystal GM
Synth 2
√
121
3
112
Garbage Mall
Mallet & Bell
121
1
98
Synth Mallet
SFX
√
121
0
113
Agogo GM
Drum & Perc.
√
121
2
98
Vs Bell Boy
Mallet & Bell
121
0
114
Steel Drums GM
Mallet & Bell
√
121
3
98
Krystal Bell
Mallet & Bell
121
1
114
Warm Steel
Mallet & Bell
121
4
98
Digi Bell
Mallet & Bell
121
0
115
Woodblock GM
Drum & Perc.
√
121
5
98
Moving Bell
Synth 1
121
1
115
Castanets
Drum & Perc.
√
121
6
98
Bell Pad
Synth 1
121
0
116
Taiko Drum GM
Drum & Perc.
√
121
7
98
Bell Choir
Synth 1
121
1
116
Concert BassDrum
Drum & Perc.
√
121
0
99
Atmosphere GM
Synth 2
√
121
0
117
Melodic Tom GM
Drum & Perc.
√
121
0
100
Brightness GM
Synth 2
√
121
1
117
Melodic Tom 2
Drum & Perc.
√
121
1
100
Lonely Spin
Synth 1
121
2
117
Reverse Tom
Drum & Perc.
121
2
100
Synth Ghostly
Synth 1
121
0
118
Synth Drum GM
Drum & Perc.
√
121
0
101
Goblins GM
SFX
121
1
118
Rhythm Box Tom
Drum & Perc.
√
121
1
101
Motion Raver
Synth 2
121
2
118
Electric Drum
Drum & Perc.
√
121
2
101
Digi Ice Pad
Synth 1
121
3
118
Reverse Snare
Drum & Perc.
121
3
101
VCF Modulation
Synth 2
121
0
119
Reverse CymbalGM
Drum & Perc.
121
0
102
Echo Drops GM
SFX
√
121
1
119
Dragon Gong
Drum & Perc.
121
1
102
Echo Bell
SFX
√
121
2
119
Reverse Cymbal 2
Drum & Perc.
121
2
102
Echo Pan
SFX
√
121
0
120
Gtr FretNoise GM
SFX
√
121
3
102
Band Passed
Synth 2
121
1
120
Guitar Cut Noise
SFX
√
121
4
102
Pan Reso
Synth 2
121
2
120
Ac. Bass String
SFX
√
121
5
102
Moon Cycles
Synth 1
121
3
120
Vox Wah Chick RX
Guitar
121
0
103
Star Theme GM
SFX
√
121
0
121
Breath Noise GM
SFX
√
121
0
104
Sitar GM
Guitar
√
121
1
121
Flute Click
Woodwind
√
121
1
104
Sitar 2
Guitar
√
121
0
122
Seashore GM
SFX
√
121
2
104
Sitar Tambou
Guitar
121
1
122
Rain
SFX
√
121
3
104
Indian Stars
Guitar
121
2
122
Thunder
SFX
√
121
4
104
Indian Frets
Guitar
121
3
122
Wind
SFX
√
121
5
104
Bouzouki
Guitar
121
4
122
Stream
SFX
√
121
6
104
Tambra
Guitar
121
5
122
Bubble
SFX
√
121
7
104
Sitar Sitar
Guitar
121
0
123
Bird Tweet GM
SFX
√
121
0
105
Banjo GM
Guitar
121
1
123
Dog
SFX
√
121
1
105
Banjo Key Off
Guitar
121
2
123
Horse Gallop
SFX
√
121
2
105
Oud 2
Guitar
121
3
123
Bird Tweet 2
SFX
√
121
3
105
Jaw Harp
SFX
121
0
124
Telephone GM
SFX
√
121
4
105
Banjo RX
Guitar
121
1
124
Telephone 2
SFX
√
√
√
√
√
GM2
√
√
√
√
Appendix
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
298
Factory data
Sounds (Program Change order)
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
GM2
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
Bank
121
2
124
Door Creak
SFX
√
121
3
126
Punch
SFX
GM2
√
121
3
124
Door
SFX
√
121
4
126
Heart Beat
SFX
√
121
4
124
Scratch
SFX
√
121
5
126
Footsteps
SFX
√
121
5
124
Wind Chime
SFX
√
121
6
126
Stadium
SFX
121
0
125
Helicopter GM
SFX
√
121
0
127
Gun Shot GM
SFX
√
121
1
125
Car Engine
SFX
√
121
1
127
Machine Gun
SFX
√
121
2
125
Car Stop
SFX
√
121
2
127
Laser Gun
SFX
√
121
3
125
Car Pass
SFX
√
121
3
127
Explosion
SFX
√
121
4
125
Car Crash
SFX
√
123
7
16
Digital Drawbars
Digit.Drawbars
121
5
125
Siren
SFX
√
121
6
125
Train
SFX
√
121
64
0-127
…
User 1
121
7
125
Jet Plane
SFX
√
121
65
0-127
…
User 2
121
8
125
Starship
SFX
√
121
9
125
Burst Noise
SFX
√
121
0
126
Applause GM
SFX
√
121
1
126
Laughing
SFX
√
121
2
126
Screaming
SFX
√
Factory data
DNC Sounds
299
DNC Sounds
EP+Damper2 DNC
(Electric Piano – P6)
Harmonica DNC
(Accordion – P6)
Jimmy Organ DNC
(Organ – P10)
Nylon Guitar DNC
(Guitar – P20)
Natural Nylon DNC
(Guitar – P20)
RealFolk Gtr DNC
(Guitar – P20)
Steel Gtr DNC
(Guitar – P21)
Jazz Guitar DNC
(Guitar – P21)
Crunch Gtr DNC
(Guitar – P21)
Movie Str.1 DNC
(Strings/Vocals – P13)
Movie Str.2 DNC
(Strings/Vocals – P13)
Scat Voices DNC
(Strings/Vocals – P13)
Res/Halo
Y– Trg
Y+ Trg
AT Trg
Random
Cycle 2
4
Cycle 1
25
SCY–
121
SCY+
PC
SC2
CC32
•
A classic Electric Piano, where pressing the Damper pedal adds two oscillators more (OSC #4 and #5) and totally different
sounds (from the SFX bank). The Damper effect of a classic Electric Piano is also heard, thanks to the same principles of
the Damper Resonance simulation.
121
26
4
•
Press the Damper pedal to add Resonance, based on the same principles of the Grand Piano RX sound’s Damper Resonance simulation.
121
5
22
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cycle in action, again. The timbre smoothly changes from note to note. Use the Sound Controllers 1 to enable a Bend.
Use the Sound Controller 2 to enable an Harmonics sound with a smoother attack, very handy when playing legato.
Push the joystick forward to enable a swell attack. Pull the joystick back to slightly filter the sound, and hear a richer
sound when the joystick is moved totally back. Several RX Noises are included. Press the Damper pedal down to hear the
Breath sound.
121
13
18
•
As in the authentic weighty monsters of the gone years, playing staccato or legato produce a different sound. The Percussion can only be heard when playing staccato. A nice modern touch is the additional Overdrive effect.
121
18
24
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. The Sound Controllers 1 and 2 will enable, respectively,
the Slide Guitar or the Harmonics. Gradually pull the joystick back, and you will control the Body resonance. When
releasing a key, you can clearly hear the release noise, and sometimes the Guitar Fret noise.
121
19
24
•
Twelve oscillators playing randomly in turn. Since each oscillator is assigned a different multisample, or a different programming of the same multisample (Filter, Attack and Second Start parameters), this will result in a lively Guitar sound,
capturing the infinite nuances of the fingering of a real guitar player.
121
34
25
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Use the Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Slide
Guitar or Harmonics sounds. Press on the keys to activate the Vibrato. Pull the joystick back to trigger Body Noise. A typical Note Off sound is heard on Key Off. Sometimes the Guitar Fret noise can be heard.
121
35
25
•
This Sound is very similar to Steel Gtr RX1, where a very complex sound is created by way of several velocity switches.
This kind of Sound is very useful in Accompaniment tracks, thanks to the many nuances available (Harmonics, Mute,
Slide…). Legato playing and other controls generate interesting timbral variations for better playability.
121
7
26
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Use the Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Slide
Gtr or Guitar Harmonic sounds. Push the joystick forward to trigger Auto Bending. When playing staccato, the Note Off
noise is heard on Key Off.
121
3
29
•
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Use the Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Slide
Guitar or Mute Gtr sounds. Push the joystick forward to trigger a sound of Distorsion Gtr. Harmonics. Pull the joystick
back to trigger Feedback. Sometimes the Guitar Fret noise can be heard.
121
7
49
•
•
•
•
•
This lush Orchestral Strings sound uses DNC controls to create a full set of performing situations. Push the joystick forward and you will hear the Strings Ensemble Tremolo sound. Or press the Sound Controller 1 or 2 to respectively enable
the Viola or Pizzicato sounds. And when it’s time for a resounding orchestral climax, press on the keys to activate the
After Touch, and let the Timpani play. And, if the previous note was played with a velocity value higher than 70, the
Orchestral Crash will play together with the Timpani. When it’s time to step a little back, pull the joystick back to play a
Violin.
121
8
49
•
•
•
•
•
As above, but in this case the Sound Controller 1 enables the Smooth Strings Ensemble sound.
121
20
52
•
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Sound Controllers 1 and 2 will enable Bend Scat Voices
or Slow Attack Choir sounds. Push the joystick forward to play different Scat Voices. Pull the joystick back to slightly filter the sound. The lower area of the keyboard plays a Scat Bass sound.
Appendix
EP+Damper1 DNC
(Electric Piano – P6)
CC00
SC1
Sound name
Legato
The following table illustrates the DNC Sounds. Note: When a Performance contains Sounds making use of Sound Controllers 1 & 2 (SC1,
SC2), these controllers are assigned to the Assignable Switches.
Factory data
Cornet DNC
(Trump/Trbn – P6)
Trombone DNC
(Trump/Trbn – P7)
Alto Sax DNC
(Sax – P5)
Tenor Sax DNC
(Sax – P5)
Clarinet DNC
(Woodwinds – P7)
Flute DNC
(Woodwinds – P7)
Whistle DNC
(Woodwinds – P8)
Wave Cycle DNC
(Synth 1 Pad – P8)
Finger Bass DNC
(Bass – P13)
Synth Kit
(Drum/Perc – P8)
•
Res/Halo
•
Y– Trg
•
Y+ Trg
•
AT Trg
56
Random
24
Cycle 2
121
Cycle 1
PC
SCY–
CC32
SCY+
Trumpet DNC
(Trump/Trbn – P6)
CC00
SC2
Sound name
SC1
DNC Sounds
Legato
300
Filter
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. You can also hear the typical Key On and Key Off noises.
Use the Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to respectively hear the Trumpet’s Doit and Fall DNC effects. Push the joystick forward
to play a bending. The Breath DNC effect will play when pressing down the Damper pedal.
121
25
56
•
•
•
•
Filter
Here, programming is very similar to the one seen for the Trumpet DNC Sound.
121
13
57
•
•
•
•
Filter
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. The release noise is heard on Key Off. Use the Sound
Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Trombone Doit or Fall sounds. Push the joystick forward to trigger a bending. Press the
Damper pedal down to hear the Breath sound.
121
12
65
•
•
•
•
Filter
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Key On and Key Off noises can also be heard. Use the
Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Soft Sax or Growl Sax sounds. Push the joystick forward to trigger a fall-down.
Press the Damper pedal down to hear the Breath sound.
121
12
66
•
•
•
•
Filter
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Key On and Key Off noises can be heard. Use the Sound
Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Soft Sax or Straight Sax sounds. Push the joystick forward to trigger a fall-down. Press
the Damper pedal down to hear the Breath sound.
121
13
71
•
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Sound Controllers 1 and 2 will enable different bendings. Push the joystick forward to play a Clarinet with a crescendo attack. Pull the joystick back to slightly filter the
sound, and hear a richer sound when the joystick is moved totally back. An RX Noise is heard on Key On and Key Off.
Press the Damper pedal down to hear the Breath sound.
121
11
73
•
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Sound Controllers 1 and 2 will enable Voice Flute or
Frullato Flute sounds. Push the joystick forward to play Flute 5th. Pull the joystick back to play Octave Voice Flute. An RX
Noise is heard on Key On and Key Off. Press the Damper pedal down to hear the Breath sound.
121
5
78
•
•
•
You can use the Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to enable, respectively, the Gliss Whistle and the Sforzando Whistle DNC
effects. By pushing the joystick forward while a note is sounding, you will listen a fall-down effect. The Whistle Breath
will be randomly heard from time to time. Also, you can trigger it by just pressing down the Damper pedal.
121
3
96
•
Cycle in action! Sixteen oscillators cycling between sixteen different synth sounds – a viable simulation of our timeless
classic, the Wavestation.
121
16
33
•
•
•
•
•
Legato playing allows for a smoother transition between notes. Use the Sound Controllers 1 and 2 to enable the Slap
Bass or Harmonics sounds. Push the joystick forward to trigger the Gliss Bass sound. Pull it back to trigger Bass Stop
notes. A typical Note Off sound is heard on Key Off.
120
0
58
A funny drum kit based on synthetic sounds.
Factory data
Drum Kits
301
Drum Kits
CC00
CC32
120
0
120
0
48
Orchestra Kit GM
120
0
49
Orchestra Kit GM
120
0
50
Bdrum&Sdrum Kit
120
0
51
Arabian Kit 1
120
0
GM2
120
0
56
SFX Kit GM
√
120
0
57
SFX Kit 2
120
0
58
Synth Kit
120
0
120
0
64
Percussion Kit
120
0
65
Latin Perc. Kit1
120
0
66
Trinity Perc.Kit
120
0
67
i30 Perc. Kit
120
0
68
Latin Perc. Kit2
120
0
120
0
72
Hip Hop Kit RX
120
0
73
Techno Kit RX
120
0
74
Dance Kit RX
120
0
75
Electro Kit RX1
120
0
76
Electro Kit RX2
120
0
120
0
89
Pop Std. Kit 1
120
0
90
Pop Std. Kit 2
120
0
91(remap to 3)
120
0
92 (remap to 6)
120
0
93-95 (remap to 1)
120
0
96
Elektro Kit 1
97
Elektro Kit 2
Legend: The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select
the Drum Kits. CC00: Control Change 0, or Bank Select MSB.
CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC: Program
Change.
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
120
0
0
Standard Kit GM
120
0
1
Standard Kit RX2
120
0
2
Standard Kit RX3
120
0
3
Ambient Kit RX
120
0
4
Pop Std. Kit RX
120
0
5
Standard Kit RX1
120
0
6
Standard Kit RX4
120
0
7
Standard Kit 1
120
0
8
Room Kit GM
120
0
9
HipHop Kit 1
120
120
0
0
10
11
Jungle Kit
Techno Kit 1
120
0
12
Room Kit 2
120
0
13
HipHop Kit 2
120
0
14
Techno Kit 2
120
0
15
Techno Kit 3
120
0
16
Power Kit GM
120
0
17
Power Kit 2
120
0
18
Power Kit RX1
120
0
19
√
√
Power Kit RX2
Name
GM2
√
57-63 (remap to 56)
69-71 (remap to 64)
77-88 (remap to 1)
0
120
0
24
Electro Kit GM
√
120
0
120
0
25
Analog Kit GM
√
120
0
98-115 (remap to 1)
120
0
26
House Kit 1
120
0
116 (remap to 51)
120
0
117
Arabian Kit 2
120
0
118
Turkish Kit
120
0
119
Oriental PercKit
120
0
120
Room Kit 1
120
0
121
Power Kit 1
120
0
122
Electro Kit
120
0
123
Analog Kit
120
0
120
0
120
0
120
64
120
120
120
0
0
0
0
27
28
House Kit 2
House Kit 3
29 (remap to 28)
30
House Kit RX1
120
0
31
House Kit RX2
120
0
32
Jazz Kit GM
120
0
33
Jazz Kit RX1
120
0
34
Jazz Kit RX2
120
0
35
Jazz Kit RX3
120
0
120
0
√
36-39 (remap to 32)
40
Brush Kit GM
120
0
41
Brush Kit 2
120
0
42
Brush Kit RX1
120
0
43
Brush Kit RX2
120
0
44
Brush Kit RX3
√
52-55 (remap to 48)
120
120
20-23 (remap to 16)
PC
45-47 (remap to 40)
124 (remap to 1)
125
Brush Kit 1
126-127 (remap to 1)
…
√
0-63
User DrumKits (1-64)
Appendix
The following table lists all Pa2X Factory Drum Kits in order of
Bank Select-Program Change number.
302
Factory data
Multisamples
Multisamples
The following table lists all Pa2X Factory Multisamples.
* OrigTune: Original Tune, i.e., samples use the natural tuning of the original instrument, instead of the equal tuning. Beating may occur at
the extreme pitch, when the sound is used in conjunction with other sounds.
0
GrandPiano_L
42
Gospel Organ Slow_L
84
E.Organ Full
126 FM Bell
1
GrandPiano_R
43
Gospel Organ Slow_R
85
E.Organ Dist
127 Flute
2
GrandPiano_L OrigTune
44
Gospel Organ Fast_L
86
Rotary Organ 1
128 Flute Frull
3
GrandPiano_R OrigTune
45
Gospel Organ Fast_R
87
Rotary Organ 1LP
129 Voice Flute
4
Tailpiece_L
46
16' 8' LF_L
88
Rotary Organ 2
130 Jazz Flute
5
Tailpiece_R
47
16' 8' LF_R
89
Super BX3
131 Flute Vibrato
6
Tailpiece_L OrigTune
48
16' 8' LS_L
90
Super BX3LP
132 Flute Attack p
7
Tailpiece_R OrigTune
49
16' 8' LS_R
91
LeslieNoise LF_L
133 Flute Attack f
8
AcousticPiano_L
50
16' 8' 51/3 LF_L
92
LeslieNoise LF_R
134 Piccolo
9
AcousticPiano_R
51
16' 8' 51/3 LF_R
93
LeslieNoise LS_L
135 Pan Flute
10
FX Pedal On_L
52
16' 8' 51/3 LS_L
94
LeslieNoise LS_R
136 Pan Flute Attack
11
FX Pedal On_R
53
16' 8' 51/3 LS_R
95
ON-Click (Organ)
137 Tin Whistle
12
FX Pedal Off_L
54
4' 22/3' 2' LF_L
96
OFF-Click (Organ)
138 Tin Whistle Voice
13
FX Pedal Off_R
55
4' 22/3' 2' LF_R
97
Pipe Flute_L
139 Tin Whistle Attack
14
FX Key Off_L
56
4' 22/3' 2' LS_L
98
Pipe Flute_R
140 Whistle Gliss
15
FX Key Off_R
57
4' 22/3' 2' LS_R
99
Pipe Positive
141 Whistle No Vibr
16
M1 Piano
58
11/3' 13/5' 1' LF_L
100 Pipe Mixture
142 Whistle Sforz Vibr
17
E.GrandPiano
59
11/3' 13/5' 1' LF_R
101 Pipe Full 1_L
143 Whistle Sforz No Vibr
18
E.Piano FM 1
60
11/3' 13/5' 1' LS_L
102 Pipe Full 1_R
144 Whistle Slow Atk Vibr
19
E.Piano FM 1LP
61
11/3' 13/5' 1' LS_R
103 Pipe Full 2
145 Whistle Breath
20
E.Piano FM 2
62
16' 8' 51/3' Perc LF_L
104 E.Organ Church
146 Shakuhachi
21
E.Piano Suit Bright mp
63
16' 8' 51/3' Perc LF_R
105 Pipe Organ Tuentiana
147 Shakuhachi Atk
22
E.Piano Suit Bright mf
64
16' 8' 51/3' Perc LS_L
106 Pipe Organ Reed
148 Bottle
23
E.Piano Suit Bright f
65
16' 8' 51/3' Perc LS_R
107 Music Box
149 Bottleizer
24
E.Piano Dyno mf
66
Theater Organ1
108 Music BoxLP
150 Recorder
25
E.Piano Dyno f
67
Theater Org2
109 Kalimba
151 Ocarina
26
E.Piano Dyno ff
68
E.Organ CX 3
110 Marimba
152 Solo Clarinet
27
E.Piano Dyno Soft
69
E.Organ Perc. O1W
111 MarimbaLP
153 Clarinet
28
E.Piano Dyno SoftLP
70
E.Organ Fast Click
112 Xylophone
154 Bass Clarinet
29
E.Piano Stage Hard
71
E.Organ Perc. 1
113 Balaphone
155 M1 DoubleReed
30
E.Piano Stage HardLP
72
E.Organ Perc. 2
114 Vibraphone1
156 Oboe
31
E.Piano Wurly Soft
73
E.Organ Perc. 3
115 Vibraphone1LP
157 English Horn
32
E.Piano Wurly Hard
74
E.Organ Perc. 4
116 Vibraphone2
158 Bassoon
33
E.Piano Pad 1
75
M1 Organ1
117 Celesta
159 Woodwind Ensemble
34
E.Piano Pad 1LP
76
M1 Organ2
118 CelestaLP
160 Baritone Sax mf
35
E.Piano Pad 2
77
Organ1
119 Glockenspiel
161 Baritone Sax f
36
Clavi 1
78
Organ2
120 GlockenspielLP
162 Baritone Sax Growl
37
Clavi 2
79
Organ2LP
121 Tubular Bell
163 Tenor Sax Vibrato
38
Clavi 3
80
Organ3 Jazz
122 Log Drum
164 Tenor Sax Expressive
39
Clavi 4
81
BX3 & Perc. 3rd
123 Steel Drum Hard
165 Tenor Sax mp
40
Harpsichord
82
E.Organ Vox
124 Steel Drum HardLP
166 Tenor Sax mf
41
Harpsichord Key off
83
E.Organ Soft
125 Gamelan
167 Tenor Sax Straight
Factory data
Multisamples
303
168 Tenor Sax M1
217 2 Trombones f _L
263 Doo Voice
310 El. Guitar Tel Bridge p
169 Alto Sax Vibrato1
218 2 Trombones f _R
264 Doo VoiceLP
311 El. Guitar Tel Bridge mf
170 Alto Sax Vibrato2
219 Trombone SlurUp
265 Solo Violin Vibrato
312 El. Guitar Tel Bridge f
171 Alto Sax Vibrato2 Drive
220 Trombone Fall
266 Violin
313 El. Guitar Fend. Slide
172 Alto Sax p
221 Classic Trumpet p
267 Viola Expressive mf
314 Clean Guitar Str p
173 Alto Sax mf
222 Classic Trumpet mf
268 Viola Expressive ff
315 Clean Guitar Str f
174 Alto Sax Growl
223 Pop Trumpet mf
269 Viola
316 Clean Guitar Mute
175 Soprano Sax Vibrato
224 Pop Trumpet f
270 Cello&Contrabass
317 Clean Guitar Dead
176 Soprano Sax Straight
225 Trumpet Expr.
271 Violin & Cello
318 Clean Guitar Slap
177 Sax Family Vibrato
226 Trumpet Slow mp
272 Strings Quartet
319 Clean Guitar Slide
178 French Musette
227 Trumpet Slow f
273 Strings Quartet Vibrato1
320 El. Guitar Le Neck
179 Musette1
228 Trumpet Tonguing mp
274 Strings Quartet Vibrato2
321 El. Guitar Le Bridge
180 Musette1LP
229 Trumpet Tonguing f
275 Pizzicato
322 El. Guitar Le Mute p
181 Accordion 16'
230 Trumpet Medium
323 El. Guitar Le Mute mf
182 Accordion 16' OrigTune
231 Trumpet Overblown
276 StereoStrings
Ensemble_L
277 StereoStrings
Ensemble_R
325 El. Guitar Le Ghost2
324 El. Guitar Le Ghost1
183 Accordion 8'
232 Trumpet Muted
184 Accordion 8' OrigTune
233 Trumpet Wah wah
185 Accordion 4'
234 2 Trumpets mp _L
186 Accordion 4' OrigTune
235 2 Trumpets mp _R
279 Strings Ensemble
Tremolo
187 Accordion1
236 2 Trumpets f _L
280 Pizzicato Ensemble
329 Tele Mute 5th f
188 Accordion2
237 2 Trumpets f _R
281 Harp
330 Tele Mute 5th ff
189 Fisa Bassoon
238 Trumpet Doit
282 Steel Guitar1 Pick p
331 Tele Mute 5th Key off
190 Fisa Clarinet
239 Trumpet Fall
283 Steel Guitar1 Pick mf
332 El. Guitar Harmonics
191 Bandoneon
240 Stereo Brass
Ensemble1_L
284 Steel Guitar1 Pick f
333 El. Guitar Gliss Down
285 Steel Guitar1 Mute
334 El. Guitar Gliss Up
241 Stereo Brass
Ensemble1_R
286 Steel Guitar1 Slide
335 El. Guitar Noise
242 Stereo Brass
Ensemble2_L
287 Steel Guitar2 p
336 El. Guitar Short Noise
288 Steel Guitar2 mf
337 El. Guitar Fret Noise
243 Stereo Brass
Ensemble2_R
289 Steel Guitar2 f
338 Jazz Guitar1
197 Harmonica
290 Steel Guitar2 Slap
339 Jazz Guitar2
198 Harmonica Wah
244 Brass Ensemble1
291 Steel Guitar2 Slide
340 Jazz Gib mellow p
199 Highland Bag Pipes
245 Brass Ensemble2
292 Nylon Guitar mp
341 Jazz Gib mellow mf
200 Highland Drones
246 Brass Ensemble2LP
293 Nylon Guitar mf
342 Jazz Gib mellow f
201 Uilleann Pipes
247 Voice Female Wuuh
294 Nylon Guitar ff
343 Pedal Steel Guitar
202 Bag Pipes
248 Voice Female Woh
295 Nylon GuitarAtk
344 Resonator Guitar
203 French Horn T1
249 Voice Female Wah
296 Ac. Guitar 12 Strings
345 Dist. Guitar
204 French Horn Ensemble
250 Voice Female Dah
297 Ac. Guitar Harmonics1
346 Dist. Guitar1 Harmo.
205 Flugel Horn Vibrato
251 Voice Male Wuh
298 Ac. Guitar Harmonics2
347 Dist. Guitar2 Harmo.
206 Flugel Horn M1
252 Voice Male Woh
299 Ac. Guitar Noise
348 Dist. Guitar2 Mute1
207 Tuba f
253 Voice Male Wah
300 Guitar Fret Noise Off
349 Dist. Guitar2 Mute2
208 Tuba ff
254 Voice Male Dah
301 Guitar Noise Off
350 El. Guitar DistMuted p
209 Trombone Vibrato
255 Voice Scat Buh
302 Guitar Body
351 El. Guitar DistMuted mp
210 Trombone1 mf
256 Voice Scat Duh
303 Guitar Noise Attack Off
352 El. Guitar PowerChord1
211 Trombone1 ff
257 Voice Scat Bah
304 El. Guitar Stra 54 p
353 El. Guitar PowerChord2
212 Trombone2 Soft
258 Voice Scat Dah
305 El. Guitar Stra 54 mf
354 El. Guitar PowerChord3
213 Trombone2 Bright
259 Voice Choir
306 El. Guitar Stra 54 f
355 Acoustic Bass1
214 Trombone Muted
260 Voice Hoo
307 El. Guitar Tel Mid p
356 Acoustic Bass2 mf
215 2 Trombones mf _L
261 Voice Pop Ooh
308 El. Guitar Tel Mid mf
357 Acoustic Bass2 f
216 2 Trombones mf _R
262 Voice Pop Ah
309 El. Guitar Tel Mid f
358 Acoustic Bass3 mp
193 Accordion Bass
194 Accordion Noise KeyOn
195 Accordion Noise KeyOff
196 Accordion Change Voice
326 Tele Mute 5th pp
327 Tele Mute 5th p
328 Tele Mute 5th mf
Appendix
192 Volkst. Accordion
278 Strings Ensemble
304
Factory data
Multisamples
359 Acoustic Bass3 mp VAR
407 MandolinLP
456 Wave Sweep3
505 Brass Fall
360 Acoustic Bass3 mf
408 Mandolin Tremolo
457 Syn Ghostly
506 Vox Wah Gtr
361 Acoustic Bass3 mf VAR
409 Mandolin Ensemble
458 Ghost
507 Vibe Chord
362 Acoustic Bass3 f
410 Banjo
459 Syn Air Pad
508 Zap1
363 Acoustic Bass3 f VAR
411 BanjoLP
460 Dream Str
509 Zap2
364 E.Bass1 Finger
412 Ukulele
461 Syn AirVortex
510 Stadium
365 E.Bass2 P.B.1
413 Shamisen
462 Syn Palawan
511 Applause
366 E.Bass2 P.B.2
414 Koto
463 Syn Clicker
512 Birds1
367 E.Bass2 LH Stop
415 M.E. Oud
464 Cricket Spectrum
513 Birds2
368 E.Bass2 RH Stop
416 M.E. Oud Tek
465 Noise1
514 Crickets
369 E.Bass2 Harmo.
417 M.E. Kanun1
466 Noise2
515 Church Bell
370 E.Bass3 p
418 M.E. Kanun2
467 Noise Pad
516 Thunder
371 E.Bass3 mf
419 M.E. Kanun Tremolo
468 Swish Terra
517 Stream
372 E.Bass3 f Slap
420 M.E. Baglama1
469 Gamelan XEQ
518 Bubble
373 E.Bass4 Pick
421 M.E. Baglama2
470 Saw1
519 Dog
374 E.Bass4 Harmo.
422 M.E. Zurna
471 Saw2
520 Gallop
375 E.Bass4 Slap
423 M.E. Clarinet Tek
472 Saw3
521 Laughing
376 E.Bass4 SlapHar
424 M.E. Clarinet
473 Pulse 02%
522 Telephone Ring
377 E.Bass4 LH Mute
425 M.E. Nay
474 Pulse 05%
523 Scream
378 E.Bass4 RH Mute
426 Mouth Harp1
475 Pulse 08%
524 Punch
379 E.Bass Gliss
427 Mouth Harp2
476 Pulse 16%
525 Heart Beat
380 E.Bass Noise1
428 Mouth Harp3
477 Pulse 33%
526 Footstep1
381 E.Bass Noise2
429 Mouth Harp4
478 Pulse 40%
527 Footstep2
382 E.Bass5 Finger
430 Mouth Harp5
479 Square
528 Door Creak
383 E.Bass6 Finger
431 Syn Flute Pad
480 Square MG
529 Door Slam
384 E.Bass6 FingerLP
432 Syn Bass Reso1
481 Square JP
530 Car Engine
385 E.Bass7 Finger
433 Syn Bass FM1
482 Triangle MG
531 Car EngineLP
386 E.Bass8 Pick
434 Syn Bass FM1LP
483 Ramp
532 Car Stop
387 E.Bass9 Pick Muted1
435 Syn Bass FM2
484 Ramp MG
533 Car Pass
388 E.Bass9 Pick Muted2
436 Syn Bass FM2LP
485 Sine
534 Car Crash
389 E.Bass10 Pick
437 Syn Bass TB
486 DWGS Syn Sine1
535 Train
390 E.Bass10 PickLP
438 RB Saw Bass
487 DWGS Syn Sine2
536 Helicopter
391 E.Bass11 Thumb Bass
439 RB Square Bass
488 DWGS Organ1
537 Gun Shot
392 E.Bass12
SlapBassThumb
440 Chrom Res
489 DWGS Organ2
538 Machine Gun
441 Detuned Super
490 DWGS Bell1
539 Laser Gun
393 E.Bass12
SlapBassThumbLP
442 Detuned PWM
491 DWGS Bell2
540 Explosion
443 Synth Brass
492 DWGS Bell3
541 Wind
444 An.Strings1
493 DWGS Bell4
542 Timpani
445 An.Strings2
494 DWGS Clav.
543 Crash
446 Analog Vintage
495 DWGS Digi1
544 Crash Reverse
447 White Pad
496 DWGS Digi2
545 Orchestra Crash
448 N1 Air Vox
497 DWGS Wire1
546 Ride Jazz
449 Ether Bell
498 DWGS Wire2
547 Ride Edge1
450 Ether BellLP
499 DWGS Sync1
548 Ride Edge2
451 Lore
500 DWGS Sync2
549 HiHat Closed
452 Lore NT
501 DWGS Sync3
550 88 HiHat Open
453 Space Lore
502 Orchestra Hit
551 88 Cowbell
454 Wave Sweep1
503 Band Hit
552 88 Tom
455 Wave Sweep2
504 Impact Hit
553 88 Conga
394 Fretless Bass 1
395 Bass Harmonics
396 Bass HarmonicsLP
397 Sitar1
398 Sitar2
399 Sitar & Tambura
400 Santur
401 SanturLP
402 Tambura
403 TamburaLP
404 Bouzouki
405 BouzoukiLP
406 Mandolin
Multisamples
554 88 Crash
567 Temple Blocks
580 Cowbell & Claves
593 Stereo Snare1_L
555 Tom
568 Orchestra BD
581 Cabasa
594 Stereo Snare1_R
556 Tom Brush
569 Castanet
582 Shaker
595 Stereo Snare2_L
557 Tom Process
570 Taiko
583 Cabasa & Shaker
596 Stereo Snare2_R
558 Electric Tom
571 Djembe Open
584 Dumbek - Djambe - Udu
597 Large1_L
559 Flexatone
572 Djembe Mute
585 Caxixi
598 Large1_R
560 Tambourine
573 Chinese Gong
586 Tabla & Baya
599 Large2_L
561 Agogo Bell
574 Snare Ghost
587 WoodBlock & Castanet
600 Large2_R
562 Meditation Tree
575 Rain Stick
588 Mix Latin Perc
601 Large3_L
563 Marc Tree
576 Congas
589 Kangaroo
602 Large3_R
564 Marc TreeLP
577 Quinto & Bongos
590 DJ Eddie Set
603 Large4_L
565 Cowbell
578 Okonkolo
591 Stereo Snares1&2_L
604 Large4_R
566 Click
579 Timbales
592 Stereo Snares1&2_R
605 Empty
305
Appendix
Factory data
306
Factory data
Drum Samples
Drum Samples
The following table lists all Pa2X Factory
Drum Samples.
Family
#
Sample
Family
#
55
BD Electribe04
1
113
Sample
SD Brass2 mf
Family
56
BD Electribe05
1
114
SD Brass2 f
2
57
BD Electribe06
1
115
SD Roll
2
2
#
Sample
0
BD Acoustic1 p
1
58
BD Electribe07
1
116
SD Ghost Roll
2
1
BD Acoustic1 mf
1
59
BD Electribe08
1
117
SD Ghost p
2
2
BD Acoustic1 f
1
60
BD Electribe09
1
118
SD Ghost f
2
3
BD Acoustic2 mf
1
61
BD Electribe10
1
119
SD Snr Ghost1 a
2
4
BD Acoustic2 f
1
62
BD Electribe11
1
120
SD Snr Ghost1 b
2
5
BD open p
1
63
BD Electribe12
1
121
SD Snr Ghost2 a
2
6
BD open mf
1
64
BD Electribe13
1
122
SD Snr Ghost2 b
2
7
BD open f
1
65
BD Electribe14
1
123
SD Snr Ghost2 c
2
8
BD Peak
1
66
BD Electribe15
1
124
SD Snr Signature p
2
9
BD Dry 1
1
67
BD Electribe16
1
125
SD Snr Signature mf
2
10
BD Dry 2
1
68
BD Electribe17
1
126
SD Snr Signature f
2
11
BD Dry 3
1
69
Syn. BD1
1
127
SD Snr Signature Rim mf
2
12
BD Normal
1
70
Syn. BD2
1
128
SD Snr Signature Rim f
2
13
BD SoftRoom
1
71
Syn. BD3
1
129
SD Snr Signature Rim1
2
14
BD Jazz
1
72
Syn. BD4
1
130
SD Snr Signature Rim2
2
15
BD Pillow
1
73
Syn. BD Buzz
1
131
Brush SD1 (swirl1)
2
16
BD Woofer
1
74
88 BD
1
132
Brush SD1 (swirl2)
2
17
BD MondoKill
1
75
BD Orchestra
1
133
Brush SD1 (swirl3)
2
18
BD Terminator
1
76
SD Wood1 p
2
134
Brush SD1 (swirl4)
2
19
BD Tubby
1
77
SD Wood1 mf
2
135
Brush SD1
2
20
BD Gated
1
78
SD Wood1 f
2
136
Brush SD2 (ghost1)
2
21
BD Tight
1
79
SD Wood2 pp
2
137
Brush SD2 (ghost2)
2
22
BD Squash
1
80
SD Wood2 p
2
138
Brush SD2 (ghost3)
2
23
BD Black&Soul 1
1
81
SD Wood2 mf
2
139
Brush SD2
2
24
BD Black&Soul 2
1
82
SD Wood2 f
2
140
Brush SD2 (fill) 4 shots
2
25
BD Black&Soul 3 dist
1
83
SD Piccolo1 pp
2
141
Brush SD2 (fill) 3 shots
2
26
BD Black&Soul 4 noise
1
84
SD Piccolo1 p
2
142
Brush SD2 (fill) 2 shots
2
27
BD Black&Soul 5 Long
1
85
SD Piccolo1 mf
2
143
Brush SD3 Hit
2
28
BD Black&Soul 6
1
86
SD Piccolo1 f
2
144
Brush SD3 Tap1
2
29
BD Dance 1
1
87
SD Piccolo2 pp
2
145
Brush SD3 Tap2
2
30
BD Dance 2
1
88
SD Piccolo2 p
2
146
Brush SD3 Swirl
2
31
BD Dance 3
1
89
SD Piccolo2 mf
2
147
SD Dry 1
2
32
BD House 1
1
90
SD Piccolo2 f
2
148
SD Dry 2
2
33
BD House 2
1
91
SD Solid1 p
2
149
SD Dry 3
2
34
BD House 3
1
92
SD Solid1 mf
2
150
SD Full Room
2
35
BD House 4
1
93
SD Solid1 f
2
151
SD Off Center
2
36
BD House 5
1
94
SD Solid2 p
2
152
SD Jazz Ring
2
37
BD Liquid
1
95
SD Solid2 mf
2
153
SD Amb.Piccolo
2
38
BD Techno 1
1
96
SD Solid2 f
2
154
SD Paper
2
39
BD Techno 2
1
97
SD Maple1 pp
2
155
SD Big Rock
2
40
BD Hip 1
1
98
SD Maple1 p
2
156
SD Yowie
2
41
BD Hip 2
1
99
SD Maple1 mp
2
157
SD Trinity1
2
42
BD Hip 3
1
100
SD Maple1 mf
2
158
SD Trinity2
2
43
BD Hip 4
1
101
SD Maple1 f
2
159
SD Stereo Gate
2
44
BD Kick1
1
102
SD Maple1 ff
2
160
SD Processed
2
45
BD Kick2
1
103
SD Maple2 pp
2
161
SD Cracker Room
2
46
BD Ambient
1
104
SD Maple2 p
2
162
SD Dance01
2
47
BD Ambient Crackle
1
105
SD Maple2 mp
2
163
SD Dance02
2
48
BD Ambient Rocker
1
106
SD Maple2 mf
2
164
SD Dance03
2
49
BD Pop
1
107
SD Maple2 f
2
165
SD Dance04
2
50
BD Deep
1
108
SD Maple2 ff
2
166
SD Dance05
2
51
BD Klanger
1
109
SD Brass1 p
2
167
SD Dance06
2
52
BD Electribe01
1
110
SD Brass1 mf
2
168
SD Dance07
2
53
BD Electribe02
1
111
SD Brass1 f
2
169
SD Dance08
2
54
BD Electribe03
1
112
SD Brass2 p
2
170
SD Dance09
2
Drum Samples
#
Sample
Sample
Sample
307
Family
#
Family
#
171
SD Dance10
2
233
Syn. Rim Click
2
295
Tom Brush3 Mid ff
Family
4
172
SD Dance11
2
234
88 Rim Shot
2
296
Tom Brush3 Low mf
4
173
SD Dance12
2
235
Sidestick mf
2
297
Tom Brush3 Low ff
4
174
SD Dance13
2
236
Sidestick f
2
298
Tom Brush4
4
175
SD Dance14
2
237
Sidestick Dance
2
299
88 Tom
4
176
SD Dance15
2
238
SideStick Dry
2
300
E.Tom FM
4
177
SD Dance16
2
239
SideStick Amb
2
301
E.Tom Real
4
178
SD Dance17
2
240
DrumStick Hit
2
302
HH1 Closed pp
3
179
SD Dance18
2
241
FX SD Large Hall1
2
303
HH1 Closed p
3
180
SD Dance19
2
242
FX SD Large Hall2
2
304
HH1 Closed mf
3
181
SD Dance20
2
243
FX Rim Large Hall1
2
305
HH1 Closed f
3
182
SD Dance21
2
244
FX Rim Large Hall2
2
306
HH1 Foot mp
3
183
SD Dance22
2
245
Tom1 Open Hi p
4
307
HH1 Foot mf
3
184
SD Dance23
2
246
Tom1 Open Hi p flam
4
308
HH1 Open mp
3
185
SD Dance24
2
247
Tom1 Open Hi f
4
309
HH1 Open mf
3
186
SD House1
2
248
Tom1 Open Hi f flam
4
310
HH2 Closed pp
3
187
SD House2
2
249
Tom1 Open Mid p
4
311
HH2 Closed p
3
188
SD House3
2
250
Tom1 Open Mid p flam
4
312
HH2 Closed mp
3
189
SD House4
2
251
Tom1 Open Mid f
4
313
HH2 Closed mf
3
190
SD (BeatBox)
2
252
Tom1 Open Mid f flam
4
314
HH2 Closed f
3
191
SD El. Funk1
2
253
Tom1 Open Low p
4
315
HH2 Closed ff
3
192
SD El. Funk2
2
254
Tom1 Open Low p flam
4
316
HH2 Foot p
3
193
SD El. Funk3
2
255
Tom1 Open Low f
4
317
HH2 Foot f
3
194
SD Small
2
256
Tom1 Open Low f flam
4
318
HH2 Open p
3
195
SD Rap
2
257
Tom1 Open Floor p
4
319
HH2 Open f
3
196
SD Noise
2
258
Tom1 Open Floor p flam
4
320
HH3 Closed1
3
197
SD Reverse
2
259
Tom1 Open Floor f
4
321
HH3 Closed2
3
198
SD Hip1
2
260
Tom1 Open Floor f flam
4
322
HH3 Foot
3
199
SD Hip2
2
261
Tom2 Hi p
4
323
HH3 Open1
3
200
SD Hip3
2
262
Tom2 Hi f
4
324
HH3 Open2
3
201
SD Hip4
2
263
Tom2 Mid p
4
325
HH3 Sizzle
3
202
SD Hip5
2
264
Tom2 Mid f
4
326
HH4 Closed1
3
203
SD Hip6
2
265
Tom2 Low p
4
327
HH4 Closed2
3
204
SD Ringy
2
266
Tom2 Low f
4
328
HH4 Foot
3
205
SD Tiny
2
267
Tom2 Floor p
4
329
HH4 FootOpen
3
206
SD Vintage1
2
268
Tom2 Floor f
4
330
HH4 Open
3
207
SD Vintage2
2
269
Tom3 Hi
4
331
HH Old Close1
3
208
SD Vintage3
2
270
Tom3 Floor
4
332
HH Old Open1
3
209
SD Vintage4
2
271
Tom4 Hi
4
333
HH Old TiteClose
3
210
SD Vintage5
2
272
Tom4 Low
4
334
HH Old Close2
3
211
SD Vintage6
2
273
Tom4 Floor
4
335
HH Old Open2
3
212
SD AmbiHop
2
274
Tom5 Hi
4
336
HH House Open1
3
213
SD Brasser
2
275
Tom5 Low
4
337
HH House Open2
3
214
SD Chili
2
276
Tom6 Vintage Hi mp
4
338
HH Hip
3
215
SD Whopper
2
277
Tom6 Vintage Hi mf
4
339
HH Alpo Close
3
216
Syn. SD1
2
278
Tom6 Vintage Hi ff
4
340
HH Dance1
3
217
Syn. SD2
2
279
Tom6 Vintage Mid mp
4
341
HH Dance2
3
218
Syn. SD3
2
280
Tom6 Vintage Mid mf
4
342
88 HH Close
3
219
Syn. SD4
2
281
Tom6 Vintage Mid ff
4
343
88 HH Open
3
220
88 SD
2
282
Tom6 Vintage Lo mp
4
344
99 HH Close
3
221
99 SD
2
283
Tom6 Vintage Lo mf
4
345
99 HH Open
3
222
SD Orchestra
2
284
Tom6 Vintage Lo ff
4
346
Syn. HH Closed
3
223
SD Orch. Roll
2
285
Tom Processed
4
347
Syn. HH Open
3
224
Rim Snr Signature Hi
2
286
Tom Jazz Hi
4
348
Crash 15'edge1
5
225
Rim Snr Signature Mid
2
287
Tom Jazz Floor
4
349
Crash 15'edge2
5
226
Rim Snr Signature Low
2
288
Tom Brush1 (sd open)
4
350
Crash 17'edge1
5
227
Rim Shot p
2
289
Tom Brush1 (sd close)
4
351
Crash 17'edge2
5
228
Rim Shot f
2
290
Tom Brush2 (sd open)
4
352
Crash 19'open1
5
229
Rim House1
2
291
Tom Brush2 (sd close)
4
353
Crash 19'open2
5
230
Rim House2
2
292
Tom Brush3 Hi mf
4
354
Crash 1
5
231
Rim Synth
2
293
Tom Brush3 Hi ff
4
355
Crash 2
5
232
RimTamb Synth
2
294
Tom Brush3 Mid mf
4
356
Crash Reverse
5
Appendix
Factory data
308
#
Factory data
Drum Samples
Family
#
Family
#
357
Crash Dance 99
Sample
5
419
DJ Vinyl Sliced 08
Sample
8
481
Sample
Conga2 Lo Open
Family
6
358
Crash DDD-1
5
420
DJ Vinyl Sliced 09
8
482
Conga2 Lo Mt Slap
6
359
88 Crash
5
421
DJ Vinyl Sliced 10
8
483
Conga2 Lo Slap
6
360
Splash 8'edge1
5
422
DJ Vinyl Sliced 11
8
484
Conga2 Hi Open
6
361
Splash 8'edge2
5
423
DJ Vinyl Sliced 12
8
485
Conga2 Hi Mute
6
362
Splash
5
424
DJ Vinyl Sliced 13
8
486
Conga2 Hi Mt Slap
6
363
China
5
425
DJ Vinyl Sliced 14
8
487
Conga2 Hi Slap1
6
364
Ride 20' mp1
5
426
DJ Vinyl Sliced 15
8
488
Conga2 Hi Slap2
6
365
Ride 20' mp2
5
427
DJ Vinyl Sliced 16
8
489
Conga2 Heel
6
366
Ride 20' mf1
5
428
DJ Vinyl Sliced 17
8
490
Conga2 Toe
6
367
Ride 20' mf2
5
429
DJ Vinyl Sliced 18
8
491
Quinto1 Open
6
368
Ride Edge1
5
430
DJ Vinyl Sliced 19
8
492
Quinto1 Closed
6
369
Ride Edge2
5
431
DJ Vinyl Sliced 20
8
493
Quinto1 Closed Slap
6
370
Ride Cup
5
432
DJ Vinyl Sliced 21
8
494
Quinto1 Toe
6
371
Ride Jazz
5
433
DJ Vinyl Sliced 22
8
495
Quinto2 Basstone
6
372
Ride Brush1
5
434
DJ Vinyl Sliced 23
8
496
Quinto2 Open mp
6
373
Ride Brush2
5
435
DJ Vinyl Sliced 24
8
497
Quinto2 Open Flam
6
374
Ride Brush3
5
436
DJ Scratch 01
8
498
Quinto2 Open Slap
6
375
Ride Rivet
5
437
DJ Scratch 02
8
499
Quinto2 Muffled
6
376
99 Ride Dance
5
438
DJ Scratch 03
8
500
Quinto2 C.Slap Flam p
6
377
Orchestra Cymbal
5
439
DJ Scratch 04
8
501
Quinto2 C.Slap Flam f
6
378
Finger Snaps
6
440
DJ Scratch 05
8
502
Quinto2 Heel
6
379
Claps1
6
441
DJ Scratch 06
8
503
Bongo1 Lo Muffled mp
6
380
Claps2
6
442
DJ Hit Rub
8
504
Bongo1 Lo Muffled f
6
381
Claps3
6
443
DJ Vocal Rub1
8
505
Bongo1 Lo Closed
6
382
Claps4
6
444
DJ Vocal Rub2
8
506
Bongo1 Lo Flam
6
383
88 Claps
6
445
DJ BD Rub
8
507
Bongo1 Lo MuffledFlam
6
384
Dance Claps1
6
446
DJ SD Rub
8
508
Bongo1 Lo Stick
6
385
Dance Claps2
6
447
Guiro Long
6
509
Bongo1 Lo StickEdge mf
6
386
Dance Claps3
6
448
Guiro Short
6
510
Bongo1 Lo StickEdge f
6
387
Dance Claps4
6
449
Vibraslap
7
511
Bongo1 Lo StickBounce
6
388
Dance Claps5
6
450
Samba Whistle
7
512
Bongo1 Lo Fingernail
6
389
Dance Claps6
6
451
Cuica Hi
6
513
Bongo1 Lo Cuptone
6
390
Dance Conga1 Lo-Open
6
452
Cuica Lo
6
514
Bongo1 Lo Slap
6
391
Dance Conga1 Hi-Open
6
453
Tumba Open1 mf
6
515
Bongo1 Hi Open mf
6
392
Dance Tambourine
7
454
Tumba Open1 f
6
516
Bongo1 Hi Open f
6
393
88 Conga
6
455
Tumba Open2 mf
6
517
Bongo1 Hi Pops
6
394
88 Claves
6
456
Tumba Open2 f
6
518
Bongo1 Hi Hightone
6
395
88 Cowbell
7
457
Tumba Open Flam
6
519
Bongo1 Hi OpenFlam
6
396
88 Maracas
7
458
Tumba Glissando
6
520
Bongo1 Hi Fingernail
6
397
Syn. Bongo1
6
459
Tumba Basstone
6
521
Bongo1 Hi Stick
6
398
Syn. Bongo2
6
460
Tumba O.Slap Flam mf
6
522
Bongo1 Hi StickEdge mf
6
399
Syn. Castanet
6
461
Tumba O.Slap Flam f
6
523
Bongo1 Hi StickEdge f
6
400
Syn. Shaker
7
462
Tumba Muffled
6
524
Bongo1 Hi StickBounce
6
401
Syn. Noise
8
463
Conga1 Lo Basstone
6
525
Bongo1 Hi Cuptone
6
402
Syn. FX1
8
464
Conga1 Lo Open mf
6
526
Bongo1 Hi Slap
6
403
Syn. FX2
8
465
Conga1 Lo Open Slap
6
527
Bongo2 Lo Open a
6
404
Syn. FX3
8
466
Conga1 Lo Glissando
6
528
Bongo2 Lo Open b
6
405
Syn. FX4
8
467
Conga1 Lo Muffled
6
529
Bongo2 Lo Mute
6
406
Syn. FX5
8
468
Conga1 Lo Closed
6
530
Bongo2 Hi Open a
6
407
Syn. Perc. Ahh
8
469
Conga1 Lo Closed Slap
6
531
Bongo2 Hi Open b
6
408
Boom
8
470
Conga1 Lo Heel
6
532
Bongo2 Hi Muffled
6
409
Zap1
8
471
Conga1 Lo Toe
6
533
Bongo2 Hi Slap
6
410
Zap2
8
472
Conga1 Hi Basstone mf
6
534
Bongo2 Lo Heel
6
411
Vinyl Hit
8
473
Conga1 Hi Basstone f
6
535
Bongo2 Lo Muffled
6
412
DJ Vinyl Sliced 01
8
474
Conga1 Hi Open mf
6
536
Bongo3 Lo Open
6
413
DJ Vinyl Sliced 02
8
475
Conga1 Hi Open Slap
6
537
Bongo3 Lo Slap
6
414
DJ Vinyl Sliced 03
8
476
Conga1 Hi Muffled
6
538
Bongo3 Lo Stick
6
415
DJ Vinyl Sliced 04
8
477
Conga1 Hi Closed
6
539
Bongo3 Hi Open
6
416
DJ Vinyl Sliced 05
8
478
Conga1 Hi Closed Slap
6
540
Bongo3 Hi Slap
6
417
DJ Vinyl Sliced 06
8
479
Conga1 Hi Heel
6
541
Bongo3 Hi Stick1
6
418
DJ Vinyl Sliced 07
8
480
Conga1 Hi Toe
6
542
Bongo3 Hi Stick2
6
Drum Samples
#
Sample
Sample
Sample
309
Family
#
Family
#
543
Okonkolo Boca Open mp
6
605
Timbales1 Hi Edge
6
667
Castanet Single
Family
6
544
Okonkolo Boca Open mf
6
606
Timbales1 Hi RimShot mf
6
668
Castanet Double
6
545
Okonkolo Boca Open f
6
607
Timbales1 Hi RimShot f
6
669
Timpani
1
546
Okonkolo Boca Open ff
6
608
Timbales1 Hi RimShot ff
6
670
Tsuzumi
6
547
Okonkolo Chacha Open mp
6
609
Timbales1 Hi Abanico1
6
671
Cabasa 1 L a Down
7
548
Okonkolo Chacha Open mf
6
610
Timbales1 Hi Abanico2
6
672
Cabasa 1 L a Up
7
549
Okonkolo Chacha Open f
6
611
Timbales1 Hi Mute
6
673
Cabasa 1 L b Down
7
550
Okonkolo Chacha Open ff
6
612
Timbales1 Hi Paila mf
7
674
Cabasa 1 L b Up
7
551
Okonkolo Chacha Slap mp
6
613
Timbales1 Hi Paila f
7
675
Cabasa 1 S a Down
7
552
Okonkolo Chacha Slap mf
6
614
Timbales2 Lo Open
6
676
Cabasa 1 S a Up
7
553
Okonkolo Chacha Slap f
6
615
Timbales2 Lo Mute
6
677
Cabasa 1 S b Down
7
554
Baya Open
6
616
Timbales2 Lo Rim
6
678
Cabasa 1 S b up
7
555
Baya Ghe
6
617
Timbales2 Hi Edge
6
679
Cabasa 2 L Stack b
7
556
Baya GheUp a
6
618
Timbales2 Hi Rim1
6
680
Cabasa 2 L Stack a
7
557
Baya GheUp b
6
619
Timbales2 Hi Rim2
6
681
Cabasa 2 L Roll
7
558
Baya KaPalm
6
620
Timbales2 Paila
7
682
Cabasa 2 S Stack a
7
559
Baya KaToe a
6
621
Cowbell1
7
683
Cabasa 2 S Stack b
7
560
Baya KaToe b
6
622
Cowbell2
7
684
Cabasa 2 S Roll
7
561
Baya Nail a
6
623
Cowbell3
7
685
Cabasa 3 WS
7
562
Baya Nail b
6
624
Cowbell4 Open
7
686
Cabasa 3 Up
7
563
Baya Nail c
6
625
Cowbell4 Mute
7
687
Cabasa 3 Down
7
564
Baya Ge
6
626
Cowbell5 Open a
7
688
Cabasa 3 Tap
7
565
Baya Up
6
627
Cowbell5 Open b
7
689
Caxixi1 a
7
566
Baya UpDown a
6
628
Cowbell5 Mute
7
690
Caxixi1 b
7
567
Baya UpDown b
6
629
Cowbell6
7
691
Caxixi1 c
7
568
Baya Mute1
6
630
Agogo Bell
7
692
Caxixi2 a
7
569
Baya Mute2
6
631
Chacha Bell
7
693
Caxixi2 b
7
570
Baya Mute3
6
632
Mambo Bell
7
694
Caxixi2 c
7
571
Tabla1 Na
6
633
Triangle Open
7
695
Caxixi3 Hard
7
572
Tabla1 Open
6
634
Triangle Mute
7
696
Caxixi3 Soft
7
573
Tabla1 Tin
6
635
Sleigh Bell
7
697
Shaker1 Push a
7
574
Tabla1 Mute1
6
636
Rap Sleigh Bell
7
698
Shaker1 Push b
7
575
Tabla1 Mute2
6
637
Jingle Bell
7
699
Shaker1 Pull a
7
576
Tabla1 Mute3
6
638
Bells Open
7
700
Shaker1 Pull b
7
577
Tabla2 Tin a
6
639
Finger Cymbal
7
701
Shaker1 Accent a
7
578
Tabla2 Tin b
6
640
Marc Tree
7
702
Shaker1 Accent b
7
579
Tabla2 Na a
6
641
Marc TreeLP
7
703
Shaker1 Slow a
7
580
Tabla2 Na b
6
642
Flexatone
7
704
Shaker1 Slow b
7
581
Tabla2 Na c
6
643
Chinese Gong
5
705
Shaker1 Slow c
7
582
Tabla2 Tun a
6
644
Claves1 Lo a
6
706
Shaker1 Roll a
7
583
Tabla2 Tun b
6
645
Claves1 Lo b
6
707
Shaker1 Roll b
7
584
Tabla2 Tele a
6
646
Claves1 Hi a
6
708
Shaker1 Roll c
7
585
Tabla2 Tele b
6
647
Claves1 Hi b
6
709
Shaker2
7
586
Tabla2 Tele c
6
648
Claves2
6
710
Shaker3
7
587
Tabla2 Ti a
6
649
Wood Block 1 a
6
711
Maracas Push
7
588
Tabla2 Ti b
6
650
Wood Block 1 b
6
712
Maracas Pull
7
589
Tabla2 Ti c
6
651
Wood Block 2 a
6
713
Dumbek a
6
590
Tabla2 Tera
6
652
Wood Block 2 b
6
714
Dumbek b
6
591
Taiko Open
6
653
Wood Block 3 a
6
715
Dumbek c
6
592
Taiko Rim
6
654
Wood Block 3 b
6
716
Dumbek d
6
593
Timbales1 Lo Open mp
6
655
Wood Block 4 a
6
717
Dumbek e
6
594
Timbales1 Lo Open mf
6
656
Wood Block 4 b
6
718
Dumbek f
6
595
Timbales1 Lo Edge mf
6
657
Wood Block 5 a
6
719
Dumbek g
6
596
Timbales1 Lo Edge f
6
658
Wood Block 5 b
6
720
Dumbek h
6
597
Timbales1 Lo RimShot
6
659
Wood Block 6 a
6
721
Dumbek i
6
598
Timbales1 Lo Abanico
6
660
Wood Block 6 b
6
722
Dumbek j
6
599
Timbales1 Lo Roll
6
661
Wood Block 7
6
723
Dumbek k
6
600
Timbales1 Lo Mute mf
6
662
Wood Block 8
6
724
Djembe L Basstone a
6
601
Timbales1 Lo Mute f
6
663
Castanet 1 a
6
725
Djembe L Basstone b
6
602
Timbales1 Lo Paila mf
7
664
Castanet 1 b
6
726
Djembe L Basstone c
6
603
Timbales1 Lo Paila f
7
665
Castanet 1 c
6
727
Djembe L Open
6
604
Timbales1 Hi Open
6
666
Castanet 2
6
728
Djembe L OpenSlap
6
Appendix
Factory data
310
#
Factory data
Drum Samples
Family
#
Family
#
729
Djembe L ClosedSlap
Sample
6
791
M.E.1 Sagat Close
Sample
7
853
Sample
M.E.2 Renk
Family
6
730
Djembe S Basstone a
6
792
M.E.1 Surdo L Mute
6
854
M.E.2 Renkbir
6
731
Djembe S Basstone b
6
793
M.E.1 Surdo L Open
6
855
M.E.2 Renkiki
6
732
Djembe S Basstone c
6
794
M.E.1 Tabla Medium
6
856
M.E.2 Tefacik
6
733
Djembe Open
6
795
M.E.1 Tabla Dom
6
857
M.E.2 Tefgum
6
734
Djembe Mute
6
796
M.E.1 Tabla Flam
6
858
M.E.2 Teftek1
6
735
Djembe Slap
6
797
M.E.1 Tabla Rim
6
859
M.E.2 Teftokat
6
736
Djembe S Open
6
798
M.E.1 Tabla Tak
6
860
M.E.2 Teftrill
6
737
Djembe S Open Slap a
6
799
M.E.1 Timbales
7
861
M.E.2 Tefzil
6
738
Djembe S Open Slap b
6
800
M.E.1 Udu f Open
6
862
M.E.2 Tek1
6
739
Djembe S Closed Slap a
6
801
M.E.1 Alkis
6
863
M.E.2 Tek2
6
740
Djembe S Closed Slap b
6
802
M.E.1 Bandir Open
6
864
M.E.2 Tekbir
6
741
Djembe S Closed Slap c
6
803
M.E.1 Bandir Closed
6
865
M.E.2 Tokat
6
742
Djembe Bass
6
804
M.E.1 Bongo Roll
6
866
M.E.2 Toprgum
6
743
Udu Open a
6
805
M.E.1 Darbuka1 Tek1
6
867
M.E.2 Toprtek1
6
744
Udu Open b
6
806
M.E.1 Darbuka1 Tek2
6
868
M.E.2 Toprtek2
6
745
Udu Open c
6
807
M.E.1 Darbuka1 Open
6
869
M.E.2 Toprtokat
6
746
Udu Open d
6
808
M.E.1 Darbuka1 Closed
6
870
M.E.2 TRILL1
6
747
Udu Slide a
7
809
M.E.1 Darbuka2
6
871
M.E.2 Zil1
7
748
Udu Slide b
7
810
M.E.1 Darbuka3
6
872
M.E.2 Zil2
7
749
Udu Half Open a
6
811
M.E.1 Darbuka4
6
873
M.E.2 Zil3
7
750
Udu Half Open b
6
812
M.E.1 Darbuka D1
6
874
M.E.2 Zilgit
8
751
Udu Half Open c
6
813
M.E.1 Darbuka D2
6
875
Orchestra Hit
8
752
Udu Bell a
6
814
M.E.1 Darbuka D3
6
876
Band Hit
8
753
Udu Bell b
6
815
M.E.1 Darbuka5 D1
6
877
Impact Hit
8
754
WD Brazillia1
2
816
M.E.1 Darbuka5 D2
6
878
Metal Hit
8
755
WD Brazillia2
2
817
M.E.1 Darbuka5 D3
6
879
Yeah!
8
756
WD Ethno SD1
2
818
M.E.1 Darbuka6 Mute
6
880
Yeah! Solo
8
757
WD Ethno SD2
2
819
M.E.1 Darbuka6 Open
7
881
Uhh
8
758
WD Ethno SD3
2
820
M.E.1 Darbuka6 Rim
6
882
Hit It
8
759
WD Ethno SD4
2
821
M.E.1 Darbuka6 Dom Ak
6
883
Uhhhh Solo
8
760
WD Ethno SD5
2
822
M.E.1 Kup1
6
884
Comp Voice Noise
8
761
WD Ethno SD6
2
823
M.E.1 Kup2
6
885
Stadium
8
762
WD Kangaroo1
2
824
M.E.1 Ramazan Davul1
6
886
Applause
8
763
WD Kangaroo2
8
825
M.E.1 Ramazan Davul2
6
887
Scream
8
764
WD Kangaroo3
8
826
M.E.1 Ramazan Davul3
6
888
Laughing
8
765
WD Kangaroo4
8
827
M.E.1 Tef1
7
889
Footsteps1
8
766
WD Kangaroo5
8
828
M.E.1 Tef2
7
890
Footsteps2
8
767
WD Kangaroo6
8
829
M.E.1 Tef3
7
891
Click
8
768
WD Kangaroo7
8
830
M.E.2 BD Kick
1
892
Bird1
8
769
WD Kangaroo8
8
831
M.E.2 SD
2
893
Bird2
8
770
Tambourine Push
7
832
M.E.2 Asagum
6
894
Dog
8
771
Tambourine Pull
7
833
M.E.2 Asmatek
6
895
Gallop
8
772
Tambourine Acc1
7
834
M.E.2 Bendirgum
6
896
Crickets
8
773
Tambourine Acc2
7
835
M.E.2 Bendirtek1
6
897
Cat
8
774
Tambourine Mute1
6
836
M.E.2 Bendirtek2
6
898
Growl
8
775
Tambourine Mute2
6
837
M.E.2 Dm1
6
899
Heart Beat
8
776
Tambourine Open
6
838
M.E.2 Findik
6
900
Punch
8
777
M.E.1 Douf Rim Ak
6
839
M.E.2 Gum
6
901
Tribe
8
778
M.E.1 Douf Tek Ak1
6
840
M.E.2 Hollotokat
6
902
Rainstick
8
779
M.E.1 Douf Tek Ak2
6
841
M.E.2 Islik1
8
903
Door Creak
8
780
M.E.1 Pand Open
6
842
M.E.2 Islik2
8
904
Door Slam
8
781
M.E.1 Pand Pattern1
6
843
M.E.2 Kapalit
6
905
Car Engine
8
782
M.E.1 Pand Pattern2
6
844
M.E.2 Kasik1
6
906
Car Stop
8
783
M.E.1 Pand Pattern3
6
845
M.E.2 Kasik2
6
907
Car Pass
8
784
M.E.1 Pand Pattern4
6
846
M.E.2 Kasik3
6
908
Car Crash
8
785
M.E.1 Rek Dom Ak
7
847
M.E.2 Kasik4
6
909
Train
8
786
M.E.1 Rek Jingle
7
848
M.E.2 Kemik
6
910
Helicopter
8
787
M.E.1 Rik1
6
849
M.E.2 Kenar1
6
911
Gun Shot1
8
788
M.E.1 Rik2
6
850
M.E.2 Kenartek
6
912
Gun Shot2
8
789
M.E.1 Rik3
6
851
M.E.2 Ramazangum
6
913
Machine Gun
8
790
M.E.1 Sagat Half Open
7
852
M.E.2 Ramazantek
6
914
Laser Gun
8
Factory data
Drum Samples
Sample
Explosion
Family
8
916
Thunder
8
917
Wind
8
918
Stream
8
919
Bubble
8
920
Church Bell
8
921
Telephone Ring
8
922
Xylophone Spectr
8
923
Cricket Spectrum
8
924
Air Vortex
8
925
Noise White
8
926
Noise FM Mod
8
927
Tubular
7
928
Gamelan
7
929
Tambura
7
930
Gtr Cut Noise1
8
931
Gtr Cut Noise2
8
932
Power Chord
8
933
Fret Noise
8
934
Dist. Slide1
8
935
Dist. Slide2
8
936
E.Gtr Pick1
8
937
E.Gtr Pick2
8
938
Gtr Scratch1
8
939
Gtr Scratch2
8
940
Amp Noise
8
941
Space Lore
8
942
Swish Terra
8
943
Hand Drill
8
944
Mouth Harp
8
945
Empty
1
Appendix
#
915
311
312
Factory data
Performances
Performances
All Performances are user-editable. Use the following table as a model for your own Perfomance lists.
Note: You can remotely select Performances on the Pa2X, by sending it Bank Select MSB (CC#0), Bank Select LSB (CC#32) and Program
Change messages on the Control channel (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230).
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
1
0
PC
Bank: 1
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
1
PC
Bank: 2
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
2
PC
Bank: 3
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
3
PC
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
4
3
3
3
3
5
4
4
4
4
6
5
5
5
5
7
6
6
6
6
8
7
7
7
7
9
8
8
8
8
10
9
9
9
9
11
10
10
10
10
12
11
11
11
11
13
12
12
12
12
14
13
13
13
13
15
14
14
14
14
16
15
15
15
15
CC#0 CC#32
1
1
4
PC
0
Bank: 5
CC#0 CC#32
1
5
PC
0
Bank: 6
CC#0 CC#32
1
6
PC
0
Bank: 7
CC#0 CC#32
1
7
Bank: 4
0
PC
0
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
4
3
3
3
3
5
4
4
4
4
6
5
5
5
5
7
6
6
6
6
8
7
7
7
7
9
8
8
8
8
10
9
9
9
9
11
10
10
10
10
12
11
11
11
11
13
12
12
12
12
14
13
13
13
13
15
14
14
14
14
16
15
15
15
15
Bank: 8
Factory data
Performances
1
1
8
PC
Bank: 9
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
9
PC
Bank: 10
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
10
PC
Bank: 11
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
11
PC
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
4
3
3
3
3
5
4
4
4
4
6
5
5
5
5
7
6
6
6
6
8
7
7
7
7
9
8
8
8
8
10
9
9
9
9
11
10
10
10
10
12
11
11
11
11
13
12
12
12
12
14
13
13
13
13
15
14
14
14
14
16
15
15
15
15
CC#0 CC#32
1
1
12
PC
Bank: 13
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
13
PC
Bank: 14
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
14
PC
Bank: 15
0
CC#0 CC#32
1
15
PC
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
4
3
3
3
3
5
4
4
4
4
6
5
5
5
5
7
6
6
6
6
8
7
7
7
7
9
8
8
8
8
10
9
9
9
9
11
10
10
10
10
12
11
11
11
11
13
12
12
12
12
14
13
13
13
13
15
14
14
14
14
16
15
15
15
15
1
1
16
PC
0
Bank: 17
CC#0 CC#32
1
17
PC
0
Bank: 18
CC#0 CC#32
1
18
PC
0
Bank: 19
CC#0 CC#32
1
19
Bank: 16
0
2
CC#0 CC#32
Bank: 12
0
PC
Bank: 20
0
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
4
3
3
3
3
5
4
4
4
4
6
5
5
5
5
7
6
6
6
6
8
7
7
7
7
9
8
8
8
8
10
9
9
9
9
11
10
10
10
10
12
11
11
11
11
13
12
12
12
12
14
13
13
13
13
15
14
14
14
14
16
15
15
15
15
Appendix
CC#0 CC#32
313
314
Factory data
Pads
Pads
You can assign the following Hits or Sequences to the four Pads. Older sounds might be still assigned to the Pads when loading musical
resources generated with an older operating system (see the following section).
#
HIT - Drum
#
HIT - Percussion
#
HIT - World 1
#
Hit - World 2
#
HIT - Orchestral
1
88 Cowbell
1
Agogo 1
1
Baja 1
1
Kup 1
1
Brass Fall
2
88 Crash
2
Agogo 2
2
Baja 2
2
Kup 2
2
Orch.Cymbal 1
3
China
3
Castanet 1
3
China Gong
3
Kup 3
3
Orch.Cymbal 2
4
Crash 1
4
Castanet 2
4
Darbuka 1
4
Kup 4
4
Orch. Hit
5
Crash 2
5
Conga Hi
5
Darbuka 2
5
Ramazan 1
5
Orch. Snare
6
Rev. Cymbal
6
Conga Low
6
Darbuka 3
6
Ramazan 2
6
Orch. Sn. Roll
7
Ride 1
7
Conga Mute
7
Darbuka 4
7
Ramazan 3
7
Timpani 1
8
Ride 2
8
Conga Slap
8
Darbuka 5
8
Rek Dom Ak
8
Timpani 2
9
Ride Bell
9
Cowbell
9
Darbuka 6
9
Rik 1
9
Timpani 3
10
Splash
10
Cuica 1
10
Darbuka 7
10
Rik 2
10
Timpani 4
11
Sticks
11
Cuica 2
11
Darbuka 8
11
Rik 3
11
Orchestra Tutti
12
Rim-Shot
12
Jingle Bell
12
Davul
12
Sagat 1
12
13
Hi Tom Flam
13
Long Guiro
13
Douf Rim Ak
13
Sagat 2
13
14
Mid Tom Flam
14
Short Guiro
14
Dragon Gong
14
Tef 1
14
15
Low Tom Flam
15
Open Bells
15
Hollo 1
15
Tef 2
15
16
Tom Flam End
16
Rain Stick
16
Hollo 2
16
Tef 3
16
17
Drum Single A
17
Tamb. Acc. 1
17
17
Tef 4
17
18
Drum Single B
18
Tamb. Acc. 2
18
18
Tef 5
18
19
Drum Single C
19
Tamb. Open
19
19
Tef 6
19
20
Drum Single D
20
Tamb. Push
20
20
20
21
Drum Sing.HouseA
21
Timbale Hi
21
21
21
22
Drum Sing.HouseB
22
Timbale Low
22
22
22
23
Drum Sing.HouseC
23
Timbale Rim 1
23
23
23
24
Drum Sing.HouseD
24
Timbale Rim 2
24
24
24
25
Drum Kit A
25
Triangle 1
25
25
25
26
Drum Kit B
26
Triangle 2
26
26
26
27
Drum Kit C
27
Vibra Slap
27
27
27
28
Drum Kit D
28
Whistle 1
28
28
28
29
Drum Kit E
29
Whistle 2
29
29
29
30
Drum Kit F
30
Windchimes 1
30
30
30
31
31
Windchimes 2
31
31
31
32
32
Windchimes 3
32
32
32
Factory data
Pads
HIT - Synth&Pad
HIT - Voice
#
HIT - Blocks
#
HIT - Misc&SFX 1
#
HIT - Misc&SFX 2
1
Cosmic
2
VCF Modulation
1
Aah !
1
Blk Funk 1 A
1
Applause
1
Bubble
2
Hit it !
2
Blk Funk 1 B
2
Bird 1
2
3
Car Crash
Planet Lead
3
Laughing
3
Blk Funk 1 C
3
Bird 2
3
Car Engine
4
Brightness
4
Scream
4
Blk Funk 1 D
4
Cat
4
Car Pass
5
Crystal
5
Uuh !
5
Blk Funk 2 A
5
Church Bell
5
Car Stop
6
New Age Pad
6
Yeah ! 1
6
Blk Funk 2 B
6
Crickets
6
Explosion
7
Fifths Lead
7
Yeah ! 2
7
Blk Funk 2 C
7
Dist. Slide 1
7
Gun Shot
8
Calliope
8
8
Blk Funk 2 D
8
Dist. Slide 2
8
Helicopter
9
Caribbean
9
9
Blk Organ A
9
Dog
9
Jet Plane
10
Rezbo
10
10
Blk Organ B
10
Door Creak
10
Laser Gun
11
Digital Polisix
11
11
Blk Organ C
11
Door Slam
11
Machine Gun
12
Motion Raver
12
12
Blk Organ D
12
Foosteps 1
12
Phone Ring
13
Moving Bell
13
13
Blk Choir A
13
Foosteps 2
13
Punch
14
Elastick Pad
14
14
Blk Choir B
14
Heart Beat
14
River
15
Rave
15
15
Blk Choir C
15
Horse Gallop
15
Seashore
16
Dance Remix
16
16
Blk Choir D
16
Lion
16
Siren
17
Vintage Sweep
17
17
17
Scratch 1
17
Starship
18
You Decide
18
18
18
Scratch 2
18
Thunder
19
19
19
19
Scratch 3
19
Train
20
20
20
20
Scratch 4
20
Wind
21
21
21
21
Scratch 5
21
22
22
22
22
Scratch 6
22
23
23
23
23
Stadium
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
23
32
#
SEQ - Drum
#
SEQ - Percussion
#
SEQ - Groove
#
SEQ - Bass
#
SEQ - Piano
1
Drum DrumBasSolo
1
Perc FingerSnap
1
Grv Drum 1
1
Bass Pick Easy
1
Piano Accomp 1
2
Drum Snare Solo
2
Perc Triang.+HH
2
Grv Drum 2
2
Bass Pick Med.
2
Piano Accomp 2
3
Drum 8 Bt Easy
3
Perc Latin 1
3
Grv Brush
3
Bass Pick Busy
3
Piano Accomp 3
4
Drum 8 Bt Medium
4
Perc Latin 2
4
Grv Jazzy
4
Bass Finger Easy
4
Piano Accomp 4
5
Drum Rock 1
5
Perc Latin 3
5
Grv Latin
5
Bass Finger Med.
5
Piano Accomp 5
6
Drum Rock 2
6
Perc Mix
6
Grv HipHop 1
6
Bass Finger Walk
6
Piano Accomp 6
7
Drum Brush 1 3/4
7
Perc Soft
7
Grv HipHop 2
7
Bass Latin
7
Piano Accomp 7
8
Drum Brush 2 3/4
8
Perc Conga
8
Grv HipHop 3
8
Bass Slap
8
Piano Accomp 8
9
Drum Disco 1
9
Perc Conga+Ride
9
Grv HipHop 4
9
Bass Digital
9
Piano Accomp 9
10
Drum Disco 2
10
Perc Conga+Mix
10
Grv HipHop 5
10
Bass Synth
10
Piano Arpeg. 1
11
Drum Disco 3
11
Perc Conga+Bongo
11
Grv HipHop 6
11
Bass DigiFilter1
11
Piano Arpeg. 2
12
Drum Disco 4
12
Perc Conga+Tamb.
12
Grv Funk 1
12
Bass DigiFilter2
12
Piano Arp 1 3/4
13
Drum Funk 1
13
Perc Shaker
13
Grv Funk 2
13
Bass DigiFilter3
13
Piano Arp 2 3/4
14
Drum Funk 2
14
Perc Shak+Tamb 1
14
Grv Funk 3
14
14
Piano Arp Down
15
Drum Brush Shuff
15
Perc Shak+Tamb 2
15
Grv House 1
15
15
Piano Arp Up
16
Drum Latin
16
Perc Shak+Cong 1
16
Grv House 2
16
16
Piano Rhythm 1/8
17
Drum Progressiv1
17
Perc Shak+Cong 2
17
Grv Analog
17
17
Piano Rhythm1/8T
18
Drum Progressiv2
18
Perc Tambourine1
18
Grv Garage 1
18
18
Piano Latin Rock
19
Drum Fill 1
19
Perc Tambourine2
19
Grv Garage 2
19
19
Piano Salsa 1
20
Drum Fill 2
20
Perc Tamb+Conga1
20
Grv Dance 1
20
20
Piano Salsa 2
21
Drum Break
21
Perc Tamb+Conga2
21
Grv Dance 2
21
21
Pno GlissDwnWhit
22
Drum End
22
Perc Guiro+Bongo
22
Grv Techno 1
22
22
Pno GlissUpWhite
23
23
Perc Cowbel+Tamb
23
Grv Techno 2
24
24
Perc 3/4
24
25
25
Perc 6/8
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
23
23
Pno GlissDwnBlak
24
24
Pno GlissUpBlack
25
25
Honky End
26
26
Appendix
#
315
316
Factory data
Pads
#
SEQ - Guitar
#
SEQ - Orchestral
#
SEQ - Solo
#
SEQ - Synth&Pad
#
SEQ - Misc&SFX
1
Gtr Steel Strum1
1
Timpani Roll 1
1
Solo Marimba
1
Synth Seq 1
1
Military 1
2
Gtr Steel Strum2
2
Timpani Roll 2
2
Solo Kalimba 1
2
Synth Seq 2
2
Military 2
3
Gtr Steel Strum3
3
Orch. Tutti 1
3
Solo Kalimba 2
3
Synth Seq 3
3
Military 3
4
Gtr Steel Strum4
4
Orch. Tutti 2
4
Solo Steel Drums
4
Synth Seq 4
4
Military 4
5
Gtr Steel Strum5
5
Orch. Tutti 3
5
Solo Vibes
5
Synth Seq 5
5
Horror 1
6
Gtr Steel Strum6
6
Orch. Tutti 4
6
Solo Gtr Dist.
6
Synth Seq 6
6
Horror 2
7
GtSteelStrum 3/4
7
Orch. Harp 1
7
Solo Slide Steel
7
Synth Seq 7
7
Horror 3
8
Gtr Steel Arp 1
8
Orch. Harp 2
8
Solo Banjo
8
Synth Seq 8
8
Horror 4
9
Gtr Steel Arp 2
9
Orch. Harp 3
9
Solo Violin
9
Synth Seq 9
9
Lullaby 1
10
Gtr Steel Arp 3
10
Orch. Harp 4
10
Solo Harpsi 3/4
10
Synth Seq 10
10
Lullaby 2
11
GtrSteel Arp 6/8
11
Orch. Harp 5
11
Solo Harpsi 4/4
11
Synth Seq 11
11
Nature - River
12
Gtr Steel Mute 1
12
French Horns 1
12
Solo Gtr Funk
12
Synth Portam. 1
12
Nature - Storm
13
Gtr Steel Mute 2
13
French Horns 2
13
Solo Piano 1
13
Synth Portam. 2
13
Metronome 3/4
14
Guitar Country
14
Strings 1
14
Solo Piano 2
14
Synth Portam. 3
14
PreCount 3/4
15
Gtr Nylon Strum1
15
Strings 2
15
Solo Piano 3
15
Synth Portam. 4
15
Metronome 4/4
16
Gtr Nylon Strum2
16
Strings 3
16
Solo Piano 4
16
Synth Filter 1
16
PreCount 4/4
17
Gtr Nylon Strum3
17
Strings 4
17
Solo Synth 1
17
Synth Filter 2
17
PreCount 4/4 Dbl
18
Gtr Nylon Strum4
18
Strings 5
18
Solo Synth 2
18
Synth Pad Panned
18
Toccata
19
Gtr Nylon Strum5
19
Strings 6
19
Solo Synth 3
19
Synth Master Pad
19
5th Intro
20
Gtr Nylon Strum6
20
Strings 7
20
Solo Synth 4
20
Synth Dark Pad
20
Primavera
21
Gtr Nylon Arp 1
21
21
Solo Synth 5
21
21
Circus 1
22
Gtr Nylon Arp 2
22
22
Solo Synth 6
22
22
Circus 2
23
Gtr Nylon Arp 3
23
23
Solo Guitar 1
23
23
24
GtrNylon Arp 3/4
24
24
Solo Guitar 2
24
24
25
25
25
Solo Guitar 3
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
Factory data
Effects
317
Effects
FX assignable to FX processors A to D
39: St. Auto Fade Mod.
1: Stereo Compressor
40: 2Voice Resonator
2: Stereo Limiter
41: Doppler
3: Multiband Limiter
42: Scratch
4: St.MasteringLimtr
43: Grain Shifter
5: Stereo Gate
44: Stereo Tremolo
6: St.Parametric4EQ
45: St. Env. Tremolo
7: St. Graphic 7EQ
46: Stereo Auto Pan
8: St.Exciter/Enhncr
47: St. Phaser + Trml
9: Stereo Isolator
48: St. Ring Modulator
10: St. Wah/Auto Wah
49: Detune
11: St. Vintage Wah
50: Pitch Shifter
12: St. Random Filter
51: Pitch Shifter BPM
13: Multi Mode Filter
52: Pitch Shift Mod.
14: St. Sub Oscillator
53: Organ Vib/Chorus
15: Talking Modulator
54: Rotary Speaker
16: Stereo Decimator
55: L/C/R Delay
17: St. Analog Record
56: Stereo/CrossDelay
18: OD/Hi.Gain Wah
57: St. Multitap Delay
19: St. Guitar Cabinet
58: St. Mod Delay
20: St. Bass Cabinet
59: St. Dynamic Delay
21: Bass Amp Model
60: St. AutoPanningDly
22: Bass Amp+Cabinet
61: Tape Echo
23: Tube PreAmp Model
62: Auto Reverse
24: St. Tube PreAmp
63: Sequence BPM Dly
25: MicModel+PreAmp
64: L/C/R BPM Delay
26: Stereo Chorus
65: Stereo BPM Delay
27: St.HarmonicChorus
66: St.BPM Mtap Delay
28: St. Biphase Mod.
67: St.BPM Mod. Delay
29: Multitap Cho/Delay
68: St.BPMAutoPanDly
30: Ensemble
69: Tape Echo BPM
31: Polysix Ensemble
70: Reverb Hall
32: Stereo Flanger
71: Reverb SmoothHall
33: St. Random Flanger
72: Reverb Wet Plate
34: St. Env. Flanger
73: Reverb Dry Plate
35: Stereo Phaser
74: Reverb Room
36: St. Random Phaser
75: ReverbBrightRoom
37: St. Env. Phaser
76: Early Reflections
38: Stereo Vibrato
77: P4EQ - Exciter
78: P4EQ - Wah
Appendix
The following table lists all Pa2X Factory Effects. Detailed information on each effect’s parameter are contained in the “Advanced Edit”
addendum that you can find in the Accessory CD.
318
Factory data
Effects
80: P4EQ - Phaser
FX assignable to FX processors B and D
only
81: P4EQ - Mt. Delay
109: St.Mltband Limiter
82: Comp - Wah
110: PianoBody/Damper
83: Comp - Amp Sim
111: OD/HyperGain Wah
84: Comp - OD/HiGain
112: GuitarAmp + P4EQ
85: Comp - P4EQ
113: BassTubeAmp+Cab.
86: Comp - Cho/Flng
114: St. Mic + PreAmp
87: Comp - Phaser
115: Multitap Cho/Delay
88: Comp - Mt. Delay
116: St. Pitch Shifter
89: Limiter - P4EQ
117: St. PitchShift BPM
90: Limiter-Cho/Flng
118: Rotary SpeakerOD
91: Limiter - Phaser
119: L/C/R Long Delay
92: Limiter - Mt.Delay
120: St/Cross Long Dly
93: Exciter - Comp
121: Hold Delay
94: Exciter - Limiter
122: LCR BPM Long Dly
95: Exciter-Cho/Flng
123: St. BPM Long Dly
96: Exciter - Phaser
124: Early Reflections
79: P4EQ - Cho/Flng
97: Exciter - Mt.Delay
98: OD/HG - Amp Sim
FX assignable to FX processor D only
99: OD/HG - Cho/Flng
125 : Vocoder
100: OD/HG - Phaser
101: OD/HG - Mt.Delay
102: Wah - Amp Sim
103: Decimator - Amp
104: Decimator - Comp
105: AmpSim - Tremolo
106: Cho/Flng - Mt.Dly
107: Phaser - Cho/Flng
108: Reverb - Gate
Factory data
MIDI Setup
319
Default
Master Kbd
Player1
Player 2
Accordion 1
Accordion 2
Accordion 3
Ext. Seq
1
P1_Tr 1
Global
P1_Tr 1
P2_Tr 1
Global
Upp1
Upp1
P1_Tr 1
2
P1_Tr 2
Control
P1_Tr 2
P2_Tr 2
Lower
Lower
Lower
P1_Tr 2
3
P1_Tr 3
-
P1_Tr 3
P2_Tr 3
Bass
-
Bass
P1_Tr 3
4
P1_Tr 4
-
P1_Tr 4
P2_Tr 4
-
Upp2
Upp2
P1_Tr 4
5
P1_Tr 5
-
P1_Tr 5
P2_Tr 5
-
Upp3
Upp3
P1_Tr 5
6
P1_Tr 6
-
P1_Tr 6
P2_Tr 6
-
-
-
P1_Tr 6
7
P1_Tr 7
-
P1_Tr 7
P2_Tr 7
-
-
-
P1_Tr 7
8
P1_Tr 8
-
P1_Tr 8
P2_Tr 8
-
-
-
P1_Tr 8
9
P1_Tr 9
-
P1_Tr 9
P2_Tr 9
-
Bass
-
P1_Tr 9
10
P1_Tr 10
-
P1_Tr 10
P2_Tr 10
Drum
Drum
Drum
P1_Tr 10
11
P1_Tr 11
-
P1_Tr 11
P2_Tr 11
Perc
Perc
Perc
P1_Tr 11
12
P1_Tr 12
-
P1_Tr 12
P2_Tr 12
Acc1
Acc1
Acc1
P1_Tr 12
13
P1_Tr 13
-
P1_Tr 13
P2_Tr 13
Acc2
Acc2
Acc2
P1_Tr 13
14
P1_Tr 14
-
P1_Tr 14
P2_Tr 14
Acc3
Acc3
Acc3
P1_Tr 14
15
P1_Tr 15
-
P1_Tr 15
P2_Tr 15
Acc4
Acc4
Acc4
P1_Tr 15
16
P1_Tr 16
-
P1_Tr 16
P2_Tr 16
Acc5
Acc5
Acc5
P1_Tr 16
1
1 Upp1
Upp1
P1_Tr 1
P2_Tr 1
Upp1
P1_Tr 1
P2_Tr 1
Upp. 1
2
Upp2
Upp2
P1_Tr 2
P2_Tr 2
Upp2
P1_Tr 2
P2_Tr 2
-
MIDI IN
Channel
3
Upp3
Upp3
P1_Tr 3
P2_Tr 3
Upp3
P1_Tr 3
P2_Tr 3
-
4
Lower
Lower
P1_Tr 4
P2_Tr 4
Lower
P1_Tr 4
P2_Tr 4
-
5
-
-
P1_Tr 5
P2_Tr 5
-
P1_Tr 5
P2_Tr 5
-
6
-
-
P1_Tr 6
P2_Tr 6
-
P1_Tr 6
P2_Tr 6
-
7
-
-
P1_Tr 7
P2_Tr 7
-
P1_Tr 7
P2_Tr 7
-
8
-
-
P1_Tr 8
P2_Tr 8
-
P1_Tr 8
P2_Tr 8
-
9
Bass
Bass
P1_Tr 9
P2_Tr 9
Bass
P1_Tr 9
P2_Tr 9
-
10
Drum
Drum
P1_Tr 10
P2_Tr 10
Drum
P1_Tr 10
P2_Tr 10
-
MIDI OUT
Channel
11
Perc
Perc
P1_Tr 11
P2_Tr 11
Perc
P1_Tr 11
P2_Tr 11
-
12
Acc1
Acc1
P1_Tr 12
P2_Tr 12
Acc1
P1_Tr 12
P2_Tr 12
-
13
Acc2
Acc2
P1_Tr 13
P2_Tr 13
Acc2
P1_Tr 13
P2_Tr 13
-
14
Acc3
Acc3
P1_Tr 14
P2_Tr 14
Acc3
P1_Tr 14
P2_Tr 14
-
15
Acc4
Acc4
P1_Tr 15
P2_Tr 15
Acc4
P1_Tr 15
P2_Tr 15
-
16
Acc5
Acc5
P1_Tr 16
P2_Tr 16
Acc5
P1_Tr 16
P2_Tr 16
-
Chord 1 Chann.
Off
1
Off
Off
2
2
2
Off
Chord 2 Chann.
Off
Off
Off
Off
3
3
Off
Off
Harm. Chann.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Off
Harm. Octave
1
1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
1
Harm. Range HI
G9
G9
G9
G9
G9
G9
G9
G9
Harm. Range LO
C -1
C -1
C -1
C -1
C -1
C -1
C -1
C -1
MIDI IN Velocity
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
110
110
Normal
Normal
MIDI IN Oct. Trp.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
MIDI IN Mute/Un.
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
Upper Oct. Trp.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Lower Oct. Trp.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Appendix
MIDI Setup
320
Assignable parameters
List of Footswitch and EC5 functions
Assignable parameters
List of Footswitch and EC5 functions
The following functions can be assigned to a footswitch or Korg
EC5’s switch pedal.
Function
Style Change
Style number
Sound Up
Selects the next Sound
Sound Down
Selects the previous Sound
Transpose Down
Transpose Up
Function
Meaning
Off
No function assigned
Style Start/Stop
Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name
Synchro Start
FX C Mute
FX D Mute
Style-Upper1 Mute
Tap Tempo/Reset
Style-Upper2 Mute
Tempo Lock
Style-Upper3 Mute
Ritardando
Progressively increases the Tempo value
Accelerando
Progressively decreases the Tempo value
Tempo Up
Increases the Tempo value
Tempo Down
Decreases the Tempo value
Intro 1
Style-Lower Mute
Style-Drum Mute
Style-Percussion Mute
Style-Bass Mute
Style-Acc1 Mute
Intro 2
Style-Acc2 Mute
Intro 3 / Count In
Style-Acc3 Mute
Ending 1
Style-Acc4 Mute
Ending 2
Style-Acc5 Mute
Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name
Style-Acc1-5 Mute
Song-Melody Mute
Mute of Song track 4 (usually, the Melody track). It doesn’t work on MP3 files.
Song-Drum&Bass Mode
Mute of all tracks, apart for track 2 (usually Bass) and 10 (usually Drum). It
doesn’t work on MP3 files.
Fill 3 / Break
Variation 1
Variation 2
Variation 3
Solo Selected Track
Variation 4
Damper Pedal
Variation Up
Selects the next Variation
Variation Down
Selects the previous Variation
Fade In/Out
Memory
Bass Inversion
Turns Punch Recording on/off
FX All Mute
Synchro Stop
Fill 2
Upper Octave Down
FX B Mute
Go to Beginning-Ply 1
Fill 1
Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name
FX A Mute
Play Stop Player 2
Go to Beginning-Ply 2
Upper Octave Up
Punch In/Out
Play Stop Player 1
Meaning
Soft Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
Bass&Lower Backing
Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name
Manual Bass
When the Style is not playing and you
are in Split mode, you can play the Lower
track with your left hand, while the Bass
still plays the chord root. See “Bass &
Lower Backing” on page 110.
Style Up
Selects the next Style
Ensemble On/Off
Style Down
Selects the previous Style
QuarterTone
Turns Quarter Tone on/off
Global-Scale
When the switch or footswitch is
pressed, the Global > General Controls >
Scale is recalled in the display.
SubScale Preset 1
(SC1)…4 (SC4)
Same functions of the SC Preset buttons
in the display.
Chord Latch
Holds the recognized chord until the
pedal is released
Chord Latch + Damper
Holds the recognized chord until the
pedal is released, and sustains the tracks
where the Damper has been turned on
Single Touch
STS1
STS2
Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name
STS3
STS4
STS Up
Selects the next STS
STS Down
Selects the previous STS
Perform. Up
Selects the next Performance
Perform. Down
Selects the previous Performance
Assignable parameters
List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Sliders functions
Function
Meaning
Glide
When the pedal is pressed, affected
notes on Upper tracks are bent down,
according to settings for the Pitch Bend
on the same tracks. When the pedal is
released, notes return to the normal
pitch, at the speed defined by the
“Time” parameter (see “Glide” on
page 220).
Audio In Mute
Mic Lead On/Off
List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable
Sliders functions
The following functions can be assigned to a continuous pedal
or to the Assignable Sliders (in ASSIGNABLE mode).
Function
Meaning
Turns all Voice Processor effects down, to
let you address the audience. See “Voice
Processor Setup: Talk” on page 240.
Off
No function assigned
On/off switch controls assigned to the
Voice Processor. Press to activate, press a
second time to deactivate.
Keyboard Expression
Master Volume
Joystick +X
Joystick right
Mic Effects On/Off
Joystick -X
Joystick left
Mic Latch On/Off
Joystick +Y
Joystick forward
FX CC12 Switch
Joystick -Y
Joystick backward
Upper VDF Cutoff
Filter cutoff (for Sounds assigned to the
Upper tracks)
Upper VDF Resonance
Filter resonance (for Sounds assigned to
the Upper tracks)
Mic Harmony On/Off
FX CC13 Switch
Standard FX controllers
Rotary Spkr On/Off
Rotary Spkr Fast/Slow
Drawbar Perc On/Off
Mic In Volume
Drawbar Noise On/Off
Text Page Down
Text Page Up
SongBook Next
Mic Lead Voice Volume
These options let you move to the previous or next page, when reading a text
file loaded with a Song (see “Text files
loaded with Standard MIDI Files and MP3
files” on page 170) or Song Book entry
(see “Lyrics as text files associated to a
SongBook entry” on page 191).
Moves to the next SongBook entry in the
selected Custom List.
Same functions of the control panel buttons with the same name
Mic Reverb Level
Mic FX Level
Mic EQ Gain Low
FX CC12 Ctl
FX CC13 Ctl
Pad 4
Pad Volume
Pad Stop
Sound Controller 2
Mic Harmony to Delay
Mic EQ Gain Low
Pad 2
Sound Controller 1
Mic Lead to Delay
Mic EQ Gain Med
Pad 1
Pad 3
Mic Harmony Output
Volume
Continuous controls assigned to the
Voice Processor.
To be used as triggers for two DNC
parameter (transmit CC#80 or CC#81).
When these functions are assigned to
the selected physical controller, this latter becomes the corresponding Sound
Controller (Sound Controller 1 or Sound
Controller 2). You can then use this
Sound Controller to control any of the
DNC parameters.
Standard FX controllers
With this function assigned, you can
control the proportional volume of all
four Pads at the same time. Please note
that the status of the Pad’s volume, after
having been modified with a pedal or
slider, is made current, and will be saved
in a Performance or STS by using the relevant Write procedure.
Appendix
Microphone Talk
321
322
Assignable parameters
List of Assignable Slider (Mic) functions
List of Assignable Slider (Mic) functions
List of Assignable Switch functions
The following functions can be assigned to the Assignable Sliders. (in Mic mode)
The following functions can be assigned to the Assignable
Switches.
Function
Meaning
Function
Meaning
Off
No function assigned
Off
No function assigned
Ritardando
Progressively increases the Tempo value
Accelerando
Progressively decreases the Tempo value
Style Up
Selects the next Style
Style Down
Selects the previous Style
Perform. Up
Selects the next Performance
Perform. Down
Selects the previous Performance
Mic In Volume
Mic Lead Voice Volume
Mic Harmony Output
Level
Mic Lead to Delay
Mic Harmony to Delay
Mic Reverb Level
Mic FX Level
Mic EQ Gain Low
Mic EQ Gain Med
Mic EQ Gain Low
Continuous controls assigned to the
Voice Processor.
FX A Mute
FX B Mute
FX C Mute
FX D Mute
FX All Mute
Style-Upper1 Mute
Style-Upper2 Mute
Style-Upper3 Mute
Style-Lower Mute
Style-Drum Mute
Style-Percussion Mute
Style-Bass Mute
Style-Acc1 Mute
Style-Acc2 Mute
Style-Acc3 Mute
Style-Acc4 Mute
Style-Acc5 Mute
Style-Acc1-5 Mute
Song-Melody Mute
Mute of Song track 4 (usually, the Melody track)
Song-Drum&Bass Mode
Mute of all tracks, apart for track 2 (usually Bass) and 10 (usually Drum)
Solo Selected Track
Bass&Lower Backing
Mutes all tracks, except for the Bass and
Lower tracks
QuarterTone
Turns Quarter Tone on/off
Global-Scale
When the switch or footswitch is
pressed, the Global > General Controls >
Scale is recalled in the display.
SubScale Preset 1
(SC1)…4 (SC4)
Same functions of the SC Preset buttons
in the display.
Audio In Mute
Microphone Talk
Turns all Voice Processor effects down, to
let you address the audience. See “Voice
Processor Setup: Talk” on page 240.
Mic Lead On/Off
On/Off switch controls assigned to the
Voice Processor. Press to activate, press a
second time to deactivate.
Mic Latch On/Off
FX CC12 Switch
FX CC13 Switch
Rotary Spkr On/Off
Rotary Spkr Fast/Slow
Drawbar Perc On/Off
Standard FX controllers
Assignable parameters
Scales
Meaning
Drawbar Noise On/Off
Text Page Down
Text Page Up
These options let you move to the previous or next page, when reading a text
file loaded with a Song (see “Text files
loaded with Standard MIDI Files and MP3
files” on page 170) or Song Book entry
(see “Lyrics as text files associated to a
SongBook entry” on page 191).
SongBook Next
Moves to the next SongBook entry in the
selected Custom List.
Sound Controller 1
To be used as triggers for two DNC
parameter (transmit CC#80 or CC#81).
When these functions are assigned to
the selected physical controller, this latter becomes the corresponding Sound
Controller (Sound Controller 1 or Sound
Controller 2). You can then use this
Sound Controller to control any of the
DNC parameters.
Sound Controller 2
Scales
The following is a list of scales (or tunings) you can select in various operating modes.
Equal
Equal tuning, the standard scale for modern
Western music. It is made of 12 identical semitones.
Pure Major
Major chords in the selected key are perfectly
tuned.
Pure Minor
Minor chords in the selected key are perfected
tuned.
Arabic
An arabic scale, using quarters of tone. Set the
Key parameter as follow:
C - for the “rast C/bayati D” scale
D - for the “rast D/bayati E” scale
F - for the “rast F/bayati G” scale
G - for the “rast G/bayati A” scale
A# - for the “rast Bb/bayati C” scale
Pythagorean Pythagorean scale, based on the music theories of
the great Greek philosopher and matematician. It
is most suitable for melodies.
Werckmeister
Late Baroque/Classic Age scale. Very suitable for
XVIII Century music.
Kirnberger
Harpsichord scale, very common during the
XVIII Century.
Slendro
Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan. The octave is
divided in 5 notes (C, D, F, G, A). The remaining
notes are tuned as in the Equal tuning.
Pelog
Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan. The octave is
divided in 7 notes (all white keys, when Key is =
C). The black keys are tuned as in the Equal tuning.
Stretch
Simulates the “stretched” tuning of an acoustic
piano. Basically an equal tuning, the lowest notes
are slightly lower, while the highest notes are
slightly higher than the standard.
User
User scale, i.e. scale programmed by the user for
the Style Play, Backing Sequence and Song Play
modes. The user scale can be saved to a Performance, Style Performance, STS or Song. You can’t
select a User scale in Global mode.
Appendix
Function
323
324
MIDI Data
MIDI Controllers
MIDI Data
CC#
MIDI Controllers
The following is a table including all Control Change messages,
and their effect on various Pa2X functions. Note that not all controllers are available in all operative modes.
CC#
CC Name
Pa2X Function
0
Bank Select
Program selection
1
Mod1 (Y+)
Joystick forward
2
Mod2 (Y-)
Joystick backward
3
Undef. ctl
4
Foot ctl
5
Port.time
6
Data ent.
7
Volume
8
Balance
9
Undef. ctl
10
Pan Pot
Track panning
11
Expression
Expression
12
Fx Ctl 1
CC#12
13
Fx Ctl 2
CC#13
14-15
Undef. ctl
16
Gen.pc.1
17
Gen.pc.2
18
Slider
19
Gen.pc.4
20-31
Undef. ctl
CC Name
Pa2X Function
91
Fx A/C
A/C (reverb) send level
92
Fx 2 ctl
93
Fx B/D
94
Fx 4 ctl
95
Fx 5 ctl
96
Data Inc
97
Data Dec
98
NRPN Lsb
See table below(*)
99
NRPN Msb*
See table below(*)
100
RPN Lsb
See MIDI Implementation Chart
RPN Msb
See MIDI Implementation Chart
101
102-119
Track volume
B/D (modul.) send level
Undefined ctl
120
AllSOff
121
Res Ctl
122
LocalCt
123
NoteOff
124
OmniOff
125
Omni On
126
Mono On
127
Poly On
Reset All Controllers
(*) The following NRPN messages are recognized by Pa2X in
Song Play and Sequencer mode only:
CC#99
(MSB)
CC#98
(LSB)
CC#06
(Data Entry)
Vibrato Rate
1
8
0…127(a)
Vibrato Depth
1
9
0…127(a)
Vibrato Decay
1
10
0…127(a)
Filter Cutoff
1
32
0…127(a)
Resonance
1
33
0…127(a)
EG Attack Time
1
99
0…127(a)
EG Decay Time
1
100
0…127(a)
EG Release Time
1
102
0…127(a)
Drum Filter Cutoff
20
dd(b)
0…127(a)
NRPN
Control Change #32-63 are the LSB (Least Significant Bytet) of Control Change #0-31, i.e. the MSB (Most Significant Byte), and are
changed according to their MSB counterparts.
64
Damper
65
Portamento
66
Sostenuto
Sostenuto pedal
67
Soft
Soft pedal
68
Legato
69
Hold 2
70
Sustain level
71
F.Res.Hp
Filter resonance
Drum Filter Resonance
21
dd(b)
0…127(a)
72
Release
Release time
Drum EG Attack Time
22
dd(b)
0…127(a)
73
Attack
Attack time
Drum EG Decay Time
23
dd(b)
0…127(a)
74
F.CutOff
Filter cutoff (Brilliance)
Drum Coarse Tune
24
75
Decay T.
Decay time
dd(b)
0…127(a)
76
Lfo1 Sp.
Vibrato speed
Drum Fine Tune
25
dd(b)
0…127(a)
0…127
77
Lfo1 Dpt
Damper pedal
Vibrato depth
26
Drum Panpot
28
dd(b)
0…127(a)
78
Lfo1 Dly
79
FilterEg
Drum Rev Send (FX 1)
29
dd(b)
0…127(a)
80
Gen.pc.5
Drum Mod Send (FX 2)
30
dd(b)
0…127(a)
81
Gen.pc.6
82
Gen.pc.7
83
Gen.pc.8
84
Port.ctl
85-90
Undef. ctl
Vibrato initial delay
Drum Volume
dd(b)
(a). 64 = No change to the original parameter’s value
(b). dd = Drum Instrument No. 0…127 (C0…C8)
Note: These controls are reset when stopping the Song, or choosing
a new Song.
MIDI Data
Program Change messages used as remote commands
325
Program Change messages used as remote commands
The following is a table including all Program Change messages, used as remote Style and Player controls. These messages are to be sent
on the Control channel (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230).
PC
Function
PC
Function
PC
Function
PC
Function
PC
Function
Style Elements
80
Intro 1
81
Intro 2
82
Intro 3/Count In
83
Variation 1
84
Variation 2
85
Variation 3
86
Variation 4
87
Fill 1
88
Fill 2
89
Fill 3/Break
90
Ending 1
91
Ending 2
92
Ending 3
Style and Players Control
93
Fade In/Out
94
Memory
95
Bass Inversion
96
Manual Bass
97
Tempo Lock
98
Single Touch
99
Style Change
100
Start/Stop (Style)
101
Play/Stop (Ply 1)
102
Play/Stop (Ply 2)
Note: The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0-127 numbering system.
Control Change and Program Change message used as remote commands
CC#0
CC#32
The same as the Style to which the STS belongs
PC
STS
PC
STS
PC
STS
PC
STS
64
STS 1
65
STS 2
66
STS 3
67
STS 4
Appendix
The following is a table including all Control Change + Program Change messages, used as remote Style and Player controls. These
messages are to be sent on the Control channel (see “MIDI: MIDI In Channels” on page 230). If a Style is already selected, just send the
Program Change message.
MidiCC.fm Page 326 Tuesday, November 24, 2009 6:58 PM
326
MIDI Data
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI Implementation Chart
KORG Pa2X
OS Version 2.0 - Nov. 04, 2008
Function
Basic Channel
Transmitted
Recognized
Default
1–16
1–16
Changed
1–16
1–16
X
X
Default
Mode
Note
Number:
Note On
Velocity
Aftertouch
****************
0–127
True Voice
Note Off
O
9n, V=1–127
X
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode 1:OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3:OMNI OFF, POLY
9n, V=1–127
V=64
X
Poly (Key)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Player data only
*1
*1
Bank Select (MSB, LSB)
*1
1, 2
O
O
Modulations
*1
6
O
O
Data Entry MSB
*1
38
O
O
Data Entry LSB
*1
7, 11
O
O
Volume, Expression
*1
10, 91, 93
O
O
Panpot, A/C FX Send, B/D FX Send
*1
64, 66, 67
O
O
Damper, Sostenuto, Soft
*1
65, 5
O
O
Portamento On/Off, Portamento Time
*1
71, 72, 73
O
O
Harmonic Content, EG time (Release, Attack)
*1
74, 75
O
O
Brightness, Decay Time
*1
76, 77, 78
O
O
Vibrato Rate, Depth, Delay
98, 99
O
O
NRPN (LSB, MSB)
*1, 2
100, 101
O
O
RPN (LSB, MSB)
*1, 3
120, 121
X
O
All sounds off, Reset all controllers
O
True #
0–127
****************
O
0–127
*1
*1
*1
0–127
O
O
Song Position
X
X
Song Select
X
X
System Exclusive
System
Common
0–127
O
Mono (Channel)
0, 32
Program
Change
0–127
****************
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Memorized
3
Messages
Altered
Remarks
*4
Tune
X
X
Clock
O
O
*5
Commands
O
O
*5
Local On/Off
X
X
All Notes Off
X
O (125)
Active Sense
O
O
Reset
X
X
*1: Sent and received when MIDI Filters In and Out are set to Off in Global mode.
*2: Drawbars settings, Sound parameters, Selection of SongBook entries.
*3: LSB, MSB = 00,00: Pitch Bend range, =01,00: Fine Tune, =02,00: Coarse Tune.
*4: Includes Inquiry and Master Volume messages, FX settings, Quarter Tone settings. GM Mode On.
*5: Transmitted only when the Clock Send parameter (Global mode) is set to on.
Mode 2:OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4:OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
Recognized chords
327
Recognized chords
The following pages show the most important chords recognized by the Pa2X, when the selected Chord Recognition mode is Fingered 2
(see “Chord Recognition Mode” on page 109). Recognized chords may vary with a different Chord Recognition mode. Note: Fingered 2
is selected while in Split keyboard mode; in Full Upper keyboard mode, Fingered 3 or Expert are selected instead.
Major 6th
Major
3-note
T
2-note
T
T
T
T
T
T
2-note
4-note
T
T
T
T
Major 7th
4-note
3-note
2-note
T
T
T
T
Sus 2
Sus 4
3-note
2-note
3-note
3-note
2-note
T
T
Dominant 7th
4-note
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
Dominant 7th Sus 4
4-note
T
T
T
T
T
Flat 5th
3-note
3-note
T
T
T
Dominant 7th 5
4-note
T
Major 7th 5
4-note
T
T
Major 7th Sus 4
4-note
T
T
T
= constituent notes of the chord
T
T = can be used as tension
Appendix
T
328
Recognized chords
Minor
Minor 6th
3-note
2-note
T
T
4-note
T
T
Minor 7th
Minor-Major 7th
4-note
T
T
3-note
T
T
Diminished
T
Diminished 7th
3-note
3-note
4-note
4-note
T
Diminished Major 7th
4-note
T
T
T
T
Minor 7th 5
4-note
T
T
Augmented
3-note
T
T
No 3rd
2-note
T
Augmented 7th
4-note
T
T
Augmented Major 7th
4-note
T
T
T
T
T
T
No 3rd, no 5th
1-note
= constituent notes of the chord
T = can be used as tension
T
Installing the Video Interface (VIF4)
NTSC, PAL, SECAM
329
Installing the Video Interface (VIF4)
You can install a Korg VIF4 Video Interface into your Pa2X. This
interface will let you connect a video monitor, TV set, video
recorder or video projector, to read lyrics on an external device.
The card can be installed by the user. Korg is not responsible for
any damage or injury caused by incorrect installation of this
card by unauthorized personnel.
2.
From the bottom of the instrument, remove the four fixing
screws (d), and keep them apart. Open the cover (e) to gain
access to the inside of the video board slot. Remove the
protective stopper (f) by pushing it from inside the slot.
3.
After having opened the cover (e), unfasten the power cable
(i) by removing the screw (g) and the clip (h). Be very careful not to let the power cable (i) fall inside the insturment.
4.
Attach the cover (e) to the circuit board (a) by using the
four previously removed screws (b). Connect the power
cable (i) to the circuit board (a), as shown in the illustration.
NTSC, PAL, SECAM
The VIF4 is compatible with the NTSC, PAL and SECAM TV
standard. When connecting a SECAM-compliant TV set, select
the PAL standard. However, in this latter case, the image will be
shown in black and white.
Precautions
• Installation of the card is done at the user’s own risk. Korg will
assume no responsibility for any damage or injury resulting
from its improper installation or use.
• Be sure to disconnect the instrument from the AC plug, before
opening it.
• To prevent your body’s static electricity from damaging the
board’s components, touch an unpainted metallic component
before proceeding with the installation.
For installation, you will need a cross-point screwdriver (not supplied).
1.
Extract the video card (a) from its package, being careful
not to touch any component on its surface with your fingers. Remove the four screws (b) and keep them apart.
Unfasten the board (a) from the metal support (c).
Appendix
Installation
330
5.
6.
Installing the Video Interface (VIF4)
Connections and setup
Replace the cover (e) to the original position, being very
careful to make the protruding side of the circuit board (a)
slide in before any other side.
Slide the cover (e) up to the original position. The video
connector protruding from the circuit board (a) will pass
through the corresponding hole on the back of the insturment. Attach the cover (e) to the bottom of the instrument
by using the four previously removed screws (d).
Connections and setup
1.
Connect the instrument’s video output to the video input
of the television set. Depending on the type of television
set, you can use a cable of the type “RCA-to-RCA” (if the
television set is equipped with a Video Composite input),
or “RCA-to-SCART” (if the television set is equipped with
a SCART connector). You can buy the needed cables at a
store that sells television equipment.
2.
Turn the instrument on, and press the GLOBAL button to
gain access to the Global edit mode. Go to the “Video Interface: Video Out” page, and select the video standard (PAL
or NTSC).
3.
Select the “Write Global-Global Setup” command from the
page menu to save the settings in memory. The Write Global-Global Setup dialog box will appear. Touch OK to confirm.
4.
Turn the television set on, and tune it on the AV1 or AV2
input.
5.
In the same page of the Global, use the Colors parameter to
choose the preferred set of colors for the lyrics and the
background.
RCA
RCA
SCART
Installing additional Sampling RAM (EXB-M256)
Precautions
331
Installing additional Sampling RAM (EXB-M256)
Pa2X comes equipped with 128MB of Sampling RAM already
installed. You can replace the internal RAM with an (optional)
board of 256MB of RAM, for increased sampling space. Korg is
not responsible for any damage or injury caused by incorrect
installation of this card by unauthorized personnel.
3.
Lightly push out on the two securing clamps (c), one after
the other. After the last one is pushed out, the RAM module
(d) will be released, and will automatically jump out.
4.
Insert the new RAM module (e) into the free slot, as shown
in the diagram. Line up the connector side of the module
with the slot base, using the dent between the connectors as
a guide. Then rotate the module down, and delicately push
until the two securing clamps jump back to the locked
position, and the RAM module is firmly seated in place.
5.
Be sure the module is correctly inserted. If not, extract it
and repeat the operation.
6.
Close and secure the compartment cover by using the two
previously removed screws (b) (see step 1).
Precautions
• Installation of the card is done at the user’s own risk. Korg will
assume no responsibility for any damage or injury resulting
from its improper installation or use.
• Be sure to disconnect the instrument from the AC plug, before
opening it.
• To prevent your body’s static electricity from damaging the
board’s components, touch an unpainted metallic component
before proceeding with the installation.
Installation
For installation, you will need a cross-point screwdriver (not supplied).
2.
From the bottom of the instrument, remove the two fixing
screws (b), and keep them apart. Open the cover (a) to gain
access to the inside of the RAM slot.
Locate the original RAM module (d), and remove it by
lightly pushing out on the two securing clamps (c) (one on
each end).
Appendix
1.
332
Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver
Connecting the Pa2X to a personal computer
Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver
The USB Device port can be used to transfer MIDI data between
the Pa2X and a personal computer (this is called the MIDI Over
USB function). This is useful when your computer is not fitted
with a MIDI interface.
Windows: Installing the KORG USB-MIDI
Driver
USB can be used in parallel with the MIDI ports. For example,
you can connect your Pa2X to a sequencer running on your
computer, and at the same time control another MIDI instrument connected to the MIDI ports of the Pa2X.
Please connect the Pa2X to the computer via an USB cable only
after having installed the KORG USB-MIDI Driver Tools.
Connecting the Pa2X this ways makes it, at the same time, a
MIDI input device, a controller, and a sound generator.
Note: You must install a separate driver for each USB port you will
use.
1.
Insert the included CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Normally, the “KORG Pa2X Application Installer” will start
up automatically.
Connecting the Pa2X to a personal
computer
Please install the KORG USB-MIDI Driver, before connecting
the Pa2X to a personal computer. Be sure your personal computer meets the requirement shown on “KORG USB-MIDI
Driver system requirements” below.
KORG
USB-MIDI
requirements
Driver
If your computer is set so that the installer does not run
automatically, double-click “KorgSetup.exe” on the CD.
3.
Please follow the installation instructions appearing onscreen.
4.
Restart the computer, and turn on the Pa2X. Connect the
Pa2X to the computer via an USB cable.
5.
Select the following command from the task bar to open
the installation instructions:
Start > all programs > KORG > KORG USB-MIDI Driver
Tools > Installation manual
system
6.
Start > all programs > KORG > KORG USB-MIDI Driver
Tools > Install KORG USB-MIDI Device
Windows
Computer: A computer with an USB port, that satisfies the
requirements of Microsoft Windows XP or Vista.
Select the following command from the task bar to open
the installation program:
7.
Please follow the installation instructions appearing onscreen to install the KORG USB-MIDI Driver.
Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition / Professional / x64 Edition (a driver for the x64 Edition is in beta
release), Vista.
Driver’s ports
Macintosh
Pa2X KEYBOARD: This allows for reception of MIDI messages
from the Pa2X (keyboard and controller’s data) to the MIDI
application running on the computer.
Computer: An Apple Macintosh with an USB port that satisfies
the requirements of Mac OS X.
Operating system: Mac OS X version 10.3 or later.
Please note before use
Copyright to all software included in this product is the property
of Korg Inc.
The license agreement for this software is provided separately.
You must read this license agreement before you install this software. Your installation of this software will be taken to indicate
your acceptance of this agreement.
After installation, the following ports will be shown in you MIDI
application (e.g., sequencer) among the other MIDI devices:
Pa2X SOUND: This allows for transmission of MIDI messages
from the MIDI application running on the computer, to the
internal tone generator of the Pa2X.
Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver
Mac OS X: Installing KORG USB-MIDI Driver
333
Mac OS X: Installing KORG USB-MIDI
Driver
1.
Insert the included CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Please double click on the “KORG USB-MIDI Driver.pkg”
in the “KORG USB-MIDI Driver” folder inside the CDROM, to run the installer. Install it according to the
instructions appearing on-screen.
Driver’s ports
After installation, the following ports will be shown in you MIDI
application (e.g., sequencer) among the other MIDI devices:
Pa2X KEYBOARD: This allows for reception of MIDI messages
from the Pa2X (keyboard and controller’s data) to the MIDI
application running on the Mac.
Appendix
Pa2X SOUND: This allows for transmission of MIDI messages
from the MIDI application running on the Mac, to the internal
tone generator of the Pa2X.
334
Shortcuts
Shortcuts
You can keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press another button on the control panel to directly jump to an edit page. Here is
the list of “shortcuts”.
Shift +
Functions
Any operating modes
Dial
Tempo Change
Scroll Arrows, or
Up/Down
When a list of Songs or SongBook entries is
shown: Next/Previous alphabetical section.
It also works in Media mode.
Sound
Sends the Sound assigned to the selected
track to the Sound mode
Global
Selects the Setup/General Controls page, MIDI
section, of the Global mode. This is a quick
way to jump to MIDI editing pages.
Media
Selects the Preferences page of the Media
mode
Start/Stop
Panic
Slider Mode
Selects the Assignable Sliders page, Controllers section, of the Global mode
Fade In/Out
Selects the Fade In/Out parameter in the Basic
page, Preferences section, of the Global
mode
Synchro (either)
Selects the MIDI Setup parameter in the
Setup/General Controls page, MIDI section, of
the Global mode
Tempo Lock
Selects the Lock page, General Controls section, of the Global mode
Display Hold
Selects the Interface page, General Controls
section, of the Global mode
SongBook
Selects the Custom List page of the SongBook
mode
Transpose (either)
Selects the Transpose Control page, General
Controls section, of the Global mode
Mic
Selects the Voice Processor Setup page of the
Global mode
Harmony
Selects the Voice Processor Preset page of the
Global mode
Effects
Selects the Voice Processor Effects page of the
Global mode
Style Play mode
Shift +
Functions
Ensemble
Selects the Ensemble Type parameter in the
Ensemble page, (Keyboard/Ensemble section)
Pad (any)
Selects the Pad page (Pad/Assignable Switches
section)
Assignable Switch
(any)
Selects the Switch page (Pad/Assignable
Switches section)
Upper Octave
(either)
Selects the Tuning page (Mixer/Tuning section)
Style
Opens the “Write Current Style Performance”
window.
Sound/Performance
Opens the “Write Performance” window.
STS
Opens the “Write STS” window.
Song Play mode
Song Play
Selects the General Control page (Preferences
section)
Play/Stop–Ply 1
or 2
Sync Start of either players
Upper Octave
(either)
Selects the Tuning page (Mixer/Tuning section)
Split
Selects the Key Velocity page (Keyboard/
Ensemble section)
Pad (any)
Selects the Pad page (Pad/Assignable Switches
section)
Assignable Switch
(any)
Selects the Switch page (Pad/Assignable
Switches section)
Sound/Performance
Opens the “Write Performance” window.
JukeBox mode
>>
Play the next Song in the JukeBox list
<<
Play the previous Song in the JukeBox list
Sequencer mode
Sequencer
Selects the Sequencer Setup page (Preferences section)
Upper Octave
(either)
Selects the Tuning page (Mixer/Tuning section)
Other available shortcuts are the following, not requiring the
SHIFT button to be pressed.
Style Play
Selects the Style Setup page (Preferences section)
Style Play mode
Memory
Selects the Style Preferences page (Preferences section)
Up/Down
(together)
Var or Fill
Selects the corresponding Style Element in
the Drum/Fill page (Style Controls section)
Global mode
Chord Scanning
(either)
Selects the Chord Recognition parameter in
the Split panel, Main Page
Split
Selects the Key Velocity page (Keyboard/
Ensemble section)
Global (keep it
pressed)
Original Tempo
Touch Panel Calibration
Troubleshooting
335
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
Page
General problems
Power does not turn on
Make sure that (1) the power cable is plugged into the outlet, (2) the cable is plugged into the
connector on the back of the instrument, (3) and is not damaged, (4) there are no problems
with the mains.
Is the power switch turned ON?
If the power still does not turn on, contact your dealer or the nearest KORG Service Center.
No sound
Check the connections to your amp or mixer.
20
Make sure that all the components of the amplifying system are turned on.
Is the MASTER VOLUME slider of the Pa2X set to a position other than “0”?
19
Is the Local parameter set to Off? Turn it On.
228
Is the Attack parameter value too high? Set it to a lower value, to let the sound start faster. Is
the Volume parameter too low? Set it to a higher value.
96, 104
Lowest note are not played
When the SPLIT button is lit up, the keyboard will be divided into the Lower part (low notes,
below the split point) and the Upper part (high notes, above the split point). Is the Lower track
muted? Unmute it.
33
Wrong sounds
Do the USER banks contain modified data? Load the appropriate data for the Song or the Style
you wish to playback.
253
Has one of the USER Drum Kits been modified? Load the appropriate Drum Kits.
253
Have the Styles or Performances been modified? Load the appropriate data (Styles or Performances).
253
Sound does not stop
Make sure that the damper switch calibration parameter is set correctly.
227
The selected Style or Song cannot
start
Make sure that the Clock parameter is set to Internal. If you are using the MIDI Clock of
another device, you must set the MIDI Clock parameter to MIDI or USB (depending on the port
the Pa2X is hooked to the other device through) and make sure that the external device transmits MIDI Clock data.
228
Does not respond to MIDI messages
Make sure that all MIDI or USB cables are connected correctly.
269
Make sure that the external device is transmitting through MIDI channels enabled to receive in
the Pa2X.
230
Make sure that the MIDI IN Filters of the Pa2X do not prevent the reception of messages.
Percussive instruments are not
played correctly
Make sure that the Drum track is set to Drum Mode and the external device has not transposition applied.
Some “clicks” can be heard when
playing a percussive instrument
This is part of the sound, and not a problem.
A background noise can be heard
after selecting a Performance,
Style or STS
The selected Performance, Style or STS recalled the effect “17 St. Analog Record”, simulating
the noise of a old vinyl recording.
The Voice Processor cannot be
heard
The Vocoder effect has been assigned to the D FX processor. This deactivates the Voice processor.
231
102, 210
Appendix
Voice Processor effects can only be applied to the microphone input
336
Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
Page
Media related problems
Cannot format a device
Is the USB cable correctly connected?
Is the USB device correctly powered?
Is the device inserted correctly?
Is the write protect tab of the disk in the protect position?
Cannot save data to a device
Is the device formatted?
262
Is the device inserted correctly?
Is the write protect tab of the disk in the protect position?
Cannot load data from a device
Is the device inserted correctly?
Does the device contain data compatible with the Pa2X?
The message “Over Current Condition Detected on USB port:
please remove the USB media”
appears in the display
The USB device is probably defective, due to a short circuit, and cannot be used. While this will
not damage the Pa2X, it is advisable to remove the device.
251
Technical specifications
337
Technical specifications
Features
KORG Pa2X
KEYBOARD
Keyboard
76 keys with Velocity and Aftertouch
SOUND DATA
Tone Generator
120 Voices, 120 Oscillators - EQ for each track - Filters with Resonance
Multitimbral-Parts
Internal: 40 channels - Midi: 16 channels
Factory Sounds
1,007 (incl. Stereo Piano and GM2 sounds) + 64 Drum Kits
User Sounds
256 Sounds - 64 Drum Kits
Digital Drawbars
9 Footages
Sound Edit
On-board full editing for Sounds and DrumKits
PCM RAM memory
128 MB standard (256 MB with the Korg EXB-M256 expansion board)
Sampling
Record, Edit, Time Slice, Load/Import, Export - PCM RAM Memory: 128MB standard, 256MB optional with the Korg EXB-M256
expansion board
Effects
4 Stereo Master, TC Helicon for Vocal FX, 3-Band Semi-Parametric Final Master EQ
Real Time Tracks
4 (Upper 1/2/3, Lower) - 4 Pads
Performances
320 User Programmable
STYLES DATA
Factory Styles
Up to 544 locations - Preloaded Styles: 409
User Styles
96 User + 320 Favorite (all 960 styles are re-writable)
Arranger Tracks
8
Style Edit
Record & Full Edit functions, Guitar Mode, Import/Export SMF
Patterns/Chord Variations
Up to 42 patterns for each style including 3 Intros, 3 Endings, 3 Fills
Style Performance (STS)
Up to 960 × 4 (Real time tracks + Acc. tracks) all programmable
PCM Style Grooves
Using the internal PCM RAM memory
PLAYER/SEQUENCER
XDS Double Player
Separate transport controls for each Player - X-Fader Slider
4 STS saved with the Song
In SongBook Mode
Tracks
16 + 16
Sequencer Edit
Record & Edit functions
Backing Sequence (Quick Record)
Real Time Record - Step Record & Edit
Lyrics/Chords
On-Screen (compatible with most popular formats)
Score View
On-Screen
OTHER FEATURES
MP3
Dual MP3 Player with X-Fader. Records MP3 files, and plays two MP3 files at the same time. Tempo change ±30%. Transpose -5~+6
semitones.
Voice Processor
Voice technology by TC Helicon: 3 Parts Harmony, Reverb, Delay, Compressor, Eq.
SongBook and SongBook List
Fully Programmable
Arabic Scale
Programmable, with up to 4 SC Presets
Pads
4 + Stop button
Compatibility
i-Series: Styles - Pa-series: Style, Perf., Sound, Song, Song Book
Operating System
OPOS Multitasking System - Load while playing - Upgradable
Internal SSD Flash memory
256 MB for O.S, PCM and all Resources (20 MB reserved to the SSD-User area)
USB for Memory Devices
Yes (2 slots - 1 Host Rear, 1 Host Front)
Hard Disk
>30 GB
Display
320 × 240 Graphical Color Touch Screen Display, with Motorized Lift System
Controls
Joystick - Dial - Up/+, Down/-
Programmable Controls
2 Switches - 8 Sliders - MP3/Drawbar Slider
Cursors
Real Time: Master Volume - Accompaniment/Player/Real Time Volume Balance - X-Fader
Switches
Transpose, Memory, Bass Inversion, Manual Bass, Fade, Tap, Synchro, Ensemble
Help System
Multilanguage Hypertext - Contextual
Appendix
USER INTERFACE
338
Technical specifications
Features
KORG Pa2X
CONNECTIONS
MIDI
IN - OUT - THRU
USB
2 Host (2.0 Hi Speed) and 1 Device (1.1 Full Speed)
Outputs
4 Analog Balanced/Unbalanced (Left/Right/Out1/Out2), 1 Digital (S/PDIF 48kHz)
Inputs
3 Inputs: 1 Mic XLR/jack combo connector with gain control and +48V Phantom Power - 2 Balanced/Unbalanced Line jacks
Headphone
1 Front jack connection
Pedals
1 Damper - 1 Assignable Footswitch/Pedal - EC5
Power Supply
AC - Universal Voltage
OPTIONS
USB Memory
Yes
CD - FD
Through USB Host
Sampling RAM
256 MB Sampling Memory Board EXB-M256
Video Interface
Graphic Video Interface VIF4 - NTSC/PAL board
Expression/Volume Pedal
Korg EXP-2 - Korg XVP-10
Multi-Switch Pedal
Korg EC5
Damper Pedal
Korg DS-1H (supporting half-pedaling)
Switch Pedal
Korg PS-1
PHYSICAL DATA
Consumption
30 Watt
Dimensions (W × D × H)
1207 / 47.52" (W) × 365 / 14.37" (D) × 136 / 5.35" (H) mm / inch without music stand and with the display fully lowered
Weight
18 kg / 39.68 lbs
Technical specifications are subject to change without notice.
Index
Index
A
Aftertouch Curve 220
Arabic Scale 94, 99
Assignable Sliders 6, 227
Audio Inputs 12, 14, 20, 233
Audio Outputs 14, 20, 231–??
Auto Style/Perf/Sound Select 225
Write 237
Song Play Setup 181
Style Play Setup 113
Talk Configuration 237
Voice Processor Preset 238
Voice Processor Setup 237
Global channel 270
Groove Quantize 177
H
B
Backup 18, 262
Balance (Keyboard/Style or Ply) 6, 19
Balance (Player) 19
Bank Select 272
Bass & Lower Backing 110
C
Chord Scanning 11
Lock 223
Contrast 10, 11
D
Damper 20, 105
Demo 20
Display contrast 10, 11
Display Hold 11
Double Player 10, 171
Drum tracks 103, 107, 232
E
EC5 227
Effects
Copy 111, 181, 216
Sequencer mode 206, 209
Song Play mode 172, 174, 175
Style Play mode 97, 101, 209
Ending 9
Ensemble 106
F
Fade In/Out 220
Favorite Styles 113
Fill 9
Footswitch 226
Format 262
G
General MIDI 270
Global 219–238
Write
Global Setup 237
MIDI Setup 237, 238
Sequencer Setup 217
Harmony track (Voice Processor) 178, 215
in SongBook entries 189
MIDI channel 229
Note Input Source 242
I
Inputs 12, 14, 20, 233
Intro 9
J
Jukebox 165, 176
K
Keyboard Mode (Split) 11
Lock 223
L
Local Off 228, 272
Lower Lock 223
Lyrics 166, 190
M
Markers 167
Master Transpose 13, 221
Master Tune 220
Master Volume 6, 19
Media 249–268
Backup 262
Format 262
Menu 11
MIDI
Clock 159, 228
General MIDI 270
Global channel 270
IN channels 230
Interface 15, 272
OUT channels 230
Setup 110, 179, 215, 228, 270
Standard MIDI File 159, 193
MIDI interface 15, 272
MIDI Setup 110, 179, 215, 228, 270
Write 237, 238
Midifile 159, 193, 270
Mode
Pad Record 145–158
339
340
Index
Sequencer 193–218
Song Play 159–162
SongBook 184–192
Style Play 87–113
Style Record 114–144
MP3 61, 89, 161, 166, 176, 184
O
Octave Transpose 13, 99
Auto Octave 223
Midi In 229
Operating Modes 7
OS (Operating System)
Backup 18, 262
Update 18
Outputs 14, 20, 231–??
P
Pads 13, 108
Pan
Pads 108
Song tracks 172, 206
Style tracks 97
PANIC (SHIFT+START/STOP) 9
PCM Autoload 264
Pedals 226
Performance 12, 87
Selecting 12, 82
Selecting (Auto) 225
Writing 112
Pitch Bend 99, 208
Player
Link mode 179
Player 2 FX mode 179
Transport controls 10, 11
Program Change 272
Q
Quarter Tone 94, 99
R
RX 215
S
Scale
Main scale 222
Sequencer mode 193–218
Shift 10
Single Touch 9, 10
Single Touch Setting (STS) 10
Selecting 10, 84
Writing 112
Song
Markers 167
Play from disk 84, 217
Recording 196–205
Selecting 84, 217
Standard MIDI File 270
Song Play mode 159–162
SongBook 184–192
Sound
Editing 104, 176, 209
Selecting 12, 82
Selecting (Auto) 225
Split (Keyboard Mode) 11
Lock 223
Split Point 95, 270
Standard MIDI File 159, 193, 270
STS, See Single Touch Setting
Style
Ending 9
Fill 9
Intro 9
Recording 114–144
Selecting 8, 83
Selecting (Auto) 225
Style Performance 87
Variation 9
Style Performance
Selecting, see Style
Writing 113
Style Play mode 87–113
Style Record mode 114–144
Synchro Start/Stop 9
T
Talk
Auto On/Off 241
On/Off 94
Settings 240
Write settings 237
Tap Tempo 10
Tempo/Value section 11
Touch Panel
Calibration 236
Track Select 10
Tracks
Drum/Percussion 103, 107, 232
Keyboard tracks 12, 87, 160
Octave Transpose 13
Sounds 12
Volume 96, 171, 206
Transpose 13, 99
Auto Octave 223
Midi In 229
U
Upper Volume Link 96, 110
USB 265
V
Variation 9
Velocity Curve 220
Video Interface 14, 235, 329
Voice Processor
Harmony Track 178, 189, 215
MIDI channel 229
Note Input Source 242
Index
Voice Processor Preset
Editing 241
Lock 223
Writing 238
Voice Processor Setup
Editing 235, 239
Writing 237
Volume
Balance 87, 159
Balance (Keyboard/Style or Ply) 6, 19
Balance (Player) 19
Individual tracks
Sequencer 206
Song Play 171
Style Play 96
Master 6, 19, 87, 159
341
Address
KORG ITALY SpA
Via Cagiata, 85
I-60027 Osimo (An)
Italy
Web
www.korgpa.com
www.korg.co.jp
www.korg.com
www.korg.co.uk
PART NUMBER:MAN0010019
© KORG Italy 2008. All rights reserved